Tli R3.0 PDF

TLI Transport and Logistics Training
Package
Release: 3.0
Contents Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CONTENTS
TLI Transport and Logistics Training Package......................................................................43
TLI10115 Certificate I in Transport and Logistics (Pathways) .............................................45
TLI11215 Certificate I in Warehousing Operations ...............................................................47
TLI11315 Certificate I in Logistics ...........................................................................................49
TLI21216 Certificate II in Driving Operations .......................................................................52
TLI21315 Certificate II in Rail Infrastructure........................................................................59
TLI21416 Certificate II in Stevedoring ....................................................................................65
TLI21616 Certificate II in Warehousing Operations .............................................................69
TLI21716 Certificate II in Road Transport Yard Operations (Freight Handler) ...............74
TLI21815 Certificate II in Logistics .........................................................................................78
TLI21915 Certificate II in Track Protection ...........................................................................81
TLI22015 Certificate II in Shunting.........................................................................................84
TLI22115 Certificate II in Rail Track Vehicle Driving ..........................................................87
TLI22215 Certificate II in Tram or Light Rail Infrastructure ..............................................90
TLI22315 Certificate II in Rail Customer Service ..................................................................93
TLI22416 Certificate II in Furniture Removal .......................................................................96
TLI31216 Certificate III in Driving Operations......................................................................99
TLI31316 Certificate III in International Freight Forwarding (Operator) .......................111
TLI31415 Certificate III in Rail Driving ...............................................................................114
TLI31616 Certificate III in Warehousing Operations ..........................................................117
TLI31716 Certificate III in Mobile Crane Operations .........................................................122
TLI31815 Certificate III in Rail Track Surfacing.................................................................125
TLI31915 Certificate III in Mechanical Rail Signalling .......................................................128
TLI32115 Certificate III in Rail Structures...........................................................................133
TLI32315 Certificate III in Electric Passenger Train Guard ..............................................137
TLI32416 Certificate III in Logistics......................................................................................140
TLI32515 Certificate III in Rail Infrastructure ....................................................................144
TLI32615 Certificate III in Rail Signalling ...........................................................................150
TLI32715 Certificate III in Track Protection........................................................................153
TLI32815 Certificate III in Rail Yard Coordination ............................................................156
TLI32915 Certificate III in Tram or Light Rail Infrastructure ..........................................159
TLI33015 Certificate III in Heritage Locomotive Assistant or Steam Locomotive Fireman162
TLI33115 Certificate III in Rail Customer Service ..............................................................165
TLI33215 Certificate III in Terminal Train Driving ............................................................168
TLI33316 Certificate III in Furniture Removal ....................................................................171
TLI33416 Certificate III in Waste Driving Operations ........................................................174
TLI33516 Certificate III in Stevedoring ................................................................................179
TLI40115 Certificate IV in Rail Safety Investigation ...........................................................186
TLI41216 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Car Driving
Instruction) ........................................................................................................................188
TLI41316 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Heavy Vehicle
Driving Instruction) ..........................................................................................................190
TLI41416 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Motorcycle Riding
Instruction) ........................................................................................................................192
TLI41515 Certificate IV in Materiel Logistics ......................................................................194
TLI41616 Certificate IV in International Freight Forwarding (Senior Operator) ............198
TLI41715 Certificate IV in Stevedoring Operations ............................................................200
TLI41816 Certificate IV in Warehousing Operations ..........................................................203
TLI41916 Certificate IV in Mobile Crane Operations .........................................................206
Approved Page 2 of 6465

© Commonwealth of Australia, 2017 Australian Industry Standards
TLI42016 Certificate IV in Logistics ......................................................................................210

TLI42116 Certificate IV in Driving Operations ....................................................................215
TLI42215 Certificate IV in Rail Network Control ................................................................220
TLI42315 Certificate IV in Rail Infrastructure ....................................................................223
TLI42415 Certificate IV in Rail Safety Management ...........................................................227
TLI42516 Certificate IV in Traffic Operations .....................................................................230
TLI42615 Certificate IV in Train Driving .............................................................................234
TLI42715 Certificate IV in Tram/Light Rail Control ..........................................................239
TLI50215 Diploma of Materiel Logistics ...............................................................................242
TLI50316 Diploma of International Freight Forwarding ....................................................246
TLI50415 Diploma of Logistics ...............................................................................................249
TLI50515 Diploma of Deployment Logistics .........................................................................253
TLI50615 Diploma of Rail Operations Management ...........................................................258
TLI50716 Diploma of Bus and Coach Operations ................................................................262
TLI50816 Diploma of Customs Broking ................................................................................265
TLI60115 Advanced Diploma of Materiel Logistics .............................................................268
TLI60215 Advanced Diploma of Deployment Logistics .......................................................272
AHCARB202A Fell small trees ...............................................................................................276
AHCARB205A Operate and maintain chainsaws.................................................................283
AHCOHS501A Manage Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) processes ......................290
AURVGA3002 Recover vehicles .............................................................................................298
BSBADM409 Coordinate business resources ........................................................................308
Assessment Requirements for BSBADM409 Coordinate business resources ....................312
BSBADM502 Manage meetings ..............................................................................................314
Assessment Requirements for BSBADM502 Manage meetings ..........................................318
BSBCMM301 Process customer complaints..........................................................................320
Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM301 Process customer complaints ......................324
BSBCMM401 Make a presentation........................................................................................326
Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM401 Make a presentation ....................................330
BSBCOM501 Identify and interpret compliance requirements ..........................................332
Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM501 Identify and interpret compliance
requirements .....................................................................................................................337
BSBCOM601 Research compliance requirements and issues .............................................339
Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM601 Research compliance requirements and issues344
BSBCUS201 Deliver a service to customers ..........................................................................346
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS201 Deliver a service to customers .......................350
BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers ....................................................352
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers .356
BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies ...........................358
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer
service strategies ...............................................................................................................362
BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service .....................................................................364
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service .................368
BSBFIA303 Process accounts payable and receivable..........................................................370
Assessment Requirements for BSBFIA303 Process accounts payable and receivable ......375
BSBFIM501 Manage budgets and financial plans ................................................................377
Assessment Requirements for BSBFIM501 Manage budgets and financial plans ............381
BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and induction of staff ............................383
Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and
induction of staff ...............................................................................................................388
BSBHRM513 Manage workforce planning ...........................................................................390
Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM513 Manage workforce planning........................395
BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system ......................................................397

Assessment Requirements for BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system ..401

BSBINM501 Manage an information or knowledge management system .........................403
Assessment Requirements for BSBINM501 Manage an information or knowledge
management system ..........................................................................................................407
BSBINN502 Build and sustain an innovative work environment........................................409
Assessment Requirements for BSBINN502 Build and sustain an innovative work
environment.......................................................................................................................414
BSBITU101 Operate a personal computer ............................................................................416
Assessment Requirements for BSBITU101 Operate a personal computer.........................420
BSBITU102 Develop keyboard skills .....................................................................................422
Assessment Requirements for BSBITU102 Develop keyboard skills ..................................425
BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness ....................................................................................427
Assessment Requirements for BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness .................................431
BSBMGT401 Show leadership in the workplace ..................................................................433
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT401 Show leadership in the workplace ...............437
BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan ............................................................................439
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan ........................443
BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement..............................................................445
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement ..........449
BSBMGT502 Manage people performance ...........................................................................451
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT502 Manage people performance .......................456
BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement ................................................................458
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement .............462
BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan .................................................................................464
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan .............................469
BSBMGT605 Provide leadership across the organisation ...................................................471
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT605 Provide leadership across the organisation 476
BSBMGT616 Develop and implement strategic plans..........................................................478
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT616 Develop and implement strategic plans ......483
BSBMGT617 Develop and implement a business plan.........................................................485
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT617 Develop and implement a business plan .....489
BSBMKG513 Promote products and services to international markets ............................491
Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG513 Promote products and services to
international markets .......................................................................................................496
BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques ................................................498
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques502
BSBPMG416 Apply project procurement procedures .........................................................504
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG416 Apply project procurement procedures......508
BSBPMG512 Manage project time ........................................................................................510
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG512 Manage project time .....................................514
BSBPMG514 Manage project cost .........................................................................................516
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG514 Manage project cost ......................................520
BSBPMG515 Manage project human resources ...................................................................522
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG515 Manage project human resources ...............526
BSBPMG516 Manage project information and communication .........................................528
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG516 Manage project information and
communication ..................................................................................................................532
BSBPMG518 Manage project procurement ..........................................................................534
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG518 Manage project procurement ......................539
BSBPMG522 Undertake project work...................................................................................541
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG522 Undertake project work ...............................546
BSBPMG604 Direct cost management of a project program ..............................................548
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG604 Direct cost management of a project program552

BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project program ........................554

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a
project program ................................................................................................................559
BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a project program ........................561
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a
project program ................................................................................................................566
BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and services .............................................................................568
Assessment Requirements for BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and services .........................572
BSBREL401 Establish networks ............................................................................................574
Assessment Requirements for BSBREL401 Establish networks .........................................578
BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks ...........................................580
Assessment Requirements for BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business
networks.............................................................................................................................584
BSBRKG304 Maintain business records ...............................................................................586
Assessment Requirements for BSBRKG304 Maintain business records ............................589
BSBRSK401 Identify risk and apply risk management processes ......................................591
Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK401 Identify risk and apply risk management
processes ............................................................................................................................595
BSBRSK501 Manage risk .......................................................................................................597
Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK501 Manage risk ....................................................601
BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability .........................603
Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for
sustainability .....................................................................................................................608
BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS hazard identification, risk assessment and risk control610
Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS hazard identification, risk
assessment and risk control .............................................................................................615
BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies, procedures and programs to meet
legislative requirements ....................................................................................................617
Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies,
procedures and programs to meet legislative requirements .........................................622
BSBWHS501 Ensure a safe workplace ..................................................................................624
Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS501 Ensure a safe workplace ...............................629
BSBWOR201 Manage personal stress in the workplace ......................................................631
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR201 Manage personal stress in the workplace ..636
BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development ...................................638
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and
development.......................................................................................................................642
BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development ...............644
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and
professional development .................................................................................................648
BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness .............................................................650
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness ..........655
BSBWRK411 Support employee and industrial relations procedures ...............................657
Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK411 Support employee and industrial relations
procedures .........................................................................................................................661
BSBWRK510 Manage employee relations.............................................................................663
Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK510 Manage employee relations .........................668
BSBWRT301 Write simple documents ..................................................................................670
Assessment Requirements for BSBWRT301 Write simple documents ...............................674
CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to behaviours of concern ................................................676
Assessment Requirements for CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to behaviours of concern679
CPCCCM2007B Use explosive power tools ...........................................................................681
CPCCCM2008B Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding ...................................692

CPCCCM2010B Work safely at heights ................................................................................702

CPCCCM3003A Work safely around power sources, services and assets .........................710
CPCCCO3054A Operate concrete agitator trucks ...............................................................721
CPCCLDG3001A Licence to perform dogging .....................................................................732
CPCCLRG3001A Licence to perform rigging basic level ....................................................743
CPCCLRG3002A Licence to perform rigging intermediate level .......................................757
CPCCOHS1001A Work safely in the construction industry ...............................................770
CPCCOHS2001A Apply OHS requirements, policies and procedures in the construction
industry ..............................................................................................................................782
CPCCSF2003A Cut and bend materials using oxy-LPG equipment ..................................797
CPPSEC5001A Establish and maintain an Occupational Health and Safety system ........807
CPPWMT3011A Respond to waste emergencies ..................................................................817
CPPWMT3015A Move waste using loadshifting equipment ...............................................829
CPPWMT3044A Identify wastes and hazards ......................................................................841
FDFFS2001A Implement the food safety program and procedures ...................................849
FDFFS3001A Monitor the implementation of quality and food safety programs .............860
FPICOT3261 Transport forestry logs using trucks ..............................................................872
HLTAID001 Provide cardiopulmonary resuscitation ..........................................................885
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID001 Provide cardiopulmonary resuscitation .......888
HLTAID002 Provide basic emergency life support ..............................................................892
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID002 Provide basic emergency life support...........896
HLTAID003 Provide first aid .................................................................................................900
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID003 Provide first aid ..............................................903
HLTAID006 Provide advanced first aid ................................................................................908
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID006 Provide advanced first aid.............................913
HLTWHS006 Manage personal stressors in the work environment...................................919
Assessment Requirements for HLTWHS006 Manage personal stressors in the work
environment.......................................................................................................................922
MARC022 Perform mooring and unmooring activities .......................................................924
Assessment Requirements for MARC022 Perform mooring and unmooring activities ....929
MARE002 Communicate during mooring and unmooring activities .................................933
Assessment Requirements for MARE002 Communicate during mooring and unmooring
activities .............................................................................................................................937
MARF017 Follow work health and safety, and emergency procedures during mooring and
unmooring activities .........................................................................................................940
Assessment Requirements for MARF017 Follow work health and safety, and emergency
procedures during mooring and unmooring activities ..................................................945
MEM12023A Perform engineering measurements ...............................................................949
MEM18001C Use hand tools ...................................................................................................957
MEM24001B Perform basic penetrant testing ......................................................................964
MEM24003B Perform basic magnetic particle testing .........................................................973
MEM24012C Apply metallurgy principles ............................................................................981
MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis.........................................................................990
NWP227B Control vegetation on a site ..................................................................................998
PMC552061C Deliver concrete to site ..................................................................................1005
PSPGOV205B Participate in workplace change .................................................................1013
PSPGOV306B Implement change ........................................................................................1019
PSPGOV404B Develop and implement work unit plans ....................................................1027
PSPGOV406B Gather and analyse information .................................................................1035
PSPGOV413A Compose complex workplace documents...................................................1043
PSPGOV421A Exercise delegations .....................................................................................1052
PSPGOV503B Coordinate resource allocation and usage .................................................1059
PSPGOV504B Undertake research and analysis ................................................................1065

PSPGOV506A Support workplace coaching and mentoring .............................................1074

PSPGOV511A Provide leadership........................................................................................1086
PSPGOV512A Use complex workplace communication strategies ...................................1095
PSPGOV513A Refine complex workplace documents .......................................................1103
PSPGOV515A Develop and use political nous ....................................................................1112
PSPGOV516A Develop and use emotional intelligence ......................................................1119
PSPGOV518A Benchmark performance .............................................................................1127
PSPGOV519A Manage performance ...................................................................................1137
PSPGOV524A Interpret data and related statistics ...........................................................1146
PSPGOV602B Establish and maintain strategic networks ................................................1153
PSPGOV605A Persuade and influence opinion ..................................................................1160
PSPGOV606A Prepare high-level/sensitive written materials ..........................................1170
PSPHR504A Implement workforce planning and succession strategies ..........................1179
PSPHR620A Manage organisational development .............................................................1189
PSPMNGT602B Manage resources......................................................................................1199
PSPMNGT608B Manage risk ...............................................................................................1207
PSPMNGT610A Manage public sector financial resources ...............................................1220
PSPMNGT613A Develop partnering arrangements ..........................................................1230
PSPMNGT615A Influence workforce effectiveness............................................................1238
PSPMNGT701B Provide strategic direction .......................................................................1250
PSPPM401B Design simple projects ....................................................................................1259
PSPPM402B Manage simple projects ..................................................................................1272
PSPPM403B Close simple projects.......................................................................................1283
PSPPM504A Carry out complex project activities .............................................................1292
PSPPOL404A Support policy implementation ...................................................................1303
PSPPOL602A Provide policy advice ....................................................................................1309
PSPPOL603A Manage policy implementation ....................................................................1317
PSPPROC303A Carry out basic procurement ....................................................................1323
PSPPROC405C Dispose of assets .........................................................................................1333
PSPPROC411A Plan procurement ......................................................................................1342
PSPPROC412A Develop and distribute requests for offers...............................................1353
PSPPROC413A Select providers and develop contracts ....................................................1364
PSPPROC414A Manage contracts .......................................................................................1374
PSPPROC503B Manage contract performance ..................................................................1386
PSPPROC504B Finalise contracts........................................................................................1398
PSPPROC505A Manage procurement risk .........................................................................1407
PSPPROC506A Plan to manage a contract .........................................................................1416
PSPPROC603C Divest strategic assets ................................................................................1428
PSPPROC604B Plan for strategic procurement .................................................................1436
PSPPROC605B Coordinate strategic procurement............................................................1446
PSPPROC606B Negotiate strategic procurement ...............................................................1458
PSPPROC607A Manage strategic contracts .......................................................................1469
PSPPROC704A Influence and define strategic procurement ............................................1480
PSPPROC705A Establish strategic procurement context .................................................1489
PSPREG411A Gather information through interviews .....................................................1500
PSPREG418A Advise on progress of investigations ...........................................................1510
PSPSEC602A Manage security awareness ..........................................................................1518
PUACOM007B Liaise with other organisations .................................................................1525
PUADEFVH001A Conduct recovery vehicle operations in a field environment .............1529
PUADEFVH002A Extract disabled equipment using winching techniques in a field
environment.....................................................................................................................1539
PUAOPE001B Supervise response .......................................................................................1548
PUAWER005B Operate as part of an emergency control organisation ...........................1559

RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site operations ..........................................................................1566

Assessment Requirements for RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site operations .......................1570
RIICBS312D Conduct bitumen tanker operations .............................................................1574
Assessment Requirements for RIICBS312D Conduct bitumen tanker operations .........1577
RIICCM201D Carry out measurements and calculations .................................................1581
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM201D Carry out measurements and calculations1583
RIICCM203D Read and interpret plans and job specifications ........................................1587
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM203D Read and interpret plans and job
specifications ...................................................................................................................1590
RIICCM205D Carry out manual excavation ......................................................................1594
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM205D Carry out manual excavation ...................1597
RIICCM207D Spread and compact materials manually ...................................................1601
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM207D Spread and compact materials manually 1604
RIICCM208D Carry out basic levelling ..............................................................................1608
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM208D Carry out basic levelling ...........................1611
RIICCM209D Carry out concrete work ..............................................................................1615
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM209D Carry out concrete work...........................1619
RIIHAN301D Operate elevating work platform .................................................................1623
Assessment Requirements for RIIHAN301D Operate elevating work platform .............1626
RIIMPO317D Conduct roller operations ............................................................................1630
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO317D Conduct roller operations .........................1633
RIIMPO318D Conduct civil construction skid steer loader operations ...........................1638
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO318D Conduct civil construction skid steer loader
operations ........................................................................................................................1641
RIIMPO319D Conduct backhoe/loader operations ............................................................1646
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO319D Conduct backhoe/loader operations ........1649
RIIMPO320D Conduct civil construction excavator operations .......................................1654
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO320D Conduct civil construction excavator
operations ........................................................................................................................1657
RIIMPO321D Conduct civil construction wheeled front end loader operations .............1662
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO321D Conduct civil construction wheeled front end
loader operations ............................................................................................................1665
RIIMPO322D Conduct civil construction tracked front end loader operations ..............1670
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO322D Conduct civil construction tracked front end
loader operations ............................................................................................................1673
RIIMPO326D Conduct civil construction water cart operations ......................................1678
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO326D Conduct civil construction water cart
operations ........................................................................................................................1681
RIIRIS401D Apply site risk management system ...............................................................1686
Assessment Requirements for RIIRIS401D Apply site risk management system ...........1689
RIIWHS202D Enter and work in confined spaces..............................................................1693
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS202D Enter and work in confined spaces ..........1696
RIIWHS204D Work safely at heights ..................................................................................1700
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS204D Work safely at heights ...............................1703
RIIWHS205D Control traffic with stop-slow bat................................................................1707
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS205D Control traffic with stop-slow bat ............1710
RIIWHS302D Implement traffic management plan ...........................................................1714
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS302D Implement traffic management plan .......1717
SIRCDIS302 Deliver medicines to customers outside the pharmacy ................................1721
SIRCHCS201 Support the supply of Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only Medicines1729
SITHFAB201 Provide responsible service of alcohol .........................................................1738
SITXCOM401 Manage conflict ............................................................................................1750
SITXEVT605 Develop event transport plans ......................................................................1758

SITXFIN402 Manage finances within a budget ..................................................................1768

SITXFSA101 Use hygienic practices for food safety...........................................................1775
SITXFSA201 Participate in safe food handling practices ..................................................1784
SITXMPR404 Coordinate marketing activities ..................................................................1796
TAEASS401B Plan assessment activities and processes .....................................................1804
TAEASS402B Assess competence.........................................................................................1813
TAEDEL301A Provide work skill instruction.....................................................................1822
TAEDEL404A Mentor in the workplace .............................................................................1832
TAEDES401A Design and develop learning programs ......................................................1839
TAETAS501B Undertake organisational training needs analysis .....................................1846
TLIA0001 Complete import procedures ..............................................................................1852
Assessment Requirements for TLIA0001 Complete import procedures ..........................1855
TLIA0002 Prepare cargo for export ....................................................................................1858
Assessment Requirements for TLIA0002 Prepare cargo for export .................................1861
TLIA1001 Secure cargo .........................................................................................................1864
Assessment Requirements for TLIA1001 Secure cargo .....................................................1867
TLIA2003 Connect and disconnect reefer units ..................................................................1870
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2003 Connect and disconnect reefer units ..............1873
TLIA2009 Complete and check import/export documentation .........................................1876
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2009 Complete and check import/export
documentation .................................................................................................................1880
TLIA2011 Package goods ......................................................................................................1882
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2011 Package goods ..................................................1884
TLIA2012 Pick and process orders ......................................................................................1886
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2012 Pick and process orders ...................................1889
TLIA2013 Receive goods .......................................................................................................1892
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2013 Receive goods....................................................1895
TLIA2014 Use product knowledge to complete work operations......................................1898
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2014 Use product knowledge to complete work
operations ........................................................................................................................1900
TLIA2020 Replenish stock ....................................................................................................1903
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2020 Replenish stock .................................................1906
TLIA2021 Despatch stock .....................................................................................................1908
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2021 Despatch stock ..................................................1911
TLIA2022 Participate in stocktakes .....................................................................................1914
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2022 Participate in stocktakes..................................1917
TLIA2041 Manually sort mail and parcels ..........................................................................1919
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2041 Manually sort mail and parcels ......................1922
TLIA2042 Despatch mail.......................................................................................................1925
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2042 Despatch mail ...................................................1928
TLIA2043 Consolidate mail ..................................................................................................1931
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2043 Consolidate mail ...............................................1934
TLIA2044 Carry out delivery operations ............................................................................1936
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2044 Carry out delivery operations .........................1939
TLIA2045 Process international parcels and letters...........................................................1942
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2045 Process international parcels and letters .......1945
TLIA2046 Process parcels and letters ..................................................................................1948
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2046 Process parcels and letters ..............................1951
TLIA2047 Stream mail ..........................................................................................................1953
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2047 Stream mail ......................................................1956
TLIA2050 Lash and unlash cargo and containers ..............................................................1958
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2050 Lash and unlash cargo and containers...........1962
TLIA3002 Maintain container/cargo records......................................................................1966

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3002 Maintain container/cargo records ..................1969

TLIA3004 Process receipt and delivery of containers and cargo ......................................1971
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3004 Process receipt and delivery of containers and
cargo .................................................................................................................................1974
TLIA3008 Transfer cargo .....................................................................................................1977
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3008 Transfer cargo ..................................................1980
TLIA3010 Coordinate goods to bond premises ...................................................................1983
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3010 Coordinate goods to bond premises ...............1986
TLIA3015 Complete receival/despatch documentation......................................................1988
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3015 Complete receival/despatch documentation ..1991
TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to organise stock control ..............................................1993
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to organise stock control1996
TLIA3017 Identify products and store to specifications ....................................................1999
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3017 Identify products and store to specifications .2002
TLIA3018 Organise despatch operations ............................................................................2005
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3018 Organise despatch operations .........................2008
TLIA3019 Organise receival operations ..............................................................................2011
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3019 Organise receival operations ...........................2014
TLIA3023 Coordinate stocktakes .........................................................................................2016
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3023 Coordinate stocktakes .....................................2019
TLIA3024 Organise warehouse records operations ...........................................................2022
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3024 Organise warehouse records operations ........2025
TLIA3026 Monitor storage facilities ....................................................................................2027
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3026 Monitor storage facilities .................................2030
TLIA3038 Control and order stock ......................................................................................2033
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3038 Control and order stock ..................................2036
TLIA3039 Receive and store stock .......................................................................................2039
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3039 Receive and store stock....................................2042
TLIA3055 Coordinate terminal/wharf equipment operations...........................................2044
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3055 Coordinate terminal/wharf equipment
operations ........................................................................................................................2047
TLIA4005 Check and evaluate records and documentation ..............................................2051
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4005 Check and evaluate records and documentation2053
TLIA4006 Organise and monitor terminal/wharf operations ...........................................2056
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4006 Organise and monitor terminal/wharf operations2059
TLIA4025 Regulate temperature controlled stock .............................................................2062
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4025 Regulate temperature controlled stock ..........2065
TLIA4028 Assess and monitor optimum stock levels .........................................................2067
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4028 Assess and monitor optimum stock levels ......2070
TLIA4031 Consolidate freight ..............................................................................................2072
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4031 Consolidate freight ...........................................2075
TLIA4032 Organise transport of freight or goods ..............................................................2077
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4032 Organise transport of freight or goods ..........2080
TLIA4033 Organise international transport of freight ......................................................2083
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4033 Organise international transport of freight ...2086
TLIA4040 Implement and monitor stevedoring regulations .............................................2089
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4040 Implement and monitor stevedoring regulations2092
TLIA4062 Implement safety stock systems .........................................................................2095
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4062 Implement safety stock systems ......................2098
TLIA4063 Coordinate stevedoring clerical functions .........................................................2101
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4063 Coordinate stevedoring clerical functions .....2104
TLIA5029 Plan and manage storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances .....2107

Assessment Requirements for TLIA5029 Plan and manage storage of dangerous goods
and hazardous substances ..............................................................................................2110
TLIA5035 Manage international freight transfer ...............................................................2113
Assessment Requirements for TLIA5035 Manage international freight transfer ...........2117
TLIA5058 Manage facility and inventory requirements ....................................................2120
Assessment Requirements for TLIA5058 Manage facility and inventory requirements 2124
TLIA5059 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by sea and
multimodal transport .....................................................................................................2127
Assessment Requirements for TLIA5059 Plan and organise the international forwarding
of freight by sea and multimodal transport..................................................................2131
TLIA5060 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by air transport..2134
of freight by air transport ..............................................................................................2138
TLIA5061 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by road and rail
transport ..........................................................................................................................2141
of freight by road and rail transport .............................................................................2145
TLIB0117 Assist with preparation of a train prior to operation .......................................2148
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0117 Assist with preparation of a train prior to
operation ..........................................................................................................................2151
TLIB0127 Certify rolling stock prior to handover .............................................................2154
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0127 Certify rolling stock prior to handover ..........2157
TLIB0128 Conduct pre-movement checks on motive power units ....................................2159
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0128 Conduct pre-movement checks on motive power
units ..................................................................................................................................2163
TLIB0132 Start up and shut down a single locomotive ......................................................2165
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0132 Start up and shut down a single locomotive ..2169
TLIB1024 Clean transportation units and facilities for passenger use .............................2172
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1024 Clean transportation units and facilities for
passenger use ...................................................................................................................2175
TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand tools ...............................................................................2178
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand tools ...........................2180
TLIB1030 Undertake general site maintenance ..................................................................2182
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1030 Undertake general site maintenance ..............2185
TLIB1031 Clean up plant, equipment and worksite ...........................................................2188
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1031 Clean up plant, equipment and worksite .......2191
TLIB1080 Use, clean and maintain towing equipment .......................................................2194
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1080 Use, clean and maintain towing equipment ...2198
TLIB1093 Clean equipment and restore worksite ..............................................................2201
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1093 Clean equipment and restore worksite ..........2204
TLIB2001 Check and assess operational capabilities of equipment..................................2207
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2001 Check and assess operational capabilities of
equipment ........................................................................................................................2210
TLIB2003 Carry out vehicle servicing and maintenance ...................................................2212
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2003 Carry out vehicle servicing and maintenance 2215
TLIB2004 Carry out vehicle inspection ...............................................................................2218
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2004 Carry out vehicle inspection............................2221
TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of trailers ..........................................................................2223
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of trailers .......................2226
TLIB2009 Check conveyor operational status ....................................................................2228
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2009 Check conveyor operational status .................2231
TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify minor faults ......................................................................2234
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify minor faults ...................2237

TLIB2023 Provide sanitation and water services support to passenger transportation units2239
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2023 Provide sanitation and water services support to
passenger transportation units ......................................................................................2242
TLIB2029 Use and maintain minor mechanical equipment ..............................................2245
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2029 Use and maintain minor mechanical equipment2248
TLIB2034 Maintain poles and associated hardware ..........................................................2250
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2034 Maintain poles and associated hardware .......2253
TLIB2073 Clean road tankers ..............................................................................................2256
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2073 Clean road tankers ...........................................2260
TLIB2079 Set up and secure a towing situation ..................................................................2262
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2079 Set up and secure a towing situation ..............2265
TLIB2081 Repair timber structures.....................................................................................2268
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2081 Repair timber structures .................................2271
TLIB2082 Repair steel structures.........................................................................................2274
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2082 Repair steel structures .....................................2278
TLIB2083 Maintain bridge bearings....................................................................................2281
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2083 Maintain bridge bearings ................................2284
TLIB2084 Carry out routine maintenance of structures ...................................................2286
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2084 Carry out routine maintenance of structures 2289
TLIB2085 Apply track fundamentals ..................................................................................2291
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2085 Apply track fundamentals ...............................2294
TLIB2086 Apply awareness of structures fundamentals ...................................................2297
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2086 Apply awareness of structures fundamentals 2300
TLIB2090 Use communication systems in a taxi .................................................................2303
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2090 Use communication systems in a taxi .............2306
TLIB2091 Measure and record track geometry..................................................................2309
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2091 Measure and record track geometry ..............2312
TLIB2092 Operate minor mechanical equipment ..............................................................2314
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2092 Operate minor mechanical equipment ...........2317
TLIB2096 Repair concrete/masonry structures ..................................................................2319
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2096 Repair concrete/masonry structures ..............2322
TLIB2097 Install and maintain guard rails .........................................................................2325
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2097 Install and maintain guard rails .....................2328
TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on electric passenger trains ...................2331
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on electric
passenger trains ..............................................................................................................2334
TLIB2111 Assist with testing train braking system on electric passenger train ..............2336
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2111 Assist with testing train braking system on
electric passenger train...................................................................................................2339
TLIB2119 Carry out maintenance of trailers ......................................................................2341
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2119 Carry out maintenance of trailers ..................2344
TLIB2121 Maintain rail joints ..............................................................................................2347
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2121 Maintain rail joints ..........................................2350
TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail operations in yards or sidings .......2353
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail
operations in yards or sidings ........................................................................................2356
TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram or light rail track fundamentals ..............................2358
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram or light rail track
fundamentals ...................................................................................................................2361
TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on on-track vehicles ...................................2363
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on on-track
vehicles .............................................................................................................................2366
TLIB2131 Prepare train ........................................................................................................2368

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2131 Prepare train ....................................................2371

TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking system ............................................2373
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking system2376
TLIB3002 Test equipment and isolate faults .......................................................................2378
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3002 Test equipment and isolate faults ...................2381
TLIB3005 Carry out maintenance of vehicles designed to carry special loads ................2384
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3005 Carry out maintenance of vehicles designed to
carry special loads...........................................................................................................2387
TLIB3006 Carry out inspection of vehicles designed to carry special loads ....................2390
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3006 Carry out inspection of vehicles designed to
carry special loads...........................................................................................................2393
TLIB3011 Set up and rig crane for lift.................................................................................2396
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3011 Set up and rig crane for lift .............................2399
TLIB3012 Plan job and set up work areas ..........................................................................2402
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3012 Plan job and set up work areas .......................2405
TLIB3013 Maintain mobile cranes .......................................................................................2408
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3013 Maintain mobile cranes ...................................2411
TLIB3014 Load and unload wheeled or tracked crane ......................................................2414
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3014 Load and unload wheeled or tracked crane ..2417
TLIB3015 Undertake site inspection ....................................................................................2420
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3015 Undertake site inspection ................................2423
TLIB3016 De-rig, pack and store tools and equipment ......................................................2425
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3016 De-rig, pack and store tools and equipment ..2428
TLIB3017 Assemble and dismantle boom or jib .................................................................2430
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3017 Assemble and dismantle boom or jib .............2433
TLIB3018 Conduct full train examination ..........................................................................2436
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3018 Conduct full train examination .......................2440
TLIB3019 Test train braking system ...................................................................................2442
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3019 Test train braking system ................................2445
TLIB3021 Conduct train roll-by inspection ........................................................................2447
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3021 Conduct train roll-by inspection .....................2451
TLIB3026 Prepare for train operation ................................................................................2453
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3026 Prepare for train operation .............................2456
TLIB3027 Set up and shut down on-train remote control system .....................................2459
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3027 Set up and shut down on-train remote control
system ...............................................................................................................................2462
TLIB3040 Inspect poles and associated hardware ..............................................................2464
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3040 Inspect poles and associated hardware ..........2467
TLIB3046 Service and clean mechanical signalling equipment and infrastructure ........2470
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3046 Service and clean mechanical signalling
equipment and infrastructure........................................................................................2473
TLIB3047 Repair and adjust mechanical signalling equipment and infrastructure .......2476
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3047 Repair and adjust mechanical signalling
equipment and infrastructure........................................................................................2479
TLIB3048 Carry out off-site repair, overhaul and assembly of mechanical signalling
equipment ........................................................................................................................2482
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3048 Carry out off-site repair, overhaul and assembly
of mechanical signalling equipment ..............................................................................2485
TLIB3053 Maintain mechanical signalling locking and interlocking devices ..................2488
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3053 Maintain mechanical signalling locking and
interlocking devices ........................................................................................................2491
TLIB3058 Maintain aerial signal/telecommunications lines and cables ...........................2494

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3058 Maintain aerial signal/telecommunications lines

and cables ........................................................................................................................2497
TLIB3075 Inspect and prepare a motive power unit ..........................................................2500
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3075 Inspect and prepare a motive power unit ......2505
TLIB3078 Inspect, prepare and start an electrical tram ....................................................2508
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3078 Inspect, prepare and start an electrical tram 2513
TLIB3087 Examine timber structures .................................................................................2516
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3087 Examine timber structures ..............................2519
TLIB3088 Examine steel structures .....................................................................................2522
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3088 Examine steel structures ..................................2525
TLIB3094 Check and repair track geometry ......................................................................2528
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3094 Check and repair track geometry ...................2531
TLIB3095 Check and repair points and crossings ..............................................................2534
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3095 Check and repair points and crossings ..........2537
TLIB3098 Examine concrete/masonry structures ..............................................................2540
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3098 Examine concrete/masonry structures ...........2543
TLIB3099 Examine track infrastructure .............................................................................2546
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3099 Examine track infrastructure .........................2549
TLIB3100 Visually inspect track infrastructure .................................................................2552
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3100 Visually inspect track infrastructure .............2555
TLIB3102 Adjust rail.............................................................................................................2558
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3102 Adjust rail .........................................................2561
TLIB3105 Prepare electric passenger train .........................................................................2564
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3105 Prepare electric passenger train .....................2567
TLIB3108 Test operation of electric passenger train braking system ..............................2569
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3108 Test operation of electric passenger train
braking system ................................................................................................................2572
TLIB3112 Prepare electric passenger train as part of guard duties .................................2575
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3112 Prepare electric passenger train as part of guard
duties ................................................................................................................................2578
TLIB3113 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on motive power units and rolling stock ..2580
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3113 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on motive
power units and rolling stock .........................................................................................2583
TLIB3118 Apply awareness of railway fundamentals ........................................................2586
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3118 Apply awareness of railway fundamentals ....2589
TLIB3120 Test mechanical signalling equipment and isolate faults .................................2591
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3120 Test mechanical signalling equipment and isolate
faults .................................................................................................................................2594
TLIB3123 Apply awareness of motive power unit fundamentals ......................................2597
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3123 Apply awareness of motive power unit
fundamentals ...................................................................................................................2600
TLIB3124 Apply awareness of steam locomotive fundamentals .......................................2603
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3124 Apply awareness of steam locomotive
fundamentals ...................................................................................................................2606
TLIB3126 Assist in the testing of heritage train braking systems .....................................2609
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3126 Assist in the testing of heritage train braking
systems .............................................................................................................................2612
TLIB3129 Conduct pre-movement checks on rolling stock ...............................................2614
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3129 Conduct pre-movement checks on rolling stock2617
TLIB4042 Conduct inspection of safeworking procedures and infrastructure ...............2619
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4042 Conduct inspection of safeworking procedures
and infrastructure ...........................................................................................................2622
TLIB4071 Install and maintain pole mounted switches and transformers ......................2625

Assessment Requirements for TLIB4071 Install and maintain pole mounted switches and
transformers ....................................................................................................................2629
TLIB4076 Inspect and prepare a heritage motive power unit ...........................................2632
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4076 Inspect and prepare a heritage motive power
unit ...................................................................................................................................2637
TLIB4077 Inspect and prepare a heritage steam locomotive ............................................2640
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4077 Inspect and prepare a heritage steam locomotive2645
TLIB4078 Carry out a train roll-by inspection ...................................................................2648
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4078 Carry out a train roll-by inspection ...............2651
TLIB4079 Conduct a general train examination ................................................................2654
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4079 Conduct a general train examination .............2657
TLIB4080 Identify, diagnose and rectify minor faults on motive power units and rolling
stock .................................................................................................................................2660
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4080 Identify, diagnose and rectify minor faults on
motive power units and rolling stock ............................................................................2663
TLIB4081 Provision a motive power unit ............................................................................2666
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4081 Provision a motive power unit ........................2669
TLIB4082 Set up motive power units in multi-coupled consist .........................................2671
Assessment Requirements for TLIB4082 Set up motive power units in multi-coupled
consist ...............................................................................................................................2675
TLIB5010 Plan and implement maintenance schedules .....................................................2678
Assessment Requirements for TLIB5010 Plan and implement maintenance schedules .2681
TLIC0001 Operate chemical tanker.....................................................................................2684
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0001 Operate chemical tanker .................................2692
TLIC0002 Operate fuel tanker .............................................................................................2695
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0002 Operate fuel tanker ..........................................2702
TLIC0003 Operate LP gas tanker ........................................................................................2705
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0003 Operate LP gas tanker.....................................2712
TLIC0004 Operate a tip truck ..............................................................................................2715
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0004 Operate a tip truck ..........................................2719
TLIC0073 Conduct tram/light rail track cleaning operations ...........................................2722
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0073 Conduct tram/light rail track cleaning
operations ........................................................................................................................2726
TLIC0079 Operate a motive power unit within defined limits ..........................................2729
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0079 Operate a motive power unit within defined
limits .................................................................................................................................2732
TLIC0083 Access rail track to travel track vehicle under a proceed authority ...............2735
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0083 Access rail track to travel track vehicle under a
proceed authority ............................................................................................................2739
TLIC0084 Access rail track to travel track vehicles under manual block working
conditions .........................................................................................................................2742
Assessment Requirements for TLIC0084 Access rail track to travel track vehicles under
manual block working conditions .................................................................................2746
TLIC1013 Ride courier/delivery bicycle ..............................................................................2748
Assessment Requirements for TLIC1013 Ride courier/delivery bicycle ..........................2752
TLIC1051 Operate commercial vehicle ...............................................................................2755
Assessment Requirements for TLIC1051 Operate commercial vehicle ............................2758
TLIC2002 Drive light rigid vehicle.......................................................................................2761
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2002 Drive light rigid vehicle ...................................2764
TLIC2009 Drive taxi ..............................................................................................................2767
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2009 Drive taxi ..........................................................2770
TLIC2012 Ride courier/delivery motorcycle .......................................................................2773
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2012 Ride courier/delivery motorcycle ...................2776

TLIC2025 Operate four wheel drive vehicle .......................................................................2778

Assessment Requirements for TLIC2025 Operate four wheel drive vehicle ....................2783
TLIC2040 Provide wheelchair accessible taxi services to passengers with disabilities ...2787
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2040 Provide wheelchair accessible taxi services to
passengers with disabilities ............................................................................................2791
TLIC2049 Operate heavy vehicle on unsealed roads ..........................................................2795
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2049 Operate heavy vehicle on unsealed roads ......2798
TLIC2050 Operate a terminal tractor .................................................................................2800
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2050 Operate a terminal tractor ..............................2803
TLIC2054 Access rail track to run track vehicle within defined worksite .......................2805
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2054 Access rail track to run track vehicle within
defined worksite ..............................................................................................................2808
TLIC2058 Travel medium or heavy self-propelled on-track equipment ..........................2810
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2058 Travel medium or heavy self-propelled on-track
equipment ........................................................................................................................2814
TLIC2059 Propel and operate light on-track equipment ...................................................2817
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2059 Propel and operate light on-track equipment2821
TLIC2074 Couple and uncouple track maintenance vehicles ............................................2824
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2074 Couple and uncouple track maintenance vehicles2827
TLIC2075 Drive and monitor medium or heavy self-propelled on-track equipment......2830
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2075 Drive and monitor medium or heavy
self-propelled on-track equipment ................................................................................2833
TLIC2076 Establish and operate braking system on medium/heavy self-propelled on-track
equipment ........................................................................................................................2836
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2076 Establish and operate braking system on
medium/heavy self-propelled on-track equipment ......................................................2839
TLIC2078 Identify and respond to signals and trackside signs .........................................2842
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2078 Identify and respond to signals and trackside
signs ..................................................................................................................................2845
TLIC2080 Start up, shut down and stable medium/heavy self-propelled on-track
equipment ........................................................................................................................2848
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2080 Start up, shut down and stable medium/heavy
self-propelled on-track equipment ................................................................................2852
TLIC2081 Pilot rail traffic within work on track authority limits ....................................2855
Assessment Requirements for TLIC2081 Pilot rail traffic within work on track authority
limits .................................................................................................................................2858
TLIC3003 Drive medium rigid vehicle ................................................................................2860
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3003 Drive medium rigid vehicle .............................2863
TLIC3004 Drive heavy rigid vehicle ....................................................................................2866
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3004 Drive heavy rigid vehicle .................................2869
TLIC3005 Drive heavy combination vehicle .......................................................................2872
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3005 Drive heavy combination vehicle ....................2875
TLIC3010 Pilot or escort oversized and/or overmassed loads ...........................................2878
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3010 Pilot or escort oversized and/or overmassed
loads .................................................................................................................................2881
TLIC3011 Transport passengers with disabilities ..............................................................2884
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3011 Transport passengers with disabilities ...........2887
TLIC3017 Shunt rolling stock...............................................................................................2890
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3017 Shunt rolling stock ...........................................2893
TLIC3018 Operate on-train remote control system ...........................................................2896
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3018 Operate on-train remote control system ........2899
TLIC3027 Stable a motive power unit .................................................................................2902
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3027 Stable a motive power unit ..............................2905

TLIC3028 Operate and monitor a heritage motive power unit .........................................2908

Assessment Requirements for TLIC3028 Operate and monitor a heritage motive power
unit ...................................................................................................................................2912
TLIC3029 Stable a heritage motive power unit ..................................................................2915
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3029 Stable a heritage motive power unit ...............2918
TLIC3030 Operate and monitor a heritage steam locomotive...........................................2921
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3030 Operate and monitor a heritage steam
locomotive ........................................................................................................................2925
TLIC3031 Stable a heritage steam locomotive ....................................................................2928
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3031 Stable a heritage steam locomotive ................2932
TLIC3032 Operate and monitor a passenger electric tram ...............................................2935
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3032 Operate and monitor a passenger electric tram2940
TLIC3033 Drive an electric tram to operational requirements .........................................2943
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3033 Drive an electric tram to operational
requirements ...................................................................................................................2946
TLIC3034 Berth and shut down an electric tram ...............................................................2949
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3034 Berth and shut down an electric tram............2952
TLIC3035 Manage the operation of a tow truck .................................................................2955
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3035 Manage the operation of a tow truck .............2958
TLIC3036 Apply safe car driving behaviours .....................................................................2961
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3036 Apply safe car driving behaviours ..................2964
TLIC3037 Apply safe heavy vehicle driving behaviours ....................................................2967
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3037 Apply safe heavy vehicle driving behaviours 2971
TLIC3038 Apply safe motorcycle riding behaviours ..........................................................2974
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3038 Apply safe motorcycle riding behaviours ......2978
TLIC3039 Operate and monitor a monorail train ..............................................................2982
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3039 Operate and monitor a monorail train ..........2986
TLIC3042 Operate coach/bus ...............................................................................................2989
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3042 Operate coach/bus ............................................2993
TLIC3045 Operate road/rail vehicle ....................................................................................2996
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3045 Operate road/rail vehicle .................................3000
TLIC3046 Drive and operate electric passenger train .......................................................3003
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3046 Drive and operate electric passenger train ....3007
TLIC3047 Stable electric passenger train............................................................................3010
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3047 Stable electric passenger train ........................3013
TLIC3048 Shunt, couple and uncouple electric passenger trains .....................................3016
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3048 Shunt, couple and uncouple electric passenger
trains ................................................................................................................................3019
TLIC3052 Assist with shunting, coupling and uncoupling electric passenger trains ......3021
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3052 Assist with shunting, coupling and uncoupling
electric passenger trains .................................................................................................3025
TLIC3057 Perform guard duties as part of electric passenger train operations .............3028
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3057 Perform guard duties as part of electric
passenger train operations .............................................................................................3032
TLIC3063 Operate vehicle carrying special loads ..............................................................3035
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3063 Operate vehicle carrying special loads ...........3038
TLIC3064 Operate car carrier vehicle .................................................................................3041
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3064 Operate car carrier vehicle .............................3045
TLIC3071 Operate an agitator .............................................................................................3048
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3071 Operate an agitator ..........................................3051
TLIC3072 Conduct the duties of an assistant on a heritage locomotive ...........................3054
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3072 Conduct the duties of an assistant on a heritage
locomotive ........................................................................................................................3058

TLIC3073 Fire a steam locomotive ......................................................................................3061

Assessment Requirements for TLIC3073 Fire a steam locomotive ...................................3065
TLIC3082 Operate a locomotive by portable remote control ............................................3068
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3082 Operate a locomotive by portable remote control3071
TLIC3083 Operate a front lift mobile compaction/collection vehicle ...............................3074
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3083 Operate a front lift mobile compaction/collection
vehicle...............................................................................................................................3077
TLIC3084 Operate a lift on/lift off collection vehicle .........................................................3080
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3084 Operate a lift on/lift off collection vehicle ......3084
TLIC3085 Operate a liquid waste collection vehicle...........................................................3087
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3085 Operate a liquid waste collection vehicle .......3091
TLIC3086 Operate a multi-lift collection vehicle ................................................................3094
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3086 Operate a multi-lift collection vehicle ............3098
TLIC3087 Operate a rear loading mobile compaction/collection vehicle .........................3101
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3087 Operate a rear loading mobile
compaction/collection vehicle.........................................................................................3104
TLIC3088 Operate a roll on/roll off collection vehicle .......................................................3107
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3088 Operate a roll on/roll off collection vehicle ....3111
TLIC3089 Operate a side loading mobile compaction/collection vehicle .........................3114
Assessment Requirements for TLIC3089 Operate a side loading mobile
compaction/collection vehicle.........................................................................................3117
TLIC4006 Drive multi-combination vehicle ........................................................................3120
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4006 Drive multi-combination vehicle ....................3123
TLIC4019 Drive train to operational requirements ...........................................................3126
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4019 Drive train to operational requirements ........3130
TLIC4023 Operate train with due consideration of route conditions ...............................3133
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4023 Operate train with due consideration of route
conditions .........................................................................................................................3136
TLIC4026 Operate and monitor a motive power unit ........................................................3140
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4026 Operate and monitor a motive power unit ....3144
TLIC4068 Operate heavy recovery ancillary equipment ...................................................3147
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4068 Operate heavy recovery ancillary equipment3150
TLIC4069 Operate heavy recovery vehicle .........................................................................3152
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4069 Operate heavy recovery vehicle ......................3156
TLIC4070 Tow a disabled heavy vehicle .............................................................................3159
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4070 Tow a disabled heavy vehicle ..........................3163
TLIC4071 Establish and operate train braking system .....................................................3167
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4071 Establish and operate train braking system ..3170
TLIC4072 Operate and monitor a motive power unit on a main line ...............................3173
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4072 Operate and monitor a motive power unit on a
main line ..........................................................................................................................3177
TLIC4073 Set up, operate and shut down a distributed power system ............................3180
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4073 Set up, operate and shut down a distributed
power system ...................................................................................................................3183
TLIC4074 Shunt, couple and uncouple rail vehicles ..........................................................3186
Assessment Requirements for TLIC4074 Shunt, couple and uncouple rail vehicles .......3189
TLID1001 Shift materials safely using manual handling methods....................................3192
Assessment Requirements for TLID1001 Shift materials safely using manual handling
methods ............................................................................................................................3195
TLID1002 Shift a load using manually-operated equipment .............................................3198
Assessment Requirements for TLID1002 Shift a load using manually-operated equipment3202
TLID2003 Handle dangerous goods/hazardous substances ...............................................3205
Assessment Requirements for TLID2003 Handle dangerous goods/hazardous substances3208

TLID2004 Load and unload goods/cargo ............................................................................3212

Assessment Requirements for TLID2004 Load and unload goods/cargo .........................3215
TLID2010 Operate a forklift .................................................................................................3218
Assessment Requirements for TLID2010 Operate a forklift .............................................3221
TLID2012 Operate specialised load shifting equipment ....................................................3224
Assessment Requirements for TLID2012 Operate specialised load shifting equipment .3228
TLID2013 Move materials mechanically using automated equipment .............................3231
Assessment Requirements for TLID2013 Move materials mechanically using automated
equipment ........................................................................................................................3234
TLID2016 Load and unload explosives/dangerous goods ..................................................3237
Assessment Requirements for TLID2016 Load and unload explosives/dangerous goods3240
TLID2018 Handle furniture and effects ..............................................................................3243
Assessment Requirements for TLID2018 Handle furniture and effects ...........................3246
TLID2019 Pack and unpack cartons during a removal .....................................................3249
Assessment Requirements for TLID2019 Pack and unpack cartons during a removal ..3252
TLID2021 Use specialised bulk transfer equipment (dry) .................................................3254
Assessment Requirements for TLID2021 Use specialised bulk transfer equipment (dry)3258
TLID2022 Conduct weighbridge operations .......................................................................3261
Assessment Requirements for TLID2022 Conduct weighbridge operations ....................3264
TLID2029 Prepare articles for delivery ...............................................................................3267
Assessment Requirements for TLID2029 Prepare articles for delivery ...........................3270
TLID2045 Operate specialised light load shifting equipment ............................................3272
Assessment Requirements for TLID2045 Operate specialised light load shifting equipment3276
TLID2047 Prepare cargo for transfer with slings ...............................................................3279
Assessment Requirements for TLID2047 Prepare cargo for transfer with slings ...........3282
TLID3011 Conduct specialised forklift operations .............................................................3285
Assessment Requirements for TLID3011 Conduct specialised forklift operations..........3288
TLID3014 Load and unload vehicles carrying special loads..............................................3291
Assessment Requirements for TLID3014 Load and unload vehicles carrying special loads3294
TLID3015 Identify and label explosives/dangerous goods .................................................3297
Assessment Requirements for TLID3015 Identify and label explosives/dangerous goods3300
TLID3020 Care for livestock in transit ................................................................................3303
Assessment Requirements for TLID3020 Care for livestock in transit ............................3306
TLID3023 Use specialised liquid bulk gas transfer equipment .........................................3308
Assessment Requirements for TLID3023 Use specialised liquid bulk gas transfer
equipment ........................................................................................................................3312
TLID3024 Use specialised liquid bulk transfer equipment (gravity/pressurised) ...........3315
Assessment Requirements for TLID3024 Use specialised liquid bulk transfer equipment
(gravity/pressurised) .......................................................................................................3319
TLID3027 Prepare for transport of dangerous goods ........................................................3322
Assessment Requirements for TLID3027 Prepare for transport of dangerous goods .....3325
TLID3031 Rig load.................................................................................................................3328
Assessment Requirements for TLID3031 Rig load .............................................................3331
TLID3033 Operate a vehicle-mounted loading crane .........................................................3334
Assessment Requirements for TLID3033 Operate a vehicle-mounted loading crane .....3338
TLID3035 Operate a boom type elevating work platform .................................................3341
Assessment Requirements for TLID3035 Operate a boom type elevating work platform3346
TLID3036 Lift and move load using a mobile crane...........................................................3349
Assessment Requirements for TLID3036 Lift and move load using a mobile crane .......3353
TLID3040 Control lift and movement of crane ...................................................................3356
Assessment Requirements for TLID3040 Control lift and movement of crane ...............3359
TLID3043 Shift loads using gantry equipment ...................................................................3362
Assessment Requirements for TLID3043 Shift loads using gantry equipment ................3366

TLID3044 Shift loads using cranes.......................................................................................3370

Assessment Requirements for TLID3044 Shift loads using cranes ...................................3374
TLID3046 Operate container side lifter ...............................................................................3377
Assessment Requirements for TLID3046 Operate container side lifter ...........................3381
TLID3047 Shift loads using ship mounted crane ................................................................3384
Assessment Requirements for TLID3047 Shift loads using ship mounted crane .............3388
TLID3048 Pack and unpack furniture and effects .............................................................3391
Assessment Requirements for TLID3048 Pack and unpack furniture and effects ..........3394
TLID3049 Pack and wrap furniture and effects for international removals ...................3397
Assessment Requirements for TLID3049 Pack and wrap furniture and effects for
international removals....................................................................................................3400
TLID3050 Coordinate furniture removal ............................................................................3403
Assessment Requirements for TLID3050 Coordinate furniture removal ........................3406
TLID3051 Segregate waste according to waste types .........................................................3409
Assessment Requirements for TLID3051 Segregate waste according to waste types ......3412
TLID4008 Monitor crane operations ...................................................................................3416
Assessment Requirements for TLID4008 Monitor crane operations ................................3419
TLID4009 Direct crane operations .......................................................................................3422
Assessment Requirements for TLID4009 Direct crane operations ...................................3425
TLID4030 Supervise mobile crane operations ....................................................................3428
Assessment Requirements for TLID4030 Supervise mobile crane operations .................3431
TLID4032 Plan and conduct specialised lift ........................................................................3434
Assessment Requirements for TLID4032 Plan and conduct specialised lift .....................3438
TLID4048 Top load a dangerous goods tanker ...................................................................3441
Assessment Requirements for TLID4048 Top load a dangerous goods tanker ...............3445
TLID4049 Bottom load a dangerous goods tanker .............................................................3448
Assessment Requirements for TLID4049 Bottom load a dangerous goods tanker ..........3452
TLID4050 Discharge a dangerous goods tanker .................................................................3456
Assessment Requirements for TLID4050 Discharge a dangerous goods tanker ..............3460
TLIE1003 Participate in basic workplace communication ................................................3463
Assessment Requirements for TLIE1003 Participate in basic workplace communication3466
TLIE1005 Carry out basic workplace calculations .............................................................3469
Assessment Requirements for TLIE1005 Carry out basic workplace calculations .........3472
TLIE2001 Present routine workplace information .............................................................3474
Assessment Requirements for TLIE2001 Present routine workplace information .........3477
TLIE2007 Use communications systems ..............................................................................3479
Assessment Requirements for TLIE2007 Use communications systems ..........................3482
TLIE2008 Process workplace documentation .....................................................................3485
Assessment Requirements for TLIE2008 Process workplace documentation ..................3487
TLIE2029 Conduct workplace information briefings ........................................................3489
Assessment Requirements for TLIE2029 Conduct workplace information briefings .....3492
TLIE2031 Use communication systems for on-track vehicle operations ..........................3494
Assessment Requirements for TLIE2031 Use communication systems for on-track vehicle
operations ........................................................................................................................3497
TLIE2032 Assess removal load .............................................................................................3500
Assessment Requirements for TLIE2032 Assess removal load .........................................3503
TLIE3002 Estimate/calculate mass, area and quantify dimensions ..................................3506
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3002 Estimate/calculate mass, area and quantify
dimensions .......................................................................................................................3509
TLIE3004 Prepare workplace documents ...........................................................................3512
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3004 Prepare workplace documents ........................3515
TLIE3009 Use pilot and escort communication ..................................................................3517
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3009 Use pilot and escort communication ...............3520

TLIE3010 Estimate furniture removal jobs ........................................................................3522

Assessment Requirements for TLIE3010 Estimate furniture removal jobs .....................3525
TLIE3012 Consolidate manifest documentation .................................................................3528
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3012 Consolidate manifest documentation .............3531
TLIE3015 Undertake rigger/dogger and driver communication ......................................3533
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3015 Undertake rigger/dogger and driver
communication ................................................................................................................3536
TLIE3016 Estimate/calculate load shifting requirements for a mobile crane ..................3539
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3016 Estimate/calculate load shifting requirements for
a mobile crane .................................................................................................................3542
TLIE3018 Maintain freight records .....................................................................................3545
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3018 Maintain freight records..................................3548
TLIE3021 Work and communicate effectively with others................................................3550
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3021 Work and communicate effectively with others3554
TLIE3022 Complete workplace documents.........................................................................3557
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3022 Complete workplace documents .....................3560
TLIE3023 Use electronic communication systems ..............................................................3562
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3023 Use electronic communication systems ..........3565
TLIE3026 Carry out advanced calculations in the transport and logistics industry .......3568
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3026 Carry out advanced calculations in the transport
and logistics industry ......................................................................................................3571
TLIE3028 Complete a work diary in the road transport industry....................................3574
Assessment Requirements for TLIE3028 Complete a work diary in the road transport
industry ............................................................................................................................3577
TLIE4006 Collect, analyse and present workplace data and information .......................3579
Assessment Requirements for TLIE4006 Collect, analyse and present workplace data and
information ......................................................................................................................3582
TLIE4013 Apply workplace statistics ..................................................................................3584
Assessment Requirements for TLIE4013 Apply workplace statistics ...............................3587
TLIE4025 Prepare and process transport documentation for dangerous goods .............3590
Assessment Requirements for TLIE4025 Prepare and process transport documentation
for dangerous goods ........................................................................................................3593
TLIE4030 Prepare rail safety reports ..................................................................................3596
Assessment Requirements for TLIE4030 Prepare rail safety reports...............................3599
TLIE4032 Use internal communication systems for rail industry regulatory compliance3602
Assessment Requirements for TLIE4032 Use internal communication systems for rail
industry regulatory compliance .....................................................................................3605
TLIE4033 Use communications systems to control tram/light rail operations ................3607
Assessment Requirements for TLIE4033 Use communications systems to control
tram/light rail operations ...............................................................................................3611
TLIE5020 Apply knowledge of freight forwarding documentation and permits ............3614
Assessment Requirements for TLIE5020 Apply knowledge of freight forwarding
documentation and permits ...........................................................................................3616
TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility legislation, regulations and workplace procedures3620
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility legislation,
regulations and workplace procedures .........................................................................3623
TLIF0002 Administer chain of responsibility policies and procedures ............................3625
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0002 Administer chain of responsibility policies and
procedures .......................................................................................................................3629
TLIF0003 Develop and implement policies and procedures to ensure chain of
responsibility compliance ...............................................................................................3632
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0003 Develop and implement policies and procedures
to ensure chain of responsibility compliance ................................................................3635

TLIF0004 Work effectively in a train-driving environment ..............................................3637

Assessment Requirements for TLIF0004 Work effectively in a train-driving environment3641
TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management system ..........................................................3644
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management system .......3649
TLIF0006 Administer a fatigue risk management system .................................................3652
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0006 Administer a fatigue risk management system3657
TLIF0007 Manage a fatigue risk management system .......................................................3661
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0007 Manage a fatigue risk management system ...3666
TLIF0075 Demonstrate awareness of interacting with other road users..........................3669
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0075 Demonstrate awareness of interacting with other
road users ........................................................................................................................3672
TLIF0076 Demonstrate awareness of factors to reduce road harm ..................................3675
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0076 Demonstrate awareness of factors to reduce road
harm .................................................................................................................................3677
TLIF0077 Demonstrate knowledge of risk factors and consequences in interacting with
other road users ..............................................................................................................3680
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0077 Demonstrate knowledge of risk factors and
consequences in interacting with other road users ......................................................3683
TLIF0078 Recognise motor vehicle road crash risks and post-crash actions...................3686
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0078 Recognise motor vehicle road crash risks and
post-crash actions............................................................................................................3688
TLIF0079 Select a safe vehicle ..............................................................................................3691
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0079 Select a safe vehicle...........................................3694
TLIF0098 Apply personal and equipment lockouts for rolling stock ...............................3697
Assessment Requirements for TLIF0098 Apply personal and equipment lockouts for
rolling stock .....................................................................................................................3700
TLIF1001 Follow work health and safety procedures ........................................................3702
Assessment Requirements for TLIF1001 Follow work health and safety procedures ....3705
TLIF1002 Conduct housekeeping activities.........................................................................3708
Assessment Requirements for TLIF1002 Conduct housekeeping activities .....................3711
TLIF1009 Conduct cleaning operations in enclosed spaces ...............................................3713
Assessment Requirements for TLIF1009 Conduct cleaning operations in enclosed spaces3716
TLIF2006 Apply accident-emergency procedures ..............................................................3719
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2006 Apply accident-emergency procedures...........3722
TLIF2010 Apply fatigue management strategies ................................................................3725
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2010 Apply fatigue management strategies .............3727
TLIF2012 Apply safe procedures when handling/transporting dangerous goods or
explosives .........................................................................................................................3730
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2012 Apply safe procedures when
handling/transporting dangerous goods or explosives ................................................3733
TLIF2018 Operate firefighting equipment ..........................................................................3736
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2018 Operate firefighting equipment ......................3738
TLIF2019 Ensure a safe on-board passenger and working environment.........................3741
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2019 Ensure a safe on-board passenger and working
environment.....................................................................................................................3744
TLIF2062 Apply awareness of safeworking rules and regulations ...................................3747
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2062 Apply awareness of safeworking rules and
regulations .......................................................................................................................3750
TLIF2068 Work at height in the stevedoring industry .......................................................3752
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2068 Work at height in the stevedoring industry ...3755
TLIF2072 Comply with safety and security procedures ....................................................3759
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2072 Comply with safety and security procedures .3762
TLIF2080 Safely access the rail corridor .............................................................................3765

Assessment Requirements for TLIF2080 Safely access the rail corridor .........................3768
TLIF2081 Perform lookout duties ........................................................................................3770
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2081 Perform lookout duties ....................................3773
TLIF2082 Perform handsignaller duties .............................................................................3775
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2082 Perform handsignaller duties ..........................3778
TLIF2097 Use audible track warning devices .....................................................................3781
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2097 Use audible track warning devices ..................3784
TLIF2106 Respond to emergencies and abnormal situations when driving medium/heavy
on-track vehicles .............................................................................................................3786
Assessment Requirements for TLIF2106 Respond to emergencies and abnormal situations
when driving medium/heavy on-track vehicles ............................................................3789
TLIF3003 Implement and monitor work health and safety procedures ...........................3792
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3003 Implement and monitor work health and safety
procedures .......................................................................................................................3795
TLIF3004 Organise work health and safety procedures in the workplace.......................3798
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3004 Organise work health and safety procedures in
the workplace ..................................................................................................................3801
TLIF3013 Coordinate breakdowns and emergencies .........................................................3804
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3013 Coordinate breakdowns and emergencies......3807
TLIF3014 Operate as an off-sider in the waste management industry .............................3810
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3014 Operate as an off-sider in the waste management
industry ............................................................................................................................3813
TLIF3015 Work safely as a non-electrical licensed worker near electrical assets ...........3816
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3015 Work safely as a non-electrical licensed worker
near electrical assets .......................................................................................................3820
TLIF3022 Implement/monitor procedures when warehousing/storing dangerous
goods/hazardous substances...........................................................................................3823
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3022 Implement/monitor procedures when
warehousing/storing dangerous goods/hazardous substances ....................................3826
TLIF3058 Apply safeworking rules and regulations to rail functions ..............................3829
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3058 Apply safeworking rules and regulations to rail
functions...........................................................................................................................3832
TLIF3060 Control traffic as a pilot vehicle operator..........................................................3834
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3060 Control traffic as a pilot vehicle operator ......3837
TLIF3063 Administer the implementation of fatigue management strategies .................3840
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3063 Administer the implementation of fatigue
management strategies ...................................................................................................3844
TLIF3083 Conduct track protection assessment.................................................................3847
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3083 Conduct track protection assessment .............3850
TLIF3084 Follow mobile crane safety procedures ..............................................................3853
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3084 Follow mobile crane safety procedures ..........3856
TLIF3085 Apply local incident response procedures .........................................................3859
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3085 Apply local incident response procedures ......3862
TLIF3087 Follow work health and safety, and environmental procedures in the rail
industry ............................................................................................................................3865
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3087 Follow work health and safety, and
environmental procedures in the rail industry ............................................................3868
TLIF3089 Implement fatigue management policies and procedures for rail infrastructure3871
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3089 Implement fatigue management policies and
procedures for rail infrastructure .................................................................................3874
TLIF3091 Apply awareness of dangerous goods and hazardous materials requirements3877
Assessment Requirements for TLIF3091 Apply awareness of dangerous goods and
hazardous materials requirements ................................................................................3880

TLIF3096 Carry out emergency response to a dangerous goods incident ........................3882

Assessment Requirements for TLIF3096 Carry out emergency response to a dangerous
goods incident ..................................................................................................................3886
TLIF4007 Implement and coordinate accident-emergency procedures ...........................3889
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4007 Implement and coordinate accident-emergency
procedures .......................................................................................................................3892
TLIF4014 Develop and maintain a safe workplace.............................................................3894
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4014 Develop and maintain a safe workplace .........3899
TLIF4061 Respond to electric tram-driving emergencies and abnormal situations .......3902
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4061 Respond to electric tram-driving emergencies
and abnormal situations .................................................................................................3906
TLIF4064 Manage fatigue management policy and procedures .......................................3909
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4064 Manage fatigue management policy and
procedures .......................................................................................................................3914
TLIF4065 Ensure compliance with Australian Dangerous Goods Code ..........................3917
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4065 Ensure compliance with Australian Dangerous
Goods Code......................................................................................................................3920
TLIF4066 Implement and supervise transport regulations compliance systems .............3922
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4066 Implement and supervise transport regulations
compliance systems .........................................................................................................3925
TLIF4069 Monitor and respond to traffic flow ...................................................................3928
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4069 Monitor and respond to traffic flow ...............3931
TLIF4070 Operate fire and life safety system within a tunnel...........................................3933
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4070 Operate fire and life safety system within a
tunnel ...............................................................................................................................3936
TLIF4086 Control and coordinate incident responses .......................................................3939
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4086 Control and coordinate incident responses ....3942
TLIF4088 Implement and coordinate rail safety and WHS risk-control strategies ........3944
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4088 Implement and coordinate rail safety and WHS
risk-control strategies .....................................................................................................3948
TLIF4090 Implement safeworking rules and regulations for network control activities 3950
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4090 Implement safeworking rules and regulations for
network control activities ...............................................................................................3953
TLIF4095 Apply work health and safety requirements for driving operations ...............3956
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4095 Apply work health and safety requirements for
driving operations ...........................................................................................................3960
TLIF4099 Develop an application for, or variation to, rail accreditation ........................3963
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4099 Develop an application for, or variation to, rail
accreditation ....................................................................................................................3966
TLIF4100 Identify and meet rail safety regulatory compliance requirements ................3968
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4100 Identify and meet rail safety regulatory
compliance requirements ...............................................................................................3972
TLIF4101 Implement and maintain a rail safety culture ...................................................3975
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4101 Implement and maintain a rail safety culture3978
TLIF4102 Implement and maintain safety management plans .........................................3981
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4102 Implement and maintain safety management
plans .................................................................................................................................3984
TLIF4103 Implement fitness for work procedures .............................................................3986
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4103 Implement fitness for work procedures .........3989
TLIF4104 Manage change in the rail safety environment .................................................3992
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4104 Manage change in the rail safety environment3996
TLIF4105 Manage rail safety compliance ...........................................................................3998
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4105 Manage rail safety compliance ........................4002

TLIF4107 Respond to notifiable rail safety occurrences ....................................................4005

Assessment Requirements for TLIF4107 Respond to notifiable rail safety occurrences 4009
TLIF4108 Implement traffic management plan in the transport industry ......................4011
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4108 Implement traffic management plan in the
transport industry ...........................................................................................................4015
TLIF4109 Communicate effectively to coordinate incident response procedures ...........4018
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4109 Communicate effectively to coordinate incident
response procedures .......................................................................................................4022
TLIF4110 Respond to abnormal situations and emergencies when driving a train ........4024
Assessment Requirements for TLIF4110 Respond to abnormal situations and emergencies
when driving a train .......................................................................................................4029
TLIF5017 Investigate rail safety incidents...........................................................................4031
Assessment Requirements for TLIF5017 Investigate rail safety incidents .......................4034
TLIF5020 Manage emergencies ............................................................................................4036
Assessment Requirements for TLIF5020 Manage emergencies ........................................4039
TLIF5021 Apply rail safeworking rules and procedures ...................................................4042
Assessment Requirements for TLIF5021 Apply rail safeworking rules and procedures 4045
TLIF5022 Develop and manage fitness for work policy and procedures .........................4047
Assessment Requirements for TLIF5022 Develop and manage fitness for work policy and
procedures .......................................................................................................................4052
TLIF5023 Undertake a derailment investigation ................................................................4055
Assessment Requirements for TLIF5023 Undertake a derailment investigation ............4059
TLIF5024 Develop plans for emergency response and recovery of rail networks ...........4062
Assessment Requirements for TLIF5024 Develop plans for emergency response and
recovery of rail networks ...............................................................................................4066
TLIG1001 Work effectively with others ..............................................................................4069
Assessment Requirements for TLIG1001 Work effectively with others ...........................4072
TLIG2007 Work in a socially diverse environment ............................................................4074
Assessment Requirements for TLIG2007 Work in a socially diverse environment ........4077
TLIG3002 Lead a work team or group ................................................................................4079
Assessment Requirements for TLIG3002 Lead a work team or group ............................4082
TLIG3003 Apply positive behaviours in the workplace .....................................................4084
Assessment Requirements for TLIG3003 Apply positive behaviours in the workplace .4087
TLIG4005 Organise transport workload .............................................................................4089
Assessment Requirements for TLIG4005 Organise transport workload .........................4092
TLIG4006 Facilitate work teams ..........................................................................................4095
Assessment Requirements for TLIG4006 Facilitate work teams ......................................4098
TLIH2001 Interpret road maps and navigate pre-determined routes ..............................4101
Assessment Requirements for TLIH2001 Interpret road maps and navigate
pre-determined routes ....................................................................................................4104
TLIH2003 Prioritise courier/delivery operations................................................................4107
Assessment Requirements for TLIH2003 Prioritise courier/delivery operations ............4110
TLIH3002 Plan and navigate routes ....................................................................................4112
Assessment Requirements for TLIH3002 Plan and navigate routes .................................4115
TLIH3004 Identify major roads, services and attractions .................................................4118
Assessment Requirements for TLIH3004 Identify major roads, services and attractions4121
TLII0001 Market international freight forwarding services .............................................4123
Assessment Requirements for TLII0001 Market international freight forwarding services4126
TLII0002 Provide freight forwarding information and customer service ........................4129
Assessment Requirements for TLII0002 Provide freight forwarding information and
customer service ..............................................................................................................4132
TLII1002 Apply customer service skills ...............................................................................4135
Assessment Requirements for TLII1002 Apply customer service skills ...........................4137

TLII2015 Operate the on-train buffet car ...........................................................................4139

Assessment Requirements for TLII2015 Operate the on-train buffet car ........................4142
TLII2019 Provide taxi customer service ..............................................................................4145
Assessment Requirements for TLII2019 Provide taxi customer service...........................4149
TLII2020 Provide assistance to customers with specific needs ..........................................4152
Assessment Requirements for TLII2020 Provide assistance to customers with specific
needs .................................................................................................................................4155
TLII3003 Provide customer service in transport vehicles/vessels .....................................4157
Assessment Requirements for TLII3003 Provide customer service in transport
vehicles/vessels.................................................................................................................4160
TLII3004 Manage camping procedures for coaches and buses .........................................4162
Assessment Requirements for TLII3004 Manage camping procedures for coaches and
buses .................................................................................................................................4165
TLII3009 Provide on-board services to customers .............................................................4168
Assessment Requirements for TLII3009 Provide on-board services to customers ..........4171
TLII3010 Provide travel information to customers ............................................................4174
Assessment Requirements for TLII3010 Provide travel information to customers.........4177
TLII3020 Provide assistance to customers ..........................................................................4179
Assessment Requirements for TLII3020 Provide assistance to customers .......................4183
TLII3022 Provide customer service in rail operations .......................................................4185
Assessment Requirements for TLII3022 Provide customer service in rail operations ....4188
TLII4001 Coordinate quality customer service...................................................................4191
Assessment Requirements for TLII4001 Coordinate quality customer service ...............4194
TLII4005 Market services and products to clients .............................................................4196
Assessment Requirements for TLII4005 Market services and products to clients ..........4199
TLII4022 Identify and meet customer requirements..........................................................4201
Assessment Requirements for TLII4022 Identify and meet customer requirements ......4204
TLII5018 Manage customer service .....................................................................................4206
Assessment Requirements for TLII5018 Manage customer service..................................4209
TLIJ2001 Apply quality procedures ....................................................................................4211
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ2001 Apply quality procedures .................................4214
TLIJ2003 Apply grain protection measures ........................................................................4216
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ2003 Apply grain protection measures ....................4219
TLIJ2004 Implement grain monitoring measures ..............................................................4222
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ2004 Implement grain monitoring measures ...........4225
TLIJ3002 Apply quality systems ..........................................................................................4228
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ3002 Apply quality systems .......................................4230
TLIJ3005 Sample, inspect and test products to specifications...........................................4232
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ3005 Sample, inspect and test products to
specifications ...................................................................................................................4235
TLIJ3006 Implement grain protection procedures.............................................................4238
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ3006 Implement grain protection procedures .........4242
TLIJ4008 Implement and monitor inbound quality assurance systems ...........................4245
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ4008 Implement and monitor inbound quality
assurance systems ...........................................................................................................4248
TLIJ4009 Implement and monitor quality assurance systems ..........................................4250
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ4009 Implement and monitor quality assurance
systems .............................................................................................................................4253
TLIJ4010 Implement quality systems and procedures in a dangerous goods workplace4255
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ4010 Implement quality systems and procedures in a
dangerous goods workplace ...........................................................................................4259
TLIJ5007 Conduct internal quality audits ..........................................................................4261
Assessment Requirements for TLIJ5007 Conduct internal quality audits .......................4264

TLIK2003 Apply keyboard skills .........................................................................................4267

Assessment Requirements for TLIK2003 Apply keyboard skills ......................................4269
TLIK2007 Perform electronic data interchange to transmit shipping documentation ...4271
Assessment Requirements for TLIK2007 Perform electronic data interchange to transmit
shipping documentation .................................................................................................4274
TLIK2010 Use infotechnology devices in the workplace ....................................................4276
Assessment Requirements for TLIK2010 Use infotechnology devices in the workplace 4279
TLIK5006 Evaluate software requirements and hardware enhancements ......................4281
Assessment Requirements for TLIK5006 Evaluate software requirements and hardware
enhancements ..................................................................................................................4284
TLIL1001 Complete workplace orientation/induction procedures ...................................4287
Assessment Requirements for TLIL1001 Complete workplace orientation/induction
procedures .......................................................................................................................4291
TLIL2008 Complete routine administrative tasks ..............................................................4294
Assessment Requirements for TLIL2008 Complete routine administrative tasks ..........4297
TLIL2031 Monitor and process attendance records ..........................................................4299
Assessment Requirements for TLIL2031 Monitor and process attendance records .......4301
TLIL2041 Monitor and record rolling stock locations .......................................................4304
Assessment Requirements for TLIL2041 Monitor and record rolling stock locations....4307
TLIL2046 Handle customer luggage/property ....................................................................4310
Assessment Requirements for TLIL2046 Handle customer luggage/property ................4313
TLIL2048 Prepare for train departure ................................................................................4316
Assessment Requirements for TLIL2048 Prepare for train departure ............................4320
TLIL2060 Complete induction to the transport industry ..................................................4323
Assessment Requirements for TLIL2060 Complete induction to the transport industry4326
TLIL3002 Undertake employee payroll activities ...............................................................4328
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3002 Undertake employee payroll activities ...........4331
TLIL3003 Conduct induction process ..................................................................................4333
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3003 Conduct induction process ..............................4336
TLIL3035 Allocate motive power .........................................................................................4339
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3035 Allocate motive power......................................4342
TLIL3039 Assist with train operations ................................................................................4345
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3039 Assist with train operations .............................4348
TLIL3052 Plan urban passenger train consists ...................................................................4351
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3052 Plan urban passenger train consists ...............4354
TLIL3065 Implement a track occupancy authority............................................................4357
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3065 Implement a track occupancy authority ........4361
TLIL3071 Control and coordinate local rail traffic movement .........................................4363
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3071 Control and coordinate local rail traffic
movement.........................................................................................................................4367
TLIL3072 Operate signal panel or equipment ....................................................................4370
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3072 Operate signal panel or equipment ................4374
TLIL3082 Implement absolute signal blocking ...................................................................4377
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3082 Implement absolute signal blocking ...............4380
TLIL3083 Implement a track work authority and manage rail traffic through worksites4383
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3083 Implement a track work authority and manage
rail traffic through worksites .........................................................................................4387
TLIL3084 Implement a local possession authority .............................................................4389
Assessment Requirements for TLIL3084 Implement a local possession authority..........4393
TLIL4005 Apply conflict/grievance resolution strategies ..................................................4396
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4005 Apply conflict/grievance resolution strategies4399
TLIL4009 Manage personal work priorities and professional development ...................4401

Assessment Requirements for TLIL4009 Manage personal work priorities and

professional development ...............................................................................................4404
TLIL4010 Assess and confirm customer transport requirements.....................................4407
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4010 Assess and confirm customer transport
requirements ...................................................................................................................4410
TLIL4021 Coordinate the erection and dismantling of temporary storage facilities ......4412
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4021 Coordinate the erection and dismantling of
temporary storage facilities............................................................................................4415
TLIL4030 Control a furniture warehouse ...........................................................................4418
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4030 Control a furniture warehouse .......................4422
TLIL4032 Implement equal employment equity strategies ...............................................4425
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4032 Implement equal employment equity strategies4428
TLIL4033 Promote effective workplace practice ................................................................4431
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4033 Promote effective workplace practice ............4434
TLIL4034 Arrange alternative passenger transport ..........................................................4437
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4034 Arrange alternative passenger transport .......4440
TLIL4036 Develop rosters.....................................................................................................4443
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4036 Develop rosters .................................................4446
TLIL4037 Apply and amend rosters ....................................................................................4449
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4037 Apply and amend rosters.................................4452
TLIL4038 Organise marshalling and shunting operations ................................................4455
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4038 Organise marshalling and shunting operations4458
TLIL4050 Allocate rolling stock ...........................................................................................4461
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4050 Allocate rolling stock........................................4464
TLIL4058 Plan a career in logistics ......................................................................................4467
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4058 Plan a career in logistics ..................................4470
TLIL4059 Implement asset management systems ..............................................................4472
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4059 Implement asset management systems ...........4475
TLIL4069 Plan and coordinate protection for multiple worksites within limits of a work
on track authority ...........................................................................................................4477
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4069 Plan and coordinate protection for multiple
worksites within limits of a work on track authority ..................................................4480
TLIL4070 Work effectively in the transport and logistics industry ..................................4483
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4070 Work effectively in the transport and logistics
industry ............................................................................................................................4486
TLIL4073 Apply asset management system ........................................................................4489
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4073 Apply asset management system.....................4492
TLIL4074 Control and coordinate rail traffic movement ..................................................4495
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4074 Control and coordinate rail traffic movement4499
TLIL4075 Implement and amend daily train plan .............................................................4502
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4075 Implement and amend daily train plan ..........4505
TLIL4076 Coordinate resources ...........................................................................................4508
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4076 Coordinate resources .......................................4511
TLIL4077 Develop out-of-course rail traffic plans and schedules.....................................4513
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4077 Develop out-of-course rail traffic plans and
schedules ..........................................................................................................................4516
TLIL4078 Coordinate fleet control logistics ........................................................................4519
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4078 Coordinate fleet control logistics ....................4522
TLIL4079 Manage the recovery process..............................................................................4525
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4079 Manage the recovery process ..........................4529
TLIL4081 Ensure competency of rail safety workers.........................................................4532
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4081 Ensure competency of rail safety workers .....4535
TLIL4082 Coordinate rail interface agreements ................................................................4538

Assessment Requirements for TLIL4082 Coordinate rail interface agreements .............4541

TLIL4083 Assist with train operations ................................................................................4543
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4083 Assist with train operations .............................4546
TLIL4084 Control daily tram/light rail operations ............................................................4549
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4084 Control daily tram/light rail operations .........4552
TLIL4085 Coordinate tram/light rail traffic movement ....................................................4555
Assessment Requirements for TLIL4085 Coordinate tram/light rail traffic movement .4558
TLIL5019 Implement and monitor transport logistics .......................................................4561
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5019 Implement and monitor transport logistics ...4564
TLIL5020 Develop and maintain operational procedures for transport and logistics
enterprises .......................................................................................................................4567
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5020 Develop and maintain operational procedures for
transport and logistics enterprises ................................................................................4570
TLIL5026 Manage export logistics .......................................................................................4573
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5026 Manage export logistics ...................................4577
TLIL5055 Manage a supply chain ........................................................................................4580
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5055 Manage a supply chain ....................................4583
TLIL5057 Maintain, monitor and improve transport operations systems .......................4586
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5057 Maintain, monitor and improve transport
operations systems ..........................................................................................................4589
TLIL5062 Apply knowledge of logistics, storage and distribution to international freight
forwarding .......................................................................................................................4591
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5062 Apply knowledge of logistics, storage and
distribution to international freight forwarding ..........................................................4594
TLIL5063 Review contracts, insurance, risk and liability in an international freight
forwarding context..........................................................................................................4597
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5063 Review contracts, insurance, risk and liability in
an international freight forwarding context .................................................................4601
TLIL5064 Manage international special freight transport services including dangerous
goods and special cargo ..................................................................................................4604
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5064 Manage international special freight transport
services including dangerous goods and special cargo ................................................4609
TLIL5065 Roster train crews................................................................................................4612
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5065 Roster train crews ............................................4615
TLIL5066 Apply rail resource management principles .....................................................4618
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5066 Apply rail resource management principles ..4623
TLIL5067 Develop a passenger transport plan ...................................................................4626
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5067 Develop a passenger transport plan ...............4629
TLIL5068 Implement a passenger transport plan ..............................................................4631
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5068 Implement a passenger transport plan ..........4634
TLIL5069 Manage a rail yard or terminal ..........................................................................4637
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5069 Manage a rail yard or terminal.......................4641
TLIL5070 Manage rail freight operations ...........................................................................4644
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5070 Manage rail freight operations .......................4647
TLIL5071 Manage rail passenger operations......................................................................4650
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5071 Manage rail passenger operations ..................4653
TLIL5072 Manage rail yard operations ..............................................................................4656
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5072 Manage rail yard operations ...........................4660
TLIL5073 Manage train crewing and rostering..................................................................4663
Assessment Requirements for TLIL5073 Manage train crewing and rostering ..............4666
TLILIC0001 Licence to transport dangerous goods by road ............................................4669
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC0001 Licence to transport dangerous goods by road4674

TLILIC0012 Licence to operate a vehicle loading crane (capacity 10 metre tonnes and
above) ...............................................................................................................................4679
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC0012 Licence to operate a vehicle loading crane
(capacity 10 metre tonnes and above) ...........................................................................4685
TLILIC2001 Licence to operate a forklift truck .................................................................4692
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC2001 Licence to operate a forklift truck..............4697
TLILIC2002 Licence to operate an order picking forklift truck.......................................4703
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC2002 Licence to operate an order picking forklift
truck .................................................................................................................................4708
TLILIC2005 Licence to operate a boom-type elevating work platform (boom length 11
metres or more) ...............................................................................................................4713
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC2005 Licence to operate a boom-type elevating work
platform (boom length 11 metres or more) ..................................................................4718
TLILIC2014 Licence to drive a light rigid vehicle ..............................................................4724
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC2014 Licence to drive a light rigid vehicle ..........4727
TLILIC2015 Licence to drive a medium rigid vehicle........................................................4730
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC2015 Licence to drive a medium rigid vehicle ....4733
TLILIC2016 Licence to drive a heavy rigid vehicle............................................................4736
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC2016 Licence to drive a heavy rigid vehicle ........4740
TLILIC3003 Licence to operate a bridge and gantry crane ..............................................4743
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3003 Licence to operate a bridge and gantry crane4748
TLILIC3004 Licence to operate a derrick crane ................................................................4754
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3004 Licence to operate a derrick crane .............4759
TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a non-slewing mobile crane (greater than 3 tonnes
capacity) ...........................................................................................................................4765
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a non-slewing mobile crane
(greater than 3 tonnes capacity) ....................................................................................4771
TLILIC3007 Licence to operate a portal boom crane ........................................................4778
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3007 Licence to operate a portal boom crane.....4783
TLILIC3008 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (up to 20 tonnes) ......................4789
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3008 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (up
to 20 tonnes).....................................................................................................................4795
TLILIC3017 Licence to drive a heavy combination vehicle ..............................................4802
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3017 Licence to drive a heavy combination vehicle4805
TLILIC3018 Licence to drive a multi-combination vehicle ...............................................4809
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3018 Licence to drive a multi-combination vehicle4812
TLILIC3019 Licence to operate a reach stacker (greater than 3 tonnes capacity)..........4816
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC3019 Licence to operate a reach stacker (greater
than 3 tonnes capacity) ...................................................................................................4822
TLILIC4009 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (up to 60 tonnes) ......................4829
to 60 tonnes).....................................................................................................................4835
TLILIC4010 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (up to 100 tonnes) ....................4842
to 100 tonnes)...................................................................................................................4848
TLILIC4011 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (over 100 tonnes)......................4855
Assessment Requirements for TLILIC4011 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane
(over 100 tonnes) .............................................................................................................4861
TLIM0001 Conduct learner driver training........................................................................4868
Assessment Requirements for TLIM0001 Conduct learner driver training ....................4872
TLIM0002 Conduct heavy vehicle learner driver training ................................................4877
Assessment Requirements for TLIM0002 Conduct heavy vehicle learner driver training4881
TLIM0003 Conduct learner rider training..........................................................................4885

Assessment Requirements for TLIM0003 Conduct learner rider training ......................4889

TLIM4001 Develop safe car driving behaviours in others .................................................4893
Assessment Requirements for TLIM4001 Develop safe car driving behaviours in others4897
TLIM4002 Develop safe heavy vehicle driving behaviours in others ................................4902
Assessment Requirements for TLIM4002 Develop safe heavy vehicle driving behaviours in
others................................................................................................................................4906
TLIM4003 Develop safe motorcycle riding behaviours in others ......................................4911
Assessment Requirements for TLIM4003 Develop safe motorcycle riding behaviours in
others................................................................................................................................4915
TLIM4004 Mentor individuals or small groups ..................................................................4920
Assessment Requirements for TLIM4004 Mentor individuals or small groups ..............4923
TLIO1002 Follow security procedures when working with passengers and personnel ..4926
Assessment Requirements for TLIO1002 Follow security procedures when working with
passengers and personnel ...............................................................................................4930
TLIO2003 Undertake loading and unloading in a designated secured environment ......4933
Assessment Requirements for TLIO2003 Undertake loading and unloading in a
designated secured environment ...................................................................................4936
TLIO2011 Provide revenue protection measures ...............................................................4938
Assessment Requirements for TLIO2011 Provide revenue protection measures ............4941
TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when working with goods and cargo ..................4944
Assessment Requirements for TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when working with
goods and cargo...............................................................................................................4948
TLIO3004 Conduct control procedures for transferring
explosives/dangerous/hazardous/high risk goods.........................................................4951
Assessment Requirements for TLIO3004 Conduct control procedures for transferring
explosives/dangerous/hazardous/high risk goods.........................................................4954
TLIO3007 Undertake emergency response action to a security threat .............................4957
Assessment Requirements for TLIO3007 Undertake emergency response action to a
security threat .................................................................................................................4960
TLIO3012 Manage disruptive and/or unlawful behaviour ................................................4962
Assessment Requirements for TLIO3012 Manage disruptive and/or unlawful behaviour4965
TLIO3015 Maintain security of railway property and revenue ........................................4968
Assessment Requirements for TLIO3015 Maintain security of railway property and
revenue .............................................................................................................................4971
TLIO3016 Apply and monitor workplace security procedures .........................................4974
Assessment Requirements for TLIO3016 Apply and monitor workplace security
procedures .......................................................................................................................4977
TLIO5005 Plan and manage security procedures for the enterprise ................................4980
Assessment Requirements for TLIO5005 Plan and manage security procedures for the
enterprise .........................................................................................................................4983
TLIO5006 Plan and manage security procedures for transferring and transporting
dangerous goods ..............................................................................................................4986
Assessment Requirements for TLIO5006 Plan and manage security procedures for
transferring and transporting dangerous goods ..........................................................4990
TLIO5017 Manage security of storage facilities..................................................................4994
Assessment Requirements for TLIO5017 Manage security of storage facilities ..............4997
TLIO5018 Manage compliance with customs excise ..........................................................5000
Assessment Requirements for TLIO5018 Manage compliance with customs excise .......5003
TLIO5020 Advise on and manage security and safety in international freight transport5006
Assessment Requirements for TLIO5020 Advise on and manage security and safety in
international freight transport ......................................................................................5010
TLIP2014 Capture records into a records keeping system ................................................5013
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2014 Capture records into a records keeping system5016

TLIP2017 Maintain control of records ................................................................................5018

Assessment Requirements for TLIP2017 Maintain control of records .............................5021
TLIP2018 Provide information from and about records ...................................................5024
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2018 Provide information from and about records 5027
TLIP2024 Conduct financial transactions ...........................................................................5030
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2024 Conduct financial transactions........................5033
TLIP2029 Prepare and process financial documents .........................................................5035
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2029 Prepare and process financial documents ......5038
TLIP2030 Conduct courier/delivery cash transactions ......................................................5040
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2030 Conduct courier/delivery cash transactions ...5043
TLIP2032 Maintain petty cash account ...............................................................................5046
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2032 Maintain petty cash account ............................5049
TLIP2033 Sell products and services ...................................................................................5051
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2033 Sell products and services ................................5054
TLIP2037 Carry out financial transactions and maintain records ...................................5057
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2037 Carry out financial transactions and maintain
records .............................................................................................................................5060
TLIP2038 Conduct, balance and secure financial transactions .........................................5063
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2038 Conduct, balance and secure financial
transactions .....................................................................................................................5067
TLIP2039 Ensure the confidentiality, privacy and security of customer information ....5069
Assessment Requirements for TLIP2039 Ensure the confidentiality, privacy and security
of customer information .................................................................................................5072
TLIP3015 Document a records system ................................................................................5074
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3015 Document a records system .............................5078
TLIP3016 Identify and classify records to be captured......................................................5081
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3016 Identify and classify records to be captured ..5084
TLIP3019 Provide records retrieval service ........................................................................5087
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3019 Provide records retrieval service ....................5090
TLIP3020 Sentence records ..................................................................................................5093
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3020 Sentence records ...............................................5096
TLIP3021 Undertake disposal program ..............................................................................5099
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3021 Undertake disposal program ...........................5102
TLIP3022 Undertake movement of records ........................................................................5104
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3022 Undertake movement of records .....................5107
TLIP3023 Destroy records ....................................................................................................5110
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3023 Destroy records .................................................5113
TLIP3026 Maintain financial records in a small business .................................................5116
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3026 Maintain financial records in a small business5119
TLIP3027 Organise freight invoicing and payment............................................................5122
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3027 Organise freight invoicing and payment ........5125
TLIP3034 Advise on and construct fares for customers ....................................................5128
Assessment Requirements for TLIP3034 Advise on and construct fares for customers .5131
TLIP4001 Develop plans to meet customer and organisation needs .................................5134
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4001 Develop plans to meet customer and organisation
needs .................................................................................................................................5137
TLIP4002 Facilitate and capitalise on change in the workplace........................................5140
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4002 Facilitate and capitalise on change in the
workplace.........................................................................................................................5143
TLIP4003 Implement, maintain and evaluate dangerous goods transport procedures
within the workplace ......................................................................................................5145
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4003 Implement, maintain and evaluate dangerous
goods transport procedures within the workplace ......................................................5149

TLIP4005 Manage workplace information .........................................................................5152

Assessment Requirements for TLIP4005 Manage workplace information ......................5155
TLIP4010 Assess lift requirements and provide quotation ................................................5157
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4010 Assess lift requirements and provide quotation5161
TLIP4013 Implement and monitor logistics planning and processes................................5164
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4013 Implement and monitor logistics planning and
processes ..........................................................................................................................5167
TLIP4028 Administer international trading accounts .......................................................5170
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4028 Administer international trading accounts ....5173
TLIP4031 Maintain customer credit accounts and services ..............................................5176
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4031 Maintain customer credit accounts and services5179
TLIP4038 Monitor a supply chain operation ......................................................................5182
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4038 Monitor a supply chain operation ...................5186
TLIP4039 Monitor transport operations .............................................................................5189
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4039 Monitor transport operations..........................5192
TLIP4040 Monitor warehouse operations ...........................................................................5195
Assessment Requirements for TLIP4040 Monitor warehouse operations........................5199
TLIP5004 Develop a transport and logistics business plan ................................................5202
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5004 Develop a transport and logistics business plan5206
TLIP5006 Establish international distribution networks...................................................5209
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5006 Establish international distribution networks5212
TLIP5007 Contribute to the development of a workplace learning environment ...........5215
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5007 Contribute to the development of a workplace
learning environment .....................................................................................................5218
TLIP5008 Manage a transport and logistics business unit ................................................5221
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5008 Manage a transport and logistics business unit5225
TLIP5011 Develop and evaluate strategies for transport and logistics enterprises .........5228
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5011 Develop and evaluate strategies for transport and
logistics enterprises .........................................................................................................5232
TLIP5025 Set and achieve budgets.......................................................................................5235
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5025 Set and achieve budgets ...................................5238
TLIP5035 Manage budgets and financial plans ..................................................................5241
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5035 Manage budgets and financial plans ..............5244
TLIP5036 Manage assets .......................................................................................................5246
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5036 Manage assets ...................................................5249
TLIP5037 Develop workplace policy and procedures ........................................................5251
Assessment Requirements for TLIP5037 Develop workplace policy and procedures .....5254
TLIPC1001 Demonstrate care and apply safe practices at work ......................................5256
Assessment Requirements for TLIPC1001 Demonstrate care and apply safe practices at
work .................................................................................................................................5259
TLIPC1002 Adapt to work requirements in the transport and logistics industry ...........5261
Assessment Requirements for TLIPC1002 Adapt to work requirements in the transport
and logistics industry ......................................................................................................5265
TLIPC1003 Apply effective work practices .........................................................................5267
Assessment Requirements for TLIPC1003 Apply effective work practices .....................5270
TLIPC1004 Complete courier delivery operations .............................................................5272
Assessment Requirements for TLIPC1004 Complete courier delivery operations..........5276
TLIPC1005 Complete small store operations......................................................................5278
Assessment Requirements for TLIPC1005 Complete small store operations ..................5281
TLIR4001 Monitor supplier performance ...........................................................................5283
Assessment Requirements for TLIR4001 Monitor supplier performance .......................5286
TLIR4002 Source goods/services and evaluate contractors ...............................................5288
Assessment Requirements for TLIR4002 Source goods/services and evaluate contractors5291

TLIR4003 Negotiate a contract.............................................................................................5294

Assessment Requirements for TLIR4003 Negotiate a contract .........................................5297
TLIR4008 Implement and supervise stocktaking procedures ...........................................5300
Assessment Requirements for TLIR4008 Implement and supervise stocktaking procedures5303
TLIR4009 Implement purchasing systems ..........................................................................5305
Assessment Requirements for TLIR4009 Implement purchasing systems .......................5308
TLIR4010 Plan purchasing ...................................................................................................5310
Assessment Requirements for TLIR4010 Plan purchasing................................................5313
TLIR4012 Conduct international purchasing .....................................................................5315
Assessment Requirements for TLIR4012 Conduct international purchasing..................5319
TLIR5005 Manage a contract ...............................................................................................5322
Assessment Requirements for TLIR5005 Manage a contract ...........................................5325
TLIR5006 Develop, implement and review purchasing strategies ....................................5328
Assessment Requirements for TLIR5006 Develop, implement and review purchasing
strategies ..........................................................................................................................5331
TLIR5007 Manage international purchasing ......................................................................5334
Assessment Requirements for TLIR5007 Manage international purchasing ..................5338
TLIR5014 Manage suppliers.................................................................................................5341
Assessment Requirements for TLIR5014 Manage suppliers .............................................5344
TLIS2004 Install and maintain rail bonding systems .........................................................5347
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2004 Install and maintain rail bonding systems......5351
TLIS2012 Install and service rail lubrication equipment...................................................5354
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2012 Install and service rail lubrication equipment5357
TLIS2013 Install minor structures .......................................................................................5360
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2013 Install minor structures....................................5363
TLIS2020 Install overhead wiring structure .......................................................................5366
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2020 Install overhead wiring structure ....................5369
TLIS2027 Install and maintain surface track drainage .....................................................5372
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2027 Install and maintain surface track drainage ..5375
TLIS2028 Install and replace transoms ...............................................................................5378
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2028 Install and replace transoms ............................5381
TLIS2030 Carry out track ballasting ...................................................................................5384
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2030 Carry out track ballasting ...............................5387
TLIS2031 Install railway sleepers ........................................................................................5390
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2031 Install railway sleepers .....................................5394
TLIS2033 Install and repair temporary track supports.....................................................5397
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2033 Install and repair temporary track supports .5400
TLIS2034 Install and repair rail fastening systems ............................................................5403
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2034 Install and repair rail fastening systems .........5406
TLIS2035 Install and repair fences and gates .....................................................................5409
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2035 Install and repair fences and gates ..................5412
TLIS2036 Use chemical repair products..............................................................................5415
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2036 Use chemical repair products ..........................5418
TLIS2044 Carry out rail installation....................................................................................5420
Assessment Requirements for TLIS2044 Carry out rail installation ................................5423
TLIS3005 Install mechanical infrastructure for signalling ................................................5426
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3005 Install mechanical infrastructure for signalling5429
TLIS3009 Install mechanical signalling locking and interlocking devices .......................5432
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3009 Install mechanical signalling locking and
interlocking devices ........................................................................................................5435
TLIS3010 Test rail using ultrasonic equipment ..................................................................5438
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3010 Test rail using ultrasonic equipment ..............5441
TLIS3011 Test rail using nondestructive testing equipment .............................................5444

Assessment Requirements for TLIS3011 Test rail using nondestructive testing equipment5447
TLIS3023 Erect and mount structures and housings for signalling equipment...............5450
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3023 Erect and mount structures and housings for
signalling equipment .......................................................................................................5453
TLIS3025 Implement ballast unloading...............................................................................5456
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3025 Implement ballast unloading ...........................5459
TLIS3026 Implement track maintenance and construction ..............................................5462
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3026 Implement track maintenance and construction5465
TLIS3029 Implement structures maintenance and installation of minor structures ......5468
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3029 Implement structures maintenance and
installation of minor structures .....................................................................................5471
TLIS3037 Install and repair rail earthworks ......................................................................5475
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3037 Install and repair rail earthworks ...................5478
TLIS3039 Measure and mark track for resurfacing ..........................................................5481
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3039 Measure and mark track for resurfacing .......5484
TLIS3040 Construct concrete or steel points and crossings...............................................5487
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3040 Construct concrete or steel points and crossings5490
TLIS3041 Construct timber or composite points and crossings ........................................5493
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3041 Construct timber or composite points and
crossings ...........................................................................................................................5496
TLIS3045 Install turnouts .....................................................................................................5499
Assessment Requirements for TLIS3045 Install turnouts..................................................5502
TLIS4007 Decommission mechanical signalling infrastructure and interlocking equipment
from service .....................................................................................................................5505
Assessment Requirements for TLIS4007 Decommission mechanical signalling
infrastructure and interlocking equipment from service ............................................5508
TLIU0001 Develop workplace policy and procedures for environmental sustainability 5511
Assessment Requirements for TLIU0001 Develop workplace policy and procedures for
environmental sustainability ..........................................................................................5514
TLIU1009 Monitor plant and equipment in an environmentally sustainable manner ...5517
Assessment Requirements for TLIU1009 Monitor plant and equipment in an
environmentally sustainable manner ............................................................................5520
TLIU1013 Prepare for environmentally sustainable work practices ................................5523
Assessment Requirements for TLIU1013 Prepare for environmentally sustainable work
practices ...........................................................................................................................5526
TLIU2008 Apply environmental procedures to rail infrastructure ..................................5529
Assessment Requirements for TLIU2008 Apply environmental procedures to rail
infrastructure ..................................................................................................................5532
TLIU2012 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices .............................5535
Assessment Requirements for TLIU2012 Participate in environmentally sustainable work
practices ...........................................................................................................................5538
TLIU3011 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices ...........5541
Assessment Requirements for TLIU3011 Implement and monitor environmentally
sustainable work practices .............................................................................................5544
TLIU3014 Operate vehicle in an environmentally sustainable manner ...........................5547
Assessment Requirements for TLIU3014 Operate vehicle in an environmentally
sustainable manner .........................................................................................................5550
TLIU3015 Identify wastes and hazards in the waste management industry ....................5552
Assessment Requirements for TLIU3015 Identify wastes and hazards in the waste
management industry .....................................................................................................5555
TLIU4001 Implement and monitor environmental protection policies and procedures .5558
Assessment Requirements for TLIU4001 Implement and monitor environmental
protection policies and procedures ................................................................................5561

TLIU4011 Apply environmental procedures to rail operations ........................................5564

Assessment Requirements for TLIU4011 Apply environmental procedures to rail
operations ........................................................................................................................5567
TLIU5006 Conduct environmental audits ...........................................................................5570
Assessment Requirements for TLIU5006 Conduct environmental audits........................5573
TLIW0036 Apply electric welding process to rail ...............................................................5576
Assessment Requirements for TLIW0036 Apply electric welding process to rail ...........5580
TLIW0044 Weld rail on tram/light rail systems using submerged ARC welding process5583
Assessment Requirements for TLIW0044 Weld rail on tram/light rail systems using
submerged ARC welding process ..................................................................................5586
TLIW2001 Operate under track protection rules ...............................................................5589
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2001 Operate under track protection rules ...........5592
TLIW2012 Grind rails ...........................................................................................................5594
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2012 Grind rails .......................................................5597
TLIW2017 Cut and join materials .......................................................................................5600
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2017 Cut and join materials ....................................5603
TLIW2018 Operate hand held air/power equipment for pallet production processes ....5606
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2018 Operate hand held air/power equipment for
pallet production processes ............................................................................................5609
TLIW2019 Apply surface coatings using a spray gun ........................................................5612
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2019 Apply surface coatings using a spray gun ....5615
TLIW2020 Undertake pallet repairs ....................................................................................5618
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2020 Undertake pallet repairs ................................5621
TLIW2021 Clean and inspect pallets ...................................................................................5624
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2021 Clean and inspect pallets ................................5627
TLIW2022 Manufacture pallets using automated methods ...............................................5630
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2022 Manufacture pallets using automated methods5633
TLIW2023 Manufacture pallets using manual methods ....................................................5636
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2023 Manufacture pallets using manual methods.5639
TLIW2024 Dock boards using computer programmed machinery ..................................5642
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2024 Dock boards using computer programmed
machinery ........................................................................................................................5645
TLIW2025 Dock boards on mechanical feeds .....................................................................5648
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2025 Dock boards on mechanical feeds..................5651
TLIW2028 Identify the principles of ballast cleaning operations .....................................5654
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2028 Identify the principles of ballast cleaning
operations ........................................................................................................................5657
TLIW2029 Identify the principles of ballast regulator operations....................................5659
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2029 Identify the principles of ballast regulator
operations ........................................................................................................................5662
TLIW2030 Identify the principles of dynamic track stabaliser operations ......................5665
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2030 Identify the principles of dynamic track
stabaliser operations .......................................................................................................5668
TLIW2031 Identify the principles of self-propelled rail grinder operations ....................5670
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2031 Identify the principles of self-propelled rail
grinder operations ..........................................................................................................5673
TLIW2032 Identify the principles of tamping machine operations ..................................5675
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2032 Identify the principles of tamping machine
operations ........................................................................................................................5678
TLIW2033 Identify the principles of mechanised track laying operations ......................5680
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2033 Identify the principles of mechanised track
laying operations .............................................................................................................5683
TLIW2037 Clip and secure points ........................................................................................5685

Assessment Requirements for TLIW2037 Clip and secure points ....................................5688

TLIW2038 Place and remove temporary speed restriction equipment ............................5690
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2038 Place and remove temporary speed restriction
equipment ........................................................................................................................5693
TLIW2039 Place and remove permanent way stop boards ...............................................5695
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2039 Place and remove permanent way stop boards5698
TLIW2041 Clip points and apply rail safety equipment ....................................................5700
Assessment Requirements for TLIW2041 Clip points and apply rail safety equipment.5703
TLIW3006 Operate computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment...........................5705
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3006 Operate computerised mail and parcels sorting
equipment ........................................................................................................................5708
TLIW3007 Code and coordinate video-coding operations .................................................5711
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3007 Code and coordinate video-coding operations5714
TLIW3008 Carry out culler facer canceller operations .....................................................5717
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3008 Carry out culler facer canceller operations ..5720
TLIW3013 Grind switches and crossings ............................................................................5723
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3013 Grind switches and crossings .........................5726
TLIW3015 Weld rail using aluminothermic welding process ...........................................5729
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3015 Weld rail using aluminothermic welding process5733
TLIW3016 Weld rail using flashbutt welding process .......................................................5736
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3016 Weld rail using flashbutt welding process ....5740
TLIW3026 Operate stand alone signalling/point control equipment ................................5743
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3026 Operate stand alone signalling/point control
equipment ........................................................................................................................5746
TLIW3027 Operate minor track equipment .......................................................................5749
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3027 Operate minor track equipment ....................5753
TLIW3034 Apply protective coating systems to structures ...............................................5756
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3034 Apply protective coating systems to structures5759
TLIW3035 Heat and cut materials using oxy-LPG equipment for the rail industry ......5762
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3035 Heat and cut materials using oxy-LPG
equipment for the rail industry .....................................................................................5766
TLIW3042 Grind rail on tram/light rail systems ................................................................5769
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3042 Grind rail on tram/light rail systems ............5772
TLIW3043 Weld rail on tram/light rail systems using electric welding process ..............5774
Assessment Requirements for TLIW3043 Weld rail on tram/light rail systems using
electric welding process ..................................................................................................5777
TLIW5001 Apply rail communications systems .................................................................5780
Assessment Requirements for TLIW5001 Apply rail communications systems ..............5783
TLIW5002 Manage rail assets and interfaces .....................................................................5786
Assessment Requirements for TLIW5002 Manage rail assets and interfaces ..................5790
TLIW5003 Manage rail network control systems ...............................................................5793
Assessment Requirements for TLIW5003 Manage rail network control systems ...........5796
TLIW5004 Manage train planning.......................................................................................5799
Assessment Requirements for TLIW5004 Manage train planning ...................................5802
TLIX0001 Determine tariff classification of goods .............................................................5805
Assessment Requirements for TLIX0001 Determine tariff classification of goods ..........5809
TLIX0002 Initiate cargo border procedures .......................................................................5812
Assessment Requirements for TLIX0002 Initiate cargo border procedures ....................5816
TLIX0003 Conduct advanced border clearance functions ................................................5819
Assessment Requirements for TLIX0003 Conduct advanced border clearance functions5822
TLIX4007 Implement and monitor integrated logistics support plans .............................5825
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4007 Implement and monitor integrated logistics
support plans ...................................................................................................................5828

TLIX4008 Conduct integrated logistics support activities .................................................5831

Assessment Requirements for TLIX4008 Conduct integrated logistics support activities5834
TLIX4009 Apply integrated logistics support processes and procedures .........................5837
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4009 Apply integrated logistics support processes and
procedures .......................................................................................................................5840
TLIX4011 Conduct logistics support analysis activities .....................................................5842
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4011 Conduct logistics support analysis activities .5845
TLIX4016 Implement and monitor materiel sustainment plans .......................................5848
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4016 Implement and monitor materiel sustainment
plans .................................................................................................................................5851
TLIX4017 Conduct materiel sustainment activities ...........................................................5854
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4017 Conduct materiel sustainment activities ........5857
TLIX4018 Apply materiel sustainment process and procedures.......................................5860
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4018 Apply materiel sustainment process and
procedures .......................................................................................................................5863
TLIX4022 Implement and monitor configuration management plans .............................5865
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4022 Implement and monitor configuration
management plans ..........................................................................................................5868
TLIX4023 Conduct configuration management activities .................................................5871
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4023 Conduct configuration management activities5874
TLIX4024 Apply configuration management processes and procedures .........................5877
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4024 Apply configuration management processes and
procedures .......................................................................................................................5880
TLIX4026 Apply codification and cataloguing processes and procedures .......................5882
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4026 Apply codification and cataloguing processes and
procedures .......................................................................................................................5885
TLIX4027 Assess maintenance spares and manage repairable items ...............................5888
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4027 Assess maintenance spares and manage
repairable items ..............................................................................................................5891
TLIX4028 Apply knowledge of logistics ..............................................................................5894
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4028 Apply knowledge of logistics ...........................5897
TLIX4029 Apply knowledge of integrated logistics support ..............................................5899
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4029 Apply knowledge of integrated logistics support5902
TLIX4030 Apply knowledge of materiel sustainment ........................................................5905
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4030 Apply knowledge of materiel sustainment .....5908
TLIX4031 Apply knowledge of configuration management ..............................................5911
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4031 Apply knowledge of configuration management5914
TLIX4032 Apply knowledge of technical regulatory framework ......................................5917
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4032 Apply knowledge of technical regulatory
framework .......................................................................................................................5920
TLIX4033 Apply technical regulatory framework compliance management systems ....5923
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4033 Apply technical regulatory framework
compliance management systems ..................................................................................5926
TLIX4034 Apply technical risk management systems and techniques .............................5929
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4034 Apply technical risk management systems and
techniques ........................................................................................................................5932
TLIX4035 Maintain technical data and information..........................................................5935
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4035 Maintain technical data and information ......5938
TLIX4036 Analyse, advise on and carry out integrated border clearance transactions .5941
Assessment Requirements for TLIX4036 Analyse, advise on and carry out integrated
border clearance transactions........................................................................................5945
TLIX5003 Develop and review integrated logistics support plans ....................................5948

Assessment Requirements for TLIX5003 Develop and review integrated logistics support
plans .................................................................................................................................5951
TLIX5004 Develop integrated logistics support processes and procedures .....................5954
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5004 Develop integrated logistics support processes
and procedures ................................................................................................................5958
TLIX5005 Manage integrated logistics support operations ...............................................5961
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5005 Manage integrated logistics support operations5964
TLIX5006 Manage verification and validation ...................................................................5967
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5006 Manage verification and validation ................5970
TLIX5010 Provide specialist integrated logistics support advice ......................................5973
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5010 Provide specialist integrated logistics support
advice ...............................................................................................................................5976
TLIX5012 Develop and review materiel sustainment plans...............................................5979
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5012 Develop and review materiel sustainment plans5982
TLIX5013 Develop materiel sustainment processes and procedures ................................5985
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5013 Develop materiel sustainment processes and
procedures .......................................................................................................................5988
TLIX5014 Manage materiel sustainment operations .........................................................5991
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5014 Manage materiel sustainment operations ......5995
TLIX5015 Establish supply chains .......................................................................................5998
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5015 Establish supply chains ...................................6001
TLIX5019 Provide specialist materiel sustainment advice ................................................6004
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5019 Provide specialist materiel sustainment advice6007
TLIX5020 Develop and review configuration management plans ....................................6010
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5020 Develop and review configuration management
plans .................................................................................................................................6013
TLIX5021 Manage configuration management processes .................................................6016
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5021 Manage configuration management processes6019
TLIX5025 Provide specialist configuration management advice ......................................6022
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5025 Provide specialist configuration management
advice ...............................................................................................................................6025
TLIX5036 Manage and monitor technical data and information systems .......................6028
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5036 Manage and monitor technical data and
information systems ........................................................................................................6032
TLIX5037 Plan logistics support for deployed operations .................................................6035
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5037 Plan logistics support for deployed operations6038
TLIX5038 Organise the deployment and delivery of logistics support .............................6041
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5038 Organise the deployment and delivery of logistics
support .............................................................................................................................6044
TLIX5039 Plan and conduct road convoy ...........................................................................6047
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5039 Plan and conduct road convoy ........................6050
TLIX5040 Manage contracted support services .................................................................6052
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5040 Manage contracted support services ..............6056
TLIX5041 Organise supply support on deployment ...........................................................6059
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5041 Organise supply support on deployment .......6063
TLIX5042 Organise road transport operations ..................................................................6066
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5042 Organise road transport operations ...............6069
TLIX5043 Conduct maintenance on deployed operations .................................................6072
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5043 Conduct maintenance on deployed operations6076
TLIX5044 Organise health support operations...................................................................6079
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5044 Organise health support operations ...............6082
TLIX5045 Manage and monitor catering on deployed operations ....................................6084

Assessment Requirements for TLIX5045 Manage and monitor catering on deployed

operations ........................................................................................................................6088
TLIX5046 Carry out standard customs clearance practices .............................................6091
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5046 Carry out standard customs clearance practices6095
TLIX5047 Determine customs value ....................................................................................6098
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5047 Determine customs value .................................6101
TLIX5048 Determine import/export prohibitions/restrictions ..........................................6104
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5048 Determine import/export
prohibitions/restrictions .................................................................................................6107
TLIX5049 Determine indirect taxes .....................................................................................6110
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5049 Determine indirect taxes..................................6113
TLIX5050 Determine origin of goods and apply preference schemes or free trade
agreements .......................................................................................................................6116
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5050 Determine origin of goods and apply preference
schemes or free trade agreements .................................................................................6119
TLIX5052 Determine complex customs value .....................................................................6122
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5052 Determine complex customs value .................6125
TLIX5053 Determine tariff classification for complex goods ............................................6128
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5053 Determine tariff classification for complex goods6131
TLIX5054 Comply with biosecurity border clearance .......................................................6134
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5054 Comply with biosecurity border clearance ....6137
TLIX5055 Apply anti-dumping and countervailing measures ..........................................6140
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5055 Apply anti-dumping and countervailing
measures ..........................................................................................................................6143
TLIX5056 Carry out additional customs clearance practices............................................6145
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5056 Carry out additional customs clearance practices6149
TLIX5058 Review decisions of regulatory bodies ...............................................................6152
Assessment Requirements for TLIX5058 Review decisions of regulatory bodies............6155
TLIX6001 Formulate materiel logistics strategies ..............................................................6157
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6001 Formulate materiel logistics strategies ...........6160
TLIX6002 Contribute to materiel logistics strategies .........................................................6163
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6002 Contribute to materiel logistics strategies .....6166
TLIX6046 Plan deployed logistics support for significant operations ..............................6169
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6046 Plan deployed logistics support for significant
operations ........................................................................................................................6172
TLIX6047 Monitor and provide logistics staff support for significant deployed operations6175
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6047 Monitor and provide logistics staff support for
significant deployed operations .....................................................................................6178
TLIX6048 Manage the deployment and delivery of logistics support ...............................6180
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6048 Manage the deployment and delivery of logistics
support .............................................................................................................................6185
TLIX6049 Undertake provisioning in support of deployed operations ............................6188
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6049 Undertake provisioning in support of deployed
operations ........................................................................................................................6191
TLIX6050 Plan distribution operations on deployment .....................................................6194
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6050 Plan distribution operations on deployment .6197
TLIX6051 Plan maintenance for deployed operations .......................................................6200
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6051 Plan maintenance for deployed operations ....6203
TLIX6052 Plan health support for deployed personnel .....................................................6206
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6052 Plan health support for deployed personnel ..6209
TLIX6053 Coordinate health support operations ...............................................................6212
Assessment Requirements for TLIX6053 Coordinate health support operations ...........6216
UEGNSG005A Prepare to work in the gas industry ..........................................................6219

UEGNSG141A Apply Workplace Health and Safety regulations, codes and practices in
the gas supply industry ...................................................................................................6230
UEGNSG601A Assess the operational capability of gas safety equipment on tankers ...6242
UEGNSG614A Load, unload, exchange and connect LPG cylinders ...............................6258
UETTDRRF02B Perform pole top rescue ...........................................................................6271
TLI Transport and Logistics Training Package..................................................................6282
TLISS00092 Mentoring Skill Set ..........................................................................................6284
TLISS00093 Integrated Logistics Support Inventory Controller Skill Set.......................6286
TLISS00094 Integrated Logistics Support Management Skill Set ....................................6288
TLISS00095 Integrated Logistics Support Practitioner Skill Set ......................................6290
TLISS00096 Logistics Configuration Management Skill Set .............................................6292
TLISS00097 Logistics Executive Management Skill Set ....................................................6294
TLISS00098 Logistics Inventory Controller Skill Set ........................................................6296
TLISS00099 Logistics Product Management Skill Set .......................................................6298
TLISS00100 Logistics Sustainment Management Skill Set................................................6300
TLISS00101 Logistics Sustainment Practitioner Skill Set .................................................6302
TLISS00102 Access and Move a Track Vehicle Within a Defined Worksite Skill Set ....6304
TLISS00103 Accessing the Rail Corridor Skill Set .............................................................6306
TLISS00104 Aluminothermic Welding Skill Set .................................................................6308
TLISS00105 Blocking Protection Skill Set ..........................................................................6310
TLISS00106 Conduct Track Protection Skill Set................................................................6312
TLISS00107 Control Rail Traffic Through Worksite Skill Set .........................................6314
TLISS00108 Coordinate Multiple Work Groups Skill Set.................................................6316
TLISS00109 Decommission Mechanical Signalling Infrastructure and Interlocking
Equipment Skill Set ........................................................................................................6318
TLISS00110 Electric Track Welding Skill Set ....................................................................6320
TLISS00111 Examining Concrete/Masonry Structures Skill Set ......................................6322
TLISS00112 Examining Steel Structures Skill Set..............................................................6324
TLISS00113 Examining Timber Structures Skill Set .........................................................6326
TLISS00114 Flashbutt Welding Skill Set ............................................................................6328
TLISS00115 Handsignaller Skill Set ....................................................................................6330
TLISS00116 Install Mechanical Equipment Skill Set .........................................................6332
TLISS00117 Installing Minor Structures Skill Set .............................................................6334
TLISS00118 Installing Transoms Skill Set ..........................................................................6336
TLISS00119 Light On-track Equipment Operation Skill Set ............................................6338
TLISS00120 Lookout Working Skill Set..............................................................................6340
TLISS00121 Maintain Aerial Signal/Telecommunication Lines and Cables Skill Set ....6342
TLISS00122 Maintain Bridge Bearings Skill Set ................................................................6344
TLISS00123 Maintain Mechanical Equipment Skill Set ....................................................6346
TLISS00124 Minor Track Equipment Operation Skill Set ...............................................6348
TLISS00125 Operate Signalling/Point Control Equipment Skill Set ................................6350
TLISS00126 Plan Track Possessions Protection Skill Set ..................................................6352
TLISS00127 Rail Adjustment Skill Set ................................................................................6354
TLISS00128 Rail Infrastructure Induction Skill Set ..........................................................6356
TLISS00129 Repairing Concrete/Masonry Structures Skill Set .......................................6358
TLISS00130 Repairing Steel Structures Skill Set ...............................................................6360
TLISS00131 Repairing Timber Structures Skill Set ..........................................................6362
TLISS00132 Suburban Network Train Driver Assistant Skill Set ....................................6364
TLISS00133 Track Grinding Skill Set .................................................................................6366
TLISS00134 Track Inspection Skill Set ...............................................................................6368
TLISS00135 Track Lubrication Skill Set ............................................................................6370
TLISS00136 Track Occupancy Protection Skill Set ...........................................................6372
TLISS00137 Track Patrol Skill Set ......................................................................................6374

TLISS00138 Travel Medium/Heavy On-Track Equipment Skill Set................................6376

TLISS00139 Travel Track Vehicle Under Block Working Conditions Skill Set .............6378
TLISS00140 Travel Track Vehicle Under Occupancy Authority Skill Set ......................6380
TLISS00141 Ultrasonic Points and Crossings Testing Skill Set ........................................6382
TLISS00142 Ultrasonic Rail Testing Skill Set .....................................................................6384
TLISS00143 Certify Rolling Stock Skill Set ........................................................................6386
TLISS00144 Move Rolling Stock Within Defined Limits Skill Set....................................6388
TLISS00145 Rail Maintainer Skill Set .................................................................................6390
TLISS00146 Tram or Light Rail Turnout Construction Skill Set.....................................6392
TLISS00147 Tram or Light Rail Turnout Installation Skill Set .......................................6394
TLISS00148 Submerged ARC Welding Skill Set ................................................................6396
TLISS00149 Tram or Light Rail Track Inspection Skill Set .............................................6398
TLISS00150 Tram or Light Rail Track Sweeping Skill Set ...............................................6400
TLISS00151 Lead Shunter Skill Set .....................................................................................6402
TLISS00152 Rail Operations Safeworking Skill Set ...........................................................6404
TLISS00153 Rail Signal Panel Operation Skill Set.............................................................6406
TLISS00154 Train Buffet Operation Skill Set ....................................................................6408
TLISS00155 Road Safety Skill Set........................................................................................6410
TLISS00156 Tow Truck Driver Skill Set .............................................................................6412
TLISS00157 Road Transport Driver Skill Set ....................................................................6414
TLISS00158 Chemical Tanker Driver Skill Set ..................................................................6416
TLISS00159 Fuel Tanker Driver Skill Set ...........................................................................6418
TLISS00160 LP Gas Tanker Driver Skill Set......................................................................6420
TLISS00161 Owner Driver Skill Set ....................................................................................6422
TLISS00162 Driving Instructor Skill Set .............................................................................6424
TLISS00163 Complier/Classifier Skill Set ...........................................................................6426
TLISS00164 International Freight Forwarding Skill Set ...................................................6428
TLISS00165 Furniture Removal Pre-Packer Skill Set .......................................................6430
TLISS00166 Furniture Removal Team Leader Skill Set ...................................................6432
TLISS00167 International Furniture Removal Packer and Wrapper Skill Set ...............6434
TLISS00168 Introduction to the Waste Industry Skill Set ................................................6436
TLISS00169 Stevedoring Clerical Skill Set .........................................................................6438
TLISS00170 Stevedoring Crane Operations Skill Set ........................................................6440
TLISS00171 Stevedoring Equipment Controller Skill Set .................................................6442
TLISS00172 Stevedoring Equipment Operations/Light Load Shifting Skill Set .............6444
TLISS00173 Stevedoring Equipment Operations/Specialised Load Shifting Skill Set ...6446
TLISS00174 Stevedoring Gantry Crane Operations Skill Set ...........................................6448
TLISS00175 Stevedoring Operation Induction and Safety Skill Set .................................6450
TLISS00176 Stevedoring Reefer Skill Set............................................................................6452
TLISS00177 Stevedoring Ship Mounted Crane Operations Skill Set ...............................6454
TLISS00178 Stevedoring Team Leader Skill Set ................................................................6456
TLISS00179 Waste Industry Off-Sider Skill Set.................................................................6458
TLISS00180 Mobile Crane Operations Supervisor Skill Set .............................................6460
TLISS00181 Open Road Operator Skill Set ........................................................................6462
TLISS00182 Road Tunnel Operator Skill Set .....................................................................6464

TLI Transport and Logistics Training Package Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI Transport and Logistics Training Package
Copyright Statement
© 2016 Commonwealth of Australia.
With the exception of the Commonwealth Coat of Arms, the Department’s logo, any
material protected by a trade mark and where otherwise noted, all material presented in this
document is provided under a Creative Commons Attribution-No Derivative Works 3.0
Australia licence.
You are free:
 to copy, distribute, display, and perform the work
 to make commercial use of the work
Under the following conditions:
 Attribution - You must give the original author credit.
 No Derivative Works - You may not alter, transform, or build upon this work.
Special Conditions (Waiver)
For the sake of clarity, where the license refers to "the work", in addition to meaning the
work in its entirety this term shall also mean "extracts of the work". Extracts of the work
carry with it the respective licence, and is thus “partitioned”.
The details of the relevant licence conditions are available on the Creative Commons
website (www.creativecommons.org.au) as is the full legal code. The document must be
attributed as the TLI Transport and Logistics Training Package Release 3.0.
Disclaimer

TLI Transport and Logistics Training Package Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
This work is the result of wide consultations with Australian industry participants. It is a collaborative view and does not
necessarily represent the view of Department of Education and Training or any specific body. For the sake of brevity it may
omit factors which could be pertinent in particular cases.
While care has been taken in the preparation of this Training Package, Department of Education and Training and the
original developer do not warrant that any licensing or registration requirements specified here are either complete or
up-to-date for your State or Territory. Department of Education and Training and the original developer do not accept any
liability for any damage or loss (including indirect and consequential loss) incurred by any person as a result of relying on
the information contained in this Training Package.
The Commonwealth, through the Department of Education and Training, does not accept any liability to any person for the
information or advice (or the use of such information or advice) which is provided in this material or incorporated into it by
reference. The information is provided on the basis that all persons accessing this material undertake responsibility for
assessing the relevance and accuracy of its content. No liability is accepted for any information or services which may
appear in any other format. No responsibility is taken for any information or services which may appear on any linked
websites.
Published by: Australian Industry Standards
Release Date: <28 February 2016>

TLI10115 Certificate I in Transport and Logistics (Pathways) Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
Companion Volume implementation guides are found in VETNet -
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=df441c6e-213d-43e3-874c-0b3f7
036d851
TLI10115 Certificate I in Transport and Logistics (Pathways)
Modification History
Release 1. This is the first release of this qualification in the TLI Transport and Logistics
Training Package.
Qualification Description
This qualification is a cross-sector certificate using units in the TLI Transport and Logistics
Training Package, which provides a pathway for those who have had limited access to formal
vocational and education training such as young unemployed people, early school leavers
and students at risk, older unemployed people, Indigenous groups, geographically
disadvantaged, and people with learning difficulties.
It is also designed to assist Year 9 and 10 students as a framework for a structured workplace
learning program, and to develop employability and technical skills required by those
commencing a career in the Transport and Logistics Industry.
The breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and skills in this qualification would prepare
a person to perform a defined range of activities, most of which may be routine and
predictable.
No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of
publication.
Entry Requirements
There are no entry requirements for this qualification.

TLI10115 Certificate I in Transport and Logistics (Pathways) Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Packaging Rules
A total of 7 units of competency comprising:
3 core units listed below plus
1 technical elective unit from the technical elective units listed below plus
3 general elective units may be selected from this Training Package or from any relevant
nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course.
The general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to ensure that all prerequisite units
specified are complied with.
Core units
TLIPC1001 Demonstrate care and apply safe practices at work
TLIPC1002 Adapt to work requirements in the transport and logistics industry
TLIPC1003 Apply effective work practices
Technical elective units
TLIPC1004 Complete courier delivery operations
TLIPC1005 Complete small store operations
General elective units
3 general elective units to be selected from this Training Package or any relevant nationally
endorsed Training Package or accredited course.
Qualification Mapping Information

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLIPC110 Certificate I in Transport and
Logistics (Pathways).
Links
036d851

TLI11215 Certificate I in Warehousing Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI11215 Certificate I in Warehousing Operations
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for the Warehousing and Storage Industry.
The breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and skills in this qualification would prepare
a person to perform a defined range of activities, most of which may be routine and
predictable.
No licensing legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time of
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
8 general elective units from the general elective units list below. Up to 3 of the general
elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or
accredited course. The general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of
the qualification.
specified in the unit are complied with.
Core units
TLIF1001 Follow work health and safety procedures
TLIL1001 Complete workplace orientation and induction procedures
TLIA1001 Secure cargo
TLIA2011 Package goods

TLI11215 Certificate I in Warehousing Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA2012 Pick and process orders
TLIA2022 Participate in stocktakes
TLIB1031 Clean up plant, equipment and worksite
TLIC1013 Ride courier/delivery bicycle
TLID1001 Shift materials safely using manual handling methods
TLID1002 Shift a load using manually-operated equipment
TLIE1003 Participate in basic workplace communication
TLIE1005 Carry out basic workplace calculations
TLIF1002 Conduct housekeeping activities
TLIF1009 Conduct cleaning operations in enclosed spaces
TLIG1001 Work effectively with others
TLII1002 Apply customer service skills
TLIU1013 Prepare for environmentally sustainable work practices

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI11210 Certificate I in Warehousing
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI11315 Certificate I in Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI11315 Certificate I in Logistics
Training Package.
This is an entry level qualification for the Transport and Logistics Industry. It involves the
breadth, depth and complexity of knowledge and skills required to prepare a person to
perform a defined range of activities, most of which may be routine and predictable.
Job roles:
Job roles and titles vary across different sectors. Possible job titles relevant to this
qualification include:
 Logistics Assistant
 Logistics General Hand.
publication.
Entry Requirements

Packaging Rules
4 general elective units from the general elective units listed below. Up to 2 of the general
the qualification.
Core units
TLIPC1001 Demonstrate care and apply safe practices at work
TLIPC1002 Adapt to work requirements in the transport and logistics industry
BSBITU101 Operate a personal computer
BSBITU102 Develop keyboard skills
TLIA2013 Receive goods
TLIA2020 Replenish stock
TLIA2021 Despatch stock
TLIB1024 Clean transportation units and facilities for passenger use
TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand tools
TLIB1030 Undertake general site maintenance

TLIG2007 Work in a socially diverse environment
TLIL1001 Complete workplace orientation and induction procedures
TLIO1002 Follow security procedures when working with passengers and

personnel
TLIPC1003 Apply effective work practices
TLIU1013 Prepare for environmentally sustainable work practices

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI11310 Certificate I in Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI21216 Certificate II in Driving Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI21216 Certificate II in Driving Operations
Release 2. This is the second release of this qualification in the TLI Transport and Logistics
Training Package.
Packaging rules for the elective units have been clarified.
The following unit has been added to the general elective units:
 TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management system.
Release 1. This is first release of this qualification in the TLI Transport and Logistics Training
Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in driving operation job roles within the Transport and
Logistics industry.
It involves a prescribed range of tasks involving known routines and procedures, and taking
some accountability for the quality of work outcomes.
Job roles
Job roles and titles vary across different sectors. Possible job titles relevant to this qualification
include:
 Courier driver
 Express driver
 Pickup and Delivery driver
 Priority driver
 Taxi Truck driver
 Taxi driver
 Tow Truck driver.
Successful achievement of the licencing units within the qualification must align with licencing
and regulatory requirements applicable to driving and state/territory regulatory requirements.
Entry Requirements

Packaging Rules
Packaging Rules A total of 18 units of competency comprising:
1 licensing/industry elective unit relevant to the vehicle type
applicable to the job role from the licensing/industry elective
units listed below plus
All units within one of the specialist elective groups (job
roles) from Group A, Group B, Group C, Group D or Group E
listed below plus
4 general elective units from the general elective units listed
below if selecting Group E or
below if selecting Group A, Group C, Group D or
below if selecting Group B.
Up to 3 of the general elective units may be selected from
any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or
accredited course. The units must contribute to the vocational
outcomes of the qualification.
Elective units can only be counted once towards the
qualification packaging rules i.e. if a unit is listed in both a
specialist elective group and the general elective group, it can
only be counted as one of the elective units required.
Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to
ensure that all prerequisite units specified are complied with.
Core units
TLID1001 Shift materials safely using manual

handling methods
TLIF1001 Follow work health and safety

procedures
TLIF2010 Apply fatigue management strategies
TLIH2001 Interpret road maps and navigate

pre-determined routes
TLIL1001 Complete workplace

orientation/induction procedures

Licensing/Industry elective units
TLIC1051 Operate commercial vehicle
TLIC2002 Drive light rigid vehicle
TLIC2009 Drive taxi
TLIC2012 Ride courier/delivery motorcycle
TLIC3003 Drive medium rigid vehicle
TLIC3004 Drive heavy rigid vehicle
TLILIC2014 Licence to drive a light rigid vehicle
TLILIC2015 Licence to drive a medium rigid

vehicle
TLILIC2016 Licence to drive a heavy rigid vehicle
Specialist elective units
Select one group (job role) from the following options:

Group A: Medium Freight
Group B: Tow Truck
Group C: Taxi
Group D: Community Service
Group E: General
Group A: Medium Freight
TLIB2004 Carry out vehicle inspection
TLID2004 Load and unload goods/cargo
TLIE2008 Process workplace documentation
TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility

legislation, regulations and workplace
procedures
TLIF2006 Apply accident-emergency procedures
Group B: Tow Truck

TLIB2079 Set up and secure a towing situation
TLIC3035 Manage the operation of a tow truck
Group C: Taxi
TLIB2090 Use communication systems in a taxi
TLIF2072 Comply with safety and security

procedures
TLIH3004 Identify major roads, services and

attractions
TLII2019 Provide taxi customer service
TLIL2060 Complete induction to the transport

industry
TLIP2037 Carry out financial transactions and

maintain records
Group D: Community Service
TLIC3011 Transport passengers with disabilities
TLIF2019 Ensure a safe on-board passenger and

working environment
TLIJ2001 Apply quality procedures
Group E: General

TLIE1003 Participate in basic workplace

communication

procedures
TLIA2041 Manually sort mail and parcels
TLIA2042 Despatch mail
TLIA2043 Consolidate mail
TLIA2044 Carry out delivery operations
TLIA2045 Process international parcels and letters
TLIA2046 Process parcels and letters
TLIA2047 Stream mail
TLIB1080 Use, clean and maintain towing

equipment
TLIC1013 Ride courier/delivery bicycle
TLIC2012 Ride courier/delivery motorcycle
TLIC2040 Provide wheelchair accessible taxi

services to passengers with disabilities
TLIC2049 Operate heavy vehicle on unsealed

roads

TLIC3035 Manage the operation of a tow truck
TLID2029 Prepare articles for delivery
TLIE1003 Participate in basic workplace

communication
TLIE3004 Prepare workplace documents

procedures
TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management

system
TLIF2019 Ensure a safe on-board passenger and

working environment
TLIF2072 Comply with safety and security

procedures
TLIF3091 Apply awareness of dangerous goods

and hazardous materials requirements
TLIH3002 Plan and navigate routes

attractions
TLII2019 Provide taxi customer service
TLIK2003 Apply keyboard skills
TLIK2010 Use infotechnology devices in the

workplace
TLIL2060 Complete induction to the transport

industry
TLILIC2015 Licence to drive a medium rigid

vehicle
TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when

working with goods and cargo
TLIP2030 Conduct courier/delivery cash

transactions
TLIP2037 Carry out financial transactions and

maintain records
TLIU1009 Monitor plant and equipment in an

environmentally sustainable manner

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI21710 Certificate II in Road Transport
Yard Operations (Freight Handler).
Links
036d851

TLI21315 Certificate II in Rail Infrastructure Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI21315 Certificate II in Rail Infrastructure
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in basic operations within the rail
infrastructure environment undertaking a range of tasks involving known routines and
procedures, and taking some responsibility for the quality of work outcomes.
Job roles
Rail Infrastructure – Track Work
 Track Worker
 Track Installer
 Track Maintainer
Rail Infrastructure – Structures
 Structures Maintainer
Rail Infrastructure – Track Surfacing
 Plant Operator
 Mobile Plant Operator
 Way Gang Driver.
Please note: RTO to insert on the testamur, the specialist elective unit group selected from
the group choice below.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules


All units within one of the specialist elective unit groups (job roles) from Group A, Group B
or Group C listed below plus
3 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting Group A or
Group C or
4 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting Group B.
The general elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed Training
Package. The general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the
qualification.
The following imported units have a prerequisite unit:
 CPCCCM2007B Use explosive power tools
 CPCCCM2008B Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding.
Core units
TLIF2080 Safely access the rail corridor
TLIU2008 Apply environmental procedures to rail infrastructure
Select all units from one of the following specialist elective groups:
Group A: Track Work
Group B: Structures
Group C: Track Surfacing.
Group A: Track Work
TLIB2085 Apply track fundamentals

TLIB2092 Operate minor mechanical equipment
TLIS2030 Carry out track ballasting
TLIS2031 Install railway sleepers
TLIS2034 Install and repair rail fastening systems
TLIS2044 Carry out rail installation
Group B: Structures
RIICCM201D Carry out measurements and calculations
RIICCM203D Read and interpret plans and job specifications
TLIB2084 Carry out routine maintenance of structures
TLIB2086 Apply awareness of structures fundamentals
Group C: Track Surfacing
TLIB1093 Clean equipment and restore worksite
TLIB2001 Check and assess operational capabilities of equipment
TLIB2091 Measure and record track geometry
TLIC2058 Travel medium or heavy self-propelled on-track equipment
OR
TLIC2059 Propel and operate light on-track equipment

CPCCOHS2001A Apply OHS requirements, policies and procedures in the

construction industry
CPCCCM2007B Use explosive power tools
CPCCCM2008B Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding
RIICCM205D Carry out manual excavation
RIICCM207D Spread and compact materials manually
RIICCM208D Carry out basic levelling
RIICCM209D Carry out concrete work
RIIHAN301D Operate elevating work platform
RIIMPO317D Conduct roller operations
RIIMPO318D Conduct civil construction skid steer loader operations
RIIMPO319D Conduct backhoe/loader operations
RIIMPO320D Conduct civil construction excavator operations
RIIMPO321D Conduct civil construction wheeled front end loader operations
RIIMPO322D Conduct civil construction tracked front end loader operations
RIIMPO326D Conduct civil construction water cart operations
RIIWHS204D Work safely at heights
RIIWHS205D Control traffic with stop-slow bat
RIIWHS302D Implement traffic management plan
TLIB2034 Maintain poles and associated hardware
TLIB2097 Install and maintain guard rails
TLIB2121 Maintain rail joints
TLIC3045 Operate road/rail vehicle

TLIF2062 Apply awareness of safeworking rules and regulations
TLIK2010 Use infotechnology devices in the workplace
TLIS2004 Install and maintain rail bonding systems
TLIS2020 Install overhead wiring structure
TLIS2027 Install and maintain surface track drainage
TLIS2033 Install and repair temporary track supports
TLIS2035 Install and repair fences and gates
TLIW2001 Operate under track protection rules
TLIW2028 Identify the principles of ballast cleaning operations
TLIW2029 Identify the principles of ballast regulator operations
TLIW2030 Identify the principles of dynamic track stabaliser operations
TLIW2031 Identify the principles of self-propelled rail grinder operations
TLIW2032 Identify the principles of tamping machine operations
TLIW2033 Identify the principles of mechanised track laying operations
TLIW2038 Place and remove temporary speed restriction equipment
TLIW3035 Heat and cut materials using oxy-LPG equipment for the rail
industry

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI21311 Certificate II in Rail Infrastructure.
Links
036d851


TLI21416 Certificate II in Stevedoring Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI21416 Certificate II in Stevedoring
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in operational roles within a stevedoring
environment. It involves a range of tasks involving known routines and procedures, and
taking some responsibility for the quality of work outcomes.
Successful achievement of the licensing units within the qualification must align with
applicable licensing and regulatory requirements.
Job roles
 Stevedore.
No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the
time of publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
5 technical elective units listed below plus
3 general elective units from either the general elective units
listed below or from the remaining technical elective units
listed below or from any relevant nationally endorsed Training
Package or accredited course. The general elective units must
contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to ensure
that all prerequisite units specified are complied with.

Core units
TLIA2050 Lash and unlash cargo and containers
TLID1001 Shift materials safely using manual handling

methods
TLIU1009 Monitor plant and equipment in an

environmentally sustainable manner
TLIB2001 Check and assess operational capabilities of

equipment
TLIC3005 Drive heavy combination vehicle
TLID2003 Handle dangerous goods/hazardous substances
TLID2010 Operate a forklift
TLID2012 Operate specialised load shifting equipment
TLID2045 Operate specialised light load shifting equipment
TLID2047 Prepare cargo for transfer with slings
TLID3011 Conduct specialised forklift operations
TLID3040 Control lift and movement of crane
TLIE2007 Use communications systems

TLIF2068 Work at height in the stevedoring industry
TLIF3060 Control traffic as a pilot vehicle operator
TLIL1001 Complete workplace orientation/induction

procedures
TLILIC2001 Licence to operate a forklift truck
TLILIC2005 Licence to operate a boom-type elevating work

platform (boom length 11 metres or more)
HLTAID002 Provide basic emergency life support
MARC022 Perform mooring and unmooring activities
MARE002 Communicate during mooring and unmooring

activities
MARF017 Follow work health and safety, and emergency

procedures during mooring and unmooring
activities
TLIA2003 Connect and disconnect reefer units
TLIA2009 Complete and check import/export

documentation
TLIA2014 Use product knowledge to complete work

operations
TLID2013 Move materials mechanically using automated

equipment
TLID2022 Conduct weighbridge operations
TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility legislation,

regulations and workplace procedures
TLIF2018 Operate firefighting equipment

TLIL2008 Complete routine administrative tasks
TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when working with

goods and cargo

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI21413 Certificate II in Stevedoring.
Links
036d851

TLI21616 Certificate II in Warehousing Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI21616 Certificate II in Warehousing Operations
Training Package.
It involves a range of tasks involving known routines and procedures, and taking some
accountability for the quality of work outcomes.
No licensing legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time
of publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
13 general elective units from the general elective units listed below.
Up to 3 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant
nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The general
elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the
qualification.
Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to ensure that all
prerequisite units specified are complied with.
Core units
TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility legislation, regulations and

workplace procedures
TLIL1001 Complete workplace orientation/induction procedures

BSBCUS20 Deliver a service to customers

1
TLIA2009 Complete and check import/export documentation
TLIA2014 Use product knowledge to complete work operations
TLIA3017 Identify products and store to specifications
TLIB2009 Check conveyor operational status
TLIB2029 Use and maintain minor mechanical equipment

TLID2013 Move materials mechanically using automated equipment
TLID2016 Load and unload explosives/dangerous goods
TLID2021 Use specialised bulk transfer equipment (dry)
TLIE2001 Present routine workplace information
TLIF2012 Apply safe procedures when handling/transporting

dangerous goods or explosives
TLIH2001 Interpret road maps and navigate pre-determined routes
TLIH2003 Prioritise courier/delivery operations
TLIJ2003 Apply grain protection measures
TLIJ2004 Implement grain monitoring measures
TLIK2007 Perform electronic data interchange to transmit shipping

documentation
TLIL2031 Monitor and process attendance records

1
TLILIC200 Licence to operate an order picking forklift truck

2
TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when working with goods and

cargo
TLIP2014 Capture records into a records keeping system
TLIP2017 Maintain control of records
TLIP2018 Provide information from and about records
TLIP2024 Conduct financial transactions
TLIP2029 Prepare and process financial documents
TLIP2032 Maintain petty cash account
TLIP2033 Sell products and services
TLIU1009 Monitor plant and equipment in an environmentally

sustainable manner
TLIU2012 Participate in environmentally sustainable work practices
TLIW2017 Cut and join materials
TLIW2020 Undertake pallet repairs
TLIW2021 Clean and inspect pallets
TLIW2023 Manufacture pallets using manual methods

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI21610 Certificate II in Warehousing
Operations.

Links
036d851

TLI21716 Certificate II in Road Transport Yard Operations (Freight Handler) Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI21716 Certificate II in Road Transport Yard Operations

(Freight Handler)
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in freight handling within the road transport yard
environment.
It involves a prescribed range of tasks involving known routines and procedures, and taking
some accountability for the quality of work outcomes.
Job roles
 Freight Handler.
No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at the time
of publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
11 general elective units from the general elective units listed below. Up to 3 of the
general elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed
Training Package or accredited course. The general elective units must contribute to
the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to ensure that all prerequisite
units specified are complied with.
Core units

TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility legislation, regulations and workplace

procedures
TLIC2050 Operate a terminal tractor
TLID2016 Load and unload explosives and dangerous goods
TLID2018 Handle furniture and effects

TLID2029 Prepare articles for delivery
TLIF2012 Apply safe procedures when handling/ transporting dangerous goods or

explosives

documentation
TLIO2011 Provide revenue protection measures
TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when working with goods and cargo

TLIU1009 Monitor plant and equipment in an environmentally sustainable manner

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI21710 Certificate II in Road Transport
Yard Operations (Freight Handler).
Links
036d851

TLI21815 Certificate II in Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI21815 Certificate II in Logistics
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in logistics operations support within the
Transport and Logistics Industry who undertakes a range of tasks involving known routines
and procedures, and who takes some responsibility for the quality of their work outcomes.
Job roles
 Logistics Support Officer
 Logistics Clerk.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
3 technical elective units from the technical elective units listed below plus
4 general elective units from the general elective units or remaining technical elective units
listed below. Up to 3 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant
nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The general elective units must
Core units


procedures
TLIH2003 Prioritise courier/delivery operations

documentation
BSBCMM301 Process customer complaints


This qualification replaces and is not equivalent to TLI21810 Certificate II in Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI21915 Certificate II in Track Protection Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI21915 Certificate II in Track Protection
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in basic operations in the rail
infrastructure environment undertaking track protection activities.
This includes a range of tasks involving known routines and procedures, and taking some
responsibility for the quality of work outcomes.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
4 specialist elective units from the specialist elective units listed below plus
1 general elective unit from the general elective units listed below or from the remaining
specialist elective units listed below. This 1 general elective unit may be selected from any
relevant nationally endorsed Training Package. The general elective units must contribute to
Core units

TLIF2081 Perform lookout duties
TLIF2082 Perform handsignaller duties
TLIF3083 Conduct track protection assessment
TLIL3082 Implement absolute signal blocking
TLIE2029 Conduct workplace information briefings
TLIF2097 Use audible track warning devices
TLIW2037 Clip and secure points
TLIW2038 Place and remove temporary speed restriction equipment
TLIW2039 Place and remove permanent way stop boards
TLIW3026 Operate stand alone signalling/point control equipment


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI21911 Certificate II in Track Protection.
Links
036d851

TLI22015 Certificate II in Shunting Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI22015 Certificate II in Shunting
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in basic operations within the rail yard/terminal
environment undertaking a range of tasks involving known routines and procedures, and
Job roles
 Shunter
 Terminal Operator.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package. The
general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Core units
TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail operations in yards or sidings
TLIC3017 Shunt rolling stock

TLIF3087 Follow work health and safety, and environmental procedures in the
rail industry
TLIB2131 Prepare train
TLIB3019 Test train braking system
TLIB3021 Conduct train roll-by inspection
TLIF3085 Apply local incident response procedures
TLIF3091 Apply awareness of dangerous goods and hazardous materials

requirements
TLIW2041 Clip points and apply rail safety equipment

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI22013 Certificate II in Shunting.
Links
036d851


TLI22115 Certificate II in Rail Track Vehicle Driving Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI22115 Certificate II in Rail Track Vehicle Driving
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person driving a medium/heavy rail track vehicle from one
location to another over main line track.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications in a wide variety of contexts, which may
involve application of some discretion and judgement in selecting equipment, services or
contingency measures. It may also include responsibility for coordinating the work of others.
Job roles
 Track Vehicle Operator/Driver
 Track Machine Driver.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units
TLIC2075 Drive and monitor medium or heavy self-propelled on-track equipment
TLIC2076 Establish and operate braking system on medium/heavy self-propelled

on-track equipment
TLIC2078 Identify and respond to signals and trackside signs
TLIC2080 Start up, shut down and stable medium/heavy self-propelled on-track
equipment
TLIF2106 Respond to emergencies and abnormal situations when driving

medium/heavy on-track vehicles
TLIB1093 Clean equipment and restore worksites
TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on on-track vehicles
TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking system
TLIC0083 Access rail track to travel track vehicle under a proceed authority
TLIC0084 Access rail track to travel track vehicles under manual block working
conditions
TLIC2054 Access rail track to run track vehicle within defined worksite
TLIC2074 Couple and uncouple track maintenance vehicles

TLIE2031 Use communication systems for on-track vehicle operations
TLIF3058 Apply safeworking rules and regulations to rail functions
TLIF3091 Apply awareness of dangerous goods and hazardous materials requirements
TLII4022 Identify and meet customer requirements

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI22113 Certificate II in Rail Track Vehicle
Driving.
Links
036d851

TLI22215 Certificate II in Tram or Light Rail Infrastructure Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI22215 Certificate II in Tram or Light Rail Infrastructure
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in basic operations within the tram/light
rail infrastructure environment undertaking a range of tasks involving known routines and
procedures, and taking some responsibility for the quality of work outcomes.
Job roles
 Tram Infrastructure Track Worker Level 1–3
 Light Rail Track Worker.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units
MEM12023A Perform engineering measurements

TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram or light rail track fundamentals
TLIC2059 Propel and operate light on-track equipment
TLIS2031 Install railway sleepers
TLIS2044 Carry out rail installation
TLIW3027 Operate minor track equipment

TLIW3035 Heat and cut materials using oxy-LPG equipment for the rail industry

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI22213 Certificate II in Tram or Light Rail
Infrastructure.
Links
036d851

TLI22315 Certificate II in Rail Customer Service Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI22315 Certificate II in Rail Customer Service
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in operations within the rail customer service
environment undertaking a range of tasks involving known routines and procedures, and
Job roles
The TLI22315 Certificate II in Rail Customer Service qualification is aligned to the following
defined roles:
 Booking clerk
 Customer service attendant/assistant
 Passenger service officer
 Station assistant/officer
 Train buffet operator
 Train conductor.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification
Core units
TLIB3118 Apply awareness of railway fundamentals

TLII2020 Provide assistance to customers with specific needs
TLII3022 Provide customer service in rail operations
CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to behaviours of concern
HLTAID003 Provide first aid
SITHFAB201 Provide responsible service of alcohol
SITXFSA101 Use hygienic practices for food safety

TLIL2048 Prepare for train departure
TLIP2038 Conduct, balance and secure financial transactions
TLIP2039 Ensure the confidentiality, privacy and security of customer

information
TLIP3034 Advise on and construct fares for passengers

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI22313 Certificate II in Rail Customer
Service.
Links
036d851

TLI22416 Certificate II in Furniture Removal Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI22416 Certificate II in Furniture Removal
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in furniture removal job roles within the
transport and logistics industry.
Job roles
 Furniture Removalist.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
5 general elective units from the general elective units listed below. Up to 3
of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally
endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The general elective units
must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Core units

TLID2019 Pack and unpack cartons during a removal
TLIE2032 Assess removal load

TLILIC2015 Licence to drive a medium rigid vehicle

TLIU1009 Monitor plant and equipment in an environmentally sustainable

manner

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI22413 Certificate II in Furniture Removal.
Links
036d851

TLI31216 Certificate III in Driving Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI31216 Certificate III in Driving Operations
Training Package.
The following units have been added to the general elective units:
 TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management system
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in driving operation job roles within the Transport and
Logistics Industry.
It involves a defined range of skilled operations, usually within a range of broader related
activities involving known routines, methods and procedures, with some discretion and
judgement in selecting equipment, services or contingency measures and within known time
constraints.
Job roles
include:
 Agitator Driver
 Bus Driver
 Line Haul Driver
 Local Heavy General Freight Driver
 Pilot Vehicle Driver
 Tip Truck Driver.
Successful achievement of the licensing units within the qualification must align with licensing
and regulatory requirements applicable to driving and state/territory regulatory requirements.
Entry Requirements

Packaging Rules
1 licensing/industry elective unit relevant to the vehicle type applicable to the job role from the
licensing/industry elective units listed below plus
All units within one of the specialist elective groups (job roles) from Group A, Group B, Group
C, Group D, Group E, Group F, Group G, Group H, Group I, Group K, Group L, or Group M
listed below plus
4 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting Group B, Group
K (depending on job role), Group M or
5 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting Group K
(depending on job role), Group L, or
6 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting Group A, Group
C, Group D, Group E, Group F, Group G, Group H or Group I.
Up to 3 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed
Training Package or accredited course. The units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of
the qualification.
Elective units can only be counted once towards the qualification packaging rules i.e. if a unit is
listed in both a specialist elective group and the general elective group, it can only be counted as
one of the elected units required.
 CPCCCO3054A Operate concrete agitator trucks
 UEGNSG614A Load, unload, exchange and connect LPG cylinders.
Core units

TLIC4006 Drive multi-combination vehicle
TLILIC3017 Licence to drive a heavy combination vehicle
TLILIC3018 Licence to drive a multi-combination vehicle

Group A: Heavy General Freight
Group B: Agitator
Group C: Bus
Group D: Refrigerated
Group E: Pilot Vehicle
Group F: Dry/Liquid
Group G: Car Carrier
Group H: Livestock
Group I: Wood Products
Group K: Dangerous Goods
Group L: Over Dimensional
Group M: Tip Truck.
Group A: Heavy General Freight


procedures
Group B: Agitator
Deliver concrete to site

PMC552061C
TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility, legislation, regulations and workplace

procedures
Group C: Bus
TLIC3042 Operate coach/bus
TLII3009 Provide on-board services to customers
Group D: Refrigerated
TLIA4025 Regulate temperature controlled stock
TLIB3006 Carry out inspection of vehicles designed to carry special loads

procedures
Group E: Pilot Vehicle

TLIC3010 Pilot or escort oversized and/or overmassed loads
TLIE3009 Use pilot and escort communication
TLIF3013 Coordinate breakdowns and emergencies
Group F: Dry/Liquid
TLID3024 Use specialised liquid bulk transfer equipment (gravity/pressurised)
TLIE3002 Estimate/calculate mass, area and quantify dimensions

procedures
Group G: Car Carrier
TLID3014 Load and unload vehicles carrying special loads

procedures
Group H: Livestock
TLID3020 Care for livestock in transit

procedures
Group I: Wood Products


procedures
Group K: Dangerous Goods
TLID3015 Identify and label explosives/dangerous goods
TLID3027 Prepare for transport of dangerous goods

procedures
Selection of both or one of the following depending on job role:
TLILIC0001 Licence to transport dangerous goods by road
UEGNSG614A Load, unload, exchange and connect LPG cylinders
Group L: Over Dimensional

procedures
Group M: Tip Truck
TLIC0004 Operate a tip truck


procedures
CPCCCO3054A Operate concrete agitator trucks

industry
CPPWMT3011A Respond to waste emergencies
CPPWMT3015A Move waste using loadshifting equipment
CPPWMT3044A Identify wastes and hazards
FPICOT3261 Transport forestry logs using trucks
HLTWHS006 Manage personal stressors in the work environment
PMC552061C Deliver concrete to site
TLIA3002 Maintain container/cargo records
TLIA3004 Process receipt and delivery of containers and cargo
TLIA3008 Transfer cargo
TLIA3015 Complete receival/despatch documentation
TLIA4005 Check and evaluate records and documentation

TLIB2003 Carry out vehicle servicing and maintenance
TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of trailers
TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify minor faults
TLIB2023 Provide sanitation and water services support to passenger transportation

units
TLIB2073 Clean road tankers
TLIB2119 Carry out maintenance of trailers
TLIB3005 Carry out maintenance of vehicles designed to carry special loads
TLIB3014 Load and unload wheeled or tracked crane
TLIB3015 Undertake site inspection
TLIB3016 De-rig, pack and store tools and equipment
TLIB3017 Assemble and dismantle boom or jib
TLIC2025 Operate four wheel drive vehicle
TLIC2049 Operate heavy vehicle on unsealed roads
TLIC3063 Operate vehicle carrying special loads
TLIC3064 Operate car carrier vehicle
TLIC3071 Operate an agitator

TLID3020 Care for livestock in transit
TLID3023 Use specialised liquid bulk gas transfer equipment
TLID3031 Rig load
TLID3033 Operate a vehicle-mounted loading crane
TLID3035 Operate a boom type elevating work platform
TLID3036 Lift and move load using mobile crane
TLID3046 Operate container side lifter
TLID4032 Plan and conduct specialised lift

TLIE3012 Consolidate manifest documentation
TLIE3016 Estimate/calculate load shifting requirements for a mobile crane
TLIE3026 Carry out advanced calculations in the transport and logistics industry
TLIE3028 Complete a work diary in the road transport industry

procedures
TLIF0002 Administer chain of responsibility policies and procedures
TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management system
TLIF2012 Apply safe procedures when handling/transporting dangerous goods or

explosives
TLIF2019 Ensure a safe on-board passenger and working environment
TLIF3063 Administer the implementation of fatigue management strategies
TLIF4014 Develop and maintain a safe workplace
TLIF4065 Ensure compliance with Australian Dangerous Goods Code
TLIH3004 Identify major roads, services and attractions

TLII3003 Provide customer service in transport vehicles/vessels
TLII3004 Manage camping procedures for coaches and buses
TLII3009 Provide on-board services to customers
TLII3010 Provide travel information to customers
TLIJ3002 Apply quality systems
TLIJ3005 Sample, inspect and test products to specifications
TLIL2046 Handle customer luggage/property
TLIL2060 Complete induction to the transport industry
TLIL4005 Apply conflict/grievance resolution strategies
TLIL4009 Manage personal work priorities and professional development
TLIL4010 Assess and confirm customer transport requirements
TLIL4034 Arrange alternative passenger transport
TLILIC0012 Licence to operate a vehicle loading crane (capacity 10 metre tonnes and
above)
TLIO1002 Follow security procedures when working with passengers and personnel
TLIO2003 Undertake loading and unloading in a designated secured environment

TLIO3004 Conduct control procedures for transferring explosives/dangerous/

hazardous/high risk goods
TLIO3007 Undertake emergency response action to a security threat
TLIO3012 Manage disruptive and/or unlawful behaviour
TLIO3016 Apply and monitor workplace security procedures
TLIP3026 Maintain financial records in a small business
TLIU3014 Operate vehicle in an environmentally sustainable manner
UEGNSG005A Prepare to work in the gas industry
UEGNSG141A Apply Workplace Health and Safety regulations, codes and practices in the
gas supply industry
UEGNSG601A Assess the operational capability of gas safety equipment on tankers

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI31210 Certificate III in Driving
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI31316 Certificate III in International Freight Forwarding (Operator) Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI31316 Certificate III in International Freight Forwarding

(Operator)
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in international freight forwarding job roles
at an operational level, within the International Freight Forwarding Industry.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications, applied in a wide variety of
contexts, which may involve application of some discretion and judgement in
selecting equipment, services or contingency measures. It may also include
responsibility for coordinating the work of others.
No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at
the time of publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units
TLIA4033 Organise international transport of freight


TLII0002 Provide freight forwarding information and customer service

documentation
TLIA0001 Complete import procedures
TLIA0002 Prepare cargo for export
TLIA3010 Coordinate goods to bond premises
TLIA4031 Consolidate freight
TLIA4032 Organise transport of freight or goods

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI31310 Certificate III in International
Freight Forwarding (Operator).
Links
036d851


TLI31415 Certificate III in Rail Driving Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI31415 Certificate III in Rail Driving
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person who drives a light rail train or tram, or operates a
monorail within a metropolitan or suburban transport environment.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications applied in a wide variety of contexts, which
may involve application of some discretion and judgement in selecting equipment, services or
Job roles
 Tram Driver
 Light Rail Driver
 Monorail Operator.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
All units within one of the specialist elective unit groups (job roles) from Group A or Group
B listed below plus
Core units

Group A: Tram/Light Rail
TLIB3078 Inspect, prepare and start an electric tram
TLIC3032 Operate and monitor a passenger electric tram
TLIC3033 Drive an electric tram to operational requirements
TLIC3034 Berth and shut down an electric tram
TLIF4061 Respond to electric tram-driving emergencies and abnormal situations
Group B: Monorail
TLIC3039 Operate and monitor a monorail train
TLIB3002 Test equipment and isolate faults


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI31410 Certificate III in Rail Driving.
Links
036d851

TLI31616 Certificate III in Warehousing Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI31616 Certificate III in Warehousing Operations
Training Package.
activities involving known routines, methods and procedures, with some discretion and
judgement in selecting equipment, services or contingency measures and within known
time constraints.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
general elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed Training
Package or accredited course. The general elective units must contribute to the
vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Core units

procedures

BSBCUS30 Deliver and monitor a service to customers

1
BSBWOR30 Organise personal work priorities and development

1
TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to organise stock control
TLIA3018 Organise despatch operations
TLIA3019 Organise receival operations
TLIA3024 Organise warehouse records operations
TLIA3026 Monitor storage facilities
TLIA3038 Control and order stock
TLIA3039 Receive and store stock
TLID3023 Use specialised liquid bulk gas transfer equipment

TLID3031 Rig load
TLID3036 Lift and move load using a mobile crane
TLID3043 Shift loads using gantry equipment
TLID3044 Shift loads using cranes
TLIE3015 Undertake rigger/dogger and driver communication
TLIE3016 Estimate/calculate load shifting requirements for a mobile crane
TLIF3003 Implement and monitor work health and safety procedures
TLIF3004 Organise work health and safety procedures in the workplace
TLIF3022 Implement/monitor procedures when warehousing/storing dangerous

goods/hazardous substances

requirements
TLIG3002 Lead a work team or group
TLIJ3006 Implement grain protection procedures
TLIL3002 Undertake employee payroll activities
TLIL3003 Conduct induction process

TLIO3004 Conduct control procedures for transferring

explosives/dangerous/hazardous/high risk goods
TLIP3015 Document a records system
TLIP3016 Identify and classify records to be captured
TLIP3019 Provide records retrieval service
TLIP3020 Sentence records
TLIP3021 Undertake disposal program
TLIP3022 Undertake movement of records
TLIP3023 Destroy records
TLIP3026 Maintain financial records in a small business
TLIU3011 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work practices
TLIW2018 Operate hand held air/power equipment for production processes
TLIW2019 Apply surface coatings using a spray gun
TLIW2022 Manufacture pallets using automated methods
TLIW2024 Dock boards using computer programmed machinery
TLIW2025 Dock boards on mechanical feeds
TLIW3006 Operate computerised mail and parcels sorting equipment
TLIW3007 Code and coordinate video-coding operations
TLIW3008 Carry out culler facer canceller operations


This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI31610 Certificate III in Warehousing
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI31716 Certificate III in Mobile Crane Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI31716 Certificate III in Mobile Crane Operations
Training Package.
This qualification is designed for mobile crane operation within the Transport and
Logistics Industry and other industries.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications applied in a wide variety of contexts.
Successful achievement of the high risk work (HRW) and heavy vehicle licensing
units in the qualification must align with applicable licensing and regulatory
requirements.
People seeking certification for HRW licensing units should check the requirements
with Safe Work Australia.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
the qualification.
The following units have prerequisite units:
 CPCCCM2010B Work safely at heights
 CPCCCM3003A Work safely around power sources, services and assets.

Note:
To comply with the National Standard for Licensing Persons Performing High Risk Work,
TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a non-slewing mobile crane (greater than 3 tonnes capacity)
must be achieved before commencing TLILIC3008 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane
(up to 20 tonnes).
Core units
CPCCCM2010B Work safely at heights
CPCCCM3003A Work safely around power sources, services and assets
CPCCLDG3001A Licence to perform dogging

industry
TLIB3013 Maintain mobile cranes
TLIF3084 Follow mobile crane safety procedures
TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a non-slewing mobile crane (greater than 3 tonnes

capacity)
TLILIC3008 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (up to 20 tonnes)
CPCCOHS1001A Work safely in the construction industry
HLTAID006 Provide advanced first aid
TLIB3011 Set up and rig crane for lift
TLIB3012 Plan job and set up work areas

TLID3031 Rig load
TLILIC2005 Licence to operate a boom-type elevating work platform (boom length

11 metres or more)

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI31710 Certificate III in Mobile Crane
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI31815 Certificate III in Rail Track Surfacing Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI31815 Certificate III in Rail Track Surfacing
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in the installation and maintenance of
mechanical rail track and the operation of track surfacing and other track equipment.
Job roles
Job roles and titles vary across different sectors. A possible job title relevant to this
qualification includes:
 Rail track surfacer.
publication.
Entry Requirements
The entry requirement for this qualification is TLI21315 Certificate II in Rail Infrastructure
(Track Surfacing) or relevant industry experience gained by working within the rail
infrastructure environment.
Packaging Rules
Core units
TLIB3094 Check and repair track geometry

TLIS3026 Implement track maintenance and construction
TLIS3039 Measure and mark track for resurfacing
TLIF3089 Implement fatigue management policies and procedures for rail

infrastructure
TLIS3025 Implement ballast unloading
TLIU4001 Implement and monitor environmental protection policies and procedures


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI31811 Certificate III in Rail Track
Surfacing.
Links
036d851

TLI31915 Certificate III in Mechanical Rail Signalling Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI31915 Certificate III in Mechanical Rail Signalling
Training Package.

This is a general qualification for a person engaged in the installation and maintenance of
mechanical rail signalling equipment.
Job roles
• Mechanical rail signaller.
publication.
Entry Requirements
The entry requirement for this qualification is the 7 core units of competency from TLI21315
Certificate II in Rail Infrastructure listed below or relevant industry experience gained by
working within the rail infrastructure environment.
Entry requirement units
Packaging Rules

The following imported unit has a prerequisite unit:
 UETTDRRF02B Perform pole top rescue.
Core units
TLIB3046 Service and clean mechanical signalling equipment and

infrastructure
TLIB3047 Repair and adjust mechanical signalling equipment and

infrastructure
TLIB3048 Carry out off-site repair, overhaul and assembly of mechanical

signalling equipment
TLIB3053 Maintain mechanical signalling locking and interlocking devices
TLIB3120 Test mechanical signalling equipment and isolate faults
TLIS3005 Install mechanical infrastructure for signalling
HLTAID001 Provide cardiopulmonary resuscitation
NWP227B Control vegetation on a site
RIIWHS202D Enter and work in confined spaces

TAEASS401B Plan assessment activities and processes
TAEASS402B Assess competence
TAEDEL301A Provide work skill instruction
TLIS2004 Install and maintain rail bonding systems
TLIS3023 Erect and mount structures and housings for signalling equipment
industry
UETTDRRF02B Perform pole top rescue

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI31913 Certificate III in Mechanical Rail
Signalling.
Links
036d851


TLI32115 Certificate III in Rail Structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32115 Certificate III in Rail Structures
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in the rail infrastructure environment who
performs tasks involving checking and repairing structures through a broad range of skilled
applications in a wide variety of contexts. It may involve application of some discretion and
judgement in selecting equipment, services or contingency measures. It may also include
responsibility for coordinating the work of others.
Job roles
Job roles and titles vary across different sectors. Possible job titles relevant to the job role
groups listed below include:
Steel/Concrete/Masonry Structures Maintenance
 Senior structures maintainer
Timber Structures Maintenance
 Senior structures maintainer.
Please note: RTO to insert on the testamur, the specialist elective group selected from the
group choice below.
publication.
Entry Requirements
(Structures) or relevant industry experience gained by working in the rail infrastructure
(structures) environment.
Packaging Rules
All units within one of the specialist elective unit groups from Group A or Group B listed
below plus
2 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting Group A or
3 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting Group B.

Up to 2 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed
Training Package. The general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of
the qualification.
 MEM24001B Perform basic penetrant testing
 MEM24003B Perform basic magnetic particle testing.
Core units
TLIS2013 Install minor structures
TLIS3029 Implement structures maintenance and installation of minor structures
 Group A: Steel/Concrete/Masonry Structures Maintenance
 Group B: Timber Structures Maintenance.
Group A: Steel/Concrete/Masonry Structures Maintenance
TLIB2082 Repair steel structures
TLIB2083 Maintain bridge bearings
TLIB2096 Repair concrete/masonry structures
Group B: Timber Structures Maintenance
TLIB2081 Repair timber structures
TLIS2028 Install and replace transoms
MEM18001C Use hand tools

MEM24001B Perform basic penetrant testing
MEM24003B Perform basic magnetic particle testing

infrastructure
TLIS2012 Install and service rail lubrication equipment
TLIS2028 Install and replace transoms
TLIS3037 Install and repair rail earthworks
TLIU4001 Implement and monitor environmental protection policies and

procedures
TLIW3034 Apply protective coating systems to structures

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI32111 Certificate III in Rail Structures.

Links
036d851

TLI32315 Certificate III in Electric Passenger Train Guard Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32315 Certificate III in Electric Passenger Train Guard
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in the duties of an electric passenger train
guard within a metropolitan train system.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units
TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on electric passenger trains
TLIB2111 Assist with testing train braking system on electric passenger train
TLIB3112 Prepare electric passenger train as part of guard duties
TLIC3052 Assist with shunting, coupling and uncoupling electric passenger

trains
TLIC3057 Perform guard duties as part of electric passenger train operations

TLIE3021 Work and communicate effectively with others
TLII3020 Provide assistance to customers
TLIF2019 Ensure a safe on-board passenger and working environment

manner
SITXCOM401 Manage conflict

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI32310 Certificate III in Electric Passenger
Train Guard.

Links
036d851

TLI32416 Certificate III in Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32416 Certificate III in Logistics
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in logistics operations within the Transport and
Logistics Industry.
activities involving known routines, methods and procedures, where some discretion and
judgement is required in selecting equipment, services or contingency measures within
known time constraints. It may also include responsibility for coordinating the work of
others.
Job roles
• Logistics Administration Officer
• Logistics Service Clerk.
of publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
2 core unit listed below plus
6 technical elective units from the technical elective units
listed below plus
5 general elective units from the general elective units or

remaining technical elective units listed below. Up to 3 of the

general elective units may be selected from any relevant
nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The
general elective units must contribute to the vocational
outcomes of the qualification.
Core units
TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility legislation,

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to

customers
TLIA3015 Complete receival/despatch

documentation
TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to organise stock

control
TLIA3017 Identify products and store to

specifications
TLIA3023 Coordinate stocktakes
TLIE3002 Estimate/calculate mass, area and

quantify dimensions
TLIE3018 Maintain freight records

TLIF0002 Administer chain of responsibility

policies and procedures
TLIF1001 Follow work health and safety

procedures
TLIF3003 Implement and monitor work health and

safety procedures
TLIF3063 Administer the implementation of fatigue

management strategies

attractions
TLIP3027 Organise freight invoicing and payment
TLIU2012 Participate in environmentally

sustainable work practices
BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and services
BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and

development
MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis
TLID1001 Shift materials safely using manual

handling methods
TLIK2010 Use infotechnology devices in the

workplace
TLIL3002 Undertake employee payroll activities

TLILIC2002 Licence to operate an order picking

forklift truck
TLIO3007 Undertake emergency response action to

a security threat
TLIO3016 Apply and monitor workplace security

procedures
TLIP3015 Document a records system
TLIP3016 Identify and classify records to be

captured
TLIP3019 Provide records retrieval service
TLIP3020 Sentence records
TLIP3021 Undertake disposal program
TLIP3022 Undertake movement of records
TLIP3023 Destroy records
TLIP3026 Maintain financial records in a small

business

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI32410 Certificate III in Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI32515 Certificate III in Rail Infrastructure Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32515 Certificate III in Rail Infrastructure
Training Package.
performs tasks involving a broad range of skilled applications in a wide variety of contexts. It
Job roles
Rail Infrastructure – Track Maintenance
 Senior track maintainer
 Ganger
Rail Infrastructure – Track Construction
 Senior track installer
 Ganger
Rail Infrastructure – Turnout Construction
 Specialist track installer
 Ganger
Rail Infrastructure – Track Welding
 Track welder
Rail Infrastructure – Track Examination
 Track examiner
Rail Infrastructure – Rail Testing
 Rail tester
Rail Infrastructure – Timber/Composite Turnout Construction
 Turnout builder
 Points and crossings builder
Rail Infrastructure – Concrete/Steel Turnout Construction
 Turnout builder
 Points and crossings builder

Rail Infrastructure – Track Drainage Maintenance

 Track drainage maintainer.
publication.
Entry Requirements
(Track Work) or relevant industry experience gained by working in the rail infrastructure
environment.
Packaging Rules
All units within one of the specialist elective unit groups (job roles) listed below plus
A minimum of 2 general elective units and a maximum of 4 general elective units from
the general elective units listed below (depending on the specialist elective group or job role
selected).
Up to 2 of the general electives units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed
Training Package. The general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of
the qualification.
Core units

 Group A: Track Maintenance
 Group B: Track Construction
 Group C: Turnout Construction
 Group D: Track Welding
 Group E: Track Examination
 Group F: Rail Testing
 Group G: Timber/Composite Turnout Construction
 Group H: Concrete/Steel Turnout Construction
 Group I: Track Drainage Maintenance.
Group A: Track Maintenance
TLIB3095 Check and repair points and crossings
Group B: Track Construction
Group C: Turnout Construction
TLIS3045 Install turnouts
Group D: Track Welding
TLIW2012 Grind rails
TLIW3015 Weld rail using aluminothermic welding process
Group E: Track Examination

TLIB3099 Examine track infrastructure
TLIB3100 Visually inspect track infrastructure
Group F: Rail Testing
TLIS3010 Test rail using ultrasonic equipment
TLIS3011 Test rail using nondestructive testing equipment
Group G: Timber/Composite Turnout Construction
TLIS3041 Construct timber or composite points and crossings
Group H: Concrete/Steel Turnout Construction
TLIS3040 Construct concrete or steel points and crossings
Group I: Track Drainage Maintenance
AHCARB202A Fell small trees
AHCARB205A Operate and maintain chainsaws
RIIRIS401D Apply site risk management system
TLIB3040 Inspect poles and associated hardware
TLIB3099 Examine track infrastructure
TLIB3102 Adjust rail
TLIB4071 Install and maintain pole mounted switches and transformers
TLIC2058 Travel medium or heavy self-propelled on-track equipment


infrastructure
TLIS2012 Install and service rail lubrication equipment
TLIS3025 Implement ballast unloading
TLIS3037 Install and repair rail earthworks

procedures
TLIW3013 Grind switches and crossings
TLIW3016 Weld rail using flashbutt welding process
TLIW3027 Operate minor track equipment

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI32511 Certificate III in Rail Infrastructure.
Links


036d851

TLI32615 Certificate III in Rail Signalling Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32615 Certificate III in Rail Signalling
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in controlling rail traffic movements and
operations within a defined or local area.
may involve application of some discretion and judgment in selecting equipment, services or
Job roles
 Signaller
 Area controller
 Yard controller.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units
TLIE3022 Complete workplace documents

TLIE3023 Use electronic communication systems
TLIL3071 Control and coordinate local rail traffic movement
TLIL3072 Operate signal panel or equipment
BSBWOR201 Manage personal stress in the workplace
BSBWRT301 Write simple documents

requirements

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI32611 Certificate III in Rail Signalling.
Links
036d851


TLI32715 Certificate III in Track Protection Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32715 Certificate III in Track Protection
Training Package.
performs tasks involving track protection in a variety of contexts.
It may involve application of some discretion and judgement in selecting equipment, services
or contingency measures. It may also include responsibility for coordinating the work of
others.
Job roles
 Track protection officer.
publication.
Entry Requirements
The entry requirement for this qualification is TLI21915 Certificate II in Track Protection or
relevant industry experience gained by working in the rail infrastructure environment
providing track protection services.
Packaging Rules
3 general elective units from the general elective units listed below or the remaining
specialist elective units listed below. Up to 3 of the general elective units may be selected
from any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package. The general elective units must
Core units

TLIL3065 Implement a track occupancy authority
TLIC2081 Pilot rail traffic within work on track authority limits
TLIL3082 Implement absolute signal blocking
TLIL3083 Implement a track work authority and manage rail traffic through
worksites
TLIL3084 Implement a local possession authority
TLIL4069 Plan and coordinate protection for multiple worksites within limits of a
work on track authority
TLIW2039 Place and remove permanent way stop boards

infrastructure

TLIL4076 Coordinate resources

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI32711 Certificate III in Track Protection.
Links
036d851

TLI32815 Certificate III in Rail Yard Coordination Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32815 Certificate III in Rail Yard Coordination
Training Package.

This is a qualification for a person engaged in the rail yard or terminal environment.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications, applied in a wide variety of contexts, which
Job roles
This qualification is aligned to the following defined roles:
 Yard Coordinator
 Terminal Coordinator.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units

industry
TLIG4006 Facilitate work teams
TLIL4038 Organise marshalling and shunting operations
TLIB3018 Conduct full train examination
TLIB3129 Conduct pre-movement checks on rolling stock

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI32813 Certificate III in Rail Yard
Coordination.
Links
036d851

TLI32915 Certificate III in Tram or Light Rail Infrastructure Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI32915 Certificate III in Tram or Light Rail Infrastructure
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in the tram or light rail infrastructure
environment who performs tasks involving a broad range of skilled applications applied in a
wide variety of contexts, which may involve application of some discretion and judgment in
selecting equipment, services or contingency measures. It may also include responsibility for
coordinating the work of others.
Job roles
 Tram Infrastructure Track Worker Level 4
 Light Rail Track Worker.
publication.
Entry Requirements
The entry requirement for this qualification is TLI22215 Certificate II in Tram or Light Rail
Infrastructure or equivalent vocational experience working within the rail infrastructure
environment.
Packaging Rules
Core units

industry
TLIW3042 Grind rail on tram/light rail systems
TLIW3013 Grind switches and crossings
TLIW3043 Weld rail on tram/light rail systems using electric welding

process


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI32913 Certificate III in Tram or Light Rail
Infrastructure.
Links
036d851

TLI33015 Certificate III in Heritage Locomotive Assistant or Steam Locomotive FiremanDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI33015 Certificate III in Heritage Locomotive Assistant or

Steam Locomotive Fireman
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person who carries out the duties of a locomotive assistant on a
heritage locomotive or fireman on a steam locomotive.
This job involves the performance of a broad range of skilled applications applied in a wide
variety of contexts, which may involve application of some discretion and judgement in
selecting equipment, services or contingency measures. It may also include responsibility for
Job roles
 Group A: Heritage Locomotive Assistant
 Group B: Steam Locomotive Fireman.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
 8 core units listed below plus
 2 specialist elective units from within either Group A or Group B, listed below plus
 4 general elective units from the general elective units listed below. Up to 3 of the
qualification.
 Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to ensure that all prerequisite units

Core units
TLIB3126 Assist in the testing of heritage train braking systems
industry
Group A: Heritage Locomotive Assistant
TLIB3123 Apply awareness of motive power unit fundamentals
TLIC3072 Conduct the duties of an assistant on a heritage locomotive
Group B: Steam Locomotive Fireman
TLIB3124 Apply awareness of steam locomotive fundamentals
TLIC3073 Fire a steam locomotive
TLIB3026 Prepare for train operation


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI33013 Certificate III in Heritage
Locomotive Assistant or Steam Locomotive Fireman.
Links
036d851

TLI33115 Certificate III in Rail Customer Service Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI33115 Certificate III in Rail Customer Service
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person who is engaged in the rail customer service environment.
They may perform a broad range of skilled applications in a wide variety of contexts, which
Job roles
 Passenger Service Officer
 Senior Customer Service Assistant/Officer
 Station Manager
 Station Officer.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
 4 general elective units from the general elective units listed below. Up to 2 of the
qualification.
 Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to ensure that all prerequisite units
Core units

TLIG3003 Apply positive behaviours in the workplace
PSPGOV205B Participate in workplace change
PUAWER005B Operate as part of an emergency control organisation
TLIF2081 Perform lookout duties
TLIL3072 Operate signal panel or equipment
TLIO3015 Maintain security of railway property and revenue
TLIP2039 Ensure the confidentiality, privacy and security of customer

information

TLIP3034 Advise on and construct fares for passengers

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI33113 Certificate III in Rail Customer
Service.
Links
036d851

TLI33215 Certificate III in Terminal Train Driving Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI33215 Certificate III in Terminal Train Driving
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for a person engaged in terminal train driving.
This qualification requires the application of a broad range of knowledge and skills in varied
contexts to undertake skilled work within a terminal train driving environment.
This qualification requires the skills and knowledge to:
 interpret and act on available information
 apply and communicate known solutions to a variety of predictable problems and to deal
with unforseen contingencies using known solutions
 provide technical information to a variety of specialist and non-specialist audiences
 undertake routine and some non-routine tasks in a range of skilled operations.
These skills and knowledge will be applied to known routines, methods, procedures and time
constraints while taking responsibility for own outputs.
Job roles
 Terminal Operator
 Terminal Train Driver
 Yard Terminal Driver.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules

Core units
TLIB0132 Start up and shut down a single locomotive
TLIC0079 Operate a motive power unit within defined limits
TLIC3027 Stable a motive power unit
Diagnose and rectify minor faults on motive power units and rolling
TLIB3113
stock
TLIB4078 Carry out a train roll-by inspection
TLIB4079 Conduct a general train examination
TLIB4081 Provision a motive power unit
TLIB4082 Set up motive power units in multi-coupled consist
TLIC3048 Shunt, couple and uncouple electric passenger trains

TLIC3082 Operate a locomotive by portable remote control
TLIC4074 Shunt, couple and uncouple rail vehicles
Apply awareness of dangerous goods and hazardous materials

TLIF3091
requirements

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI33213 Certificate III in Terminal Train
Driving.
Links
036d851

TLI33316 Certificate III in Furniture Removal Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI33316 Certificate III in Furniture Removal
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in furniture removal job roles within the
Job roles
 Furniture Removalist
 Team Leader.
No licensing legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units

1

TLID3050 Coordinate furniture removal

01

3
TLID3048 Pack and unpack furniture and effects
TLID3049 Pack and wrap furniture and effects for international removals
TLIE3010 Estimate furniture removals jobs



1

4

5

6

7

8
TLIU3011 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work

practices

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI33313 Certificate III in Furniture Removal.
Links
036d851

TLI33416 Certificate III in Waste Driving Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI33416 Certificate III in Waste Driving Operations
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in waste driving job roles within the transport and
logistics industry.
Job roles
 Waste Vehicle Driver.
of publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
1 licensing or industry elective unit relevant to the vehicle type applicable to
the job role from the licensing/industry elective units listed below plus
Core units


TLIF3015 Work safely as a non-electrical licensed worker near electrical

assets
TLIU3015 Identify wastes and hazards in the waste management

industry

CPPWMT3011 Respond to waste emergencies

A
CPPWMT3015 Move waste using loadshifting equipment

A
TLIC2049 Operate heavy vehicle on unsealed roads
TLIC3063 Operate vehicle carrying special loads
TLIC3083 Operate a front lift mobile compaction/collection vehicle
TLIC3084 Operate a lift on/lift off collection vehicle
TLIC3085 Operate a liquid waste collection vehicle
TLIC3086 Operate a multi-lift collection vehicle
TLIC3087 Operate a rear loading mobile compaction/collection vehicle
TLIC3088 Operate a roll on/roll off collection vehicle
TLIC3089 Operate a side loading mobile compaction/collection vehicle
TLID3051 Segregate waste according to waste types

TLIE3028 Complete a work diary in the road transport industry
TLIF3014 Operate as an off-sider in the waste management industry
TLILIC0012 Licence to operate a vehicle loading crane (capacity 10 metre

tonnes and above)
TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when working with goods and

cargo

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI33413 Certificate III in Waste Driving
Operations.
Links
036d851


TLI33516 Certificate III in Stevedoring Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI33516 Certificate III in Stevedoring
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in operational roles in a stevedoring
environment.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications applied in a wide variety of contexts,
which may involve application of some discretion and judgement in selecting
equipment, services or contingency measures. It may also include responsibility for
Job roles
• Clerical Officer
• Crane Operator
• Equipment Controller
• Equipment Operator
• Team Leader.
Entry Requirements
The entry requirement for this qualification is the 8 core units of
competency from TLI21416 Certificate II in Stevedoring listed below.
Entry requirement units


sustainable manner
Packaging Rules
All units within one of the specialist elective unit groups (job roles)
listed below plus
A minimum of 4 general elective units and a maximum of 5 general
elective units listed below (depending on the specialist elective group or
job role selected), or the remaining specialist elective units listed below.
Up to 2 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant
qualification.
Core units
BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS hazard identification, risk

assessment and risk control
TLIF0001 Apply chain of responsibility legislation, regulations

and workplace procedures

 Group A: Team Leading
 Group B: Clerical

 Group C: Equipment Operations

 Group D: Reefer Operations
 Group E: Equipment Control
 Group F: Crane Operations.
Group A: Team Leading
TLIF3003 Implement and monitor work health and safety

procedures
Group B: Clerical
TLIO2021 Follow security procedures when working with goods

and cargo
Group C: Equipment Operations

and cargo
Note: must choose at least one of the following units
Group D: Reefer Operations


and cargo
Group E: Equipment Control
TLIA3055 Coordinate terminal/wharf equipment operations

and cargo
Group F: Crane Operations

and cargo
Note: must choose at least one of the following units
TLID3043 Shift loads using gantry equipment
TLID3044 Shift loads using cranes
TLID3047 Shift loads using ship mounted crane
CPCCLDG300 Licence to perform dogging

1A

TLIB3017 Assemble and dismantle boom or jib
TLID4008 Monitor crane operations
TLID4009 Direct crane operations

TLIE3016 Estimate/calculate load shifting requirements for a

mobile crane
TLILIC2005 Licence to operate a boom-type elevating work platform

(boom length 11 metres or more)
TLILIC3003 Licence to operate a bridge and gantry crane
TLILIC3004 Licence to operate a derrick crane
TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a non-slewing mobile crane (greater

than 3 tonnes capacity)
TLILIC3007 Licence to operate a portal boom crane
TLILIC3008 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (up to 20

tonnes)
TLILIC3019 Licence to operate a reach stacker (greater than 3 tonnes

capacity)

tonnes)


tonnes)
TLILIC4011 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (over 100

tonnes)

sustainable manner

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI33513 Certificate III in Stevedoring.
Links
036d851

TLI40115 Certificate IV in Rail Safety Investigation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI40115 Certificate IV in Rail Safety Investigation
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person who undertakes a rail safety investigation within the rail
industry in accordance with regulator, rail industry standards, rules and operational
procedures.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
4 general elective units. The general elective units may be selected from the general elective
units listed below and up to 2 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant
nationally endorsed Training Package. The general elective units must contribute to the
Core units
BSBRSK401 Identify risk and apply risk management processes
PSPREG411A Gather information through interviews
PSPREG418A Advise on progress of investigations
TLIE4030 Prepare rail safety reports

TLI40115 Certificate IV in Rail Safety Investigation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIF4088 Implement and coordinate rail safety and WHS risk-control

strategies
TLIF4100 Identify and meet rail safety regulatory compliance requirements
TLIF4107 Respond to notifiable rail safety occurrences
TLIF5017 Investigate rail safety incidents
TLIB4042 Conduct inspection of safeworking procedures and infrastructure
TLIF4101 Implement and maintain a rail safety culture

This is the first release of this qualification in the TLI Transport and Logistics Training
Package.
Links
036d851

TLI41216 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Car Driving Instruction)Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
TLI41216 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road

Transport - Car Driving Instruction)
Training Package.
This qualification is for those engaged in driving instructor job roles within the
Transport and Logistics Industry.
It includes the performance of a broad range of skilled applications including
requirements to evaluate and analyse current practices, to develop new criteria and
procedures for performing current practices, and to provide some leadership and
guidance to others in applying skills and planning skill development.
This qualification is currently cited as meeting part of the requirements for certification
as a Motor Vehicle Driving Instructor, as defined by relevant state/territory licensing
and regulatory requirements.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
12 core units listed below
Core units
BSBRKG304 Maintain business records
TAEDES401A Design and develop learning programs
TLIC1051 Operate a commercial vehicle
TLIC3036 Apply safe car driving behaviours

TLI41216 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Car Driving Instruction)Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
TLIL4009 Manage personal work priorities and

professional development
TLIM0001 Conduct learner driver training
TLIM4001 Develop safe car driving behaviours in others

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI41210 Certificate IV in Transport and
Logistics (Road Transport - Car Driving Instruction).
Links
036d851

TLI41316 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Heavy Vehicle Driving Instruction) Date this document was
generated: 18 May 2017

Transport - Heavy Vehicle Driving Instruction)
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in heavy vehicle driving instructor job roles
within the Transport and Logistics Industry.
This qualification is currently cited as meeting part of the requirements for certification
as a Heavy Vehicle Driving Instructor, as defined by relevant state/territory licensing
and regulatory requirements.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
1 industry elective unit from the industry elective units listed
below, relevant to the vehicle type applicable to the job role.
Core units
TLIC3037 Apply safe heavy vehicle driving behaviours

TLI41316 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Heavy Vehicle Driving Instruction) Date this document was
TLIF4066 Implement and supervise transport regulations

compliance systems
TLIL4009 Manage personal work priorities and professional

development
TLIM0002 Conduct heavy vehicle learner driver training
TLIM4002 Develop safe heavy vehicle driving behaviours in

others
Industry elective units

Logistics (Road Transport - Heavy Vehicle Driving Instruction).
Links
036d851

TLI41416 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Motorcycle Riding Instruction)Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017

Transport - Motorcycle Riding Instruction)
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in motorcycle riding instructor job roles
within the Transport and Logistics Industry.
This qualification is currently cited as meeting part of the requirements for
certification as a Motorcycle Riding Instructor, as defined by relevant
state/territory licensing and regulatory requirements.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
11 core units listed below
Core units
TAEDEL301 Provide work skill instruction

A
TAEDES401 Design and develop learning programs

A
TLIC3038 Apply safe motorcycle riding behaviours

TLI41416 Certificate IV in Transport and Logistics (Road Transport - Motorcycle Riding Instruction)Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
TLIL4009 Manage personal work priorities and professional

development
TLIM0003 Conduct learner rider training
TLIM4003 Develop safe motorcycle riding behaviours in others

Logistics (Road Transport - Motorcycle Riding Instruction).
Links
036d851

TLI41515 Certificate IV in Materiel Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI41515 Certificate IV in Materiel Logistics
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person who is engaged in the Logistics Industry in a variety of
integrated logistics and materiel sustainment roles.
Successful achievement of this qualification requires a person to perform a broad range of
skilled applications including requirements to evaluate and analyse current practices, develop
new criteria and procedures for performing current practices, and to provide some leadership
and guidance to others.
This qualification is targeted at practitioners from the logistics support discipline with at least
twelve months’ experience. Practitioners from the inventory management, data management,
maintenance system management and integrated logistics support (acquisition and
sustainment) job streams would benefit from this qualification.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
3 logistics elective units from the logistics elective units listed below plus
6 general elective units from the general elective units or remaining logistics or technical
elective units listed below. Up to 3 of the general elective units may be selected from any
relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The general elective units
Where imported units are selected, care must be taken to ensure that all prerequisite units are

complied with.
Core units
PSPGOV404B Develop and implement work unit plans
PSPGOV413A Compose complex workplace documents
PSPPROC303A Carry out basic procurement
TLIX4028 Apply knowledge of logistics
Logistics elective units
TLIX4007 Implement and monitor integrated logistics support plans
TLIX4008 Conduct integrated logistics support activities
TLIX4009 Apply integrated logistics support processes and procedures
TLIX4011 Conduct logistics support analysis activities
TLIX4016 Implement and monitor materiel sustainment plans
TLIX4017 Conduct materiel sustainment activities
TLIX4018 Apply materiel sustainment processes and procedures
TLIX4022 Implement and monitor configuration management plans
TLIX4023 Conduct configuration management activities
TLIX4024 Apply configuration management processes and procedures
TLIP5036 Manage assets
TLIX4026 Apply codification and cataloguing processes and procedures
TLIX4027 Assess maintenance spares and manage repairable items
TLIX4029 Apply knowledge of integrated logistics support
TLIX4030 Apply knowledge of materiel sustainment
TLIX4031 Apply knowledge of configuration management
TLIX4032 Apply knowledge of technical regulatory framework

TLIX4034 Apply technical risk management systems and techniques
TLIX4035 Maintain technical data and information
BSBADM409 Coordinate business resources
BSBCOM501 Identify and interpret compliance requirements
BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system
BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness
BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies, procedures and programs to

meet legislative requirements
BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement
BSBREL401 Establish networks
PSPGOV406B Gather and analyse information
PSPGOV421A Exercise delegations
PSPPM401B Design simple projects
PSPPM402B Manage simple projects
PSPPM403B Close simple projects
PSPPROC405C Dispose of assets
PSPPROC411A Plan procurement
PSPPROC412A Develop and distribute requests for offers
PSPPROC413A Select providers and develop contracts
PSPPROC414A Manage contracts
TLIR4001 Monitor supplier performance

procedures
TLIX4033 Apply technical regulatory framework compliance management

systems


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI41510 Certificate IV in Materiel Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI41616 Certificate IV in International Freight Forwarding (Senior Operator) Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI41616 Certificate IV in International Freight Forwarding

(Senior Operator)
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in international freight forwarding job roles at a
senior operational level within the International Freight Forwarding Industry.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications including evaluating and analysing current
practices, developing new criteria and procedures for performing current practices, and
providing some leadership and guidance to others.
of publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Training Package or accredited course. The general elective units must contribute
to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Core units
TLIA5035 Manage international freight transfer

TLI41616 Certificate IV in International Freight Forwarding (Senior Operator) Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

procedures
TLII0001 Market international freight forwarding services
TLII0002 Provide freight forwarding information and customer service
TLIL5026 Manage export logistics
TLIM4004 Mentor individuals or small groups
TLIR4002 Source goods/services and evaluate contractors

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI41610 Certificate IV in International
Freight Forwarding (Senior Operator).
Links
036d851

TLI41715 Certificate IV in Stevedoring Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI41715 Certificate IV in Stevedoring Operations
Training Package.
This qualification is for a person engaged in operational roles within a stevedoring
environment. It involves a broad range of skilled applications including evaluating and
analysing current practices, developing new criteria and procedures for performing current
practices, and providing some leadership and guidance to others.
Job roles
• Stevedore Shift Foreperson
• Stevedore Charge Foreperson.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
elective units may be selected from any relevant endorsed Training Package or accredited
course. The general elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the
qualification.
Core units
TLIA4006 Organise and monitor terminal/wharf operations

TLIE4006 Collect, analyse and present workplace data and information
TLIF4007 Implement and coordinate accident-emergency procedures
TLIF4064 Manage fatigue management policy and procedures
TLIL4033 Promote effective workplace practice

procedures
Elective units
TLIA4040 Implement and monitor stevedoring regulations
TLIA4063 Coordinate stevedoring clerical functions
TLID4008 Monitor crane operations
TLID4009 Direct crane operations
TLIF3022 Implement/monitor procedures when warehousing/storing

dangerous goods/hazardous substances
TLII4001 Coordinate quality customer service

TLIL4032 Implement equal employment equity strategies
TLIL4037 Apply and amend rosters
TLIP4001 Develop plans to meet customer and organisation needs
TLIP4002 Facilitate and capitalise on change in the workplace
TLIP4003 Implement, maintain and evaluate dangerous goods transport

procedures within the workplace
TLIP4005 Manage workplace information

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI41710 Certificate IV in Stevedoring
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI41816 Certificate IV in Warehousing Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI41816 Certificate IV in Warehousing Operations
Training Package.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications including requirements to evaluate
and analyse current practices, to develop new criteria and procedures for performing
current practices, and to provide leadership and guidance to others in applying skills
and planning skill development.
No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this qualification at
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units


TLIA4028 Assess and monitor optimum stock levels
TLIE4013 Apply workplace statistics
TLIG4005 Organise transport workload
TLII4005 Market services and products to clients
TLIL4021 Coordinate the erection and dismantling of temporary storage

facilities
TLIL4036 Develop rosters

TLIP4031 Maintain customer credit accounts and services
TLIU0001 Develop workplace policy and procedures for environmental

sustainability
TLIU3011 Implement and monitor environmentally sustainable work

practices

procedures

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI41810 Certificate IV in Warehousing
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI41916 Certificate IV in Mobile Crane Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI41916 Certificate IV in Mobile Crane Operations
Training Package.
This qualification is designed for mobile crane operation within the Transport and
Logistics Industry and other industries. It involves a broad range of skilled applications
applied in a wide variety of contexts.
Successful achievement of the high risk work (HRW) and heavy vehicle licensing units
in the qualification must align with licensing and regulatory requirements.
People seeking certification for HRW licensing units should check the requirements
with Safe Work Australia.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
10 elective units, of which 1 elective unit must be taken from Group A elective units
listed below and 6 elective units must be taken from Group B elective units listed
below plus
The remaining 3 elective units may be selected from Group A or Group B or from
any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course.
The elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
The following units have a prerequisite unit:
 CPCCCM2010B Work safely at heights

 CPCCCM3003A Work safely around power sources, services and assets

 CPCCLRG3001A Licence to perform rigging basic level
 CPCCLRG3002A Licence to perform rigging intermediate level
Note:
To comply with the National Standards for Licensing Persons Performing High Risk
Work, there is a requirement to achieve TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a
non-slewing mobile crane (greater than 3 tonnes capacity) before commencing the
selected slewing mobile crane licence unit.
Applying for a high risk work licence for TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a
non-slewing mobile crane (greater than 3 tonnes capacity) is not a requirement if the
selected mobile slewing crane licence is being applied for, as this licence covers
TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a non-slewing mobile crane.
Core units
CPCCCM3003A Work safely around power sources, services and assets

TLILIC3006 Licence to operate a non-slewing mobile crane (greater than 3

tonnes capacity)

manner
Elective units
Group A: High Risk Licensing
CPCCLRG3001A Licence to perform rigging basic level
CPCCLRG3002A Licence to perform rigging intermediate level

TLILIC4011 Licence to operate a slewing mobile crane (over 100 tonnes)
Group B: General
TLID3031 Rig load
TLILIC2005 Licence to operate a boom-type elevating work platform (boom

length 11 metres or more)
TLIP4010 Assess lift requirements and provide quotation


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI41910 Certificate IV in Mobile Crane
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI42016 Certificate IV in Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42016 Certificate IV in Logistics
Training Package.
 TLIF0006 Administer a fatigue risk management system
 TLIF0007 Manage a fatigue risk management system
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in logistics operations in the Transport and Logistics
Industry in a variety of operational roles.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications including requirements to evaluate and analyse
current practices, to develop new criteria and procedures for performing current practices, and to
provide leadership and guidance to others in applying skills and planning skill development.
Successful achievement of the licensing units within the qualification must align with applicable
licensing and regulatory requirements.
Job roles
include:
 Logistics Coordinator
 Logistics Supervisor.
publication.
Entry Requirements

Packaging Rules
Elective units can only be counted once towards the qualification packaging rules i.e. if a unit
is listed in both a technical elective group and the general elective group, it can only be
counted as one of the elective units required.
Core units
procedures
PSPPCM004 Plan procurement
TLIA4062 Implement safety stock systems
TLIF4066 Implement and supervise transport regulations compliance systems
TLIG4005 Organise transport workload

TLIL4030 Control a furniture warehouse
TLIL4070 Work effectively in the transport and logistics industry
TLIL4078 Coordinate fleet control logistics
TLIP4003 Implement, maintain and evaluate dangerous goods transport

procedures within the workplace
TLIP4013 Implement and monitor logistics planning and processes
TLIP4038 Monitor a supply chain operation
TLIP4039 Monitor transport operations
TLIP4040 Monitor warehouse operations
TLIR4003 Negotiate a contract
TLIR4008 Implement and supervise stocktaking procedures
TLIR4009 Implement purchasing systems
TLIR4010 Plan purchasing
TLIR4012 Conduct international purchasing
BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies
BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and induction of staff
BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies, procedures and programs to

meet legislative requirements

SITXFIN402 Manage finances within a budget
TLIF0006 Administer a fatigue risk management system
TLIF0007 Manage a fatigue risk management system
TLIJ4008 Implement and monitor inbound quality assurance systems
TLIL4058 Plan a career in logistics
TLIL4059 Implement asset management systems

TLIP4028 Administer international trading accounts

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI42010 Certificate IV in Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI42116 Certificate IV in Driving Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42116 Certificate IV in Driving Operations
Training Package.
 TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management system
 TLIF0006 Administer a fatigue risk management system.
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in driving operation job roles in the Transport and
Logistics industry.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications including requirements to evaluate and
analyse current practices, to develop new criteria and procedures for performing current
practices, and to provide leadership and guidance to others in applying skills and planning
skill development.
Job roles
 Chemical tanker driver
 Fuel tanker driver
 Heavy recovery driver
 LP gas tanker driver.
Successful achievement of the licensing unit in the qualification must align with licensing and
regulatory requirements applicable to driving and state or territory regulatory requirements.
Entry Requirements

Packaging Rules
1 licensing/industry elective unit relevant to the vehicle type applicable to the job
role from the licensing/industry elective units listed below plus
All units within one of the specialist elective groups (job roles) from Group A,
Group B, Group C or Group D listed below plus
5 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting
Group A, Group B or Group C or
6 general elective units from the general elective units listed below if selecting
Group D.
Up to 3 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant nationally
endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The units must contribute to the
The following units have prerequisite units:
 CPCCSF2003A Cut and bend materials using oxy-LPG equipment
 TLIC0002 Operate fuel tanker
 TLIC0003 Operate LP gas tanker
 TLID4048 Top load a dangerous goods tanker
 TLID4049 Bottom load a dangerous goods tanker.
Core units

TLIF4066 Implement and supervise transport regulations compliance

systems
TLIF4095 Apply work health and safety requirements for driving

operations


Group A: Fuel Tanker
Group B: LP Gas Tanker
Group C: Chemical Tanker
Group D: Heavy Recovery.
Group A: Fuel Tanker
TLIC0002 Operate fuel tanker
Group B: LP Gas Tanker
TLIC0003 Operate LP gas tanker
Group C: Chemical Tanker
TLIC0001 Operate chemical tanker
Group D: Heavy Recovery
TLIC4069 Operate heavy recovery vehicle

AURVGA3002 Recover vehicles

CPCCSF2003A Cut and bend materials using oxy-LPG equipment
PUADEFVH001A Conduct recovery vehicle operations in a field environment
PUADEFVH002A Extract disabled equipment using winching techniques in a

field environment
RIICBS312D Conduct bitumen tanker operations
TLIC0001 Operate chemical tanker
TLIC0002 Operate fuel tanker
TLIC0003 Operate LP gas tanker
TLIC4068 Operate heavy recovery ancillary equipment
TLIC4070 Tow a disabled heavy vehicle
TLID4048 Top load a dangerous goods tanker
TLID4049 Bottom load a dangerous goods tanker
TLID4050 Discharge a dangerous goods tanker
TLIE3026 Carry out advanced calculations in the transport and

logistics industry
TLIE4025 Prepare and process transport documentation for dangerous

goods
TLIF0005 Apply a fatigue risk management system

TLIF3091 Apply awareness of dangerous goods and hazardous

materials requirements
TLIF3096 Carry out emergency response to a dangerous goods incident
TLIJ4010 Implement quality systems and procedures in a dangerous

goods workplace
TLIL4079 Manage the recovery process
TLILIC0012 Licence to operate a vehicle loading crane (capacity 10

metre tonnes and above)

sustainable manner

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI42111 Certificate IV in Driving
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI42215 Certificate IV in Rail Network Control Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42215 Certificate IV in Rail Network Control
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in the control of rail networks.
This qualification requires a broad range of skilled applications within the rail control
environment. It also requires the skills and knowledge to evaluate and analyse current
practices, to develop new criteria and procedures, and to provide some leadership and
guidance to others in their work.
Job roles
 Train controller
 Network controller
 Area controller.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units

rail industry
TLIF4086 Control and coordinate incident responses
TLIF4090 Implement safeworking rules and regulations for network control

activities
TLIL4074 Control and coordinate rail traffic movement
TLIL4075 Implement and amend daily train plan

requirements
TLIL2041 Monitor and record rolling stock locations
TLIL3035 Allocate motive power
TLIL3052 Plan urban passenger train consists
TLIL4050 Allocate rolling stock

TLIL4077 Develop out-of-course rail traffic plans and schedules

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI42211 Certificate IV in Rail Network
Control.
Links
036d851

TLI42315 Certificate IV in Rail Infrastructure Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42315 Certificate IV in Rail Infrastructure
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in providing infrastructure construction and/or
maintenance activities on rail networks.
This qualification requires a broad range of skilled applications within the rail Infrastructure
Job roles
This qualification is suitable for a variety of job roles in the fields of:
Rail Track Working, Rail Track Surfacing or Rail Structures
Job roles and titles vary across different sectors. Possible job titles relevant to the listed fields
include:
 Ganger
 Leading hand
 Team leader
 Work group leader
 Supervisor
 Possession officer.
Track Protection
Possible job titles relevant to this field include:
 Principal protection officer (PPO).
publication.
Entry Requirements
The entry requirement for this qualification is one of the following qualifications:
 TLI31815 Certificate III in Rail Track Surfacing
 TLI31915 Certificate III in Mechanical Rail Signalling
 TLI32115 Certificate III in Rail Structures
 TLI32515 Certificate III in Rail Infrastructure
 TLI32715 Certificate III in Track Protection or
 relevant industry experience gained by working in the rail infrastructure environment.

Packaging Rules
3 specialist elective units from one of the specialist elective unit groups (job roles) from
Group A or Group B listed below plus
2 general units from the general elective units listed below. Up to 2 of the general elective
units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package. The general
elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
Core units
BSBMGT401 Show leadership in the workplace
BSBPMG409 Apply project scope-management techniques

infrastructure
TLIF4088 Implement and coordinate rail safety and WHS risk-control strategies
TLIJ4009 Implement and monitor quality assurance systems
TLIL4076 Coordinate resources
Select 3 units from one of the following specialist elective groups:

 Group A: Rail Track Working, Rail Track Surfacing or Rail Structures
 Group B: Track Protection.
Group A: Rail Track Working, Rail Track Surfacing or Rail Structures
TLIL4073 Apply asset management system

Group B: Track Protection
The selection must include TLIL4069 Plan and coordinate protection for multiple worksites
within limits of a work on track authority.
TLIL4069 Plan and coordinate protection for multiple worksites within limits of a
work on track authority
BSBADM502 Manage meetings
BSBCMM401 Make a presentation
RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site operations
TLIB4042 Conduct inspection of safeworking procedures and infrastructure
TLID4030 Supervise mobile crane operations
TLIR4008 Implement and supervise stocktaking procedures
TLIR4009 Implement purchasing systems

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI42311 Certificate IV in Rail Infrastructure.
Links


036d851

TLI42415 Certificate IV in Rail Safety Management Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42415 Certificate IV in Rail Safety Management
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in the management of safety within the rail industry.
This qualification requires a broad range of skilled applications within the rail safety
Job roles
This qualification is aligned to the following defined role:
 Rail Safety Manager.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units
TLIE4030 Prepare rail safety reports
TLIE4032 Use internal communication systems for rail industry regulatory

compliance
TLIF4099 Develop an application for, or variation to, rail accreditation
TLIF4102 Implement and maintain safety management plans
TLIF4104 Manage change in the rail safety environment
TLIF4105 Manage rail safety compliance
TLIL4081 Ensure competency of rail safety workers
BSBPMG518 Manage project procurement
PSPGOV306B Implement change
TLIF4103 Implement fitness for work procedures
TLIL4073 Apply asset management system
TLIL4082 Coordinate rail interface agreements

procedures

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI42413 Certificate IV in Rail Safety

Management.
Links
036d851

TLI42516 Certificate IV in Traffic Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42516 Certificate IV in Traffic Operations
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in traffic operations job roles within the
Transport and Logistics Industry.
It involves a broad range of skilled applications including requirements to evaluate and
analyse current practices, to develop new criteria and procedures for performing current
practices, and to provide leadership and guidance to others in applying skills and planning
skill development.
Job roles:
The TLI42516 Certificate IV in Traffic Operations qualification is aligned to the
following defined roles:
 Tunnel Road Operator
 Open Road Operator.
No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
1 specialist elective unit from Group A or Group B listed below plus

Core units
Manage personal stressors in the work environment

HLTWHS00
6
TLIF4069 Monitor and respond to traffic flow
TLIF5020 Manage emergencies

sustainable manner
Group A: Tunnel Operator
TLIF4070 Operate fire and life safety system within a tunnel
Group B: Open Road Operator

TLIE3026 Carry out advanced calculations in the transport and logistics

industry
TLIF3063 Administer the implementation of fatigue management

strategies
TLIF4070 Operate fire and life safety system within a tunnel
TLIF4108 Implement traffic management plan in the transport industry

TLIO3007 Undertake emergency response action to a security threat

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI42513 Certificate IV in Traffic
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI42615 Certificate IV in Train Driving Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42615 Certificate IV in Train Driving
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in train driving activities.
It involves a broad range of specialised knowledge and skills in varied contexts to undertake
skilled work within a train driving environment.
It may include skills and knowledge required for specialised tasks or functions in known or
changing contexts with responsibility for own functions and outputs.
Job roles
 Electric Passenger Train Driver
 Freight Train Driver
 Heavy Haul Train Driver
 Locomotive Driver
 Train Driver.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
All units within one of the specialist elective unit groups (job roles) from Group A, Group
B, Group C, Group D or Group E listed below plus
4 general elective units from the general elective units listed below or remaining units not
selected from a specialist elective unit group. Up to 2 of the general elective units may be
selected from any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package. The general elective units

Core units
TLIB3075 Inspect and prepare a motive power unit
TLIB4080 Identify, diagnose and rectify minor faults on motive power units and
rolling stock
TLIC4023 Operate train with due consideration of route conditions
TLIC4026 Operate and monitor a motive power unit
TLIF0004 Work effectively in a train-driving environment
TLIF4110 Respond to abnormal situations and emergencies when driving a train
Group A: Freight
TLIC4019 Drive a train to operational requirements
Group B: Urban Electric
TLIB3105 Prepare electric passenger train
TLIB3108 Test operation of electric passenger train braking system
TLIC3046 Drive and operate electric passenger train
TLIC3047 Stable electric passenger train

TLIC3048 Shunt, couple and uncouple electric passenger trains
Group C: Country Passenger
TLIC4019 Drive a train to operational requirements
Group D: Steam Locomotive
TLIB3124 Apply awareness of steam locomotive fundamentals
TLIB4077 Inspect and prepare a heritage steam locomotive
TLIC3030 Operate and monitor a heritage steam locomotive
TLIC3031 Stable a heritage steam locomotive
TLIC4019 Drive train to operational requirements
Group E: Heritage Motive Power
TLIB4076 Inspect and prepare a heritage motive power unit
TLIC3028 Operate and monitor a heritage motive power unit
TLIC3029 Stable a heritage motive power unit
TLIC4019 Drive train to operational requirements
TLIB3027 Set up and shut down on-train remote control system
TLIB4079 Conduct a general train examination
TLIB4081 Provision a motive power unit

TLIB4082 Set up motive power units in multi-coupled consist
TLIC3018 Operate on-train remote control system
TLIC3082 Operate a locomotive by portable remote control
TLIC4071 Establish and operate train braking system
TLIC4072 Operate and monitor a motive power unit on a main line
TLIC4073 Set up, operate and shut down a distributed power system
TLIC4074 Shunt, couple and uncouple rail vehicles
Apply awareness of dangerous goods and hazardous materials

TLIF3091
requirements
TLII3022 Provide customer service in rail operations
TLIL4083 Assist with train operations
TLIU4011 Apply environmental procedures to rail operations


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI42613 Certificate IV in Train Driving.
Links
036d851

TLI42715 Certificate IV in Tram/Light Rail Control Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI42715 Certificate IV in Tram/Light Rail Control
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in the control of tram/light rail networks.
This qualification requires a broad range of skilled applications within the rail control
guidance to others in their work
Job roles
 Job roles and titles vary across different sectors. Possible job titles relevant to this
 Light Rail Controller
 Tram Controller.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Core units
TLIE4033 Use communications systems to control tram/light rail operations

rail industry
TLIF4109 Communicate effectively to coordinate incident response procedures
TLIL4084 Control daily tram/light rail operations
TLIL4085 Coordinate tram/light rail traffic movement

requirements
TLIL4050 Allocate rolling stock

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI42713 Certificate IV in Tram/Light Rail
Control.
Links


036d851

TLI50215 Diploma of Materiel Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI50215 Diploma of Materiel Logistics
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those working in materiel sustainment and integrated logistics
management roles.
Successful achievement of this qualification requires the self-directed application of
knowledge and skills, with substantial depth in some areas where judgement is required in
planning and selecting appropriate equipment, services and techniques for self and others.
Applications involve participating in developing strategic initiatives as well as personal
responsibility and autonomy in performing complex technical operations or organising others.
It may include participating in teams, including those concerned with planning and evaluation
functions. Group or team coordination may also be involved.
This qualification has been designed for people in integrated logistics support management or
sustainment management roles. These people will have a breadth of responsibility across a
range of functional areas and will generally be responsible for a team.
Job roles
 Integrated Logistics Support Manager
 Materiel Sustainment Manager.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
5 specialist elective units from one of the specialist elective unit groups, either Group A or
Group B, listed below plus
4 logistics elective units from the logistics elective units listed below or the remaining
specialist elective units from the Group chosen (either A or B) plus

the qualification.
complied with.
Core units
PSPGOV512A Use complex workplace communication strategies
PSPGOV513A Refine complex workplace documents
Group A: Integrated Logistics Support
TLIX5003 Develop and review integrated logistics support plans
TLIX5004 Develop integrated logistics support processes and procedures
TLIX5005 Manage integrated logistics support operations
TLIX5010 Provide specialist integrated logistics support advice
Group B: Materiel Sustainment
TLIX5012 Develop and review materiel sustainment plans
TLIX5013 Develop materiel sustainment processes and procedures
TLIX5014 Manage materiel sustainment operations
TLIX5019 Provide specialist materiel sustainment advice

BSBFIM501 Manage budgets and financial plans
PSPPM504A Carry out complex project activities
TLIL5055 Manage a supply chain
TLIR5014 Manage suppliers
TLIX5006 Manage verification and validation
TLIX5015 Establish supply chains
TLIX5020 Develop and review configuration management plans
TLIX5021 Manage configuration management processes
TLIX5025 Provide specialist configuration management advice
TLIX5036 Manage and monitor technical data and information systems
BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service
BSBINM501 Manage an information or knowledge management system
BSBMGT502 Manage people performance
BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement
BSBWHS501 Ensure a safe workplace
BSBPMG512 Manage project time
BSBPMG514 Manage project cost
BSBPMG515 Manage project human resources
BSBPMG516 Manage project information and communication
PSPGOV504B Undertake research and analysis

PSPGOV511A Provide leadership
PSPGOV518A Benchmark performance
PSPGOV524A Interpret data and related statistics
PSPPROC503B Manage contract performance
PSPPROC504B Finalise contracts
PSPPROC506A Plan to manage a contract

procedures

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI50210 Diploma of Materiel Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI50316 Diploma of International Freight Forwarding Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI50316 Diploma of International Freight Forwarding
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in advanced international freight forwarding
job roles within the Transport and Logistics Industry.
Successful achievement of this qualification will require the self-directed application of
knowledge and skills, with substantial depth in some areas where judgement is required
in planning and selecting appropriate equipment, services and techniques for self and
others.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
Training Package or accredited course. The general elective units must contribute to
units are complied with.
Core units
TLIA5059 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by sea and
multimodal transport
TLIA5060 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by air

transport
TLIA5061 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by road and
rail transport
TLIE5020 Apply knowledge of freight forwarding documentation and permits

responsibility compliance
TLIL5062 Apply knowledge of logistics, storage and distribution to

international freight forwarding
TLIL5063 Review contracts, insurance, risk and liability in an international

freight forwarding context
TLIL5064 Manage international special freight transport services including

dangerous goods and special cargo
TLIO5020 Advise on and manage security and safety in international freight

transport
BSBMKG513 Promote products and services to international markets
TLIX0001 Determine tariff classification of goods
TLIX5054 Comply with biosecurity border clearance

This qualification replaces but is not equivalent to TLI50310 Diploma of International Freight
Forwarding.
Links


036d851

TLI50415 Diploma of Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI50415 Diploma of Logistics
Release 3. This is the third release of this qualification in the TLI Transport and Logistics
Training Package.
 TLIF0006 Administer a fatigue management system
 TLIF0007 Manage a fatigue risk management system.
Release 2. This is the two release of this qualification in the TLI Transport and Logistics
Training Package.
ISC Upgrade - Unit added to General elective units.
Training Package.
This is a general qualification for the integrated management of logistics.
Achievement of this qualification will require the self-directed application of knowledge and
skills, with substantial depth in some areas where judgement is required in planning and selecting
appropriate equipment, services and techniques for self and others.
Applications involve participation in the development of strategic initiatives as well as personal
responsibility and autonomy in performing complex technical operations or organising others. It
may include participation in teams, including those concerned with planning and evaluation
functions. Group or team coordination may be involved.
Successful achievement of the licensing units within the qualification must align with applicable
licensing and regulatory requirements.
Job roles
include:
 Logistics Manager.
publication.
Entry Requirements

Packaging Rules
Core unit
TLIL5020 Develop and maintain operational procedures for transport and

logistics enterprises
TLIA5029 Plan and manage storage of dangerous goods and hazardous

substances
TLIA5058 Manage facility and inventory requirements

responsibility compliance
TLII5018 Manage customer service
TLIL5019 Implement and monitor transport logistics
TLIL5026 Manage export logistics
TLIL5057 Maintain, monitor and improve transport operations systems
TLIP5004 Develop a transport and logistics business plan
TLIP5006 Establish international distribution networks

TLIP5008 Manage a transport and logistics business unit
TLIP5011 Develop and evaluate strategies for transport and logistics enterprises
TLIR5006 Develop, implement and review purchasing strategies
TLIR5007 Manage international purchasing

procedures
TLIU5006 Conduct environmental audits
TLIX5040 Manage contracted support services
BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and induction of staff
BSBINN502 Build and sustain an innovative work environment
BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan
BSBPMG522 Undertake project work
BSBRSK501 Manage risk
BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness
BSBWRK510 Manage employee relations
PSPGOV506A Support workplace coaching and mentoring
SITXEVT605 Develop event transport plans
TLIB5010 Plan and implement maintenance schedules

TLIF0007 Manage a fatigue risk management system
TLIF5020 Manage emergencies
TLIK5006 Evaluate software requirements and hardware enhancements
TLIJ5007 Conduct internal quality audits
TLIO5005 Plan and manage security procedures for the enterprise
TLIO5006 Plan and manage security procedures for transferring and transporting
dangerous goods
TLIO5017 Manage security of storage facilities
TLIO5018 Manage compliance with customs excise
TLIP5007 Contribute to the development of a workplace learning environment
TLIP5025 Set and achieve budgets
TLIP5035 Manage budgets and financial plans
TLIR5005 Manage a contract
TLIU0001 Develop workplace policy and procedures for environmental

sustainability

This qualification replaces and is not equivalent to TLI50410 Diploma of Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI50515 Diploma of Deployment Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI50515 Diploma of Deployment Logistics
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person working in a deployment logistics management role.
Successful achievement of this qualification requires the self-directed application of
Applications involve participating in developing strategic initiatives as well as personal
responsibility and autonomy in performing complex technical operations or organising others.
It may include participating in teams, including those concerned with planning and evaluation
functions. Group or team coordination may be involved.
Job roles
 Logistics Manager (Deployed Operations).
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
specialist elective units. Up to 4 of the general elective units may be selected from any
relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The general elective units
complied with.
Core units

PUAOPE001B Supervise response
TLIL5020 Develop and maintain operational procedures for transport and

logistics enterprises
TLIL5057 Maintain, monitor and improve transport operations systems
TLIX4032 Apply a knowledge of technical regulatory framework
TLIX5006 Manage verification and validation
TLIX5020 Develop and review configuration management plans
TLIX5021 Manage configuration management processes
TLIX5025 Provide specialist configuration management advice
TLIX5037 Plan logistics support for deployed operations
TLIX5038 Organise deployment and delivery of logistics support

TLIX5039 Plan and conduct road convoy
TLIX5041 Organise supply support on deployment
TLIX5042 Organise road transport operations
TLIX5043 Conduct maintenance on deployed operations
TLIX5044 Organise health support operations
TLIX5045 Manage and monitor catering on deployed operations
BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability
BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development
PSPGOV503B Coordinate resource allocation and usage
PSPGOV515A Develop and use political nous
PSPGOV516A Develop and use emotional intelligence
PSPGOV519A Manage performance

PSPMNGT602B Manage resources
PSPMNGT701B Provide strategic direction
PSPPOL404A Support policy implementation
PUACOM007B Liaise with other organisations
SITXFSA201 Participate in safe food handling practices


procedures

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI50510 Diploma of Deployment Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI50615 Diploma of Rail Operations Management Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI50615 Diploma of Rail Operations Management
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person engaged in the management of rail operations. This
qualification requires the self-directed application of knowledge and skills, with substantial
depth in some areas where judgement is required in planning and selecting appropriate
equipment, services and techniques for self and others.
Application involves participation in developing strategic initiatives as well as personal
responsibility and autonomy in performing or organising others to carry out complex
technical operations. It may include participation in teams, including those concerned with
planning and evaluation functions. Group or team coordination may be involved.
Job roles
 Network Controller
 Passenger Services Manager
 Rail Freight Manager
 Rail Operations Manager
 Rail Maintenance Manager.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
All units within one of the specialist elective unit groups (job roles) listed below plus
4 general elective units from the general elective units listed below or from the remaining
units not already selected from a specialist elective group. Up to 2 of the general elective
units may be selected from any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package. The general
elective units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.

Core units
AHCOHS501A Manage Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) processes
TLIE4032 Use internal communication systems for rail industry regulatory

compliance
TLIF4104 Manage change in the rail safety environment
TLIF5021 Apply rail safeworking rules and procedures
TLIL5066 Apply rail resource management principles
TLIW5001 Apply rail communications systems
TLIW5002 Manage rail assets and interfaces
Group A: Rail Operations
TLIL5073 Manage train crewing and rostering
TLIW5004 Manage train planning
Group B: Yard Operations
TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail operations in yards or

sidings
TLIL5069 Manage a rail yard or terminal
Group C: Passenger Operations
TLIL5071 Manage rail passenger operations
TLIL5073 Manage train crewing and rostering
Group D: Freight/Heavy Haul Operations
TLIL5070 Manage rail freight operations
Group E: Network Control

TLIF5024 Develop plans for emergency response and recovery of rail networks
TLIW5003 Manage rail network control systems
Group F: Rail Safety
Group G: Maintenance Operations
TLIL5072 Manage rail yard operations
Group H: Incident management
TLIF5023 Undertake a derailment investigation
BSBHRM513 Manage workforce planning
BSBPMG416 Apply project procurement procedures
CPPSEC5001A Establish and maintain an occupational health and safety system
PSPHR504A Implement workforce planning and succession strategies
PSPPROC505A Manage procurement risk
PSPSEC602A Manage security awareness

procedures
TLIF4099 Develop an application for, or variation to, rail accreditation
TLIF5022 Develop and manage fitness for work policy and procedures

TLIL4069 Plan and coordinate protection for multiple worksites within limits of
a work on track authority
TLIL4081 Ensure competency of rail safety workers
TLIL5065 Roster train crews
TLIR5005 Manage a contract

procedures

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI50613 Diploma of Rail Operations
Management.
Links
036d851

TLI50716 Diploma of Bus and Coach Operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI50716 Diploma of Bus and Coach Operations
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in bus and coach operations job roles within the
Job roles
 Fleet Manager
 Operations Manager
 Passenger Service Delivery Manager
 Service Delivery Manager.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
below. Up to 2 of the general elective units may be selected
from any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or
accredited course. The general elective units must contribute to
Core units

TLIL5057 Maintain, monitor and improve transport

operations systems
TLIL5067 Develop a passenger transport plan
BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and

induction of staff
BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan
BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business

networks
BSBWRK411 Support employee and industrial relations

procedures
SITXMPR404 Coordinate marketing activities
TAEDEL404A Mentor in the workplace
TAETAS501B Undertake organisational training needs

analysis
TLIF0002 Administer chain of responsibility policies

and procedures
TLIF4064 Manage fatigue management policy and

procedures

TLIL4005 Apply conflict/grievance resolution

strategies
TLIL5068 Implement a passenger transport plan
TLIO1002 Follow security procedures when working

with passengers and personnel
TLIP5004 Develop a transport and logistics business

plan
TLIP5037 Develop workplace policy and procedures
TLIR5006 Develop, implement and review purchasing

strategies
TLIU4001 Implement and monitor environmental

protection policies and procedures

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI50713 Diploma of Bus and Coach
Operations.
Links
036d851

TLI50816 Diploma of Customs Broking Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI50816 Diploma of Customs Broking
Training Package.
This is a qualification for those engaged in customs broker job roles within the Transport and
Logistics Industry.
Successful achievement of this qualification will require the self-directed application of
Job roles
The TLI50816 Diploma of Customs Broking qualification is aligned to the following defined
role:
 Customs Broker.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
3 general elective units from the general elective units listed below. Up
to 2 of the general elective units may be selected from any relevant
qualification.
Core units

TLIX0001 Determine tariff classification of goods
TLIX0002 Initiating cargo border procedures
TLIX0003 Conduct advanced border clearance functions
TLIX4036 Analyse, advise on and carry out integrated border

clearance transactions
TLIX5046 Carry out standard customs clearance practices
TLIX5047 Determine customs value
TLIX5048 Determine import/export prohibitions/restrictions
TLIX5049 Determine indirect taxes
TLIX5050 Determine origin of goods and apply preference

schemes or free trade agreements
TLIX5052 Determine complex customs value
TLIX5053 Determine tariff classification for complex goods
TLIX5054 Comply with biosecurity border clearance
TLIX5055 Apply anti-dumping and countervailing measures
TLIX5056 Carry out additional customs clearance practices
TLIX5058 Review decisions of regulatory bodies
TLIF0003 Develop and implement policies and procedures to

ensure chain of responsibility compliance
TLII0001 Market international freight forwarding services

TLIL5063 Review contracts, insurance, risk and liability in an

international freight forwarding context

and cargo
TLIP5025 Set and achieve budgets

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI50813 Diploma of Customs Broking.
Links
036d851

TLI60115 Advanced Diploma of Materiel Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI60115 Advanced Diploma of Materiel Logistics
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person who provides leadership and strategic direction in materiel
sustainment and integrated management of logistics.
Successful achievement of this qualification requires the application of a significant range of
fundamental principles and complex techniques across a wide and often unpredictable variety
of contexts in relation to either varied or highly specific functions. Contribution to developing
a broad plan, budget or strategy is involved and accountability and responsibility for self and
others in achieving the outcomes is also involved. Significant judgement is required in
planning, design, technical or leadership/guidance functions related to products, services,
operations or procedures.
This qualification has been designed for systems managers or those in executive logistics
management roles who manage multiple systems or fleets. These people generally have
relatively broad materiel logistics coverage and manage logistics programs, program offices
or directorates.
This qualification will suit people with a minimum of six years Defence Materiel
Organisation (DMO)/Defence logistics experience.
Job roles
 Materiel Logistics Program Manager
 Materiel Logistics Senior Manager
 Materiel Logistics Executive Manager.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules


2 logistics elective units from the logistics elective units listed below plus
logistics elective units. Up to 2 of the general elective units may be selected from any
relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The general elective
units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
complied with.
Core units
BSBMGT605 Provide leadership across the organisation
PSPGOV602 Establish and maintain strategic networks

B
PSPGOV605 Persuade and influence opinion

A
PSPGOV606 Prepare high-level/sensitive written materials

A
PSPPOL603A Manage policy implementation
PSPPROC607 Manage strategic contracts

A
TLIX6001 Formulate material logistics strategies
OR
TLIX6002 Contribute to material logistics strategies
BSBCOM601 Research compliance requirements and issues
BSBMGT616 Develop and implement strategic plans

BSBMGT617 Develop and implement a business plan
BSBPMG604 Direct cost management of a project program
BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project program
BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a project program
PSPHR620A Manage organisational development
PSPMNGT60 Manage resources

2B
PSPMNGT61 Manage public sector financial resources

0A
PSPMNGT61 Develop partnering arrangements

3A
PSPMNGT61 Influence workforce effectiveness

5A
PSPPOL602A Provide policy advice
PSPPROC504 Finalise contracts

B
PSPPROC506 Plan to manage a contract

A
PSPPROC603 Divest strategic assets

C
PSPPROC604 Plan for strategic procurement

B
PSPPROC605 Coordinate strategic procurement

B
PSPPROC606 Negotiate strategic procurement

B
PSPPROC704 Influence and define strategic procurement

A
PSPPROC705 Establish strategic procurement context


This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI60110 Advanced Diploma of Materiel
Logistics.
Links
036d851

TLI60215 Advanced Diploma of Deployment Logistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLI60215 Advanced Diploma of Deployment Logistics
Training Package.
This is a qualification for a person who provides leadership and strategic direction in planning
and managing deployment logistics.
Successful achievement of this qualification requires the application of a significant range of
fundamental principles and complex techniques across a wide and often unpredictable variety
of contexts in relation to either varied or highly specific functions. Contribution to developing
a broad plan, budget or strategy is involved and accountability and responsibility for self and
others in achieving the outcomes is also involved. Significant judgement is required in
planning, design, technical or leadership/guidance functions related to products, services,
operations or procedures.
Job roles
 Deployment Logistics Program Manager
 Deployment Logistics Senior Manager
 Deployment Logistics Executive Manager.
publication.
Entry Requirements
Packaging Rules
4 integrated deployment logistics elective units from the integrated deployment logistics
elective units listed below plus
5 general elective units from the general elective units listed below or the remaining integrated

deployment logistics elective units. Up to 4 of the general elective units may be selected from
any relevant nationally endorsed Training Package or accredited course. The general elective
units must contribute to the vocational outcomes of the qualification.
complied with.
The following imported unit has a prerequisite unit:
 FDFFS3001A Monitor the implementation of quality and food safety programs.
Core units
PSPGOV511 Provide leadership

A
PSPMNGT60 Manage risk

8B
Integrated deployment logistics elective units
FDFFS2001A Implement the food safety program and procedures
FDFFS3001A Monitor the implementation of quality and food safety programs
PSPGOV406 Gather and analyse information

B
PSPGOV512 Use complex workplace communication strategies

A
PSPGOV513 Refine complex workplace documents

A
PSPGOV602 Establish and maintain strategic networks

B
PSPGOV605 Persuade and influence opinion

A

TLIL5020 Develop and maintain operational procedures for transport and logistics
enterprises
TLIX6002 Contribute to material logistics strategies
TLIX6046 Plan deployed logistics support for significant operations
TLIX6047 Monitor and provide logistics staff support for significant deployed operations
TLIX6048 Manage the deployment and delivery of logistics support
TLIX6049 Undertake provisioning in support of deployed operations
TLIX6050 Plan distribution operations on deployment
TLIX6051 Plan maintenance for deployed operations
TLIX6052 Plan health support for deployed personnel
TLIX6053 Coordinate health support operations
BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project program
BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a project program
PSPGOV506 Support workplace coaching and mentoring

A
PSPGOV515 Develop and use political nous

A
PSPGOV606 Prepare high-level/sensitive written materials

A
PSPMNGT60 Manage resources

2B
PSPMNGT61 Manage public sector financial resources

0A
PSPMNGT61 Develop partnering arrangements

3A
PSPMNGT61 Influence workforce effectiveness

5A
PSPPROC504 Finalise contracts

B
PSPPROC506 Plan to manage a contract

A

This qualification replaces and is equivalent to TLI60210 Advanced Diploma of Deployment
Logistics.
Links
036d851

AHCARB202A Fell small trees Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
AHCARB202A Fell small trees
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers the process of small tree felling and
defines the standard required to: prepare and properly
maintain equipment; determine the tree felling conditions,
direction of fall, safe fall zone, exclusion zone and escape
route; use safe tree felling techniques; use safe tree
removal techniques.
Application of the Unit

Application of the unit This unit applies to the process of small tree felling where
hazards have been assessed as low risk.
Licensing/Regulatory Information
Not Applicable
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units

Employability Skills Information

Employability skills This unit contains employability skills.
Elements and Performance Criteria Pre-Content

Not Applicable
Elements and Performance Criteria

ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA


1. Identify tree felling 1.1. Instructions for tree felling operations are received
requirements and clarified with supervisor prior to work being
undertaken.
1.2. Topography and site conditions are assessed and
factors influencing the natural direction of fall are
identified and confirmed with supervisor.
1.3. Tree is visually assessed and factors influencing the
tree felling operation are identified and confirmed
with supervisor.
1.4. Natural direction of fall, safe fall zone and exclusion
zone are determined and confirmed with supervisor.
1.5. Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) hazards
associated with felling operation are identified, risks
assessed and reported to the supervisor.
2. Prepare for tree 2.1. Felling equipment and component options that are
felling appropriate to the task being undertaken are selected
and prepared.
2.2. Appropriate support tools are prepared, transported
and placed to minimise felling delays.
2.3. Suitable safety equipment and Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE) are selected, checked, used,
maintained and stored.
2.4. Fall zone is cleared of obstacles and articles which
may be damaged by felled tree.
2.5. Clear escape route is established appropriate to the
site and according to recognised guidelines.
3. Fell tree 3.1. Location of other personnel is noted and monitored.
3.2. Standard tree felling techniques are determined by
ground conditions and state of canopy.
3.3. Corrective action is taken in response to changing
conditions or problems encountered.
3.4. Planned escape route is used when tree starts to fall.
3.5. Fall of tree and movement on ground are monitored
until felled tree is stable.
3.6. Safe working practices are employed according to
OHS requirements.
4. Complete tree felling 4.1. Appropriate method of clearing the site of felled tree
operation is determined.
4.2. Machinery required for removal of felled tree is
selected and used according to manufacturer's
specifications and OHS requirements.


4.3. Fall site is cleared of tree and all tree debris.
Required Skills and Knowledge

REQUIRED SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE
This section describes the skills and knowledge required for this unit.
Required skills
 interpret work procedures
 demonstrate safe working practices
 communicate orally and using hand signals with other personnel
 participate in teams and contribute to team objectives
 determine safe fall zones and exclusion zones
 measure distances
 monitor and maintain tree felling tools and equipment
 recognise structural defects, common diseases, pests, and nutrition deficiencies
 operate a chainsaw
 recognise caution or hazard signs and symbols
 interpret tasks or information from labels, manuals or written instructions
 record information accurately or verbally report information
 use literacy skills to follow sequenced written instructions and record information
accurately and legibly
 use oral communication skills/language competence to fulfil the job role as
specified by the organisation including questioning, active listening, asking for
clarification and seeking advice from supervisor
 use numeracy skills to estimate, calculate and record routine workplace measures
 use interpersonal skills to relate to people from a range of social, cultural and
ethnic backgrounds and with a range of physical and mental abilities.
Required knowledge
 basic operational and maintenance requirements of tree felling equipment
 safe working practices for chainsaw operation
 safety procedures and potential hazards for working safely in the amenity tree
industry
 emergency and first aid procedures
 the effect of tree removal on the environment
 local government regulations that apply to tree removal where appropriate
 identification of services and other hazards that affect the performance of the unit


 principles and methods of inspecting trees to identify structural defects.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the
performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the Assessment
Guidelines for the Training Package.
Overview of assessment
Critical aspects for assessment and The evidence required to demonstrate competency in this
evidence required to demonstrate unit must be relevant to workplace operations and satisfy
competency in this unit holistically all of the requirements of the performance
criteria and required skills and knowledge and include
achievement of the following:
 prepare and properly maintain equipment
 determine the tree felling conditions, direction of fall,
safe fall zone, exclusion zone and escape route
 use safe tree felling techniques
 use safe tree removal techniques
Context of and specific resources for Competency requires the application of work practices
assessment under work conditions. Selection and use of resources
for some worksites may differ due to the regional or
enterprise circumstances.
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole.
Trees may include:  all species of trees and woody tree like
vegetation forms.
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Arboriculture

Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units
Competency field
Competency field

AHCARB205A Operate and maintain chainsaws Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers the process of maintaining, preparing and
operating hand-held chainsaws in a work environment and
defines the standard required to: select, use, maintain and
store suitable personal protective equipment; carry out
routine checks and maintenance on chainsaw; apply
appropriate chainsaw technique and cutting methods
according to manufacturer's specifications and documented
low risk work procedures; assess and minimise
environmental impacts of chainsaw use; maintain records
of chainsaw training and certification, risk assessment and
use.

Application of the unit This unit applies to cross-cutting fallen timber using safe
cutting techniques.
Not Applicable
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units



Not Applicable



1. Recognise and apply 1.1. Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) procedures
workplace safety relevant to the maintenance and operation of
procedures chainsaws are recognised and applied.
1.2. OHS hazards are identified, risks assessed and risk
controls are implemented.
1.3. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is selected and
used.
1.4. Relevant licensing and legislative requirements with
regard to the operation of chainsaws are recognised,
accessed and applied.
2. Check and maintain 2.1. Tools and materials required for maintenance
chainsaw procedures are selected, checked and confirmed
against maintenance plan.
2.2. Routine checks and maintenance procedures are
conducted prior to operation and according to
manufacturer's specifications and maintenance plan.
2.3. Chainsaw faults or malfunctions are identified,
tagged and reported for repair according to
manufacturer's specifications and enterprise
requirements.
2.4. Completed chainsaw maintenance procedures are
detailed and recorded.
3. Operate chainsaw 3.1. Sawing materials are identified and positioned for
operation according to documented low risk work
procedures.
3.2. Cutting methods are determined appropriate to type
of material and risk controls implemented.
3.3. Chainsaw is operated according to manufacturer's
specifications and operator's manual.
3.4. Effective worksite communication is maintained to
ensure efficient workflow and address immediate
problems.
3.5. Environmental implications associated with
chainsaw operation are identified, assessed and
controlled according to documented requirements.
4. Complete and check 4.1. Chainsaw damage, malfunctions or irregular
chainsaw operation performance are recorded and reported according to
enterprise requirements.
4.2. Chainsaw is cleaned, maintained and stored
according to manufacturer's specifications and
enterprise requirements.
4.3. Relevant reports are maintained to industry


standards according to enterprise requirements.

Required skills
 identify hazards and implement safe operating procedures
 safely cross-cut fallen timber using compression and tension cuts with a hand held
chainsaw
 maximise volume and quality of recovery
 demonstrate safe and environmentally responsible workplace practices
 obtain relevant licenses and permits
 read and interpret manufacturer's specifications, work and maintenance plans, and
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs).
 effectively communicate information, interpret and apply task instructions, and
maintain records and reports
 estimate and measure dimensions, and calculate volumes
 recognise caution or hazard signs and symbols
 interpret tasks or information from labels, manuals or written instructions
 record information accurately or verbally report information
 use literacy skills to follow sequenced written instructions and record information
accurately and legibly
 use numeracy skills to estimate, calculate and record routine workplace measures
 use interpersonal skills to relate to people from a range of social, cultural and
ethnic backgrounds and with a range of physical and mental abilities.
Required knowledge
 relevant State/Territory legislation and regulations with regard to the operation of
chainsaws
 OHS legislative requirements and Codes of Practice
 hazards and risks when using chainsaws
 operating principles and operating methods
 various types of chainsaws and respective functions


 effects of timber defects on recovery
 environment Codes of Practice with regard to chainsaw operation.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
 select, use, maintain and store suitable personal
protective equipment
 carry out routine checks and maintenance on
chainsaw
 apply appropriate chainsaw technique and cutting
methods according to manufacturer's specifications
and documented low risk work procedures
 assess and minimise environmental impacts of
chainsaw use
 maintain records of chainsaw training and
certification, risk assessment and use.
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Chainsaws may include:  all types and models of hand-held chainsaws

in a work environment.
Unit Sector(s)

Unit sector Arboriculture
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units
Competency field
Competency field

AHCOHS501A Manage Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) processes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
AHCOHS501A Manage Occupational Health and Safety (OHS)

processes
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers managing OHS processes and defines the
standard required to: develop OHS policies and
procedures which demonstrate enterprise commitment to
OHS; establish arrangements to ensure the involvement
of all employees in the management of OHS; supervise
procedures for identifying hazards; conduct risk
assessments to cover all phases of the organisations
operations involving all relevant staff; develop risk
controls and ensure all relevant staff are aware of them;
establish and maintain procedures for dealing with
hazardous events and emergencies; established and
maintain an OHS safety induction and training program;
establish and maintain a system for OHS records; review
the enterprise OHS system based on an analysis of OHS
records, related policies, procedures and programs and
make changes in response to review.

Application of the unit This unit requires the ability to develop management
systems and procedures, and to manage the
implementation process. The process is usually
conducted within policy guidelines and procedures where
discretion and judgement are required.
Not Applicable

Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units


Not Applicable



1. Develop OHS 1.1. An OHS business plan and program is developed for
policies and the enterprise in consultation with designated
procedures personnel and/or management.
1.2. OHS responsibilities and duties are clearly defined,
allocated and included in job descriptions and duty
statements for all relevant positions.
1.3. Financial and human resources for implementation
of OHS policies and procedures are identified, sought
and/or provided as required.
1.4. Information on the OHS system and procedures for
the area of responsibility is provided and explained in
a form which is readily understood by employees.
2. Establish and 2.1. Consultation processes are established and
maintain processes to maintained with employees and their representatives
ensure the in accordance with relevant legislation and according
participation of all to enterprise guidelines.
employees in the 2.2. Issues raised though participation and consultation
application of OHS are dealt with and resolved promptly and effectively
in accordance with enterprise procedures for issue
resolution.
2.3. Information about the outcomes of participation and
consultation is provided in a manner readily
accessible to employees.
3. Establish and 3.1. Existing and potential hazards within the area of
maintain procedures responsibility are identified and confirmed in
for identifying accordance with legislation, Codes of Practice, and
hazards trends identified from the OHS records system.
3.2. A procedure for ongoing identification of hazards is
developed and integrated within systems of work and
procedures.
3.3. Activities are appropriately monitored to ensure that
this procedure is adopted effectively throughout areas
of managerial responsibility.
3.4. Hazard identification is addressed at the planning,
design and evaluation stages of any change in the
workplace to ensure that new hazards are not created.
4. Establish and 4.1. Risks associated with identified hazards are assessed
maintain procedures in accordance with safe work practices, with
for assessing risks information derived from workplace OHS records
and industry wide information, and with relevant
OHS legislation and Codes of Practice.
4.2. A procedure for ongoing assessment of risks is
developed and integrated within systems of work and


procedures.
4.3. Activities are monitored to ensure that risk
assessment procedures are adopted effectively
throughout the area of managerial responsibility.
4.4. Risk assessment is addressed at the planning, design
and evaluation stages of any change in the workplace
to ensure that the risk from hazards is not increased.
4.5. Accident and dangerous occurrences are investigated
and recorded according to enterprise and OHS
procedures.
5. Interim risk control 5.1. Measures to control assessed risks are developed and
measures are implemented in accordance with the hierarchy of
implemented until a control, relevant OHS legislation, Codes of Practice,
better or permanent and trends identified from the OHS records system.
control measure is 5.2. When measures which control a risk at its source are
developed not immediately practicable, interim solutions are
implemented until a permanent control measure is
developed.
5.3. A process of ongoing hazard identification and risk
assessment, and review of effectiveness of control
programs is developed and integrated into enterprise
management arrangements.
5.4. Activities are monitored to ensure that the risk
control procedure is adopted effectively throughout
the area of managerial responsibility.
5.5. Risk control is addressed at the planning, design and
evaluation stages of any change in the workplace to
ensure that adequate risk control measures are
included.
5.6. Systems are designed to reduce risk and
administrative arrangements to ensure safe OHS
work practices are put in place where elimination of a
hazard is not possible.
5.7. Effective OHS risk management measures are set in
place during any modification of the buildings and
structures, machinery and work activities.
5.8. Inadequacies in existing risk control measures are
identified and resources enabling implementation of
new measures are sought and/or provided according
to appropriate workplace procedures.
6. Plan and manage 6.1. Potential emergencies posing risk to health and
enterprise procedures safety of workers and the public are correctly
for dealing with identified.


hazardous events 6.2. Plans and procedures which control the risks
associated with hazardous events and meet any
legislative requirements as a minimum, are
developed in consultation with appropriate
emergency services.
6.3. Appropriate information and training is provided to
employees to enable implementation of correct
emergency procedures.
6.4. Adequate numbers of workers are trained in First
Aid to ensure that first aid is applied to preserve life
and minimise injury.
7. Establish and 7.1. An OHS induction program is developed to meet the
maintain an OHS occupational health and safety needs of new
safety induction and employees.
training program 7.2. An OHS training program is developed as part of
supervisors and employee's general training.
8. Establish and 8.1. A system for keeping OHS records is established and
maintain a system for monitored to allow identification of patterns of
OHS records occupational injury and disease in the enterprise.
8.2. Records are regularly updated and used to evaluate
the effectiveness of the enterprise OHS program.
9. Evaluate the 9.1. The effectiveness of the OHS system and related
enterprise OHS policies, procedures and programs is assessed
system and related according to enterprise aims with respect to OHS.
policies, procedures 9.2. Improvements to the OHS system are developed and
and programs implemented to ensure more effective achievement of
enterprise aims.
9.3. Compliance with OHS legislation and Codes of
Practice is assessed to ensure that legal OHS
standards are maintained as a minimum.

Required skills
 develop OHS policies and procedures which demonstrate enterprise commitment to
OHS


 establish and maintain arrangements to ensure the involvement of all employees in
the management of OHS
 establish and maintain procedures for identifying hazards
 establish and maintain procedures for assessing risks
 establish and maintain procedures for controlling risks
 establish and maintain enterprise procedures for dealing with hazardous events
 establish and maintain an OHS safety induction and training program
 establish and maintain a system for OHS records
 evaluate the enterprise OHS system and related policies, procedures and programs
 analyse recorded data to determine where the OHS program can better meet
enterprise and employee needs
 use literacy skills to fulfil job roles as required by the organisation. The level of
skill may range from reading and understanding documentation to completion of
written reports
clarification, negotiating solutions and responding to a range of views
 use numeracy skills to estimate, calculate and record complex workplace measures
 use interpersonal skills to work with others and relate to people from a range of
cultural, social and religious backgrounds and with a range of physical and mental
abilities.
Required knowledge
 data and documentation for industry injury statistics
 significant hazards and areas of risk in the workplace
 all relevant OHS legislation and Codes of Practice consistent with the hierarchy of
OHS risk control and its implementation for hazards in land-based industries
 risk control measures
 hierarchy of risk controls
 relevant management systems and procedures
 public safety issues.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
 develop OHS policies and procedures which
demonstrate enterprise commitment to OHS
 establish arrangements to ensure the involvement of
all employees in the management of OHS
 supervise procedures for identifying hazards
 conduct risk assessments to cover all phases of the
organisations operations involving all relevant staff
 develop risk controls and ensure all relevant staff are
aware of them
 establish and maintain procedures for dealing with
hazardous events and emergencies
 established and maintain an OHS safety induction
and training program
 establish and maintain a system for OHS records
including records to be kept and persons responsible
 review the enterprise OHS system based on an
analysis of OHS records, related policies, procedures
and programs and make changes in response to
review.
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT

RANGE STATEMENT
The enterprise OHS program  the full range of hazards that workers are
includes: exposed to (or are likely to be exposed to) in
the workplace.
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Occupational health and safety
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units
Competency field
Competency field

AURVGA3002 Recover vehicles Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
AURVGA3002 Recover vehicles
Release Comment
Release 1 Replaces AURV328961A Recover vehicle

Unit code updated to meet policy requirements
Minor changes to unit title
Reference to OHS legislation replaced with new WHS legislation
Licensing statement added to unit descriptor
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers the competence required to recover a
vehicle by transporting and towing.
Licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification
requirements may apply to this unit in some jurisdictions.
Users are advised to check with the relevant regulatory
authority.

Application of the unit The unit includes identification and confirmation of work
requirement, preparation for work, selecting the recovery
method, preparing the recovery vehicle and the vehicle to
be recovered, operating the recovery vehicle, cleaning up
the recovery worksite and completion of work finalisation
processes, including clean-up and documentation.
Work requires individuals to demonstrate judgement and
problem-solving skills in managing own work activities
and contributing to a productive team environment.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.


Elements describe the Performance criteria describe the performance needed to
essential outcomes of a demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold
unit of competency. italicised text is used, further information is detailed in the
required skills and knowledge section and the range
statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent
with the evidence guide.


1. Prepare for work 1.1. Work instructions are used to determine the job
requirements, including job sheets, recovery types,
vehicles preparation and recovery procedures.
1.2. Job specifications are read and interpreted.
1.3. WHS requirements, including personal protection
needs, are observed throughout the work.
1.4. Vehicle and method of recovery are identified.
1.5. Hand, power tooling and safety equipment are
identified and checked for safe use.
1.6. Procedures are determined to minimise waste
material/ components.
1.7. Procedures are identified for maximising energy
efficiency while completing the job.
2. Ascertain type of 2.1. Details are obtained by visual surveillance of
recovery recovery scene.
2.2. Information is obtained from officials at scene.
2.3. Hazards are recognised and included in requirements
for recovery.
2.4. All activities are carried out according to industry
regulations/guidelines, WHS legislation, and
enterprise procedures/policies.
3. Prepare vehicle to be 3.1. Vehicle is prepared for tow/lift using recognised
recovered for tow/lift enterprise guidelines and legislative requirements.
3.2. Vehicle is prepared for recovery without causing
damage to any component or system.
4. Prepare recovery 4.1. Recovery vehicle is prepared using recognised
vehicle for tow/lift enterprise guidelines and legislative requirements.
4.2. Recovery vehicle is prepared without causing
damage to any component or system.
regulations/guidelines, WHS legislation, statutory
requirements and enterprise procedures/policies.
5. Operate recovery 5.1. Vehicle/equipment is operated using recognised
vehicle industry guidelines and legislative requirements.
5.2. Lifting and loading procedures are followed.
5.3. Vehicle is operated without causing damage to any


component or system.
5.4. Recovered vehicle is safely conveyed to agreed
destination.
6. Clean up recovery 6.1. Area of recovery and its near vicinity is cleared of
worksite debris and dangerous objects/hazardous materials.
6.2. Worksite is cleaned without causing damage to any
component or system.
6.3. Clean-up procedures are completed within
recognised enterprise guidelines and legislative
requirements.
7. Clean up work 7.1. Material that can be reused is collected and stored.
vehicle and maintain 7.2. Waste and scrap is removed following workplace
equipment procedure.
7.3. Equipment and work vehicle are cleaned and
inspected for serviceable condition in accordance
with workplace procedures.
7.4. Unserviceable equipment is tagged and faults
identified in accordance with workplace procedures.
7.5. Operator maintenance is completed in accordance
with manufacturer/component supplier specifications
and worksite procedures.
7.6. Tooling is maintained in accordance with workplace
procedures.


Required skills
 collect, organise and understand information related to work orders, plans and
safety procedures for recovery type, preparation of vehicles, recovery procedure
and worksite clean-up requirements
 communicate ideas and information to enable confirmation of work requirements
and specifications, coordination of work with worksite supervisor, other workers
and customers, and the reporting of work outcomes and problems
 plan and organise activities, including preparation and layout of worksite and
obtaining of equipment and materials to avoid backtracking, workflow
interruptions or wastage
 work with others and in a team by recognising dependencies and using cooperative
approaches to optimise workflow and productivity
 establish safe and effective work processes which anticipate and/or resolve
problems and downtime, to systematically develop solutions to avoid or minimise
reworking and avoid wastage
 use mathematical ideas and techniques to calculate time, assess tolerances, apply
accurate measurements, calculate material requirements and establish quality
checks
 use workplace technology related to recovery of vehicles, including the use of
specialist recovery equipment, measuring equipment, computerised technology and
communication devices and the reporting/recording of results
Required knowledge
A working knowledge of:

 WHS regulations/requirements, equipment, material and personal safety
requirements
 environmental regulations
 technical information
 hazard identification and management procedures
 pick up/loading procedures
 manufacturer/component supplier recommended towing procedures and techniques
 manual handling procedures
 work organisation and planning processes
 enterprise quality processes

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Critical aspects for assessment It is essential that competence is fully observed and there is
and evidence required to ability to transfer competence to changing circumstances and
demonstrate competency in this to respond to unusual situations in the critical aspects of:
unit  observing safety procedures and requirements
 communicating effectively with others involved in or
affected by the work
 selecting methods and techniques appropriate to the
circumstances
 completing preparatory activity in a systematic manner
 applying pick up/loading procedures
 applying vehicle protection methods
 completing transporting and towing procedures
 completing area rehabilitation
 completing workplace/equipment documentation.
Context of, and specific Application of competence is to be assessed in the workplace
resources for assessment or simulated worksite.
Assessment is to occur using standard and authorised work
practices, safety requirements and environmental constraints.
Assessment is to comply with regulatory requirements,
including Australian Standards.
The following resources should be made available:
 workplace location or simulated workplace
 materials relevant to recovery of vehicles
 equipment, hand and power tooling appropriate to
recovery of vehicles
 activities covering mandatory task requirements
 specifications and work instructions.
Method of assessment  Assessment must satisfy the endorsed assessment
guidelines of the automotive industry's RS&R Training
Package.
 Assessment methods must confirm consistency and
accuracy of performance together with application of
underpinning knowledge.

EVIDENCE GUIDE
 Assessment must be by direct observation of tasks, with
questioning on underpinning knowledge and it must also
reinforce the integration of key competencies.
 Assessment may be applied under project related
conditions and require evidence of process.
 Assessment must confirm a reasonable inference that
competence is able not only to be satisfied under the
particular circumstance, but is able to be transferred to
other circumstances.
 It is preferable that assessment reflects a process rather
than an event and occurs over a period of time to cover
varying quality circumstances. Evidence of performance
may be provided by customers, team leaders/members or
other persons subject to agreed authentication
arrangements.
 Competence in this unit may be assessed in conjunction
with other functional units which together form part of
the holistic work role.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for
different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold
italicised wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential
operating conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on
the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry
and regional contexts) may also be included.
Recovery Recovery may be for damaged/broken down

vehicle or transportation of vehicle
Recovery vehicle Recovery vehicle may include tow truck, tilt tray,
trailer, dolly wheels, low loader.
Recovery methods Recovery methods are to include:

 preparation for lifting, loading and towing
 lifting, loading, towing, securing, cleaning up
recovery area (e.g. broken glass, debris).
WHS WHS requirements are to be in accordance with
legislation/regulations/codes of practice and
enterprise safety policies and procedures. This
may include protective clothing and equipment,
use of tooling and equipment, workplace
environment and safety, handling of materials,
use of fire fighting equipment, enterprise first aid,
hazard control and hazardous materials and
substances.
Personal protective equipment Personal protective equipment is to include that

prescribed under legislation/regulation/codes of
practice and workplace policies and practices.
Safe operating procedures Safe operating procedures are to include, but are
not limited to operational risk assessment and
treatments associated with vehicular movement,
toxic substances, electrical safety, machinery
movement and operation, manual and mechanical
lifting and shifting, working in proximity to
others and worksite visitors.
Emergency procedures Emergency procedures related to this unit are to

include, but are not limited to emergency
shutdown and stopping of equipment,
extinguishing fires, enterprise first aid

RANGE STATEMENT
requirements and worksite evacuation.
Environmental requirements Environmental requirements are to include but are

not limited to waste management, noise, dust and
clean-up management.
Quality requirements Quality requirements are to include, but are not

limited to regulations, including Australian
Standards, internal company quality policy and
standards and enterprise operations and
procedures.
Statutory/regulatory authorities Statutory/regulatory authorities may include

Federal, State/Territory and local authorities
administering acts, regulations and codes of
practice.
Tooling and equipment Tooling and equipment may include hand tooling,
chains, slings, ropes, safety equipment, towing
bar, jack, shovel, broom, remote lights, signs,
torch, watch, work light, air lines and fittings,
reduction blocks, and communication equipment.
Materials Materials may include gloves, industry-specific

stationery and cleaning materials.
Communications Communications are to include, but are not

limited to street directory, verbal and visual
instructions and fault reporting and may include
worksite specific instructions, written
instructions, plans or instructions related to
job/task, telephones and pagers.
Information/documents Sources of information/documents may include:

 verbal or written and graphical instructions,
signage, work schedules/plans/specifications,
work bulletins, memos, material safety data
sheets, diagrams or sketches
 safe work procedures related to recovery of
vehicles
 regulatory/legislative requirements pertaining
to automotive industry, including Australian
Design Rules
 engineer's design specifications and
instructions
 organisation work specifications and

RANGE STATEMENT
requirements
 instructions issued by authorised enterprise or
external persons
 Australian Standards.
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Vehicle body
Co-requisite units
Not applicable.
Competency field
Competency field

BSBADM409 Coordinate business resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBADM409 Coordinate business resources
Release Comments
Release 1 This version first released with BSB Business Services

Training Package Version 1.0.
Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to determine and analyse existing and
required resources, their effective application and the accountability for their use.
It applies to individuals with a broad knowledge of business resources who contribute well
developed skills and knowledge to ensure adequate resources are available to perform the
work of the organisation. They may have responsibility to provide guidance or to delegate
aspects of these tasks to others.

publication.
Unit Sector
Administration – General Administration



essential outcomes. demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Determine resource 1.1 Determine resource requirements in accordance with business

requirements and operational plans and organisational requirements
1.2 Provide opportunities to individuals and workgroups to
contribute to the identification of resource requirements
1.3 Ensure resource expenditure is realistic and makes efficient use
of available budget resources
1.4 Present recommendations on resource requirements in the
required format, style and structure using relevant business
equipment and technology
2 Acquire and allocate 2.1 Acquire physical resources and services in accordance with
resources organisational requirements
2.2 Check resources to ensure quality and quantity are in line with
service agreements
2.3 Allocate resources promptly to enable achievement of
workgroup objectives
2.4 Ensure consultation with individuals and teams on allocation of
resources is participative and is conducted using appropriate
interpersonal skills
3 Monitor and report on 3.1 Measure effectiveness of resource planning and assess against
resource allocation and actual costs, identified shortfalls and surpluses
usage 3.2 Develop and implement methods of monitoring resource use to
enable timely and accurate reporting against business and
operational plans
3.3 Identify improvements in resource planning through consultation
and feedback, and implement in accordance with organisational
requirements
3.4 Maintain records concerning equipment and resource purchases
in accordance with organisational requirements

Foundation Skills
This section describes language, literacy, numeracy and employment skills incorporated in
the performance criteria that are required for competent performance.
Skill Performance Description
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4  Identifies and interprets information from
organisational plans, policies and procedures
Writing 1.4, 2.1, 3.1-3.4  Develops a range of documents using structure and
vocabulary appropriate to audience, context and
purpose
Oral 1.2, 2.4, 3.3  Participates effectively in spoken interactions using
Communication active listening and questioning to confirm and clarify
understanding
Numeracy 1.3, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2  Interprets and comprehends a range of mathematical
information that is embedded in familiar texts
 Calculates and compares numeric data to track
expenditure
Navigate the 1.1, 2.1, 3.3, 3.4  Recognises and responds to explicit and implicit
world of work organisational procedures and protocols and
legislative/regulatory requirements
Interact with 1.2, 1.4, 2.4, 3.3  Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of
others communication for a specific purpose relevant to own
role
 Cooperates with others as part of familiar routine
activities playing an active role in facilitating group
interaction
Get the work 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1,  Applies formal processes when planning complex
done 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2 tasks, producing plans with logically sequenced steps,
reflecting an awareness of time constraints
 Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing
predictable problems in familiar work contexts
 Utilises a range of features within digital applications
to access, store and share information
 Reflects on the ways in which variables impact on
decision outcomes to identify improvement
opportunities

Unit Mapping Information

Code and title Code and title Comments Equivalence status
current version previous version
BSBADM409 BSBADM409A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Coordinate business Coordinate business Standards for
resources resources Training Packages
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=11ef6853-ceed-4ba7-9d87-4da40
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBADM409 Coordinate business resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBADM409 Coordinate business

resources
Release Comments
Release 1 This version first released with BSB Business Services Training
Package Version 1.0.
Performance Evidence
Evidence of the ability to:
 monitor resource usage
 maintain records of resource requirements and usage
 calculate costs and expenditures in relation to use and maintenance of business resources
 acquire and allocate physical resources and services to team members
 consult and communicate with individuals and teams about acquiring and using resources
 monitor, review and report on resource use acquisition, allocation, use and procedures
 follow organisational policies and procedures in relation to business resource acquisition
and monitoring.
Note: If a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least
once.
Knowledge Evidence
To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must:
 describe the functions of business equipment used in an organisation and identify common
faults
 identify organisational policies, plans and procedures in relation to business resource
acquisition and monitoring.

Assessment Requirements for BSBADM409 Coordinate business resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Conditions
Assessment must be conducted in a safe environment where evidence gathered demonstrates
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the general administration field of
work and include access to:
 records relating to business resources
 policies and procedures relating to resources
 case studies, and where possible, real situations.
Assessors must satisfy NVR/AQTF assessor requirements.
Links
7e23c10

BSBADM502 Manage meetings Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage a range of meetings
including overseeing the meeting preparation processes, chairing meetings, organising the
minutes and reporting meeting outcomes.
It applies to individuals employed in a range of work environments who are required to

organise and manage meetings within their workplace, including conducting or managing
administrative tasks in providing agendas and meeting material. They may work as senior
administrative staff or may be individuals with responsibility for conducting and chairing
meetings in the workplace.

publication.
Unit Sector
Administration – General Administration



1 Prepare for meetings 1.1 Develop agenda in line with stated meeting purpose
1.2 Ensure style and structure of meeting are appropriate to its
purpose
1.3 Identify meeting participants and notify them in accordance with
organisational procedures
1.4 Confirm meeting arrangements in accordance with requirements
of meeting
1.5 Despatch meeting papers to participants within designated
timelines
2 Conduct meetings 2.1 Chair meetings in accordance with organisational requirements,

agreed conventions for type of meeting and legal and ethical
requirements
2.2 Conduct meetings to ensure they are focused, time efficient and
achieve the required outcomes
2.3 Ensure meeting facilitation enables participation, discussion,
problem-solving and resolution of issues
2.4 Brief minute-taker on method for recording meeting notes in
accordance with organisational requirements and conventions for
type of meeting
3 Follow up meetings 3.1 Check transcribed meeting notes to ensure they reflect a true and
accurate record of the meeting and are formatted in accordance with
organisational procedures and meeting conventions
3.2 Distribute and store minutes and other follow-up documentation
within designated timelines, and according to organisational
requirements
3.3 Report outcomes of meetings as required, within designated
timelines

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 3.1, 3.2  Identifies and interprets information from complex
texts including legislation, organisational policies and
procedures
 Compares final output with original notes to check for
accuracy
Writing 1.1-1.5, 3.2, 3.3  Addresses the context, purpose and audience when
generating a range of texts
 Prepares complex texts from notes using appropriate
structure, and accurate spelling, grammar and
punctuation
 Records notes of meeting proceedings according to
organisational requirements
 Edits and corrects own work to ensure accuracy
Oral 2.1-2.4  Participates in verbal exchanges using appropriate
Communication style, tone and vocabulary for audience, context and
purpose
 Listens for specific information during meetings
 Asks questions and listens to responses to clarify
understanding
Numeracy 1.4, 1.5, 3.2, 3.3  Recognises and interprets numerical information
related to timeframes and budgets
Navigate the 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2  Recognises and responds to both explicit and implicit
work of work organisational procedures and protocols and
legislative/regulatory requirements
Interact with 1.3, 1.5, 2.3, 3.2  Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of
role
 Cooperates with others as part of familiar activities,
playing an active role in facilitating group interaction
Get the work 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5,  Applies formal processes when planning complex
done 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1, tasks, producing plans with logically sequenced steps,
3.2, 3.3 reflecting an awareness of time constraints
 Recognises and takes responsibility for addressing
predictable problems in familiar work contexts


BSBADM502 BSBADM502B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Manage meetings Manage meetings Standards for
Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBADM502 Manage meetings Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBADM502 Manage meetings
Release Comments
 apply conventions and procedures for formal and informal meetings including:
 developing and distributing agendas and papers
 identifying and inviting meeting participants
 organising and confirming meeting arrangements
 running the meeting and following up
 organise, take part in and chair a meeting
 record and store meeting documentation
 follow organisational policies and procedures.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline meeting terminology, structures, arrangements
 outline responsibilities of the chairperson and explain group dynamics in relation to
managing meetings
 describe options for meetings including face-to-face, teleconferencing, web-conferencing
and using webcams
 identify the relevant organisational procedures and policies regarding meetings, chairing
and minutes including identifying organisational formats for minutes and agendas.

Assessment Requirements for BSBADM502 Manage meetings Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the general administration field of
 reference material in regard to meeting venues and technology, catering and transport
suppliers
 organisational policies and procedures for managing meetings
 office supplies and equipment
 computers and relevant software
 case studies and, where possible, real situations.
Links
7e23c10

BSBCMM301 Process customer complaints Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes skills and knowledge required to handle formal and informal negative
feedback and complaints from customers.
It applies to individuals who apply a broad range of competencies and may exercise discretion
and judgement using appropriate knowledge of products, customer service systems and
organisational policies to provide technical advice and support to a team.

publication.
Unit Sector
Communication – Interpersonal Communication



1 Respond to complaints 1.1 Process customer complaints using effective communication

according to organisational procedures established under
organisational policies, legislation or codes of practice
1.2 Obtain, document and review reports relating to customer
complaints
1.3 Make decisions about customer complaints, taking into account
applicable legislation, organisational policies and codes
1.4 Negotiate resolution of the complaint and obtain agreement
where possible
1.5 Maintain a register of complaints/disputes
1.6 Inform customer of the outcome of the investigation
2 Refer complaints 2.1 Identify complaints that require referral to other personnel or
external bodies
2.2 Make referrals to appropriate personnel for follow-up in
accordance with individual level of responsibility
2.3 Forward all documents and investigation reports
2.4 Follow-up appropriate personnel to gain prompt decisions
3 Exercise judgement to 3.1 Identify implications of issues for customer and organisation
resolve customer service 3.2 Analyse, explain and negotiate appropriate options for
issues resolution with customer
3.3 Propose viable options in accordance with appropriate
legislative requirements and enterprise policies
3.4 Ensure matters for which a solution cannot be negotiated are
referred to appropriate personnel

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 3.3  Recognises, identifies and interprets textual
information to determine legislative, regulatory and
Writing 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.2, 3.3  Documents complaints and actions taken in
accordance with organisational requirements
 Records spoken information clearly and accurately for
future reference
Oral 1.1, 1.4, 1.6, 2.2,  Presents or requests information using words and
Communication 2.4, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 non-verbal features appropriate to the audience and
context
 Uses listening and questioning techniques to gather
information and confirm understanding
Navigate the 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1, 3.3  Takes personal responsibility for following
world of work organisational policies and procedures and legislative
requirements
Interact with 1.4, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2,  Follows organisational communication practices and
others 3.3, 3.4 procedures when referring complaints, seeking
advice or negotiating outcomes
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,  Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and
done 1.5, 2.2-2.4, 3.1 completing tasks to achieve required outcomes
 Addresses less predictable problems applying problem
solving processes in determining solutions that meet
 Uses the main features and functions of digital tools to
complete work tasks


BSBCMM301 BSBCMM301B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Process customer Process customer Standards for
complaints complaints Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM301 Process customer complaints Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM301 Process customer

complaints
Release Comments
 process and document customer complaints according to organisational and legislative
requirements
 use effective communication techniques to discuss options and resolve complaints
 follow correct procedures when referring and following up complaints.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify the key provisions of relevant legislation from all forms of government that may
affect aspects of business operations
 explain the communication skills required when handling customer complaints
 outline organisational procedures and standards for processing complaints
 list external bodies to which complaints could be referred.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM301 Process customer complaints Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced by individuals using interpersonal
communication skills in the workplace and include access to:
 organisational policies and procedures relevant to customer complaints
 relevant legislation or codes of practice
 office equipment and resources
 case studies and, where possible, real situations
 interaction with others.
Links
7e23c10

BSBCMM401 Make a presentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Training Package Version 1.0
Application
This unit covers the skills and knowledge required to prepare, deliver and review a
presentation to a target audience.
This unit applies to individuals who may be expected to make presentations for a range of
purposes, such as marketing, training and promotions. They contribute well developed
communication skills in presenting a range of concepts and ideas.

publication.
Unit Sector
Communication – Interpersonal Communication



1 Prepare a presentation 1.1 Plan and document presentation approach and intended
outcomes
1.2 Choose presentation strategies, format and delivery methods that
match the characteristics of the target audience, location, resources
and personnel needed
1.3 Select presentation aids, materials and techniques that suit the
format and purpose of the presentation, and will enhance audience
understanding of key concepts and central ideas
1.4 Brief others involved in the presentation on their
roles/responsibilities within the presentation
1.5 Select techniques to evaluate presentation effectiveness
2 Deliver a presentation 2.1 Explain and discuss desired outcomes of the presentation with
the target audience
2.2 Use presentation aids, materials and examples to support target
audience understanding of key concepts and central ideas
2.3 Monitor non-verbal and verbal communication of participants to
promote attainment of presentation outcomes
2.4 Use persuasive communication techniques to secure audience
interest
2.5 Provide opportunities for participants to seek clarification on
central ideas and concepts, and adjust the presentation to meet
participant needs and preferences
2.6 Summarise key concepts and ideas at strategic points to facilitate
participant understanding
3 Review the presentation 3.1 Implement techniques to review the effectiveness of the
presentation
3.2 Seek and discuss reactions to the presentation from participants
or from key personnel involved in the presentation
3.3 Utilise feedback from the audience or from key personnel
involved in the presentation to make changes to central ideas
presented

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.2  Reviews and analyses documents to identify
information relevant to a specific presentation
Writing 1.1, 3.3  Develops material to convey ideas and information to
target audience in an engaging way
Oral 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3,  Presents information using words and non-verbal
Communication 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 3.2 features appropriate to the audience and context
 Uses listening and questioning techniques to gather
information required to develop or modify
presentations
 Interprets audience reactions and changes words or
non-verbal features accordingly
Interact with 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4,  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others 2.5, 2.6, 3.2 to encourage interaction or to present information
 Demonstrates sophisticated control over oral, visual
and written formats, drawing on a range of
communication practices to achieve goals
 Recognises the need to alter personal communication
style in response to the needs or expectations of
others
Get the work 1.1-1.5, 2.2, 2.5,  Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and
done 3.1-3.3 prioritising tasks and own workload to achieve
outcomes
 Uses feedback from others, analytical and lateral
thinking to review current practices and develop new
ideas
complete work tasks


BSBCMM401 Make BSBCMM401A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

a presentation Make a presentation Standards for
Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM401 Make a presentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM401 Make a presentation
Release Comments
 prepare and deliver presentations related to occupation or area of interest which
demonstrate the use of:
 effective presentation strategies and communication principles
 aids and materials to support the presentation
 select and implement methods to review the effectiveness of own presentation and
document any changes which would improve future presentations.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify information collection methods that will support review and feedback of
presentations
 identify regulatory and organisational obligations and requirements relevant to
presentations
 describe the principles of effective communication
 describe the range of presentation aids and materials available to support presentations.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCMM401 Make a presentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced by individuals using interpersonal
communication skills in the workplace and include access to:
 equipment, materials and business software packages for making a presentation
 business technology
Links
7e23c10

BSBCOM501 Identify and interpret compliance requirements Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify and interpret the range of
internal and external compliance requirements and obligations that must be fulfilled by an
organisation.
It applies to individuals who use their sound theoretical knowledge of compliance and skills
in identifying compliance requirements to plan, carry out and evaluate their own work and/or
the work of a team.
No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time
of publication.
Unit Sector
Regulation, licensing and risk – compliance



1 Clarify the scope of 1.1 Identify and review the relevant range of operations and the
operations sphere of business arrangements of the organisation
1.2 Conduct an analysis of the operations and business
arrangements of the organisation and identify the functions,
products and services that may be subject to compliance
requirements
1.3 Develop and document work activity plans for determining
relevant compliance requirements
1.4 Obtain approval of plans from relevant organisational
personnel
2 Identify compliance 2.1 Conduct a search of information on internal and external

requirements compliance requirements using appropriate search resources,
including relevant Australian and international standards
2.2 Ensure the search of compliance requirements scans across all
relevant jurisdictions of laws, regulations, and industry and
organisational codes and standards and identify pertinent
compliance requirements
2.3 Progressively review information collected in terms of its
relevance to the organisation’s operations, services and products
2.4 Organise and store gathered information on relevant
compliance requirements in an appropriate format for further
analysis
3 Interpret, analyse and 3.1 Review and interpret collected information in terms of its
prioritise identified relevance to the organisation’s functions, services and products
compliance requirements 3.2 Discuss and clarify with relevant internal or external personnel
ambiguities, uncertainties and problems experienced in
interpreting identified compliance information
3.3 Identify, analyse and prioritise relevant compliance
requirements in terms of critical implications for the organisation
and risks and consequence of possible breaches
3.4 Group pertinent compliance requirements into those that are
critical and central to the organisation’s operations, those that are
important in some circumstances but are not central to the
organisation’s operations, and those that are pertinent but are
incidental to the organisation’s operations

4 Document compliance 4.1 Organise and document outcomes of the identification and
requirements interpretation activities
4.2 Prepare and communicate reports of relevant compliance
requirements and assessment of implications to relevant personnel
performing specific compliance management functions

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Identifies, interprets, analyses or reviews complex
2.3, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4 texts from various sources to determine legal
requirements, organisational operations, specific
requirements and responsibilities
Writing 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.4,  Collates and compiles results of research and analysis
3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2 using appropriate technical language and
organisational formats
 Develops materials to convey information,
requirements or recommendations using language and
structure appropriate to the audience
Oral 1.4, 3.2, 4.2  Presents specialised information using structure and
Communication language to suit the audience
 Uses appropriate techniques, including active listening
and questioning, to seek approvals and to confirm
understanding
Navigate the 1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3  Takes full responsibility for following policies,
world of work procedures and legislative requirements and identifies
organisational implications of new legislation or
regulations
Interact with 1.4, 3.2, 4.2  Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and
others practices when communicating with internal and
external personnel
Get the work 1.1, 1.3, 2.1-2.4, 3.1,  Plans, organises and implements activities required to
done 3.3, 3.4, 4.1, 4.2 identify, prioritise and document compliance
requirements
 Systematically gathers, analyses and evaluates all
relevant information in order to make informed
decisions about management of compliance breaches
 Uses digital tools and systems to locate, organise and
share information in effective ways


BSBCOM501 Identify BSBCOM501B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

and interpret Identify and Standards for
compliance interpret compliance Training Packages
requirements requirements
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM501 Identify and interpret compliance requirements Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM501 Identify and interpret

Release Comments
 analyse an organisation’s operations to identify areas subject to compliance requirements
 interpret and analyse information from Australian and international standards, legislation,
regulations, industry and organisational codes of practice to determine their relevance to
the organisation
 document and store the outcomes of identification and interpretation activities related to
the organisation’s compliance requirements
 report on key compliance requirements and the implications of these for the organisation.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline elements of compliance programs and related management systems breaches
 identify relevant Australian and international standards.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM501 Identify and interpret compliance requirements Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the compliance field of work and
include access to:
 relevant Australian and international standards, laws, regulations, industry and
organisational codes and standards
 appropriate computer resources for online searching
Links
7e23c10

BSBCOM601 Research compliance requirements and issues Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to explore and investigate various
aspects and issues associated with compliance requirements and a related compliance
program/management system.
It applies to individuals in regulatory authorities or large organisations with responsibilities

related to identifying and investigating impacts, issues and policy implications of various
aspects of compliance. It also applies to internal or external consultants who carry out
research activities for clients on various aspects of compliance as a compliance researcher or
member of a compliance management team.
of publication.
Unit Sector
Regulation, Licensing and Risk – Compliance



1 Clarify the purpose and 1.1 Confirm and clarify the purpose and scope of the required
scope of the research compliance related research in collaboration with the client/s and
relevant internal and/or external personnel
1.2 Document the purpose and scope of the required research in
accordance with organisational and/or client requirements
2 Develop the research 2.1 Develop a suitable research methodology to enable sufficiently
plan valid and reliable outcomes for the required research
2.2 Prepare the research plan for the proposed project
2.3 Obtain approval of plan from relevant internal and/or external
personnel
3 Gather required 3.1 Collect relevant research data using appropriate research
research data techniques and sources in accordance with the agreed research
plan
3.2 Gather and interpret from appropriate sources, information on
relevant Australian and international standards pertaining to
compliance requirements and related systems
3.3 Organise, interpret and review collected data in terms of its
relevance to the project's purpose and objectives
3.4 Discuss ambiguities, uncertainties and problems experienced
while interpreting collected data and address appropriately in
conjunction with relevant internal or external personnel
3.5 Organise interpreted research data for later analysis
4 Analyse collected data 4.1 Analyse data in accordance with planned methodology
4.2 Review and discuss outcomes of the analysis with relevant
internal or external personnel
5 Determine research 5.1 Interpret the outcomes of the data analysis in accordance with
findings and outcomes the project objectives
5.2 Develop and discuss preliminary findings, identified issues and
related recommendations with relevant internal and/or external
personnel
5.3 Undertake any additional data collection and analysis required
to clarify aspects of findings, issues and related action options

6 Document and 6.1 Prepare a draft report of the research outcomes, findings and
disseminate research recommendations in accordance with the agreed structure and
outcomes format, and distribute to relevant internal and/or external personnel
for comment and feedback
6.2 Edit the report based on the feedback obtained
6.3 Proofread the report prior to publication
6.4 Ensure the outcomes, findings and recommendations in the
report are signed off by authorised personnel
6.5 Produce and disseminate the report to nominated internal
and/or external personnel in accordance with agreed arrangements

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4,  Comprehends and analyses texts to identify key
3.5, 4.1, 5.2, 6.2, 6.3 requirements
 Identifies, analyses, reviews and extracts relevant
information from complex texts
 Proofreads draft texts to identify changes required
Writing 1.2, 2.1-2.3, 3.2-3.4,  Collates, summarises and compiles information from
4.2, 5.2, 6.1-6.3 a range of sources
 Develops reports for a specific audience using clear
and detailed language to convey findings and
recommendations
 Edits and incorporates amendments to ensure
compliance with regulatory or organisational
requirements
Oral 1.1, 2.3, 3.4, 4.2, 5.2  Conveys information, in a format and style appropriate
Communication to a specific audience
 Elicits the views and opinions of others by listening
and questioning
Navigate the 3.2  Identifies organisational implications of legislative
world of work requirements and considers these when planning and
implementing work
Interact with 1.1, 2.3, 3.4, 4.2, 5.2  Collaborates with others using effective interpersonal
others skills to facilitate shared understanding
 Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and
practices when communicating with internal and
external personnel
Get the work 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.5,  Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors
done 4.1, 4,2, 5.1-5.3, implementation and manages required communication
6.1-6.5 with others
 Gathers and analyses data and feedback to improve
outcomes
 Utilises features and functions of digital tools to
complete complex tasks


BSBCOM601 BSBCOM601B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Research compliance Research Standards for
requirements and compliance Training Packages
issues requirements and
issues
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM601 Research compliance requirements and issuesDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM601 Research compliance

requirements and issues
Release Comments
 access and interpret information on relevant Australian and international standards
 collaborate with others to identify and document the purpose and scope of the compliance
research
 plan the research requirements including:
 selecting an appropriate research methodology
 preparing a research plan
 getting approval for the plan from appropriate people
 carry out the research according to the approved plan including:
 collecting, organising, analysing and interpreting data
 reviewing and discussing analysis and preliminary outcomes with relevant l personnel
 prepare and distribute report of the research outcomes according to organisational
requirements.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain compliance requirements relevant to the organisational research methods
 explain elements of relevant compliance program/management systems
 describe quantitative and qualitative data analysis techniques relevant to compliance
related research
 list relevant Australian and international standards
 identify relevant organisational policies and procedures
 identify sources of information relevant to compliance related research.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCOM601 Research compliance requirements and issuesDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the compliance field of work and
include access to:
 organisational information and Australian and international standards related to
 relevant personnel
 computer resources and business equipment
Links
7e23c10

BSBCUS201 Deliver a service to customers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to deliver all aspects of customer
service at an introductory level. It includes creating a relationship with customers, identifying
their needs, delivering services or products and processing customer feedback.
It applies to individuals who perform a range of routine tasks in the workplace using a limited
range of practical skills and fundamental knowledge of customer service in a defined context
under direct supervision or with limited individual responsibility.

publication.
Unit Sector
Stakeholder Relations – Customer Service



1 Establish contact with 1.1 Acknowledge and greet customer in a professional, courteous
customers and concise manner according to organisational and legislative
requirements
1.2 Maintain personal dress and presentation in line with
1.3 Communicate using appropriate interpersonal skills to facilitate
accurate and relevant exchange of information
1.4 Maintain sensitivity to customer specific needs and any
cultural, family and individual differences
1.5 Establish rapport/relationship with customer and express a
genuine interest in customer needs/requirements
2 Identify customer needs 2.1 Use appropriate questioning and active listening to determine
customer needs
2.2 Assess customer needs for urgency to identify priorities for
service delivery
2.3 Provide customer with information about available options for
meeting customer needs and assist customer to identify preferred
option/s
2.4 Identify personal limitations in addressing customer needs and
seek assistance from designated persons where required
3 Deliver service to 3.1 Provide prompt customer service to meet identified needs
customers according to organisational requirements
3.2 Provide information regarding problems and delays, and
follow-up within appropriate timeframes as necessary
3.3 Communicate with customers in a clear, concise and courteous
manner
3.4 Identify opportunities to enhance the quality of service and
products, and take action to improve the service whenever possible
4 Process customer 4.1 Promptly recognise customer feedback and handle sensitively
feedback according to organisational and legislative requirements
4.2 Accurately record any feedback and communication between
customers and the organisation according to organisational
standards, policies and procedures and legislative requirements


4.3 Identify any unmet customer needs and discuss suitability of
other products/services
4.4 Support customers to make contact with other services
according to organisational policies and procedures
Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 3.1, 4.1,  Understands requirements in organisational policy and
4.2, 4.4 procedure documents
 Interprets product and service information in a range
of formats to provide customer advice
Writing 4.2  Records customer information according to
Oral 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5,  Provides information or advice using structure and
Communication 2.1-2.4, 3.2, 3.3, 4.3 language to suit the audience
 Asks questions and listens to gain information or
confirm understanding
Navigate the 1.1, 1.2, 3.1, 4.1,  Follows organisational procedures and practices
world of work 4.2, 4.4 relevant to own role
Interact with 1.1, 1.3-1.5, 2.1-2.4,  Uses accepted communication practices to establish
others 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, connections, build rapport and develop professional
4.3, 4.4 working relationships
 Adjusts personal communication style in response to
the opinions, values and particular needs of others
Get the work 3.2, 3.4, 4.1- 4.3  Addresses routine problems in familiar work contexts
done  Recognises opportunities to enhance work practices
and outcomes


BSBCUS201 Deliver BSBCUS201B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

a service to Deliver a service to Standards for
customers customers Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS201 Deliver a service to customers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS201 Deliver a service to

customers
Release Comments
Release 1 This version first released with Business Services Training

 greet customer and establish rapport/relationship in accordance with organisational
requirements
 identify customer needs using appropriate interpersonal skills
 provide prompt service to address customer needs in accordance with organisational
requirements
 identify and follow up opportunities to increase the quality of service and products
 respond to and record all customer feedback according to organisational standards,
policies and procedures.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify and briefly describe key provisions of relevant legislation from all forms of
government that apply to provision of customer services
 identify and explain workplace organisational policies and procedures relating to customer
service and the customer service process.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS201 Deliver a service to customers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the customer service field of work
and include access to:
 office equipment and technology
 workplace documents, organisational policies and procedures for customer service
 examples of customer complaints and feedback
Links
7e23c10

BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify customer needs, deliver and
monitor customer service and identify improvements in the provision of customer service.
It applies to individuals who apply a broad range of competencies in various work contexts. In
this role, individuals often exercise discretion and judgement using appropriate theoretical
knowledge of customer service to provide technical advice and support to customers over
short or long term interactions.

publication.
Unit Sector



1 Identify customer needs 1.1 Use appropriate interpersonal skills to accurately identify and
clarify customer needs and expectations
1.2 Assess customer needs for urgency to determine priorities for
service delivery according to organisational and legislative
requirements
1.3 Use effective communication to inform customers about
available choices for meeting their needs and assist in the selection
of preferred options
1.4 Identify limitations in addressing customer needs and seek
appropriate assistance from designated individuals
2 Deliver a service to 2.1 Provide prompt service to customers to meet identified needs
customers in accordance with organisational and legislative requirements
2.2 Establish and maintain appropriate rapport with customers to
ensure completion of quality service delivery
2.3 Sensitively and courteously handle customer complaints in
accordance with organisational and legislative requirements
2.4 Provide assistance or respond to customers with specific needs
according to organisational and legislative requirements
2.5 Identify and use available opportunities to promote and
enhance services and products to customers
3 Monitor and report on 3.1 Regularly review customer satisfaction with service delivery
service delivery using verifiable evidence according to organisational and
legislative requirements
3.2 Identify opportunities to enhance the quality of service and
products, and pursue within organisational and legislative
requirements
3.3 Monitor procedural aspects of service delivery for
effectiveness and suitability to customer requirements
3.4 Regularly seek customer feedback and use to improve the
provision of products and services
3.5 Ensure reports are clear, detailed and contain recommendations
focused on critical aspects of service delivery

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.2 2.1, 2.3, 2.4,  Comprehends textual information to determine

3.1, 3.5 customer service requirements
 Proofreads texts for clarity of meaning and accuracy of
grammar and punctuation
Writing 2.3, 3.5  Completes responses to customer complaints in
required format
 Prepares reports using sequencing, format and words
to communicate recommendations clearly and
effectively
Oral 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2,  Provides information or advice using structure and
Communication 2.3, 2.4 language to suit the audience
 Asks questions and listens to gain information or
Navigate the 1.2, 2.1-2.4, 3.1, 3.2  Recognises, understands and applies organisational
world of work policies and procedures relevant to role
Interact with 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2,  Selects and uses appropriate communication
others 2.3, 2.4, 3.4 conventions to establish connections, build rapport,
seek information and develop professional working
relationships
 Adjusts personal communication style in response to
the opinions, values and particular needs of others
Get the work 1.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.1-3.5  Plans and implements systems to gather and organise
done information
 Monitor actions and progress against goals and
implements adjustments as appropriate
 Uses problem-solving skills to analyse and respond to
customer complaints or enquiries
 Identifies and follows up on opportunities to improve
work practices and outcomes


BSBCUS301 Deliver BSBCUS301B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

and monitor a service Deliver and monitor Standards for
to customers a service to Training Packages
customers
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a

service to customers
Release Comments

 use communication skills to establish rapport and build relationships with customers in
 identify customer needs using appropriate questioning and active listening skills
 provide customer service in accordance with organisational requirements
 respond to and record customer feedback and action taken according to organisational
standards, policies and procedures
 produce a report which identifies and recommends ways to improve service delivery.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 summarise key provisions of relevant legislation from all levels of government that may
affect aspects of business operations
 explain organisational policy and procedures for customer service, including handling
customer complaints
 provide examples of verifiable evidence that could be used to review customer satisfaction
 outline the interpersonal skills needed for serving customers, including customers with
specific needs.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS301 Deliver and monitor a service to customers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the customer service field of work
and include access to:
 office equipment and technology
 workplace documents, organisational policies and procedures for customer service
Links
7e23c10

BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service

strategies
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to advise, carry out and evaluate
customer service strategies.
It applies to individuals who have well developed skills and a broad knowledge of customer
service strategies for addressing customer needs and problems, and who may provide
guidance or delegate work related tasks to others.

publication.
Unit Sector



1 Advise on customer 1.1 Clarify and accurately assess customer needs using appropriate
service needs communication techniques
1.2 Diagnose problems matching service delivery to customers and
develop options for improved service within organisational
requirements
1.3 Provide relevant and constructive advice to promote the
improvement of customer service delivery
1.4 Use business technology and/or online services to structure and
present information on customer service needs
2 Support implementation 2.1 Ensure customer service strategies and opportunities are
of customer service promoted to designated individuals and groups
strategies 2.2 Identify and allocate available budget resources to fulfil
customer service objectives
2.3 Promptly action procedures to resolve customer difficulties and
complaints within organisational requirements
2.4 Ensure that decisions to implement strategies are taken in
consultation with designated individuals and groups
3 Evaluate and report on 3.1 Review client satisfaction with service delivery using verifiable
customer service data in accordance with organisational requirements
3.2 Identify and report changes necessary to maintain service
standards to designated individuals and groups
3.3 Prepare conclusions and recommendations from verifiable
evidence and provide constructive advice on future directions of
client service strategies
3.4 Maintain systems, records and reporting procedures to compare
changes in customer satisfaction

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.2, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1  Reviews textual information and comprehends details
that relate to the interests or requirements of the client
and organisation
Writing 1.4, 3.3, 3.4  Creates a range of formal texts using structure,
grammar and clear and specialised language to
describe customer needs, maintain information and
support a particular position
Oral 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.2  Uses pace, intonation, intelligible pronunciation and
Communication listening and questioning techniques to interact
effectively with others
Numeracy 2.2  Recognises and interprets numerical information and
performs calculations on familiar mathematical
information
Navigate the 1.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2  Recognises and applies organisational protocols and
world of work meets expectations associated with own work
Interact with 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4,  Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of
others 3.2, 3.3 communication for a specific purpose relevant to own
role
 Uses a range of strategies to establish a sense of
connection and build rapport with customers
 Collaborates with others contributing knowledge and
skills to achieve joint outcomes
Get the work 1.2, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1- 3.4  Applies formal and logical processes when planning
done and implementing tasks
 Applies standard procedures when responding to
familiar problems within own work context
 Uses digital technologies to access, organise, present
and store information relevant to own role


BSBCUS401 BSBCUS401B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Coordinate Coordinate Standards for
implementation of implementation of Training Packages
customer service customer service
strategies strategies
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies Date this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS401 Coordinate

implementation of customer service strategies
Release Comments

 identify the needs and priorities of the organisation in delivering services to customers
 diagnose problems in delivery of customer service
 respond to and report on customer feedback and complaints
 review client satisfaction using verifiable data
 consult and communicate effectively with relevant people
 develop and implement strategies and methods to improve customer service delivery
including:
 budgeting
 promotion to staff
 documentation and follow up.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the principles of customer service
 explain sources of information and techniques for identifying customer needs and
reviewing customer satisfaction
 explain the organisational business structure, products and services related to customer
service
 describe product and service standards and best practice models.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS401 Coordinate implementation of customer service strategies Date this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and
replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must
be typical of those experienced in the customer service field of work and include access to:
 office equipment
 organisational policies and procedures for customer service
 client satisfaction data
Links
7e23c10

BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop strategies to manage
organisational systems that ensure products and services are delivered and maintained to
standards agreed by the organisation.
It applies to individuals who supervise the provision of quality customer service within an
organisation’s procedures framework by others. At this level, individuals must exercise
considerable discretion and judgement, using a range of problem solving and decision making
strategies.

publication.
Unit Sector



1 Plan to meet internal 1.1 Investigate, identify, assess, and include the needs of customers
and external customer in planning processes
requirements 1.2 Ensure plans achieve the quality, time and cost specifications
agreed with customers
2 Ensure delivery of 2.1 Deliver products and services to customer specifications within
quality products and organisation’s business plan
services 2.2 Monitor team performance to consistently meet the
organisation’s quality and delivery standards
2.3 Help colleagues overcome difficulties in meeting customer
service standards
3 Monitor, adjust and 3.1 Develop and use strategies to monitor progress in achieving
review customer service product and/or service targets and standards
3.2 Develop and use strategies to obtain customer feedback to
improve the provision of products and services
3.3 Develop, procure and use resources effectively to provide quality
products and services to customers
3.4 Make decisions to overcome problems and to adapt customer
services, products and service delivery in consultation with
appropriate individuals and groups
3.5 Manage records, reports and recommendations within the
organisation’s systems and processes

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.1,  Interprets and analyses textual information from a
3.2, 3.3, 3.5 variety of sources and applies the knowledge that has
been gained to evaluate standards for organisation’s
products and services
Writing 1.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5  Produces a range of text types to convey information,
requirements or recommendations matching style of
writing to purpose and audience
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.2  Clearly articulates systems and standards in a team
Communication environment using language suitable to diverse
audiences
 Uses listening and questioning techniques to obtain
feedback and confirm understanding
Numeracy 1.2  Interprets and comprehends mathematical information
in organisation’s business and customer service plans.
Navigate the 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.5  Recognises and applies organisational protocols and
world of work meets expectations associated with own work
Interact with 1.1, 2.3, 3.4  Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and
others protocols when communicating with colleagues and
customers
 Collaborates with others, taking into account their
strengths and experience, to achieve desired outcomes
 Provides support in field of expertise to team
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Develops and implements plans using logical
done 3.1-3.5 processes and monitors and evaluates progress against
stated goals
 Accepts responsibility for addressing complex or
non-routine difficulties, applying problem solving
processes in determining a solution.
 Uses digital technology to access, organise and present
information in a format that meets requirements


BSBCUS501 BSBCUS501C Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Manage quality Manage quality Standards for Training
customer service customer service Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS501 Manage quality

customer service
Release Comments

 develop and manage organisational systems for quality customer service
 develop and review plans, policies and procedures for delivering and monitoring quality
customer service
 implement policies and procedures to ensure quality customer service
 solve complex customer complaints and system problems that lead to poor customer
service
 monitor and assist teams to meet customer service requirements
 develop, procure and use human and physical resources to support quality customer
service delivery.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBCUS501 Manage quality customer service Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the legislative and regulatory context of the organisation relevant to customer
service
 describe organisational policy and procedures for customer service including handling
customer complaints
 identify service standards and best practice models
 summarise public relations and product promotion
 outline techniques for dealing with customers including customers with specific needs
 explain techniques for solving complaints including the principles and techniques
involved in the management and organisation of:
 customer behaviour
 customer needs research
 customer relations
 ongoing product and/or service quality
 problem identification and resolution
 quality customer service delivery
 record keeping and management methods
 strategies for monitoring, managing and introducing ways to improve customer service
relationships
 strategies to obtain customer feedback.
Gather evidence to demonstrate consistent performance in conditions that are safe and
replicate the workplace. Noise levels, production flow, interruptions and time variances must
be typical of those experienced in the customer service field of work and include access to:
 legislation, regulations and codes of practice related to customer service
 workplace documentation and resources
 complex customer complaints
Links
7e23c10

BSBFIA303 Process accounts payable and receivable Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBFIA303 Process accounts payable and receivable
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes skills and knowledge required to maintain accounts payable and accounts
receivable records, including processing payments to creditors and handling overdue accounts
receivable.
It applies to individuals employed in a range of work environments supporting the accounting

functions and aspects of an enterprise. They may provide administrative support within an
enterprise, or may be members of staff who have been delegated accounting responsibilities.

publication.
Unit Sector
Finance – Financial Administration



1 Maintain financial 1.1 Check source documents for accuracy and appropriate
journal systems authorisation
1.2 Refer errors and discrepancies in source documents for
resolution in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures
1.3 Enter transactions into cash and credit journal system in
accordance with organisational policy and procedures and relevant
legislation and compliance requirements
1.4 Total credit journals in accordance with organisational policy
and procedures
2 Prepare bank 2.1 Check cash journals against bank statements to identify
reconciliations differences
2.2 Update cash journals with relevant data from bank statement/s
2.3 Identify discrepancies and refer to appropriate staff member,
organisation or agency
2.4 Total cash journals in accordance with organisational policy
and procedures
2.5 Prepare regular reconciliation reports within designated
timelines
3 Maintain accounts 3.1 Enter transactions into individual accounts payable and
payable and accounts accounts receivable in accordance with organisational policy and
receivable systems procedures and accounting requirements
3.2 Prepare schedules of accounts payable and accounts receivable
for reconciliation purposes and in accordance with organisational
requirements
3.3 Reconcile accounts payable and accounts receivable schedules
with journal data or general ledger and in accordance with
4 Process payments for 4.1 Reconcile accounts payable statements with accounting records
accounts payable and in accordance with organisational policy and procedures
4.2 Check payment documentation for accuracy of information and
discrepancies and rectify errors in accordance with organisational
requirements

5 Prepare statements for 5.1 Produce and check accounts receivable statements for accuracy
accounts receivable in accordance with organisational policy and procedures
5.2 Rectify discrepancies and statements despatched within
designated timelines
6 Follow up outstanding 6.1 Maintain accounts receivable ledger system in accordance with
accounts organisational requirements and to reflect current credit situation
6.2 Conduct aged-analysis of accounts receivable to identify
outstanding accounts and to determine collection procedures in
6.3 Report or follow up outstanding accounts in accordance with
organisational policy and procedures
6.4 Monitor and review credit terms in accordance with credit
policy and procedures

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5,  Interprets textual information from a range of sources

3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, to confirm all necessary job requirements
5.2, 6.1-6.4  Checks documents to identify errors or discrepancies
Writing 1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.5,  Prepares a range of clear documentation using relevant

3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, format, grammatical structure and vocabulary suitable
6.1-6.4 to audience
Oral 1.2, 2.3, 6.3  Uses questioning and listening techniques to clarify
Communication information
 Explains information clearly using appropriate
terminology and tone
Numeracy 1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5,  Uses a limited range of mathematical calculations to
3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, reconcile amounts using whole numbers and decimals
5.2, 6.1-6.4  Arranges/compares numerical information
Navigate the 1.1-1.4, 2.4, 2.5,  Appreciates implications of legal and regulatory
world of work 3.1-3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, responsibilities related to own work
5.2, 6.1-6.4
Interact with 1.2, 2.3, 6.3  Seeks the appropriate form, channel and mode of
role
 Plays an active role in workgroup discussions, paying
some attention to the perspective of others
Get the work 1.2-1.4, 2.1-2.5,  Plans a range of routine and non-routine tasks
done 3.1-3.3, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, recognising stated goals and aiming to achieve them
5.2, 6.1-6.4 within specified timeframes
 Recognises predictable problems and applies formal
problem-solving processes or seeks advice from
others, as relevant
 Automatically implements standard procedures for
routine decisions
 Uses digital technologies to access, record, store,
organise and compile data and present reports as
required


BSBFIA303 Process BSBFIA303 Process Updated to meet Equivalent unit

accounts payable and accounts payable and Standards for
receivable receivable Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBFIA303 Process accounts payable and receivable Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBFIA303 Process accounts

payable and receivable
Release Comments

 accurately enter data into journal and subsidiary ledger system
 maintain journals and subsidiary ledger systems
 reconcile subsidiary ledger system with journal or general ledger data
 complete all tasks in accordance with legal and organisational responsibilities, within
scope of own responsibility.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 list key provisions of relevant legislation and regulations, standards and codes of practice
that may affect aspects of financial operations
 briefly describe the organisational accounting systems and procedures
 explain how to check for errors or discrepancies
 list and describe tasks that are outside own scope of responsibility.

Assessment Requirements for BSBFIA303 Process accounts payable and receivable Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the financial administration field of
 computer equipment and relevant software
 examples of cash journals, credit journals, accounts payable and accounts receivable
subsidiary legers
 workplace reference materials such procedural manuals and company policy
 case studies and, where possible, real situations..
Links
7e23c10

BSBFIM501 Manage budgets and financial plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake financial management
within a work team in an organisation. It includes planning and implementing financial
management approaches, supporting team members whose role involves aspects of financial
operations, monitoring and controlling finances and reviewing and evaluating effectiveness of
financial management processes.
It applies to managers in a wide range of organisations and sectors who have responsibility for
ensuring that work team financial resources are used effectively and are managed in line with
financial objectives of the team and organisation.

publication.
Unit Sector
Finance - Financial Management



1 Plan financial 1.1 Access budget/financial plans for the work team
management approaches 1.2 Clarify budget/financial plans with relevant personnel within the
organisation to ensure that documented outcomes are achievable,
accurate and comprehensible
1.3 Negotiate any changes required to be made to budget/financial
plans with relevant personnel within the organisation
1.4 Prepare contingency plans in the event that initial plans need to
be varied
2 Implement financial 2.1 Disseminate relevant details of the agreed budget/financial plans
management approaches to team members
2.2 Provide support to ensure that team members can competently
perform required roles associated with the management of finances
2.3 Determine and access resources and systems to manage financial
management processes within the work team
3 Monitor and control 3.1 Implement processes to monitor actual expenditure and to
finances control costs across the work team
3.2 Monitor expenditure and costs on an agreed cyclical basis to
identify cost variations and expenditure overruns
3.3 Implement, monitor and modify contingency plans as required to
maintain financial objectives
3.4 Report on budget and expenditure in accordance with
organisational protocols
4 Review and evaluate 4.1 Collect and collate for analysis, data and information on the
financial management effectiveness of financial management processes within the work
processes team
4.2 Analyse data and information on the effectiveness of financial
management processes within the work team and identify, document
and recommend any improvements to existing processes
4.3 Implement and monitor agreed improvements in line with
financial objectives of the work team and the organisation

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3,  Interprets and analyses information to determine
3.1-3.4, 4.2, 4.3 activities required
Writing 1.1, 1.4, 4.1-4.3  Records information in correct forms and prepares
materials which convey detailed and factual content in
accordance with internal procedures
Oral 1.2, 1.3, 2.1-2.3  Presents information about financial issues and
Communication requirements to a range of audiences using structure
and language to suit the audience
 Uses active listening and questioning to clarify
information and to confirm understanding
Numeracy 1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3,  Uses a wide range of mathematical calculations to
3.1-3.4, 4.1-4.3 analyse numeric information in budgets or financial
plans
Navigate the 2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 4.3  Recognises, understands and adheres to organisational
world of work requirements in undertaking own work
Interact with 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2,  Uses a range of strategies to connect, collaborate and
others 3.1, 2.3, 4.2, 4.3 cooperate with other work colleagues in activities
requiring collective effort and diverse skills and
knowledge
Get the work 1.1, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1-3.4,  Uses logical processes in planning, implementing and
done 4.1-4.3 evaluating complex tasks and developing alternative
strategies in achieving goals and timelines
 Uses a range of digital technologies to access, filter,
compile, integrate and logically present complex
information from multiple sources


BSBFIM501 Manage BSBFIM501A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

budgets and financial Manage budgets and Standards for
plans financial plans Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBFIM501 Manage budgets and financial plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBFIM501 Manage budgets and

financial plans
Release Comments

 use financial skills to work with and interpret budgets, ageing summaries, cash flow, petty
cash, Goods and Services Tax (GST), and profit and loss statements
 communicate with relevant people to clarify budget/financial plans, negotiate changes and
disseminate information
 prepare, implement and modify financial contingency plans
 monitor expenditure and control costs
 support and monitor team members
 report on budget and expenditure
 review and make recommendations for improvements to financial processes
 meet record keeping requirements for the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) and for
auditing purposes.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBFIM501 Manage budgets and financial plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 describe basic accounting principles
 identify and explain the relevant legislation and current requirements of the Australian
Taxation Office, including the Goods and Services Tax (GST)
 explain the key requirements for financiall record keeping and auditing
 describe the principles and techniques involved in managing:
 budgeting
 cash flows
 electronic spreadsheets
 GST
 ledgers and financial statements
 profit and loss statements.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the financial management field of
 resources and documentation used in the workplace
 workplace policies and procedures
 workplace budgets and financial plans
 case studies and, where available, real situations.
Links
7e23c10

BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and induction of staff Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and induction of

staff
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to execute tasks associated with the
recruitment cycle and apply in-depth knowledge of the work of the organisation, and how
recruitment and selection practices fit with other human resources functions.
This unit applies to individuals who support recruitment, selection and induction functions
under the direction of a human resource manager.
No licensing, legislative, or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of

publication.
Unit Sector
Workforce Development – Human Resource Management



1 Plan for recruitment 1.1 Obtain approval to fill position, clarify time lines and
requirement for appointment
1.2 Assist in preparing job descriptions that accurately reflect the
role requirements, according to organisational policies and
procedures, legislation, codes, national standards and work health
and safety (WHS) considerations
1.3 Consult with relevant personnel about job descriptions and
workforce strategy
1.4 Assist in ensuring that job descriptions comply with legislative
requirements and reflect the organisation's requirements for a
diverse workforce
1.5 Obtain approvals to advertise position
2 Plan for selection 2.1 Choose appropriate channels and technology to advertise
vacancies and/or identify potential talent pool
2.2 Advertise vacancies for staffing requirements according to
organisational policies and procedures
2.3 Consult with relevant personnel to convene selection panel and
develop interview questions
2.4 Assist in ensuring that interview questions comply with
2.5 Assist in short-listing applicants
2.6 Schedule interviews and advise relevant people of times, dates
and venues
3 Support selection 3.1 Participate in interview process and assess candidates against
process agreed selection criteria
3.2 Discuss assessment with other selection panel members
3.3 Correct biases and deviations from agreed procedures and
negotiate for preferred candidate
3.4 Contact referees for referee reports
3.5 Prepare selection report and make recommendations to senior
personnel for appointment
3.6 Advise unsuccessful candidates of outcomes and respond to any
queries


3.7 Secure preferred candidate's agreement
3.8 Complete necessary documentation according to organisational
procedures, observing confidentiality and privacy requirements
4 Induct successful 4.1 Provide successful candidate with employment contract and
candidate other documentation
4.2 Advise manager and work team of new appointment
4.3 Advise managers and staff of candidate's starting date and make
necessary administrative arrangements for pay and employee record
keeping
4.4 Arrange successful candidate's induction according to
organisational policy

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.2, 1.4, 2.4, 2.5  Synthesises ideas, concepts and specific information
from workplace and regulatory texts to inform
development of workplace documents
 Evaluates information to make judgements
Writing 1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 2.2,  Produces a range of text types using specific
3.5, 3.6, 3.8, 4.2, 4.3 information, workplace conventions and templates
Oral 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 2.3,  Asks questions and listens carefully to gather, interpret
communication 2.5, 3.1-3.5. 3.7 or evaluate information
 Uses appropriate vocabulary to present ideas or
persuasive arguments
Navigate the 1.2, 1.4, 2.4, 3.3,  Applies workplace protocols, legislation or regulations
world of work 3.8, 4.1, 4.4 relevant to own responsibilities
Interact with 1.3, 2.3, 3.2, 3.3  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others when communicating with personnel, candidates or
referees
 Participates in conversations relevant to role
responding, explaining, negotiating and persuading as
required
Get the work 2.1, 2.3, 2.6, 4.1,  Selects and uses digital technology to access, enter,
done 4.3, 4.4 store and retrieve information in accordance with
security requirements
 Takes responsibility for planning and implementing
tasks for efficient and effective outcomes


BSBHRM405 BSBHRM405A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Support the Support the Standards for
recruitment, selection recruitment, selection Training Packages
and induction of staff and induction of staff
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and induction of staff Date this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM405 Support the

recruitment, selection and induction of staff
Release Comments
 prepare job descriptions
 use job descriptions to support sourcing, selecting and appointing suitable staff
 use different advertising channels to promote vacancies and/or establish a potential talent
pool
 consult with managers to gain approvals
 develop selection criteria and interview questions in consultation with relevant personnel
 schedule interviews and advise relevant people of times, dates and venues
 participate in interviews and other selection techniques including assessing candidates
against selection criteria to short list them
 obtain referees' reports
 prepare and distribute a selection report including feedback to give unsuccessful
candidates
 advise unsuccessful candidates of the results
 secure preferred candidate’s agreement and provide an employment contract
 advise other staff of the successful candidate and arrange induction.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify documentation required for recruitment, selection and induction
 explain human resources life cycle and the place of recruitment and selection
 identify legislation relevant to recruitment, selection and induction of staff
 describe channels and technology to advertise vacancies
 explain a range of interviewing techniques and other selection processes and their
application.

Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM405 Support the recruitment, selection and induction of staff Date this document was generated:
18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the workforce development –
human resource development field of work and include access to:
 workplace policies and procedures
 position descriptions
 legislation, regulations, Codes and Standards relevant to staff recruitment, selection and
induction
Links
7e23c10

BSBHRM513 Manage workforce planning Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBHRM513 Manage workforce planning
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage planning in relation to an
organisation's workforce including researching requirements, developing objectives and
strategies, implementing initiatives and monitoring and evaluating trends.
It applies to individuals who are human resource managers or staff members with a role in a
policy or planning unit that focuses on workforce planning.

publication.
Unit Sector
Workforce Development – Human Resource Management



1 Research workforce 1.1 Review current data on staff turnover and demographics
requirements 1.2 Assess factors that may affect workforce supply
1.3 Establish the organisation's requirements for a skilled and
diverse workforce
2 Develop workforce 2.1 Review organisational strategy and establish aligned objectives
objectives and strategies for modification or retention of the workforce
2.2 Consider strategies to address unacceptable staff turnover, if
required
2.3 Define objectives to retain required skilled labour
2.4 Define objectives for workforce diversity and cross-cultural
management
2.5 Define strategies to source skilled labour
2.6 Communicate objectives and rationale to relevant stakeholders
2.7 Obtain agreement and endorsement for objectives and establish
targets
2.8 Develop contingency plans to cope with extreme situations
3 Implement initiatives to 3.1 Implement action to support agreed objectives for recruitment,
support workforce training, redeployment and redundancy
planning objectives 3.2 Develop and implement strategies to assist workforce to deal
with organisational change
3.3 Develop and implement strategies to assist in meeting the
organisation's workforce diversity goals
3.4 Implement succession planning system to ensure desirable
workers are developed and retained
3.5 Implement programs to ensure workplace is an employer of
choice
4 Monitor and evaluate 4.1 Review workforce plan against patterns in exiting employee and
workforce trends workforce changes
4.2 Monitor labour supply trends for areas of over- or under-supply
in the external environment
4.3 Monitor effects of labour trends on demand for labour


4.4 Survey organisational climate to gauge worker satisfaction
4.5 Refine objectives and strategies in response to internal and
external changes and make recommendations in response to global
trends and incidents
4.6 Regularly review government policy on labour demand and
supply
4.7 Evaluate effectiveness of change processes against agreed
objectives

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 4.6  Interprets and critically analyses organisational strategy
and data on staff turnover and demographics
Writing 1.3, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4,  Uses broad vocabulary, grammatical structure and
2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, conventions appropriate to audience and context to
3.2, 3.3, 4.5 develop strategies, plans or reports
Oral 2.6, 2.7  Conveys information using language, format and style
communication appropriate to a specific audience
Numeracy 4.2, 4.3, 4.4  Extracts and evaluates the mathematical information
and applies mathematical and problem-solving
strategies when monitoring labour trends and surveying
organisational climate
Navigate the 2.1, 2.7, 3.2, 3.3  Understands and interprets organisational goals r to
world of work develop processes, objectives or strategies relevant to
own role requirements
Interact with 2.6, 2.7  Selects and implements appropriate communication
others protocols to liaise with personnel in a range of work
contexts
Get the work 1.1, 2.1, 2.8, 3.1  Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors
done -3.5, 4.1- 4.7 implementation and manages relevant communication
when researching requirements and developing
workforce objectives and strategies
 Makes a range of critical and non-critical decisions in
relatively complex situations, taking a range of
constraints into account when assessing factors
affecting workforce supply
 Anticipates potential problems and uses analytical or
lateral thinking processes to formulate contingency
plans
 Uses a range of digital tools to collect data, and to
extract, organise and share information


BSBHRM513 BSBHRM513A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Manage workforce Manage workforce Standards for
planning planning Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM513 Manage workforce planning Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM513 Manage workforce

planning
Release Comments
 review and interpret information from a range of internal and external sources to identify:
 current staff turnover and demographics
 labour supply trends factors that may affect workforce supply
 organisation's workforce requirements objectives and strategies
 manage workforce planning including developing, implementing, monitoring and
reviewing strategies to meet workforce needs
 review relevant trends and supply and demand factors that will impact on an
organisation's workforce
 develop a workforce plan that includes relevant research and specific strategies to ensure
access to a skilled and diverse workforce.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain current information about external labour supply relevant to the specific industry
or skill requirements of the organisation
 outline industrial relations relevant to the specific industry
 describe labour force analysis and forecasting techniques.

Assessment Requirements for BSBHRM513 Manage workforce planning Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
human resource development field of work and include access to:
 an appropriate range of documentation and resources normally used in the workplace
 organisational strategic and operational plans
 organisational policies and procedures
 business technology.
Links
7e23c10

BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement and review the workplace
information system. It involves the identification, acquisition, initial analysis and use of
appropriate information which plays a significant part in the organisation’s effectiveness.
It applies to individuals whose work will normally be carried out within routine and
non-routine methods and procedures which require planning and evaluation, leadership and
guidance of others, and some discretion and judgement.

publication.
Unit Sector
Knowledge Management – Information Management



1 Identify and source 1.1 Determine and locate information required by teams
information needs 1.2 Acquire and review information held by the organisation to
determine suitability, accessibility, currency and reliability
according to organisational policies
2 Collect, analyse and 2.1 Collect information, which is adequate and relevant to the needs
report information of teams, in a timely manner
2.2 Ensure information is in a format suitable for analysis,
interpretation and dissemination
2.3 Analyse information to identify and report relevant trends and
developments in terms of the needs for which it was acquired
3 Implement information 3.1 Implement management information systems effectively to store,

systems retrieve and regularly review data for decision making purposes
3.2 Use technology available in the work area to manage
information effectively
3.3 Submit recommendations for improving the information system
to designated persons and/or groups
4 Prepare for information 4.1 Collect information about information system future needs in
system changes consultation with colleagues, including those who have a specialist
role in resource management
4.2 Ensure estimates of information system future needs reflect the
organisation’s business plans, and customer and supplier
requirements
4.3 Support proposals to secure resources by clearly presenting
submissions that describe realistic options, benefits, costs and
outcomes
4.4 Prepare team members to work with new technology and
information system changes

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Critically analyses complex documentation from a
2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, variety of sources and consolidates information
4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4 relating to specific criteria to determine requirements
Writing 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1,  Develops material for a specific audience using clear
3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4 and detailed language in order to convey explicit
information, requirements and recommendations
Oral 1.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4  Uses active listening and questioning and reading of
Communication verbal and non-verbal signals to convey and clarify
information and to confirm understanding
Numeracy 4.1-4.3  Selects from and uses a variety of developing
mathematical and problem solving strategies to ensure
estimates of information reflect the business plan and
staff requirements
Navigate the 1.2  Takes responsibility for following policies, procedures
world of work and legislative requirements and identifies
regulation
Interact with 1.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others when communicating with clients and co-workers in a
range of work contexts
 Cooperates with others and contributes to work
practices where joint outcomes are expected and
deadlines are to be met
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3,  Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and
done 3.1, 3.2, 4.1, 4.2 prioritising tasks and own workload for efficiency and
effective outcomes
 Contributes to continuous improvement of current
work practices by applying basic principles of
analytical thinking
 Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to
access, enter, present and communicate data and
information


BSBINM401 BSBINM401A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Implement Implement workplace Standards for
workplace information system Training Packages
information system
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBINM401 Implement workplace

information system
Release Comments
 identify, source and analyse information to determine
 information system needs
 whether it is fit for purpose
 trends and developments
 implement and review the workplace information system
 review a workplace information system and prepare and present a submission
recommending improvements.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify the information systems that are, or should be, available in the workplace
 explain the information management systems and technology typically associated with the
workplace including:
 budgets and financial management systems
 customer information software or records
 databases
 personal digital assistant (PDA)
 product and service information
 project management software
 record management systems
 spreadsheets.

Assessment Requirements for BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the knowledge management –
information management field of work and include access to:
 a workplace information system
 workplace policies and procedures.
Links
7e23c10

BSBINM501 Manage an information or knowledge management system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBINM501 Manage an information or knowledge management

system
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to organise training for others for an
information or knowledge management system and to manage the use of the system.
It applies to individuals who are responsible for seeing that key information and corporate
knowledge are retained, accessible to others and improve business outcomes.
The unit applies to information or knowledge management systems which comprise policies,
protocols, procedures and practices to manage information or knowledge within the
organisation and among relevant stakeholders.

publication.
Unit Sector
Knowledge Management – Information Management



1 Organise learning to use 1.1 Identify learning needs of relevant personnel and stakeholders
information or knowledge for input into and use of an information or knowledge management
management system system
1.2 Identify and secure human, financial and physical resources
required for learning activities to use an information or knowledge
management system
1.3 Organise and facilitate learning activities
1.4 Promote and support use of the system throughout the
organisation
1.5 Monitor and document effectiveness of learning activities
2 Manage use of 2.1 Ensure implementation of policies and procedures for the
information or knowledge information or knowledge management system are monitored for
management system compliance, effectiveness and efficiency
2.2 Address implementation issues and problems as they arise
2.3 Monitor integration and alignment with data and information
systems
2.4 Collect information on achievement of performance measures
2.5 Manage contingencies such as system failure or technical
difficulties by accessing technical specialist help as required
3 Review use of 3.1 Analyse effectiveness of system and report on strengths and
information or knowledge limitations of the system
management system 3.2 Review business and operational plan and determine how
effectively the system is contributing to intended outcomes
3.3 Make recommendations for improvement to system, policy or
work practices

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5,  Researches and critically analyses documentation from

3.1-3.3 a variety of sources to determine requirements
Writing 1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.4, 3.2,  Prepares and produces documentation for a specific
3.3 audience using clear and detailed language to convey
explicit information, requirements and
recommendations
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,  Presents information using structure and language to
Communication 2.2, 2.5, 3.3 suit the audience
 Uses active listening and questioning and reading of
verbal and non-verbal signals to clarify information
and to confirm understanding
Navigate the 2.1, 3.3  Takes full responsibility for following policies,
world of work procedures and legislative requirements and identifies
regulation
 Modifies or develops organisational policies and
procedures to comply with legislative requirements
and organisation goals
Interact with 1.1-1.4, 2.5, 3.3  Implements strategies for a diverse range of
others colleagues and clients in order to build rapport and
foster strong relationships
 Collaborates with others sharing information to build
strong work groups and avoid behaviours that are not
conducive to a productive environment
 Elicits feedback and provides feedback to others in
order to improve self or workgroup behaviours
Get the work 1.1-1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1,  Accepts responsibility for planning and sequencing
done 3.2 complex tasks and workload, negotiating key aspects
with others and taking into account capabilities,
efficiencies and effectiveness
 Monitors progress of plans and schedules and reviews
and changes them to meet new demands and priorities
 Applies systematic and analytical processes to address
problems and make decisions in complex situations
 Investigates new and innovative ideas as a means to
continuously improve, work practices and processes
 Uses and investigates new digital technologies and

applications to manage and manipulate data and

communicate effectively with others

BSBINM501 BSBINM501A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Manage an Manage an Standards for
information or information or Training Packages
knowledge knowledge
management system management system
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBINM501 Manage an information or knowledge management systemDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBINM501 Manage an

information or knowledge management system
Release Comments
 identify learning needs and plan and implement learning activities to enable personnel to
use information or knowledge management system including
 providing human, financial and physical resources as required
 use of coaching, mentoring, information sessions, workshops, training programs and
e-learning as appropriate
 monitor performance and address issues and contingencies as they arise including
 accessing technical specialists as required
 correct application of policies and procedures for the information or knowledge
management system
 alignment and effectiveness of the policies and procedures
 effectiveness of information or knowledge management system for intended outcomes
 recommend improvements to systems, policies and practices as appropriate.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline relevant legislation, codes of practice and national standards relevant to privacy,
freedom of information and knowledge management
 explain organisational policies and procedures including:
 records management
 information management
 customer service
 commercial confidentiality
 describe the organisational operations and existing data and information systems.

Assessment Requirements for BSBINM501 Manage an information or knowledge management systemDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
information management field of work and include access to:
 relevant legislation, regulation, standards and codes
 relevant workplace systems, documentation and resources
Links
7e23c10

BSBINN502 Build and sustain an innovative work environment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create an environment that enables
and supports the application of innovative practice focusing on a holistic approach to the
integration of innovation across all areas of work practice.
It applies to individuals working in leadership or management roles in any industry or

community context. The individual could be employed by the organisation, but may also be
an external contractor, the leader of a cross organisation team or of a self-formed team of
individuals. The work group could be permanent or temporary in nature.

publication.
Unit Sector
Creativity and Innovation – Innovation



1 Lead innovation by 1.1 Make innovation an integral part of leadership and management
example activities
1.2 Demonstrate positive reception of ideas from others and provide
constructive advice
1.3 Establish and maintain relationships based on mutual respect and
trust
1.4 Take considered risks to open up opportunities for innovation
1.5 Regularly evaluate own approaches for consistency with the
wider organisational or project context
2 Establish work practices 2.1 Consult on and establish working conditions that reflect and
that support innovation encourage innovative practice
2.2 Introduce and maintain workplace procedures that foster
innovation and allow for rigorous evaluation of innovative ideas
2.3 Facilitate and participate in collaborative work arrangements to
foster innovation
2.4 Build and lead teams to work in ways that maximise
opportunities for innovation
3 Promote innovation 3.1 Acknowledge suggestions, improvements and innovations from

all colleagues
3.2 Find appropriate ways of celebrating and promoting innovation
3.3 Promote and reinforce the value of innovation according to the
vision and objectives of the organisation or project
3.4 Promote and support the evaluation of innovative ideas within
the wider organisational or project context
4 Create a physical 4.1 Evaluate the impact of the physical environment in relation to
environment which innovation
supports innovation 4.2 Collaborate with colleagues about ideas for enhancing the
physical work environment before taking action
4.3 Consider potential for supporting innovation when selecting
physical resources and equipment
4.4 Design, fit-out and decorate workspaces to encourage creative
mindsets, collaborative working and the development of positive


workplace relationships
5 Provide learning 5.1 Pro-actively share relevant information, knowledge and skills
opportunities with colleagues
5.2 Provide or encourage formal and informal learning opportunities
to help develop the skills needed for innovation
5.3 Create opportunities in which individuals can learn from the
experience of others

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.5, 2.2, 4.1, 5.1  Interprets and evaluates information that may deal with
complex ideas related to issues both within and outside
a given workplace context
Writing 3.3, 3.4, 5.1  Develops information for others using language to suit
the context and audience
Oral 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1,  Presents ideas and concepts to a range of audiences
Communication 3.3, 3.4, 5.1 using structure and language to suit the audience
 Uses active listening and questioning to discuss and
clarify information and to confirm understanding
Navigate the 1.1, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2,  Takes responsibility for implementing practices and
world of work 3.3, 5.1, 5.2 procedures to achieve organisational objectives in
innovation according to role requirements
 Stays up to date with professional development options
to provide relevant information to staff
Interact with 1.2, 1.3, 2.3, 2.4,  Uses appropriate communication techniques to build
others 3.1-3.4, 4.2, 5.1, 5.3 rapport and foster strong relationships with co-workers
in a range of work contexts
 Uses inclusive and collaborative techniques to share,
promote and convey complex information about new
ideas and systems within the workplace
Get the work 1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1,  Accepts responsibility for planning and implementing
done 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, tasks and practices to achieve organisational goals,
4.4, 5.2, 5.3 negotiating key aspects with others and taking into
account current capabilities and needs
 Develops new and innovative ideas through
exploration, evaluation, analysis and critical thinking
 Facilitates a climate where people feel comfortable
suggesting and discussing improvements or new ideas
 Uses problem solving processes to identify, assess and
respond to challenges and risks around innovation


BSBINN502 Build BSBINN502A Build Updated to meet Equivalent unit

and sustain an and sustain an Standards for
innovative work innovative work Training Packages
environment environment
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBINN502 Build and sustain an innovative work environment Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBINN502 Build and sustain an

innovative work environment
Release Comments
Evidence of the ability to maximise opportunities for innovation by:
 establishing procedures and practices that foster innovation including:
 collaborative work arrangements
 building team capacity to contribute to innovation
 providing formal and informal learning opportunities
 evaluating ideas
 celebration and promotion of innovation
 consultation
 respectful communications and sharing of ideas and feedback
 reinforcing the value of innovation to the vision and objectives of the organisation,
 model ling behaviour including being receptive to ideas, giving constructive advice,
evaluating own work, establishing and maintaining relationships based on mutual respect
and trust, taking considered risks that provide opportunities for innovation
 evaluating how the physical environment can be enhanced to support innovation and
collaboration and collaborating on ideas to make improvements including in the selection
of physical resources and equipment, and the design, fit-out and decoration of the
workspaces
 making changes to a workspace that will encourage innovation in at least one of
 design
 fit-out
 decoration.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBINN502 Build and sustain an innovative work environment Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Knowledge Evidence
 explain the concepts and theories of innovation and how these link to innovation in
practice
 explain the context for innovation in the workplace including core business values, overall
objectives, broader environmental context and the need to ensure the value and benefit of
innovative ideas and projects
 discuss the factors and tools that can motivate individuals to use creative thinking and
apply innovative work practices
 research the legislative framework that impacts on operations in the relevant workplace
context
 explain how different approaches to management and leadership can support or hinder
innovation
 discuss typical challenges and barriers to innovation within teams and organisations and
ways of overcoming these including rewarding and celebrating innovation, coaching and
learning, modelling behaviour and managing the physical environment.

consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the creativity and innovation and
include access to:
 workplace documents
Links
7e23c10

BSBITU101 Operate a personal computer Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to start up and use a range of basic
functions on a personal computer or business computer terminal.
It applies to individuals who perform a range of routine computer tasks in the various sectors
of the business services industry and generally work under direct supervision.

publication.
Unit Sector
Information and Communications Technology – IT Use



1 Start computer, system 1.1 Adjust workspace, furniture and equipment to suit user
information and features ergonomic requirements
1.2 Ensure work meets organisational and work health and safety
(WHS) requirements for computer operation
1.3 Start computer or log on according to user procedures
1.4 Identify basic functions and features using system information
1.5 Customise desktop configuration, if necessary, with assistance
from appropriate persons
1.6 Use help functions as required
2 Navigate and 2.1 Open, close and access features by selecting correct desktop
manipulate desktop icons
environment 2.2 Open, resize and close desktop windows by using correct
window functions
2.3 Create shortcuts onto the desktop, if necessary, with assistance
from appropriate persons
3 Organise files using 3.1 Create folders/subfolders with suitable names

basic directory and folder 3.2 Save files with suitable names in appropriate folders
structures
3.3 Rename and move folders/subfolders and files as required
3.4 Identify folder/subfolder and file attributes
3.5 Move folders/subfolders and files using cut and paste, and drag
and drop techniques
3.6 Save folders/subfolders and files to appropriate media where
necessary
3.7 Search for folders/subfolders and files using appropriate
software tools
3.8 Restore deleted folder/subfolders and files as necessary
4 Print information 4.1 Print information from installed printer

4.2 View progress of print jobs and delete as required
4.3 Change default printer, if installed
5 Shut down computer 5.1 Close all open applications


5.2 Shut down computer according to user procedures
Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.3, 1.5, 1.6, 3.1-3.8,  Recognises textual information within internal
4.1-4.3, 5.1, 5.2 procedures and technical documents to determine and
complete work requirements
Writing 1.3, 3.1-3.3, 3.7  Inputs information using familiar text types and
records numerical and textual information for file
naming conventions
Oral 1.5, 2.3  Asks simple questions and comprehends answers that
Communication contain short and explicit information
Navigate the 1.1-1.3, 5.2  Recognises and follows organisational procedures and
world of work legislative responsibilities, with particular reference to
health and safety
Interact with 1.5, 2.3  Uses appropriate communication practices to seek
others guidance from more experienced work colleagues
Get the work 1.3-1.6, 2.1-2.3,  With guidance, is beginning to understand and use the
done 3.1-3.8, 4.1-4.3, 5.1, specific functions and features of digital systems and
5.2 tools

BSBITU101 Operate BSBITU101A Operate Updated to meet Equivalent unit

a personal computer a personal computer Standards for
Training Packages

Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBITU101 Operate a personal computer Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBITU101 Operate a personal

computer
Release Comments
 adjust equipment, furniture and workspace to suit individual ergonomic requirements
 follow organisational and WHS requirements when operating a computer
 follow user procedures and system information when using the basic functions on a
computer, seeking assistance when necessary
 use desktop icons and create shortcuts
 create and manipulate folders and subfolders
 check and delete print jobs and change default printer
 correctly shut down software applications and the computer.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the main work health and safety requirements for working with a computer
 list the main points to consider when setting up an ergonomic work environment
 list the main components of the computer system, and briefly explain what each one does
 briefly explain the functions of the operating system
 outline the organisation’s conventions for naming files

Assessment Requirements for BSBITU101 Operate a personal computer Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the information and
communications technology – IT use field of work and include access to:
 information about work health and safety requirements.
 computer user and system information
 suitable workspace including a personal computer or computer terminal with relevant
software and printer.
Links
7e23c10

BSBITU102 Develop keyboard skills Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBITU102 Develop keyboard skills
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop basic keyboard skills using
touch typing techniques in a broad range of settings.
It applies to individuals who perform a range of mainly routine tasks and generally work
under direct supervision using limited practical skills and fundamental knowledge.

publication.
Unit Sector
Information and Communications Technology – IT Use



1. Use safe work 1.1 Adjust workspace, furniture and equipment to suit user
practices ergonomic requirements
1.2 Ensure work meets organisational and work health and safety
(WHS) requirements for computer operation
2. Identify and develop 2.1 Identify and apply keyboard functions for both alpha and
keyboard skills numeric keyboard functions
2.2 Apply touch typing technique to complete a task
2.3 Develop speed and accuracy in accordance with workplace
requirements for level of responsibility
3. Check accuracy 3.1 Proofread document carefully to identify errors

3.2 Amend document, correct errors and complete a final accuracy
check
Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 2.3, 3.1, 3.2  Comprehends textual information in workplace

documents to confirm work requirements
 Checks own work to identify errors
Writing 2.2, 2.3, 3.2  Enters and edits numerical and textual information
according to a defined format
Navigate the 1.1, 1.2, 2.3  Complies with organisational and legislative
world of requirements and meets expectations associated with own
work role
Get the work 2.1-2.3, 3.1, 3.2  Understands the specific functions and features of digital
done tools and uses these to perform work tasks

Range of Conditions
This section specifies different work environments and conditions that may affect
performance. Essential operating conditions that may be present (depending on the work
situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional
contexts) are included.
Speed and accuracy must be:  consistent with degree of experience of operator
 relevant to level of responsibility.

BSBITU102 Develop BSBITU102A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

keyboard skills Develop keyboard Standards for
skills Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBITU102 Develop keyboard skills Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBITU102 Develop keyboard

skills
Release Comments
 follow ergonomic and organisational and work health and safety (WHS) requirements
 use keyboard functions to enter alpha and numeric data
 develop touch-typing techniques and speed and accuracy
 proofread and edit documents.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify key provisions of relevant legislation from all forms of government that may
affect aspects of business operations, such as WHS
 identify organisational benchmarks for keyboarding.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the information and
communications technology – IT use field of work and include access to:
 industry software packages
 relevant legislation
 relevant workplace documentation and resources.

Assessment Requirements for BSBITU102 Develop keyboard skills Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
7e23c10

BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness
Release Comments

Application
This unit defines skills, knowledge and outcomes required to plan and supervise the
performance of the team and develop team cohesion.
It applies team leaders, supervisors and new emerging managers who have an important
leadership role in the development of efficient and effective work teams.
Leaders at this level also provide leadership for the team and bridge the gap between the
management of the organisation and the team members. As such they must 'manage up' as
well as manage their team/s.

publication.
Unit Sector
Management and Leadership - Leadership



1. Plan to achieve team 1.1 Lead the team to identify, establish and document team purpose,
outcomes roles, responsibilities, goals, plans and objectives in consultation
with team members
1.2 Engage team members to incorporate innovation and
productivity measures in work plans
1.3 Lead and support team members in meeting expected outcomes
2. Lead team to develop 2.1 Provide opportunities for input of team members into planning,
cohesion decision making and operational aspects of work team
2.2 Encourage and support team members to take responsibility for
own work and to assist each other in undertaking required roles and
responsibilities
2.3 Provide feedback to team members to encourage, value and
reward individual and team efforts and contributions
2.4 Recognise and address issues, concerns and problems identified
by team members or refer to relevant persons as required
2.5 Model expected behaviours and approaches
3. Participate in and 3.1 Actively encourage team members to participate in and take
facilitate work team responsibility for team activities and communication processes
3.2 Give the team support to identify and resolve problems which
impede its performance
3.3 Ensure own contribution to work team serves as a role model for
others and enhances the organisation's image within the work team,
the organisation and with clients/customers
4. Liaise with 4.1 Maintain open communication with line manager/management at

management all times
4.2 Communicate information from line manager/management to the
team
4.3 Communicate unresolved issues, concerns and problems raised
by the team/team members to line manager/management and ensure
follow-up action is taken
4.4 Communicate unresolved issues, concerns and problems related
to the team/team members raised by line managers/management to
the team and ensure follow-up to action is taken

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Writing 1.1, 4.2  Prepares workplace plans that communicate intent and
elicits feedback clearly and effectively
Oral 1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3,  Engages in discussions or provides information using
communication 3.1, 3.2, 4.2-4.4 structure and language appropriate to the audience and
situation
Interact with 1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.5, 3.1,  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others 3.3, 4.1 when communicating with team members
 Adapts personal communication style to model
required behaviours, build trust and positive working
relationships and to show respect for the opinions and
values of others
 Plays a lead role in situations requiring effective
collaboration, demonstrating conflict resolution skills
and ability to engage and motivate others
Get the work 1.1-1.3, 3.2  Develops, implements and monitors plans and
done processes to ensure team engagement and effectiveness
 Uses formal analytical thinking techniques to identify
issues and generate possible solutions, seeking input
from others as required


BSBLDR403 Lead BSBWOR402A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

team effectiveness Promote team Standards for
effectiveness Training Packages
Title change
Minor edits to clarify
intent of performance
criteria
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBLDR403 Lead team

effectiveness
Release Comments
 apply knowledge of organisational goals, objectives and plans
 develop a team work plan including documentation of how it was generated and how it
will be monitored
 identify and incorporate innovation and productivity measures into a team work plan
 communicate with team members and management to identify and establish the team
purpose, roles, responsibilities, goals plans and objectives and resolve problems
 use techniques to consult, encourage, support and provide feedback to team members
 model team leadership behaviours and approaches
 liaise with management to develop the teamwork plan, resolve issues and ensure
follow-up action is taken.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
To complete the unit requirements safely and effectively, the individual must explain
principles and techniques associated with:
 delegation and work allocation
 goal setting
 group dynamics and processes
 individual behaviour and difference
 leadership styles
 motivation
 negotiation
 problem solving
 planning
 workplace innovation
 workplace productivity.

Assessment Requirements for BSBLDR403 Lead team effectiveness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership
field of work and include access to:
 information about the organisation, including organisational structure, goals, objectives
and plans
 case studies, and where possible, real situations
 workplace equipment and resources
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT401 Show leadership in the workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to lead teams and individuals by
modelling high standards of conduct to reflect the organisation's standards and values.
It applies to individuals who are making the transition from being a team member to taking
responsibility for the work and performance of others and providing the first level of
leadership within the organisation. These managers have a strong influence on the work
culture, values and ethics of the teams they supervise.

publication.
Unit Sector
Management and Leadership – Management



1. Model high standards 1.1 Ensure management performance and behaviour meets the
of management organisation’s requirements
performance and 1.2 Ensure management performance and behaviour serves as a
behaviour
positive role model for others
1.3 Develop and implement performance plans in accordance with
organisation’s goals and objectives
1.4 Establish and use key performance indicators to meet
2. Enhance organisation’s 2.1 Use organisation’s standards and values in conducting business
image 2.2 Question, through established communication channels,
standards and values considered to be damaging to the
organisation
2.3 Ensure personal performance contributes to developing an
organisation which has integrity and credibility
3. Make informed 3.1 Gather and organise information relevant to the issue/s under
decisions consideration
3.2 Facilitate individual’s and team’s active participation in
decision-making processes
3.3 Examine options and assess associated risks to determine
preferred course/s of action
3.4 Ensure decisions are timely and communicate them clearly to
individuals and teams
3.5 Prepare plans to implement decisions and ensure they are
agreed by relevant individuals and teams
3.6 Use feedback processes effectively to monitor the
implementation and impact of decisions

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1,  Gathers, interprets and analyses text relating to
3.1, 3.3, 3.5, 3.6 organisational goals, standards and values to aid
planning and decision making
Writing 1.3, 1.4, 3.1, 3.3,  Records and reports key information related to the
3.5, 3.6 organisational goals, standards and objectives
 Researches, plans and prepares documentation for
relevant stakeholders
Oral 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3,  Uses appropriate structure and language when
Communication 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 developing performance plans, or when seeking and
providing information about organisational goals and
objectives
Numeracy 1.4  Identifies and comprehends mathematical information
in familiar texts to establish key performance
indicators
Navigate the 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,  Understands how own role meshes with others and
world of work 2.1, 2.3 contributes to broader work goals
 Monitors adherence to organisational policies and
procedures and considers own role in terms of its
contribution to broader goals of the work environment
Interact with 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3,  Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes,
others 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 playing an active role in facilitating effective outcomes
 Recognises the importance of taking audience, purpose
and contextual factors into account when making
decisions about what to communicate with whom, why
and how
Get the work 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 3.1,  Develops plans to manage relatively complex,
done 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6 non-routine tasks with an awareness of how they
contribute to longer term operational and strategic
goals
 Uses systematic, analytical processes in complex,
non-routine situations, setting goals, gathering relevant
information and identifying and evaluating options
against agreed criteria
 Evaluates effectiveness of decisions in terms of how
well they meet stated goals

Range of Conditions
Organisation’s standards and values  explicitly stated values
must be identified by considering:  values that are implied by the way the organisation
conducts its business.

BSBMGT401 Show BSBMGT401A Show Updated to meet Equivalent unit

leadership in the leadership in the Standards for
workplace workplace Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT401 Show leadership in the workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT401 Show leadership in

the workplace
Release Comments
 identify the organisation’s standards and values, whether stated or implied by the way the
organisation conducts its business
 evaluate own behaviour and performance against these and adjust to achieve required
standards
 develop and implement performance plans and key performance indicators (KPIs) to meet
 use established communication channels to raise questions about standards and values that
may be damaging to the organisation
 ensure own behaviour and performance contributes to the integrity and credibility of the
organisation
 facilitate processes to make decisions that are based on:
 relevant information
 examination of options and associated risks
 input from relevant people
 communicate about making and implementing decisions including:
 facilitating agreement on the preferred course of action and implementation plans
 monitoring and feedback on the implementation and impact of decisions.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT401 Show leadership in the workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 explain how to identify an organisation’s standards and values when they are:
 stated
 implied
 articulate organisational values and expectations of behaviour
 explain basic theory of group behaviour
 outline the organisation’s process for raising questions about standards and values
 give examples of behaviours and performance that would typically be considered
damaging to an organisation
 explain concepts including:
 organisational values
 role modelling
 integrity and credibility
 leadership.
 relevant workplace documentation and resources
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement the operational plan by
monitoring and adjusting operational performance, planning and acquiring resources and
providing reports on performance as required.
It applies to individuals who plan activities to achieve the measurable, stated objectives of the
team and the organisation. At this level work will normally be carried out within routine and
non-routine methods and procedures which require planning, evaluation, leadership and
guidance of others.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Implement operational 1.1 Collate, analyse and organise details of resource requirements
plan in consultation with relevant personnel, colleagues and specialist
resource managers
1.2 Implement operational plans to contribute to the achievement
of organisation’s performance/business plan
1.3 Identify and use key performance indicators (KPIs) to monitor
operational performance
1.4 Manage contingencies by adjusting the implementation of the
operational plan in consultation with others
1.5 Provide assistance in the development and presentation of
proposals for resource requirements in line with operational
planning processes
2. Implement resource 2.1 Recruit and induct employees within organisation’s policies,
acquisition practices and procedures
2.2 Implement plans for acquisition of physical resources and
services within organisation’s policies, practices and procedures
and in consultation with relevant personnel
3. Monitor operational 3.1 Monitor performance systems and processes to assess progress
performance in achieving profit/productivity plans and targets
3.2 Analyse and use budget and actual financial information to
monitor profit/productivity performance
3.3 Identify unsatisfactory performance and take prompt action to
rectify the situation according to organisational policies
3.4 Provide mentoring, coaching and supervision to support
individuals and teams to use resources effectively, economically
and safely
3.5 Present recommendations for variation to operational plans to
the designated persons/groups and gain approval
3.6 Implement systems, procedures and records associated with
performance in accordance with organisation’s requirements

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Learning 3.4  Actively reinforces learning by applying new

knowledge and skills in mentoring, coaching and
supervising others
Reading 1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1,  Identifies, interprets, analyses and reviews textual
3.2, 3.6 information related to the operational plan and
monitoring of operational performance
Writing 1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2,  Communicates relationships between ideas and
3.2-3.6 information, matching style of writing to purpose and
audience
 Researches, plans and prepares workplace
documentation for relevant stakeholders using
Oral 1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1,  Participates in a variety of spoken exchanges with a
Communication 2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5 range of audiences varying structure and language to
suit the audience
Numeracy 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,  Selects and uses familiar mathematical techniques to
1.5, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 organise timely supply of adequate resources for the
operational plan and to use budgetary information to
monitor performance
Navigate the 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3,  Monitors adherence to organisational policies and
world of work 3.4, 3.6 procedures and considers own role in terms of its
others 2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5 when communicating with diverse individuals to build
rapport, seek or present information
 Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes,
playing an active role in facilitating effective group
communication, influencing direction and taking a
leadership role on occasion
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,  Takes responsibility for planning, organising,
done 1.5, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, implementing and monitoring tasks required to achieve
3.3, 3.6 required outcomes
well they met stated goals

 Recognises and addresses an increasing range of

familiar problems by implementing contingency plans

BSBMGT402 BSBMGT402A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Implement Implement Standards for
operational plan operational plan Training Packages.
Edits to clarify intent

of Performance
Criteria.
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT402 Implement

operational plan
Release Comments
 interact with a range of people/groups to identify resource requirements, performance
objectives, systems, procedures and records relating to the operational plan
 vary the operational plan and gain approval to deal with contingencies
 monitor operational performance against the performance objectives and budgets and take
action to rectify unsatisfactory performance
 plan and acquire physical and human resources using organisation’s systems and
procedures
 manage and support personnel to achieve performance objectives. including inducting
new employees and providing mentoring and coaching
 present information and recommendations to support implementation and variation of the
operational plan
 document and provide reports on performance as required by the organisation.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 describe performance monitoring systems and processes
 describe methods for problem solving
 explain how organisational policies and procedures relate to the operational plan.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT402 Implement operational plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 organisational operational plans, policies and procedures
 workplace documentation and resources including budgets, physical and human resource
procurement documentation, employee induction and performance monitoring procedures
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement the organisation’s
continuous improvement systems and processes. It covers using systems and strategies to
actively encourage the team to participate in the process, monitoring and reviewing
performance, and identifying opportunities for further improvements.
It applies to managers who have an active role in implementing the continuous improvement
process to achieve the organisation's objectives. Their position is closely associated with the
creation and delivery of products and services which means that they have an important role
in influencing the ongoing development of the organisation.
At this level, work will normally be carried out within routine and non-routine methods and
procedures, which require planning, evaluation, leadership and guidance of others.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Implement continuous 1.1 Implement systems to ensure that individuals and teams are
improvement systems and actively encouraged and supported to participate in decision
processes making processes, assume responsibility and exercise initiative
1.2 Communicate the organisation’s continuous improvement
processes to individuals and teams, and obtain feedback
1.3 Ensure effective mentoring and coaching allows individuals
and teams to implement the organisation’s continuous
improvement processes
2. Monitor and review 2.1 Use the organisation’s systems and technology to monitor and
performance review progress and to identify ways in which planning and
operations could be improved
2.2 Improve customer service through continuous improvement
techniques and processes
2.3 Formulate and communicate recommendations for adjustments
to those who have a role in their development and implementation
3. Provide opportunities 3.1 Implement processes to ensure that team members are
for further improvement informed of savings and productivity/service improvements in
achieving the business plan
3.2 Document work performance to aid the identification of further
opportunities for improvement
3.3 Manage records, reports and recommendations for
improvement within the organisation’s systems and processes

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.2, 3.3  Evaluates and integrates facts and ideas to construct
meaning from a range of text types in an effort to
implement continuous improvement systems and
processes
Writing 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Selects vocabulary, grammatical structures and
2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 conventions appropriate to text
 Researches, plans and prepares continuous
improvement documentation for relevant stakeholders
Oral 1.2, 1.3, 2.3  Participates in a variety of spoken exchanges with a
Communication range of audiences using structure and language to suit
the audience
Navigate the 2.1  Monitors adherence to organisational policies and
world of work procedures and considers own role in terms of its
Interact the 1.2, 1.3, 2.3, 3.1  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
work of others when communicating with diverse individuals to seek
or share information
communication, influencing direction and taking a
Get the work 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2,  Takes responsibility for planning and organising own
done 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 workload to achieve required outcomes
well they meet stated goals
 Uses digital applications to access and filter data,
extract, organise, integrate and share relevant
information
 Recognises the potential of new approaches to enhance
work practices and outcomes


BSBMGT403 BSBMGT403A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Implement continuous Implement Standards for
improvement continuous Training Packages
improvement
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT403 Implement

continuous improvement
Release Comments
 implement continuous improvement systems and provide mentoring and coaching support
to enable individuals and teams to participate in decisions, take responsibility, show
initiative and implement improvement processes
 implement processes to inform team members about savings and productivity/service
improvements achievements
 communicate effectively to support the continuous improvement system and
implementation of improvements
 apply continuous improvement to customer services including internal and external
customers
 implement, monitor and adjust improvement plans, processes and procedures to improve
performance
 document performance to identify further opportunities for improvement
 manage records and reports within the organisation’s systems and procedures.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 give examples of continuous improvement processes
 list typical areas of need for coaching and mentoring to support continuous improvement
 explain how change management techniques can support continuous improvement and
initiative
 identify the organisation’s systems and data that can be used for benchmarking and
monitoring performance for continuous improvement.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT403 Implement continuous improvement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT502 Manage people performance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage the performance of staff who
report to them directly. Development of key result areas and key performance indicators and
standards, coupled with regular and timely coaching and feedback, provide the basis for
performance management.
It applies to individuals who manage people. It covers work allocation and the methods to
review performance, reward excellence and provide feedback where there is a need for
improvement.
The unit makes the link between performance management and performance development,
and reinforces both functions as a key requirement for effective managers.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Allocate work 1.1 Consult relevant groups and individuals on work to be

allocated and resources available
1.2 Develop work plans in accordance with operational plans
1.3 Allocate work in a way that is efficient, cost effective and
outcome focussed
1.4 Confirm performance standards, Code of Conduct and work
outputs with relevant teams and individuals
1.5 Develop and agree performance indicators with relevant staff
prior to commencement of work
1.6 Conduct risk analysis in accordance with the organisational
risk management plan and legal requirements
2. Assess performance 2.1 Design performance management and review processes to

ensure consistency with organisational objectives and policies
2.2 Train participants in the performance management and review
process
2.3 Conduct performance management in accordance with
organisational protocols and time lines
2.4 Monitor and evaluate performance on a continuous basis
3. Provide feedback 3.1 Provide informal feedback to staff on a regular basis

3.2 Advise relevant people where there is poor performance and
take necessary actions
3.3 Provide on-the-job coaching when necessary to improve
performance and to confirm excellence in performance
3.4 Document performance in accordance with the organisational
performance management system
3.5 Conduct formal structured feedback sessions as necessary and
in accordance with organisational policy
4. Manage follow up 4.1 Write and agree on performance improvement and

development plans in accordance with organisational policies
4.2 Seek assistance from human resources specialists, where
appropriate
4.3 Reinforce excellence in performance through recognition and


continuous feedback
4.4 Monitor and coach individuals with poor performance
4.5 Provide support services where necessary
4.6 Counsel individuals who continue to perform below
expectations and implement the disciplinary process if necessary
4.7 Terminate staff in accordance with legal and organisational
requirements where serious misconduct occurs or ongoing
poor-performance continues

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Learning 2.2, 3.3, 4.4  Consolidates and improves own knowledge and skills
by coaching, mentoring or training others
Reading 1.2, 1.6, 2.4  Gathers, interprets and analyses texts in organisational
documents to facilitate performance management
Writing 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6,  Plans and prepares documents for allocating work and
2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4, managing performance suitable for the target audience
3.5, 4.1, 4.7 and in accordance with organisational requirements
Oral 1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2,  Uses language and structure appropriate to context and
Communication 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, audience to explain expected standards of
3.5, 4.2-4.7 performance, provide feedback and coach staff
Numeracy 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6,  Extracts and evaluates mathematical information
2.1, 2.4, 3.4, 4.1 embedded in a range of tasks and text relating to
performance standards and risk analysis
Navigate the 1.2, 1.6, 2.1, 2.3,  Appreciates the implications of legal and regulatory
world of work 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.7 responsibilities related to own work and the
organisation as a whole
 Monitors adherence to organisational policies and
procedures
Interact with 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5,  Recognises and applies the protocols governing what
others 2.2, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, to communicate to whom and how in a range of work
4.2-4.6 contexts
influencing direction and taking a leadership role on
occasion
Get the work 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 1.6,  Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors
done 2.1, 2.4, 4.1, 4.2 implementation and manages relevant communication
 Seeks advice, feedback and support as required to
assist in the decision-making process
 Uses experiences to reflect on the ways in which
variables impact on performance


BSBMGT502 Manage BSBMGT502B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

people performance Manage people Standards for
performance Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT502 Manage people performance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT502 Manage people

performance
Release Comments
 consult with relevant stakeholders to identify work requirements, performance standards
and agreed performance indicators
 develop work plans and allocate work to achieve outcomes efficiently and within
organisational and legal requirements
 monitor, evaluate and provide feedback on performance and provide coaching or training,
as needed
 reinforce excellence in performance through recognition and continuous feedback
 seek assistance from human resources specialists where appropriate
 keep records and documentation in accordance with the organisational performance
management system.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline relevant legislative and regulatory requirements
 outline relevant awards and certified agreements
 explain performance measurement systems utilised within the organisation
 explain unlawful dismissal rules and due process
 describe staff development options and information.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT502 Manage people performance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 relevant legislation
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to lead and manage continuous
improvement systems and processes. Particular emphasis is on the development of systems
and the analysis of information to monitor and adjust performance strategies, and to manage
opportunities for further improvements.
It applies to individuals who take an active role in managing a continuous improvement

process in order to achieve an organisation’s objectives.
At this level, work will normally be carried out using complex and diverse methods and
procedures which require the exercise of considerable discretion and judgement, using a range
of problem-solving and decision-making strategies.

publication.
Unit Sector
Management and leadership – Management



1. Lead continuous 1.1 Develop strategies to ensure that team members are actively
improvement systems and encouraged and supported to participate in decision-making
processes processes, assume responsibility and exercise initiative as
appropriate
1.2 Establish systems to ensure that the organisation’s continuous
improvement processes are communicated to stakeholders
1.3 Ensure that change and improvement processes meet
sustainability requirements
1.4 Develop effective mentoring and coaching processes to ensure
that individuals and teams are able to implement and support the
organisation’s continuous improvement processes
1.5 Ensure that insights and experiences from business activities
are captured and accessible through knowledge management
systems
2. Monitor and adjust 2.1 Develop strategies to ensure that systems and processes are
performance strategies used to monitor operational progress and to identify ways in which
planning and operations could be improved
2.2 Adjust and communicate strategies to stakeholders according
to organisational procedures
3. Manage opportunities 3.1 Establish processes to ensure that team members are informed
for further improvement of outcomes of continuous improvement efforts
3.2 Ensure processes include recording of work team performance
to assist in identifying further opportunities for improvement
3.3 Consider areas identified for further improvement when
undertaking future planning

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5,  Identifies and extracts relevant information from a
2.1, 2.2, 3.3 range of complex texts
 Locates, interprets and analyses workplace
documentation to gather information relating to
Writing 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5,  Develops complex texts related to continuous
2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.3 improvement processes according to organisational
requirements
 Ensures the vocabulary, grammatical structures and
conventions are appropriate for the context and target
audience
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.2  Presents information to a range of audiences using
Communication appropriate structure and language
 Listens and comprehends information from a variety of
spoken exchanges with clients, co-workers and other
stakeholders
 Confirms understanding through questioning and
active listening
Navigate the 1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2  Develops strategies to enable compliance with
world of work legislative requirements and achievement of the
organisation’s goals
 Monitors adherence to organisational policies,
procedures and protocols and considers own role in
terms of its contribution to broader goals of the work
environment
Interact with 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.2  Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and
external stakeholders
interaction and influencing direction
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5,  Takes responsibility for developing, implementing and
done 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 monitoring systems and processes to achieve
organisational outcomes
 Uses analytical and lateral thinking to review current
practices and develop ideas for improvement
 Reflects on the ways in which digital systems and tools
are used, or could be used, to achieve work goals


BSBMGT516 BSBMGT516C Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Facilitate continuous Facilitate continuous Standards for
improvement improvement Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous

improvement
Release Comments
Evidence of the ability to establish systems and processes for continuous improvement that:
 facilitate effective contributions to and communications about continuous improvement
processes and outcomes
 address sustainability requirements
 incorporate mentoring, coaching and other support to enable people to participate
effectively in continuous improvement processes
 capture insights, experiences and ideas for improvements and incorporate them into the
organisation’s knowledge management systems and future planning.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain how systems and procedures can support effective continuous improvement
 explain how continuous improvement systems and processes relate to other business
systems and requirements including, knowledge management, quality, performance
management and sustainability.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT516 Facilitate continuous improvement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and monitor implementation
of the operational plan to provide efficient and effective workplace practices within the
organisation’s productivity and profitability plans.
Management at a strategic level requires systems and procedures to be developed and

implemented to facilitate the organisation’s operational plan.
This unit applies to individuals who manage the work of others and operate within the
parameters of a broader strategic and/or business plan.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Develop operational 1.1 Research, analyse and document resource requirements and
plan develop an operational plan in consultation with relevant
personnel, colleagues and specialist resource managers
1.2 Develop and/or implement consultation processes as an
integral part of the operational planning process
1.3 Ensure the operational plan includes key performance
indicators to measure organisational performance
1.4 Develop and implement contingency plans for the operational
plan
1.5 Ensure the development and presentation of proposals for
resource requirements is supported by a variety of information
sources and seek specialist advice as required
1.6 Obtain approval for the plan from relevant parties and explain
the plan to relevant work teams
2. Plan and manage 2.1 Develop and implement strategies to ensure that employees are
resource acquisition recruited and/or inducted within the organisation’s human
resources management policies, practices and procedures
2.2 Develop and implement strategies to ensure that physical
resources and services are acquired in accordance with the
organisation’s policies, practices and procedures
2.3 Recognise and incorporate requirements for intellectual
property rights and responsibilities in recruitment and acquisition
of resources and services
3. Monitor and review 3.1 Develop, monitor and review performance systems and
operational performance processes to assess progress in achieving profit and productivity
plans and targets
3.2 Analyse and interpret budget and actual financial information
to monitor and review profit and productivity performance
3.3 Identify areas of under-performance, recommend solutions and
take prompt action to rectify the situation
3.4 Plan and implement systems to ensure that mentoring and
coaching are provided to support individuals and teams to
effectively, economically and safely use resources
3.5 Negotiate recommendations for variations to operational plans


and gain approval from designated persons/groups
3.6 Develop and implement systems to ensure that procedures and
records associated with documenting performance are managed in

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2,  Identifies and extracts relevant information from a
3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.6 range of complex texts
 Gathers, interprets and analyses workplace
documentation to determine requirements for the
operational plan
Writing 1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2,  Develops and documents a range of detailed texts
3.1-3.6 relating to the management of an operational plan
according to organisational requirements
 Ensures the vocabulary, grammatical structures and
conventions are appropriate for the context and target
audience
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6,  Presents information to a range of audiences using
Communication 3.4, 3.5 appropriate register, vocabulary and paralinguistic
features
 Listens and comprehends information from a variety of
spoken exchanges with clients, co-workers and other
stakeholders
 Confirms understanding through questioning and
active listening
Numeracy 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 3.1-3.4  Selects and uses mathematical problem-solving
strategies to organise resource requirements,
performance benchmarks and financial viability of the
operational plan
Navigate the 2.1, 2.2, 3.4, 3.6  Monitors adherence to organisational policies,
world of work procedures and considers own role in terms of its
 Appreciates the implications of legal responsibilities
with specific reference to health and safety
Interact with 1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 3.5  Identifies and uses appropriate conventions and
interaction, influencing direction and taking a
Get the work 1.1-1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1,  Takes responsibility for developing and implementing
done 3.3, 3.4, 3.6 systems and processes to achieve organisational
objectives, seeking advice, feedback and support as

required to assist in the development and planning

phase
 Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors
implementation, and manages relevant communication
 Uses systematic analytical processes to aid decision
making, identify potential problems and generate
contingency plans or solutions

BSBMGT517 BSBMGT515A Updated to meet No equivalent unit

Manage operational Manage operational Standards for
plan plan Training Packages.
Edits to clarify intent

of Performance
Criteria.
Additional
performance criterion
and evidence for
intellectual property.
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT517 Manage operational

plan
Release Comments
 develop and implement an operational plan using a variety of information sources and
consultation (including using specialist advice if required) which includes:
 resource requirements
 key performance indicators
 monitoring processes
 contingency plans
 communicate effectively with relevant stakeholders to explain the plan and supporting
information, seek approvals, negotiate variations and engage work teams
 develop and implement strategies to achieve the operational plan within the organisation’s
policies, practices and procedures including:
 recruiting, inducting and developing personnel
 acquiring physical resources and services
 protecting intellectual property
 making variations to the plan
 monitoring and documenting performance.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT517 Manage operational plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 describe models and methods for operational plans
 explain the role of an operational plan in achieving the organisation’s objectives
 explain budgeting processes
 list alternative approaches to developing key performance indicators to meet business
objectives
 outline the legislative and regulatory context relevant to the operational plan of the
organisation
 outline the organisation’s policies, practices and procedures that directly relate to the
operational plan.
 relevant legislation and regulations
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT605 Provide leadership across the organisation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments
Version 1 This version first released with BSB Business Services

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to demonstrate senior leadership
behaviour and personal and professional competence. Business ethics are also addressed in
this unit.
It applies to individuals who have a role in inspiring and motivating others to achieve
organisational goals and to model professionalism in their organisation and industry.
Leadership is seen in the context of the organisational mission.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Communicate 1.1 Clarify objectives, values and standards in accordance with

organisational mission organisation’s strategic direction
and goals 1.2 Establish linkages between organisational objectives, values
and standards and the responsibilities of relevant groups and
individuals
1.3 Ensure media and language used is appropriate to individuals
and group circumstances
1.4 State clear expectations of internal groups and individuals and
explain in a manner which builds commitment to the organisation
1.5 Address expectations of the organisation
1.6 Investigate incidents promptly and communicate results clearly
to relevant groups and individuals
2. Influence groups and 2.1 Build trust, confidence and respect of diverse groups and
individuals individuals through positive role modelling and effective
communication and consultation
2.2 Embrace, resource and effectively implement improvements to
organisational and workplace culture
2.3 Demonstrate understanding of the global environment and new
technology in work activities
2.4 Ensure actions convey flexibility and adaptability to change
and accessibility
2.5 Ensure consultation and participation in decision making
occurs with relevant groups and individuals where appropriate
2.6 Ensure decision making takes into account needs and
expectations of both internal and external groups
2.7 Ensure decision making occurs in accordance with risk
management plans for all options, and within appropriate
timeframes
2.8 Ensure that the organisation is represented positively in the
media and community
3. Build and support 3.1 Assign accountabilities and responsibilities to teams consistent
teams with their competencies and operational plans
3.2 Ensure teams are resourced to allow them to achieve their


objectives
3.3 Empower teams and individuals through effective delegation
and support for their initiatives
3.4 Create and maintain a positive work environment
3.5 Encourage teams and individuals to develop innovative
approaches to the performance of work
4. Demonstrate personal 4.1 Model ethical conduct in all areas of work and encourage
and professional others to adopt business ethics
competence 4.2 Adapt appropriate interpersonal and leadership styles to meet
particular circumstances and situations
4.3 Set and achieve personal objectives and work program
outcomes
4.4 Ensure self-performance and professional competence is
continuously improved through engagement in a range of
professional development activities
4.5 Participate regularly in industry/professional networks and
groups

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Learning 4.3, 4.4, 4.5  Actively looks for and accepts ways to maintain and
improve own skills and knowledge
Reading 1.2, 1.3, 1.6, 2.7,  Evaluates and integrates facts and ideas to construct
4.4, 4.5 meaning from a range of text types
Writing 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,  Records and reports key information related to the
1.6, 3.1, 4.3 outcomes of the job to interact effectively and
appropriately with the team
 Researches, plans and prepares documentation using
format and language appropriate to the audience
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5,  Participates in a variety of spoken exchanges with
Communication 1.6, 2.1, 2.5, 3.1, clients, co-workers and stakeholders using structure
3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2 and language appropriate to context and audience
Navigate the 1.1, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6,  Works autonomously making high level decisions
world of work 2.8, 3.1, 4.1 related to the achievement of organisational goals
 Reflects on designation of roles and responsibilities
and how everyone’s role contributes to broader
organisational goals
 Appreciates the implications of ethical and other
organisational responsibilities in carrying out own role
Interact with 1.3, 1.4, 1.6, 2.1,  Demonstrates sophisticated control over oral, visual
others 2.4, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, and/or written formats, drawing on a range of
3.5, 4.1, 4.2 communication practices to achieve goals
 Identifies strengths and limitations of own
interpersonal skills and addresses areas that would
benefit from further development
 Recognises the importance of building rapport in order
to establish effective working relationships and inspire
trust and confidence
 Collaborates and cooperates with others, playing an
active role in leading and facilitating effective group
interaction and influencing direction
 Facilitates a climate in which others feel comfortable
to identify, explore and build on a variety of
perspectives in order to achieve shared outcomes
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 1.6, 2.2-2.7,  Accepts responsibility for planning and sequencing
done 3.1, 3.2, 3.5 complex tasks and workload of self and others,
negotiating key aspects with others taking into account

capabilities, efficiencies and effectiveness

 Applies problem solving processes to identify risks,
evaluate options and determine solutions
 Facilitates a climate in which creativity and innovation
are accepted as an integral part of achieving outcomes
 Actively identifies systems, devices and applications
with potential to meet current and/or future needs

BSBMGT605 BSBMGT605B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Provide leadership Provide leadership Standards for
across the across the organisation Training Packages
organisation
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT605 Provide leadership across the organisation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT605 Provide leadership

across the organisation
Release Comments
Version 1 This version first released with BSB Business Services Training
Evidence of the ability to use interpersonal and risk management skills to:
 clearly communicate the organisation’s objectives, values and standards to a range of
stakeholders using appropriate media and language
 influence, support and provide resources for individuals and groups to:
 participate in consultations and decision making processes
 contribute to innovation and improvements
 achieve their responsibilities and objectives
 facilitate consultative decision making processes with relevant internal and external
stakeholders
 demonstrate ethical conduct and professional competence and continuing professional
development
 encourage others to adopt business ethics and build their commitment to the organisation.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain business ethics and their application to leadership
 outline leadership styles and their application in supporting the organisation’s mission,
objectives and values
 explain the impact of legislation in providing leadership in the organisation
 explain the organisation’s mission, purpose and values
 describe organisation objectives, plans and strategies
 explain organisational change processes.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT605 Provide leadership across the organisation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 relevant legislation, regulation, standards and codes
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT616 Develop and implement strategic plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to establish the strategic direction of the
organisation, sustain competitive advantage and enhance competitiveness. It covers analysis
and interpretation of relevant markets, capability assessment of the organisation and analysis
of the organisation’s existing and potential competitors and allies. It also covers
implementation of the strategic plan and developing specific actions and initiatives that will
be undertaken by people working in various roles.
It applies to individuals working in senior roles in the organisation who have responsibility
for ensuring that the organisation is positioned to ensure its long-term viability and success.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Confirm organisational 1.1 Check with stakeholders that organisational vision and mission
vision and mission are still held to be current and are supported
1.2 Make any changes or refinements to vision or mission
statement as required
1.3 Review or develop organisational values to support the vision
and mission statement
1.4 Gain support for strategic planning process from all relevant
stakeholders
2. Analyse the internal 2.1 Determine information requirements and undertake or

and external environment commission research to deliver relevant information
2.2 Analyse political, economic, social, and technological
developments in a global context
2.3 Seek advice from appropriate experts wherever necessary
2.4 Identify and consider strengths and weaknesses of existing and
potential competitors and allies
2.5 Analyse organisation’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities
and threats
2.6 Consider cooperative ventures that are supported by risk and
cost benefit analyses, are consistent with the organisational vision,
mission and values and provide for due diligence
2.7 Check that analysis of internal and external environment is
consistent with the perspectives of other informed people
3. Write strategic plan 3.1 Document relevant research and background for inclusion in
the strategic plan
3.2 Formulate strategic objectives and strategies needed for the
future
3.3 Detail each strategy with an assigned priority, a timeframe,
responsible parties and measurable performance indicators
3.4 Circulate strategic plan for comment, support and endorsement
4. Implement strategic 4.1 Communicate strategic plan to all relevant parties

plan 4.2 Brief people with a specific role in relation to strategies
4.3 Use performance indicators to monitor progress in


implementing plan
4.4 Make necessary refinements to plan
4.5 Evaluate achievement of objectives at agreed milestones
4.6 Review effectiveness of plan and consider methods for
improving strategic planning processes

Foundation Skills
Skill Performance Criteria Description
Reading 1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2,  Identifies and analyses complex organisational texts
2.4-2.6, 3.1, 3.3, to determine business requirements
4.4-4.6  Reviews, evaluates, interprets and applies content
from a range of sources to aid in development of
strategies
Writing 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2,  Prepares strategic plans for relevant stakeholders
2.4-2.6, 3.1-3.3, 4.3- incorporating appropriate vocabulary, grammatical
4.6 structure and conventions
 Incorporates amendments to documents according
to organisational requirements
 Collates and compiles data to convey specific
information, requirements and recommendations
Oral 1.1, 1.4, 2.3, 4.1, 4.2  Presents information and seeks advice using
Communication language and register appropriate to audience
 Participates in discussions using listening and
questioning to elicit the views of others and to
clarify or confirm understanding
Numeracy 2.6, 3.2, 3.3, 4.5, 4.6  Interprets and analyses statistical data and
mathematical information to consider trends and
resource implications of proposed strategies
Navigate the 1.1-1.3  Works autonomously making high level decisions
world of work to achieve and improve organisational goals
 Takes a lead role in the development of strategies to
achieve organisational goals
Interact with 1.1, 1.4, 2.3, 3.4, 4.1,  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and
others 4.2 protocols when communicating with internal and
external stakeholders to seek or share information
leadership role
 Seeks feedback or expert advice where required
Get the work 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4-2.7,  Develops flexible plans for complex, high impact
done 3.2, 4.3-4.6 activities with strategic implications, taking into
account capabilities, efficiencies and effectiveness
 Systematically gathers and analyses all relevant
information and evaluates options to inform
decisions about organisational strategies
 Evaluates outcomes to identify opportunities for

improvement
 Applies problem solving processes to identify risks,
evaluate options and determine solutions

BSBMGT616 Develop BSBMGT616A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

and implement Develop and Standards for
strategic plans implement strategic Training Packages
plans
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT616 Develop and implement strategic plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT616 Develop and

implement strategic plans
Release Comments
 consult and communicate effectively with relevant stakeholders to:
 confirm or revise the organisation’s mission, vision and values
 validate findings of research and analysis
 get input to and endorsement of strategic plans
 brief relevant parties about the plan
 analyse organisation’s internal and external environment to formulate strategic plans
including:
 background and research relevant to the plan
 legislation, regulations and codes of practice, including for intellectual property
 objectives, strategies and priorities
 roles and responsibilities
 performance indicators
 timeframes
 consideration of co-operative ventures
 cost-benefit and risk analysis
 seek advice from appropriate experts wherever necessary
 monitor and evaluate the implementation of the plan and make refinements as appropriate
 review effectiveness of planning processes and identify opportunities for improvement.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT616 Develop and implement strategic plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the legislation, regulations and codes of practice relevant to the organisation’s
strategic plan.
 give examples of risks and risk management strategies relevant to strategic planning
including:
 intellectual property rights and responsibilities
 other risks
 outline strategic planning methodologies including political, economic, social and
technological (PEST) analysis and strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats
analysis (SWOT)
 identify internal and external sources of information relevant to the organisation's market,
competitors, customer base, vision, values and capabilities
 outline techniques for developing organisational values.
 relevant legislation, regulations, standards and codes
Links
7e23c10

BSBMGT617 Develop and implement a business plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments
Version 1 This version first released with BSB Business Services

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to run a business operation and covers
the steps required to develop and implement a business plan.
It applies to individuals who are running an organisation or who take a senior role in
determining the effective functioning and success of the organisation. As such, they may
oversee the work of a number of teams and other managers.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Develop business plan 1.1 Review and evaluate pre-existing strategic, business and
operational plan, if available
1.2 Analyse and interpret business vision, mission, values and
objectives
1.3 Consult with key stakeholders
1.4 Review market requirements for the product or service, profile
customer needs and research pricing options
1.5 Develop performance objectives and measures through
consultation with key stakeholders
1.6 Identify financial, human and physical resource requirements
for the business
1.7 Consider any permits or licences that may be required for new
activity
1.8 Write business plan
2. Monitor performance 2.1 Communicate business plan to all relevant parties and ensure
understanding of performance requirements and timeframes
2.2 Ensure skilled labour is available to implement plan
2.3 Test performance measurement systems and refine, if
necessary
2.4 Ensure timely reports on all key aspects of the business are
available, user-friendly and balanced in terms of financial and
non-financial performance
2.5 Report system failures, product failures and variances to the
business plan as they occur
3. Respond to 3.1 Analyse performance reports against planned objectives

performance data 3.2 Review performance indicators and refine if necessary
3.3 Ensure groups and individuals contributing to
under-performance are coached, and provide training where
appropriate
3.4 Review system processes and work methods regularly as part
of continuous improvement

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.7,  Gathers, interprets and analyses textual information
2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.4 when developing the business plan and monitoring
operational performance
 Utilises understanding of distinguishing structures and
features of a range of text as well as recognising and
reflecting on context, purpose and audience
Writing 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.5,  Communicates relationships between ideas and
1.8, 2.3, 2.5, 3.2, information, matching style of writing to purpose and
3.3, 3.4 audience
 Researches, plans and prepares business plan for
relevant stakeholders
Oral 1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 3.3  Presents information and seeks advice using language
Communication and features appropriate to audience
questioning to elicit the views of others and to clarify
or confirm understanding
Numeracy 1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6,  Extracts and evaluates mathematical information to
1.8, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2 review the market, research competitors and review
pricing structures
Navigate the 1.7  Takes full responsibility for identifying and complying
world of work with legislative requirements applicable to self and the
organisation
Interact with 1.3, 1.5, 2.1, 3.3  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others when communicating with internal and external
stakeholders to seek or share information
leadership role
 Provides support in field of expertise to colleagues, as
required
done 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, implementation and manages relevant communication
3.2, 3.3, 3.4  Systematically gathers and analyses all relevant
information and evaluates options in order to monitor
performance and identify opportunities for
improvement


BSBMGT617Develo BSBMGT617A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

p and implement a Develop and Standards for
business plan implement a business Training Packages
plan
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT617 Develop and implement a business plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT617 Develop and

implement a business plan
Release Comments
Version 1 This version first released with BSB Business Services Training
 analyse and research business vision, mission, values, objectives, goals, competitors,
financial targets, management arrangements, marketing approaches and strategic, business
and operational plans
 write a business plan which includes a description of the business, products and services,
financial, physical and human resource requirements, permit and licence requirements,
marketing activity, financial indicators, productivity and performance targets for key
result areas
 implement a business plan including ensuring skilled labour is available, and that training
is provided where appropriate
 monitor and respond to business performance including evaluation of performance against
key results indicators including profit and loss, community awareness or branding,
environmental impact, governance, quality, sales, triple bottom line and the workforce
 consult, communicate with and report to key stakeholders including business partners,
financiers, customers, staff and technical advisers
 provide an analysis of the strengths and weaknesses of a business plan.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline processes for developing business plans
 describe performance objectives and measures including key performance indicators
 identify key stakeholders.

Assessment Requirements for BSBMGT617 Develop and implement a business plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 appropriate documentation and resources normally used in the workplace
 strategic, business and operational plans
 business information and data
Links
7e23c10

BSBMKG513 Promote products and services to international markets Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBMKG513 Promote products and services to international

markets
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to promote products and/or services of
the business within specified international markets.
It applies to individuals with managerial responsibility including planning, coordinating,

reviewing and reporting on promotional activities. Management of promotional activities may
involve geographic separation from these activities.

publication.
Unit Sector
Business Development – Marketing



1. Plan promotional 1.1 Access marketing plan for international business activity to
activities inform planning of promotional activities
1.2 Access relevant information sources to support planning of
promotional activities
1.3 Identify and assess promotional activities to ensure cultural
appropriateness and compatibility with organisational
requirements
1.4 Plan and schedule promotional activities according to
marketing needs of the organisation
1.5 Determine overall promotional objectives in consultation with
designated individuals and groups both in international and
domestic settings
1.6 Ensure timelines and costs for promotion of activities are
realistic and consistent with budget resources
1.7 Develop action plans to provide details of products and/or
services being promoted
2. Coordinate 2.1 Identify and prepare personnel and resources to support

promotional activities promotional activities, both in international and domestic settings,
to facilitate achievement of promotional goals
2.2 Identify, agree on and allocate roles and responsibilities of
overseas and domestic personnel for delivery of promotional
activities
2.3 Establish and conduct relationships with targeted groups in
overseas settings in a manner which enhances the positive image
of the organisation
2.4 Supervise and support roles and responsibilities of overseas
personnel involved in promotional activities
2.5 Use international business networks to assist in implementing
promotional activities
3. Review and report on 3.1 Analyse audience feedback and data to determine impact of
promotional activities promotional activity on delivery of products and/or services
3.2 Assess effectiveness of planning processes to identify possible
improvements for future international promotional activities
3.3 Collect and provide feedback to personnel and agencies


involved in promotional activity both in international and domestic
settings
3.4 Analyse costs and timelines to evaluate benefits accruing from
internationally based promotional activities
3.5 Prepare conclusions and recommendations from verifiable
evidence and provide constructive advice on future directions for
internationally based promotional activities

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1-1.4, 1.6, 3.1, 3.4  Identifies, analyses and evaluates complex textual
information including audience feedback to determine
business achievements
Writing 1.4, 1.7, 3.3, 3.5  Produces action plans, complex reports and other
documentation using clear, accurate and relevant
language and appropriate grammatical structure
Oral 1.5, 2.1-2.5, 3.1, 3.3,  Articulates ideas and recommendations clearly using
Communication 3.5 language and technical references suitable to audience
 Uses active listening and questioning to confirm
understanding
Numeracy 1.6, 3.4  Uses mathematical formulas to interpret expenditure
and business timelines
Navigate the 1.1, 1.3, 1.4  Monitors adherence to organisational policies and
world of work objectives and considers own role in terms of its
Interact with 2.1, 2.3-2.5, 3.3, 3.5  Begins to cultivate relationships with people with the
others knowledge, skills and influence to get things done or
provide support, building formal and informal
networks within and beyond immediate work context
 Recognises importance of taking audience, purpose
and contextual factors into account when making
decisions about what to communicate with whom, why
and how
Get the work 1.1-1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1,  Develops plans and uses effective time management
done 3.2, 3.4 and organisational skills to complete tasks with an
awareness of how they may contribute to longer-term
operational and strategic goals
 In more complex, non-routine situations, uses formal
decision-making processes, setting or clarifying goals,
gathering information and identifying and evaluating
several choices against a limited set of criteria
 When dealing with complex issues identifies cause of
the problem, and uses analytical processes to generate
possible solutions
 Monitors outcomes, considering results from a range
of perspectives and identifying key concepts and
principles that may be adaptable to future situations


BSBMKG513 BSBMKG513A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Promote products and Promote products Standards for
services to and services to Training Packages
international markets international markets
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG513 Promote products and services to international marketsDate this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG513 Promote products

and services to international markets
Release Comments
 plan, coordinate and review promotional activities undertaken in an international context
 produce a report detailing activities and recommendations to inform and guide future
promotional work.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify available overseas media
 summarise cultural characteristics of groups within target market
 list relevant international business networks
 outline marketing strategies and promotional activities suitable for international markets.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the business development –
marketing field of work and include access to:
 feedback on activity from overseas personnel/clients

Assessment Requirements for BSBMKG513 Promote products and services to international marketsDate this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniques
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to contribute to the control of a project's
scope by assisting with identifying its objectives, deliverables, constraints, assumptions and
outcomes; and by applying controls once the project has commenced.
It applies to individuals who are project practitioners working in a project support role.
of publication.
Unit Sector
Management and Leadership – Project Management



1. Contribute to defining 1.1 Review project initiation documentation and assist in

project scope identifying project objectives and requirements
1.2 Contribute to identifying project deliverables
1.3 Contribute to identifying measurable outcomes to enable
evaluation of project performance
1.4 Contribute to developing and documenting the scope
management plan
1.5 Assist in obtaining agreement to scope from relevant project
authority
2. Apply project scope 2.1 Undertake work according to agreed project scope
controls management plan and by using established change control
procedures and performance measurement procedures
2.2 Communicate instances of non-compliance with overall scope
to the project manager and other team members
3. Contribute to review of 3.1 Measure progress to determine potential, perceived and actual
scope controls scope changes
3.2 Appropriately report scope changes
3.3 Assist in review of project outcomes to determine effectiveness
of initial and subsequent scope management approaches

Foundation Skills
Skill Performance Criteria Description
Reading 1.1  Interprets and analyses complex texts
Writing 1.4, 1.5, 3.2  Develops and amends plans and associated
documentation using appropriate
organisational formats and vocabulary
Oral 1.2-1.5, 2.2  Interacts effectively in verbal exchanges,
Communication using clear language to convey information,
and active listening and questioning to
clarify understanding
Numeracy 1.3, 3.1  Selects and applies a range of mathematical
and problem-solving strategies to develop
timelines and monitor progress
Interact with 1.2-1.5, 2.2  Uses appropriate communication practices in
others a range of work contexts
 Collaborates and cooperates with others to
achieve shared goals
Get the work 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3  Plans and organises tasks required to
done monitor and report on project
implementation
 Analyses outcomes to identify future
improvements

BSBPMG409 Apply BSBPMG409A Apply Updated to meet Equivalent unit

project scope project Standards for
management scope-management Training Packages
techniques

Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniquesDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG409 Apply project scope

management techniques
Release Comments
 contribute to delineating and controlling project scope
 record project scope management plan
 interpret and follow project initiation documentation for purposes of documenting project
scope.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 list components of a project scope management plan
 identify and describe factors likely to impact project scope
 outline formal change-control processes
 identify and discuss methods for measuring work outcomes and progress against plans
 identify and discuss methods for segmenting and documenting a work breakdown
structure
 explain procedures for reporting a change in scope
 describe types of project initiation documentation.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG409 Apply project scope management techniquesDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the management and leadership –
project management field of work and include access to:
 project documentation which includes information about project scope
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG416 Apply project procurement procedures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPMG416 Apply project procurement procedures
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to assist with procurement for a project.
It involves identifying procurement requirements, assisting with supplier selection,
conducting procurement activities, and assisting with procurement finalisation activities for
the project.
It applies to individuals who are project practitioners working in a project support role. The
individual may be operating in a large or small organisation, and applying skills in the context
of enterprise projects.
The project practitioner may be part of a project team under the direction of a project
manager, or may work as part of a smaller scale, self-directed team.
of endorsement.
Unit Sector



1. Assist with 1.1 Contribute to establishing procurement requirements to achieve

procurement planning project objectives
1.2 Act under delegated authority to contribute to development of
procurement-management plan
1.3 Contribute to developing procurement documentation
2. Contribute to supplier 2.1 Gather and evaluate information on potential suppliers

selection process 2.2 Make recommendations to assist in selection of preferred
suppliers
2.3 Contribute to establishing agreed terms and conditions with
preferred suppliers
2.4 Identify and act in line with probity and project governance
constraints
2.5 Assist in developing contractual documentation
3. Conduct procurement 3.1 Test and accept supplies to ensure they are fit for purpose in
activities both quality and suitability
3.2 Undertake procurement activities and maintain information in
line with reporting, confidentiality and audit requirements
3.3 Receive, reconcile and register supplies according to
established procedures
3.4 Monitor and control suppliers according to contractual supply
documentation
4. Assist in finalising 4.1 Assist in finalising procurement agreements

procurement activities 4.2 Assist in review of project outcomes using available records to
determine effectiveness of procurement activities
4.3 Contribute to identifying lessons learned and possible
improvements to procurement management

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 2.1, 2.4, 3.2,  Applies appropriate strategies to construct meaning
3.3, 3.4, 4.2 from a variety of texts
Writing 1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3,  Develops informative project documents using
2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2 vocabulary and structure appropriate to audience,
context and purpose
 Completes project documentation using required
formats and structure
Oral 1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5  Participates verbal exchanges using clear language and
Communication appropriate non-verbal features to provide and seek
information
 Uses questioning and listening skills to check and
Numeracy 1.3, 2.5, 3.2, 3.3  Uses basic mathematical formula to calculate whole
numbers and decimals to ensure financial accounts
match purchased items
Navigate the 1.2, 2.4, 3.2-3.4  Understands responsibilities and boundaries associated
world of work with own role
 Adheres to organisational policies and procedures
when planning and undertaking work
Interact with 1.1, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5  Uses accepted communication practices and protocols
others to share or provide information
 Collaborates with others to achieve project outcomes
Get the work 1.2, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2,  Plans, organises and implements tasks required to
done 3.4, 4.2, 4.3 achieve outcomes according to organisational
requirements
 Reflects on outcomes to gain insights into future
improvements


BSBPMG416 Apply BSBPMG416A Apply Updated to meet Equivalent unit

project procurement project procurement Standards for
procedures procedures Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG416 Apply project procurement procedures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG416 Apply project

procurement procedures
Release Comments
 document procurement requirements for a workplace project, including clear descriptions
of product and service, quality specifications, resource identification, supply and delivery
requirements and supply and engagement metrics
 apply procurement-management procedures to a workplace project, including selection
criteria, testing and accepting, monitoring and receiving supplies
 finalise procurement agreements.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify and describe procurement-management policy, processes and procedures
 explain the procurement documentation requirements
 describe the components of contractual documentation and the legal obligations of all
parties
 explain the process used to select preferred contractors
 identify and describe project procurement-management tools and techniques.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG416 Apply project procurement procedures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 examples of project procurement documentation
 examples of procurement tasks and activities
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG512 Manage project time Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage time during projects. It
involves determining and implementing the project schedule, and assessing time management
outcomes.
It applies to individuals responsible for managing and leading a project in an organisation,

business, or as a consultant.
of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Determine project 1.1 Develop work breakdown structure with sufficient detail to
schedule enable effective planning and control
1.2 Estimate duration and effort, sequence and dependencies of
tasks, to achieve project deliverables
1.3 Use project scheduling tools and techniques to identify
schedule impact on project time management, resource
requirements, costs and risks
1.4 Contribute to achieving an agreed schedule baseline and
communication of the schedule to stakeholders
2. Implement project 2.1 Implement mechanisms to measure, record and report progress
schedule of activities according to agreed schedule
2.2 Conduct ongoing analysis to identify baseline variance
2.3 Analyse and forecast impact of changes to the schedule
2.4 Review progress throughout project life cycle and implement
agreed schedule changes
2.5 Develop responses to potential or actual schedule changes and
implement them to maintain project objectives
3. Assess time 3.1 Review schedule performance records to determine

management outcomes effectiveness of time management activities
3.2 Identify and document time management issues and
recommend improvements

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 2.1-2.4, 3.1  Identifies, interprets and analyses textual information
obtained from a range of sources
Writing 1.1, 2.1, 2.4, 2.5, 3.2  Drafts and develops documentation required for
project scheduling and reporting using appropriate
formats and language
Oral 1.4, 2.5  Participates in a verbal exchanges using clear and
Communication detailed language and appropriate non-verbal features
to convey expectations and advise others on progress
Numeracy 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4,  Calculates time requirements for project scheduling
2.1-2.5  Uses basic mathematical formula to determine costs
and other necessary resources
Interact with 1.4, 2.5  Actively identifies requirements of important
others communication exchanges, selecting appropriate
channels, format, tone and content to suit purpose and
audience
Get the work 1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.1,  Plans and schedules complex activities, monitors
done 3.2 implementation and manages relevant communication
 Monitors actions against goals, adjusting plans and
resources where necessary
 Uses analytical skills to review and evaluate process
and decide on future improvements
 Uses digital applications to access, organise, integrate
and share relevant information in effective ways

BSBPMG512 BSBPMG512A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Manage project time Manage project time Standards for
Training Packages

Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG512 Manage project time Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG512 Manage project time
Release Comments
 develop a project schedule using project management tools and techniques
 implement, analyse and monitor a project schedule
 conduct a review of project scheduling and recommend improvements for the future.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain estimation techniques to determine task duration and resource effort
 explain procedures for identifying critical path
 explain procedures for managing project baselines, establishment and variance
 summarise project life cycle phases and describe each phase
 explain best-practice time management methodologies, their capabilities, limitations,
applications and outcomes
 summarise key tools for project scheduling
 explain work breakdown structures and application to project schedules.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG512 Manage project time Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
project management field of work and include access to workplace documentation, including:
 examples of project schedules, reports and feedback from project stakeholders regarding
time management
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG514 Manage project cost Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPMG514 Manage project cost
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify, analyse and refine project
costs to produce a budget, and to use this budget as the principal mechanism to control project
cost.

of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Determine project costs 1.1 Determine resource requirements for individual tasks identified
in the work breakdown structure, with input from stakeholders and
guidance from others
1.2 Estimate project costs to enable project budget to be prepared
within agreed tolerances
1.3 Develop a project budget
1.4 Develop a cost-management plan, within delegated authority,
to ensure clarity of understanding and ongoing management of
project finances
2. Monitor and control 2.1 Implement agreed financial-management processes and

project costs procedures to monitor actual expenditure against budget
2.2 Select and use cost-analysis methods and tools to identify cost
variations and evaluate alternative actions
2.3 Implement and monitor agreed actions to maintain financial
objectives
2.4 Provide accurate and timely financial reports
3. Complete 3.1 Conduct appropriate activities to signify financial completion

cost-management 3.2 Review project outcomes using available records to determine
processes effectiveness of project cost management
3.3 Review cost-management issues and document improvements

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.2, 3.2, 3.3  Interprets and analyses textual information from a
range of sources
 Reviews, compares and contrasts information related
to budget
Writing 1.3, 1.4, 2.4, 3.3  Drafts and develops documents using appropriate
format and language for context
Oral 1.1  Participates in verbal exchanges using clear language
Communication and appropriate tone and syntax to provide relevant
information
 Uses active listening and questioning to elicit views
and opinions of others
Numeracy 1.1-1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4,  Uses mathematical formulae to calculate resources
3.1, 3.2 against predetermined budgets, solve variances and
finalise project costs
Navigate the 1.4, 2.1  Adheres to organisational policies and procedures and
world of work understands responsibilities of own role
Interact with 1.1  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others when communicating with internal and external
stakeholders to confirm requirements, seek guidance or
share information
Get the work 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2,  Plans and schedules complex activities, monitors
done 2.3, 2.4, 3.2, 3.3 implementation and manages relevant communication
 Monitors actions against goals, adjusting plans and
resources where necessary
 Uses analytical skills to review and evaluate process
and decide on future improvements
 Uses digital applications to access, organise, integrate
and share relevant information in effective ways


BSBPMG514 Manage BSBPMG514A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

project cost Manage project cost Standards for
Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG514 Manage project cost Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG514 Manage project cost
Release Comments
 work closely with others to determine resources against budgetary frameworks
 prepare a budget and cost-management plan for a project
 monitor costs across a project's life cycle including solving cost variations and analysing
possible alternatives
 record expenditure, create accurate financial reports and review cost-management
processes.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain appropriate budgeting processes, tools and techniques
 describe methods and tools for costing and cost analysis
 explain strategies for managing costs and their application in different situations
 outline processes for reviewing costs against outcomes
 summarise key organisational policies and procedures applicable to this role.
 workplace documentation, including budgets and other financial documents

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG514 Manage project cost Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG515 Manage project human resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPMG515 Manage project human resources
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage human resources related to
projects. It involves planning for human resources, implementing personnel training and
development, and managing the project team.

of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Plan human resources 1.1 Determine resource requirements for individual tasks to
relevant to projects determine required project personnel levels and competencies
1.2 Establish project organisation and structure to align individual
and group competencies with project tasks
1.3 Allocate personnel to the project to meet planned work outputs
throughout project timeline
1.4 Apply human resources management (HRM) methods,
techniques and tools to support engagement and performance of
personnel
2. Implement project 2.1 Negotiate, define and communicate clear project role
personnel training and descriptions
development 2.2 Identify, plan and implement ongoing development and
training of project team members to support personnel and project
performance
2.3 Measure individuals' performance against agreed criteria and
initiate actions to overcome shortfalls in performance
3. Lead project team 3.1 Implement processes and take action to improve individual
performance and overall project effectiveness
3.2 Monitor and report, for remedial action, internal and external
influences on individual and project team performance and morale
3.3 Implement procedures for interpersonal communication,
counselling, and conflict resolution to maintain a positive work
environment
3.4 Identify and manage inter-project and intra-project resource
conflict to minimise impact on achievement of project objectives
4. Finalise human 4.1 Disband project team according to organisational policies and
resource activities related procedures
to projects 4.2 Identify and document human resource issues and
recommended improvements

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.3, 3.3, 4.1  Interprets textual information obtained from a range of
sources and determines how content may be applied to
requirements
Writing 1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1,  Develops plans, role descriptions and reports using
3.2, 4.2 clear, specific and industry-related terminology,
appropriate structures and conventions
 Documents personnel requirements, results of
performance measurements and improvement
recommendations
Oral 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 3.1,  Participates in verbal exchanges using clear language
Communication 3.3, 3.4 and appropriate non-verbal features
 Uses active listening and questioning to elicit views
and opinions of others and confirm understanding
Numeracy 1.1, 2.3, 3.4  Uses mathematical formulae to calculate resources
against project requirements and to measure work
output against predetermined criteria
Navigate the 3.3, 4.1  Understands and adheres to organisational policies and
world of work procedures
Interact with 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.3,  Collaborates with co-workers to negotiate and
others 3.1, 3.3, 3.4 facilitate shared understanding of individual roles and
group objectives
 Manages workplace conflict by recognising
contributing factors and implementing resolution
strategies
Get the work 1.1-1.4, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1,  Develops plans to identify project responsibilities and
done 3.2, 3.4, 4.2 needs, and allocate project personnel, with an
awareness of how this contributes to overall project
goals
 Uses analytical skills to review performance and
decide on actions needed
 Reflects on how variables impact outcomes to gain
insights into concepts that may be adapted in future
situations



Manage project Manage project Standards for
human resources human resources Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG515 Manage project human resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG515 Manage project

human resources
Release Comments
 plan and allocate human resources to a project
 identify and organise project personnel training and development
 manage project personnel to achieve project outcomes
 apply human resource management (HRM) methods, techniques and tools to the project.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 summarise human resource management (HRM) methods, techniques and tools
 explain strategies for managing project human resources and their application to different
situations
 explain processes used to measure individuals' performance against agreed criteria
 explain techniques for managing and improving performance.
 project documentation

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG515 Manage project human resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG516 Manage project information and communication Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPMG516 Manage project information and communication
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to link people, ideas and information at
all stages in the project life cycle. Project communication management ensures timely and
appropriate generation, collection, dissemination, storage and disposal of project information
through formal structures and processes.

of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Plan information and 1.1 Identify, analyse and document information requirements, with
communication processes input from stakeholders, as the basis for communication planning
1.2 Develop, within delegated authority, an agreed communication
management plan to support achievement of project objectives
1.3 Establish and maintain a designated project-management
information system to ensure quality, validity, timeliness and
integrity of information and communication
2. Implement project 2.1 Manage generation, gathering, storage, retrieval, analysis and
information and dissemination of information by project staff and stakeholders
communication processes 2.2 Implement, modify, monitor and control designated
information-validation processes to optimise quality and accuracy
of data
2.3 Implement and maintain appropriate communication networks
2.4 Identify and resolve communication and
information-management system issues
3. Assess information and 3.1 Finalise and archive records according to agreed project
communication outcomes information ownership and control requirements
3.2.Review project outcomes to determine effectiveness of
management information and communication processes and
procedures
3.3 Identify and document lessons learned and recommended
improvements for application in future projects

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1-1.3, 3.1, 3.2  Interprets and analyses complex texts from a range of
sources
Writing 1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1,  Develops project documents using vocabulary,
3.3 structure and conventions appropriate to text
Oral 1.1, 1.2  Participates in verbal exchanges using clear language

Communication and appropriate non-verbal features
 Uses active listening and questioning to confirm
understanding and agreement
Navigate the 1.2  Understands responsibilities and boundaries of own
world of work role
Interact with 1.1, 1.2  Actively identifies requirements of important

others communication exchanges, selecting appropriate
channels, format and content to suit purpose and
audience
Get the work 1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3,  Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors
done 2.4, 3.2 implementation and manages relevant communication
 Uses problem-solving techniques to analyse and
resolve issues
 Evaluates outcomes of decisions to identify
 Uses digital tools to access, organise and analyse
complex data

BSBPMG516 Manage BSBPMG516A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

project information Manage project Standards for
and communication information and Training Packages
communication

Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG516 Manage project information and communication Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017

information and communication
Release Comments

 develop a communication management plan and an information system for a specific
project
 implement a project information system with a systematic approach to storage, searching,
retrieval and archiving of relevant information
 implement and maintain communication processes
 review project outcomes and document suggestions for improvements to managing project
information and communication for future projects.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain alternative communication methods and media and their application on various
projects
 identify effective project-management information systems and their various applications
 explain methods used to evaluate information systems and communication processes.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG516 Manage project information and communication Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
 project communication and information management documentation
 examples of how communication was managed on projects
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG518 Manage project procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Version created to correct missing elements

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake procurement in projects.

of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Determine 1.1 Identify procurement requirements with input from

procurement stakeholders as basis for procurement planning
requirements 1.2 Establish and maintain, within delegated authority, agreed
procurement management plan
2. Establish agreed 2.1 Obtain information from suppliers capable of fulfilling

procurement processes procurement requirements
2.2 Determine or adopt established selection processes and
selection criteria, and communicate to vendors to ensure
transparency
2.3 Obtain relevant approvals for procurement processes to be used
3. Conduct procurement 3.1. Identify and act according to probity and project governance
activities constraints
3.2. Communicate agreed proposals and/or specifications to
prospective vendors to ensure clarity of understanding of project
objectives
3.3. Solicit vendor responses according to proposal requirements
3.4. Evaluate responses and select preferred vendors according to
current legal requirements and agreed selection criteria
3.5. Negotiate with preferred contractor or supplier, to agree on
terms and conditions of supply
4. Implement and monitor 4.1. Implement established procurement management plan and
procurement make modifications in line with agreed delegations
4.2. Review progress and manage agreed variations to ensure
timely completion of tasks and resolution of conflict within the
legal framework of the supply agreement
4.3. Identify and report procurement management issues and
implement agreed remedial actions to ensure project objectives are
met
5. Manage procurement 5.1. Conduct finalisation activities to ensure vendor deliverables

finalisation procedures meet contracted requirements
5.2. Review project outcomes using available procurement records
and information to determine effectiveness of procurement
processes and procedures


5.3. Document lessons learned and recommended improvements
for application to future projects

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 2.1, 3.1, 3.4,  Interprets, evaluates and critiques ideas and
4.1, 5.2 information from a range of complex texts
Writing 1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2,  Develops plans using vocabulary, structure and
3.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, conventions appropriate to text
5.2, 5.3  Creates documents for internal and external use, using
vocabulary and structure suitable for audience and
context
 Drafts requests for approvals using organisational
formats
Oral 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3,  Participates in verbal exchanges using clear language
Communication 3.2, 3.5, 4.2 to seek and provide information, or request approvals
 Uses active listening and questioning techniques to
Numeracy 1.1, 4.2  Recognises cost parameters and interprets numerical
information accordingly
 Calculates changes to timelines resulting from changes
to plan
Navigate the 1.2, 3.1, 3.4, 4.1  Understands responsibilities and boundaries of own
world of work role
others 3.2, 3.3, 3.5, 4.2 when communicating with internal and external
 Uses interpersonal skills to negotiate acceptable
outcomes
Get the work 1.1,1.2, 2.1, 3.1, 3.3,  Plans and organises complex activities, monitors
5.1, 5.2  Resolves problems and makes decisions based on
analysis of options against set criteria and targets


Code and title Code and title Comments Equivalence
status
current previous
version version
BSBPMG518 BSBPMG518 Updated to Equivalent

Manage Manage correct unit
project project missing
procurement procurement elements
Release 2 Release 1
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG518 Manage project procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

procurement
Release Comments
Version created to correct missing elements
 work with others to determine procurement requirements and produce a procurement
management plan for a project
 carry out procurement and contracting activities according to agreed processes
 monitor activities across a project's life cycle and resolve issues that could affect
achievement of project objectives
 create and maintain procurement records and documentation according to requirements of
project and organisation
 document a review of procurement management processes and procedures.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 describe the general features of a procurement management plan
 summarise procurement procedures and required documentation
 identify criteria that could be used to select vendors or suppliers
 explain the general conditions and legal obligations of contracts as they relate to project
procurement
 explain probity and project governance constraints that relate to project procurement in a
project and industry context.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG518 Manage project procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 workplace documentation relevant to procurement and contracts
 case studies or, where possible, real situations.
Assessors of this unit must satisfy the requirements for assessors in applicable vocational
education and training legislation, frameworks and/or standards.
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG522 Undertake project work Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to undertake a straightforward project or
a section of a larger project. It covers developing a project plan, administering and monitoring
the project, finalising the project and reviewing the project to identify lessons learned for
application to future projects.
This unit applies to individuals who play a significant role in ensuring a project meets
timelines, quality standards, budgetary limits and other requirements set for the project.
The unit does not apply to specialist project managers. For specialist project managers, the
other units of competency in the project management field (BSBPMG) will be applicable.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Define project 1.1 Access project scope and other relevant documentation
1.2 Define project stakeholders
1.3 Seek clarification from delegating authority of issues related to
project and project parameters
1.4 Identify limits of own responsibility and reporting requirements
1.5 Clarify relationship of project to other projects and to the
organisation's objectives
1.6 Determine and access available resources to undertake project
2. Develop project plan 2.1 Develop project plan in line with the project parameters
2.2 Identify and access appropriate project management tools
2.3 Formulate risk management plan for project, including Work
Health and Safety (WHS)
2.4 Develop and approve project budget
2.5 Consult team members and take their views into account in
planning the project
2.6 Finalise project plan and gain necessary approvals to commence
project according to documented plan
3. Administer and monitor 3.1 Take action to ensure project team members are clear about their
project responsibilities and the project requirements
3.2 Provide support for project team members, especially with
regard to specific needs, to ensure that the quality of the expected
outcomes of the project and documented time lines are met
3.3 Establish and maintain required recordkeeping systems
throughout the project
3.4 Implement and monitor plans for managing project finances,
resources and quality
3.5 Complete and forward project reports as required to stakeholders
3.6 Undertake risk management as required to ensure project
outcomes are met
3.7 Achieve project deliverables
4. Finalise project 4.1 Complete financial recordkeeping associated with project and


check for accuracy
4.2 Ensure transition of staff involved in project to new roles or
reassignment to previous roles
4.3 Complete project documentation and obtain necessary sign-offs
for concluding project
5. Review project 5.1 Review project outcomes and processes against the project scope
and plan
5.2 Involve team members in the project review
5.3 Document lessons learned from the project and report within the
organisation

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1,  Organises, evaluates and critiques ideas and
4.3, 5.1 information from a range of complex texts
Writing 2.1, 2.3, 2.6, 3.3,  Develops plans, reports and recommendations using
3.5, 4.1, 4.3, 5.3 vocabulary, structure and conventions appropriate to
text
 Establishes and maintains records according to
Numeracy 1.6, 2.4, 3.4, 4.1  Uses formal and some informal, oral and written
mathematical language and representation to prepare
and communicate budgetary and financial information
Oral 2.5, 5.2  Participates in verbal discussions using clear language
communication and appropriate features to present or seek information
 Using listening and questioning skills to seek
information and confirm understanding
Navigate the 1.3, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1, 4.3  Recognises and responds to organisational and
world of work legislative/regulatory requirements
Interact with 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 5.2  Selects and uses appropriate communication protocols
others and practices to ensure shared understanding of project
roles and expectations
 Uses collaborative techniques to engage stakeholders in
consultations and negotiations
Get the work 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1,  Develops and implements plans to manage projects that
done 2.2, 2.3, 2.6, 3.1-3.7, involve diverse stakeholders with potentially
4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.3 competing demands
 Systematically gathers and analyses all relevant
information and evaluates options to make informed
decisions
 Uses digital technologies and applications to access,
organise and share information



Undertake project Undertake project Standards for
work work Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG522 Undertake project work Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG522 Undertake project

work
Release Comments
 define the parameters of the project including:
 project scope
 project stakeholders, including own responsibilities
 relationship of project to organisational objectives and other projects
 reporting requirements
 resource requirements
 use project management tools to develop and implement a project plan including:
 deliverables
 work breakdown
 budget and allocation of resources
 timelines
 risk management
 recordkeeping and reporting
 consult and communicate with relevant stakeholders to generate input and engagement in
planning, implementing and reviewing the project
 provide support to team members to enable them to achieve deliverables and to transition
them as appropriate at completion of the project
 finalise the project including documentation, sign-offs and reporting
 review and document the project outcomes.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG522 Undertake project work Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 give examples of project management tools and how they contribute to a project
 outline types of documents and other sources of information commonly used in defining
the parameters of a project
 explain processes for identifying and managing risk in a project
 outline the organisation's mission, goals, objectives and operations and how the project
relates to them
 explain the organisation's procedures and processes that are relevant to managing a project
including:
 lines of authority and approvals
 quality assurance
 human resources
 budgets and finance
 recordkeeping
 reporting
 outline the legislative and regulatory context of the organisation in relation to project
work, including work health and safety (WHS) requirements.
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG604 Direct cost management of a project program Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to analyse, coordinate, and refine
budgets of multiple projects contributing to an overall program budget. It covers directing
project budget development, managing program costs and directing financial completion of
projects.
It applies to individuals who are program managers, managing a suite of projects (a program).

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Direct project budget 1.1 Direct project managers to determine resource requirements for
development individual tasks, in consultation with appropriate stakeholders, to
develop project budgets which contribute to the program budget
1.2 Direct project cost estimations to enable budgets and cost
management processes to be developed for project life cycles
1.3 Direct and authorise cost strategies and cost management plans
to ensure clarity of understanding and ongoing management of
project finances and the program budget
2. Manage program costs 2.1 Develop and maintain cost management systems to direct
monitoring of actual expenditure and to control costs throughout
multiple project life cycles and for the program
2.2 Conduct analysis, evaluate options and implement responses to
project cost variations to maintain control over changing financial
and program objectives
2.3 Monitor internal and external influences on program costs and,
where necessary, seek approval from business management for
changes to the approved program budget
3. Direct financial 3.1 Provide direction for project finalisation activities to achieve
completion integrated financial and physical project completion within
program expectations
3.2 Review project outcomes from available records at the
finalisation of each project, and analyse information to determine
effectiveness of cost management systems
3.3 File program lessons learnt as a resource for future reference
and, where necessary, refer to higher project authority for
application in planning strategic direction changes and business
outcomes for future projects

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.3, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2  Organises, evaluates and critiques ideas and
information from a range of complex texts
Writing 1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.2, 3.3  Develops a range of project related documents using
appropriate format, vocabulary and structure
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 3.1  Participates in discussions and presents information
Communication using language and features appropriate to the
audience
Numeracy 1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.1,  Analyses and synthesises highly embedded
3.2 mathematical information
 Selects from, and flexibly applies, a wide range of
highly developed mathematical and problem-solving
strategies and techniques
Interact with 1.1-1.3, 3.1  Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes,
others playing a lead role in facilitating successful outcomes
and influencing direction
Get the work 1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 3.2,  Develops and implements plans for complex activities
done 3.3 that contribute to overall project goals
 Reviews priorities and performance during
implementation, identifying and addressing issues and
reallocating resources
 Monitors outcomes of decisions, considering results
from a range of perspectives, and identifying key
concepts and principles that may be adaptable to future
situations
 Uses digital tools to access and organise complex data
and analyse multiple sources of information for
strategic purposes


BSBPMG604 Direct BSBPMG604A Direct Updated to meet Equivalent unit

cost management of cost management of a Standards for
a project program project program Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG604 Direct cost management of a project programDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG604 Direct cost

management of a project program
Release Comments
 direct project budget development, including:
 directing project managers to develop project budgets which contribute to program
budget
 directing project cost estimation
 directing and authorising cost strategies and cost management plans
 manage program costs, including:
 developing and maintaining cost management systems
 conducting analysis, evaluating options and implementing responses to project cost
variations
 monitoring internal and external influences on program costs and seeking approval for
budget changes
 direct financial completion, including:
 providing direction for project finalisation activities
 reviewing and analysing project outcomes
 filing and referring program lessons learnt to higher program authority for future
application.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain regulatory and legislative financial reporting requirements
 explain methods for costing and estimating project resources
 explain methods for monitoring and controlling project expenditure.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG604 Direct cost management of a project programDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 financial documentation and files
 feedback from project teams and other stakeholders as to how program costs were
managed.
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project program Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project

program
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to direct human resource organisation
and staffing across a program, direct project managers in relation to staff performance, and to
provide leadership within the program.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Direct human resources 1.1 Direct human resource requirement analysis for projects to
management planning determine numbers and skill levels required for overall program
1.2 Direct stakeholder assessment to establish a basis for
stakeholder management within projects and overall program
1.3 Direct responsibility assignment for project activities and tasks,
and establish authorisation protocols
2. Manage program 2.1 Determine resource requirements for projects in consultation

organisation and staffing with project managers and appropriate stakeholders, to establish
program staffing levels, allocation to projects and required
competencies
2.2 Direct project organisation and structure to optimise alignment
of individual and group competencies within projects
2.3 Direct recruitment of staff for allocation to projects or
reallocation within the organisation, within agreed delegated
authority, to meet competency requirements throughout the
program
2.4 Direct project managers’ use of human resources management
(HRM) methods, techniques and tools, and modify for program
requirements
2.5 Utilise organisational HRM system and HRM processes across
projects
3. Direct project staff 3.1 Obtain agreement on performance measurement criteria for
performance management clarity of roles and responsibilities and ongoing assessment
3.2 Ensure systems for ongoing development and training of
personnel across the program are established and implemented by
project managers
3.3 Measure individuals’ performance against agreed criteria and
authorise actions to overcome shortfalls in performance and
encourage career progression
4. Provide overall 4.1 Manage a system of continuous improvement of staff to

leadership to project enhance program effectiveness
teams
4.2 Analyse individual and team performance and morale levels
and take action where necessary
4.3 Direct procedures for interpersonal communication,


counselling and conflict resolution by project managers, and
review results to maintain and promote a positive working
environment
4.4 Identify and positively manage intra-organisational and
intra-project conflict to maximise achievement of program
objectives
4.5 Aggregate HRM lessons learnt for application in planning and,
where appropriate, pass on information to others for consideration
in strategic planning and direction

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 3.3  Organises, evaluates and critiques ideas and

information from complex texts
 Draws on a broad range of strategies to build and
maintain understanding throughout complex texts
Writing 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3,  Develops a range of project related documents using
3.1, 3.3, 4.5 appropriate format, vocabulary and structure
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1,  Provides information using language and features
Communication 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 4.2, appropriate to the audience
4.3, 4.4  Use listening and questioning skills to confirm or
clarify understanding
Numeracy 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 4.2  Extracts, interprets and evaluates mathematical
information in organisational and project
documentation
 Compares and contrasts performance against criteria
Interact with 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1,  Actively identifies requirements of important
others 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 4.2, communication exchanges, selecting appropriate
4.3, 4.4 channels, format and content to suit purpose and
audience
collaborative skills, demonstrating ability to influence
and motivate others
 Recognises potential for conflict and takes steps to
stop an issue from escalating
Get the work 1.1-1.3, 2.2-2.5, 3.1,  Develops plans for complex activities that contribute
done 3.3, 4.1, 4.2 to overall project goals and involve multiple
stakeholders
 Regularly reviews priorities and performance during
implementation, identifying and addressing issues, and
reallocating resources
 Identifies issues and uses analytical techniques to
generate and evaluate possible solutions


BSBPMG606 Direct BSBPMG606A Direct Updated to meet Equivalent unit

human resources human resources Standards for
management of a management of a Training Packages
project program project program
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project programDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG606 Direct human

resources management of a project program
Release Comments
 direct human resources management (HRM) planning, including:
 directing project analysis to determine program requirements
 directing stakeholder assessment
 directing responsibility assignment and establishing authorisation protocols
 manage program organisation and staffing, including:
 determining project resource requirements
 directing project organisation and structure
 directing staff recruitment
 directing project managers’ use of HRM methods, techniques and tools
 utilising organisational HRM system and processes across projects
 direct project staff performance management, including:
 obtaining agreement on measurement criteria
 ensuring systems for ongoing development and training
 measuring individuals’ performance and authorising relevant actions
 provide overall leadership to project teams, including:
 managing a continuous improvement system
 analysing and taking action on individual and team performance and morale levels
 directing procedures for interpersonal communication, counselling and conflict
resolution by project managers, and reviewing results
 identifying and positively managing intra-organisational and intra-project conflict
 aggregating and passing on HRM lessons learnt.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project programDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 explain human resource management methods, techniques and tools
 identify relevant legislation
 describe models of performance management and performance development.
 workplace HRM documentation
 feedback from project teams and stakeholders as to how human resource management was
handled.
Links
7e23c10

BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a project program Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a project

program
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to direct the management of contracting
and procurement activities across projects and programs. It covers setting up the contracting
process, directing management of contract and procurement processes, and finalising
contracts for projects across the program.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Direct planning for 1.1 Direct identification of product specifications and procurement
project contracting and requirements for procurement and contract planning, in
procurement consultation with appropriate stakeholders
1.2 Direct development of procurement strategies, methods and
management plans in line with project objectives across the
program
2. Direct set up of 2.1 Direct project managers to source organisations that meet
contract and procurement procurement requirements
process 2.2 Establish selection processes and selection criteria, in
consultation with stakeholders, and arrange for communication to
prospective contractors
2.3 Ensure contract and procurement actions accord with
organisation and program objectives
3. Direct management of 3.1 Provide direction for identification of requirements of

contract and procurement proposals and arrange communication to prospective contractors
process 3.2 Ensure responses are evaluated and preferred contractors are
selected in accordance with agreed selection processes
3.3 Direct negotiation of contract terms and conditions between
client and preferred contractor
4. Direct management of 4.1 Direct management of contract and procurement activities in

contracts accordance with program contract and procurement management
guidelines
4.2 Provide direction for regular reviews from available records
and information, and ensure variances are analysed and changes
for implementation agreed on
4.3 Ensure project managers work within legal and organisational
framework for contracts
4.4 Identify potential, perceived and actual contractual conflicts
and approve remedial actions to minimise disruption
5. Direct finalisation of 5.1 Direct finalisation activities for management of contract

contracts deliverables in accordance with contractual project and program
requirements
5.2 Direct review and analysis of project outcomes to determine
effectiveness of contract and procurement processes and


procedures
5.3 Aggregate and use lessons learnt for application in planning
and implementation of later projects within the program and,
where appropriate, pass on to organisational management for use
in strategic planning

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 2.3, 4.1, 4.3, 5.2  Identifies, interprets and analyses information from
complex sources, including legislation
Writing 1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 3.2,  Develops and documents strategies and plans using
4.2, 4.4, 5.2, 5.3 organisational format and specific terminology
 Documents outcomes according to organisational
requirements
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Provides direction and contributes to discussions using
Communication 3.3, 4.4, 5.2 language and features appropriate to the audience
Numeracy 1.2, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2  Interprets and evaluates mathematical information in a
broad range of texts
 Selects from, and flexibly applies, a range of
mathematical and problem-solving strategies and
techniques to compare and contrast effectiveness of
processes
Navigate the 2.3, 4.3  Monitors adherence to organisational, legal and
world of work regulatory requirements
Interact with 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Plays a lead role in situations requiring effective
others 3.3, 4.4, 5.2 collaboration, demonstrating high-level influencing
skills and ability to direct others
 Uses negotiation skills to set up contracts, to agree
prices and terms, and to resolve disputes
Get the work 1.1, 2.1-2.3, 3.2, 4.1,  Develops flexible plans for complex, high-impact
done 4.2, 5.1, 5.2 activities with strategic implications, involving a
diverse range of stakeholders with potentially
competing demands
 Uses analytical processes to decide on a course of
action, establishing criteria for deciding between
options, and seeking input and advice from others
before taking action, when necessary
 Monitors outcomes of decisions, considering results
from a range of perspectives, and identifying key
concepts and principles that may be adaptable to future
situations


Code and Code and title Comments Equivalence
title status
previous
current version
version
BSBPMG609 BSBPMG609A Updated to Equivalent

Direct Direct meet unit
procurement procurement Standards
and and contracting for Training
contracting for for a project Packages
a project program
program
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a project programDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG609 Direct procurement

and contracting for a project program
Release Comments
 direct planning for project contracting and procurement, including:
 directing identification of product specifications and procurement requirements
 directing development of procurement strategies, methods and management plans
 direct set up of contract and procurement process, including:
 directing project managers to source suitable organisations
 establishing selection processes and selection criteria
 ensuring contract and procurement actions accord with objectives
 direct management of contract and procurement process, including:
 providing direction for identifying and arranging communication of proposal
requirements
 ensuring responses are evaluated and preferred contractors selected
 directing negotiation of contract terms and conditions
 direct management of contracts, including:
 directing management of contract and procurement
 providing direction for regular reviews
 ensuring project managers work within legal and organisational framework
 identifying and approving remedial actions for potential, perceived and actual
contractual conflicts
 direct finalisation of contracts, including:
 directing finalisation activities for management of contract deliverables
 directing review and analysis of project outcomes
 aggregating and using lessons learnt.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPMG609 Direct procurement and contracting for a project programDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 explain contract management and legal obligations of both parties
 describe procurement processes and options.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the Management and Leadership –
Project Management field of work and include access to:
 workplace contractual and procurement documentation
 feedback from project team and stakeholders as to how procurement and contractual
processes were handled.
Links
7e23c10

BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and services Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and services
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to determine purchasing requirements
and make and receive purchases.
It applies to individuals who work under a level of supervision and who conduct low risk, low
expenditure purchasing for an organisation using established and documented purchasing
strategies. Individuals may be working in a small organisation with general responsibility for
conducting purchasing within an organisation, or they may be a purchasing specialist working
in a large organisation. Some judgement may be required to make decisions about purchasing
strategies.
of publication.
Unit Sector
Administration – Purchasing and Contracting



1. Understand purchasing 1.1 Read, understand and clarify organisation’s purchasing

and own requirements strategies as required
1.2 Determine own role and limits of authority in consultation with
relevant personnel
2. Make purchases 2.1 Receive purchase specifications from relevant personnel and
clarify as required
2.2 Select purchasing methods most appropriate to particular
purchases within limits of own role
2.3 Obtain approvals for purchases as required
2.4 Obtain quotations from suppliers as required
2.5 Select suppliers, place orders and make purchases
3. Receive purchases 3.1 Receive goods or make arrangements to receive services

3.2 Advise relevant personnel of receipt of purchase
3.3 Ensure goods received are checked for compliance with
specifications
3.4 Take action to resolve non-compliance with specifications
3.5 Facilitate registration of new assets
3.6 File and store purchase records

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3, 3.4  Gathers and interprets a range of textual information to
identify relevant key information
Writing 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.5,  Creates everyday workplace documentation l using
3.1, 3.2, 3.5 terminology and format relevant to audience and
purpose
Oral 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3-2.5,  Uses suitable language to liaise with suppliers and
Communication 3.1, 3.2, 3.4 clarify information within the organisation
 Uses active questioning and listening techniques to
confirm requirements
Numeracy 2.1, 2.4, 2.5  Interprets simple numerical data and makes basic
calculations to determine costs of goods and services
Navigate the 1.1, 2.1, 3.3, 3.4  Adheres to organisational procedures and policies
world of work  Understands how own role connects with others and
contributes to broader work goals
Interact with 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3-2.5,  Selects from a small range of communication modes,
others 3.2 forms and channels to meet a specific purpose within
the immediate work environment
 Seeks to cooperate with others to achieve results in
immediate work context
Get the work 1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.4-3.6  Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and
done prioritising tasks for efficient and effective outcomes
 Responds to predictable routine problems and
implements standard or logical solutions
complete work tasks


BSBPUR301 BSBPUR301B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Purchase goods and Purchase goods and Standards for
services services Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and services Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and

services
Release Comments
 obtain quotes from prospective suppliers
 select appropriate purchasing methods
 receive, check and document purchases.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline organisation policy and procedures relating to:
 purchasing strategies
 recordkeeping systems related to purchasing and assets
 standard contracting arrangements
 explain purchasing and procurement principles for:
 accountability
 probity and transparency
 risk management
 value for money.

Assessment Requirements for BSBPUR301 Purchase goods and services Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the administration – purchasing
and contracting field of work and include access to:
 organisation policies and procedures
 purchasing strategies and relevant purchasing records
 office equipment and resources.
Links
7e23c10

BSBREL401 Establish networks Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBREL401 Establish networks
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and maintain effective work
relationships and networks through relationship building and negotiation skills required by
workers within an organisation as well as freelance or contract workers.
It applies to individuals with a broad knowledge of networking and negotiation who

contribute well developed skills in creating solutions to unpredictable problems through
analysis and evaluation of information from a variety of sources. They may have
responsibility to provide guidance or to delegate aspects of tasks to others.
of publication.
Unit Sector
Stakeholder Relations – Relationship Management



1. Develop and maintain 1.1 Use appropriate network strategies to establish and maintain
business networks relationships that promote the development of business
opportunities
1.2 Identify and pursue network opportunities to maximise a range
of contacts
1.3 Communicate information regarding new networks to inform
individuals, colleagues and clients of potential benefits
1.4 Participate in professional networks and associations to obtain
and maintain personal knowledge and skills
2. Establish and maintain 2.1 Develop and maintain relationships to promote benefits
business relationships consistent with organisational/client requirements
2.2 Gain and maintain trust and confidence of contacts through
demonstration of high standards of business practices
2.3 Use a high level of negotiation skills to encourage positive
outcomes
2.4 Identify difficult situations and negotiate solutions using
collaborative problem-solving techniques
2.5 Seek specialist advice in the development of contacts where
appropriate
3. Promote the 3.1 Develop strategies to represent and promote the interests and
relationship requirements of the relationship
3.2 Use appropriate presentation skills to communicate the goals
and objectives of the relationship
3.3 Effectively communicate issues, policies and practices of the
relationship to a range of audiences, in writing and verbally
3.4 Obtain feedback to identify and develop ways to improve
promotional activities within available opportunities

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Learning 1.4, 3.4  Seeks opportunities to develop and extend expertise

and identify areas for professional improvement
Reading 2.1  Sources and analyses information to establish
networks that consistently promote business
opportunities
Writing 1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.5  Uses appropriate vocabulary, layout and grammatical
3.1-3.4 structure to convey ideas and information
Oral 1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.2,  Utilises persuasive language and appropriate

Communication 3.3, 3.4 non-verbal features to achieve mutually acceptable
outcomes
 Uses active listening and questioning techniques to
Navigate the 2.1  Understands and adheres to organisational policies and
world of work procedures
Interact with 1.1-1.4, 2.1-2.5, 3.1,  Actively identifies the requirements of important
others 3.2 communication exchanges, selecting appropriate
channels, format, tone and content to suit purpose and
audience
 Looks for ways of establishing connections and
building genuine understanding with a diverse range of
people
 Begins to cultivate relationships with people with the
knowledge, skills and influence to get things done or
provide support
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.4  Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and
done implementing tasks required to build and maintain
networks
 Uses analytical processes to identify problems, gather
relevant information, evaluate options and determine
solutions


BSBREL401 BSBREL401A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Establish networks Establish networks Standards for
Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL401 Establish networks Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBREL401 Establish networks
Release Comments
 identify and use networking opportunities
 maintain records of relevant contacts
 use written and verbal communication skills to establish, cultivate and promote
professional business relationships
 use feedback to improve promotional activities.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 list and describe strategies for establishing and maintaining business relationships
 identify relevant networks, organisations, agencies, associations or individuals
 describe the principles and techniques needed to negotiate positive outcomes
 explain client or organisational policies, plans and procedures relevant to business
relationships
 outline methods for obtaining feedback on promotional activities.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the stakeholder relations –
relationship management field of work and include access to:

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL401 Establish networks Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
7e23c10

BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to establish, maintain and improve
client relationships and to actively participate in networks to support attainment of key
business outcomes.
It applies to individuals such as marketing and sales professionals who depend on excellent
interpersonal relationships and communication skills to achieve outcomes but may also apply
to other individuals working in any industry.

publication.
Unit Sector
Stakeholder Relations – Relationship Management



1. Initiate interpersonal 1.1 Identify and use preferred client communication styles and
communication with methods
clients 1.2 Establish rapport with clients using verbal and non-verbal
communication processes
1.3 Investigate and act upon opportunities to offer positive feedback
to clients
1.4 Use open questions to promote two-way communication
1.5 Identify and act upon potential barriers to effective
communication with clients
1.6 Initiate communication processes which relate to client needs,
preferences and expectations
2. Establish client 2.1 Develop client loyalty objectives focusing on the development of
relationship management long term business partnerships
strategies 2.2 Assess client profile information to determine approach
2.3 Develop client loyalty strategies to attract and retain clients in
accordance with the business strategy
2.4 Identify and apply client care and client service standards
3. Maintain and improve 3.1 Develop strategies to obtain ongoing feedback from clients to
ongoing relationships with monitor satisfaction levels
clients 3.2 Develop strategies to elicit feedback which provide information
in a form that can be used to improve relationships with clients
3.3 Obtain feedback to develop and implement strategies which
maintain and improve relationships with clients
4. Build and maintain 4.1 Allocate time to establish and maintain business contacts
networks 4.2 Participate in business associations and/or professional
development activities to establish and maintain a network of
support for the business and to enhance personal knowledge of the
market
4.3 Establish communication channels to exchange information and
ideas
4.4 Provide, seek and verify information to the network

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 2.2,  Interprets information from a range of sources to
2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 4.2- 4.4 determine and adhere to communication and
networking requirements
Writing 1.1,1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 2.4,  Records notes from research and discussions for future
3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3 reference
 Develops materials for a specific audience according
to organisational standards
Oral 1.1-1.6, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3,  Participates in spoken exchanges with a range of
Communication 4.2-4.4 audiences using structure and language to suit the
audience
 Involves others in discussions using active listening
and questioning techniques appropriately
Numeracy 2.4, 4.1  Performs calculations to determine timeframes and
measure actual performance against required standards
Navigate the 2.3, 2.4  Considers wider organisational goals when developing
world of work customer relationship strategies
others 3.3, 4.2-4.4 when communicating with clients or business contacts
to build rapport, seek or present information
 Recognises the need to alter personal communication
style in response to the needs, values, beliefs and
cultural expectations of others
 Adapts personal communication style to build
positive working relationships and show respect for the
opinions, values and particular needs of others
Get the work 1.1, 2.1-2.4, 3.1-3.3,  Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and
done 4.1-4.4 implementing tasks and own workload to achieve
business outcomes
 Uses analytical processes to gather relevant
information, identify and evaluate options and decide
on appropriate systems and strategies
 Actively monitors and evaluates effectiveness of
decisions to identify and implement improvements


BSBREL402 Build BSBREL402A Build Updated to meet Equivalent unit

client relationships and client relationships Standards for
business networks and business Training Packages
networks
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBREL402 Build client

relationships and business networks
Release Comments
 identify clients’ preferred communication styles and methods and potential barriers to
communications and use appropriate communication styles and strategies
 apply communication techniques to establish rapport and promote two-way
communication
 develop and implement client loyalty strategies and service standards based on business
objectives and client information
 develop and implement strategies to elicit feedback from clients and use it to improve
relationships and customer satisfaction
 maintain contacts and participate in formal and informal networks that support the
business and enhance personal knowledge of the market.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBREL402 Build client relationships and business networks Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Knowledge Evidence
 give examples of strategies that can build client loyalty including those that focus on:
 financial incentives and special offers
 premium services and private/dedicated facilities
 loyalty programs, rewards and recognition
 outline issues that are commonly addressed in client care/service standards in the industry
 outline typical barriers to communicating with clients and possible strategies to address
them
 give examples of strategies for feedback
 describe the principles and techniques for effective communication and networking
 outline networking opportunities relevant to the business with reference to:
 government, industry and professional associations
 trade shows, conferences, briefings and other professional development activities
 existing groups or networks
 businesses and individuals
 outline aspects of organisational policies, procedures and processes that are relevant to
communicating with clients and participating in networks.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the stakeholder relations -
relationship management field of work and include access to:
Links
7e23c10

BSBRKG304 Maintain business records Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to maintain the records of a business or
records system in good order on a day-to-day basis.
It applies to individuals who follow established guidelines and processes to assist them to
carry out their work. They work under supervision or in consultation with more senior staff or
system users to support effective recordkeeping and governance practices across the
organisation.

publication.
Unit Sector
Knowledge Management – Recordkeeping



1. Collate business 1.1 Identify individual records or information which should be

records incorporated into business or records system according to
organisational criteria
1.2 Sort records in accordance with workplace requirements
1.3 Follow security and access requirements in accordance with
2. Update business or 2.1 Identify and record control information for describing new
records system records to be incorporated into business or records system
2.2 Update control information describing movement or use of
records within business or records system
2.3 Accurately record and update control information in business
or records system
2.4 Identify and remove records of completed business activities
from current system for disposal
3. Prepare reports from 3.1 Interpret requests for reports and clarify the content and
the business or records frequency sought, where necessary
system 3.2 Prepare reports from business or records system in accordance
with instructions or request
3.3 Prepare reports in accordance with organisational security and
access procedures

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1  Gathers and interprets textual information from
different sources to determine how information may be
applied to job requirements
Writing 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1  Uses clear and industry related terminology to
complete and update workplace information
Oral 3.1  Uses questioning and active listening techniques to
Communication confirm job requirements
Numeracy 1.1  Recognises and uses numerical systems associated

with recordkeeping systems
Navigate the 1.3, 3.3  Takes some personal responsibility for following
world of work organisational procedures
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3,  Takes responsibility for planning and organising own
done 2.4, 3.2 workload to ensure work deadlines are met
 Takes responsibility for the outcomes of routine
decisions related directly to own role

BSBRKG304 BSBRKG304B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Maintain business Maintain business Standards for
records records Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBRKG304 Maintain business records Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBRKG304 Maintain business

records
Release Comments
Release1 This version first released with BSB Business Services Training
 collate business records in compliance with organisational procedures and workplace
requirements
 record and update control information accurately in business records system.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the organisational requirements regarding the maintenance and security of
business records
 describe the general principles and processes of records management and records
management systems, such as:
 systems of control
 records continuum theory
 mandate and ownership of business process
 environmental context
 records characteristics.

Assessment Requirements for BSBRKG304 Maintain business records Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
recordkeeping field of work and include access to:
Links
7e23c10

BSBRSK401 Identify risk and apply risk management processes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to identify risks and to apply established
risk management processes to a defined area of operations that are within the responsibilities
and obligations of the role.
It applies to individuals with a broad knowledge of risk analysis or project management who
contribute well developed skills in creating solutions to unpredictable problems through
analysis and evaluation of information from a variety of sources. They may have
responsibility to provide guidance or to delegate aspects of these tasks to others.
In this unit, risks applicable within own work responsibilities and area of operation, may
include projects being undertaken individually or by a team, or operations within a section of
the organisation.

publication.
Unit Sector
Regulation, Licensing and Risk – Risk Management



1. Identify risks 1.1 Identify the context for risk management

1.2 Identify risks using tools, ensuring all reasonable steps have
been taken to identify all risks
1.3 Document identified risks in accordance with relevant policies,
procedures, legislation and standards
2. Analyse and evaluate 2.1 Analyse and document risks in consultation with relevant
risks stakeholders
2.2 Undertake risk categorisation and determine level of risk
2.3 Document analysis processes and outcomes
3. Treat risks 3.1 Determine appropriate control measures for risks and assess for
strengths and weaknesses
3.2 Identify control measures for all risks
3.3 Refer risks relevant to whole of organisation or having an impact
beyond own work responsibilities and area of operation to others as
per established policies and procedures
3.4 Choose and implement control measures for own area of
operation and/or responsibilities
3.5 Prepare and implement treatment plans
4. Monitor and review 4.1 Regularly review implemented treatment/s against measures of
effectiveness of risk success
treatment/s 4.2 Use review results to improve the treatment of risks
4.3 Provide assistance to auditing risk in own area of operation
4.4 Monitor and review management of risk in own area of operation

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.2  Comprehends documents and texts of varying

complexity to extract and analyse relevant information
Writing 1.3, 2.1, 2.3, 3.5  Uses specific, industry related terminology and logical
organisational structure in workplace documents that
identify and analyse risk and report management
process outcomes
Oral 2.1  Participates effectively in interactions with
communication stakeholders by using questioning and listening to elicit
opinions and clarify understanding
Numeracy 1.2, 4.1  Uses numerical tools to assess risk and uses numerical
data to review plans
Navigate the 1.1, 1.3, 3.3  Complies with organisational and legislative
world of work requirements
 Takes responsibility for identification and management
of risk within own work context and refers matters to
others as required
Interact with 2.1  Selects appropriate communication protocols and
others conventions when conferring with others to establish
risk management requirements
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Determines job sequence and works logically and
done 3.1, 3.2, 3.4, 3.5, systematically to undertake defined tasks
4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4  Uses analysis and consultative processes to inform
decisions about selection and implementation of risk
control measures
 Evaluates effectiveness of plans and results to inform
improvement decisions
 Uses familiar digital technologies and systems to
access information, prepare plans and communicate
with others


BSBRSK401 BSBRSK401A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Identify risk and Identify risk and Standards for
apply risk apply risk Training Packages
management management
processes processes
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK401 Identify risk and apply risk management processesDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK401 Identify risk and

apply risk management processes
Release Comments
Evidence of the ability to apply organisational policies, procedures and processes to:
 identify risks
 consult with relevant stakeholders to analyse and evaluate risks
 identify and evaluate control measures
 develop and implement treatment plans for own area or responsibility
 refer risks that are beyond own area of responsibility to others
 maintain risk management documentation.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline techniques for identifying and evaluating risks
 outline organisational policies, procedures or processes for risk management
 give examples of areas where risks are commonly identified in an organisation
 outline the purpose and key elements of current risk management standards
 outline the legislative and regulatory context of the organisation in relation to risk
management
 describe the organisation's auditing requirements relating to risk management.

Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK401 Identify risk and apply risk management processesDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the regulation, licensing and risk -
risk management field of work and include access to:
Links
7e23c10

BSBRSK501 Manage risk Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes skills and knowledge required to manage risks in a range of contexts
across an organisation or for a specific business unit or area in any industry setting.
It applies to individuals who are working in positions of authority and are approved to
implement change across the organisation, business unit, program or project area. They may
or may not have responsibility for directly supervising others.

publication.
Unit Sector
Regulation, Licensing and Risk – Risk Management



1. Establish risk context 1.1 Review organisational processes, procedures and requirements
for undertaking risk management in accordance with current risk
management standards
1.2 Determine scope for risk management process
1.3 Identify internal and external stakeholders and their issues
1.4 Review political, economic, social, legal, technological and
policy context
1.5 Review strengths and weaknesses of existing arrangements
1.6 Document critical success factors, goals or objectives for area
included in scope
1.7 Obtain support for risk management activities
1.8 Communicate with relevant parties about the risk management
process and invite participation
2. Identify risks 2.1 Invite relevant parties to assist in the identification of risks
2.2 Research risks that may apply to scope
2.3 Use tools and techniques to generate a list of risks that apply to
the scope, in consultation with relevant parties
3. Analyse risks 3.1 Assess likelihood of risks occurring

3.2 Assess impact or consequence if risks occur
3.3 Evaluate and prioritise risks for treatment
4. Select and implement 4.1 Determine and select most appropriate options for treating risks
treatments 4.2 Develop an action plan for implementing risk treatment
4.3 Communicate risk management processes to relevant parties
4.4 Ensure all documentation is in order and appropriately stored
4.5 Implement and monitor action plan
4.6 Evaluate risk management process

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.4, 1.5, 2.2  Comprehends a variety of relatively complex

texts
 Gathers, interprets and analyses textual
information from a range of sources to identify
relevant information
Writing 1.6, 1.8, 2.1, 2.3, 4.3  Develops textual material and organises
content in a manner that effectively documents
risk management analysis and assessment
priorities and processes
Oral 1.8, 2.1, 2.3, 4.3  Participates in interactions with stakeholders
Communication using questioning and listening to elicit
opinions, and to confirm and clarify
understanding
Numeracy 2.2  Uses numerical tools to assess risk and uses
numerical data to review plans
Navigate the 1.1, 2.1, 4.3  Refers to organisational processes, procedures
world of work and requirements when making decisions
about risk management
Interact with 1.8, 2.1, 2.3, 4.3  Establishes and uses appropriate conventions
others and protocols when communicating with
stakeholders about risk management
 Consults and negotiates with stakeholders
about risk management processes and
outcomes
Get the work 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.1, 2.2,  Sequences and schedules a range of routine
done 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, and complex activities, monitors
4.4, 4.5, 4.6 implementation, evaluates processes and
manages relevant communication
 Systematically analyses information to decide
on appropriate risk management treatments
 Uses digital technologies and systems to
access information, document plans and
communicate with others


BSBRSK501 Manage BSBRSK501B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

risk Manage risk Standards for
Training Packages
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK501 Manage risk Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK501 Manage risk
Release Comments
 analyse information from a range of sources to identify the scope and context of the risk
management process including:
 stakeholder analysis
 political, economic, social, legal, technological and policy context
 current arrangements
 objectives and critical success factors for the area included in scope
 risks that may apply to scope
 consult and communicate with relevant stakeholders to identify and assess risks,
determine appropriate risk treatment actions and priorities and explain the risk
management processes
 develop and implement an action plan to treat risks
 monitor and evaluate the action plan and risk management process
 maintain documentation.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the purpose and key elements of current risk management standards
 outline the legislative and regulatory context of the organisation in relation to risk
management
 outline organisational policies, procedures and processes for risk management.

Assessment Requirements for BSBRSK501 Manage risk Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the regulation, licensing and risk -
risk management field of work and include access to:
Links
7e23c10

BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainability Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for

sustainability
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to develop and implement a workplace
sustainability policy and to modify the policy to suit changed circumstances.
It applies to individuals with managerial responsibilities who undertake work developing

approaches to create, monitor and improve strategies and policies within workplaces and
engage with a range of relevant stakeholders and specialists.

publication.

Unit Sector
Industry Capability – Sustainability


1. Develop workplace 1.1 Define scope of sustainability policy

sustainability policy 1.2 Gather information from a range of sources to plan and develop
policy
1.3 Identify and consult stakeholders as a key component of the
policy development process
1.4 Include appropriate strategies in policy at all stages of work for
minimising resource use, reducing toxic material and hazardous
chemical use and employing life cycle management approaches
1.5 Make recommendations for policy options based on likely
effectiveness, timeframes and cost
1.6 Develop policy that reflects the organisation’s commitment to
sustainability as an integral part of business planning and as a
business opportunity
1.7 Agree to appropriate methods of implementation, outcomes and
performance indicators
2. Communicate 2.1 Promote workplace sustainability policy, including its expected

workplace sustainability outcome, to key stakeholders
policy 2.2 Inform those involved in implementing the policy about
expected outcomes, activities to be undertaken and assigned
responsibilities
3. Implement workplace 3.1 Develop and communicate procedures to help implement

sustainability policy workplace sustainability policy
3.2 Implement strategies for continuous improvement in resource
efficiency
3.3 Establish and assign responsibility for recording systems to track
continuous improvements in sustainability approaches
4. Review workplace 4.1 Document outcomes and provide feedback to key personnel and
sustainability policy stakeholders
implementation 4.2 Investigate successes or otherwise of policy


4.3 Monitor records to identify trends that may require remedial
action and use to promote continuous improvement of performance
4.4 Modify policy and or procedures as required to ensure
improvements are made

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 4.2, 4.3  Identifies, analyses and evaluates complex textual
information to determine legislative and regulatory
requirements, trends and outcomes
Writing 1.2-1.7, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1,  Researches, plans and prepares documentation using
3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4 format and language appropriate to context,
organisational requirements and audience
Oral 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2,  Presents information and seeks advice using language
Communication 3.1, 4.1 appropriate to audience
Numeracy 1.5, 4.3  Interprets and uses mathematical equations to calculate
numerical information relating to time durations and
costs
Navigate the 1.1-1.6, 3.1, 4.4  Develops, monitors and modifies organisational
world of work policies and procedures in accordance with legislative
requirements and organisation goals
others 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3 when communicating with internal and external
 Plays a lead role in consulting and negotiating positive
outcomes with a range of stakeholders
Get the work 1.2, 1.4-1.7, 2.3, 2.4,  Plans, organises and implements work activities of self
done 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.5, and others that ensure compliance with organisational
3.6, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4 policies and procedures, and legislative requirements
 Sequences and schedules complex activities, monitors
implementation, and manages relevant communication
 Uses systematic, analytical processes in relatively
complex, situations, setting goals, gathering relevant
information, and identifying and evaluating options


BSBSUS501 BSBSUS501A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Develop workplace Develop workplace Standards for
policy and policy and procedures Training Packages
procedures for for sustainability
sustainability
performance criteria
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainabilityDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS501 Develop workplace

policy and procedures for sustainability
Release Comments
 scope and develop organisational policies and procedures that comply with legislative
requirements and support the organisation’s sustainability goals covering at a minimum:
 minimising resource use
 resource efficiency
 reducing toxic material and hazardous chemical use
 employing life cycle management approaches
 continuous improvement
 plan and implement sustainability policy and procedures including:
 agreed outcomes
 activities to be undertaken
 assigned responsibilities
 record keeping, review and improvement processes
 consult and communicate with relevant stakeholders to generate engagement with
sustainability policy development, implementation and continuous improvement
 review and improve sustainability policies.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBSUS501 Develop workplace policy and procedures for sustainabilityDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the environmental or sustainability legislation, regulations and codes of practice
applicable to the organisation identify internal and external sources of information and
explain how they can be used to plan and develop the organisation’s sustainability policy
 explain policy development processes and practices
 outline organisational systems and procedures that relate to sustainability
 outline typical barriers to implementing policies and procedures in an organisation and
possible strategies to address them.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the sustainability field of work and
include access to:
Links
7e23c10

BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS hazard identification, risk assessment and risk controlDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS hazard identification, risk

assessment and risk control
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to maintain a healthy and safe
workplace through participation in the process of identifying work health and safety (WHS)
hazards and assessing and controlling WHS risks, and the promotion and support of worker
consultation.
It applies to individuals who assist with the identification of workplace hazards and the
assessment and control of WHS risks as part of their WHS responsibilities, which are in
addition to their main duties.
NOTE: The terms 'occupational health and safety' (OHS) and 'work health and safety' (WHS)
are equivalent and generally either can be used in the workplace. In jurisdictions where the
Model WHS Legislation has not been implemented RTOs are advised to contextualise the unit
of competency by referring to the existing State/Territory OHS legislative requirements.

publication.
Unit Sector
Regulation, Licensing and Risk – Work Health and Safety



1. Participate in workplace 1.1 Participate in selecting hazard identification methods suitable for
hazard identification the workplace
1.2 Use selected methods to identify, report and record hazards
according to workplace procedures and WHS Acts, regulations and
codes of practice
1.3 Provide information and assistance to persons conducting hazard
identification
2. Participate in WHS risk 2.1 Participate in selecting suitable risk assessment methods for the
assessment workplace
2.2 Use selected methods to assess and record risks according to
workplace procedures and WHS Acts, regulations and codes of
practice
2.3 Provide information and assistance to persons conducting risk
assessments
3. Promote and support 3.1 Advise workers of, and consult them about, hazard identification
worker consultation and and risk assessment activities, according to workplace WHS
participation in hazard consultation and participation policies, procedures and processes
identification and risk 3.2 Encourage workers to participate in these activities according to
assessment workplace WHS consultation and participation policies, procedures
and processes
3.3 Advise workers of, and consult them about, the results and
outcomes of these activities, according to workplace WHS
consultation and participation policies, procedures and processes
4. Participate in 4.1 Obtain workplace records of the outcomes of hazard

developing, selecting and identifications and risk assessments, and use them to participate in
implementing WHS risk developing risk control options
controls 4.2 Apply knowledge of WHS Acts, regulations, codes of practice,
other information and guidelines, and workplace policies,
procedures and processes to identify duty holders
4.3 Participate in selecting risk control options using appropriate
criteria
4.4 Identify and report factors impeding successful implementation
of selected risk controls
4.5 Participate in developing a risk control implementation and


evaluation plan
4.6 Provide information about the implementation and evaluation
plan to individuals and parties
5. Support effective 5.1 Advise workers of, and consult them about, developing risk
worker consultation and control options, and selecting and implementing risk controls,
participation in the risk according to workplace WHS consultation and participation policies,
control process procedures and processes
5.2 Encourage workers to participate in these activities according to
workplace WHS consultation and participation policies, procedures
and processes

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 4.1,  Interprets and identifies information from WHS
4.3, 4.4 legislation, workplace policy and procedure and
records
Writing 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 2.3,  Uses formats and language appropriate to audience and
3.1-3.3, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, context in plans, reports and general advice
5.2
Oral 1.1-1.3, 2.1-2.3, 4.6  Presents information or assistance using appropriate

communication levels of industry specific vocabulary
 Uses listening and questioning to clarify and confirm
understanding
Navigate the 1.2, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3,  Follows legal and regulatory responsibilities and
world of work 4.2, 5.1, 5.2 organisational policies and procedures in relation to
WHS role
 Keeps up to date on changes to WHS legislation or
regulations and organisational policies and procedures
Interact with 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.3,  Understands what to communicate and to whom in a
others 3.2, 3.3, 4.3, 4.5, range of contexts
4.6, 5.1, 5.2  Cooperates with others as part of WHS activities and
contributes to specific activities requiring joint
responsibility and accountability
 Shares information and resources, offers assistance
voluntarily and provides feedback when requested
 Plays an active role in group discussions, paying
attention to perspectives of others and encouraging
participation
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 4.3  Plans and implements tasks to achieve required
done outcomes
 Uses formal decision-making processes, setting or
clarifying goals, gathering information and identifying
and evaluating choices against a set of criteria in the
WHS risk-management process


BSBWHS303 BSBWHS303A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Participate in WHS Participate in WHS Standards for
hazard identification, hazard identification, Training Packages
risk assessment and risk assessment and
risk control risk control
intent of performance
criteria
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS hazard identification, risk assessment and risk controlDate this document
was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS

hazard identification, risk assessment and risk control
Release Comments
 participate in selection and use of required methods to identify, report and record hazards
 assess and record risks for identified hazards
 promote and support worker consultation and participation in hazard identification and
risk assessment
 participate in developing, selecting and implementing risk control options and plans.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS303 Participate in WHS hazard identification, risk assessment and risk controlDate this document
was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the relevant Commonwealth and state or territory Acts, regulations, codes of
practice standards, guidance material and other relevant publications
 summarise work health and safety (WHS) legislative requirements about:
 communication, consultation and participation
 notification of incidents
 recordkeeping
 specific hazard identification and risk assessment and control methods
 list the basic principles of incident causation and injury processes
 explain the concept of hazards, risks and risk factors
 describe hazard identification and risk assessment methods
 identify internal and external sources of WHS information and data, and how to access
them
 summarise organisational WHS policies, procedures, processes and systems
 describe the range of WHS hazards that may be present in the workplace, the harm they
can cause and how this harm occurs
 describe risk control options for different hazards and work situations
 identify types of hazard and risk registers
 describe the workplace communication processes for sharing information about hazard
identification, and risk assessment and control.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced by individuals carrying out work
health and safety duties in the workplace and include access to:
 organisational policies, standard operating procedures and plans
 Acts, regulations, codes of practice, licensing requirements and standards
 relevant data files
 appropriate resources to manage the identification and rectification of breaches in
compliance requirements.
Links
7e23c10

BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies, procedures and programs to meet legislative requirements Date this document was
BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies, procedures

and programs to meet legislative requirements
Release Comments

Training Package release 1.0
Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to implement and monitor an
organisation’s work health and safety (WHS) policies, procedures and programs in the
relevant work area in order to meet legislative requirements.
It applies to individuals with supervisory responsibilities for implementing and monitoring the
organisation’s WHS policies, procedures and programs in a work area. These individuals have
a broad knowledge of WHS policies and contribute well developed skills in creating solutions
to unpredictable problems through analysis and evaluation of information from a variety of
sources. They provide supervision and guidance to others and have limited responsibility for
the output of others.

publication.
Unit Sector



1. Provide information to 1.1 Accurately explain to the work team relevant provisions of WHS
the work team about WHS Acts, regulations and codes of practice
policies and procedures 1.2 Provide information about the organisation’s WHS policies,
procedures and programs, and ensure it is readily accessible to, and
understandable by the work team
1.3 Regularly provide and clearly explain to the work team
information about identified hazards and the outcomes of risk
assessment and control
2. Implement and monitor 2.1 Communicate to workplace parties the importance of effective
participation arrangements consultation mechanisms in managing health and safety risks in the
for managing WHS workplace
2.2 Apply consultation procedures to facilitate participation of the
work team in managing work area hazards
2.3 Promptly deal with issues raised through consultation, according
to organisational consultation procedures and WHS legislative and
regulatory requirements
2.4 Promptly record and communicate to the work team the
outcomes of consultation over WHS issues
3. Implement and monitor 3.1 Identify WHS training needs according to organisational
organisational procedures requirements and WHS legislative and regulatory requirements
for providing WHS 3.2 Make arrangements to meet WHS training needs of team
training members in consultation with relevant individuals
3.3 Provide workplace learning opportunities and coaching and
mentoring assistance to facilitate team and individual achievement
of identified WHS training needs
3.4 Identify and report to management the costs associated with
providing training for work team, for inclusion in financial and
management plans
4. Implement and monitor 4.1 Identify and report on hazards in work area according to WHS
organisational procedures policies and procedures and WHS legislative and regulatory
and legal requirements for requirements
identifying hazards and
4.2 Promptly action team member hazard reports according to
assessing and controlling organisational procedures and WHS legislative and regulatory
risks requirements


4.3 Implement procedures to control risks using the hierarchy of
control, according to organisational and WHS legislative
requirements
4.4 Identify and report inadequacies in existing risk controls
according to hierarchy of control and WHS legislative requirements
4.5 Monitor outcomes of reports on inadequacies, where appropriate,
to ensure a prompt organisational response
5. Implement and monitor 5.1 Accurately complete and maintain WHS records of incidents of
organisational procedures occupational injury and disease in work area, according to WHS
for maintaining WHS policies, procedures and legislative requirements
records for the team 5.2 Use aggregate information and data from work area records to
identify hazards and monitor risk control procedures in work area

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1-1.3, 5.2  Interprets and analyses complex WHS legislative and
organisational texts
Writing 1.1-1.3, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1,  Documents WHS legislative and organisational
3.2, 3.4, 4.1, 4.4, 5.1 information using structure, layout and language
suitable for audience
 Records WHS issues and actions taken according to
reporting requirements
 Prepares and maintains required records using
appropriate structure and vocabulary
Oral 1.1-1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.2,  Provides WHS legislative and organisational
communication 3.3, 4.1, 4.4 information and advice using structure and language
suitable for audience
Numeracy 3.4, 5.2  Extracts, interprets and comprehends mathematical
information in relation to training costs and risk
management data
Navigate the 1.1,1.2, 2.3, 3.1,  Takes responsibility for adherence to legal and
world of work 4.1-4.5, 5.1 regulatory responsibilities and organisational policies
and procedures in relation to WHS
 Keeps up to date on changes to WHS legislation or
regulations and organisational policies and procedures
Interact with 2.2, 3.2, 3.3  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others to facilitate consultation or provide feedback
 Initiates and contributes to facilitating consultative
role, responding, explaining, clarifying and expanding
on ideas and information as required
 Collaborates with others to achieve individual and team
outcomes
Get the work 2.2, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1-4.5,  Uses combination of formal, logical planning and
done 5.1 intuitive understanding of context to identify relevant
information and risks, and identify and evaluate
alternative strategies
 Uses formal decision-making processes, setting or
clarifying goals, gathering information and identifying
and evaluating choices against a set of criteria
 Recognises and takes responsibility for reporting WHS
risk control inadequacies
 Uses formal and informal processes to monitor
implementations of WHS solutions and reflect on

outcomes

BSBWHS401 BSBWHS401A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Implement and Implement and Standards for
monitor WHS monitor WHS Training Packages
policies, procedures policies, procedures
and programs to meet and programs to meet
legislative legislative Minor edits to clarify
requirements requirements intent of performance
criteria
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies, procedures and programs to meet legislative
requirements Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS401 Implement and

monitor WHS policies, procedures and programs to meet
Release Comments
 explain clearly and accurately to work team the relevant work health and safety (WHS)
information including:
 WHS legislative and organisational requirements
 identified hazards and outcomes of risk assessment and control
 ensure that the team has access to information about WHS policies, procedures and
programs in appropriate structure and language
 implement and monitor procedures according to organisational and legislative WHS
requirements including:
 consultation and communications to enable team members to participate in managing
WHS risks and hazards
 identifying WHS training needs and providing learning opportunities, coaching and
mentoring as appropriate to needs
 identifying, reporting and taking action on WHS hazards and risks
 identifying and reporting inadequacies in existing risk controls and monitoring
outcomes to ensure a prompt organisational response
 reporting on the cost of WHS training
 keeping WHS records
 analysing aggregate WHS data to identify hazards and monitor risk control procedures
in work area.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS401 Implement and monitor WHS policies, procedures and programs to meet legislative
requirements Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 outline the legal responsibilities and duties of managers, supervisors, persons conducting
businesses or undertakings (PCBUs) and workers in relation to WHS risk management in
the workplace
 identify key provisions of relevant WHS Acts, regulations and codes of practice that apply
to the business and outline how they apply in the work area
 explain organisational policies and procedures relating to hazard identification, risk
management, fire, emergency and evacuation, incident investigation and reporting
 explain the importance of effective consultation mechanisms in managing health and
safety risks in the workplace
 explain how the hierarchy of control applies in the work area.
 an actual workplace or simulated environment
 examples of documents relating to workplace safety, hazard identification and risk
assessment
Links
7e23c10

BSBWHS501 Ensure a safe workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to establish, maintain and evaluate the
organisation’s work health and safety (WHS) policies, procedures and programs in the
relevant work area, according to WHS legislative requirements. It takes a systems approach
and addresses compliance with relevant legislative requirements.
This unit applies to managers working in a range of contexts who have, or are likely to have
responsibility for WHS as part of their broader management role. It is relevant for people with
obligations under WHS legislation, for example persons conducting a business or undertaking
(PCBUs) or officers, as defined by relevant legislation.

publication.
Unit Sector



1 Establish a WHS 1.1 Locate, adapt, adopt and communicate WHS policies that clearly
management system in a define the organisation’s commitment to complying with WHS
work area legislation
1.2 Identify duty holders and define WHS responsibilities for all
workplace personnel in the work area according to WHS legislation,
policies, procedures and programs
1.3 Identify and approve financial and human resources required by
the WHS management system (WHSMS)
2 Establish and maintain 2.1 Work with workers and their representatives to set up and
effective and compliant maintain participation arrangements according to relevant WHS
participation arrangements legislation
for managing WHS in a 2.2 Appropriately resolve issues raised through participation and
work area consultation arrangements according to relevant WHS legislation
2.3 Promptly provide information about the outcomes of
participation and consultation to workers and ensure it is easy for
them to access and understand
3 Establish and maintain 3.1 Develop procedures for ongoing hazard identification, and
procedures for effectively assessment and control of associated risks
identifying hazards, and 3.2 Include hazard identification at the planning, design and
assessing and controlling evaluation stages of any change in the workplace to ensure that new
risks in a work area hazards are not created by the proposed changes and existing
hazards are controlled
3.3 Develop and maintain procedures for selecting and
implementing risk controls according to the hierarchy of control and
WHS legislative requirements
3.4 Identify inadequacies in existing risk controls according to the
hierarchy of control and WHS legislative requirements, and
promptly provide resources to enable implementation of new
measures
3.5 Identify requirements for expert WHS advice, and request this
advice as required
4 Evaluate and maintain a 4.1 Develop and provide a WHS induction and training program for
work area WHS all workers in a work area as part of the organisation’s training
management system program
4.2 Use a system for WHS record keeping to allow identification of


patterns of occupational injury and disease in the organisation, and
to maintain a record of WHS decisions made, including reasons for
the decision
4.3 Measure and evaluate the WHSMS in line with the
organisation’s quality systems framework
4.4 Develop and implement improvements to the WHSMS to
achieve organisational WHS objectives
4.5 Ensure compliance with the WHS legislative framework to
achieve, as a minimum, WHS legal requirements
Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5  Organises, evaluates and critiques ideas and
information from WHS legislation, policies, procedures
and programs
Writing 1.1, 2.3, 3.2, 3.5,  Produces WHS policies, procedures and programs
4.1, 4.2  using appropriate vocabulary, grammatical structure
and conventions to produce
 Records WHS decisions according to organisational
requirements
Oral 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3  Presents and seeks information from others using
communication structure and language suitable for the audience
 Provides information on resolution of WHS issues
varying level of technical vocabulary to suit audience
Numeracy 1.3  Selects from, and applies, an expanding range of
mathematical and problem solving strategies in
identifying financial and human resources required
Navigate the 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Monitors adherence to legal and regulatory rights and
world of work 3.3, 3.4, 4.5 responsibilities for self and others in relation to WHS
 Takes responsibility for developing, implementing and
reviewing policies, procedures and processes in
accordance with organisational and legislative
requirements

Interact with 1.1, 2.1, 2.3, 3.5  Plays a lead role in situations requiring effective
others collaboration demonstrating the ability to guide
discussions and negotiate agreeable outcomes
 Provides feedback to others in forms they can
understand and use
Get the work 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2,  Develops plans or processes to manage relatively
done 2.3, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, complex, WHS management tasks with an awareness
3.5, 4.1, 4.2 4.3, 4.4, of how they contribute to operational and strategic
4.5 goals
 Uses systematic, analytical processes, setting goals,
gathering relevant information, and identifying and
evaluating options against agreed criteria
 Considers whether, and how, others should be
involved, using consultative or collaborative processes
as an integral part of the decision-making process
 Uses digital systems and tools to enter, store and
retrieve relevant information
Range of Conditions
WHS legislation must include:  applicable Commonwealth and state or territory
WHS Acts, regulations and codes of practice.

BSBWHS501 Ensure BSBWHS501A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

a safe workplace Ensure a safe Standards for
workplace Training Packages

Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS501 Ensure a safe workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS501 Ensure a safe

workplace
Release Comments
 establish, implement, maintain and evaluate a work health and safety (WHS) management
system for a work area of an organisation in accordance with WHS legislation including
policies, procedures and record keeping
 ensure organisational WHS compliance
 establish, implement, maintain and evaluate effective and compliant participation
arrangements for managing WHS including identifying duty holders, identifying and
approving the required resources and developing and implementing a training program
 establish, implement, maintain and evaluate procedures for effectively identifying
hazards, and assessing and controlling risks using the hierarchy of risk control
 provide information and complete documentation for a WHS management system
 identify requirements for and request expert WHS advice.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify and detail relevant WHS Acts, regulations and codes of practice
 specify relevant WHS organisational policies, procedures, programs and practices
 explain hazard identification and risk-management processes
 describe the hierarchy of risk control and how it is applied in the workplace
 specify in-house and WHS legislative reporting requirements.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWHS501 Ensure a safe workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 organisational WHS policies and procedures
 WHS legislation, regulations and codes of practice
Links
7e23c10

BSBWOR201 Manage personal stress in the workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to understand signs and sources of stress
within the broader framework of the job role and work environment.
It applies to individuals who usually work with some guidance and supervision in an
environment where they are likely to encounter difficult customers and situations from time to
time. It typically applies in a contact centre environment owing to the very measured,
structured, high volume and potentially repetitive nature of the work, but can apply in any
work environment.
of publication.
Unit Sector
Industry Capability – Workplace Effectiveness



1. Develop personal 1.1 Recognise signs and sources of stress

awareness of stress 1.2 Acknowledge stress and difficult situations
1.3 Analyse and understand potential areas of stress in the work
environment
2. Develop stress 2.1 Develop an effective understanding of a range of stress

management techniques management techniques
2.2 Use appropriate techniques to manage stressful situations
effectively
2.3 Focus on areas of stress within personal control
2.4 Adopt strategies to effectively reduce, manage and deal with
stress
3. Manage time 3.1 Develop and understand job role priorities

3.2 Develop techniques to support achievement of key
performance indicators (KPIs) and priorities
3.3 Use appropriate time management tools and techniques
3.4 Regularly evaluate tools and techniques
3.5 Promptly identify and inform relevant personnel of any
variations and difficulties affecting work requirements, through
regular reviews
4. Recover from a 4.1 Review the contact or situation

stressful contact 4.2 Analyse root cause/s of stressful contact or situation
4.3 Depersonalise context of contact or situation
4.4 Discuss outcomes with appropriate staff members
4.5 Prepare for next contact or situation positively
4.6 Follow up or take action where needed
5. Maintain personal 5.1 Identify sources of fatigue in contact centre role

stamina and resilience 5.2 Adopt work routine and procedural strategies to minimise
stress and fatigue
5.3 Monitor personal performance against performance
requirements


5.4 Adapt stamina management strategies to maximise
performance
5.5 Seek assistance from team members and management in
managing stamina
6. Maintain work/life 6.1 Identify work/life priorities

balance 6.2 Adopt strategies to support work/life priorities
6.3 Give high priority to health and wellbeing
6.4 Monitor work/life balance
6.5 Develop ability to effectively leave work behind at the end of
the day

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 3.1-3.5  Recognises and interprets textual information to

determine job role and requirements
Writing 3.3, 3.4, 3.5  Completes time management documentation using
Oral 3.5, 4.4, 5.5  Participates in discussions using clear language and
Communication features appropriate to audience
 Uses listening and questioning techniques to request
assistance and confirm understanding
Navigate the 3.1, 3.2, 5.3  Understands role requirements and identifies own
world of work responsibilities
Interact with 3.5, 4.4, 5.5  Establishes rapport and builds relationships with team
others members and others
 Maintains awareness of own strengths and weaknesses
to support an overall sense of wellbeing
Get the work 1.3, 2.1, 2.4, 3.1-3.4,  Plans and organises tasks to achieve outcome within
done 4.1-4.3, 4.5, 4.6, timeframes
5.1-5.4, 6.1, 6.2, 6.4,  Uses analytical skills to decide on effective techniques
6.5 to manage stress and personal well-being
 Uses problem-solving skills to address a range of
issues, seeking advice of others, where necessary
 Monitors implementation of solutions and reflects on
outcomes

BSBWOR201 BSBWOR201A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Manage personal Manage personal Standards for
stress in the stress in the Training Packages
workplace workplace

Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR201 Manage personal stress in the workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR201 Manage personal

stress in the workplace
Release Comments
 recognise and understand potential stress in the work environment
 develop and use techniques and strategies to manage stress and stressful situations
 adopt and monitor potential sources of stress and fatigue, seeking assistance as required
 monitor own performance against performance requirements and key performance
indicators (KPIs)
 use techniques to achieve work/life balance.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 describe job role priorities and KPIs
 list internal and external sources of assistance, including escalation pathways
 outline signs and sources of existing and potential stress or difficult situations
 discuss stress management and reduction techniques
 describe time management tools and techniques.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR201 Manage personal stress in the workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the industry capability – workplace
effectiveness field of work and include access to:
 time management tools
 workplace documentation
Links
7e23c10

BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to organise own work schedules, to
monitor and obtain feedback on work performance and to maintain required levels of
competence.
This unit applies to individuals who exercise discretion and judgement and apply a broad
range of competencies in various work contexts.
of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Organise and complete 1.1 Ensure that work goals, objectives or Key Performance
own work schedule Indicators (KPIs) are understood, negotiated and agreed in
1.2 Assess and prioritise workload to ensure tasks are completed
within identified timeframes
1.3 Identify factors affecting the achievement of work objectives
and incorporate contingencies into work plans
1.4 Use business technology efficiently and effectively to manage
and monitor scheduling and completion of tasks
2. Monitor own work 2.1 Accurately monitor and adjust personal work performance
performance through self assessment to ensure achievement of tasks and
compliance with legislation and work processes or KPIs
2.2 Ensure that feedback on performance is actively sought and
evaluated from colleagues and clients in the context of individual
and group requirements
2.3 Routinely identify and report on variations in the quality of and
products and services according to organisational requirements
2.4 Identify signs of stress and effects on personal wellbeing
2.5 Identify sources of stress and access appropriate supports and
resolution strategies
3. Co-ordinate personal 3.1 Identify personal learning and professional development needs
skill development and and skill gaps using self assessment and advice from colleagues
learning and clients in relation to role and organisational requirements
3.2 Identify, prioritise and plan opportunities for undertaking
personal skill development activities in liaison with work groups
and relevant personnel
3.3 Access, complete and record professional development
opportunities to facilitate continuous learning and career
development
3.4 Incorporate formal and informal feedback into review of
further learning needs

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Learning 3.1-3.4  Employs a range of approaches and investigative

techniques to source the knowledge necessary to
arrange personal learning experiences
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1  Interprets textual information to determine
organisation’s procedures, own work performance and
objectives
Writing 1.3, 1.4, 2.3, 3.1,  Prepares written reports and workplace documents that
3.2, 3.3 communicate information clearly and effectively
Oral 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2  Clearly gives and receives feedback using specific and
Communication relevant language
 Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm
understanding
Numeracy 1.1, 1.3  Understands responsibilities and scope of role and
complies with organisational policies, procedures and
protocols
Interact with 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2  Selects the appropriate form, channel and mode of
role
 Fosters and nurtures a culture of constructive and
respectful feedback
 Proactively collaborates with others to achieve specific
goals
Get the work 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.4,  Plans and organises work commitments to ensure
done 2.5, 3.2 deadlines and objectives are met
 Uses formal analytical thinking techniques to
recognise and respond to routine problems
 Uses digital systems and tools to enter, store and
monitor information


BSBWOR301 BSBWOR301B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Organise personal Organise personal Standards for
work priorities and work priorities and Training Packages
development development
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR301 Organise personal

work priorities and development
Release Comments
 prepare a work plan according to organisational requirements and work objectives
 use business technology to schedule, prioritise and monitor completion of tasks in a work
plan
 assess and prioritise own work load and deal with contingencies
 monitor and assess personal performance against job role requirements by seeking
feedback from colleagues and clients
 identify personal development needs and access, complete and record skill development
and learning.
Note: if a specific volume or frequency is not stated, then evidence must be provided at least
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline key provisions of legislation that relate to own work role
 describe goals, objectives or key performance indicators of own work role
 explain ways to elicit, analyse and interpret feedback when communicating with other
people in the workplace
 explain the principles and techniques of goal setting, measuring performance, time
management and personal assessment of learning and development needs
 explain signs and sources of stress and strategies to deal with stress in the workplace
 identify methods to identify and prioritise personal learning needs.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR301 Organise personal work priorities and development Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the industry capability - workplace
 work schedules and performance improvement plans
Links
7e23c10

BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional

development
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to create systems and process to
organise information and prioritise tasks.
It applies to individuals working in managerial positions who have excellent organisational

skills. The work ethic of individuals in this role has a significant impact on the work culture
and patterns of behaviour of others as managers at this level are role models in their work
environment.
of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Establish personal 1.1 Serve as a positive role model in the workplace through
work goals personal work planning
1.2 Ensure personal work goals, plans and activities reflect the
organisation’s plans, and own responsibilities and accountabilities
1.3 Measure and maintain personal performance in varying work
conditions, work contexts and when contingencies occur
2. Set and meet own work 2.1 Take initiative to prioritise and facilitate competing demands to
priorities achieve personal, team and organisational goals and objectives
2.2 Use technology efficiently and effectively to manage work
priorities and commitments
2.3 Maintain appropriate work-life balance, and ensure stress is
effectively managed and health is attended to
3. Develop and maintain 3.1 Assess personal knowledge and skills against competency
professional competence standards to determine development needs, priorities and plans
3.2 Seek feedback from employees, clients and colleagues and use
this feedback to identify and develop ways to improve competence
3.3 Identify, evaluate, select and use development opportunities
suitable to personal learning style/s to develop competence
3.4 Participate in networks to enhance personal knowledge, skills
and work relationships
3.5 Identify and develop new skills to achieve and maintain a
competitive edge

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Learning 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5  Investigates and uses a range of strategies to develop
personal competence
Reading 1.2, 3.1, 3.2  Analyses and interprets textual information from
organisational policies and practices or feedback to
inform personal development planning
Writing 3.2  Uses feedback to prepare reports that summarise ways
to improve competence
Oral 3.2  Uses active listening and questioning to seek and
Communication receive feedback
Navigate the 1.2, 2.1  Understands how own role contributes to broader
world of work organisational goals
 Considers organisational protocols when planning own
career development
Interact with 1.1, 3.2, 3.4  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others when communicating with diverse stakeholders
 Uses interpersonal skills to establish and build positive
working relationships with others
Get the work 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1,  Plans and prioritises tasks in order to meet deadlines,
done 2.2, 2.3, 3.1 manage role responsibilities and to manage own
personal welfare
 Identifies and uses appropriate technology to improve
work efficiency


BSBWOR501 Manage BSBWOR501B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

personal work Manage personal Standards for
priorities and work priorities and Training Packages
professional professional
development development
Performance Criteria
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development Date this document was
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR501 Manage personal

work priorities and professional development
Release Comments
 use business technology to create and use systems and processes to organise and prioritise
tasks and commitments
 measure and maintain personal work performance including assessing competency against
competency standards and seeking feedback
 maintain an appropriate work-life balance to manage personal health and stress
 participate in networks
 develop a personal development plan which includes career objectives and an action plan
 develop new skills.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain principles and techniques involved in the management and organisation of:
 performance measurement
 personal behaviour, self-awareness and personality traits identification
 a personal development plan
 personal goal setting
 time
 discuss management development opportunities and options for self
 describe methods for achieving a healthy work-life balance
 outline organisation’s policies, plans and procedures
 explain types of learning style/s and how they relate to the individual
 describe types of work methods and practices that can improve personal performance.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR501 Manage personal work priorities and professional development Date this document was
Links
7e23c10

BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to lead teams in the workplace and to
actively engage with the management of the organisation.
It applies to individuals working at a managerial level who facilitate work teams and build a
positive culture within their work teams. At this level, work will normally be carried out using
complex and diverse methods and procedures requiring the exercise of considerable discretion
and judgement, using a range of problem solving and decision making strategies.
of publication.
Unit Sector



1. Establish team 1.1 Consult team members to establish a common understanding of

performance plan team purpose, roles, responsibilities and accountabilities in
accordance with organisational goals, plans and objectives
1.2 Develop performance plans to establish expected outcomes,
outputs, key performance indicators (KPIs) and goals for work
team
1.3 Support team members in meeting expected performance
outcomes
2. Develop and facilitate 2.1 Develop strategies to ensure team members have input into
team cohesion planning, decision making and operational aspects of work team
2.2 Develop policies and procedures to ensure team members take
responsibility for own work and assist others to undertake required
roles and responsibilities
2.3 Provide feedback to team members to encourage, value and
reward individual and team efforts and contributions
2.4 Develop processes to ensure that issues, concerns and
problems identified by team members are recognised and
addressed
3. Facilitate teamwork 3.1 Encourage team members and individuals to participate in and
to take responsibility for team activities, including communication
processes
3.2 Support the team in identifying and resolving work
performance problems
3.3 Ensure own contribution to work team serves as a role model
for others and enhances the organisation’s image for all
stakeholders
4. Liaise with 4.1 Establish and maintain open communication processes with all
stakeholders stakeholders
4.2 Communicate information from line manager/management to
the team
4.3 Communicate unresolved issues, concerns and problems raised
by team members and follow-up with line manager/management
and other relevant stakeholders
4.4 Evaluate and take necessary corrective action regarding


unresolved issues, concerns and problems raised by internal or

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 4.4  Analyses and interprets textual information from the
organisation’s policies, goals and objectives to
establish team goals or to determine corrective action
Writing 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4,  Prepares written reports and workplace documentation
4.2, 4.3, 4.4 that communicate complex information clearly and
effectively
Oral 1.1, 2.3, 3.1, 4.1,  Engages in discussions or provides information using
Communication 4.2, 4.3 appropriate vocabulary and non-verbal features
 Uses listening and questioning techniques to confirm
understanding and to engage the audience
Navigate the 1.1, 2.1, 2.2, 3.3  Understands how own role contributes to broader
world of work organisational goals
 Modifies or develops policies and procedures to
achieve organisational goals
others 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3 when communicating with diverse stakeholders
 Uses interpersonal skills to gain trust and confidence
of team and provides feedback to others in forms that
they can understand and use
 Adapts personal communication style to build positive
working relationships and to show respect for the
opinions, values and particular needs of others
collaboration, demonstrating high level conflict
resolution skills and ability to engage and motivate
others
Get the work 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4,  Develops, implements and monitors plans and
done 3.2, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4 processes to ensure team effectiveness
 Monitors and actively supports processes and
development activities to ensure the team is focused on
work outcomes
 Plans for unexpected outcomes and implements
creative responses to overcome challenges


BSBWOR502 Lead BSBWOR502B Updated to meet Equivalent unit

and manage team Ensure team Standards for
effectiveness effectiveness Training Packages
Title change
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR502 Lead and manage

team effectiveness
Release Comments
 use leadership techniques and strategies to facilitate team cohesion and work outcomes
including:
 encouraging and fostering shared understanding of purpose, roles and responsibilities
 identifying and resolving problems
 providing feedback to encourage, value and reward others
 modelling desired behaviour and practices
 develop policies and procedures to ensure team members take responsibility for own work
and assist others to undertake required roles and responsibilities
 establish processes to address issues and resolve performance issues
 support team to meet expected performance outcomes including providing formal and
informal learning opportunities as needed
 develop performance plans with key performance indicators (KPIs), outputs and goals for
individuals or the team which incorporate input from stakeholders
 communicate effectively with a range of stakeholders about team performance plans and
team performance
 facilitate two-way flow of information between team and management relevant to team
performance
 evaluate and take necessary corrective action regarding unresolved issues, concerns and
problems raised by internal or external stakeholders.
once.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWOR502 Lead and manage team effectiveness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 explain how group dynamics can support or hinder team performance
 outline strategies that can support team cohesion, participation and performance
 explain strategies for gaining consensus
 explain issue resolution strategies.
 workplace documents
Links
7e23c10

BSBWRK411 Support employee and industrial relations procedures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBWRK411 Support employee and industrial relations

procedures
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to communicate and implement
industrial relations policies and procedures to effectively represent organisations/employers.
It applies to individuals who work in support positions, assisting others in dealing with
industrial relations conflicts and issues.

publication.
Unit Sector
Workforce Development – Workplace Relations



1. Communicate and 1.1 Source and disseminate relevant legislation, agreements,

implement organisation’s policies and procedures to relevant persons and groups
industrial relations 1.2 Implement agreements, policies and procedures according to
site, enterprise and statutory requirements
1.3 Support strategies to effectively communicate with relevant
persons and groups on industrial relations matters
1.4 Promote the organisation’s industrial relations procedures to
relevant persons and groups
1.5 Represent the organisation appropriately in discussions with
key stakeholders
2. Assist in minimising 2.1 Monitor the implementation of industrial relations policies and
industrial relations procedures
conflict
2.2 Process documentation and report to management and other
relevant parties about potential industrial relations conflicts
2.3 Support managers to contain industrial relations conflicts and
deal with grievances and disputes, within limits of own authority
2.4 Work with employees to resolve personal grievances and
prevent escalation of industrial relations conflicts
2.5 Work under supervision to source specialist industrial relations
expertise
3. Enhance industrial 3.1 Trial and implement strategies to monitor the implementation
relations of the organisation’s industrial relations policies and procedures
3.2 Implement strategies to facilitate feedback on the industrial
climate
3.3 Implement strategies to strengthen relationships with relevant
persons and groups
3.4 Provide information and feedback to management on industrial
relations
3.5 Provide information and advice to relevant persons and groups

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1  Comprehends and analyses complex texts from a
variety of sources and records to determine relevance
to requirements or review implementation of
strategies
Writing 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2,  Prepares required documents using language and
3.4, 3.5 structure appropriate to purpose and audience
Oral 1.1-1.5, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5,  Presents information and seeks advice using language
Communication 3.4, 3.5 and non-verbal features appropriate to audience and
context
Navigate the 1.2, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1,  Follows policies, procedures and legislative
world of work 2.3, 3.1 requirements and identifies implications of new
legislation or regulation for self and others
 Understands responsibilities and limits of own role
Interact with 1.1, 1.3-1.5, 2.2-2.5,  Selects and uses appropriate conventions and protocols
others 3.2-3.5 when communicating with co-workers in a range of
work contexts
 Collaborates and cooperates with others to achieve
required outcomes
 Uses effective strategies to moderate conflict and
negotiate solutions
Get the work 1.1, 2.1-2.3, 2.5, 3.1,  Plans and organises tasks required to achieve required
done 3.4, 3.5 outcomes, seeking advice from others when necessary
 Makes a range of critical and non-critical decisions in
relatively complex situations


BSBWRK411 BSBWRK411A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Support employee Support employee and Standards for
and industrial industrial relations Training Packages
relations procedures procedures
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK411 Support employee and industrial relations procedures Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK411 Support employee

and industrial relations procedures
Release Comments
 locate information required to identify relevant legislation, agreements, policies and
procedures in relation to industrial matters
 use effective communication techniques to support the resolution of workplace grievances
and conflicts
 provide accurate written and oral advice about industrial matters
 use strategies to monitor and gather feedback on the implementation of industrial relations
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 outline relevant industrial relations policies and procedures
 summarise grievance resolution policy and procedures
 describe relevant legislation, codes of practice and national standards
 describe the relevant state/territory and federal industrial relations systems
 identify sources of expert advice.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK411 Support employee and industrial relations procedures Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
workplace relations field of work and include access to:
 relevant workplace policies and procedures
Links
7e23c10

BSBWRK510 Manage employee relations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
BSBWRK510 Manage employee relations
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to manage employee and industrial
relations matters in an organisation. It involves developing and implementing employee and
industrial relations policies and plans and managing conflict resolution negotiations.
It applies to those who are authorised to oversee industrial relations and manage conflict and
grievances in an organisation. They will have a sound theoretical knowledge base in human
resources management and industrial relations as well as current knowledge of industrial
relations trends and legislation.

publication.
Unit Sector
Workforce Development – Workplace Relations



1. Develop employee and 1.1 Analyse strategic plans and operational plans to determine long
industrial relations term employee relations
policies and plans 1.2 Analyse existing employee relations performance in relation to
workforce objectives
1.3 Evaluate options in terms of cost-benefit, risk-analysis and
current legislative requirements
1.4 Work with the management team to develop industrial
relations policies and plans
1.5 Identify the skills and knowledge needed by management and
the workforce to effectively implement these strategies and
policies
2. Implement employee 2.1 Develop an implementation plan and a contingency plan for
relations policies and the employee relations policies and strategies
plans 2.2 Make arrangements for training and development for identified
needs to support the employee relations plan
2.3 Undertake associated employee relations activities to reach
agreement on changes required by the organisational policies or
implementation plan
2.4 Ensure procedures for addressing grievances and conflict are
properly documented
2.5 Communicate key issues about procedures for addressing
grievances and conflict to stakeholders
2.6 Review employee relations policies and plans to establish
whether they are meeting their intended outcomes
3. Manage negotiations to 3.1 Train individuals in conflict-management techniques and

resolve conflict procedures
3.2 Identify, and where possible alleviate or eliminate, sources of
conflict or grievance according to legal requirements
3.3 Check documentation and other information sources to clarify
issues in dispute
3.4 Obtain expert or specialist advice and/or refer to precedents, if
required
3.5 Determine desired negotiation outcomes, negotiation strategy


and negotiation timeframes
3.6 Advocate the organisation’s position in negotiation to obtain
agreement
3.7 Document, and if necessary certify, the agreed outcomes with
the relevant jurisdiction
3.8 Implement agreements
3.9 Take remedial action where groups or individuals fail to abide
by agreements

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 3.3  Interprets, critically analyses and applies appropriate
strategies to construct meaning from complex texts
Writing 1.4, 2.1, 2.4, 2.5, 3.7  Displays knowledge of required structure and layout,
employing broad vocabulary, grammatical structure
and conventions appropriate to purpose and audience
Oral 1,4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.6  Conveys information using language and non-verbal
communication features appropriate to the audience
 Employs listening and questioning techniques to clarify
and confirm understanding
Numeracy 1.2, 1.3  Extracts and evaluates the mathematical information
embedded in a range of tasks and texts
Navigate the 1.3, 1.4, 2.3, 2.6,  Modifies or develops organisational policies to achieve
world of work 3.2, 3.7 organisational goals and comply with legislative
requirements
 Keeps up to date on changes to legislation or
regulations relevant to own rights and responsibilities
and considers implications of these
Interact with 1.4, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2,  Collaborates with others to achieve joint outcomes,
others 3.4, 3.6, 3.9 playing an active role in facilitating effective group
 Actively builds networks that include key people with
expert skills and knowledge
 Uses a range of strategies to facilitate an acceptable
outcome for all parties where conflicts occur
3.5, 3.7, 3.8  Uses analytical techniques to identify issues and
generate possible solutions, seeking input from others
as required, before making decisions or implementing
solutions
 Draws on the diverse perspectives of others to gain
insights into current practices and opportunities for
change


BSBWRK510 BSBWRK510A Updated to meet Equivalent unit

Manage employee Manage employee Standards for
relations relations Training Packages
Minor edits to
clarify intent of
Performance Criteria
Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK510 Manage employee relations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK510 Manage employee

relations
Release Comments
 analyse organisational documentation to determine long-term employee relations
objectives and current employee relations performance
 collaborate with others to develop and review industrial relations policies and plans
 develop implementation and contingency plans for industrial relations policies
 identify the skills and knowledge needed to implement the plan and organise training and
development for self and staff
 document and communicate strategies and procedures for eliminating and dealing with
grievances and disputes
 train others in conflict-resolution techniques
 manage industrial relations conflicts, including advocating the organisation’s position
during negotiations and documenting, implementing and following up agreements.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 explain relevant industrial relations legislation or regulations
 summarise enterprise and workplace bargaining processes
 summarise key entities in the current Australian industrial relations system, including
courts and tribunals, trade unions and employer bodies
 identify sources of expert advice.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWRK510 Manage employee relations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
workplace relations field of work and include access to:
 awards and enterprise bargaining agreements
Links
7e23c10

BSBWRT301 Write simple documents Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to plan, draft and finalise a basic
document.
It applies to individuals who apply a broad range of competencies in various work contexts
and may exercise some discretion and judgement to produce a range of workplace
documentation.
of publication.
Unit Sector
Communication – Writing



1 Plan document 1.1 Determine audience and purpose for the document
1.2 Determine the format and structure
1.3 Establish key points for inclusion
1.4 Identify organisational requirements
1.5 Establish method of communication
1.6 Establish means of communication
2 Draft document 2.1 Develop draft document to communicate key points

2.2 Obtain and include any additional information that is required
3 Review document 3.1 Check draft for suitability of tone for audience, purpose, format
and communication style
3.2 Check draft for readability, grammar, spelling, and sentence and
paragraph construction
3.3 Check draft for sequencing and structure
3.4 Check draft to ensure it meets organisational requirements
3.5 Ensure draft is proofread, where appropriate, by supervisor or
colleague
4 Write final document 4.1 Make and proofread necessary changes

4.2 Ensure document is sent to intended recipient
4.3 File copy of document in accordance with organisational policies
and procedures

Foundation Skills
Criteria
Reading 1.1-1.3, 3.1-3.4, 4.1  Recognises and interprets a variety of text to determine
and confirm task requirements
 Proofreads documents checking for grammar, spelling,
structure, and suitability of style and format for
audience
Writing 2.1, 2.2, 3.1-3.5, 4.1  Produces and edits basic documents, according to
organisational requirements, for a given audience and
purpose
Oral 2.2, 3.5  Uses listening and questioning skills to seek additional
Communication information or confirmation of task completion
Navigate the 1.4, 3.4, 4.3  Understands and complies with organisational policies
world of work and procedures
Interact with 2.2, 3.5  Follows accepted communication practices and

others protocols when seeking information or feedback from
others
Get the work 1.1-1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 3.4,  Takes responsibility for planning, sequencing and
done 3.5, 4.1-4.3 prioritising tasks to achieve required outcomes
complete work tasks

BSBWRT301 Write BSBWRT301A Write Updated to meet Equivalent unit

simple documents simple documents Standards for
Training Packages

Links
7e23c10

Assessment Requirements for BSBWRT301 Write simple documents Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for BSBWRT301 Write simple

documents
Release Comments
Package Version 1.0
 plan, draft and finalise three different simple documents that accurately convey the
required basic information in a format suitable for the intended audience and in
accordance with organisational policies and procedures for document production.
once.
Knowledge Evidence
 identify the process for checking basic grammar, spelling and punctuation
 describe different communication methods
 describe how audience, purpose and method of communication influence the tone of a
document.
consistent performance of typical activities experienced in the communication – writing field
of work and include access to:
 office equipment and resources to assist in document production
 examples of documents to review.

Assessment Requirements for BSBWRT301 Write simple documents Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Links
7e23c10

CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to behaviours of concern Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to behaviours of concern
Release Comments
Release 1 This version was released in CHC Community Services Training

Package release 2.0 and meets the requirements of the 2012
Standards for Training Packages.
Minimal change to the elements and performance criteria. New
evidence requirements for assessment including volume and
frequency requirements. Significant changes to knowledge
evidence.
Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to respond effectively to behaviours of
concern of people. Skills are associated with handling difficult incidents rather than managing
ongoing behaviour difficulties.
The unit applies to workers in any context exposed to difficult and challenging behaviour.
The skills in this unit must be applied in accordance with Commonwealth and State/Territory
legislation, Australian/New Zealand standards and industry codes of practice.


Elements define the essential Performance criteria describe the performance needed to
outcomes demonstrate achievement of the element
1. Identify behaviour and plan 1.1 Identify behaviours of concern in line with work role
response and organisation policies and procedures
1.2 Identify appropriate response to potential instances of
behaviours of concern
1.3 Ensure planned responses to behaviours of concern
maximise the availability of other appropriate staff and
resources
1.4 Give priority to safety of self and others in responding
to behaviours of concern
2. Apply response 2.1 Ensure response to instances of behaviours of concern

reflect organisation policies and procedures
2.2 Seek assistance as required
2.3 Deal with behaviours of concern promptly, firmly and
diplomatically in accordance with organisation policy and
procedure
2.4 Use communication effectively to achieve the desired
outcomes in responding to behaviours of concern
2.5 Select appropriate strategies to suit particular
instances of behaviours of concern
3. Report and review incidents 3.1 Report incidents according to organisation policies
and procedures
3.2 Review incidents with appropriate staff and offer
suggestions appropriate to area of responsibility
3.3 Access and participate in available debriefing
mechanisms and associated support and/or development
activities
3.4 Seek advice and assistance from legitimate sources as
and when appropriate

Foundation Skills
The Foundation Skills describe those required skills (such as language, literacy, numeracy
and employment skills) that are essential to performance.
Foundation skills essential to performance are explicit in the performance criteria of this unit
of competency.

No equivalent unit.
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=5e0c25cc-3d9d-4b43-80d3-bd22
cc4f1e53

Assessment Requirements for CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to behaviours of concernDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to

behaviours of concern
Release Comments
Release 1 This version was released in CHC Community Services Training

Package release 2.0 and meets the requirements of the 2012
Standards for Training Packages.
Minimal change to the elements and performance criteria. New
evidence requirements for assessment including volume and
frequency requirements. Significant changes to knowledge
evidence.
The candidate must show evidence of the ability to complete tasks outlined in elements and
performance criteria of this unit, manage tasks and manage contingencies in the context of the
job role. There must be evidence that the candidate has:
 effectively dealt with at least 5 different behaviours of concern

Assessment Requirements for CHCCCS020 Respond effectively to behaviours of concernDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must be able to demonstrate essential knowledge required to effectively
complete tasks outlined in elements and performance criteria of this unit, manage tasks and
manage contingencies in the context of the work role. This includes knowledge of:
 different behaviours of concern:
 aggression
 confusion or other cognitive impairment
 intoxication
 intrusive behaviour
 manipulation
 noisiness
 self-destructive behaviour
 verbal offensiveness
 wandering
 strategies for dealing with behaviours of concern
 issues needing to be referred to an appropriate professional
 legal and ethical consideration relevant to recognising and responding to behaviours of
concern, including:
 duty of care
 human rights
 work health and safety
 organisation reporting processes
Skills must be demonstrated in the workplace or in a simulated environment that reflects
workplace conditions. The following conditions must be met for this unit:
 use of suitable facilities, equipment and resources including organisation policies and
procedures in relation to reporting behaviours of concern
 modelling of industry operating conditions and contingencies, including scenarios that
reflect different behaviours of concern
Assessors must satisfy the Standards for Registered Training Organisations (RTOs)
2015/AQTF mandatory competency requirements for assessors.
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=5e0c25cc-3d9d-4b43-80d3-bd22
cc4f1e53

CPCCCM2007B Use explosive power tools Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPCCCM2007B Use explosive power tools
Minor changes made to range statement, including addition of photovoltaic (solar) panels
Equivalent to CPCCCM2007A
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to apply safe and effective operation
of explosive power tools (EPT), used to fasten materials or fix fasteners to bases. It includes
both direct action and indirect action explosive powered fastening tools.

This unit of competency supports achievement of skills to safely and effectively use a range
of EPT used in the construction industry.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites

This unit contains employability skills.

essential outcomes of a demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised
unit of competency. text is used, further information is detailed in the required skills
and knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of
performance is to be consistent with the evidence guide.

1 Plan and prepare. 1.1 Work instructions, including plans, specifications,

quality requirements and operational details, are
obtained, confirmed and applied from relevant
information for planning and preparation.
1.2 Safety (OHS) requirements are followed in accordance

with safety plans and policies.
1.3 Signage and barricade requirements are identified and

implemented.
1.4 Plant, tools and equipment selected to carry out tasks

are consistent with job requirements, checked for
serviceability, and any faults are rectified or reported
prior to commencement.
1.5 Material quantity requirements are calculated in

accordance with plans and specifications.
1.6 Materials appropriate to work application are identified,

obtained, prepared, safely handled and located ready for
use.
1.7 Environmental requirements are identified for the

project in accordance with environmental plans and
statutory and regulatory authority obligations, and are
applied.
2 Set out fasteners. 2.1 Minimum distances for set out from edge of substrate
material are adhered to in accordance with legislation,
regulations and codes of practice.
2.2 Material is located and temporarily held or fixed into

designed position according to detailed drawings.
3 Use EPT. 3.1 EPT is checked for operation according to manufacturer

specifications and safety (OHS) requirements for use of
EPT.
3.2 Fastener is selected according to requirements of job.
3.3 Charge is selected to assessed requirements for material,

base and penetration.

3.4 Attachments and accessories are installed to EPT in

accordance with manufacturer specifications and safety
(OHS) requirements.
3.5 Fastener and charge in EPT are located to manufacturer

specifications.
3.6 EPT operation is carried out and fastener is fixed into

place in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations, legislation, regulations and codes of
practice.
3.7 Fastening penetration is checked and appropriate depth

into material is applied.
3.8 Power regulating device is adjusted for conditions.
3.9 Misfire procedures are carried out according to

manufacturer recommendations, legislation, regulations
and codes of practice.
3.10 Temporary holding and fixings are removed without

damage to material.
4 Secure and store 4.1 Charges are stored in designated container in accordance
equipment and with legislation, regulations and codes of practice and
charges. used charges are recorded.
4.2 Unused fasteners, the EPT and attachments are stored in

a carry case in line with manufacturer recommendations.
4.3 Logbook is checked and maintenance recorded

according to manufacturer recommendations.
5 Maintain EPT and 5.1 Safety features of tools are checked for serviceability in
kit. accordance with manufacturer operating manual.
5.2 Tools are cleaned and lubricated to manufacturer

recommendations.
5.3 Periodic maintenance service is carried out to

manufacturer specifications.
5.4 Diminished stocks of charges and fasteners are

replenished to designed effectiveness of EPT kit.

6 Clean up. 6.1 Work area is cleared and materials disposed of, reused
or recycled in accordance with legislation, regulations,
codes of practice and job specification.
6.2 Plant, tools and equipment are cleaned, checked,

maintained and stored in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations and standard work practices.


Required skills
Required skills for this unit are:

 communication skills to:
 determine requirements
 enable clear and direct communication, using questioning to identify and confirm
requirements, share information, listen and understand
 follow instructions
 read and interpret:
 documentation from a variety of sources
 drawings and specifications
 report faults
 use language and concepts appropriate to cultural differences
 use and interpret non-verbal communication, such as hand signals
 written skills to record maintenance in logbook
 identifying and accurately reporting to appropriate personnel any faults in tools,
equipment or materials
 numeracy skills to apply measurements and make calculations
 organisational skills, including the ability to plan and set out work
 teamwork skills to work with others to action tasks and relate to people from a range of
cultural and ethnic backgrounds and with varying physical and mental abilities
 technological skills to:
 use a range of mobile technology, such as two-way radio and mobile phones
 voice and hand signals to access and understand site-specific instructions.
Required knowledge
Required knowledge for this unit is:

 construction terminology
 EPT materials
 EPT charges and fasteners
 equipment safety manuals and instructions
 job safety analysis (JSA) and safe work method statements
 material safety data sheets (MSDS)
 materials storage and environmentally friendly waste management

 plans, specifications and drawings

 processes for the calculation of material requirements
 quality requirements
 relevant Acts, regulations and codes of practice
 security and storage procedures for equipment and charges
 types, characteristics, uses and limitations of plant, tools and equipment
 workplace and equipment safety requirements.
Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment This unit of competency could be assessed in the

workplace or a close simulation of the workplace
environment, provided that simulated or project-based
assessment techniques fully replicate construction
workplace conditions, materials, activities,
responsibilities and procedures.
Critical aspects for assessment A person who demonstrates competency in this unit
and evidence required to must be able to provide evidence of the ability to:
demonstrate competency in this  locate, interpret and apply relevant information,
unit standards and specifications
 comply with site safety plan and OHS legislation,
regulations and codes of practice applicable to
workplace operations
 comply with organisational policies and
procedures, including quality requirements
 safely and effectively use tools and equipment
 communicate and work effectively and safely with
others
 fix metal or timber to a steel, concrete or masonry
base on one project of each to job specifications,
including:
 completion of stripping and assembly of the tool
 completing log of serviceability
 maintaining and cleaning

 selecting charges and fasteners applicable to

base material and material being fixed
 misfire procedures
 using attachments
 complying with storage and security regulations
and OHS requirements for the working
environment
 selecting signage
 test fire.
Context of and specific resources This competency is to be assessed using standard and
for assessment authorised work practices, safety requirements and
environmental constraints.
Assessment of essential underpinning knowledge will
usually be conducted in an off-site context.
Assessment is to comply with relevant regulatory or
Australian standards' requirements.
Resource implications for assessment include:
 an induction procedure and requirement
 realistic tasks or simulated tasks covering the
mandatory task requirements
 relevant specifications and work instructions
 tools and equipment appropriate to applying safe
work practices
 support materials appropriate to activity
 workplace instructions relating to safe work
practices and addressing hazards and emergencies
 material safety data sheets
 research resources, including industry related
systems information.
Reasonable adjustments for people with disabilities
must be made to assessment processes where required.
This could include access to modified equipment and
other physical resources, and the provision of
appropriate assessment support.
Method of assessment Assessment methods must:

 satisfy the endorsed Assessment Guidelines of the
Construction, Plumbing and Services Training
Package
 include direct observation of tasks in real or
simulated work conditions, with questioning to

confirm the ability to consistently identify and

correctly interpret the essential underpinning
knowledge required for practical application
 reinforce the integration of employability skills
with workplace tasks and job roles
 confirm that competency is verified and able to be
transferred to other circumstances and
environments.
Validity and sufficiency of evidence requires that:
 competency will need to be demonstrated over a
period of time reflecting the scope of the role and
the practical requirements of the workplace
 where the assessment is part of a structured
learning experience the evidence collected must
relate to a number of performances assessed at
different points in time and separated by further
learning and practice, with a decision on
competency only taken at the point when the
assessor has complete confidence in the person's
demonstrated ability and applied knowledge
 all assessment that is part of a structured learning
experience must include a combination of direct,
indirect and supplementary evidence.
Assessment processes and techniques should as far as
is practical take into account the language, literacy and
numeracy capacity of the candidate in relation to the
competency being assessed.
Supplementary evidence of competency may be
obtained from relevant authenticated documentation
from third parties, such as existing supervisors, team
leaders or specialist training staff.
Range Statement
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different work
environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in
the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present
with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate,
accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Information includes:  diagrams or sketches

 instructions issued by authorised organisational or

external personnel
 manufacturer specifications and instructions where
specified
 memos
 MSDS
 organisation work specifications and requirements
 plans and specifications
 regulatory and legislative requirements pertaining
to using EPT
 relevant Australian standards
 safe work procedures related to using EPT
 signage
 verbal or written and graphical instructions
 work bulletins
 work schedules.
Planning and preparation include:  work site inspection

 equipment defect identification
 assessment of conditions and hazards
 determination of work requirements.
Safety (OHS) is to be in accordance  emergency procedures, including extinguishing

with legislation, regulations, codes fires, organisational first aid requirements and
of practice, organisational safety evacuation
policies and procedures, and project  handling of materials
safety plan and may include:  hazard control
 hazardous materials and substances
 safe operating procedures, including the conduct of
operational risk assessment and treatments
associated with:
 earth leakage boxes
 lighting
 photovoltaic (solar) panels
 power cables, including overhead service trays,
cables and conduits
 restricted access barriers
 surrounding structures
 traffic control
 trip hazards
 work site visitors and the public

 working at heights
 working in confined spaces
 working in proximity to others
 working with dangerous materials
 organisational first aid
 personal protective clothing and equipment
prescribed under legislation, regulations and
workplace policies and practices
 use of firefighting equipment
 use of tools and equipment
 workplace environment and safety.
Tools and equipment may include:  direct action EPT

 indirect action EPT
 clamps and levels.
Materials include:  timber

 metals
 patented fasteners.
Environmental requirements  clean-up management

include:  noise and dust
 vibration
 waste management.
Statutory and regulatory authorities  federal, state and local authorities administering
include: applicable Acts, regulations and codes of practice.
Minimum distance for set out of  regulated minimum distances

fasteners is to be in accordance with:  bases, including concrete, masonry or steel.
Use of EPT includes:  stripping and assembling tools

 completing log of serviceability
 maintaining and cleaning tools
 selecting charges and fasteners applicable to the
base material and material being fixed
 misfire procedures
 using attachments
 complying with storage and security regulations

and OHS requirements for the working

environment
 selecting signage
 test fire.
Attachments include:  channel, rebate and other manufacturer

attachments.
Fastener and charge include:  firing a test shot with misfire procedures,
complying with the regulated safety procedure for
misfire.
Unit Sector(s)
Functional area
Unit sector Construction
Custom Content Section

Not applicable.

CPCCCM2008B Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPCCCM2008B Erect and dismantle restricted height scaffolding
Photovoltaic (solar) panels added to range statement
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to erect and dismantle restricted
height scaffolding to provide work platforms for various occupational applications. It includes
placement of safety barriers and only involves modular scaffolding restricted to a height of 4
metres.

This unit of competency supports achievement of skills to handle, erect and dismantle a range
of restricted height scaffolding systems, which may include working with others and as a
member of a team.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites



1 Plan and prepare. 1.1 Work instructions, including plans, specifications,

obtained from relevant sources of information,
confirmed and applied for planning and preparation
purposes.
1.2 Workplace health and safety (WHS) requirements are

followed in accordance with safety plans and policies.
1.3 Signage and barricade requirements are identified and

implemented.
1.4 Plant, tools and equipment are selected to carry out

tasks consistent with job requirements, are checked for
serviceability, and any faults are rectified or reported
prior to commencement.
1.5 Scaffolding quantity requirements are calculated in

accordance with plans, specifications and quality
requirements.
1.6 Materials appropriate to the work application are

identified, obtained, prepared, safely handled and
located ready for use.

statutory and regulatory authority obligations, and are
applied.

2 Erect scaffolding. 2.1 Purpose for scaffolding is confirmed and associated

work tasks are identified.
2.2 Expected loading on scaffold and supporting structure is

determined using load tables.
2.3 Site access and egress routes are identified.
2.4 Scaffolding and components are selected and inspected

with damaged components labelled and rejected or
repaired.
2.5 Adequate footing is established in accordance with

Australian standard for scaffolding.
2.6 Scaffolding is erected in accordance with regulations,

planned hazard prevention and control measures,
acceptable safe work practices and manufacturer
requirements.
3 Inspect, repair and 3.1 Critical structural and safety areas of scaffolding are
alter scaffolding. inspected for damage, corrosion and wear.
3.2 Current use of scaffolding is checked for compliance

with type of scaffolding equipment.
3.3 Inspection log and handover are completed.
3.4 Scaffolding is reviewed to determine if changes or

modifications were scheduled as per original planning.
3.5 Alteration or repair is carried out where specified.
4 Dismantle 4.1 Scaffolding is dismantled using reverse procedure as for

scaffolding. erection.
or recycled in accordance with legislation, regulations,
codes of practice and job specification.
5.2 Plant, tools and equipment are cleaned, checked,

maintained and stored in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations and standard work practices.


Required skills

 report faults
 written skills to record maintenance in logbooks
Required knowledge

 general construction terminology

 relevant Acts, regulations and codes of practice

 scaffolding equipment
 scaffolding techniques
 shifting devices
Evidence Guide

 comply with site safety plan and OHS legislation,
regulations and codes of practice applicable to
 safely and effectively use tools, plant and
equipment
others
 complete planning, erection and dismantling of a
modular scaffolding system, in accordance with
JSA and safe work method statements and
regulations, including a minimum of:
 three bays (one with a return)
 one lift with ladder
 fall and edge protection.

work practices

Package
environments.


Range Statement

 engineers' design specifications and manufacturer
specifications and instructions, where specified
external personnel
 memos
 MSDS
 regulatory and legislative requirements pertaining
to erecting and dismantling restricted height

scaffolding
 safe work procedures related to erecting and
dismantling restricted height scaffolding
 signage
 work bulletins
 work schedules, plans and specifications.
Planning and preparation include:  work site inspection, equipment defect

identification, assessment of conditions and
hazards, and determination of work requirements
 erection of scaffolding to a maximum height of 4
metres, including placement, sequencing, squaring,
levelling and the reverse for dismantling
 establishment of footings, including review of JSAs
to determine bearing capacity of ground or working
surfaces
 alteration and repair, which may be required due to
storm damage, accidents, misuse and process
changes.
Workplace health and safety is to  emergency procedures, including extinguishing
be in accordance with legislation, fires, organisational first aid requirements and
regulations, codes of practice, evacuation
organisational safety policies and  handling of materials
procedures, and project safety plan  hazard control
and may include:  hazardous materials and substances
 safe operating procedures, including the conduct
of operational risk assessment and treatments
associated with:
 lighting
cables and conduits
 traffic control
 trip hazards


Tools and equipment include:  aluminium modular scaffolding equipment

 hammers
 ladders
 scaffolding planks
 shovels and spanners
 spirit levels
 steel box spanners
 tape measures.
Scaffolding type and quantity  types of restricted height scaffolding may include
requirements: systems scaffolding, A frame, H frame, tube and
coupler, and aluminium (and modular to a
maximum height of 4 metres).
Quality requirements include  Australian standards

relevant regulations, including:  internal company quality policy and standards
 manufacturer specifications, where specified
 workplace operations and procedures.
Environmental requirements  clean-up protection

Purpose for scaffolding includes:  work platforms for various occupational

applications.

Unit Sector(s)
Functional area

Not applicable.

CPCCCM2010B Work safely at heights Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Photovoltaic (solar) panels added to range statement
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to work safely on construction sites
where the work activity involves working above 1.5 metres from ground level and where fall
protection measures are required.

Construction work is undertaken on domestic and commercial work sites within new
construction, renovation or refurbishment, and maintenance.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites



1 Identify work area 1.1 Site of proposed work at heights is identified from
requirements. relevant information.
1.2 Method of accessing work area is identified.
1.3 Tasks to be completed are identified from work orders

and supervisor instructions.
1.4 Fall protection equipment is identified if required by site

job workplace health and safety (WHS) analysis and
statutory and regulatory requirements.
1.5 Approved methods of moving tools and equipment to

work area are identified to minimise potential of falling
objects, removal of scaffold components, inappropriate
carrying of materials on ladders, and excessive bending
or twisting in pass-up situations.
2 Access work area. 2.1 Fall protection equipment where required is correctly
fitted, adjusted and anchored.
2.2 Arrangements are made to appropriately install required

equipment taking account of all potential hazards.
2.3 Appropriate methods are used to access work area for

self, tools and equipment, and materials.
2.4 Tools and materials are placed to eliminate or at least

minimise the risk of items being knocked down.
3 Conduct work 3.1 Work is conducted following workplace approved

tasks. procedures.
3.2 Fall protection equipment is kept in place and adjusted

appropriately to cater for movement during work.
3.3 Scaffold components and fall barriers are kept in place

during work.
3.4 Egress from work area is completed following work site

supervisor approved methods for self, tools, materials
and environmental requirements.


Required skills

 use a range of mobile technology
Required knowledge

 types, characteristics, uses and limitation of plant, tools and equipment
Evidence Guide


 comply with site safety plan, OHS regulations and
state and territory legislation applicable to
equipment
others
 select and use appropriate height access and fall
protection equipment and work methods, including
inspecting fall protection equipment, scaffold and
fall barriers for faults
 apply knowledge of industry products to identify:
 manual handling risks
 types of lifting and support structures approved
for use
 modify work activities to cater for variations in
work site procedures, contexts and environment
and use appropriate behaviour for safe work at
heights
 use safe handling requirements, based on
information provided, for equipment, products and
materials.


work practices

Package
environments.


Range Statement
Work at heights includes:  assessment of conditions and hazards

 determination of work requirements
 identification of equipment defects
 inspection of work sites.

external personnel
 memos
 signage
 work bulletins
Workplace health and safety is to  emergency procedures, including extinguishing

be in accordance with state or fires, organisational first aid requirements and
territory legislation and regulations, evacuation

operational risk assessment and treatments

associated with:
 lighting
cables and conduits
 traffic control
 trip hazards
 relevant OHS legislation applying in the
jurisdiction where work is carried out, including:
 AS6001 - 1999 Working platforms for domestic
application
 AS1576 - Scaffolding
 AS/NZS4576 - 1995 Guidelines for scaffolding
Hazards include:  air temperature

 construction activity involving other workers and
contractors
 dust and vapours
 electrical equipment
 energy sources
 equipment and materials
 hazardous materials
 light
 manual handling

 moisture
 noise
 pholtovoltaic (solar) panels
 stationary and moving plant
 work at heights.
Tools and equipment include:  air compressors and hoses

 hand and power tools
 nail guns
 power leads
 scaffolding.
Materials include:  materials used on the construction work site.

 vibration
Unit Sector(s)
Functional area

Not applicable.

CPCCCM3003A Work safely around power sources, services and assets Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPCCCM3003A Work safely around power sources, services and

assets
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to
work with or operate plant in or around close proximity of
power sources, services and assets for the general safety of
personnel and equipment. It includes all occupational areas
that may require working near electricity.

Application of the unit This unit of competency supports achievement of skills
and knowledge to work safely around power sources when
undertaking construction tasks.
Not Applicable
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units
CPCCOHS2001A Apply OHS requirements,

policies and procedures in the





1. Plan and prepare. 1.1. Work instructions, including plans, specifications,
obtained, confirmed and applied from relevant
information for planning and preparation.
1.2. Safety (OHS) requirements are followed in
accordance with safety plans and policies.
1.3. Signage and barricade requirements are identified
and implemented.
1.4. Plant, tools and equipment are selected to carry out
tasks are consistent with job requirements, checked
for serviceability, and any faults are rectified or
reported prior to commencement.
1.5. Environmental requirements are identified for the
statutory and regulatory authority obligations, and
are applied.
2. Apply safe work 2.1. Relevant authorities are contacted to identify
practices. electrical sources and type.
2.2. Plant is positioned according to work method
statement and job safety analyses (JSAs).
2.3. Plant procedures are followed to comply with work
method statement and JSAs.
2.4. Work is conducted in or around the power source,
service or asset.
2.5. Personnel, plant and equipment are retracted from
powered area following safe work method statement
and JSAs.
3. Clean up. 3.1. Work area is cleared and materials disposed of,
reused or recycled in accordance with legislation,
regulations, codes of practice and job specification.
3.2. Plant, tools and equipment are cleaned, checked,
maintained and stored in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations and standard work
practices.
3.3. Work completion procedures are applied and
relevant personnel are notified that work is finished.

Required skills

 enable clear and direct communication, using questioning to identify and
confirm requirements, share information, listen and understand
 identify electrical source and type from relevant authorities
 report faults
 teamwork skills to work with others to action tasks and relate to people from a
range of cultural and ethnic backgrounds and with varying physical and mental
abilities
Required knowledge

 electrical safety on construction work sites
 first aid including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)
 JSA and safe work method statements
 site specific emergency procedures


 working with electrical power techniques

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
The evidence guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction
with the performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement and the
Assessment Guidelines for the Training Package.

environment, provided that simulated or
project-based assessment techniques fully
replicate construction workplace conditions,
materials, activities, responsibilities and
procedures.
Critical aspects for assessment A person who demonstrates competency in this

and evidence required to unit must be able to provide evidence of the ability
demonstrate competency in this to:
unit  locate, interpret and apply relevant
information, standards and specifications
 comply with site safety plan and OHS
legislation, regulations and codes of practice
applicable to workplace operations
equipment
 communicate and work effectively and safely
with others
 contact relevant authorities
 apply work method statements and JSAs to
oversee plant positioning and operation for
one project, including erection and/or
placement of barriers and safeguards.
Context of and specific resources This competency is to be assessed using standard
for assessment and authorised work practices, safety requirements
and environmental constraints.
Assessment of essential underpinning knowledge
will usually be conducted in an off-site context.
Assessment is to comply with relevant regulatory
or Australian standards' requirements.

EVIDENCE GUIDE
 tools and equipment appropriate to applying
safe work practices
practices and addressing hazards and
emergencies
Reasonable adjustments for people with
disabilities must be made to assessment processes
where required. This could include access to
modified equipment and other physical resources,
and the provision of appropriate assessment
support.

 satisfy the endorsed Assessment Guidelines of
the Construction, Plumbing and Services
Training Package
 reinforce the integration of employability
skills with workplace tasks and job roles
 confirm that competency is verified and able
to be transferred to other circumstances and
environments.
 competency will need to be demonstrated over
a period of time reflecting the scope of the role
and the practical requirements of the
workplace
learning experience the evidence collected
must relate to a number of performances
assessed at different points in time and
separated by further learning and practice,
with a decision on competency only taken at

EVIDENCE GUIDE
the point when the assessor has complete
confidence in the person's demonstrated ability
and applied knowledge
 all assessment that is part of a structured
learning experience must include a
combination of direct, indirect and
supplementary evidence.
Assessment processes and techniques should as
far as is practical take into account the language,
literacy and numeracy capacity of the candidate in
relation to the competency being assessed.
obtained from relevant authenticated
documentation from third parties, such as existing
supervisors, team leaders or specialist training
staff.
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
The range statement relates to the unit of competency as a whole. It allows for different
work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised
wording, if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating
conditions that may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work
situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and
regional contexts) may also be included.
Information includes:  verbal or written and graphical instructions

 diagrams or sketches
 instructions issued by authorised
organisational or external personnel
 manufacturer specifications and instructions
where specified
 memos
 MSDS
requirements
 regulatory and legislative requirements
pertaining to working safely around power

RANGE STATEMENT
 safe work procedures related to working safely
around power
 signage
 work bulletins
 work schedules.
Planning and preparation  work site inspection
include:  equipment defect identification
 assessment of conditions and hazards
 determination of work requirements.
Safety (OHS) is to be in  emergency procedures, including
accordance with legislation, extinguishing fires, organisational first aid
regulations, codes of practice, requirements and evacuation
 safe operating procedures, including the
conduct of operational risk assessment and
treatments associated with:
 lighting
 power cables, including overhead service
trays, cables and conduits
 traffic control
 trip hazards
Signage and barricade  barricades

RANGE STATEMENT
requirements include:  isolation
 other physical barriers
 site safety signage.
Plant includes:  back hoes
 booms
 cranes
 EWPs
 excavators
 scaffold.
Tools and equipment include:  those associated with the task at hand.
Environmental requirements  clean-up protection

 vibration
Statutory and regulatory  include federal, state and local authorities
authorities: administering applicable Acts, regulations and
codes of practice
 must include federal, state and local electrical
authorities.
Electrical sources include:  distribution towers
 generators
 poles
 sub-stations
 temporary services
 train and tram assets
 transmission towers
 underground and overhead wires
 underground conductors
 all other services, sources and assets.
Unit Sector(s)
Co-requisite units

Co-requisite units Nil
Functional area
Functional area

CPCCCO3054A Operate concrete agitator trucks Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPCCCO3054A Operate concrete agitator trucks
This version first released with CPC08 Construction, Plumbing and Services Training
Package Version 9.
 Changes to unit title, performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, range statement,
and methods of assessment
 Range of other minor editorial changes
Not equivalent to CPCCCO3034A Conduct concrete agitator truck operations
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to operate concrete agitator trucks in
support of construction projects.
The unit covers planning and preparing for work, conducting operational checks, safely and
effectively operating a concrete agitator truck and associated equipment for a range of
mandatory tasks, and conducting operator maintenance and work finalisation activities. The
unit may include working with others and as a member of a team.

This unit of competency supports the role of those who operate concrete agitator trucks used
to supply concrete for residential, commercial or civil construction sites.
Licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to concreting work in
different states and territories. Candidates are advised to consult with the relevant regulatory
authorities.
Pre-Requisites



Elements describe the Performance criteria describe the required performance
essential outcomes of a unit needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where
of competency. bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed
in the required skills and knowledge and/or the range
1 Plan and prepare. 1.1 Work instructions, work health and safety (WHS)
requirements and other information relevant to the
work are identified, confirmed and applied for planning
and preparation purposes.
1.2 Tools and equipment consistent with job requirements

are selected and checked for serviceability, and faults are
rectified and reported before work begins.
1.3 Materials appropriate to the work application are

obtained, prepared, safely handled and located ready for
use.

project according to environmental plans and regulatory
obligations.
2 Conduct machine 2.1 Pre-start, start-up, park and shut-down procedures,

pre-operational including emergency shut-down procedures, are carried
checks. out according to manufacturer and site-specific
requirements.
2.2 Vehicle controls and functions are checked for

serviceability and faults are rectified and reported.
2.3 Agitator controls and functions are checked for

serviceability, and faults are rectified and reported.

3 Operate the 3.1 Site hazards associated with truck operations are
agitator truck. identified and safe operating techniques are used to
minimise risk.
3.2 Engine power is managed to ensure efficiency of

concrete agitator truck movements and to minimise
damage to the engine and gears.
3.3 Engine power is coordinated with gear selection

ensuring smooth transition and operation within torque
range.
3.4 Truck is operated to work instructions according to

company operating procedures.
3.5 Road and traffic conditions are monitored taking into

account road standards, traffic flow, distance and load,
and ensuring no injury to people or damage to property,
equipment, loads and facilities.
3.6 Truck is brought to a halt smoothly, using the engine

retarder, gears and brakes and minimising the wear and
tear on vehicle.
4 Load, transport 4.1 Concrete agitator truck is positioned at load and

and discharge discharge points with a minimum of manoeuvres.
concrete.
4.2 Concrete agitator truck is loaded to within authorised
carrying capacity of concrete mixes to suit the site and
task conditions.
4.3 Concrete agitator truck is moved from loading to

discharge point safely and smoothly avoiding surge and
sway.
4.4 Concrete is discharged according to task specifications.
4.5 Discharge systems, including chutes and adaptors, are

monitored and maintained throughout the operations.
5 Carry out driver 5.1 Concrete agitator truck is safely parked, prepared for
maintenance. maintenance and shut down as per manufacturer manual
and organisational requirements.
5.2 Inspection and fault finding are conducted according to

manufacturer specifications and recorded according to

organisational procedures.
5.3 Defective parts are removed and replaced safely and

effectively according to manufacturer instructions.
5.4 Regular programmed maintenance tasks are carried out

according to manufacturer and organisational
requirements.
or recycled according to project environmental
management plan.
6.2 Vehicle, bowl, tools and equipment are cleaned,

checked, maintained and stored according to
practices.


Required skills
 learning skills to:
 evaluate own actions and make judgments about performance and necessary
improvements
 respond to change, such as differences in work site, and environmental and quality
requirements
 numeracy skills to calculate and confirm correct quantities of materials for work tasks
 oral communication skills to:
requirements, and share information
 report work site hazards to appropriate personnel, including faults in tools, equipment
or materials
 reading skills to:
 interpret documentation, including drawings and specifications
 understand written instructions, procedures and signage
 interpret manufacturer instructions for safely handling tools and equipment
 writing skills to complete pre-operational checklists and equipment fault forms
Required knowledge
 characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations of concrete agitator truck systems:
 operational, maintenance and basic diagnostic procedures
 safe operating techniques in all terrain
 construction activity sequences relating to concreting operations
 general construction terminology
 types, location and usage of relevant safety information:
 job safety analyses (JSA) and safe work method statements (SWMS)
 safety data sheets (SDS)
 safety manuals and instructions for plant, tools and equipment
 signage
 environmental and work site safety plans
 quality requirements relating to the operation of a concrete agitator truck
 requirements for safe handling of materials
 site and equipment safety requirements, including site isolation and traffic control

responsibilities and authorities

 state or territory regulatory requirements relating to concrete agitator truck operations

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment This unit of competency could be assessed by observation in the

workplace or a close simulation of the workplace environment,
provided that simulated or project-based assessment techniques
fully replicate construction workplace conditions, materials,
activities, responsibilities and procedures.
Critical aspects for A person should demonstrate the ability to:

assessment and evidence  conduct concrete agitator truck operations, over not less than
required to demonstrate three shifts and two different sites, including the safe and
competency in this unit effective:
 positioning of the vehicle at the load point
 loading and transporting of concrete
 discharging of concrete at work site to specification
 discharging directly to site
 discharging to wheelbarrow and hopper
 applying emergency procedures
 conduct authorised operator maintenance
 locate, interpret and apply relevant information, standards and
specifications relating to concrete agitator truck operations
 comply with site safety plans and procedures
 comply with organisational policies and procedures, relating
to concrete agitator truck operations, including quality
requirements
 communicate and work effectively and safely with others
during each stage of the concrete agitator truck operation.
Context of and specific Assessment of this unit:
resources for  must be in the context of the work environment
assessment
 may be conducted in an off-site context, provided it is realistic
and sufficiently rigorous to cover all aspects of workplace
performance, including task skills, task management skills,
contingency management skills and job role environment
skills
 must meet relevant compliance requirements.
 an induction procedure
 realistic tasks or simulated tasks covering the mandatory task
requirements

 tools and equipment appropriate to applying safe work

practices
 workplace instructions relating to safe work practices and
addressing hazards and emergencies
 safety data sheets.
Method of assessment Assessment for this unit must verify the practical application of
the required skills and knowledge, using a combination of the
following methods:
 direct observation of tasks in real or simulated work
conditions
 questioning to confirm the ability to consistently identify and
correctly interpret the essential underpinning knowledge
required for practical application
 review of relevant authenticated documentation from third
parties, such as existing supervisors, team leaders or specialist
training staff.
Guidance information This unit could be assessed on its own or in combination with
for assessment other units relevant to the job function.
Reasonable adjustments for people with disabilities must be made
to assessment processes where required. This could include access
to modified equipment and other physical resources, and the
provision of appropriate assessment support.
Assessment processes and techniques should, as far as is
practical, take into account the language, literacy and numeracy
capacity of the candidate in relation to the competency being
assessed.
Range Statement
Work health and safety  assistance of others or the use of manual or mechanical lifting
requirements must devices with handling activities where size, weight or other
comply with state and issues, such as disability, are a factor
territory legislation and  emergency procedures, including extinguishing fires,
regulations and project organisational first aid requirements, and evacuation
safety plan, and may procedures

include:  hazard control

 hazardous materials and substances
 hazards and risks, including uneven or unstable terrain, trees,
fires, overhead services, bridges, buildings, excavations,
traffic, embankments, structures and hazardous materials
 personal protective equipment (PPE) prescribed under
legislation, regulations and workplace policies and practices
operational risk assessment and treatments associated with:
 lighting
 power cables, including overhead service trays, cables and
conduits
 signage and restricted access barriers
 traffic control
 trip hazards
 working outdoors in warm climates
 safe parking practices, including ensuring access ways are
clear; and that equipment and machinery are clear of
overhangs and refuelling sites, a safe distance from
excavations, and secured from unauthorised access or
movement
 workplace environmental requirements and safety.
Information may  instructions issued by authorised organisational and external
include: personnel
 memos
 regulatory and legislative requirements relating to operation
of concrete agitator trucks on construction sites
 safe work procedures relating to operation of concrete agitator
trucks on construction sites
 safety data sheets
 signage
 verbal, written and diagrammatic instructions, including
manufacturer specifications and instructions where specified
 work bulletins


Planning and  assessing conditions and hazards
preparation must  determining work requirements and safety plans and
include: procedures
 identifying and rectifying equipment defects
 inspecting work sites.
Tools and equipment  hand tools and maintenance equipment associated with the
must include: particular concrete agitator truck.
Environmental  clean-up management

requirements may  dust and noise control
include:  stormwater management
 vibration management
Functions must include:  brakes
 manoeuverability
 steering.
Agitator controls:  relate to speed, revolutions, forward and return
 may be air, mechanical or electrically actuated.
Discharge points:  must include:
 directly to site
 into a wheelbarrow and hopper
 may include into a kibble.
Concrete mixes:  may be relatively dry or increasingly wet
 will include block-fill, pool mix, topping, slab, footing and
kerb and guttering.
Maintenance:  must include:
 authorised servicing
 cleaning
 monitoring, recording and reporting faults
 may include:
 conducting authorised minor replacements
 providing assistance to maintenance personnel during
maintenance and repair activities.
Unit Sector(s)
Concreting


Not applicable.

CPCCLDG3001A Licence to perform dogging Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit specifies the outcomes required to perform
slinging techniques, including the selection and inspection
of lifting gear and/or the directing of the crane operator in
the movement of the load when the load is out of view of
the crane/ operator for licensing purposes.

Application of the unit This unit covers the scope of work to demonstrate
competency in the application of slinging techniques,
selection and inspection of lifting gear and/or the directing
of the crane/ operator in the movement of the load.
This unit is based upon the National Standard for
Licensing Persons Performing High Risk Work.
This unit in its current form meets state and territory
licensing requirements. Any alteration will result in a unit
which is not acceptable to regulators for the purpose of
licensing.
Refer to Unit Descriptor
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units Nil





1. Plan job. 1.1. Site information is obtained and related to the task.
1.2. Hazard s and potential hazards associated with the
slinging and directing of loads are identified.
1.3. Hazard control measures consistent with
appropriate standards are identified to ensure the
safety of personnel and equipment.
1.4. The weight, dimensions and centre of gravity of the
load are identified and assessed.
1.5. Suitable lifting/slinging points on the load are
identified.
1.6. Appropriate lifting equipment needs are assessed.
1.7. Appropriate communication methods are assessed
with crane/ operators and other appropriate
personnel.
1.8. Manufacturer's specifications/information is obtained
for special loads where necessary.
2. Select and inspect 2.1. Lifting equipment appropriate to the task is selected.
equipment. 2.2. Lifting equipment is inspected for serviceability.
2.3. Damaged or excessively worn lifting equipment is
identified, labelled and rejected.
2.4. Appropriate communication methods for the
crane/operator and appropriate personnel are
selected.
2.5. Appropriate communication equipment is selected
and its serviceability is checked.
2.6. Appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) is
selected and checked.
3. Prepare site and 3.1. Hazard prevention/control measures are applied
equipment. consistent with appropriate standards to ensure the
safety of personnel and equipment.
3.2. Appropriate slinging method is selected.
3.3. Lifting equipment is prepared and assembled where
appropriate.
3.4. Load destination is prepared.
4. Perform task. 4.1. Lifting equipment is attached and secured to the
lifting hook using appropriate techniques.
4.2. Lifting hook is positioned over the load centre of
gravity.
4.3. Lifting equipment is attached and secured to the load


in an appropriate manner.
4.4. Tag line is attached and secured where appropriate.
4.5. Test lift is conducted to ensure security of load.
4.6. Load is moved maintaining stability and control at
all times.
4.7. Appropriate communication methods and
communication signals are applied to safely
coordinate the load movement both within sight and
out-of-sight of crane operator.
4.8. The load is landed to ensure that it is stable and
secure from movement.
4.9. Lifting equipment is removed or disconnected from
load and prepared for next task or storage.
5. Shut down job and 5.1. Unserviceable lifting equipment inspected and
clean up. rejected.
5.2. Defective equipment is isolated and tagged.
5.3. Lifting equipment is stored in accordance with
procedures and appropriate standards.
5.4. Hazard prevention/control measures are removed
where appropriate.
5.5. Excess materials from the work area are removed
(where applicable).
5.6. Defects are reported and recorded according to
procedures and appropriate action is taken.

Required skills

 communication techniques in the workplace including whistles, hand signals and
use of fixed channel two-way radios
 communication skills at a level sufficient to communicate with other site personnel
 calculate rated capacity of lifting equipment
 apply different methods for making temporary connections to loads using fibre and
synthetic ropes


 ability to interpret rated capacity and working load limit tags
 hazard identification and control
 slinging techniques
 selection and inspection of lifting equipment
 directing crane operators in the moving of loads in a safe manner, using a slewing
crane
 inspection and care of a wide range of lifting equipment to appropriate Australian
Standards and/or manufacturer's specifications.
Required knowledge

 appropriate mathematical procedures for estimation and measurement of loads
 basic knowledge of types of cranes and their functions
 Commonwealth, state or territory OHS legislation, standards and codes of practice
relevant to the full range of techniques for undertaking dogging activities
 load stability and safety factors in line with manufacturer's specifications
 types of lifting equipment and slinging techniques for use, and their limitations and
performance in a wide range of conditions (including but not limited to slings,
beams, accessories, clamps, work-boxes, bins and pallets)
 understanding of the hierarchy of control.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Overview of assessment Successful assessment of this unit meets the

competency requirement of the National Standard
for licensing Persons Performing High Risk Work.
State/Territory OHS regulators have mandated the
use of Assessment Instruments and Instructions for
Assessment of this unit which have been endorsed
by the national body responsible for OHS matters.

unit  comply with Commonwealth, state or territory
OHS legislation, standards relevant to safe
dogging and crane operations.
 communicate and work safely with others in
the work area.
 apply Hazard prevention and control measures
consistent with appropriate standards.
 apply to move loads in conjunction with cranes
including, the reading of tags, slinging,
loading, directing and landing loads with a
slewing mobile crane with a telescopic boom
and a winch, in and out of sight of the crane/
operator, moving four loads of varying shapes,
sizes and weights.
 use fibre and/or synthetic rope as tag lines, and
connecting to loads using clove hitch, rolling
hitch, bowline and single sheetbend.
 conduct pre and post operational checks of the
lifting equipment.
Context of and specific  Assessment of the safe and effective
resources for assessment application of knowledge and skill to
workplace tasks (performance) must be
undertaken using the national OHS endorsed
Assessment Instrument
 Assessment of performance must be
undertaken either in the workplace or in a
realistically simulated workplace setting

EVIDENCE GUIDE
 Assessors must ensure that the assessment in
the workplace is organised through a
workplace supervisor to ensure that all the
required equipment and materials and a
suitable working area is made available to suit
the assessment and the workplace
 Assessment must occur under standard and
authorised work practices, safety requirements
and environmental constraints
 Assessment is to comply with the requirements
of any relevant Standards or operating
procedures for dogging activities
 Applicants must have access to:
 personal protective equipment (PPE) for the
purpose of the performance assessment.
 four different loads as prescribed in the
endorsed assessment instrument
 lifting and associated equipment
 suitable slewing crane
 communication equipment (eg. fixed
channel, two-way radios) as applicable.
Method of assessment Assessment must be conducted using the national
OHS endorsed Assessment Instrument. This
Instrument provides instruction on the application
of the assessment.
Assessment may be in conjunction with the
assessment of other units of competency.
The use of 'simulators' in the assessment of this
unit of competency is not acceptable.
Assessment methods must confirm consistency and
accuracy of performance together with application
of underpinning knowledge.
Assessment must confirm a reasonable inference
that competency is not only able to be satisfied
under the particular circumstance, but is able to be
transferred to other circumstances.
Guidance information for Further information about endorsed Assessment

assessment Instruments may be obtained from state/territory
OHS regulators.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Site informationmay include but  local conditions such as access and egress
not be limited to  work method statements.
Hazards may include but not  ground stability (eg. ground condition,
limited to: recently filled trenches, slopes)
 overhead hazards (e.g. power lines, service
pipes, trees, buildings, etc)
 insufficient lighting
 traffic (e.g. pedestrians, vehicles, plant)
 weather (e.g. wind, lightning, storms)
 other specific hazards (e.g. trip hazards,
heights, radio interference, etc).
Hazard prevention/control The systematic process of eliminating or reducing
measures the risk to personnel and property through the
application of controls.
It includes the application of the hierarchy of
controls, including:
1. elimination.
2. substitution.
3. isolation.
4. engineered control measures.
5. safe work practices.
6. personal protective equipment.
Appropriate standard s may  codes of practice

include:  legislation
 Australian Standards
 manufacturer's specifications
 industry standards.
Lifting Equipment may include  fibre ropes
but not limited to:  wire ropes
 chain

RANGE STATEMENT
 wire and synthetic slings
 shackles
 eyebolts
 beam clamps
 plate clamps
 spreader beams
 lifting beams
 pallet forks and cages
 concrete kibbles
 personnel boxes.
Communication Methods may  written instructions
include but are not limited to:  signage,
 hand signals
 listening
 questioning to confirm understanding
 appropriate worksite protocol.
Cranes may include but not limited  tower cranes (including self erecting)
to:  portal boom cranes
 vehicle loading cranes
 slewing mobile cranes
 non-slewing cranes
 derrick cranes.
Appropriate personnel may  supervisors
include but are not limited to:  colleagues
 managers who are authorised to take
responsibility for the workplace or operations.
Communication Equipment may  fixed channel two-way radios
include but not limited to:  whistles
 bells.
Personal protective equipment  hard hat
(PPE) may include but not limited  safety boots
to:  gloves
 high visibility clothing
 reflective vest
 relevant breathing, hearing, sight, skin and
sun protection.
Load destination may include but  ground
not limited to:  loading platforms
 suspended floors
 vehicles.

RANGE STATEMENT
Communication signals may  stop - hand

include but not limited to:  stop - whistle
 hoist up - hand
 hoist up - whistle
 hoist down - hand
 hoist down - whistle
 luff boom down - hand
 luff boom down - whistle
 luff boom up - hand
 luff boom up - whistle
 telescope out - hand
 telescope out - whistle
 telescope in - hand
 telescope in - whistle
 slew left - hand
 slew left - whistle
 slew right - hand
 slew right - whistle.
Defective Equipment may include  excessive wear
but not limited to:  damage
 stretched
 broken wires
 cut/damaged fibres.
Unit Sector(s)
Co-requisite units

Functional area
Functional area

CPCCLRG3001A Licence to perform rigging basic level Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPCCLRG3001A Licence to perform rigging basic level
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit specifies the outcomes required to perform basic
rigging work associated with movement of plant and
equipment, steel erections, hoists (including mast climbing
hoists), placement of pre-cast concrete, safety nets and
static lines, perimeter safety screens and shutters; and
cantilever crane loading platforms for licensing purposes.

Application of the unit This unit requires the applicant to be able plan the work,
select and inspect equipment, set up task, erect structures
and plant and dismantle structures and plant.
licensing.
This unit has a pre-requisite requirement. This requirement
may be met by either the successful completion of the unit
CPCCLDG3001A Licence to perform dogging or holding a
valid licence for dogging.

Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units




1. Plan job. 1.1. Task to be undertaken is assessed.
1.2. Potential workplace hazards are identified.
1.3. Hazard control measures are identified consistent
with appropriate standards to ensure the safety of
personnel and equipment.
1.4. Site information is obtained.
1.5. All forces and loads associated with erecting and
dismantling structures and associated plant are
considered in consultation with appropriate
personnel.
1.6. Rigging equipment and associated equipment are
identified in consultation with appropriate personnel
according to procedures and site information.
1.7. Safety equipment is identified.
1.8. Appropriate communication methods are identified
with appropriate personnel.
2. Select and inspect 2.1. Rigging equipment and associated equipment are
equipment. selected and inspected according to procedures and
the appropriate standard.
2.2. Safety equipment is selected and inspected
according to procedures.
2.3. All defective rigging equipment, associated
equipment and safety equipment is isolated, reported
and recorded according to procedures.
2.4. Communication equipment is selected and
inspected for serviceability (where applicable.
3. Set up task. 3.1. Appropriate hazard prevention/control measures
are applied to the work area according to procedures.
3.2. Ground suitability is inspected and checked (where
appropriate).
3.3. Site information is reviewed, interpreted and
communicated to appropriate personnel and
appropriate personnel.
determined in consultation with appropriate
personnel.
3.5. Safety equipment is fitted and worn correctly (where
appropriate).
3.6. Rigging equipment and associated plant are


positioned for work application and stability
3.7. Methods of applying temporary connections using
fibre rope are applied according to procedures and
4. Erect structures and 4.1. Structures and associated plant are erected according
plant. to procedures and site information.
4.2. Stability of structures and associated plant is
maintained during erection according to procedures.
4.3. Work is conducted safely at heights including safe
and effective use of safety equipment.
communication equipment, are used to co-ordinate
the tasks.
4.5. Associated plant and rigging equipment is used
according to procedures and the appropriate
standard.
4.6. Temporary guys, ties, propping and shoring,
including flexible steel wire rope, and tubing, are
connected where required.
4.7. Associated equipment is used in a safe and
appropriate manner.
4.8. The completed task is inspected according to the
appropriate standard.
4.9. Excess materials are removed from the work area
(where applicable).
5. Dismantle structures 5.1. Structures and associated plant are dismantled
and plant. according to procedures and the appropriate
standard.
maintained during dismantling according to
procedures.
5.4. Rigging equipment, associated equipment, safety
equipment and associated plant are inspected for
damage and defects.
equipment, associated plant and safety equipment are
isolated reported and recorded according to
procedures.


stored. according to procedures and the appropriate
standard.
(where appropriate).

Required skills

 ability to calculate Safe Working Load (SWL) and Working Load Limit (WLL)
 ability to erect and dismantle, level, plumb and stabilise associated plant and
structures
 ability to work safely at heights including the correct application of safety
equipment.
 accurate interpretation of basic structural charts and structural plans (site
information)
 applying methods for making temporary connections of ropes using fibre and
synthetic types
 apply methods of splicing and whipping fibre and synthetic ropes
 correct application and use of all rigging and associated equipment
 risk assessment and hazard control strategies
 interpersonal and communication skills at a level sufficient to site/workplace
requirements. This includes the relevant communication methods and equipment.
 verify problems and equipment faults and demonstrate appropriate response.
Required knowledge

 ability to interpret manufacturer's specifications for all plant and equipment use in
rigging operations
 knowledge of principles relating to all plant, equipment and structural stability
 knowledge of the types and functions of rigging, safety and associated equipment
including an understanding of their limitations.
 organisational and workplace standards, requirements, policies and procedures for
rigging


 understanding of the hierarchy of hazard identification and control
 relevant Commonwealth, state or territory and local government OHS legislation,
standards and codes of practice for undertaking rigging activities
 understanding of inspection and maintenance requirements of a wide range of
appropriate plant and equipment in line with Australian Standards or
manufacturer's specifications
 estimation of ground bearing pressures of the full range of soil types and associated
ground conditions for setting up plant and equipment.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

Assessment endorsed by the national body
responsible for OHS matters for the assessment of
this unit.

unit  comply with OHS licensing legislation.
 effectively communicate and work safely with
others in the work area.
 effectively conduct risk assessment and
management procedures.
 effectively complete the following tasks:-
 inspection of all plant and equipment, and
 installation of a fall arrest system (Static
line), and
 use of a safety harness / fall arrest system,
and
 installation of crane loading platforms and
 installation of a safety net, and
 installation of a shutter and safety screen,
and
 demonstrated ability to work safely at
heights, and
 erection of structural steel, and
 erection of precast panel, and
 set up and operation of a winch for load
movement, and
 installation of a materials hoist, or
 installation of a mast climber.
 effectively demonstrate the following knots,

EVIDENCE GUIDE
bends and hitches:-
 Sheet bend,
 Becket hitch,
 Running bowline,
 Double bowline.
 effectively demonstrate the following splices
and whippings:-
 Eye splice,
 Back splice,
 Short splice,
 Sail makers whipping,
 Common whipping,
 West countryman's
Context of and specific Assessment of the safe and effective application of
resources for assessment knowledge and skill to workplace tasks
(performance) must be undertaken using the
National OHS endorsed Assessment Instrument.
Assessment of performance must be undertaken
either in the workplace or in a realistically
simulated workplace setting.
Assessors must ensure that the assessment in the
workplace is organised to ensure that all the
required equipment and materials and a suitable
working area is made available to suit the
assessment and the workplace.
Assessment must occur under standard and
authorised work practices, safety requirements and
Assessment is to comply with the requirements of
any relevant Standards or operating procedures for
basic rigging.
Applicants must have access to:
purpose of the Performance Assessment.
 appropriate safety equipment in safe condition
 appropriate rigging equipment, associated
equipment associated plant in safe condition as
described in the endorsed assessment
instrument
 communication equipment (e.g. two-way

EVIDENCE GUIDE
radios) where applicable
 appropriate materials as required for safe
erection of structures
 appropriate materials for conducting fibre rope
slicing, whipping, knots, bends and hitches.
Method of assessment Assessment must be conducted using the national
OHS endorsed Assessment Instruments. These
Instruments provide advice on their application.

OHS regulators.
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Hazards may include but are not  ground stability (e.g. ground condition,
pipes) (NB: minimum clearance distance from
powerlines or electrical equipment as
determined by relevant state authority or

RANGE STATEMENT
electrical supply authority.)
 traffic (e.g. pedestrians, vehicles, other plant)
 environmental conditions (e.g. wind,
lightning, storms)
 other specific hazards (e.g. dangerous
materials).
Hazard control measures: Refers to the systematic process of eliminating or
reducing the risk to personnel and property
through the application of controls.
control, the six-step preference of control
measures to manage and control risk:
 elimination
 substitution
 isolation
 engineering control measures
 using safe work practices
 personal protective equipment.
Appropriate standards may  codes of practice
include:  legislation
 industry standards (where applicable).
Site Information may include, but  local conditions such as access and egress,
not limited to:  work method statements,
 site specific job safety analyses and other site
specific documentation as required.
 task plans / Schedules and structural plans.
Forces and Loads may include,  dead loads
but not limited to:  live loads
 static load
 dynamic loads
 wind loads.
Structures may include but are not  structural steel
limited to:  precast panels.
Associated plant may include but  static lines

not limited to:  safety nets
 hoists

RANGE STATEMENT
 mast climbers
 loading platforms.
Appropriate personnel may  engineers
include:  supervisors
 colleagues
Rigging Equipment may include  scaffolds
but is not limited to:  elevated work platforms
 personnel box
 cantilevered crane loading platforms
 mast climbers.
 safety screens and shutters
 cranes including but not limited to:
 mobile slewing cranes
 tower cranes
 self-erecting tower cranes
 portal boom cranes
 derrick cranes
 bridge and gantry cranes.
Associated equipment may include  all types of power and manually operated
but is not limited to: lifting gear
 fibre ropes
 flexible steel wire rope (FSWR)
 chains
 wire and synthetic slings
 shackles
 terminations
 wedge sockets
 eye bolts
 beam clamps
 plate clamps
 rope grips
 turnbuckles
 rigging screws
 chain blocks
 lever blocks
 lever-action winches

RANGE STATEMENT
 sheaves
 spreader bars
 lifting beams
 jacks
 levers
 skates
 wedges
 rollers
 girder trolley
Procedures may include but is not  manufacturer's guidelines (instructions,
limited to: specifications or checklists)
 industry operating procedures, relevant codes
of practice
 workplace procedures (work instructions,
operating procedures, checklists).
Safety Equipment may include but  safety harness
not limited to:  energy absorber
 lanyard
 inertia reel
 static safety lines
 safety nets.
Communication Methods may  verbal and non-verbal language
include but is not limited to:  written instructions
 signage
 hand signals
 listening,
 questioning to confirm understanding, and
appropriate worksite protocol.
NB: Mobile phones are not to be used for
signalling purposes during the rigging process.
Communication equipment may  fixed channel two-way radios

include but is not limited to:
Hazard prevention/control  safety tags on electrical switches/isolators

measures may include but is not  powerlines are insulated
limited to:  safety observer used inside exclusion zone
 power disconnected
 traffic barricades and control
 pedestrian barricades
 trench covers

RANGE STATEMENT
 movement of obstructions
 personal protective equipment
 adequate illumination
 safety shutters and screens.
Ground suitability may include but  rough uneven ground
is not limited to:  backfilled ground
 soft soils
 hard compacted soil
 rock
 bitumen
 concrete
 suspended concrete floors
 building roofs
 landings
 ground bearing pressure.
Appropriate personnel may  other riggers
include but not limited to  doggers
 crane operators.
Temporary connections may  knots
include but not limited to:  bends
 hitches
 spicing
 whipping.
Flexible Steel Wire Rope (FSWR)  identification, uses and connections.
includes: May include termination for:
 static lines,
 guys,
 purchase systems,
 lashing,
 cranes,
 hoist and winch ropes.
Unit Sector(s)

Co-requisite units
Functional area
Functional area

CPCCLRG3002A Licence to perform rigging intermediate level Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPCCLRG3002A Licence to perform rigging intermediate level
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit specifies the outcomes required to perform
rigging work at the intermediate level, which includes all
the outcomes for rigging work at the basic level, and also
includes rigging of cranes, rigging of conveyors, rigging of
dredges and excavators, rigging associated with tilt slabs,
rigging associated with demolition work, and dual lifts for
licensing purposes.

Application of the unit This unit requires the applicant to be able plan the work,
select and inspect equipment, set up task, erect structures
and plant and dismantle structures and plant.
licensing.
This unit has a pre-requisite requirement. This requirement
may be met by either the successful completion of the unit
CPCCLRG3001A Licence to perform rigging basic level or
holding a valid licence for basic rigging.

Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units
CPCCLRG3001A Licence to perform rigging

basic level




1. Plan job. 1.1. Task to be undertaken is assessed
1.2. Potential workplace hazards are identified
1.3. Hazard control measures are identified consistent
with appropriate standards to ensure the safety of
personnel and equipment
1.4. Site information is obtained
considered in consultation with appropriate
personnel.
identified in consultation with appropriate personnel
according to procedures and site information.
1.7. Safety equipment is identified.
1.8. Appropriate communication methods are identified
with appropriate personnel.
2. Select and inspect 2.1. Rigging equipment and associated equipment are
equipment. selected and inspected according to procedures and
2.2. Safety equipment is selected and inspected
equipment and safety equipment is isolated, reported
and recorded according to procedures.
2.4. Communication equipment is selected and
inspected for serviceability (where applicable)
3. Set up tasks. 3.1. Appropriate hazard prevention/control measures
are applied to the work area according to procedures.
3.2. Ground suitability is inspected and checked (where
appropriate).
3.3. Site information is reviewed, interpreted and
communicated to appropriate personnel and
appropriate personnel.
determined in consultation with appropriate
personnel.
3.5. Safety equipment is fitted and worn correctly (where
appropriate).
3.6. Rigging equipment and associated plant are


positioned for work application and stability
4. Erect structures and 4.1. Structures and associated plant is erected according
plant. to procedures and site information.
maintained during erection according to procedures.
communication equipment, are used to co-ordinate
the tasks.
4.5. Temporary guys, ties, propping and shoring,
including flexible steel wire rope, and tubing, are
connected where required.
4.6. Associated plant and rigging equipment is used
according to procedures and the appropriate
standard.
4.7. Associated equipment is used in a safe and
appropriate manner.
4.8. The completed task is inspected according to the
appropriate standard.
4.9. Excess materials are removed from the work area
(where applicable)
5. Dismantle structures 5.1. Structures and associated plant are dismantled
and plant. according to procedures and the appropriate
standard.
maintained during dismantling according to
procedures.
5.4. Rigging equipment, associated equipment, safety
equipment and associated plant are inspected for
damage and defects
equipment, associated plant and safety equipment are
isolated reported and recorded according to
procedures.
stored according to procedures and the appropriate
standard.


(where appropriate)

Required skills

 ability to calculate Safe Working Load (SWL) and Working Load Limit (WLL)
 ability to erect and dismantle, level, plumb and stabilise associated plant and
structures
 ability to work safely at heights including the correct application of safety
equipment.
 accurate interpretation of structural charts and structural plans (site information)
 correct application and use of all rigging and associated equipment
 risk assessment and hazard control strategies
 interpersonal and communication skills at a level sufficient to site/workplace
requirements. This includes the relevant communication methods and equipment.
 verify problems and equipment faults and demonstrate appropriate response.
Required knowledge

 ability to interpret manufacturer's specifications for all plant and equipment use in
rigging operations
 knowledge of principles relating to all plant, equipment and structural stability
 knowledge of the types and functions of rigging, safety and associated equipment
including an understanding of their limitations
 organisational and workplace standards, requirements, policies and procedures for
rigging
 understanding of the hierarchy of hazard identification and control
 relevant Commonwealth, state or territory and local government OHS legislation,
standards and codes of practice for undertaking rigging activities
 understanding of inspection and maintenance requirements of a wide range of
appropriate plant and equipment in line with Australian Standards or
manufacturer's specifications
 estimation of ground bearing pressures of the full range of soil types and associated


ground conditions for setting up plant and equipment.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

Assessment for this unit which have been endorsed
by the national body responsible for OHS matters.

unit  comply with OHS licensing legislation.
others in the work area.
 effectively conduct risk assessment and
management procedures.
 effectively complete the following tasks:
 adding and removing a tower crane section,
or
 adding and removing a crane lattice boom
section, or
 erecting a non guyed tower (e.g. light tower,
and
 perform a multiple crane lift, or
 a multiple winch lift, or
 a combination of a crane and winch lift, and
 lifting and installing a series of tilt-up
panels, or
 lifting and installing a series of scenery
panels (i.e. entertainment industry), and
 demolish/remove a series of tilt-up panel
structures, or
 demolish/remove a series of scenery panel
structures, and
 demolishing a concrete encased structural
steel column and beam.
 NB: All specifications for these performance

EVIDENCE GUIDE
tasks are detailed in the endorsed assessment
instrument.
 effectively conduct pre and post operational
checks of intermediate rigging equipment.
Context of and specific Assessment of the safe and effective application of
resources for assessment knowledge and skill to workplace tasks
(performance) must be undertaken using the
endorsed Assessment Instrument.
Assessment of performance must be undertaken
either in the workplace or in a realistically
simulated workplace setting.
Assessors must ensure that the assessment in the
workplace is organised to ensure that all the
required equipment and materials and a suitable
working area is made available to suit the
assessment and the workplace.
Assessment must occur under standard and
authorised work practices, safety requirements and
Assessment is to comply with relevant appropriate
standard requirements.
Applicants must have access to:
purpose of the Performance Assessment
 appropriate safety equipment is safe condition
 appropriate rigging equipment, associated
equipment associated plant in safe condition as
described in the endorsed assessment
instrument
 communication equipment (e.g. radios) where
applicable
 appropriate materials as required for safe
erection of structures.
Method of assessment Assessment must be conducted using the endorsed
Assessment Instruments. These Instruments
provide advice on their application.

EVIDENCE GUIDE

OHS regulators.
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Hazards may include but not  ground stability (e.g. ground condition,
pipes) (NB: Minimum clearance distance
from powerlines or electrical equipment as
determined by relevant state authority or
electrical supply authority)
 traffic (e.g. pedestrians, vehicles, other plant)
 environmental conditions (e.g. wind,
lightning, storms)
 other specific hazards (e.g. dangerous
materials).
Hazard control measures: Refers to the systematic process of eliminating or
reducing the risk to personnel and property
through the application of controls.
control, the six-step preference of control

RANGE STATEMENT
measures to manage and control risk:
 elimination
 substitution
 isolation
 engineering control measures
 using safe work practices
Appropriate standards may  codes of practice
include but are not limited to:  legislation
 industry standards (where applicable).
Site Information may include but  local conditions such as access and egress
is not limited to:  work method statements
 site-specific job safety analyses and other site
specific documentation as required
 task plans /schedules and structural plans.
Forces and Loads may include but  dead loads
are not limited to:  live loads
 static load
 dynamic loads
 wind loads.
Structures may include but not  concrete tilt-up panels
limited to:  scenery panels (used in entertainment)
 non guyed light towers.
Associated plant may include but  all types of cranes
is not limited to:  conveyors
 dredges
 excavators.
Appropriate personnel may  supervisors
include but not limited to:  engineers
 colleagues
Rigging Equipment may include  scaffolds
but is not limited to:  elevated work platforms
 stages
 personnel box
 cantilevered crane loading platforms,

RANGE STATEMENT
 mast climbers
 safety screens and shutters
 cranes including but not limited to:
 mobile slewing cranes
 tower cranes
 self-erecting tower cranes
 portal boom cranes
 derrick cranes
 bridge and gantry cranes.
Associated equipment may include  all associated equipment at the basic rigging
but is not limited to: level, and
 lifting clutches (swift lifts)
 chain motors.
Procedures may include but are  manufacturer's guidelines (instructions,
not limited to: specifications or checklists)
 industry operating procedures, relevant codes
of practice
 workplace procedures (work instructions,
operating procedures, checklists).
Safety Equipment may include but  safety harness
not limited to:  energy absorber
 lanyard
 inertia reel
 safety nets
 static lines.
Communication Methods may  verbal and non-verbal language
include but not limited to:  written instructions
 signage
 hand signals
 listening,
 questioning to confirm understanding, and
appropriate worksite protocol.
NB: Mobile phones are not to be used for
signalling purposes during the rigging process.
Communication equipment may  fixed channel two-way radios

include but is not limited to:
Hazard prevention/control  safety tags on electrical switches/isolators

RANGE STATEMENT
measures may include but is not  powerlines are insulated
limited to:  safety observer used inside exclusion zone
 power disconnected
 traffic barricades and control
 pedestrian barricades
 trench covers
 movement of obstructions
 adequate illumination.
Ground suitability may include but  rough uneven ground
is not limited to:  backfilled ground
 soft soils
 hard compacted soil
 rock
 bitumen
 concrete
 suspended concrete floors
 building roofs
 landings
 ground bearing pressure.
Appropriate personnel may  other riggers
include but not limited to:  doggers
 crane operators.
Flexible Steel Wire Rope (FSWR)  identification, uses and connections.
includes: May include termination for:
 static lines
 guys
 purchase systems
 lashing
 cranes
 hoist and winch ropes.
Unit Sector(s)

Co-requisite units
Functional area
Functional area

CPCCOHS1001A Work safely in the construction industry Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
undertake Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) induction
training within the construction industry.
It requires the ability to demonstrate personal awareness of
OHS legislative requirements, and the basic principles of
risk management and prevention of injury and illness in the
construction industry.
Licensing requirements will apply to this unit of
competency depending on the regulatory requirements of
each jurisdiction.

Application of the unit This unit of competency supports the attainment of the
basic OHS knowledge required prior to undertaking
designated work tasks within any of the sectors within the
construction industry. The unit relates directly to the
general induction training program specified by the
National Code of Practice for Induction for Construction
Work (ASCC 2007).
Pre-Requisites





1. Identify OHS 1.1. Applicable OHS legislative requirements relevant
legislative to own work, role and responsibilities are identified
requirements. and explained.
1.2. Duty of care requirements are identified.
1.3. Own responsibilities to comply with safe work
practices are identified and explained.
2. Identify construction 2.1. Basic principles of risk management are identified.
hazards and control 2.2. Common construction hazards are identified and
measures. discussed.
2.3. Measures for controlling hazards and risks are
identified.
3. Identify OHS 3.1. OHS communication processes, information and
communication and documentation are identified and discussed.
reporting processes. 3.2. Role of designated OHS personnel is identified and
explained.
3.3. Safety signs and symbols are identified and
explained.
3.4. Procedures and relevant authorities for reporting
hazards, incidents and injuries are identified.
4. Identify OHS 4.1. General procedures for responding to incidents and
incident response emergencies are identified and explained.
procedures. 4.2. Procedures for accessing first aid are identified.
4.3. Requirements for the selection and use of relevant
personal protective equipment are identified and
demonstrated.
4.4. Fire safety equipment is identified and discussed.

Required skills

 clarify OHS legislative requirements


 verbally report construction hazards and risks
 ask effective questions
 relay information to others
 discuss OHS issues and information
 comprehension skills to:
 explain the basic OHS legislative requirements which will be applicable to own
work
 explain the meaning of safety signs and symbols
 identify common construction hazards
 discuss the basic principles of risk management.
Required knowledge

 applicable Commonwealth, State or Territory OHS legislation, regulations,
standards, codes of practice and industry standards/guidance notes relevant to own
work, role and responsibilities
 basic principles of risk management and assessment for construction work
 common construction hazards
 common construction safety signage and its meanings
 general construction emergency response and evacuation procedures
 general construction work activities that require licenses, tickets or certificates of
competency
 general first aid response requirements
 general procedures for raising OHS issues
 general procedures for reporting OHS hazards, accidents, incidents, emergencies,
injuries, near misses and dangerous occurrences
 general procedures for responding to hazards, incidents and injuries
 general workers' compensation and injury management requirements
 OHS hierarchy of controls
 OHS responsibilities and rights of duty holders, including:
 persons in control of construction work/projects
 employers and self-employed persons
 supervisors
 employees
 designers
 inspectors
 manufacturers and suppliers
 own responsibilities to comply with safe work practices relating to:
 housekeeping


 identification of hazards
 preventing bullying or harassment
 smoking
 use of amenities
 use of drugs and alcohol
 role of OHS committees and representatives
 types of common personal protective equipment and fire safety equipment
 types of OHS information and documentation.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Critical aspects for assessment Evidence must confirm personal awareness of the
and evidence required to following:
demonstrate competency in this  applicable OHS legislative and safety
unit requirements for construction work including
duty of care
 the range of common construction hazards and
procedures for the assessment of risk and
application of the hierarchy of control
 OHS communication processes, information
and documentation including the role of OHS
committees and representatives, the meaning
of common safety signs and symbols, and
procedures for reporting hazards, incidents and
injuries
 general procedures for responding to incidents
and emergencies including evacuation, first
aid, fire safety equipment and PPE.
Context of and specific resources  Resources must be available to support the
for assessment program including participant materials and
other information or equipment related to the
skills and knowledge covered by the program.
 It is recommended that the assessment tool
designed specifically to support this unit of
competency will provide consistency in
assessment outcomes.
 Where applicable, physical resources should
include equipment modified for people with
disabilities
 Access must be provided to appropriate
assessment support when required.
 Assessment processes and techniques must be
culturally appropriate, and appropriate to the
oracy, language and literacy capacity of the
assessee and the work being performed
 In all cases where practical assessment is used
it will be combined with targeted questioning
to assess the underpinning knowledge.

EVIDENCE GUIDE
Questioning will be undertaken in such a
manner as is appropriate to the oracy,
language and literacy levels of the operator,
any cultural issues that may affect responses to
the questions, and reflecting the requirements
of the competency and the work being
performed.
Method of assessment Assessment methods may include more than one
of the following:
 practical assessment
 oral questioning
 written test
 work-based activities
 simulated project based activity
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
OHS legislative requirements  Australian standards

relate to:  construction industry OHS standards and
guidelines
 duty of care
 health and safety representatives, committees
and supervisors
 licences, tickets or certificates of competency
 National Code of Practice for Induction
Training for Construction Work
 national safety standards
 OHS and welfare Acts and regulations
 safety codes of practice.
Duty of care requirements relate  legal responsibility under duty of care to do
to: everything reasonably practicable to protect
others from harm

RANGE STATEMENT
 own responsibilities to comply with safe work
practices, including activities that require
licences, tickets or certificates of competency
 relevant state OHS requirements, including
employers and self-employed persons, persons
in control of the work site, construction
supervisors, designers, manufacturers and
suppliers, construction workers,
subcontractors and inspectors.
Safe work practices include:  access to site amenities, such as drinking
water and toilets
 general requirements for safe use of plant and
equipment
 general requirements for use of personal
protective equipment and clothing
 housekeeping to ensure a clean, tidy and safer
work area
 no drugs and alcohol at work
 preventing bullying and harassment
 smoking in designated areas
 storage and removal of debris.
Risk relates to:  likelihood of a hazard causing injury or harm.
Principles of risk management  assessing the risks involved

include:  consulting and reporting ensuring the
involvement of relevant workers
 controlling the hazard
 identifying hazards
 reviewing to identify change or improvement.
Hazard relates to:  any thing (including an intrinsic property of a
thing) or situation with the potential to cause
injury or harm.
Common construction hazards  confined spaces
include:  electrical safety
 excavations, including trenches
 falling objects
 hazardous substances and dangerous goods
 HIV and other infectious diseases
 hot and cold working environments
 manual handling
 noise
 plant and equipment

RANGE STATEMENT
 traffic and mobile plant
 unplanned collapse
 ultraviolet (UV) radiation
 working at heights.
Measures for controlling risk to  elimination
eliminate or minimise hazards in  substitution
accordance with the hierarchy of  isolation
control include:  engineering control
 administrative control
OHS communication processes  discussions with OHS representatives
include:  OHS meetings
 OHS notices, newsletters, bulletins and
correspondence
 OHS participative arrangements
 processes for raising OHS issues
 toolbox talks
 workplace consultation relating to OHS issues
and changes.
OHS information and  accident and incident reports
documentation includes:  Acts and regulations
 Australian standards
 codes of practice
 construction documentation and plans
 emergency information contact
 evacuation plans
 guidance notes
 job safety analyses
 labels
 proformas for reporting hazards, incidents and
injuries
 reports of near misses and dangerous
occurrences
 risk assessments
 safe work method statements
 safety meeting minutes
 site safety inspection reports.
Designated OHS personnel  first aid officers
includes:  OHS committee members

RANGE STATEMENT
 OHS representatives
 supervisors.
Safety signs and symbols include:  emergency information signs (e.g. exits,
equipment and first aid)
 fire signs (e.g. location of fire alarms and
firefighting equipment)
 hazard signs (e.g. danger and warning)
 regulatory signs (e.g. prohibition, mandatory
and limitation or restriction)
 safety tags and lockout (e.g. danger tags, out
of service tags).
Relevant authorities include:  emergency services (e.g. police, ambulance,
fire brigade and emergency rescue)
 OHS regulatory authority
 supervisor.
Incidents include:  accidents resulting in personal injury or
damage to property
 near misses or dangerous occurrences which
do not cause injury but may pose an
immediate and significant risk to persons or
property, and need to be reported so that
action can be taken to prevent recurrence, for
example:
 breathing apparatus malfunctioning to the
extent that the user's health is in danger
 collapse of the floor, wall or ceiling of a
building being used as a workplace
 collapse or failure of an excavation more than
1.5 metres deep (including any shoring)
 collapse or partial collapse of a building or
structure
 collapse, overturning or failure of the load
bearing of any scaffolding, lift, crane, hoist or
mine-winding equipment
 damage to or malfunction of any other major
plant
 electric shock.
 electrical short circuit, malfunction or
explosion
 uncontrolled explosion, fire or escape of gas,
hazardous substance or steam
 any other unintended or uncontrolled incident
or event arising from operations carried on at a

RANGE STATEMENT
workplace.
General procedures for  basic emergency response (keep calm, raise
responding to incidents and alarm, obtain help)
emergencies include:  evacuation
 notification of designated OHS personnel and
authorities
 notification of emergency services (e.g. when
and how)
 referring to site emergency plans and
documentation.
Emergencies include:  chemical spill
 fire
 injury to personnel
 structural collapse
 toxic and/or flammable vapours emission
 vehicle/mobile plant accident.
Personal protective equipment  aprons
includes:  arm guards
 eye protection
 gloves
 hard hat
 hearing protection
 high visibility retro reflective vests
 protective, well fitting clothing
 respiratory protection
 safety footwear
 UV protective clothing and sunscreen.
Fire safety equipment includes:  breathing apparatus
 fire blankets
 firefighting equipment.
Unit Sector(s)
Co-requisite units

Functional area
Functional area

CPCCOHS2001A Apply OHS requirements, policies and procedures in the construction industryDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
CPCCOHS2001A Apply OHS requirements, policies and

procedures in the construction industry
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
carry out OHS requirements through safe work practices at
any on or off-site construction workplace. It requires the
performance of work in a safe manner through awareness of
risks and work requirements, and the planning and
performance of safe work practices with concern for
personal safety and the safety of others.

Application of the unit This unit of competency covers fundamental OHS
necessary to undertake work tasks within any sector in the
construction industry. It includes the identification of
hazardous materials, including asbestos, and compliance
with legislated work safety practices. It does not cover
removal of asbestos, which is a licensed activity.
The unit relates directly to the general induction training
program specified by the National Code of Practice for
Induction for Construction Work (ASCC 2007) required to
enter a construction work site. Completion of unit
CPCCOHS1001A covers this requirement.
Not Applicable

2017
Pre-Requisites



2017

1. Identify and assess 1.1. Hazards in the work area are identified, assessed and
risks. reported to designated personnel.
1.2. Safety risks in the work area are identified, assessed
and reported to designated personnel.
1.3. Safe work practices, duty of care requirements and
safe work instructions are followed for controlling
risks.
1.4. OHS, hazard, accident or incident reports are
contributed to according to workplace procedures and
Australian government and state or territory OHS
legislation and relevant information.
2. Identify hazardous 2.1. Hazardous materials on a work site are correctly
materials and other identified and, if appropriate, handled and used
hazards on work according to company and legislated procedures.
sites. 2.2. Measures for controlling risks and construction
hazards are applied effectively and immediately.
2.3. Hazardous materials that have safety implications for
self and other workers are secured immediately they
are identified, using appropriate signs and symbols.
2.4. Asbestos-containing materials are identified on a
work site and reported to designated personnel.
3. Plan and prepare for 3.1. Correct personal protective equipment and clothing
safe work practices. for each area of construction work are identified,
worn, correctly fitted, used and stored according to
enterprise procedures.
3.2. Selection of tools, equipment and materials, and
organisation of tasks are performed in conjunction
with other personnel on site and in accordance with
enterprise procedures.
3.3. Required barricades and signage are determined and
erected at the appropriate site location.
3.4. Material safety data sheets (MSDS), and job safety
analysis (JSA) and safe work method statements
relevant to the work to be carried out are identified
and applied.
4. Apply safe work 4.1. Tasks are performed in a manner that is safe for
practices. operators, other personnel and the general community
in accordance with legislative requirements, and
enterprise policies and procedures.
4.2. Plant and equipment guards are used in accordance
with manufacturer specifications, work site

2017

regulations and Australian standards where
applicable.
4.3. Procedures and relevant authorities for reporting
hazards, incidents and injuries are used.
4.4. Prohibited tools and equipment in areas with
identified asbestos are recognised and not used.
4.5. Work site safety signs and symbols are identified and
followed.
4.6. Work site area is cleared and maintained to prevent
and protect self and others from incidents and
accidents and to meet environmental requirements.
5. Follow emergency 5.1. Designated personnel are identified in the event of an
procedures. emergency for communication purposes.
5.2. Safe workplace procedures for dealing with accidents,
various types of fire and other emergencies are
followed, including identification or use, if
appropriate, of fire equipment within scope of
responsibilities.
5.3. Emergency response and evacuation procedures are
known, practised and carried out effectively when
required.
5.4. Emergency first aid treatment of minor injuries is
carried out correctly and details of any treatment
administered are reported accurately to designated
personnel as soon as possible.

Required skills

 ability to accurately recognise OHS hazards, including asbestos and take all
opportunities to alleviate safety problems in a variety of construction work sites
and environments
 capacity to deal calmly and effectively with any potential safety problems and
work closely with other team members and supervisors to ensure safe working
conditions are maintained

2017

 determine and report hazards and risks
 enable clear and direct communication, using questioning to identify and
confirm requirements, share information, listen and understand
 MSDS, JSA and safe work method statements
 other relevant documentation
 written skills to contribute to reports
abilities
Required knowledge

 asbestos management code prevention of exposure
 basic first aid procedures
 common construction industry terminology
 common workplace safety hazards and risks and procedures for reporting these to
designated personnel
 construction industry communications equipment and use
 construction industry health and safety signage
 emergency response and evacuation procedures
 MSDS
 OHS hierarchy of control and role of OHS committees and representatives
 relevant legislation, regulations and workplace requirements relating to OHS,
including hazard reduction and personal safety, including duty of care
responsibilities, workers' compensation and injury management requirements
 safe manual handling techniques
 safe work practices in normal working environment
 safety equipment, policies and requirements for working in confined spaces and at

2017

height, including on rooves
 tools and equipment prohibited for use near identified asbestos-containing
materials (ACM)
 types of fires and basic firefighting equipment
 types, possible location and risks of ACM, including serpentine and amphibole
groups, and their use in common building materials
 types, purpose and use of construction industry personal protective equipment and
clothing

2017
Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

Critical aspects for assessment and A person who demonstrates competency in this unit
evidence required to demonstrate must be able to provide evidence of the ability to:
competency in this unit  correctly locate, interpret and apply relevant
 comply with a site safety plan, organisational
policies, OHS regulations and state and territory
legislation applicable to workplace operations,
including quality requirements
 correctly identify ACM and policies and procedures
for reporting this to designated personnel
others
 apply general procedures for responding to
incidents and reporting hazards and injuries
 select and use firefighting equipment to extinguish
a simulated mechanical fire
 evacuate a site through simulated response to an
emergency, complying with workplace procedures.

2017
EVIDENCE GUIDE
work practices

Package
environments.

2017
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Hazards include:  chemical spills

 electrical safety work in confined spaces
 excavations, including trenches
 falling objects
 fires
 gases
 hazardous materials
 high or very low temperatures
 HIV and other infectious diseases
 liquids under pressure
 manual handling
 moving machinery and equipment
 noise, dust and vapours
 overhanging beams
 protrusions
 sharp equipment
 traffic
 ultraviolet (UV) radiation
 unplanned collapse

2017
RANGE STATEMENT
 working at heights.
Designated personnel to be  designated safety officers, determined by the
contacted in case of an enterprise, who have undertaken specific safety
emergency, accident, fire or to response training
report a risk such as identification  managers or other senior personnel
of ACM are:  personnel competent and/or licensed in the safe
handling of asbestos
 supervisors.
Safe work practices:  include:
 day to day observation of OHS policies and
procedures
 emergency procedures
 risk assessment
 use of basic firefighting equipment
 relate to:
 access to site amenities, such as drinking
water and toilets
 general requirements for safe use of plant
and equipment
 general requirements for use of personal
protective equipment and clothing
 housekeeping to ensure a clean, tidy and
safer work area
 no drugs and alcohol at work
 preventing bullying and harassment
 smoking in designated areas
 storage and removal of debris.
Duty of care requirements:  relate to:
 legal responsibility under duty of care to do
everything reasonably practicable to protect
others from harm
 relevant state and territory OHS
requirements and include employers and
self-employed persons, persons in control
of the work site, construction supervisors,
designers, manufacturers and suppliers,
construction workers, subcontractors and
inspectors
 may relate to:
 own responsibilities to comply with safe
work practices, including activities that

2017
RANGE STATEMENT
require licences, tickets or certificates of
competency.
Incidents include:  accidents resulting in personal injury or
damage to property
 near misses or dangerous occurrences that do
not cause injury but may pose an immediate
and significant risk to persons or property, and
need to be reported so that action can be taken
to prevent recurrence, for example:
 breathing apparatus malfunctioning to the
extent that the user's health is in danger
 collapse of the floor, wall or ceiling of a
building being used as a workplace
 collapse or failure of an excavation more
than 1.5 metres deep (including any
shoring)
 collapse or partial collapse of a building or
structure
 collapse, overturning or failure of the load
bearing of any scaffolding, lift, crane, hoist
or mine-winding equipment
 damage to or malfunction of any other
major plant
 electric shock
 electrical short circuit, malfunction or
explosion
 uncontrolled explosion, fire or escape of
gas, hazardous substance or steam
 any other unintended or uncontrolled
incident or event arising from operations
carried on at a workplace.
Australian government and state  Australian standards
or territory OHS legislative  construction industry OHS standards and
requirements include: guidelines
 duty of care
 health and safety representatives, committees
and supervisors
 licences, tickets or certificates of competency
 National Code of Practice for Induction
Training for Construction Work
 national safety standards

2017
RANGE STATEMENT
 OHS and welfare Acts and regulations
 safety codes of practice.
 emergency situation contacts
 evacuation plans
 instructions issued by authorised organisational
or external personnel
 labels
 manufacturer specifications and instructions
 memos
 MSDS
requirements
 regulatory and legislative requirements, such
as Acts, regulations and codes of practice
 reports of near misses or accidents
 safe work procedures or equivalent
documentation
 safety meeting minutes
 signage
 work bulletins
 work schedules.
Hazardous materials include:  ACM
 cleaning chemicals, including those in
pressurised containers
 glues
 insulation materials
 solvents
 treated timber products.
Measures for controlling risk or  elimination
minimising hazards in accordance  substitution
with the hierarchy of control  isolation
include:  engineering control
 administrative control
Signs and symbols include:  emergency information signs (exits,
equipment, first aid)
 fire signs (location of fire alarms and

2017
RANGE STATEMENT
firefighting equipment)
 hazard identification, facility or location signs
 regulatory signs (e.g. prohibition, mandatory
and limitation or restriction), such as hazard
signs (danger and warning)
 safety tags and lockout (danger tags, out of
service tags)
 site safety, directional, traffic and warning
signs and symbols.
Asbestos-containing materials  includes recognising common types of ACM
are identified: that may be found in construction materials
and buildings
 covers asbestos rope/fabrics, asbestos cement
sheeting, asbestos cement piping and lagging
on pipes, bituminous waterproof membrane,
fire doors, electrical switchboards, millboard,
and sheeting under ceramic or vinyl floor tiles
in wet areas.
Asbestos-containing materials are  person in control of the workplace as set out in
reported to: the relevant Asbestos Management Code.
Personal protective equipment is  aprons

to include:  arm guards
 caps
 dust mask/respirators
 ear muffs/plugs
 gloves
 hard hats
 high visibility retro reflective vests
 jackets
 overalls
 safety glasses/goggles
 steel capped boots
 UV protective clothing and sunscreen.
Tools and equipment include:  firefighting equipment
 first aid kit
 ladders and work platforms
Materials include:  first aid materials suitable for emergency first
aid treatment of minor injuries.
Prohibited tools and equipment  high-speed abrasive power and pneumatic
that cannot be used near identified tolls, high pressure water cleaners, compressed

2017
RANGE STATEMENT
ACM include: air or abrasive blasting
 any vacuum cleaning equipment not
specifically designed for safe work with
asbestos.
Environmental requirements are  clean-up protection
to cover workplace quality  stormwater protection
management and include:  waste management.
Types of fire includes:  electrical, chemical, gas, mechanical, paper,

wood or natural fire.
Fire equipment includes:  breathing apparatus
 fire extinguishers
 fire hydrant and hoses
 fire reel
 fire truck
 manual firefighting instruments, such as fire
blankets.
Emergency response and  emergencies, such as fire, toxic and/or
evacuation procedures include: flammable vapours emission, vehicle/mobile
plant accident, structural collapse, chemical
spill and injury to personnel
 extinguishing fires, organisational first aid
requirements and evacuation.
Unit Sector(s)
Co-requisite units

2017
Functional area
Functional area

CPCCSF2003A Cut and bend materials using oxy-LPG equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPCCSF2003A Cut and bend materials using oxy-LPG

equipment
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to heat,
cut and bend construction materials using oxy-LPG equipment.
It includes planning and preparation for the work, setting up and
testing the equipment, cutting materials, heating and bending
materials, shutdown of equipment and completion of clean-up
activities.

Application of the unit This unit supports the attainment of skills and knowledge to use
oxy-LPG-acetylene equipment to cut and bend materials for
steelfixing applications, which includes working with others and as
a member of a team. It does not involve specialist welding
techniques.
Not Applicable
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units
CPCCOHS2001A Apply OHS requirements, policies and

procedures in the construction industry





1. Plan and prepare. 1.1. Work instructions, including plans, specifications,
quality requirements and operational details are
obtained from relevant information, confirmed and
applied to the scope of work performed.
1.2. Safety (OHS) requirements are followed in
accordance with safety plans and policies.
1.3. Signage and barricade requirements are identified
and implemented.
1.4. Plant, tools and equipment are selected to carry out
tasks are consistent with the requirements of the job,
checked for serviceability and any faults are rectified
or reported prior to commencement.
1.5. Materials quantity requirements are calculated in
accordance with plans, specifications and quality
requirements.
1.6. Materials appropriate to the work application are
identified, obtained, prepared, safely handled and
located ready for use.
1.7. Environmental requirements are identified for the
statutory and legislative authority obligations and
applied.
2. Set up and test 2.1. Correct fire extinguisher is selected and located to be
equipment. readily accessible prior to and during operations.
2.2. Regulators are attached to oxy and acetylene bottles
in accordance with manufacturer specifications and
OHS regulations.
2.3. Lines are purged to manufacturer recommendations
prior to lighting up.
2.4. Equipment is tested for leaks and corrective action
undertaken or faults reported.
2.5. Correct pressures and cutting tips are selected in
accordance with material to be cut and manufacturer
specifications.
3. Cut material. 3.1. Material is accurately marked and secured or
clamped ready for cutting.
3.2. Torch is lit correctly and safely according to
3.3. Setting of flame is adjusted for cutting to
manufacturer recommendations.
3.4. Correct cutting position is adopted during cutting to


set-out mark.
4. Heat and bend 4.1. Material is accurately marked and securely clamped
material. ready for cutting.
4.2. Torch is lit correctly and safely according to
4.3. Heat is applied to specified material and weakening
effects of the heating process are minimised.
4.4. Material is bent to specification and correctly
cooled.
5. Shut down. 5.1. Torch is switched off according to manufacturer
specifications.
5.2. Gas supply is shut off according to manufacturer
specifications.
6. Clean up. 6.1. Work area is cleared and materials disposed of,
reused or recycled in accordance with legislation,
regulations, codes of practice and job specification.
6.2. Plant, tools and equipment are cleaned, checked,
maintained and stored in accordance with
practices.

Required skills

 report faults


 mathematical and numeracy skills to apply measurements and calculations
abilities
Required knowledge

 construction and steelfixing terminology
 oxy acetylene and LPG heating and cutting equipment set-up and operating
techniques
 oxy acetylene and LPG heating and cutting equipment types, characteristics, uses
and limitations
 plans, drawings and specifications
 types and properties of steelfixing materials

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

environment, provided that simulated or
project-based assessment techniques fully
replicate construction workplace conditions,
materials, activities, responsibilities and
procedures.

unit  locate, interpret and apply of relevant
 comply with site safety plan and OHS
legislation, regulations and codes of practice
applicable to workplace operations
equipment
 communicate and work effectively and safely
with others
 use both oxy-acetylene and LPG systems to
cut to specification a range of bars up to and
including 36mm
 heat and bend a minimum of three bars to
specification including at least one 36mm bar.
Context of and specific resources This competency is to be assessed using standard
for assessment and authorised work practices, safety requirements
and environmental constraints.
Assessment of essential underpinning knowledge
will usually be conducted in an off-site context.
Assessment is to comply with relevant regulatory
or Australian standards' requirements.

EVIDENCE GUIDE
 tools and equipment appropriate to applying
safe work practices
practices and addressing hazards and
emergencies
Reasonable adjustments for people with
disabilities must be made to assessment processes
where required. This could include access to
modified equipment and other physical resources,
and the provision of appropriate assessment
support.

 satisfy the endorsed Assessment Guidelines of
the Construction, Plumbing and Services
Training Package
 reinforce the integration of employability
skills with workplace tasks and job roles
 confirm that competency is verified and able
to be transferred to other circumstances and
environments.
 competency will need to be demonstrated over
a period of time reflecting the scope of the role
and the practical requirements of the
workplace
learning experience the evidence collected
must relate to a number of performances
assessed at different points in time and
separated by further learning and practice,
with a decision on competency only taken at

EVIDENCE GUIDE
the point when the assessor has complete
confidence in the person's demonstrated ability
and applied knowledge
 all assessment that is part of a structured
learning experience must include a
combination of direct, indirect and
supplementary evidence.
Assessment processes and techniques should as
far as is practical take into account the language,
literacy and numeracy capacity of the candidate in
relation to the competency being assessed.
obtained from relevant authenticated
documentation from third parties, such as existing
supervisors, team leaders or specialist training
staff.
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT

 instructions issued by authorised
organisational or external personnel
 manufacturer specifications and instructions,
where specified
 MSDS
 memos
 regulatory and legislative requirements
pertaining to cut and bend materials using
oxy/LPG equipment
 safe work procedures relating to cut and bend
materials using oxy/LPG equipment

RANGE STATEMENT
 signage
 verbal, written and graphical instructions
 work bulletins
Scope of work:  cutting of steel includes cutting up of waste for
salvage, cutting reinforcement steel and
cutting holes in plate
 bending includes reinforcement steel
 all work is to conform to the requirements of
relevant Australian standards.
Safety (OHS) is to be in  emergency procedures, including
accordance with state and territory extinguishing fires, organisational first aid
legislation and regulations and requirements and evacuation
project safety plan and may  handling activities that may require the
include: assistance of others or the use of manual or
mechanical lifting devices where size, weight
or other issues, such as a disability are a factor
 hazard control
 hazardous materials and substances, including
cement and curing agents
 PPE prescribed under legislation, regulations
and workplace policies and practices
 safe operating procedures, including the
conduct of operational risk assessment and
treatments associated with:
 cutting, grinding and welding equipment
 lighting
 power equipment
 power leads and sources
 trip hazards
 working with metals under stress
 workplace environmental requirements and
safety.
Equipment includes:  cylinders
 regulators

RANGE STATEMENT
 gas tubing
 cutting blowpipes
 flint lighters
 measuring tapes and rules
 clamps and support stands.
Materials:  include:
 cutting consumables
 deformed bars
 mesh sheets of deformed bars
 mesh sheets of plain bars
 plain rods
 may include:
 pipe sections
 scaffolding components
 structural steel sections.
Quality requirements include  Australian standards
relevant regulations, including:  internal company quality policy and standards
 manufacturer specifications
 workplace operations and procedures.
include:  dust and noise
Statutory and regulatory  federal, state and local authorities
authorities include: administering the applicable Acts, regulations
and codes of practice.
Unit Sector(s)
Functional area
Functional area

CPPSEC5001A Establish and maintain an Occupational Health and Safety system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPPSEC5001A Establish and maintain an Occupational Health

and Safety system
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
manage an Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) system to
ensure compliance with legislative requirements relating to
security operations. It requires the ability to establish
policies and procedures for the implementation of OHS in the
workplace ensuring ongoing consultative processes. It also
requires an ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the OHS
system to identify procedural improvements.
This unit may form part of the licensing requirements for
persons engaged in security operations in those states and
territories where these are regulated activities.

Application of the This unit of competency has wide application in a range of
unit managerial roles in the security industry. Work is performed
under minimal supervision and competency requires a high
level of judgement and decision-making. The knowledge
and skills described in this unit are to be applied within
relevant legislative and organisational guidelines.
Pre-Requisites
Not Applicable



Elements describe the Performance criteria describe the required performance
essential outcomes of a needed to demonstrate achievement of the element. Where
unit of competency. bold italicised text is used, further information is detailed in
the required skills and knowledge section and/or the range
statement. Assessment of performance is to be consistent with
the evidence guide.


1 Establish an OHS 1.1 OHS system is developed which clearly states
system. commitment to OHS and compliance with legislative
requirements.
1.2 OHS roles and responsibilities for all employees are
defined.
1.3 Financial and human resources for the effective operation
of the OHS system are established and implemented.
1.4 OHS induction and training program is developed and
made available to all employees.
1.5 System for OHS record keeping is established and
maintained to allow identification of hazard, risk and
injury patterns.
1.6 OHS information and procedures are communicated and
explained to all employees in an accessible format in
accordance with legislative requirements.
2 Establish 2.1 Consultative processes are established and maintained to
participative ensure maximum OHS vigilance and compliance of all
arrangements for employees.
OHS. 2.2 OHS issues raised through participation and consultation
are acknowledged and resolved promptly.
2.3 Feedback from OHS consultation and any changes to
procedures are recorded and communicated promptly to
all employees.
3 Establish 3.1 Procedures for identifying hazards and managing risks
procedures for are developed in accordance with legislative requirements.
managing hazards 3.2 Hazard identification is addressed at the planning, design
and risks. and evaluation stages of any change in workplace to
ensure new hazards are not created.
3.3 Procedures for selection and implementation of risk
control measures in accordance with the hierarchy of
control are developed and maintained.
3.4 Inadequacies in procedures for hazard identification and
risk control are identified and new measures promptly
established.
4 Evaluate system 4.1 Evaluation of the OHS system is undertaken using
effectiveness. verifiable evidence.
4.2 Improvements to the OHS system are developed and
implemented to achieve organisational OHS objectives.
4.3 Compliance with the OHS legislative framework is
continually assessed to ensure that legal obligations are
met.


4.4 All OHS documentation is maintained in accordance with
legislative requirements.

This section describes the skills and knowledge and their level required for this unit.
Required skills
 access and use workplace information
 active listening
 adapt personal communication style to a variety of situations
 analyse and evaluate information and data
 coaching and mentoring to provide support to colleagues
 communicate in a clear and concise manner
 consultation
 effectively work with teams and individuals
 negotiation
 numeracy skill to calculate resources and costings
 planning
 reading to interpret complex information
 relate to people from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds and
physical and mental abilities
 research, analyse and interpret information from a variety of people and reporting
 solve problems to deal with complex and non routine difficulties
 use a range of communications equipment
 use technology to research, analyse and report information
 writing to develop complex reports.
Required knowledge
 applicable OHS licensing and legislative compliance requirements
 application of the hierarchy of control
 approved communication terminology and call signs
 available support agencies and the types of services offered
 difference between negative and positive language
 differences between written and spoken English
 how to read and use body language to gain confidence of others
 how to record information which may be used for legal purposes
 how to safeguard confidential information


 how to use business equipment to present information
 intervention points for expert OHS advice
 negotiation techniques
 non conformance reporting requirements
 OHS implications relating to use of guard dogs, apprehension or arrest of persons,
use of firearms, use of restraints, handcuffs, batons and spray
 organisational standards for the presentation and maintenance of written
information
 power plays and how they are used in conflict situations
 principles and practices of effective OHS management
 principles and techniques associated with modelling safe work practices, hazard
identification and risk management
 principles of AS/NZS 4360: 2004 Risk management
 tactical response measures
 use of force guidelines.
Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Critical aspects for A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must be able to
assessment and provide evidence of:
evidence required to  managing organisational compliance with applicable OHS
demonstrate legislation and licensing, and implementing consultative
competency in this unit arrangements to ensure individual and team OHS awareness
and compliance
 developing a comprehensive OHS system which maximises
implementation of OHS policies and procedures
 conducting an evaluation of the OHS system and using the
findings together with consultation processes as the basis for
implementing improvements
 establishing systems for ensuring OHS records and information
meet legal compliance requirements.
Context of and specific Context of assessment includes:
resources for  a setting in the workplace or environment that simulates the
assessment conditions of performance described in the elements,

performance criteria and range statement.

 access to a registered provider of assessment services
 access to a suitable venue and equipment
 access to plain English version of relevant statutes and
procedures
 assessment instruments including personal planner and
assessment record book
 work schedules, organisational policies and duty statements.
Reasonable adjustments must be made to assessment processes
where required for people with disabilities. This could include
access to modified equipment and other physical resources, and the
provision of appropriate assessment support.
Method of assessment This unit of competency should be assessed using questioning of

underpinning knowledge and skills.
Guidance information Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally

for assessment appropriate and suitable to the language, literacy and numeracy
capacity of the candidate and the competency being assessed. In all
cases where practical assessment is used, it should be combined
with targeted questioning to assess the underpinning knowledge.
Oral questioning or written assessment may be used to assess
underpinning knowledge. In assessment situations where the
candidate is offered a choice between oral questioning and written
assessment, questions are to be identical.
Supplementary evidence may be obtained from relevant
authenticated correspondence from existing supervisors, team
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
OHS system may  counter terrorism

 designated OHS personnel and committees

include:  designing safe operations and systems of work

 duty of care requirements
 emergency and evacuation policies and procedures
 incorporation of expert OHS advice as required
 injury management and workers compensation
 issue resolution and conflict negotiation processes
 mechanisms for obtaining updated information (eg health
effects of hazards, technical developments in risk control,
changes to legislation, security alerts and industry trends)
 mechanisms for updating OHS policies and procedures
 planning and implementing changes to security operations
and tactical response strategies
 procedures for maintenance and storage of equipment and
weapons
 procedures for purchasing of materials and equipment
 procedures, timeframes and accountabilities for reporting
OHS issues
 provision of counselling and stress management processes
 provision of OHS information and training
 provisions for first aid equipment and response
 restraint and apprehension of persons
 security licensing requirements
 system for communicating OHS information to
individuals and teams
 use of firearms, handcuffs, batons and spray
 use of force guidelines.
Legislative  anti-discrimination and diversity
requirements may  Australian standards, codes of practice and regulations
relate to:  award and enterprise agreements
 duty of care
 evidence collection
 licensing arrangements and certification requirements
 OHS issue resolution
 relevant commonwealth, state and territory OHS
legislation, codes of practice and regulations
 roles and responsibilities of OHS representatives and
committees
 trade practices
 use of force.
OHS roles and  fire wardens
responsibilities may  first aid officers
include:  general duty of care
 OHS chain of command

 OHS committee representatives

 OHS officers
 safe workplace practices.
Training program  allocation of resources for training including acquisition,
may include: purchase of training services, development of staff
training skills
 group discussions to enhance safety awareness
 handouts or information sheets
 OHS induction training
 ongoing assessment of individual and team training needs
 specific courses.
OHS record keeping  audit and inspection reports
may relate to:  consultation processes (eg OHS Committee meeting
papers)
 equipment maintenance and testing reports
 first aid or medical post records
 hazardous substances register
 identifying records required under OHS legislation (eg,
major accident and injury notifications, certificates,
licenses, dangerous goods storage register)
 manufacturer and supplier information relating to security
equipment
 records of induction, instruction and training
 workers compensation and rehabilitation records
 workplace environmental monitoring records.
Hazard relates to:  any thing (including an intrinsic property of a thing) or
situation with the potential to cause injury or harm.
Risk relates to:  the chance of something happening that will have an
impact on objectives.
Security risks may  biological hazards
include:  chemical spills
 electrical faults
 explosives
 injury to personnel
 noise, light, heat, smoke
 persons carrying weapons
 persons causing a public nuisance
 persons demonstrating suspicious behaviour
 persons suffering from emotional or physical distress
 persons under the influence of intoxicating substances
 persons with criminal intent
 persons, vehicles and equipment in unsuitable locations

 suspicious packages or substances

 terrorism
 violence or physical threats.
OHS information and  application of organisational OHS policies and procedures
procedures may relate  back-up
to:  compliance with applicable legislation, standards and
regulations related to OHS
 current security industry risks and alerts
 identified hazards
 outcomes of risk assessment and control processes
 procedures for evacuation, application of first aid and
emergency response
 processes for raising OHS issues
 tactical response
 up-to-date OHS issues and industry safety trends
 use of force
 use of restraints, handcuffs, batons, spray and firearms.
Consultative processes  establishment and use of OHS committees and other
may include: committees
 establishment and use of OHS representatives and first aid
officers
 involvement of individuals and teams in OHS
management activities (eg OHS inspections, audits,
environmental monitoring, risk assessment and control,
emergency simulations)
 mechanisms for employees to raise OHS issues
 provision of regular OHS bulletins, notices and
information.
OHS records may  first aid and medical post records
relate to:  hazardous substances registers
 health surveillance and monitoring of work environment
 identified hazards and risks
 industry warnings and security alerts
 maintenance and testing reports
 manufacturer and supplier information, including
materials safety data sheets and dangerous goods storage
lists
 OHS audits and inspections
 OHS instruction and training
 OHS issues which have been raised and reported
 reports of accidents and injury
 workers compensation and rehabilitation records.
Procedures for  consultation

identifying hazards  continuous monitoring of work environment

may include:  debrief and review of security incidents
 regular informal and informal discussions with colleagues
 regular inspections of equipment and work area
 review of OHS records.
Managing risks may  application of the hierarchy of control
involve:  complying with safe operating procedures for equipment
 correct selection, use, storage and maintenance of
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
 evacuation
 maintaining vigilance, awareness and observation in the
work environment
 OHS communication and reporting
 requests for back-up support or instructions
 safe lifting and manual handling
 security of documents, cash, equipment and persons
 use of fire safety equipment
 use of reasonable force.
Verifiable evidence  auditable documentation and reports
may include:  employee and client questionnaires
 number of hazards, accidents, injuries or near misses
 quality assurance data
 records of complaints and actions taken for resolution.
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Security
Competency field
Competency field Security and risk management

CPPWMT3011A Respond to waste emergencies Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPPWMT3011A Respond to waste emergencies
Revised unit
Unit updated and equivalent to PRMWM11B Respond to waste emergency
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to respond to a range of emergencies
which may occur in the management of waste. It requires the ability to act quickly in a
methodical and calm manner.

This unit of competency supports individuals with responsibilities for conducting waste
management activity. It includes contributing to the implementation of developed operational
procedures, as well as recognising the need for expert advice.
of endorsement.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1 Identify nature of 1.1 Details of the nature, type and severity of the emergency
emergency. are identified, including waste types involved and
existing and potential hazards and risks.
1.2 Emergency is reported to supervisor or team leader

according to organisational requirements and relevant
legislation and codes.
2 Prepare to respond 2.1 Potential hazards and risks are incorporated into
to emergency. emergency response action.
2.2 Emergency response action or procedures are followed

legislation.
2.3 Full details of emergency are communicated to relevant

parties.
2.4 Emergency and personal protective equipment is used

safely and efficiently according to manufacturer
specifications and organisational occupational health and
safety (OHS) requirements.
2.5 Containment and isolation of emergency situation are

conducted where possible to minimise danger to
surrounding equipment, area, environment, other
personnel and general public.
2.6 Risks to personnel are avoided and evacuation

procedures are followed according to organisational
requirements.
2.7 Necessary actions to protect organisational interests are

taken according to organisational requirements.
3 Review 3.1 Emergency response actions are monitored and

emergency evaluated continuously and modifications are made to
response. response actions to reduce the impact of the emergency.
3.2 Emergency situation is controlled until formal relief is

notified or received, according to organisational
requirements, OHS standards and relevant legislation.

4 Assist with 4.1 Clean-up to remove waste, contamination, equipment

clean-up and hazards from the emergency site is conducted
according to organisational, legislative and OHS
requirements.
4.2 Regulated waste identification signage is updated as

required.
5 Record and report 5.1 Full details of emergency situation and response actions
emergency are recorded according to organisational requirements
and relevant legislation.
5.2 Emergency situation and response actions are reported to

appropriate personnel according to organisational
requirements.


Required skills
 emergency expertise to facilitate:
 waste assessment
 isolation procedures, including bunding and erecting barriers
 selection of equipment
 quality control inspection
 interpersonal skills to work in a team environment
 ask questions
 give clear information
 listen effectively
 reading skills to:
 interpret emergency requirements
 follow emergency procedure guidelines
 read graduated devices
 interpret work requirements and material safety data sheets (MSDS)
 problem-solving skills to:
 identify hazards and risks
 identify waste types, including regulated waste and waste non-conformance
 resolve pressure situations in a prompt, calm manner
 self-management skills to:
 conduct work practices safely and efficiently
 handle waste non-conformances
 prioritise duties
 use emergency and personal protective equipment (PPE)
 written communication skills for:
 documentation, including emergency incident report
 record keeping
Required knowledge
 emergency response procedures, including:
 confined space procedures
 HAZCHEM identification systems

 methods of containment and isolation of emergencies

 site management plan and identification of work areas, including location of:
 alarms
 emergency equipment
 communications equipment
 coding systems
 signalling techniques
 standard emergency procedures
 identification of:
 waste types, streams and characteristics
 waste non-conformances
 waste non-conformance procedures
 waste recovery routes
 procedures for containing segregated waste types, including containment and isolation of
hazardous waste
 emergency waste management processes to facilitate:
 identification of plant and equipment
 operation of plant and equipment
 cleaning and maintenance of plant and equipment
 recycling activity
 OHS requirements relating to:
 chemical storage and decanting
 dangerous goods and hazardous substances
 OHS hierarchy of control
 basic first aid appropriate to likely hazards and risks in work environment
 potential hazards and risks relating to:
 dangerous goods
 potential incidents
 waste containment and segregation techniques
 emergency response procedures
 service requirements, including:
 client requirements
 duty of care
 organisational requirements
 waste management options
 waste management hierarchy
 waste containment and disposal techniques


Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment This unit of competency could be assessed by observation of

practical demonstration in the workplace or in a simulated
environment.
assessment and evidence provide evidence of the required skills and knowledge specified in
required to demonstrate this unit.
competency in this unit In particular the person should demonstrate the ability to:
 identify emergencies
 follow OHS and emergency procedures
 act quickly and implement required processes to overcome
emergencies
 document actions.
Context of and specific Assessment of essential underpinning knowledge may be conducted
resources for assessment in an off-site context. It is to comply with relevant regulatory or
Australian standards’ requirements.
 work plans and approved specifications
 forms and procedures manuals.
Method of assessment The process of responding to a waste emergency must comply with
industry expectations in the particular client environment. If the
environment is narrowly defined or is not representative of industry
needs, it may be necessary to refer to portfolio case studies to assess
competency in responding to a waste emergency.
Assessment methods must:
 satisfy the endorsed Assessment Guidelines of the Property
Services Training Package
 include direct observation of tasks in real or simulated work
conditions, with questioning to confirm the ability to consistently
identify and correctly interpret the essential underpinning
 reinforce the integration of employability skills with workplace
tasks and job roles
 confirm that competency is verified and able to be transferred to
other circumstances and environments.
Guidance information for Reasonable adjustments for people with disabilities must be made to
assessment processes where required. This could include access to

assessment modified equipment and other physical resources, and the provision
of appropriate assessment support.
Assessment processes and techniques should as far as is practical
take into account the language, literacy and numeracy capacity of
the candidate in relation to the competency being assessed.
This unit could be assessed on its own or in combination with other
units relevant to the job function, for example:
 CPPCMN3001B Participate in environmentally sustainable work
practices
 CPPCMN3003A Contribute to workplace safety arrangements.

Range Statement
environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if used in the
performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be present with
training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the candidate, accessibility of
the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be included.
Emergency may include:  chemical reaction

 contamination
 fire
 gas leak
 hazardous waste spill
 fallen powerlines.
Waste types may include:  solid (non-hazardous), e.g. construction and demolition
 liquid (non-hazardous), e.g. chemical and aqueous
 hazardous – regulated, prescribed, quarantined, medical and
clinical
 recoverable resources, e.g. recyclable and green waste.
Organisational  briefing papers
requirements may include  job sheets
information found in:  letters
 memos
 operations manuals
 quality assurance documents
 tender and contract documents
 verbal or written instructions
 work procedures.
Legislation and codes  codes, including:
may include:  Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by
Road and Rail
 industry
 commonwealth, state and territory legislation, including:
 anti-discrimination
 environmental protection
 equal employment opportunity
 freedom of information
 industrial
 OHS
 trade practices
 road laws.
Potential hazards and  damage to plant, vehicle or property

risks are those identified  harm to the environment

by the organisation that  illness or injury to employees, contractors or the public
may lead to:  injuries resulting from manual handling and repetitive work.
Potential hazards and  broken glass
risks may include:  broken metal
 compaction equipment
 contamination
 dust
 fire
 gases and fumes
 hazardous waste (e.g. sharps)
 narrow driveways
 other vehicles and equipment
 overhanging signs
 projectiles
 spark-producing equipment
 unguarded conveyor belts
 weather.
Emergency response  cleaning up
action or procedures may  containing emergency
include:  isolating or shutting down equipment or plant
 evacuation
 first aid
 making site safe
 notifying authorities
 using PPE.
Relevant parties may  emergency services
include:  other affected parties
 organisational personnel
 environmental protection agencies.
Emergency and personal  communications equipment
protective equipment  eye protection, such as goggles and protective glasses
must include:  eyewash kit
 first aid kit
 footwear
 MSDS
 spill kit
 oil absorbent materials
 overalls and protective clothing.

Emergency and personal  breathing apparatus

protective equipment  emergency procedure guides
could also include:  face shield or mask
 gloves
 hard hats.
Personal protective  cleaned and fitted according to organisational requirements,
equipment must be: manufacturer specifications and OHS requirements
 worn when required according to organisational requirements
 stored according to organisational requirements.
Containment and  bunding area
isolation may include:  erecting barricades
 moving vehicle or equipment away from hazardous area
 sealing leaks
 transferring waste
 turning off electricity and gas
 using fire extinguishers
 water-hosing.
Evacuation procedures  emergency procedures manuals
may be found in:  OHS requirements
 organisational requirements
 legislation and codes.
Protecting organisational  collecting details from witnesses
interests may include:  not commenting or admitting liability
 not talking to media.
Clean-up may include:  removing equipment, plant and vehicle from site
 removing and disposing of contaminated soil and liquid
 shovelling
 sweeping out
 using cleaning products
 using high pressure water or air-hosing
 vacuuming.
Contamination may  exposure to sunlight
include:  infestation
 mixing with other waste types
 rot or mould
 waterlogging.
Regulated waste  classification of dangerous goods
identification signage  communications equipment
may include:  first aid
 hazardous class
 HAZCHEM codes

 packaging group number.

Recorded includes:  authorities notified
 cause or suspected cause of emergency
 damage incurred to:
 general public
 equipment
 personnel
 vehicle
 emergency and personal protective equipment used
 emergency response procedures undertaken
 nature of clean-up
 nature, type, source and severity of emergency
 recommendations for preventing future emergencies
 regulatory authority requirements.
Unit Sector(s)
Waste management

Not applicable.

CPPWMT3015A Move waste using loadshifting equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPPWMT3015A Move waste using loadshifting equipment
Revised unit
Unit updated and equivalent to PRMWM15B Move waste using load shifting equipment
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to operate a mobile plant for loading
and unloading waste. It requires the ability to organise the activity and apply safe work
practices.

This unit of competency supports individuals with responsibilities for managing waste during
loadshifting. It includes contributing to the implementation of developed operational
procedures, as well as recognising the need for expert advice.
of endorsement.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1 Prepare for 1.1 Job sheet and schedule are reviewed to identify job
loadshifting. requirements.
1.2 Loadshifting equipment, associated attachments and

emergency and personal protective equipment (PPE)
are selected according to job requirements to maximise
efficiency and effectiveness of transportation.
1.3 Operator’s licence is inspected to ensure it complies

with organisational requirements and relevant
legislation and codes.
1.4 Potential hazards and risks to work are identified and

handled according to organisational emergency response
action or procedures, and occupational health and safety
(OHS) regulations and other relevant legislation and
codes.
2 Perform routine 2.1 Visual check of equipment is conducted to pinpoint

checks on damage, leaks, obstructions, component wear or
loadshifting potential hazards.
equipment.
2.2 Equipment systems are tested to ensure that they comply
with manufacturer specifications and organisational
requirements.
2.3 Service checks are conducted in compliance with

manufacturer specifications to ensure water, oil, fuel, air
pressure and greasing are maintained at designated
levels.
2.4 Emergency and personal protective equipment is

checked to ensure it is functioning adequately.
2.5 Associated equipment is checked to ensure that it is

operational and complies with manufacturer
specifications.
3 Operate 3.1 Equipment is operated and driven in a safe and efficient

loadshifting manner, according to organisational requirements, road
equipment. and traffic regulations, and other legislation and codes.
3.2 Surrounding environment is continuously observed to

identify and avoid or minimise potential hazards.

3.3 Clear communication with relevant personnel is

maintained.
4 Organise for 4.1 Waste to be loaded and checked is identified to ensure

loading. integrity of containment.
4.2 Loading method is determined according to waste

containment type and organisational requirements.
4.3 Equipment is parked or set up in a loading position that

ensures efficiency and safety of loading.
4.4 Barriers and warning signs are erected at loading and

unloading sites to ensure safety of surrounding personnel
legislation.
5 Load and move 5.1 Waste is loaded safely and efficiently according to waste
waste. type in designated area using an approved loading
method to maintain integrity.
5.2 Liquid flow where waste is vacuumed is regulated to

ensure maintenance of constant hose pressure.
5.3 Waste is moved safely and securely according to

organisational requirements, manufacturer specifications
and relevant legislation and codes.
5.4 Visual checks are maintained to identify and remedy

potential hazards.
5.5 Load is checked to ensure it conforms to equipment

capacity requirements, manufacturer specifications and
relevant legislation and codes.
6 Unload waste. 6.1 Waste is unloaded safely and efficiently according to

waste type, in designated area using an approved
unloading method to maintain integrity.
6.2 Liquid flow where waste is vacuumed is regulated to

ensure maintenance of constant hose pressure.
6.3 Visual checks are maintained to identify and remedy

potential hazards during unloading.

6.4 Load is stacked or housed at destination according to

organisational requirements, manufacturer specifications
and relevant legislation and codes.
7 Shut down and 7.1 Equipment is parked or stored in a safe location to avoid
secure loadshifting damage to equipment or obstruction of surrounding site
equipment. activity.
7.2 Shut-down procedures are completed according to

manufacturer specifications and organisational
requirements.
7.3 Equipment is secured and stored to avoid unauthorised

access or use
8 Carry out basic 8.1 Equipment is cleaned to remove debris and

housekeeping contamination and to ensure safe operating
and procedures.
maintenance.
8.2 Service checks are conducted according to

manufacturer specifications to ensure water, oil,
fuel, air pressure and greasing are maintained at
designated levels.
8.3 Equipment faults or defects are reported to

relevant personnel
8.4 Record of moving activities is completed

promptly and according to organisational
requirements.


Required skills
 driving ability to facilitate safe and efficient driving
 numeracy skills to:
 measure weights and volumes
 measure waste
 literacy skills to:
 report waste movements and loading activity
 graduated devices
 procedure guidelines
 specifications
 work requirements and material safety data sheets (MSDS)
 direct traffic
 ask questions
 provide clear information
 listen actively
 identify waste types, including regulated waste and waste non-conformances
 segregate waste types, including potentially hazardous wastes
 apply signalling techniques
 handle waste non-conformances
 identify routes
 organise work methodically
 safely load and unload waste
 use emergency and PPE
 work in confined spaces
 waste identification, including:
 containment of hazardous waste
 isolation
 recording waste sorted

 identifying and sampling waste types

Required knowledge
 driving:
 licence requirements
 road laws
 map reading
 equipment operation to facilitate:
 basic cleaning and maintenance of equipment
 selection of plant and equipment
 waste contaminants
 waste types, streams and characteristics
 loading and unloading methods
 equipment load weight requirements
 types of loading equipment
 waste loading and unloading and moving hazards
 requirements for handling and transporting waste
 waste processing equipment
 waste loading and unloading techniques
 emergency response procedures
 OHS requirements relating to:

Evidence Guide

practical demonstration in the workplace or in a simulated work
environment using loadshifting equipment.
 interpret job sheets
 organise equipment operation
 load safely and efficiently
 observe OHS requirements.
Method of assessment Moving waste using loadshifting equipment must comply with
industry expectations in the particular client environment. If the
environment is narrowly defined or is not representative of industry
needs, it may be necessary to refer to portfolio case studies to assess
competency in the moving of waste.
tasks and job roles
assessment assessment processes where required. This could include access to
modified equipment and other physical resources, and the provision


units relevant to the job function, for example:
 CPPWMT3019A Prepare waste for re-use
 CPPWMT3044A Identify wastes and hazards.

Range Statement
Job sheet and schedule  emergency and PPE requirements

typically include:  job route and sequence
 site contact
 site requirements
 vehicle and associated equipment requirements
 waste type, classification, characteristics and transport
requirements.
Loadshifting equipment  dozers
may include:  earthmoving equipment
 forklifts
 loaders:
 front-end
 rear-end
 tailgate
 trucks:
 articulated
 open-bodied:
 hook lift
 pump
 vacuum
 rigid
 windrow turners.
Emergency and personal  communications equipment
protective equipment  eye protection, such as goggles and protective glasses
must include:  eyewash kit
 first aid kit
 footwear
 gloves
 overalls and protective clothing.
Emergency and personal  breathing apparatus
protective equipment  emergency procedure guides
could also include:  face shields or masks
 hard hats

 MSDS
 spill kit.
Personal protective  cleaned and fitted according to organisational requirements,
equipment must be: manufacturer specifications and OHS requirements
 worn when required according to organisational requirements
 stored according to organisational requirements.
Organisational  briefing papers
requirements may include  job sheets
information found in:  letters
 memos
 operations manuals
 quality assurance documents
 verbal or written instructions
 work procedures.
Relevant legislation and  codes, including:
codes may include:  Australian Code for the Transport of Dangerous Goods by
Road and Rail
 industry
 commonwealth, state and territory legislation, including:
 industrial
 OHS
 trade practices
 road laws.
Potential hazards and  damage to plant, vehicle or property
risks are those identified  harm to the environment
by the organisation that  illness or injury to employees, contractors or the public
may lead to:  injuries resulting from manual handling and repetitive work.
Potential hazards and  broken glass

risks may include:  broken metal
 compaction equipment
 contamination
 dust
 fire
 gases and fumes


 projectiles
 weather.
Emergency response  cleaning up
action or procedures may  containing emergency
include:  isolating or shutting down equipment or plant
 evacuation
 first aid
 making site safe
 notifying authorities
 using PPE.
Relevant personnel may  client
include:  team leader
 team member
 management
 supervisor.
Integrity of containment  contamination
may include checks for:  drum expansion
 gases
 leaching
 leaks
 seals
 spillage
 unstable form.
Loading method may  cart lifter
include:  forklift
 front-end loader
 high pressure vacuum loading
 loading by hand
 shovelling.
Waste type may include:  solid (non-hazardous), e.g. construction and demolition
 liquid (non-hazardous), e.g. chemical and aqueous
clinical
Cleaning of equipment  cleaning products and fluids
may include:  high pressure water or air-hosing
 shovelling

 sweeping out
 using decontamination products
 vacuuming.
Unit Sector(s)
Waste management

Not applicable.

CPPWMT3044A Identify wastes and hazards Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
CPPWMT3044A Identify wastes and hazards
Revised unit
Unit updated and equivalent to PRMWM44B Identify wastes and hazards
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency specifies the outcomes required to identify a range of wastes and
potential hazards and risks that may be present in the work environment.

This unit of competency supports individuals with responsibilities for identifying wastes and
potential hazards and risks in a team environment. It includes following direction, systems
and plans, as well as recognising the need for expert advice.
of endorsement.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1 Identify waste. 1.1 Waste characteristics are identified.
1.2 Types of wastes are differentiated by waste stream or

waste categories.
1.3 Hazardous and dangerous waste and non-conforming

waste are detailed.
1.4 Contaminants present in waste are noted.
1.5 Further information on waste is obtained by questioning

appropriate personnel to ensure correct identification.
2 Identify hazards 2.1 Other potential hazards and risks present in work
and risks. environment are listed.
2.2 Supervisor and team members are informed of job

requirements, hazards and risks.
2.3 Safe work practices that prevent risk behaviour are

outlined to supervisor.
2.4 Emergency response procedures are practised with team

members.


Required skills
 analytical skills to:
 identify waste types and waste non-conformances
 segregate valuable resources in composite materials
 segregate waste types, including potentially hazardous waste
 list potential hazards and risks
 document and keep records
 emergency requirements
 hazard advice
 job sheets
 work requirements and material safety data sheets (MSDS)
 provide information
 ask questions
 apply signalling techniques
 plan and undertake routine tasks
 prioritise duties
 use emergency and personal protective equipment (PPE)
Required knowledge
 waste contaminants
 waste monitoring procedures
 waste non-conformance handling procedures
 waste types
 waste management options

 waste storage requirements

 waste disposal and recovery routes
 procedures for containing segregated waste types, including containment and isolation of
hazardous waste
 emergency response procedures relating to:
 confined space procedures
 duty of care
 identification of work areas, including location of:
 alarms
 emergency equipment
 communications equipment
 coding systems
 environmental agencies
 environmental regulations
 signalling techniques
 waste management hierarchy
 waste containment methods and isolation of emergencies
 occupational health and safety (OHS) requirements relating to:
 chemical storage and decanting
 basic first aid appropriate to likely hazards and risks in work environment
 dangerous goods
 potential incidents

Evidence Guide

practical demonstration in the workplace or in a simulated
environment.
 identify a range of waste streams, hazardous wastes and waste
contaminants
 identify a range of potential hazards and risks present in the
workplace
 observe OHS requirements.
Method of assessment The process of identifying waste and hazards must meet industry
expectations. If the environment is narrowly defined or is not
representative of industry needs, it may be necessary to refer to
portfolio case studies to assess competency in the identification of
waste and hazards.
tasks and job roles
assessment assessment processes where required. This could include access to

modified equipment and other physical resources, and the provision

units of competency relevant to the job function, for example:
 CPPWMT3005A Identify and segregate waste
 CPPWMT3014A Manually sort waste.

Range Statement
Waste characteristics may  density

include:  level of contamination
 quality
 shape
 size
 volume
 weight.
Waste stream may  construction and demolition
include:  dangerous goods
 green waste
 hazardous substances
 municipal waste.
Waste categories may  solid (non-hazardous), e.g. construction and demolition
include:  liquid (non-hazardous), e.g. chemical and aqueous
clinical
Hazardous and  all waste depending on the condition, environment and personal
dangerous waste may exposure
include:  biological products
 blood products
 chemicals
 electrical wiring
 glass
 hospital waste
 leaking containers
 medical waste
 needles and syringes
 oil and petrol.
Non-conforming waste  contamination
may include:  hazardous or dangerous waste
 inferior quality and unacceptable waste streams.
Contaminants may  sunlight
include:  infestation
 mixing waste types

 rot or mould
 waterlogging.
Other potential hazards  damage to plant, vehicle or property
and risks are those that  harm to the environment
may lead to:  illness or injury to employees, contractors or the public
 injuries resulting from manual handling and repetitive work.
Hazards and risks may  broken glass
include:  compaction equipment
 contamination
 dust
 fire
 projectiles
 weather.
Unit Sector(s)
Waste management

Not applicable.

FDFFS2001A Implement the food safety program and procedures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
FDFFS2001A Implement the food safety program and procedures
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge
required to maintain personal hygiene and conduct food
handling, housekeeping and waste disposal related to work
tasks and responsibilities where work involves operation of
production and/or packaging equipment and processes.

Application of the unit This unit is based on and equivalent to the guideline food
safety unit GFSMFSRA Apply and monitor food safety
requirements.
Note that this unit does not apply to the pharmaceutical
industry. Refer to FDFPH2001A Apply Good
Manufacturing Practice procedures.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units

Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017




1. Implement the food 1.1. Food handling requirements are identified
safety program 1.2. Food handling is carried out according to the food
safety program
1.3. Food safety hazards are controlled as required by the
food safety program
1.4. Where food safety control requirements are not met,
the incident is promptly reported and corrective
action is taken
1.5. Food safety information is recorded to meet
requirements of the food safety program
1.6. The workplace is maintained in a clean and tidy
order to meet workplace standards
1.7. Work is conducted in accordance with workplace
environmental guidelines
2. Participate in 2.1. Work area, materials, equipment and product are
maintaining and routinely monitored to ensure compliance with food
improving food safety requirements
safety 2.2. Processes, practices or conditions which could result
in a food safety breach are identified and reported
according to workplace reporting requirements
2.3. Corrective action is taken in accordance with the
food safety program
2.4. Food safety issues are raised with designated
personnel
3. Comply with 3.1. Personal hygiene meets the requirements of the food
personal hygiene safety program
standards 3.2. Health conditions and/or illness are reported as
required by the food safety program
3.3. Clothing and footwear worn is appropriate for the
food handling task and meets the requirements of the
food safety program
3.4. Movement around the workplace complies with the
food safety program


Required skills
Ability to:
 locate and follow workplace information relating to food safety responsibilities
 follow workplace procedures to maintain food safety as required by the food safety
program relating to own work
 monitor food safety hazards as required by the food safety program, including
methods such as visual inspection, sampling and testing
 record results of monitoring, and maintain records as required by the food safety
program
 identify and report situations that do not meet the requirements of the food safety
program and/or could result in unsafe food
 take corrective action as required by food safety program within level of
responsibility
 handle, clean and store equipment, utensils, packaging materials and similar items
according to the requirements of the food safety program as required by work role
 maintain personal hygiene consistent with the food safety program
 take necessary precautions when moving around the workplace and/or from one
task to another to maintain food safety
 wear and maintain appropriate clothing/footwear as required by work tasks and
consistent with the requirements of the food safety program
 report health conditions and illness as appropriate according to the food safety
program
 handle and dispose of out-of-specification or contaminated food, waste and
recyclable material according to food safety program as this requirement relates to
own work responsibility
 maintain the work area in a clean and tidy state
 identify and report signs of pest infestation
 record food safety information in appropriate format
 clean and sanitise equipment according to enterprise procedures
 collect samples and conduct tests according to the food safety program according
to enterprise procedures
 participate in investigating food safety breaches according to enterprise procedures
specified by the organisation, including questioning, active listening, asking for
 work cooperatively within a culturally diverse workforce
Required knowledge

Knowledge of:
 sources of information and expertise on procedures and responsibilities for food
safety relating to own work
 basic concepts of HACCP-based food safety, including identification of hazards
that are likely to occur, establishing appropriate methods of control and confirming
that controls are met
 food safety management arrangements in the workplace, including awareness of
food safety legislation, workplace policies and procedures to implement
responsibilities, understanding the relationship between the quality system and
food safety program, personnel responsible for developing and implementing the
food safety program, the role of internal and external auditors as appropriate,
procedures followed to investigate contamination events, and performance
improvement processes
 awareness of common microbiological, physical and chemical hazards related to
the foods handled in the work area, including the types of hazards likely to occur,
the conditions under which they occur, possible consequences and control methods
to prevent occurrence
 basic understanding of the properties, handling and storage requirements of
ingredients, materials and products handled and used
 suitable standard for materials, measuring devices, equipment and utensils used in
the work area
 food safety requirements related to work responsibilities, including personal
hygiene, requirements and procedures to report illness and safe food handling
practices for own work
 methods used to monitor that food safety is under control, including the purpose of
sampling and taking measurements, such as temperature and pH, and conducting
inspections and tests
 action required in the event of non-compliance (corrective action is typically
described in the food safety program and/or related workplace information)
 purpose of keeping records and the recording requirements of the food safety
program
 methods used in the workplace to isolate or quarantine food which may be unsafe
 product and ingredient traceability procedures, such as product recall where
required by work responsibilities
 clothing and footwear requirements for working in and/or moving between food
handling areas
 personal clothing maintenance, laundering and storage requirements
 appropriate bandages and dressings to be used when undertaking food handling
 housekeeping requirements and responsibilities relating to own work, and use and
storage of housekeeping/cleaning equipment where relevant
 procedures to follow in the event of pest sighting or discovery of infestation
 purpose and importance of cleaning and sanitation procedures
 waste collection, recycling and handling procedures relevant to own work
responsibilities

 cleaning and sanitation procedures where relevant

 impact of rework handling/addition on food safety where relevant
 sampling and test methods where relevant


Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction with the
Overview of assessment Assessment must be carried out in a manner that

recognises the cultural and literacy requirements of the
assessee and is appropriate to the work performed.
Competence in this unit must be achieved in accordance
with food safety standards and regulations.
Critical aspects for assessment and Evidence of ability to:

evidence required to demonstrate  identify own responsibilities with regard to food
competency in this unit safety
 identify food safety risks in the workplace and the
control measures used to manage them
 apply control measures in own work
 monitor compliance with food safety standards
 identify and act on non-compliances and participate
in improving safety
 maintain required standards of personal hygiene
 complete workplace records as required
 apply safe work practices and identify OHS hazards
and controls
 apply food safety procedures.
Context of and specific resources for Assessment must occur in a real or simulated workplace
assessment where the assessee has access to:
 food safety information relating to the workplace,
including a food safety program outlining food safety
hazards and control methods. It may also include
company policies, procedures and codes of practice,
such as:
 Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP)
 related work instructions and procedures
 work tasks and responsibilities
 appropriate clothing and related apparatus
 reporting and monitoring systems
 cleaning and sanitation policies and procedures as
required
 sampling and test procedures and related
equipment as required.

EVIDENCE GUIDE
Method of assessment This unit should be assessed together with other units of
competence relevant to the function or work role.
Examples could be:
 FDFOP2004A Clean and sanitise equipment
 FDFOP2013A Apply sampling procedures
 FDFOP2063A Apply quality systems and procedures
 MSL973001A Perform basic tests.
Guidance information for To ensure consistency in one's performance, competency
assessment should be demonstrated on more than one occasion over
a period of time in order to cover a variety of
circumstances, cases and responsibilities, and where
possible, over a number of assessment activities.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
A food safety program A food safety program is a written document that

specifies how a business will control all food
safety hazards that may be reasonably expected to
occur in all food handling operations of the food
business. The food safety program and related
procedures must comply with legal requirements
of the food safety standards and must be
communicated to all food handlers. Where no
food safety program is in place, food safety
requirements may be specified in general
operating procedures
Workplace information Workplace information may be provided in:

 food safety program
 standard operating procedures (SOPs)
 specifications
 log sheets
 written or verbal instruction
Food handling Food handling refers to:
 food receipt and storage
 food preparation
 cooking, holding, cooling, chilling and
reheating
 packaging, disposal
Products/materials handled and Products/materials handled and stored can
stored include:
 raw materials
 ingredients
 consumables
 part-processed product
 finished product
 cleaning materials

RANGE STATEMENT
Examples of a breach of food Examples of a breach of food safety procedures

safety procedures could include:
 failure to check delivery temperatures of
potentially hazardous chilled food
 failure to place temperature-sensitive food in
temperature controlled storage conditions
promptly
 failure to wash hands when required
 use of cloths for unsuitable purposes
Responsibility for monitoring Responsibility for monitoring food safety,
food safety identifying breaches in food safety procedures
and taking corrective action relates to own tasks
and responsibilities and occurs in the context of
the food safety program in the workplace
Monitoring Monitoring describes the methods used to confirm

that a food safety hazard is in control, such as:
 taking temperatures
 collecting samples
 conducting visual inspections
 conducting other tests as required
Food safety hazard A food safety hazard is a biological, chemical or
physical agent in, or condition of, food that has
the potential to cause an adverse health effect
Hygiene requirements Minimum personal hygiene requirements are

specified by the food safety program. At a
minimum this must meet legal requirements as set
out in the Food Safety Standard 3.2.2, Division
4:14 and/or state or territory
legislation/regulations
Reporting of health conditions Reporting of health conditions and illnesses

and illnesses requirements requirements are specified by the food safety
program. At a minimum this must meet legal
requirements as set out in Food Safety Standard
3.2.2, Division 4:13 and/or state or territory
Appropriate clothing and Appropriate clothing and footwear depends on

footwear work requirements. It should be designed to
ensure that the body and clothing itself does not
contaminate food or surfaces likely to come into

RANGE STATEMENT
contact with food. Examples of clothing designed
to prevent contamination by the body include:
 purpose designed overalls or uniforms
 hair-nets
 beard snoods
 gloves
 overshoes
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Food safety
Competency field
Competency field
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

FDFFS3001A Monitor the implementation of quality and food safety programs Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
FDFFS3001A Monitor the implementation of quality and food

safety programs
November 2011: minor typographical error corrected.
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge
required to provide a leadership role in supporting
day-to-day implementation of the food safety/quality
programs in a work area. It also involves supporting others
to implement the requirements of the food safety/quality
procedures.

Application of the unit This unit applies to those with formal responsibility for
others, and to those required to model workplace policies
and procedures but who have no formal management role.
This unit is based on and equivalent to the guideline food
safety unit GFSOFSA Oversee the day-to-day
implementation of food safety in the workplace.
Note that this unit does not apply to the pharmaceutical
industry. Refer to FDFPH3001A Monitor and maintain
Good Manufacturing Practice procedures.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units
FDFFS2001A Implement the food safety program

and procedures




1. Ensure others in the 1.1. Hazard control and clothing and equipment
work area are able to appropriate to work requirements are available,
meet quality and functional and correctly fitted
food safety 1.2. Information on food safety/quality responsibilities
requirements and procedures is current, accessible and
communicated to others in the work area
1.3. Information about identified hazards and the
outcomes of risk assessment and risk control
procedures is accessible and communicated to others
in the work area
1.4. Food safety/quality hazards and control measures
used in the work area can be identified by those in the
work area
1.5. Mentoring and coaching support is available to
support individuals/groups to implement quality and
safe food handling procedures
1.6. Training needs are identified and addressed within
level of responsibility
2. Monitor observance 2.1. Work procedures in the work area are clearly
of quality standards defined, documented and followed
and food safety 2.2. Deviation from identified procedures is identified,
programs in the work reported and addressed within level of responsibility
area 2.3. Personal behaviour is consistent with workplace
policies and procedures that support food safety and
quality
2.4. Food safety and/or quality hazards are identified and
reported according to workplace procedures
2.5. Food safety and quality information is recorded to
meet workplace reporting requirements
2.6. The work area is maintained according to
housekeeping standards
2.7. Work is conducted in accordance with workplace
environmental guidelines
3. Take corrective 3.1. Workplace procedures for responding to quality and
action in response to food safety non-compliance are promptly
quality and food implemented
safety 3.2. Hazardous events are investigated to identify cause
non-compliance
3.3. Control measures to prevent recurrence and minimise
risks of hazardous events are implemented
4. Maintain and 4.1. Processes or conditions which could result in a


improve quality and breach of food safety procedures or quality
food safety in the specifications are identified, assessed, removed or
work area and/reported within level of responsibility and
according to workplace procedure
4.2. Risk assessments are conducted and appropriate
control measures are identified and implemented in
the work area
4.3. Recommendations arising from risk assessments are
implemented within level of responsibility
4.4. Inadequacies in control measures are identified and
reported according to company reporting
requirements
4.5. Matters raised relating to quality/food safety are
promptly resolved and/or referred to appropriate
personnel
4.6. The work group is consulted and advised of
quality/food safety matters relevant to work role
4.7. Opportunities for improving food safety and quality
are identified and raised with relevant personnel
4.8. Procedures are developed or revised to support
effective control of quality and food safety hazards
4.9. Quality/food safety records are reviewed to ensure
they are complete and meet the quality system, food
safety program and legal requirements


Required skills
Ability to:
 access, interpret and communicate information about the food safety program,
quality requirements and related procedures to others in the work area
 demonstrate two-way communication, including active listening and responding
constructively to feedback
 provide access to and maintain current food safety/quality documentation
 model safe food handling and quality practices and procedures to achieve required
outcomes, including demonstrating:
 work procedures that meet the requirements of quality and food safety
 cleaning and sanitising equipment
 sampling and testing as appropriate according to quality and food safety
requirements
 maintaining personal hygiene
 wearing appropriate clothing and footwear as required by the work task
 following procedures when moving within and between work areas
 reporting health conditions and illnesses according to workplace procedures
 handling, cleaning and storing equipment, utensils and packaging materials as
appropriate
 identify control points in the work area and demonstrate monitoring techniques
used (control points include critical, quality and regulatory control points)
 support others to meet quality standards and follow food safety procedures by
ensuring that all personnel in the work area receive the information required and
have the necessary skills and equipment to carry out their responsibilities
 identify, report and/or address food safety/quality non-compliance in an
appropriate and timely manner within level of responsibility
 determine when and how to make adjustments to maintain output within level of
responsibility
 identify, report and/or address food safety/quality training and development needs
of others in the work area
 ensure that appropriate and timely action is taken in response to non-compliance
 handle and dispose of out-of-specification or contaminated food, waste and
recyclable material according to food safety program as this requirement relates to
own work responsibility
 participate in investigations of non-compliance and risk assessment processes
 participate in consultation processes to improve quality and food safety outcomes
in the workplace


 review practice and procedures to implement recommendations arising from risk
assessments and/or improvement proposals within level of responsibility, such as
collecting and analysing food safety/quality records, reviewing operating
procedures and communicating changes to others in the work area
 ensure that housekeeping standards are maintained and that equipment is in
operational order, such as participating in the management of equipment
calibration
 monitor the recording of quality and food safety information to confirm that
records accurately reflect performance and meet the requirements of the food
safety and quality programs
 participate in food recall procedures as required, within level of responsibility
 facilitate consultation processes according to enterprise procedures
 lead investigations of quality and food safety incidents according to enterprise
procedures
 work cooperatively within a culturally diverse workforce
Required knowledge
Knowledge of:
 sources of information and expertise on procedures and responsibilities for food
safety relevant to the workplace
 principles of a HACCP-based approach to managing food safety, including
identifying hazards that are likely to occur, establishing appropriate methods of
control and confirming that controls are met
 basic concepts of quality assurance including hazards, risk assessment and control
methods
 company programs and systems in place to manage and support quality and food
safety in the workplace, which may involve separate or integrated programs,
including systems for maintaining and updating documents, such as operating
procedures and specifications
 clothing and footwear requirements for working in and/or moving between food
handling areas, including personal clothing maintenance, laundering and storage
requirements
 appropriate bandages and dressings to be used when undertaking food handling
 housekeeping requirements and responsibilities relating to own work, where
relevant this includes use and storage of housekeeping/cleaning equipment
 procedures to follow in the event of pest sighting or discovery of infestation
 purpose and importance of cleaning and sanitation procedures
 legal obligations for food safety and quality, including an awareness of government
legislation and customer requirements
 food safety and quality responsibilities and requirements relating to the work area
 awareness of common micro biological, physical and chemical hazards related to
the foods handled in the work area, including the types of hazards likely to occur,
the conditions under which they occur, possible consequences and control methods


to prevent occurrence
 suitable standard for materials, measuring devices, equipment and utensils used in
the work area
 properties of food and ingredients used that affect food safety, including an
understanding of related storage, processing and handling requirements
 current technical and process knowledge required to participate in investigations of
food safety/quality hazards, risks and incidents within level of responsibility,
including an understanding of common micro biological, physical and chemical
hazards, related control methods and the way changes in equipment and/or
processing methods can affect food safety and quality outcomes
 procedures for identifying unsafe and/or non-conforming product, including
control points and evidence of out-of-specification product or materials
 sampling procedures, test methods and inspections
 options for responding to non-compliance, including legal responsibility, risk
management and cost/implications of different responses and level of responsibility
for decision making
 methods used in the workplace to isolate or quarantine food which may be unsafe
 waste collection, recycling, handling and disposal, including handling/disposal
requirements for different types of waste, such as hazardous waste where relevant
 traceability and recall procedures within level of responsibility
 documentation system and procedures, including record keeping to meet both
company and legal requirements, procedures for developing and/or reviewing
workplace procedures, and document control systems used in the workplace
 auditing arrangements, roles and responsibilities as they relate to own work
responsibilities, such as internal and external audit processes
 appropriate communication skills and techniques to convey information on quality
and food safety requirements to others in the workplace
 cleaning and sanitation procedures where relevant
 impact of rework handling/addition on food safety where relevant
 sampling and test methods where relevant
 facilitation and consultation techniqueswhere relevant

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Overview of assessment Assessment must be carried out in a manner that

recognises the cultural and literacy requirements of the
assessee and is appropriate to the work performed.
Competence in this unit must be achieved in accordance
with food safety standards and regulations.
Critical aspects for assessment and Evidence of ability to:

evidence required to demonstrate  describe quality and food safety program, risks and
competency in this unit control measures of the work area
 confirm that control measures are in place and that
personnel in the work area are equipped and
informed to implement programs
 identify, address and follow up on non-compliances
 identify causes of non compliances
 conduct risk assessments and recommend responsive
action
 provide support to others to implement the programs
 complete and maintain documentation.
Context of and specific resources for Assessment must occur in a real or simulated workplace
assessment where the assessee has access to:
 food safety program for the work area which
identifies critical control points, control measures and
corrective action
 quality policy, system and procedures
 work area or system in which quality and food safety
practices and procedures are to be monitored
 personal protective clothing and equipment as
required
 review/audit arrangements
 reporting and monitoring systems.
Method of assessment This unit should be assessed together with other units of
competence relevant to the function or work role.
Examples could be:
 FDFPPL3001A Participate in improvement processes
 FDFPPL3004A Lead work teams and groups
 BSBRES401A Analyse and present research

EVIDENCE GUIDE
information.
Guidance information for To ensure consistency in one's performance, competency
assessment should be demonstrated on more than one occasion over
a period of time in order to cover a variety of
circumstances, cases and responsibilities, and where
possible, over a number of assessment activities.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Work responsibilities Work responsibilities may include formal or

informal responsibility for modelling appropriate
quality/food safety policies and procedures and
providing a support role to others in the work area
Food safety program A food safety program is a written document that

specifies how a business will control all food
safety hazards that may be reasonably expected to
occur in all food handling operations of the food
business. The food safety program and related
procedures must comply with legal requirements
of the food safety standards and must be
communicated to all food handlers. Where no food
safety program is in place, food safety
requirements may be specified in general
Quality systems Quality systems may be externally accredited,

such as an ISO system, or internally designed and
managed
Workplace information Workplace information may be provided in:

 food safety and quality policies and programs
 standard operating procedures (SOPs)
 specifications
 log sheets
 written or verbal instruction incorporating
food safety and quality requirements
Incidents A food safety incident is:
 a situation where the safe limits or parameters
identified by the food safety program are not
met
A quality incident is:
 a situation where the quality limits or
parameters identified in specifications or

RANGE STATEMENT
processing instructions are not met
Monitoring Monitoring describes the methods used to confirm
that a food safety or quality hazard is in control,
such as:
 taking temperatures
 collecting samples
 conducting visual inspections
 additional testing as required
Responsibility for identifying Responsibility for identifying breaches of food
breaches of food safety safety procedures and taking corrective action
procedures occurs in the context of the food safety program
and within scope of responsibility
Responsibility for identifying Responsibility for identifying non-compliance

non-compliance against quality against quality standards occurs within the context
standards of defined standards or specifications and relates
to work area
Personal hygiene requirements Minimum personal hygiene requirements are

specified by the food safety program. At a
minimum this must meet legal requirements as set
out in the Food Safety Standard 3.2.2, Division
4:14 and/or state or territory
Reporting of health conditions Reporting of health conditions and illnesses

and illnesses requirements are specified by the food safety
program. At a minimum this must meet legal
requirements as set out in Food Safety Standard
3.2.2, Division 4:13 and/or state or territory
Operator responsibilities The operator at this level may not have direct
responsibility for overseeing the
training/development of team members. At a
minimum they must be able to identify
development needs of others in the work area and
refer this information to the relevant personnel.
The operator at this level may not have
responsibility for independently assessing risks
and determining the effectiveness of control
measures. However, they would be expected to
observe day-to-day effectiveness and participate in
assessment and review processes. Responsibilities

RANGE STATEMENT
at this level may include facilitating consultation
processes within level of responsibility
Record keeping Record keeping complies with customer, legal and

food safety program requirements
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Food safety
Competency field
Competency field
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

FPICOT3261 Transport forestry logs using trucks Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
FPICOT3261 Transport forestry logs using trucks
Replaces FPICOT3226B, Not Equivalent
Unit Descriptor
Unit This unit describes the outcomes required to drive log trucks to or from a
descriptor forestry harvesting site, facilitate log loading and unloading, and deliver logs to
their intended destination according to organisational procedures and
regulations.
General workplace legislative and regulatory requirements apply to this unit.
Specific licences and certification may be required, subject to enterprise
requirements.

Application of The unit involves transporting forestry logs using trucks in a variety of work
the unit settings, including forest environments, landings, log dumps, saw mills,
wood chip mills, veneer mills, board/plywood mills and other settings, such
as farms and agriculture.
The skills and knowledge required for competent workplace performance are
to be used within the scope of the person’s job and authority.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.

This unit contains employability skills


Not applicable.


Elements describe the Performance criteria describe the performance needed to demonstrate
essential outcomes of a achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used,
unit of competency. further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge
section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be
consistent with the evidence guide.
1. Prepare to transport 1.1. Appropriate work/occupational health and safety (WHS/OHS),
logs environmental and organisational policies and procedures
relevant to transporting forestry logs using trucks are identified
and followed
1.2 Logging sites and logs to be transported are identified from
schedules, work orders or harvesting site personnel
1.3. Coupe map is located and examined for truck access areas
1.4. Work order and/or schedules are reviewed and clarified with
appropriate personnel, as required
1.5. Truck, ancillary equipment, accessories and/or configuration
requirements relevant to work order and load build are located
and availability is confirmed
1.6. Transportation documentation required to comply with
legislation related to driving hours, load limits and dimensions is
received and checked
2. Establish route for log 2.1. Route is selected and its suitability to enter and exit coupe is
truck confirmed with appropriate personnel to ensure minimal
environmental impact and site protection
2.2. Transport routes are communicated and confirmed with
appropriate personnel to ensure the most efficient, safe, secure
and legal movement of forestry logs
2.3. Information on height, width and load limits of road
infrastructure, environmental constraints and other restrictions
are adhered to, where necessary
2.4. Time required to transport logs is estimated and confirmed with
relevant personnel accounting for fatigue management legislation
and guidelines
3. Facilitate log truck 3.1. Access is identified and manoeuvring approach established with
loading worksite personnel for loading areas
3.2. Truck and/or configuration are positioned to avoid site and
equipment hazards and to maximise load safety and security
while loading
3.3. Log positioning equipment is placed and checked for planned
loading, and is reset if necessary
3.4. Safe loading procedures are agreed to with relevant worksite


personnel and monitored to ensure load meets transport
3.5. Communication between driver and machine operators is
established and maintained to determine safe location when
loading logs
3.6. Load is checked and feedback provided to loader operator, as
required, to ensure safe transport
4. Secure logs prior to 4.1. Load is secured with sufficient number and type of securing
transport devices as per loading guidelines and transport regulatory
requirements
4.2. Logs are re-tensioned as required
4.3. Overhang warning devices and signage are fitted to load to
comply with transport regulatory requirements
5. Transport logs 5.1. Logs are transported following planned or modified route with
consideration for road surfaces, conditions and fatigue
management legislation and guidelines
5.2. Condition of roads and tracks is monitored, and unexpected
ground, water, vegetation or other environmental conditions are
reported to appropriate personnel
5.3. Truck is operated and driven to manufacturer specifications and
legislative requirements using primary and subsidiary controls
as appropriate to conditions
5.4. Truck gauges and warning devices are monitored through
observation of performance to detect operating faults
5.5. Operating faults are identified, recorded and reported, and
responded to as necessary according to organisational
requirements to ensure equipment is safely operated within
manufacturer specifications and safety regulations
5.6. Periodic load safety checks are conducted and load is
re-tensioned according to statutory requirements and road
conditions
5.7. Communication methods with other drivers and road users are
established and operated during log transport to inform location
of truck and possible hazards
5.8. Communication channels are kept open in line with
organisational arrangements to ensure location is known at all
times so that timely emergency assistance can be provided if
required
6. Complete log transport 6.1. Site procedures for unloading are established with appropriate
operations for personnel and site inductions are completed
unloading 6.2. Truck is directed to and manoeuvred into planned position for
unloading


6.3. Truck is parked in designated area as instructed by appropriate
personnel to avoid site and equipment hazards
6.4. Truck and trailer are shut down and truck is secured according to
manufacturer specifications and site requirements
6.5. Load is inspected for log movement and provision is made to
support logs that cannot be controlled when released
6.6. Safe location and safe unloading zones are identified and
adhered to when removing logs according to site unloading
procedures
6.7. Securing devices for load restraint are released in correct
sequence for truck, trailer and/or load configuration
6.8. Log shifting process and truck operations, including faults, are
recorded and reported to appropriate personnel
6.9. Workplace records and documentation are completed and
maintained according to workplace procedures
6.10. Truck and trailer are made safe for return journey to coupe


This describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level required for this unit.
Required skills
 Technical skills to:
 use and maintain relevant tools, machinery and equipment
 efficiently and safely transport forestry logs using trucks
 Communication skills to:
 use appropriate communication and interpersonal techniques with colleagues and others
 use skills, including questioning, active listening, asking for clarification, and seeking
advice when required
 Literacy skills to:
 record and report workplace information, including log books, incident reports, and
transport routes
 maintain documentation
 Numeracy skills to:
 calculate load sizes
 record and estimate weights
 calculate work and rest times
 calculate load restraint requirements
 Problem-solving skills to:
 identify problems and equipment faults
 demonstrate appropriate response procedures
 determine appropriate haulage routes
 Map reading skills to interpret coupe and road transport maps
Required knowledge
 WHS/OHS, environmental, and organisational policies, procedures and established safe
practices relevant to the full range of processes for the transport of forestry logs using
trucks
 Environmental protection requirements, including noise levels, emissions, damage to
habitat, safe disposal of waste material, and minimisation of carbon emissions
 Environmental risks and hazards associated with the transport of forestry logs using trucks
 Energy efficient practices, including minimising fuel consumption
 Scheduling and routing procedures
 Transport regulatory requirements relating to the transport of forestry logs
 Truck capabilities and capacities
 Statutory road regulations
 Load restraint standards and techniques
 Safe log loading and unloading methods and techniques, including load restraint
 Established communication channels and protocols
 Fatigue management legislation and guidelines
 Problem identification and resolution strategies and common fault finding techniques
 Types of tools and equipment used for the transport of forestry logs, and procedures for
their safe use, operation and maintenance
 Safe manual handling techniques and/or equipment

 Applicable fall from heights regulations and compliance requirements

 Appropriate mathematical procedures for calculating load sizes, estimating and recording
weights, load restraint requirements, and work and rest times
 Procedures for recording and reporting workplace information

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must

be able to provide evidence that they can safely transport
forestry logs using trucks according to organisational
requirements.
evidence required to demonstrate unit must be relevant to, and satisfy, all of the
competency in this unit requirements of the elements of this unit and include
demonstration of:
 following appropriate WHS/OHS, environmental and
organisational policies and procedures relevant to
transporting forestry logs using trucks
 planning forestry log movement in line with
 observing and facilitating loading and unloading log
truck to organisational requirements
 securing forestry logs prior to transport according to
legislative and organisational requirements
 following legal requirements as well as organisational
policies and procedures relevant to transporting
forestry logs
 completing documentation required by workplace
personnel to complete the movement of forestry logs.
Context of and specific resources  Competency is to be assessed in the workplace
for assessment  Assessment is to occur under standard and authorised
work practices, safety and environmental constraints
 Assessment of required knowledge, other than
confirmatory questions, will usually be conducted in
an off-site context
 Assessment is to comply with relevant regulatory or
Australian Standards requirements
 The following resources should be made available:
 workplace location
 materials and equipment relevant to undertaking work
applicable to this unit
 specifications and work instructions
Method of assessment  Assessment must satisfy the endorsed Assessment
Guidelines of the FPI11 Training Package
 Assessment methods must confirm consistency and
accuracy of performance (over time and in a range of

workplace relevant contexts) together with

application of required knowledge
 Assessment must be by direct observation of tasks,
with questioning on required knowledge and at least
one other type of evidence i.e. third party report and it
must also reinforce the integration of employability
skills
 Assessment methods must confirm the ability to
access and correctly interpret and apply the required
knowledge
 Assessment may be applied under project-related
conditions (real or simulated) and require evidence of
process
 Assessment must confirm a reasonable inference that
competency is able not only to be satisfied under the
particular circumstance, but is able to be transferred
to other circumstances
 Assessment may be in conjunction with assessment of
other units of competency relevant to the industry
sector, workplace and job role
 The assessment environment should not disadvantage
the candidate
 Assessment practices should take into account any
relevant language or cultural issues related to
Aboriginality, gender or language backgrounds other
than English
 Where the participant has a disability, reasonable
adjustment may be applied during assessment
 Language and literacy demands of the assessment
task should not be higher than those of the work role
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
RANGE STATEMENT
Work/occupational health and are to be in accordance with applicable commonwealth,

safety (WHS/OHS) requirements: state or territory legislation and regulations, and
organisational safety policies and procedures, and may

RANGE STATEMENT
include:
 personal protective equipment and clothing
 safety equipment
 first-aid equipment
 fire-fighting equipment
 fatigue management
 hazard and risk control
 elimination of hazardous materials and substances
 safe forest practices, including required actions
relating to forest fire
 manual handling, including shifting, lifting and
carrying
 chain of responsibility
Environmental requirements may  legislation
include:  organisational policies and procedures
 energy efficiency
 workplace practices
Organisational requirements may  legal
include:  organisational and site guidelines
 policies and procedures relating to own role and
responsibility
 procedural manuals
 quality and continuous improvement processes and
standards
 WHS/OHS, emergency and evacuation procedures
 ethical standards
 recording and reporting requirements
 equipment use, maintenance and storage
requirements
 environmental management requirements (waste
disposal, recycling and reuse guidelines)
Work orders may include:  instructions for equipment allocation and usage,
location and intended activity to designated
personnel
 supervisors
 suppliers
 clients
 colleagues
 managers
 schedulers

RANGE STATEMENT
Truck may include:  rigid or articulated log trucks

the following:
 semi-trailers
 jinkers
 quad-dogs
 B doubles
 two-bay skeletal trucks
Ancillary equipment may include:  safety fittings
 load restraint devices
 head boards
 cab guards
Accessories may include:  tools
 records
 first aid kits
 binders
 chains
Configuration is to include:  a truck and trailer combination
Load build: is to include positioning of logs on truck so as to avoid:

 uneven weight distribution
 instability or uncontrolled collapse of the load
during loading or unloading
must also take into account:
 requirements for trailer rigidity
 turning clearance
 overhang
 projection above stanchions
 crowning
 weight distribution on truck and trailer axles
 contact with bolsters, stanchions and other logs
Transportation documentation may  transport permits
include:  gazette notices
 information booklets
 maps
Communication may include:  verbal and non-verbal language
 questioning to clarify and confirm understanding

RANGE STATEMENT
 use of positive, confident and cooperative language
 use of language and concepts appropriate to
individual social and cultural differences
 control of tone of voice
 body language
Road infrastructure may include:  sealed or unsealed roads
 established tracks
Environmental constraints may  soil type
include:  access
 slope
 weather conditions
Other restrictions may include:  load height
 weight
 overhang
Log positioning equipment may  bolsters
include:  slippers
 stanchions
 chocks
Securing devices may include:  dogs and chains
 binders/straps
 webbing
 lashings and winches
 auto-tensioning devices
Overhang warning devices may  flags
include:  lights
 reflectors
 signs
Environmental conditions may  soil and water protection
include:  ground hazards and obstacles
 wind and dust
 fog and rain
Primary controls may include:  power
 brakes
 steering
 speed
 position
 load reaction
 gear selection
Subsidiary controls may include:  differential lock

RANGE STATEMENT
 centre tyre inflation (CTI) power dividers
Gauges and warning devices may  alarms
include:  lights
 buzzers
Records and reports: may include:
 scheduling and coordination outcomes
 log movement
 despatch outcomes
 storage locations
 quality outcomes
 hazards
 incidents
 equipment malfunctions
may be:
 manual
 work diary
 computer-based system
 other appropriate organisational communication
system
Re-tensioning is to include:  re-tightening of the chains, binders and other load
restraint devices
Communication methods may  two-way radio
include:  hands-free mobile phones
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.

Not applicable.

HLTAID001 Provide cardiopulmonary resuscitation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
HLTAID001 Provide cardiopulmonary resuscitation
Release Notes
Release 5 Updated:
 assessor requirements statement
 foundation skills lead in statement
 licensing statement
 modification history to reflect 2012 standards
Equivalent outcome.
Release 4 Updated mapping information. Changes to assessment requirements.

Equivalent outcome.
Release 3 Updated mapping information. Equivalent outcome.
Release 1 This version was released in HLT Health Training Package release 1.0
and meets the requirements of the 2012 Standards for Training
Packages.
Significant changes to elements and performance criteria.
Revised evidence requirements, including volume and frequency of
assessment.

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to perform cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR) in line with the Australian Resuscitation Council (ARC) Guidelines.
This unit applies to all workers who may be required to provide CPR, in a range of situations,
including community and workplace settings.
Specific licensing /regulatory requirements relating to this competency, including

requirements for refresher training should be obtained from the relevant
national/state/territory Work Health and Safety Regulatory Authorities.

Elements define the essential Performance criteria specify the level of performance
outcomes. needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1. Respond to an emergency 1.1 Recognise an emergency situation

situation 1.2 Identify, assess and minimise immediate hazards to
health and safety of self and others
1.3 Assess the casualty and recognise the need for CPR
1.4 Seek assistance from emergency response services
2. Perform CPR procedures 2.1 Perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation in accordance

with ARC guidelines
2.2 Display respectful behaviour towards casualty
2.3 Operate automated external defibrillator (AED)
according to manufacturer’s instructions

3. Communicate details of the 3.1 Accurately convey incident details to emergency

incident response services
3.2 Report details of incident to workplace supervisor as
appropriate
3.3 Maintain confidentiality of records and information
in line with statutory and/or organisational policies
Foundation Skills
The Foundation Skills describe those required skills (language, literacy, numeracy and
employment skills) that are essential to performance.
Foundation skills essential to performance are explicit in the performance criteria of this
unit of competency.

No equivalent unit.
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=ced1390f-48d9-4ab0-bd50-b015e
5485705

Assessment Requirements for HLTAID001 Provide cardiopulmonary resuscitation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID001 Provide

cardiopulmonary resuscitation
Release Notes
Release 5 Updated:
Equivalent outcome.

Equivalent outcome.
Packages.
Significant changes to elements and performance criteria.
Revised evidence requirements, including volume and frequency of
assessment.

job role.
There must be evidence that the candidate has completed the following tasks in line with
state/territory regulations, first aid codes of practice, Australian Resuscitation Council (ARC)
guidelines and workplace procedures:
 Followed DRSABCD in line with ARC guidelines, including:

 performed at least 2 minutes of uninterrupted single rescuer cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR) (5 cycles of both compressions and ventilations) on an adult
resuscitation manikin placed on the floor
 performed at least 2 minutes of uninterrupted single rescuer CPR (5 cycles both
compressions and ventilations) on an infant resuscitation manikin placed on a firm
surface
 responded appropriately in the event of regurgitation or vomiting
 managed the unconscious breathing casualty
 followed single rescue procedure, including the demonstration of a rotation of
operators with minimal interruptions to compressions
 followed the prompts of an automated external defibrillator (AED)
 Responded to at least one simulated first aid scenario contextualised to the candidate’s
workplace/community setting, including:
 demonstrated safe manual handling techniques
 provided an accurate verbal or written report of the incident

Knowledge Evidence
 State/Territory regulations, first aid codes of practice and workplace procedures including:
 ARC Guidelines relevant to the provision of CPR
 safe work practices to minimise risks and potential hazards
 infection control principles and procedures, including use of standard precautions
 requirements for currency of skill and knowledge
 Legal, workplace and community considerations, including:
 awareness of potential need for stress-management techniques and available support
following an emergency situation
 respectful behaviour towards a casualty
 own skills and limitations
 consent
 privacy and confidentiality requirements
 importance of debriefing
 Considerations when providing CPR, including:
 airway obstruction due to body position
 appropriate duration and cessation of CPR
 appropriate use of an AED
 chain of survival
 standard precautions
 Basic anatomy and physiology relating to:
 how to recognise a person is not breathing normally
 chest
 response/consciousness
 upper airway and effect of positional change

Skills must be demonstrated working individually in an environment that provides realistic
in-depth, industry-validated scenarios and simulations to assess candidates’ skills and
knowledge.
Assessment resources must include:

 adult and infant resuscitation manikins in line with ARC Guidelines for the purpose of
assessment of CPR procedures
 AED training device
 workplace injury, trauma and/or illness record, or other appropriate workplace incident
report form
Simulated assessment environments must simulate the real-life working environment where
these skills and knowledge would be performed, with all the relevant equipment and resources
of that working environment.
Assessor Requirements
In addition hold current first aid certificate HLTAID003 or higher.
Links
5485705

HLTAID002 Provide basic emergency life support Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments
Release 4 Updated:
Equivalent outcome.

Equivalent outcome.
Release 2 Minor corrections to formatting to improve readability. Equivalent

competency outcome.
Packages.
Significant changes to elements and performance criteria, changes to
scope of unit. Changes to evidence requirements relative to revised
scope of unit.

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to recognise and respond to
life-threatening emergencies in line with the Australian Resuscitation Council (ARC)
Guidelines.
This unit applies to all workers who may be required to provide an emergency response in a
range of situations, including community and workplace settings.


Elements define the essential Performance criteria specify the level of

outcomes. performance needed to demonstrate achievement
of the element.
1. Respond to an emergency situation 1.1 Recognise an emergency situation

1.2 Identify, assess and minimise immediate
hazards to health and safety of self and others
1.3 Assess the casualty and recognise the need for
first aid response
1.4 Assess the situation and seek assistance from
emergency response services

Elements define the essential Performance criteria specify the level of

outcomes. performance needed to demonstrate achievement
of the element.
2. Apply appropriate first aid 2.1 Perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)

procedures in accordance with ARC guidelines
2.2 Provide first aid in accordance with established
first aid principles
2.4 Obtain consent from casualty where possible
2.5 Use available resources and equipment to
make the casualty as comfortable as possible
2.6 Operate first aid equipment according to
manufacturer’s instructions
2.7 Monitor the casualty’s condition and respond
in accordance with first aid principles
3. Communicate details of the incident 3.1 Accurately convey incident details to

3.2 Report details of incident to workplace
supervisor as appropriate
3.3 Maintain confidentiality of records and
information in line with statutory and/or
organisational policies
Foundation Skills
unit of competency.


No equivalent unit.
Links
5485705

Assessment Requirements for HLTAID002 Provide basic emergency life support Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID002 Provide basic

emergency life support
Release Comments
Release 4 Updated:
Equivalent outcome.

Equivalent outcome.

competency outcome.
Packages.
scope of unit. Changes to evidence requirements relative to revised
scope of unit.

job role.

surface
 followed the prompts of an Automated External Defibrillator (AED)
 Responded to at least one simulated first aid scenario contextualised to the candidate’s
 Applied first aid procedures for the following:
 allergic reaction
 anaphylaxis
 bleeding control
 choking and airway obstruction
 respiratory distress, including asthma
 shock

Knowledge Evidence
 ARC Guidelines relevant to provision of CPR and first aid
 Infection control principles and procedures, including use of standard precautions
 legal, workplace and community considerations, including:
 consent
 considerations when providing basic emergency life support, including:
 principles and procedures for first aid management of the following scenarios:
 anaphylaxis
 cardiac conditions, including chest pain
 chocking and airway obstruction
 shock
 stroke
 basic anatomy and physiology relating to:
 considerations in provision of first aid for specified conditions
 chest

knowledge.
 adrenaline auto-injector training device
 placebo bronchodilator and spacer device
 roller bandages
 triangular bandage
 workplace First Aid kit
report form
 wound dressing
Assessor requirements
In addition hold current first aid certificate HLTAID003 or higher.
Links
5485705

HLTAID003 Provide first aid Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments
Release 6 Updated:
Equivalent outcome.

Equivalent outcome.
Release 3 Updated mapping information.

competency outcome.
Packages.
scope of unit. New evidence requirements for assessment.
Removal of prerequisite unit.

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to provide a first aid response to a
casualty. The unit applies to all workers who may be required to provide a first aid response
in a range of situations, including community and workplace settings.



situation 1.2 Identify, assess and manage immediate hazards to
1.3 Assess the casualty and recognise the need for first
aid response
2. Apply appropriate first aid 2.1 Perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) in

procedures accordance with Australian Resuscitation Council (ARC)
guidelines
2.2 Provide first aid in accordance with established first
aid principles
2.5 Use available resources and equipment to make the
casualty as comfortable as possible
2.7 Monitor the casualty’s condition and respond in
accordance with first aid principles


3.2 Report details of incident to workplace supervisor as
appropriate
4. Evaluate the incident and 4.1 Recognise the possible psychological impacts on self
own performance and other rescuers involved in critical incidents
4.2 Participate in debriefing to address individual needs
Foundation Skills
unit of competency.

No equivalent unit.
Links
5485705

Assessment Requirements for HLTAID003 Provide first aid Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID003 Provide first aid
Release Comments
Release 6 Updated:
Equivalent outcome.

Equivalent outcome.
Release 3 Updated mapping information.

competency outcome.
Packages.
scope of unit. New evidence requirements for assessment.
Removal of prerequisite unit.

e candidate must show evidence of the ability to complete tasks outlined in elements and
job role.

surface
 followed the prompts of an Automated External Defibrillator (AED)
 Responded to at least two simulated first aid scenarios contextualised to the candidate’s
 conducted a visual and verbal assessment of the casualty
 post-incident debrief and evaluation
 Applied first aid procedures for the following:
 anaphylaxis
 envenomation, using pressure immobilisation
 fractures, sprains and strains, using arm slings, roller bandages or other appropriate
immobilisation techniques
 shock

Knowledge Evidence
 ARC Guidelines relevant to provision of CPR and first aid
 legal, workplace and community considerations including:
 consent
 considerations when providing first aid including:
 how to conduct a visual and verbal assessment of the casualty
 principles and procedures for first aid management of the following scenarios:
 abdominal injuries
 anaphylaxis
 basic care of a wound
 burns
 crush injuries
 diabetes
 dislocations
 drowning
 envenomation
 environmental impact, including hypothermia, hyperthermia, dehydration and heat
stroke
 eye and ear injuries
 fractures
 febrile convulsions
 head, neck and spinal injuries

 minor skin injuries

 needle stick injuries
 poisoning and toxic substances
 seizures, including epilepsy
 shock
 soft tissue injuries, including strains and, sprains
 stroke
 unconsciousness
 chest

knowledge.

 roller bandages
 triangular bandages
 workplace First Aid kit
report form for written reports
 wound dressings
Links
5485705

HLTAID006 Provide advanced first aid Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments
Release 5 Updated:
Equivalent outcome.

Equivalent outcome.
Release 2 Minor changes to formatting to improve readability.
Packages.
scope of unit.
Removal of embedded content from HLTFA412A Apply First Aid.
New evidence requirements for assessment.
Removal of pre-requisite unit.

Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to provide an advanced first aid
response, including management of the incident and other first aiders, until the arrival of
medical or other assistance.
The unit applies to workers who may be required to provide, coordinate and manage a first aid
response across a range of complex situations, including community and workplace settings.



situation 1.2 Identify, assess and manage immediate hazards to
1.3 Assess the casualty and recognise the need for first
aid response
1.5 Deploy resources to appropriate locations as required
in line with workplace procedures

2. Apply appropriate first aid 2.1 Perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) in

procedures accordance with Australian Resuscitation Council (ARC)
guidelines
2.2 Provide first aid in accordance with established first
aid principles
2.5 Use available resources and equipment to make the
casualty as comfortable as possible
2.7 Monitor the casualty’s condition and respond in
accordance with first aid principles
3. Coordinate first aid activities 3.1 Identify available resources required and establish
until arrival of medical communication links with appropriate personnel,
assistance emergency management services and medical assistance
as appropriate
3.2 Deploy correct amount of required resources to
appropriate locations in an effective manner to ensure
timely arrival
3.3 Document the provision of resources and recommend
modifications as required
3.4 Monitor the condition of casualties in accordance
with first aid principles and workplace procedures
3.5 Coordinate evacuation of casualties according to
relevant evacuation procedures
3.6 Arrange support services for personnel involved in
the incident in accordance with relevant principles and
procedures


4.2 Report details of incident in line with organisational
policies
5. Evaluate the incident and 5.1 Recognise the possible psychological impacts on self
own performance and other rescuers involved in critical incidents
5.2 Participate in debriefing to address individual needs
5.3 Evaluate management of the incident and develop an
action plan in consultation with relevant parties
5.4 Review contingency planning to identify and select
alternative management principles and procedures as
required
Foundation Skills
unit of competency.

No equivalent unit

Links
5485705

Assessment Requirements for HLTAID006 Provide advanced first aid Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for HLTAID006 Provide advanced first

aid
Release Comments
Release 5 Updated:
Equivalent outcome.

Equivalent outcome.
Release 2 Minor changes to formatting to improve readability.
Packages.
scope of unit.
Removal of embedded content from HLTFA412A Apply First Aid.
New evidence requirements for assessment.
Removal of pre-requisite unit.

job role.
 followed DRSABCD in line with ARC guidelines, including:
surface
 performed at least 2 minutes of Bag-valve-mask ventilation and at least 2 minutes of
compression during a two rescuer procedure on an adult resuscitation manikin placed
on the floor
 followed the prompts of a Automated External Defibrillator (AED)
 responded to at least three simulated first aid scenarios contextualised to the candidate’s
 conducted a visual and verbal secondary survey assessment of the casualty
 assessed vital signs (respirations, pulse and temperature)
 communicated effectively with a first aid team providing direction and coordination of
other first aiders
 post-incident debrief and evaluation
 provided an accurate verbal and written report of the incident
 applied first aid procedures for the following:
 anaphylaxis
 conducted a basic triage for multiple casualty incident
 envenomation (using pressure immobilisation)
 fractures, sprains and strains (using arm slings, roller bandages or other appropriate
immobilisation principles)
 head, neck and spinal injuries (using immobilisation principles)
 respiratory distress - including asthma
 seizures - including epilepsy
 shock
 located and interpreted workplace policies and procedures


Knowledge Evidence
 ARC guidelines relevant to provision of CPR and first aid
 guidelines of Australian national peak clinical bodies
 safe work practices to deal with risks and potential hazards including manual handling,
hazardous substances, dangerous goods and chemicals
 legal, workplace and community considerations including:
 capabilities of emergency management services
 consent
 legal requirements of administration of medication and the rights and responsibilities
of the First Aider in the workplace regarding medication
 considerations when providing first aid including:
 assessment and interpretation of vital signs, including respirations, temperature and
pulse
 how to conduct a visual and verbal secondary survey assessment of casualty
 priorities of management in first aid when dealing with life-threatening conditions
 procedures for dealing with casualties who are aged or infirmed
 procedures for dealing with major and minor accidents in the workplace
 procedures when providing first aid to children
 principles and procedures for first aid management of the following scenarios, including
complications:
 abdominal injuries
 anaphylaxis
 basic care of a wound
 burns, including thermal, chemical, friction and electrical


 crush injuries
 diabetes
 drowning
 emergency childbirth
 envenomation
 environmental impact including hypothermia, hyperthermia, dehydration and heat
stroke
 eye and ear injuries
 febrile convulsions
 head, neck and spinal injuries
 levels of consciousness
 needle stick injuries
 poisoning and toxic substances
 seizures, including epilepsy
 shock
 skin injuries
 soft tissue musculoskeletal, including injuries including sprains, strains, dislocations
and fractures
 stroke
 substance misuse, including common drugs and alcohol, including illicit drugs
 chest, skeleton, joints and muscles
 response/level of consciousness

knowledge.
 AED training device.
 bag-valve-mask
 eye patch
 roller bandages
 thermometer
 triangular bandages
 workplace first Aid kit
report form
 wound dressings
Links
5485705

HLTWHS006 Manage personal stressors in the work environment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
HLTWHS006 Manage personal stressors in the work

environment
Release Comments
Release 1 This version was released in HLT Health Training Package

release 2.0 and meets the requirements of the 2012 Standards
for Training Packages.
Significant changes to the elements and performance criteria.
New evidence requirements for assessment including volume
and frequency requirements.
Application
This unit describes the skills and knowledge required to maintain health and wellbeing by
preventing and managing personal stress.
This unit applies to work in a range of health and community services settings, in particular
work roles that operate in high stress situations and circumstances.
The skills in this unit must be applied in accordance with Commonwealth and State/Territory
legislation, Australian/New Zealand standards and industry codes of practice.


Elements define the Performance criteria describe the performance needed to

essential outcomes demonstrate achievement of the element
1. Develop strategies to 1.1 Recognise sources of stress in own job role

manage personal stress 1.2 Recognise triggers and own response to stress
1.3 Identify strategies to effectively prevent, reduce and manage
stress
1.4 Identify internal and external options and resources for
additional support
1.5 Develop a personal stress management plan that responds to
identified stressors and triggers
2. Implement stress 2.1 Use strategies from personal stress management plan that
management strategies address personal triggers and stressors
2.2 Organise own workload to minimise stress and inform relevant
personnel of any variations and difficulties affecting work
requirements
2.3 Identify and adopt strategies to balance work/life priorities
3. Evaluate stress 3.1 Monitor and review effectiveness of stress management

reducing strategies strategies
3.2 Adjust strategies not meeting the desired outcome and
recognise when additional resources and/or support is needed
3.3 Access internal or external options and resources for
additional support to meet desired outcomes of the stress
management plan
Foundation Skills
of competency.


No equivalent unit.
Links
5485705

Assessment Requirements for HLTWHS006 Manage personal stressors in the work environment Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for HLTWHS006 Manage personal

stressors in the work environment
Release Comments
Release 1 This version was released in HLT Health Training Package

release 2.0 and meets the requirements of the 2012 Standards
for Training Packages.
Significant changes to the elements and performance criteria.
New evidence requirements for assessment including volume
and frequency requirements.
job role. There must be evidence that the candidate has:
 developed, implemented and reviewed 1 personal stress management plan that includes
identified sources, triggers and responses to stress
 used strategies from personal stress management plan to manage 2 stressful situations in
the workplace involving colleagues and/or clients

Assessment Requirements for HLTWHS006 Manage personal stressors in the work environment Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 sources of stress and how they manifest in health and/or community services work
environment including:
 complex client behaviour (emotional, aggressive, cognitive deficit, non-compliance)
 grief and loss experienced by workers
 exposure to stressful working conditions and stressful incidents
 work planning and prioritisation techniques e.g. time management strategies
 legal rights relating to the Fair Work Act
 services available for referral, both within the organisation and in the community e.g.
informal/formal debriefing sessions and/or workplace counselling
 self-care techniques including:
 impact of exercise, diet and nutrition on physical health
 work/life balance strategies
 complementary and alternative health options
Skills must have been demonstrated in the workplace or in a simulated environment that
reflects workplace conditions. Where simulation is used, it must reflect real working
conditions by modelling industry operating conditions and contingencies, as well as, using
suitable facilities, equipment and resources.
Links
5485705

MARC022 Perform mooring and unmooring activities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MARC022 Perform mooring and unmooring activities
Release 1. New unit of competency.
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out mooring and unmooring
activities according to relevant requirements and regulations.
This unit applies to people working in the maritime industry as a Linesperson.
No licensing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
C – Equipment Operations
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

ELEMENTS PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

1 Prepare a berth 1.1 Relevant documentation and records are identified and
accessed as required
1.2 Positioning information is obtained, checked and confirmed

as accurate

1.3 Bridge marker is set
1.4 Briefing is obtained and interpreted on issues related to

mooring or unmooring operation
1.5 Communications equipment is prepared and set to correct

channels
1.6 Berth conditions are checked, and made clear and ready for
mooring and unmooring
1.7 Portainer cranes and gantries/loaders are correctly positioned

for berthing of vessel
1.8 Safety concerns are communicated to pilot of vessel with due

care not to interfere with tug and vessel communications
2 Receive heaving line 2.1 First lines are received from mooring launch according to
from mooring operational procedures and pilot directions
launch
2.2 Assistance is provided in pulling mooring line ashore and
making it fast to applicable bollard/hooks
2.3 Required precautions and safety procedures are followed

during receival operations
2.4 Correct method for crossing mooring lines over and between
another vessel’s mooring lines is followed
2.5 When another vessel occupies the bollard, mooring line is

dipped as required
3 Receive heaving lines 3.1 First lines are received and are made fast to appropriate
from vessel bollards/ hooks
3.2 Two headlines and two sternlines are made available each to
two different bollards/hooks
3.3 Spring lines from forward and aft are received from vessel
and are attached to applicable bollards/hooks
3.4 Additional lines are received from vessel and are attached to
applicable bollards/hooks
3.5 Correct method for crossing mooring lines over and between
another vessel’s mooring lines is followed
3.6 When another vessel occupies the bollard, mooring line is

dipped as required

3.7 Safe distance from snapback zones and demarcated area is

maintained during line tensioning
4 Return heaving line 4.1 Vessel crew is made aware of planned heaving line return
to vessel operations
4.2 Lines are returned according to operational procedures

during heaving line return operations
5 Land a gangway 5.1 Precautions are taken to ensure all personnel are well clear of
vicinity of gangway
5.2 Vehicle is used to locate gangway in correct position in a

safe and efficient manner
6 Let go of vessel 6.1 Vessel crew is made aware of intentions to let go
6.2 Singling up processes are carried out according to

operational procedures and required safety precautions
6.3 Due care is taken during singling up processes to ensure all

mooring lines are kept clear of propeller
6.4 Due care is taken when waiting for order for remaining lines
to be released, to stand clear of remaining lines because of
tension to which lines may be subjected
6.5 Once order is given, remaining lines are released according

to operational procedures and required safety precautions
6.6 Stand clear procedures are immediately implemented when

vessel crew inadvertently heaves on a line being handled by
the shore-side team

during unmooring operations

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
Range is restricted to essential operating conditions and any other variables essential to the work
environment.
Relevant documentation  mooring and unmooring plans, procedures, checklists and

and records include one or instructions
more of the following:  relevant maritime authority instructions
 relevant sections of maritime regulations concerning mooring
and unmooring operations
 reports and records of mooring and unmooring operations or
safety incidents
 rope and equipment manufacturer instructions and procedures
 safety instructions and procedures
Issues related to mooring  bollard/hook and capstan numbers
or unmooring operations  special circumstances
include one or more of the
following:
Made clear and ready for  removing obstructions

mooring includes one of  stopping any work that creates excessive dust or noise
the following:
Safety precautions  checking:

include:  own personal fitness and medical wellbeing
 whereabouts of edge of wharf
 whereabouts of other members of mooring and unmooring
team
 confirming availability of a personal flotation device on arrival
at mooring and unmooring operation
 keeping clear of snapback zone and demarcated areas
 keeping work area hazard-free
 obtaining and using required PPE (such as safety footwear,
safety helmet, suitable gloves, safety vest and reflective clothing,
personal life vest, safety glasses)
 removing rings from fingers to avoid them being caught on steel
wire ropes

 wearing suitable clothing

Mooring or unmooring  landing a gangway
operations include  positioning lines launch
 positioning mooring lines
 preparing a berth
 receiving mooring lines under a vessel
 receiving heaving line from:
 a launch
 a vessel
 returning heaving line to a vessel
 towing mooring lines using vehicles
 unmooring and letting go a vessel
 working:
 by day or night
 in normal and emergency situations
 under any permissible conditions of weather
 at various shore-side terminals and wharves

This unit replaces and is equivalent to MARC1001A Carry out shore-based mooring and
unmooring operations.
MARC1001A replaces and is equivalent to TDMMR5607A Carry out shore-based mooring
and unmooring operations.
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=772efb7b-4cce-47fe-9bbd-ee3b1
d1eb4c2

Assessment Requirements for MARC022 Perform mooring and unmooring activities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for MARC022 Perform mooring and

unmooring activities
Evidence required to demonstrate competence in this unit must be relevant to and satisfy all of
the requirements of the elements, performance criteria and range of conditions on at least one
occasion and include:
 applying relevant work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS)
requirements and work practices
 being aware of own ability and limits to rectify irregularities and faults
 communicating effectively with other personnel when mooring and unmooring a vessel using
standard nautical terms
 complying with relevant maritime regulations and International Maritime Organization
(IMO) Conventions and Codes, including the relevant sections of the Australian Maritime
Safety Authority (AMSA) Marine Orders as they apply to mooring and unmooring operations
on ocean-going vessels
 ensuring behaviour reflects relevant current legislative and regulatory requirements
 following all orders carefully and systematically
 following work instructions
 handling mooring lines on deck of lines launch, flaking and positioning of mooring lines
 handling rope appropriately and correctly:
 storing and caring for ropes and lines
 tying knots such as bowline, reef knot, overhand knot, figure of eight knot, sheet bends
and clove hitch and splicing and whipping, round turn two half hitches
 applying a chain stopper to a wire rope
 heaving on a line in collaboration with other members of a mooring team
 applying a stopper to a synthetic fibre rope
 applying a chain stopper to a natural cordage rope
 attaching a line to a bollard or bitt with all lines in correct order such as up through the
eye
 flaking down a rope
 handling wire mooring lines in lines launch
 identifying and correctly using:
 various types of ropes, steel wires and mooring equipment
 personal protective equipment (PPE)
 implementing port and vessel security procedures

 initiating timely action in response to defects or damage

 interpreting and following procedures for mooring and unmooring operations, including
safety instructions and precautions
 recognising dangers and hazards before and during mooring and unmooring operations, and
taking appropriate action to report and/or rectify them
 recognising problems that may occur during mooring and unmooring operations and taking
appropriate action to report and/or resolve them
 taking proper care of ropes and mooring equipment
 using various vehicles for towing mooring lines, as required
 working effectively as a member of a mooring and /or unmooring team.
Knowledge Evidence
the requirements of the elements, performance criteria and range of conditions and include
knowledge of:
 awareness of line launches propeller when towing mooring lines
 communications techniques and equipment required during mooring and unmooring
operations
 correct method of crossing ship’s mooring lines over and or between other vessel’s mooring
lines already berthed
 dangers associated with mooring systems:
 being hit by a heaving line being thrown down from a vessel
 stepping inside the bight of a line
 being struck by a parting line
 mixing rings and wire rope
 falling off the edge of the wharf into the water
 back strain from carrying a line, heaving on a line or heaving on a line
 ‘snap back’ when a line breaks
 trip hazards such as crane lines
 factors that affect mooring and unmooring operations, including the effects of wind, weather,
tides, sea conditions, currents, draft changes and surges from passing vessels on mooring and
unmooring operations
 hazards and problems, and appropriate preventative and remedial action and solutions
 maritime regulations applicable to mooring and unmooring vessels
 methods for mooring and unmooring a vessel, including all required rope handling
techniques and precautions
 operational characteristics of different types of lines, equipment and facilities used in
mooring and unmooring operations
 operational procedures and layouts of various types of shore-side loading and discharging

terminals and wharves

 PPE required for use during mooring and unmooring operations
 procedures for assessing stresses on lines and gear used in mooring and unmooring
operations
 reason for and correct method of dipping mooring line
 relevant manufacturer guidelines relating to use of machinery, including instructions on
equipment capability and limitations
 relevant sections of the Standards of Training, Certification & Watchkeeping (STCW) 95 and
AMSA Marine Orders
 relevant work WHS/OHS codes of practice, policies and procedures
 safety drills and equipment used for lines launch
 snapback zone and demarcated areas
 standard nautical terms in relation to mooring activities and related equipment
 technique for releasing fowled mooring lines under wharfs and around ship anchors.
As a minimum, assessors must satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, which include
requirements in the Standards for Registered Training Organisations current at the time of
assessment.
As a minimum, assessment must satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, which include
assessment.
Assessment processes and techniques must be appropriate to the language, literacy and numeracy
requirements of the work being performed and the needs of the candidate.
Assessment must occur in workplace operational situations or where this is not available, in
simulated workplace operational situations or an industry-approved marine operations site that
replicate workplace conditions where mooring and unmooring activities can be demonstrated.
Resources for assessment include access to:
 a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or other simulated practical and knowledge
assessments
 relevant documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice and
operation manuals
 tools, equipment, materials and PPE currently used in industry
 bridge marker:
 at night vehicle with flashing hazard light
 flag
 vehicles used for towing mooring lines.

Links
d1eb4c2

MARE002 Communicate during mooring and unmooring activities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MARE002 Communicate during mooring and unmooring

activities
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to communicate effectively with others
involved in mooring and unmooring activities.
This unit applies to people working in the maritime industry as a Linesperson.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
E – Communication
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare to 1.1 Work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and

communicate with safety (OHS) procedures are followed
others
1.2 Prior to mooring or unmooring activities, all radios and other
communications equipment is checked to confirm they are

functioning correctly
1.3 Batteries are checked to confirm they are operational and

fully charged
1.4 Relevant documentation and records are identified and

accessed as required
1.5 Radios are set to operate on channels required for mooring

and unmooring
1.6 Faulty communications equipment is reported, rectified or

replaced
2 Communicate with 2.1 Correct communication is maintained with others involved in

others mooring and unmooring activities, throughout mooring and
unmooring activities
2.2 Clear and concise verbal and non-verbal communication is

used and appropriate action is taken to confirm others have
correctly heard and interpreted the communication
2.3 VHF radio communication is conducted using required

procedures and protocols
2.4 Appropriate methods are used to communicate with foreign

crews on vessels
2.5 Safety concerns are promptly and clearly communicated to

pilot prior to and during, mooring and unmooring activities
2.6 Due care is taken when using radio communication

equipment, so as not to interfere with operational
communication between tug crews and pilot of vessel

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
environment.
Safety procedures include:  checking:

 own personal fitness and medical wellbeing
 whereabouts of other members of mooring/unmooring team
at mooring operation
 keeping clear of snapback zone and demarcated areas
 obtaining and using required personal protective equipment
(such as safety footwear, safety helmet, suitable gloves, safety
vest and reflective clothing, personal life vest, safety glasses)
wire ropes
Relevant documentation  maritime authority instructions
and records include one or  mooring and unmooring plans, procedures, checklists and
more of the following: instructions
 relevant sections of maritime regulations concerning mooring
and unmooring operations
 reports and records of mooring operations or safety incidents
Communication includes  oral communication with mooring supervisor or Master and
one or more of the other members of mooring or unmooring team
following:  radio between mooring supervisor (shore-side) and:
 pilot on vessel
 wharf mooring personnel (bow) forward
 wharf mooring personnel (stern) aft
 VHF radio between:
 tug crew and pilot on vessel
 tug crew and mooring launch crew

 mooring launch crew and pilot on vessel

 visual contact and hand signals
Others involved in  lines launch driver
mooring and unmooring  mooring launch crew
activities include one or  mooring master or supervisor
more of the following:  mooring team
 pilot and crew on vessel being moored or unmoored and tug
 shorelines crew on wharf
 tug crew
 vessel crew

This unit replaces and is equivalent to MARE1001A Communicate during shore-based
mooring and unmooring operations.
MARE1001A replaces and is equivalent to TDMME907A Communicate during shore-based
mooring and unmooring operations.
Links
d1eb4c2

Assessment Requirements for MARE002 Communicate during mooring and unmooring activities Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for MARE002 Communicate during

mooring and unmooring activities
 applying relevant work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS)
requirements and work practices
 being aware of own ability and limits to rectify irregularities and faults
 checking functioning of radios and communications equipment
 communicating effectively with others when mooring and unmooring a vessel
 complying with relevant maritime regulations and International Maritime Organization
(IMO) Conventions and Codes, including relevant sections of Australian Maritime Safety
Authority (AMSA) Marine Orders as they apply to mooring and unmooring operations on
ocean-going vessels
 ensuring behaviour reflects relevant current legislative and regulatory requirements
 following all orders carefully and systematically
 following work instructions
 identifying and correctly using various types of radios and other relevant communications
equipment
 implementing port and vessel security procedures
 initiating timely action in response to defects or damage
 interpreting and following procedures for communicating with others during mooring and
 recognising and responding appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace
 recognising problems that may occur when communicating with others during mooring and
unmooring operations and taking appropriate action to report and resolve these problems
 taking proper care of radios and communications equipment
 testing and recharging batteries used in radios and other communications equipment
 using hand held VHF radios correctly when communicating with ship’s crew, pilot and wharf
supervisor.
Knowledge Evidence

May 2017
knowledge of:
 basic principles and procedures for marine VHF radio communication:
 by day or night
 at a range of shore-side terminals and wharves
 communications techniques and equipment required during mooring and unmooring
operations, including protocols for radio use
 correct use of handheld VHF radio
 factors that affect communication during mooring and unmooring operations, such as effects
of noise, faulty equipment, discharged batteries, wind, weather
 maritime regulations applicable to communication during mooring and unmooring of vessels
 methods of visual contact and hand signals
 operational characteristics of different types of radios and other forms of communications
equipment used in mooring and unmooring operations
 practices and procedures for communicating with others during mooring and unmooring
operations
 purpose of silence periods when operating radio equipment
 radio calling and replying procedures
 relevant manufacturer instructions relating to use of radios and other communications
equipment
 relevant maritime and radio communications regulations
 relevant port and vessel security procedures, including operating radio communications
channel instructions
 relevant WHS/OHS codes of practice, policies and procedures.
assessment.
assessment.

May 2017
replicate workplace conditions.

assessments
operation manuals
 tools, equipment, materials and personal protective equipment currently used in industry.
Links
d1eb4c2

MARF017 Follow work health and safety, and emergency procedures during mooring and unmooring activities Date this document was
MARF017 Follow work health and safety, and emergency

procedures during mooring and unmooring activities
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to interpret and follow work health and
safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) policy and procedures, and emergency
procedures during mooring and unmooring activities.
This unit applies to people working in the maritime industry as a Linesperson as part of a
mooring and unmooring team.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
F – Operational Quality and Safety
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Follow safety and 1.1 Tests and inspections of ropes and equipment are conducted
hazard control according to regulations and company procedures
procedures

1.2 Hazards are identified and action is taken to eliminate or

minimise risk to personnel, port facilities, vessel and the
environment
1.3 Safety precautions and hazard minimisation procedures and

regulations are followed at all times during mooring or
1.4 Safe distance from snapback zones and demarcated area is

maintained during tensioning and slackening of lines
1.5 Action is taken to secure vessel and to maintain safety of

vessel and persons involved, in a mooring or unmooring
incident
2 Use personal 2.1 Personal protective equipment (PPE) is obtained and checked
protective prior to commencement of operations according to company
equipment WHS/OHS policy and procedures
2.2 PPE is correctly used as required
2.3 PPE is correctly stored after use according to company

procedures
3 Follow safety and 3.1 Wharf, port and vessel emergency procedures are accessed
emergency and implemented
procedures
3.2 Safety drills are conducted according to company procedures
3.3 Escape routes, and internal and external communications and

alarm systems are correctly used according to regulatory
requirements and established port procedures
3.4 Emergency communications, and alarm signals and systems

are used according to port emergency procedures and

4 Report safety 4.1 Safety incidents or emergencies that occur during mooring or
incidents and unmooring operations are correctly and accurately recorded
emergencies according to regulations and company procedures
4.2 Required reports on safety incidents or emergencies that

occur during mooring or unmooring operations are prepared
and referred to designated personnel according to regulations
and company procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
environment.
Hazards include one or  crane movement

more of the following:  faulty communications equipment
 inadequate lighting
 ship mooring lines and wires in poor condition
 wharf traffic
Personnel include one or  mooring:
more of the following:  launch and crew
 mooring supervisor
 wharf mooring personnel (bow) forward
 wharf mooring personnel (stern) aft
 pilot
 tug crew/s
 vessel crew
Safety precautions  checking:
include:  own personal fitness and medical wellbeing
 whereabouts of other members of mooring/unmooring team
at mooring operation
 obtaining and using required personal protective equipment
(such as safety footwear, safety helmet, suitable gloves were
appropriate, safety vest and reflective clothing, personal life vest,
safety glasses)
wire ropes
 wearing suitable clothing
Hazard minimisation  ensuring ropes and equipment have been tested and are in good
procedures include: condition
 placing warning signage in appropriate places

 testing equipment prior to operation

Mooring or unmooring  landing a gangway
operations include one or  preparing a berth
more of the following:  receiving heaving line from:
 a launch
 a vessel
 returning heaving line to a vessel
 unmooring and letting go a vessel
 working:
 by day or night
 at various shore-side terminals and wharves

This unit replaces and is equivalent to MARF1004A Follow work health and safety, and
emergency procedures during shore-based mooring operations.
MARF1004A replaces and is equivalent to TDMMF6007A Follow OH&S and emergency
procedures during shore-based mooring operations.
Links
d1eb4c2

Assessment Requirements for MARF017 Follow work health and safety, and emergency procedures during mooring and unmooring
activities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for MARF017 Follow work health and

safety, and emergency procedures during mooring and unmooring
activities
 communicating effectively with other personnel when mooring and unmooring a vessel
 handling rope appropriately and correctly:
 storing and caring for ropes and lines
 tying knots such as bowline, reef knot, overhand knot, figure of eight knot, sheet bends,
clove hitch, splicing and whipping, round turn two half hitches
 applying a chain stopper to a wire rope
 heaving on a line in collaboration with other members of a mooring team
 applying a stopper to a synthetic fibre rope
 applying a chain stopper to a natural cordage rope
 attaching a line to a bollard or bitt with all lines in correct order such as up through the
eye (dipping)
 flaking down a rope
 forming a bight
 identifying and correctly using:
 personal protective equipment (PPE)
 various types of ropes, steel wires and mooring equipment
 interpreting and following work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety
(OHS), and safety management procedures for mooring and unmooring operations, including
safety instructions and precautions
 recognising dangers and hazards before and during mooring and unmooring operations, and
taking appropriate action to report and rectify them
 recognising safety-related problems that may occur during mooring and unmooring
operations, and taking appropriate action to report and resolve these problems
 recording and reporting safety incidents and emergencies
 reporting and/or rectifying hazards, safety incidents or emergencies promptly
 responding to individual differences and applying acceptable behaviour when working with
others

 working safely as a member of a mooring and unmooring team

 working systematically with required attention to detail and safety requirements.
Knowledge Evidence
knowledge of:
 dangers associated with mooring and unmooring duties:
 being hit by a line being thrown down from a vessel
 stepping inside the bight of a line
 being struck by a parting line
 mixing rings and wire rope
 falling off the edge of the wharf into the water
 back strain from carrying a line, heaving on a line
 ‘snap back’ in the event of a line breaking
 trip hazards such as crane lines
 hazards and safety-related problems that may occur during mooring and unmooring
operations, and appropriate preventative and remedial action and solutions
 individual differences and acceptable behaviour when working with others
 legal rights and responsibilities of management, crew and others
 methods for safely mooring and unmooring ocean-going vessels
 procedures for calculating stresses on lifting gear used in cargo handling operations
 relevant documentation and records:
 mooring and unmooring plans, procedures, checklists and instructions
 relevant sections of maritime regulations concerning mooring and unmooring operations
 instructions of relevant maritime authorities
 reports and records of safety incidents or emergencies
 relevant port and vessel safety and security requirements and regulations
 relevant WHS/OHS legislation, codes of practice, policies and procedures
 reporting requirements for safety incidents or emergencies that occur during mooring or
 safety drills and equipment used for lines launches
 safety instructions for using ropes and other equipment during mooring and unmooring
operations
 safety management procedures for mooring and unmooring ocean-going vessels
 use, type and application of PPE required when undertaking mooring and unmooring

activities.
assessment.
assessment.
replicates workplace conditions.
assessments
operation manuals
 tools, equipment currently used in industry including:
 VHF radios
 ropes and heaving lines provided by shore
 shackles
 wires
 PPE including:
 personal life vest
 reflective clothing
 safety footwear
 helmet
 vest
 suitable gloves
 protective safety glasses.
Practical assessment should be combined with targeted questioning to assess required
knowledge. Performance should be demonstrated consistently over time and in a suitable range
of contexts.

Links
d1eb4c2

MEM12023A Perform engineering measurements Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MEM12023A Perform engineering measurements
Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers performing measurement skills requiring
straightforward use of mechanical measuring devices and
associated calculations.

Application of the unit This unit covers straightforward measurement using
devices which incorporate visual indications representing
units of measurement.
It applies to the use of measuring devices in a range of
manufacturing, engineering and related environments. It
includes, where required, adjustment of measuring devices
through simple means and typically includes zeroing or
scale adjustment.
Measurements may be expressed in metric or imperial
units. All measurements are undertaken to standard
operating procedures. Electrical/electronic devices used
are those not requiring the connection or disconnection of
circuitry.
Work is undertaken autonomously or part of team
environment, in the field, work station or workshops.
For straightforward use of comparison or pre-set
measuring devices, Unit MEM12001B (Use comparison
and basic measuring devices) should be accessed.
Band: A
Unit Weight: 5
Not Applicable

Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units




1. Select appropriate 1.1. Measurement requirements are determined from
device or equipment specifications.
1.2. Appropriate device or equipment is selected
according to standard operating procedures, to
achieve required outcome.
2. Obtain measurements 2.1. Correct and appropriate measuring technique is
using a range of used.
measuring devices 2.2. Measurements are accurately obtained .
2.3. Dimensions are determined or verified using basic
calculations, where required.
3. Maintain measuring 3.1. Routine care and storage of devices is undertaken to
devices manufacturers' specifications or standard operating
procedures.
3.2. Routine adjustments to devices are made and
checked.
4. Communicate 4.1. Measurements are accurately recorded, where
measurements as required.
required 4.2. Freehand sketch which depicts required information
is prepared, as required.

Required skills
Look for evidence that confirms skills in:

 selecting the appropriate measuring device for given measuring tasks
 using appropriate measuring technique
 reading all measurements taken accurately to the finest graduation of the selected
measuring device
 handling and storing measuring devices in accordance with manufacturers'
specifications or standard operating procedures
 verifying all measuring devices before use
 making, where appropriate, routine adjustments to measuring devices
 reading, interpreting and following information on written job instructions,


specifications, standard operating procedures, charts, lists, drawings and other
applicable reference documents
 planning and sequencing operations
 checking and clarifying task related information
 checking for conformance to specifications
 undertaking numerical operations involving addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division, fractions and decimals within the scope of this unit
 preparing drawings as required
Required knowledge
Look for evidence that confirms knowledge of:

 correct application of a range of measuring devices
 correct and appropriate measuring technique for a range of measuring devices
 addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, fractions, decimals to the scope
required by this unit
 procedures for handling and storing a range of measuring devices
 procedures for adjusting and zeroing a range of measuring devices
 methods of communicating measurements by drawings, as required
 safe work practices and procedures

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

be able to perform engineering measurements.
Critical aspects for assessment and Assessors must be satisfied that the candidate can
evidence required to demonstrate competently and consistently perform all elements of the
competency in this unit unit as specified by the criteria, including required
knowledge, and be capable of applying the competency
in new and different situations and contexts.
Context of and specific resources for This unit may be assessed on the job, off the job or a
assessment combination of both on and off the job. Where
assessment occurs off the job, that is the candidate is not
in productive work, then an appropriate simulation must
be used where the range of conditions reflects realistic
workplace situations. The competencies covered by this
unit would be demonstrated by an individual working
alone or as part of a team. The assessment environment
should not disadvantage the candidate.
This unit could be assessed in conjunction with any other
units addressing the safety, quality, communication,
materials handling, recording and reporting associated
with performing engineering measurements or other units
requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge
covered by this unit.
Method of assessment Assessors should gather a range of evidence that is valid,

sufficient, current and authentic. Evidence can be
gathered through a variety of ways including direct
observation, supervisor's reports, project work, samples
and questioning. Questioning techniques should not
require language, literacy and numeracy skills beyond
those required in this unit of competency. The candidate
must have access to all tools, equipment, materials and
documentation required. The candidate must be
permitted to refer to any relevant workplace procedures,
product and manufacturing specifications, codes,
standards, manuals and reference materials.
Guidance information for

assessment

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Specifications Drawings, sketches, job instructions, schematics,

diagrams, technical manuals
Range of measuring devices Protractors, combination squares, set squares, dial

indicators, thermometers, tapes, rules,
micrometers, vernier-scaled measuring equipment
Basic calculations Calculations needed to assist in determining

measurements where a reading of the graduated
device is not sufficient, for example subtracting
one measurement from another to give a third
measurement. Examples of calculations needed
are addition, subtraction, multiplication, division,
fractions and decimals. Calculations may be made
using a calculator
Routine adjustments Validating the device using simple zeroing or

scale adjustment
Measurements Measuring length, squareness, flatness, angle,

roundness, clearances or any other measurements
that can be read off analog, digital or other
measuring device
Information Dimensions, instructions, base line or datum

points
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector

Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units
Competency field
Competency field Measurement

MEM18001C Use hand tools Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MEM18001C Use hand tools
Not Applicable
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers using a range of hand tools for a variety of
general engineering applications.

Application of the unit Applications may include hand tools used for adjusting,
dismantling, assembling and finishing of items or
components, and the finishing, cutting, scraping of
metallic and non-metallic material to size and shape. This
includes simple tapping and threading and routine
maintenance of hand tools.
This unit should not be selected if the hand tool is
dedicated to a single operation or machine and if only a
machine specific/customised tool is used.
When using hand held power tools or power tools used for
hand held operations, refer to Unit MEM18002B (Use
power tools/hand held operations).
Band: A
Unit Weight: 2
Not Applicable

Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units




1. Use hand tools 1.1. Hand tools are selected appropriate to the task
requirements.
1.2. Hand tools are used to produce desired outcomes to
job specifications which may include finish, tension,
size or shape.
1.3. All safety requirements are adhered to before, during
and after use.
1.4. Unsafe or faulty tools are identified and marked for
repair according to designated procedures before,
during and after use.
1.5. Routine maintenance of tools, including hand
sharpening is undertaken according to standard
operational procedures, principles and techniques.
1.6. Hand tools are stored safely in appropriate location
according to standard operational procedures and
manufacturers' recommendations.

Required skills

 reading and following information on standard operating procedures
 following verbal instructions
 selecting hand tools appropriate to the task
 using hand tools safely
 identifying hand tool defects and marking for repair
 maintaining/sharpening hand tools using appropriate techniques
 storing hand tools in accordance with manufacturers'/standard operating procedures
Required knowledge

 applications of different hand tools in a general engineering context
 common faults and/or defects in hand tools


 procedures for marking unsafe or faulty tools for repair
 routine maintenance requirements for a range of hand tools
 storage location and procedures for a range of hand tools
 hazards and control measures associated with using hand tools
 use and application of personal protective equipment

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

be able to use hand tools for a range of general
engineering applications.
with using hand tools or other units requiring the
exercise of the skills and knowledge covered by this unit.


assessment

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Hand tools Hacksaws, hammers, punches, screwdrivers,

sockets, wrenches, scrapers, chisels, gouges,
wood planes and files of all cross-sectional shapes
and types
Job specifications Finish, tension, size or shape etc.
Routine maintenance Cleaning, lubricating, tightening, simple tool

repairs, hand sharpening and adjustments using
engineering principles, tools, equipment and
procedures
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

Competency field
Competency field Maintenance and diagnostics

MEM24001B Perform basic penetrant testing Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MEM24001B Perform basic penetrant testing
Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers performing basic penetrant testing
procedures in a range of industrial applications.

Application of the unit This unit applies to basic penetrant testing techniques on
fabrications, structures and components across a wide
range of industries and restricted to basic visible dye
and/or process penetrant line methods.
The work can relate to scheduled and unscheduled
maintenance activities, using general tools, specific
penetrant testing equipment as specified in maintenance
documentation, testing procedures or operator
instructions.
Actual and potential defects are to be considered, together
with ongoing abnormalities in fabrications, components
and structures.
Penetrant testing is performed on critical component or
structural zones.
All testing must be completed with particular attention to
personal safety and OH&S regulations. Certification
against Australian standards may be achieved where
assessment in this unit of competency is carried out in
conjunction with an examining authority as described in
ISO 9712.
Materials and chemicals which are subject to codes and
regulations - for example, chemicals, explosives, solvents,
dangerous materials, acids, or noxious waste products -
must be subject to safe work habits and must be stored and
used in accordance with safe work practices.
This unit should not be selected when Unit MEM24002B
(Perform penetrant testing) has already been selected.
Where power tools are required, Unit MEM18002B (Use
power tools/hand held operations) should also be selected.
Band: A
Unit Weight: 2

Not Applicable
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units
Path 1 MEM18001C Use hand tools




1. Prepare inspection 1.1. Inspection areas are cleaned and prepared for testing
areas for basic using appropriate procedures and materials.
penetrant testing 1.2. Preparation processes are carried out in accordance
with the relevant procedures and OH&S
requirements.
1.3. Inspection areas are visually assessed and obvious
discontinuities are identified.
2. Perform basic 2.1. Nominated test is identified from standard operating
penetrant testing procedures.
2.2. Test equipment is prepared in accordance with
standard operating procedures.
2.3. Test media is selected and applied in accordance
with workplace practices and specifications.
2.4. Penetrant test is carried out in accordance with
relevant work instructions and OH&S requirements.
2.5. Penetrant testing equipment is maintained and stored
in accordance with standard operating procedures and
OH&S requirements.
3. Report the results of 3.1. Basic indications are checked and defects are
penetrant test(s) identified in accordance with enterprise standards
and/or procedures.
3.2. Basic indications are confirmed in accordance with
enterprise standards and/or procedures.
3.3. Test results are reported in accordance with

Required skills

 preparing inspection areas
 identifying discontinuities
 applying procedures


 applying test media
 applying principles of penetrant testing techniques
 identifying defects
 reading and interpreting routine information on written job instructions,
specifications and standard operating procedures.
 following oral instructions
 entering routine and familiar information onto proformas and standard workplace
forms
Required knowledge

 cleaning and preparation processes
 precleaning methods and their areas of use - solvents, vapour degrease, etching,
detergents, paint removers, mechanical methods
 consequences of incorrect preparation
 procedures and OH&S requirements in relation to the preparation process
 basic concepts and principles of NDT; general terms, purpose of NDT and areas of
application of NDT
 scope and basic description of test
 general properties of penetrants - penetrability, removability, visibility
 emulsifier types
 developer types
 use of standard test panels
 established inspection procedures and techniques
 types of discontinuities and their consequences
 procedure for carrying out penetrant testing
 penetrant application
 dwell times
 penetrant removal
 developer application
 dry powder
 development time
 factors affecting indications
 non-relevant indications
 post-cleaning methods and their areas of use
 basic maintenance and storage procedures for testing equipment
 OH&S requirements including storage requirements
 definition of a defect and common basic defects
 methods/procedures for reporting test results


Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

be able to perform basic penetrant testing. Competency
in this unit cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have
been satisfied.
with performing basic penetrant testing or other units


EVIDENCE GUIDE

assessment
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Preparation processes Surface cleaning and drying
Obvious discontinuities Observed changes in material homogeneity
Reported Accurate identification of location and size of

discontinuities
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

Competency field
Competency field Non-destructive testing

MEM24003B Perform basic magnetic particle testing Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MEM24003B Perform basic magnetic particle testing
Not Applicable

Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers performing basic magnetic particle testing
procedures in a range of industrial applications. It covers
the principles of magnetism and the associated application
of basic magnetic particle testing techniques in the field of
non-destructive testing. Knowledge of metallurgy
associated with the level of application in this unit is
required.

Application of the unit This unit applies to portable and fixed ('yoke' or 'bench')
basic magnetic particle testing techniques on fabrications,
structures and components across a wide range of
industries.
The work can relate to scheduled and unscheduled
maintenance activities using general tools and specific
magnetic testing equipment as specified in maintenance
documentation, testing procedures or operator
instructions.
Actual and potential defects are considered, together with
ongoing abnormalities in fabrications, components and
structures. Magnetic particle testing is performed on
critical component or structural zones. All testing must be
completed with particular attention to personal safety and
OH&S regulations. Certification against Australian
standards may be achieved where assessment in this unit
of competency is carried out in conjunction with an
examining authority as described in ISO 9712.
Materials and chemicals which are subject to codes and
regulations - for example, chemicals, explosives, solvents,
dangerous materials, acids, or noxious waste products -
must be subject to safe work habits and must be stored and
used in accordance with safe work practices.
This unit should not be selected when Unit MEM24004B
(Perform magnetic particle testing) has already been
selected.
Where power tools are required, Unit MEM18002B (Use
power tools/hand held operations) should also be selected.
Where tests require the interpretation of drawings, Unit
MEM09002B (Interpret technical drawings) should also

be selected.
Band: A
Unit Weight: 2
Not Applicable
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units
Path 1 MEM18001C Use hand tools




1. Prepare inspection 1.1. Inspection areas are cleaned and prepared for testing
areas for basic using appropriate procedures and materials.
magnetic particle 1.2. Preparation processes are carried out in accordance
testing with the relevant specifications and OH&S
requirements.
1.3. Inspection areas are visually assessed and obvious
discontinuities are identified.
2. Perform basic 2.1. Nominated 'yoke' or 'bench' magnetic particle testing
magnetic particle procedure is identified from standard operating
testing procedures.
2.2. Test equipment is prepared in accordance with
relevant standards and/or procedures.
2.3. Magnetic particle test is carried out in accordance
with relevant work instructions and OHS
requirements.
2.4. Magnetic particle testing equipment is maintained
and stored in accordance with standard operating
procedures and OH&S requirements.
3. Report the results of 3.1. Basic indications are checked and defects are
magnetic particle identified in accordance with enterprise standards
test(s) and/or procedures.
3.2. Basic indications are confirmed in accordance with
3.3. Test results are reported in accordance with

Required skills

 interpreting and following procedures
 identifying inspection areas
 identifying discontinuities and defects


 selecting appropriate testing techniques and procedures
 assessing risks
 entering routine and familiar information onto proformas and standard workplace
forms
 locating, reading and interpreting information on written job instructions,
specifications, charts, lists and other reference documentation
 planning, sequencing operations
Required knowledge

 surface preparation
 procedures and OH&S requirements in relation to the preparation process
 established assessment procedures and techniques
 types of discontinuities and their consequences
 scope and basic principles of magnetic particle testing
 procedure for carrying out magnetic particle test using either the 'yoke' or 'bench'
 advantages and limitations of magnetic particle testing
 hazards and safety precautions associated with magnetic particle testing
 basic maintenance and storage procedures for testing equipment
 common basic defects
 methods/procedures for reporting test results
 advantages, limitations of various equipment
 magnetic particle application - methods for wet, dry particles
 recording and reporting results of simple tests
 safety precautions in testing
 use of toxic, flammable materials, electrical hazards
 use and application of personal protective equipment
 relevant hazards and control measures related to the competency

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

be able to perform basic magnetic particle testing.
Competency in this unit cannot be claimed until all
prerequisites have been satisfied.
with performing basic magnetic particle testing
procedures in a range of industrial applications or other
units requiring the exercise of the skills and knowledge


EVIDENCE GUIDE

assessment
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Preparation processes Surface cleaning and drying
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

Competency field

MEM24012C Apply metallurgy principles Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MEM24012C Apply metallurgy principles
Single band identifier removed to clarify dual status

Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers applying basic metallurgy principles
related to selecting appropriate non-destructive testing
techniques (NDT) and interpreting the results of NDT tests
for metallurgical processes.

Application of the unit This unit applies to knowledge of metallurgy principles,
and the relationship between the various non-destructive
testing methods and their capabilities and limitations when
applied to the detection of specific discontinuities in
metals and alloys.
The unit applies to employees other than NDT technicians
such as metallurgists, welding supervisors etc. who select
and order NDT tests and who interpret results provided by
tests for metal manufacturing, casting, shaping, and
joining processes. The unit does not apply to the conduct
of NDT tests.
Such variables as the type of discontinuity, manufacturing
process and limitations will assist in determining the
sequence of testing and the ultimate selection of one
non-destructive test method in preference to another. Any
testing that may be carried out must be completed with
particular attention to personal and OH&S regulations.
Where materials and chemicals which are subject to codes
and regulations are stored and used - for example,
chemicals, explosives, solvents, dangerous materials,
acids, or noxious waste products - safe work habits must
be considered.
Band:
This unit has dual status and is to be regarded as both a
Specialisation band A unit and Specialisation band B unit
for progression to C5 (AQF level V).
Unit Weight: 4

Not Applicable
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units




1. Interpret and apply 1.1. Principles of solidification and crystal structures in
the principles of metals and alloys are interpreted and applied in
solidification and relation to NDT techniques.
crystal structures in
metals and alloys
2. Interpret equilibrium 2.1. Equilibrium diagram for metal or alloy is correctly
diagrams for metals sourced
and alloys 2.2. Equilibrium diagrams are correctly interpreted.
3. Interpret and apply 3.1. Principles and methods for fusion welding of metals
the principles of and alloys are applied to NDT test selection.
fusion welding of 3.2. Defects in weldments are identified and classified
metals and alloys from NDT test results.
4. Interpret and apply 4.1. Principles and methods used to produce metal
the principles of the castings are applied to NDT test selection.
formation of castings 4.2. Defects in metal and alloy castings are identified and
classified from NDT test results.
5. Interpret and apply 5.1. Principles and methods used to produce steel
the principles of steel forgings are applied to NDT test selection.
forging 5.2. Defects in steel forgings are identified and classified
from NDT test results.
6. Interpret and apply 6.1. Principles of mechanical testing are applied to NDT
the principles of test selection.
mechanical testing 6.2. Defects in metal product are identified and classified
from NDT test results

Required skills

 research
 understanding and applying metallurgy principles
 selecting NDT test appropriate to metal or alloy and manufacturing process

Required knowledge

 principles of solidification and crystal structures in metal:
 classification of materials
 structure of atoms
 process of solidification
 crystal structures
 defects formed during solidification
 modification of crystal structure
 heat treatment processes
 defects formed during heat treatment
 meaning of equilibrium diagrams representative of a range of metals including
aluminium, iron, steel and common non-ferrous alloys:
 alloy systems
 solid and liquid solubility
 basic equilibrium diagrams
 equilibrium diagrams for common alloys
 principles of fusion welding in relation to NDT testing
 defects in fusion welding:
 processing defects
 grinding cracks
 pickling cracks
 heat treatment cracks
 service defects
 fatigue cracks
 corrosion and stress corrosion cracks
 principles of the formation of castings
 defects in castings
 principles of steel forging
 defects in steel forging
 principles of mechanical testing:
 mechanical testing
 tensile testing
 impact testing
 hardness testing
 fatigue testing
 other tests


Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

be able to apply metallurgy principles to NDT test
selection and interpretation. Competency in this unit
cannot be claimed until all prerequisites have been
satisfied.
with applying basic metallurgy principles as related to
non-destructive testing techniques, or other units


EVIDENCE GUIDE

assessment
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Principles and methods for  MMAW

fusion welding of metals and  SAW
alloys  GMAW
 GTAW
 FCAW
Defects in weldments Cracks, lack of fusion, cavities, imperfect shape,
solid inclusions, miscellaneous
Defects in metal and alloy Shrinkage cavities, hot tears, cold cracks, gas
castings holes
Principles and methods used to Deformations, strengthening mechanisms,

produce steel forgings annealing
Principles of mechanical testing Impact, tensile, hardness testing
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector

Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units
Competency field

MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
MSS402080A Undertake root cause analysis
New unit, superseding MSACMT280A Undertake root cause analysis - Equivalent
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency covers the skills and knowledge required to undertake root cause
analysis (RCA) by any person. This will often be undertaken by people working in a team.
This unit also covers the competencies needed by operators to contribute to an advanced
maintenance strategy using RCA coupled with diagrams and charts.

This unit applies to individuals working in an organisation which is applying competitive
systems and practices strategies. The unit applies to the formal problem solving to root cause
that the individual must undertake in their own work area or where the individual contributes
to problem solving to root cause as part of a team.
This unit requires an ability to seek and apply information from a variety of sources in order
to inform RCAs. Initiative and enterprise is also required to identify quick fix and permanent
solutions to problems.
Where training in a wider range of problem solving techniques and tools is required the unit
MSAPMSUP390A Use structured problem solving tools should be selected.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1 Recognise 1.1 Identify features or occurrences indicative of a problem

problems
1.2 Use appropriate tools, techniques and charts to define
the problem
2 Implement quick 2.1 Recommend a quick fix within the scope of competency
fix and authority
2.2 Use technology or processes relevant to the problem to

implement quick fix
3 Determine root 3.1 Identify a range of possible causes

cause
3.2 Gather data and other information to eliminate or
confirm possible causes
3.3 Use available data and information to link causes and

effects
3.4 Seek assistance, as required
3.5 Identify root cause

4 Develop 4.1 Identify a range of methods to eliminate the root cause

permanent or break the cause tree
solution
4.2 Select the most appropriate solution
4.3 Liaise with relevant people
4.4 Recommend or implement solution within the limits of

competency and authority
4.5 Monitor impact of solution and make further

recommendations, as required


Required skills
Required skills include:

 cooperating and working with others on problem solving
 assessing and recording information from a variety of sources
 defining potential problems factually, including:
 location and extent of problem or incident
 sequence of events where relevant
 extent of deviation from normal operation or performance
 analysing potential problems across a range of varied activities and knowledge applications
 reading and constructing simple charts, such as cause and effect diagrams
Required knowledge
Required knowledge includes:

 RCA methodology, including difference between quick fixes and root cause elimination or
breaking of causal tree
 principles and normal operation of equipment, plant and processes in own work area
sufficient to undertake a RCA and propose solutions
 common variances to normal performance that are indicators of a problem
 use of relevant analysis tools (e.g. cause/effect diagrams, Pareto charts and 5 Whys)
 operations in own work area
Evidence Guide
Critical aspects for assessment and A person who demonstrates competency in this unit must
evidence required to demonstrate be able to provide evidence of the ability to:
competency in this unit  undertake problem identification
 use appropriate processes to achieve root cause

identification
 prioritise solutions
 recommend solutions and implementation procedures
to problems within own area and range of technical
skills and knowledge
 evaluate implementation of solutions.
Context of and specific resources Assessment of performance must be undertaken in a
for assessment workplace using or implementing one or more
competitive systems and practices.
Access may be required to:
 workplace procedures and plans relevant to work area
 specifications and documentation relating to planned,
currently being implemented, or implemented
changes to work processes and procedures relevant to
the assessee
 documentation and information in relation to
production, waste, overheads and hazard
control/management
 reports from supervisors/managers
 case studies and scenarios to assess response to
contingencies.
Method of assessment A holistic approach should be taken to the assessment.
Competence in this unit may be assessed by using a
combination of the following to generate evidence:
 demonstration in the workplace
 workplace projects
 suitable simulation
 case studies/scenarios (particularly for assessment of
contingencies, improvement scenarios, and so on)
 targeted questioning
 reports from supervisors, peers and colleagues
(third-party reports)
 portfolio of evidence.
In all cases it is expected that practical assessment will
be combined with targeted questioning to assess
underpinning knowledge.
Where applicable, reasonable adjustment must be made
to work environments and training situations to
accommodate ethnicity, age, gender, demographics and
disability.
Guidance information for Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally

assessment appropriate and appropriate to the oracy, language and

literacy capacity of the candidate and the work being
performed.
Range Statement
Competitive systems and practices Competitive systems and practices may include, but are
not limited to:
 lean operations
 agile operations
 preventative and predictive maintenance approaches
 monitoring and data gathering systems, such as
Systems Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
software, Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
systems, Materials Resource Planning (MRP) and
proprietary systems
 statistical process control systems, including six
sigma and three sigma
 Just in Time (JIT), kanban and other pull-related
operations control systems
 supply, value, and demand chain monitoring and
analysis
 5S
 continuous improvement (kaizen)
 breakthrough improvement (kaizen blitz)
 cause/effect diagrams
 overall equipment effectiveness (OEE)
 takt time
 process mapping
 problem solving
 run charts
 standard procedures
 current reality tree
Competitive systems and practices should be interpreted
so as to take into account:

 the stage of implementation of competitive systems

and practices
 the size of the enterprise
 the work organisation, culture, regulatory
environment and the industry sector
Features or occurrences indicative Examples of features or occurrences indicating problems
of a problem include:
 variation to normal plant or equipment operation
 unplanned or non-conforming process or operations
outcomes
 out of specification products
 excess scrap
 accidents and emergencies
 regulatory breaches
 customer returns and complaints
 reduction or loss of sales
Root cause There are many possible causes of any problem. The root
cause contrasts with other possible causes of a problem
which when eliminated have no impact or only
ameliorate the problem. Elimination of the root cause
permanently eliminates the problem. There should only
be one root cause for any problem and so the analysis
should continue until this one cause is found.
Cause tree The series of causes is referred to as the cause tree. Not
all root causes are accessible and able to be eliminated.
Breaking the cause tree is such a way that the problem
cannot recur is an acceptable alternative.
Not all situations can wait for the RCA and eventual
elimination of the root cause as there may be serious
current impacts. The quick fix will control these
immediate impacts, but does not eliminate the root cause.
Quick fix A quick fix is not a short cut or side step for a permanent
solution to the root cause. It is a necessary step designed
to control the immediate impacts of a problem, for
example, to prevent ongoing errors or to ameliorate
damage.
Appropriate techniques/charts Appropriate techniques/charts may include:

 control charts
 Pareto charts
 run charts
 flow charts

 cause and effect diagrams

 tree diagrams
 5 Whys analysis
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Competitive systems and practices

Not applicable.

NWP227B Control vegetation on a site Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
NWP227B Release 2: Layout adjusted. No changes to content.
NWP227B Release 1: Primary release.
Unit Descriptor
This unit of competency describes the outcomes required to control vegetation on a site by
inspecting, identifying and treating weeds, plants and shrubs. The ability to plan and
undertake work safely, including the safe handling of chemicals and equipment, is essential to
performance.

This unit supports the attainment of skills and knowledge required for field and operational
staff involved in plant control but it does not reflect the requirements for undertaking plant
control on the properties of third parties where further training and licensing requirements
may apply.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



Elements describe the Performance criteria describe the required performance needed to
essential outcomes of demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text
a unit of competency. is used, further information is detailed in the range statement.
Assessment of performance is to be consistent with the evidence
guide.

1 Plan and prepare 1.1 Plan work according to work specifications, relevant legislation
work. and organisational procedures.
1.2 Perform site check according to organisational requirements to
prevent damage to other utilities and environment.
1.3 Select and check equipment and personal protective equipment
and material safety data sheets to meet safety requirements of
task and site.
1.4 Identify noxious weeds, plants and shrubs.
2 Treat vegetation. 2.1 Conduct monitoring programs to determine spread, growth rate
and extent of problem caused by weeds.
2.2 Store, handle, transport and mix chemicals and other control
mechanisms according to relevant legislation and organisational
procedures.
2.3 Use processes to treat vegetation in a manner safe to all
stakeholders and according to appropriate standards and
organisational operational procedures.
2.4 Implement controls according to organisational requirements to
minimise environmental damage and deal with emergencies and
spillage.
3 Check work and 3.1 Clean equipment after use and prepare for safe storage or re-use.
restore work site. 3.2 Identify potential hazards and dispose of waste according to
organisational requirements.
4 Complete 4.1 Record use of chemicals and control mechanisms according to
records and legislative and organisational requirements.
reports. 4.2 Complete work reports and documentation as required.


This describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level, required for this unit.
Required skills:
 identify and report operational problems
 produce reports and logs
 use personal protective equipment
 use tools and machinery
 use chemicals and other treatments
 follow plans, charts and instructions
 perform work-related calculations
 interpret material safety data sheets (MSDS)
 apply procedures and standards
 communicate with employees and customers
 work effectively as part of a team
 use communication equipment
 use literacy skills in regard to verbal and written communication in the workplace
 give and receive instructions
Required knowledge:
 environmental aspects of controlling vegetation
 relevant utilities and service bodies
 communication systems
 use, storage, handling and transport of hazardous substances
 landscape and ground structure of work area
 risk factors and potential hazards of vegetation control processes
 equipment operation, capacity and limitations
 effects of weather and conditions on use of chemical treatment, site or plant
 control systems
 materials handling
 landscape and ground structure of work area

Evidence Guide
performance criteria, required skills and knowledge, the range statement and the Assessment
Critical aspects for The candidate should demonstrate the ability to control
assessment and evidence vegetation on a site by inspecting, identifying and treating
required to demonstrate weeds, plants and shrubs including:
competency in this unit  interpreting work requirements from given documentation
 identifying noxious weeds and appropriate control
methods
 planning and preparing equipment and materials required
for work
 treating vegetation according to legislative and
 identifying risks and implement controls
 restoring work site according to environmental and
 completing relevant documentation.
Context of and specific Access to the workplace and resources including:
resources for assessment  documentation that should normally be available in a
water industry organisation
 relevant codes, standards and government regulations.
Where applicable, physical resources should include
equipment modified for people with disabilities.
Access must be provided to appropriate learning and
assessment support when required.
Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally
appropriate, and appropriate to the language and literacy
capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.
 competency will need to be demonstrated over a period of
time reflecting the scope of the role and the practical
requirements of the workplace
 where the assessment is part of a structured learning
experience the evidence collected must relate to a number
of performances assessed at different points in time and
separated by further learning and practice
 a decision of competence only taken at the point when the
competence over time and in various contexts

experience must include a combination of direct, indirect

and supplementary evidence
 where assessment is for the purpose of recognition
(RCC/RPL), the evidence provided will need to be
authenticated and show that it represents competency
demonstrated over a period of time
 assessment can be through simulated project-based
activity and must include evidence relating to each of the
elements in this unit.
In all cases where practical assessment is used it will be
combined with targeted questioning to assess the
underpinning knowledge. Questioning will be undertaken in a
manner appropriate to the skill levels of the operator and
cultural issues that may affect responses to the questions, and
will reflect the requirements of the competency and the work
being performed.

Range Statement
work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording, if
used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Add any essential operating conditions
that may be present with training and assessment depending on the work situation, needs of
the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts.
Relevant legislation and  relevant federal and state or territory legislation and
organisational procedures regulations
include:  codes of practice, associated standards and guidance
material
 documented organisational policies, manuals and
induction programs
 relevant community planning and development
agreements, such as land care agreements
Equipment and personal  hand and power tools
protective equipment may  on- and off-road vehicles
include:  lifting and winching equipment
 mechanical excavation equipment
 chemicals and mixers
 chemical spraying apparatus
 mixing equipment and storage areas
 communication equipment
 gas detection equipment
 rescue equipment
 breathing apparatus
 other appropriate personal protective equipment,
including goggles and gloves
Processes used to treat and  application of chemicals
control vegetation include:  manual extraction
 use of genetic plant modification
 companion planting
 other environmental controls, including use of insects
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.

Competency field
Common.

PMC552061C Deliver concrete to site Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PMC552061C Deliver concrete to site
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit of competency covers the efficient delivery of
quality concrete to site using an agitator or similar.

Application of the unit This competency covers the efficient delivery of quality
concrete to site using an agitator or similar. It includes the
operation of all ancillary equipment and the operation of
plant using PLCs where appropriate. This competency is
NOT intended to be used for the delivery of concrete
within a site using mobile equipment or overhead cranes.
PMC562070B Move materials should be used in these
circumstances.
In a typical scenario the agitator will be truck mounted.
This unit does not cover the driving of the truck. Local
regulations should be consulted and complied with.
Typically an operator would:
 deliver premix concrete to a customer.
 determine the product/delivery requirements from the
production schedule, specifications. delivery docket
and/or other specifications.
 resolve and prevent routine problems; and
 ensure the delivered product is to specification.
The operator generally works independently with frequent
contact with the base plant.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units




1. Load agitator. 1.1. Check job requirements
1.2. Position agitator for loading
1.3. Load agitator with correct concrete batch
1.4. Check any special requirements and take action
required.
1.5. Check that slump is to specification and take any
action required
2. Deliver concrete. 2.1. Deliver concrete without delay
2.2. Position vehicle/agitator as required by safety needs
and if practical customer requirements
2.3. Report breakdowns or lengthy delays en route to
relevant person
2.4. Maintain product quality as per requirements and
procedures.
3. Conform to site 3.1. Check access to site with customer
protocols 3.2. Assess site conditions and enter in a manner suited
to the conditions, load and site requirements
3.3. Mix concrete on site as per quality requirements
3.4. Discharge concrete as required by customer
3.5. Wash down chutes and agitator in the area
designated by the customer
3.6. Complete all records
4. Rectify routine 4.1. Identify the range of faults that can occur during the
problems operation
4.2. Determine and rectify fault causes in accordance
with procedures/work instructions
4.3. Identify and rectify equipment failure causes in
accordance with procedures
4.4. Make sure appropriate records and log books of
equipment operations are maintained to meet
procedures
4.5. Identify non-routine problems and take appropriate
action.
4.6. Ensure required checklists are completed
5. Control hazards 5.1. Identify hazards from the job to be done
5.2. Identify other hazards in the work area
5.3. Assess the risks arising from those hazards
5.4. Implement measures to control those risks in line


with procedures

Required skills
Skills required for this unit include the ability to:

 communicate with customers
 determine, and meet customer requirements while maintaining HSE standards
 deliver product to site on time and within specification
 operate the equipment safely
Reading and numeracy is required to the level of interpreting workplace documents
and technical information.
Required knowledge
 Knowledge and understanding of the equipment sufficient to recognise problems
and the appropriate action to be taken.
 Knowledge of the organisation's procedures and relevant regulatory requirements
along with the ability to implement them within appropriate time constraints and in
a manner relevant to the operation of the equipment.
 Knowledge of:
 the relationship between mixing time/water cement ratio and product quality
 importance of slump
 quality procedures
 handling techniques to maintain quality
 Knowledge of underlying causes of faults such as precipitated by:
 irregular mixing action
 mechanical failure
 electrical equipment malfunction
as is relevant to the practical operation of the equipment.

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Overview of assessment The unit will be assessed in as holistic a manner as is

practical and may be integrated with the assessment of
other relevant units of competency.
Critical aspects for assessment and Competence must be demonstrated in the ability to
evidence required to demonstrate recognise situations requiring action and then in
competency in this unit implementing appropriate corrective action. Consistent
performance should be demonstrated. In particular look
to see that:
 concrete is delivered in full, on time and in
specification
 there are good relations with the customers
 there is good liaison with the batching plant.
These aspects may be best assessed using a range of
scenarios/case studies/what ifs as the stimulus, with a
walk-through forming part of the response. The
assessment activities should include responding to a
range of problems.
Context of and specific resources for Assessment for this unit of competency will be on an
assessment operating work site.
Assessment will occur over a range of situations which
will include disruptions to normal, smooth operation.
Simulation or case studies/scenarios may be required to
allow for timely assessment of parts of this competency
unit (e.g., those parts of element 3 referring to dealing
with customers). Simulation should be based on the
actual plant and will include 'walk-throughs' of the
relevant competency components. Simulations may also
include the use of case studies/scenarios and role plays.
Assessment will require access to an operating plant over
an extended period of time, or a suitable method of
gathering evidence of operating ability over a range of
situations. A bank of scenarios/case studies/what ifs
will be required as will a bank of questions which will be
used to probe the reasoning behind the observable
actions.

EVIDENCE GUIDE
Method of assessment It may be appropriate to assess this unit together with:

 TLIC407D Drive heavy rigid vehicle
 TLIC307C Drive medium rigid vehicle
 TLIC507D Drive heavy combination vehicle
or such other unit as may be appropriate.
This unit may be assessed in conjunction with:
 MSAPMSUP280A Manage conflict at work
 PMC562081B Deliver customer service.
Individual enterprises may choose to add prerequisites
and co-requisites relevant to their processes.
Guidance information for Assessment processes and techniques must be culturally

assessment appropriate and appropriate to the language and literacy
capacity of the candidate and the work being performed.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Procedures All operations are performed in accordance with

standard procedures and work instructions.
Special requirements Special requirements may be noted on the docket

or instructed by the batcher or otherwise
communicated.
Special requirements may include the addition of
water.
Relevant person Relevant person for reporting delays/breakdowns

may include batcher, dispatcher or other person as
specified in the procedures.
Records Completion of records must include:

 the addition of water
 other items identified in the procedures
and where possible the customer signature.
Records may be completed on the docket or other
means as specified in the procedures.
Checklists Required checklists ma include:

 maintenance checklists
 pre start checklists
 other checklists
Context This unit includes:
 determining and adding the correct amount of
water taking into account required
specification and moisture/water already in the
mix
 measurement of slump or similar tests
 customer service and product knowledge
 knowledge of relevant road rules and waste
disposal requirements.

RANGE STATEMENT
 It does NOT include the driving of the truck
(which is a prerequisite). However the driver's
road skills should be observed to ensure that
they meet the business's standards.
It does NOT include the driving of the truck.
However, the driver's road skills should be
observed to ensure that they meet the business's
standards.
Typical problems Typical problems may include:

 sites with poor access/unstable soil
 transportation/site delays
 site conflicts
 disposal of agitator washings
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Operational/technical
Competency field
Competency field
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

PSPGOV205B Participate in workplace change Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV205B Participate in workplace change
Release TP Version Comments
3 PSP12V1 Unit descriptor edited.
2 PSP04V4.2 Layout adjusted. No changes

to content.
1 PSP04V4.1 Primary release.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers participation in the change process within a workgroup. It includes
suggesting options for change and contributing to the implementation of change.
In practice, participating in workplace change may overlap with other generalist or specialist
public sector work activities such as working effectively in the public sector, communicating
with others, using resources, handling information, using technology, etc.
This is one of 6 units of competency in the Working in Government and Management
Competency Fields that deal with change. Related units are:
 PSPGOV306B Implement change
 PSPGOV405B Provide input to change processes
 PSPGOV514A Facilitate change
 PSPMNGT604B Manage change
 PSPMNGT703A Lead and influence change

of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.


Elements are the essential Together, performance criteria specify the requirements for
outcomes of the unit of competent performance. Text in bold italics is explained in the
competency. Range Statement following.

1. Suggest options for 1.1 Possible changes to aspects of operational work which could
change improve efficiency and effectiveness are identified and
suggested.
1.2 Advantages, disadvantages and consequences of proposed
suggestions are considered and discussed with the workgroup.
1.3 Other workgroup members' input is accepted and considered in
suggesting options for change.
2. Contribute to the 2.1 Specific changes in own routine operations and procedures are
implementation of implemented as required in accordance with legislation, policy
change and procedures.
2.2 Changes are made in response to directions to achieve service
standards and identified outcomes.
2.3 Available resources and supports are accessed to assist in
changing own work practices.
2.4 Personal responses to change are discussed with the workgroup.
2.5 Effects upon others of own actions/reactions to change are
considered.
2.6 Support mechanisms to assist with the implementation of
change are identified and accessed as required.


This section describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level, required for
this unit.
Skill requirements
 working in a team in a way that demonstrates consideration of the effect of change
on others and the effect of one's own reaction to change on others
 communicating with team members on issues and personal reactions to change
 implementing change as required
 accessing assistance for coping with change
 responding to diversity, including gender and disability
 applying public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety, and
environment in the context of change
Knowledge requirements
Look for evidence that confirms knowledge and understanding of:
 personal response to change
 impact of change as it affects individuals and groups
 public sector legislation, policy and guidelines
 environmental and sustainability guidelines
 workgroup practices and service standards
 equal employment opportunity, equity and diversity principles
 occupational health and safety and environmental impact of change including
stress, and stress management

Evidence Guide
The Evidence Guide specifies the evidence required to demonstrate achievement in the unit of
competency as a whole. It must be read in conjunction with the Unit descriptor, Performance
Criteria, the Range Statement and the Assessment Guidelines for the Public Sector Training
Package.
Units to be assessed  Pre-requisite units that must be achieved prior to this unit:Nil
together  Co-requisite units that must be assessed with this unit:Nil
 Co-assessed units that may be assessed with this unit to
increase the efficiency and realism of the assessment process
include, but are not limited to:
 PSPGOV201B Work in a public sector environment
 PSPGOV202B Use routine workplace communication
techniques
 PSPGOV203B Deliver a service to clients
 PSPGOV204B Access and use resources
 PSPGOV206B Handle workplace information
 PSPGOV207B Use technology in the workplace
 PSPGOV208A Write routine workplace materials
Overview of evidence In addition to integrated demonstration of the elements and their
requirements related performance criteria, look for evidence that confirms:
 the knowledge requirements of this unit
 the skill requirements of this unit
 application of Employability Skills as they relate to this unit
 participation in workplace change in a range of (3 or more)
contexts (or occasions, over time)
Resources required to These resources include:
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to change
in the public sector
 case studies and workplace scenarios to capture the range of
situations likely to be encountered when participating in
workplace change
Where and how to Valid assessment of this unit requires:
assess evidence  a workplace environment, or one that closely resembles normal
work practice and replicates the range of conditions likely to be
encountered when participating in workplace change, including
coping with difficulties, irregularities and breakdowns in
routine
 participation in workplace change in a range of (3 or more)
Assessment methods should reflect workplace demands, such as

literacy, and the needs of particular groups, such as:

 people with disabilities
 people from culturally and linguistically diverse backgrounds
 Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people
 women
 young people
 older people
 people in rural and remote locations.
Assessment methods suitable for valid and reliable assessment of
this competency may include, but are not limited to, a combination
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
 authenticated evidence from the workplace and/or training
courses
For consistency of Evidence must be gathered over time in a range of contexts to
assessment ensure the person can achieve the unit outcome and apply the
competency in different situations or environments

Range Statement
The Range Statement provides information about the context in which the unit of competency
is carried out. The variables cater for differences between States and Territories and the
Commonwealth, and between organisations and workplaces. They allow for different work
requirements, work practices and knowledge. The Range Statement also provides a focus for
assessment. It relates to the unit as a whole. Text in bold italics in the Performance Criteria is
explained here.
Legislation, policy and  Commonwealth, State/Territory and Local Government

procedures may include: legislation
 government policy
 public sector code of ethics
 national standards specific to service delivery area
 the organisation's policies and practices
 environment and sustainability policies
 organisational code of conduct
 specific work unit/business area policy and procedures
Change in the workplace  organisational change
may include:  implementation of new/revised work practices
 sustainability practices
 technology change in the workplace
 work location
 structural and functional change
 client base
 staffing changes
 job role changes
 work priorities
 shared services environment
 machinery of government changes
 legislative change
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Working in Government.

PSPGOV306B Implement change Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV306B Implement change

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers implementation of change and participation in refinement of work
procedures. It includes preparing for, implementing and monitoring change and working with
ambiguity in the face of change.
In practice, implementing change may overlap with other generalist or specialist public sector
work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, working effectively,
contributing to the workgroup, organising information, using resources, etc.
Competency Fields that deal with change. Related units are:
 PSPGOV205B Participate in workplace change
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Prepare for change 1.1 The need for change in work practices is accepted within the
work unit and suggestions are made or options devised.
1.2 Advantages, disadvantages and consequences of proposed
suggestions are identified.
1.3 Suggested workplace changes are discussed with supervisor and
colleagues and acted upon as required.
1.4 Contributions are made to planning for change in the workgroup
in accordance with organisational requirements.
1.5 Effects upon others of own emotions/reactions to change are
considered and adjustments are made to support required
change.
2. Implement and 2.1 Own work practices are changed according to agreed
monitor change arrangements.
2.2 Advice and support are given to assist others to adjust to
changes in work practice.
2.3 The benefits of change are promoted in the workplace as
opportunity arises.
2.4 Opportunities for continuous improvement in the workplace are
identified, referred for approval and acted on.
2.5 Change is monitored with others to determine the effectiveness
of revised procedures, and findings are advised to senior staff.
3. Work with 3.1 Ambiguity/uncertainty relating to changed roles, functions and
ambiguity in the procedures is identified and problem-focused strategies are
workplace used for coping.
3.2 A flexible approach is applied when carrying out instructions
for changes to work practices.
3.3 Issues relating to change that cannot be resolved immediately
are accommodated whilst implementing change in accordance
with legislation, policy and procedures.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying public sector legislation, policies and guidelines in an environment of
change
 communicating including consultation and negotiation with a diverse workforce,
including peers and supervisors
 observing and evaluating
 giving and receiving feedback
 coping with ambiguity, emotions and stressors related to implementing change
 applying occupational health and safety and environmental requirements in the
context of change
 legislation, policies and guidelines relating to public sector environments
 principles of adapting to change
 group dynamics
 emotional intelligence
 workgroup practices
 at least one change management model
 public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and environment in
the context of change management

Evidence Guide
Package.
 PSPETHC301B Uphold the values and principles of public
service
 PSPGOV301B Work effectively in the organisation
 PSPGOV302B Contribute to workgroup activities
 PSPGOV303B Build and maintain internal networks
 PSPGOV307B Organise workplace information
 PSPGOV308B Work effectively with diversity
 PSPGOV312A Use workplace communication strategies
 PSPGOV314A Contribute to conflict management
 PSPGOV315A Give and receive workplace feedback
 PSPLEGN301B Comply with legislation in the public sector
 changes implemented in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
occasions, over time).
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to change
management
situations likely to be encountered when implementing change
encountered when implementing change, including coping with
difficulties, irregularities and breakdowns in routine
 changes implemented in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or


 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses
competency in different situations or environments.

Range Statement
explained here.
Change may be:  imposed or self-initiated

 at individual, team, organisational or regional level
Change may include:  technology
 work practices and procedures
 staffing
 resources
 work priorities and objectives
 budget
 organisational structure/restructure
 machinery of government changes
 amalgamation of agencies
 work location
 shared services environment
 workplace re-organisation
Problem-focused  clearly identifying problem
strategies may include:  seeking advice and direction for clarifying/dealing with
problem
 developing a plan of action
 seeking feedback on planned action
 implementing planned action and reflecting on/evaluating
outcomes in order to modify/use same strategy
Flexible approach may  positive attitude to change even though there may be some
include: ambiguity about what is required
 being prepared to perform work differently one day to the next
 accepting an iterative approach to changes in work practices
Legislation, policy and  Commonwealth, State/Territory and Local Government
procedures may include: legislation
 environmental and sustainability policies
 national standards related to service delivery area

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV404B Develop and implement work unit plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers development and implementation of work unit plans at both the work unit
and individual level to achieve results through planning. It includes participating in the
planning activities of the work unit, preparing individual work plans, and implementing and
evaluating work plans.
In practice, development and implementation of work plans may overlap with other generalist
or specialist public sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation,
applying government processes, gathering and analysing information, using resources, etc.
This is one of 6 units in the Working in Government and Management Competency Fields that
deal with working with others. Related units are:
 PSPGOV511A Provide leadership
 PSPGOV516A Develop and use emotional intelligence
 PSPGOV604A Foster leadership and innovation
 PSPMNGT701B Provide strategic
of publication

Not applicable.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Participate in 1.1 Contributions are made to planning that reflect a knowledge of
planning activities corporate goals and their relationship to work unit and
individual plans.
1.2 Consideration of workplace requirements is reflected in
contributions to work unit plans.
1.3 Planning activities are completed as requested within the
defined timeframe and meet the organisation's requirements.
1.4 Feedback is sought and acted on in relation to effectiveness of
input to planning activities.
2. Prepare individual 2.1 Work plan objectives are linked to and consistent with
work plans organisational and work unit aims.
2.2 Objectives are stated as measurable targets with clear
performance indicators.
2.3 Innovative and cost-effective options for achieving objectives
are explored and aligned to organisational aims.
2.4 Individual work plans are used to promote the achievement of
work unit objectives and to reflect personal and organisational
accountability to all clients.
2.5 Collaborative planning with other workgroup members is used
to integrate individual plans and build working relationships.
3. Implement and 3.1 Work methods and practices to implement plans are identified
evaluate work plans in consultation with others.
3.2 Workload and work flows are monitored and balanced.
3.3 Work is completed in accordance with work plans and meets
time and workplace requirements, legislation, policies and
procedures.
3.4 Problems in implementing work plans are monitored and
solutions are proposed within area of responsibility.
3.5 Work plans are revised according to changes in work priorities
and organisational needs.


This section describes the essential skills and knowledge and their level, required for this unit.
Skill requirements
 planning own work to achieve goals
 engaging in collaborative planning with other workgroup members
 applying problem solving
 monitoring and evaluation of progress towards work unit goals
 negotiating goals and outcomes
 applying public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and environment
in the context of work planning
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to work planning in the
public sector
 effective planning processes
 policies and procedures on sustainable practice
 corporate goals or aims
 organisational procedures
 importance of aligning work unit plans with organisational goals
 public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and environment in the
context of work planning

Evidence Guide
Package.
 PSPBORD401A Create and maintain profiles
 PSPETHC401A Uphold and support the values and
principles of public service
 PSPGOV403B Use resources to achieve work unit goals
 PSPGOV406B Gather and analyse information
 PSPGOV408A Value diversity
 PSPGOV411A Deal with conflict
 PSPGOV412A Use advanced workplace communication
strategies
 PSPGOV413A Compose complex workplace documents
 PSPGOV417A Identify and treat risks
 PSPGOV422A Apply government processes
 PSPLEGN401A Encourage compliance with legislation in
the public sector
 PSPOHS401B Implement workplace safety procedures and
programs
 PSPPM401B Design simple projects
 PSPPM402B Manage simple projects
 PSPPROC410A Administer contracts
 work unit plans developed and implemented in a range of (3 or
more) contexts (or occasions, over time)
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to work
planning in the public sector


situations likely to be encountered when developing and
implementing work unit plans
assess evidence  a workplace environment or one that closely resembles normal
encountered when developing and implementing work unit
plans, including coping with difficulties, irregularities and
breakdowns in routine
 work unit plans developed and implemented in a range of (3 or
more) contexts (or occasions, over time).
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 observation
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
 simulation or role plays
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Workplace requirements  staffing procedures

may relate to:  resourcing allocations and requirements
 identified timeframes
 relevant legislation affecting organisational administration
 organisation, corporate and strategic plans and activity
calendars
 relevant industrial awards
 financial circulars (or equivalent)
 organisation financial and personnel management guidelines
 technology and data associated with work
 environmental and sustainability practices
Work unit plans may  daily/weekly/monthly work unit plans
include:  project plans
 specific purpose plans including equal employment
opportunity, industrial democracy and occupational health and
safety
 resource plans
Legislation, policy and  State/Territory and Commonwealth legislation and regulations
procedures may include: such as:
 public sector management acts
 financial management acts
 privacy legislation
 equal employment opportunity, anti-discrimination and
harassment legislation
 occupational health and safety legislation
 consumer legislation
 environmental and sustainability legislation
 risk management guidelines.
 ethics and accountability standards
 public sector standards
 fraud control standards
 government security standards
 organisational policy, procedures and protocols

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV406B Gather and analyse information Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers collection and analysis of information to achieve work unit objectives and
meet client needs. It includes identifying and collecting information, analysing and
interpreting information, developing and applying workable solutions, presenting information
and maintaining information.
In practice, gathering and analysing information may overlap with other generalist or
specialist public sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation,
applying government processes, using resources, gathering evidence, carrying out projects,
using financial processes, identifying and treating risks, monitoring for fraud, undertaking,
court listings, conducting claim assessments, etc.
Competency Fields that deal with information/knowledge management. Related units are:
 PSPGOV504B Undertake research and analysis
 PSPMNGT614A Facilitate knowledge management
of publication

Not applicable.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify and collect 1.1 Nature, extent and purpose of required information is
information identified.
1.2 Internal and external sources are identified and accessed to
produce required information in accordance with legislation,
policy and procedures.
1.3 Information is collected, organised, recorded and reported in
accordance with organisational procedures and defined
guidelines.
1.4 Information collected is organised in a way which enables easy
access and retrieval by other staff.
2. Analyse and 2.1 Information and its sources are critically evaluated for relevance
interpret and validity to business/client requirements.
information 2.2 Basic analysis of information is undertaken as required to
identify key issues.
2.3 More detailed analysis of information is carried out as required
using relevant techniques including mathematical calculations
and methods for numerical/graphical information.
3. Develop and apply 3.1 Workable solutions to business/client requirements are
workable solutions developed on consideration of analysed information.
3.2 Proposed solutions are communicated or implemented as
required.
4. Present information 4.1 Information is reported in the required format, style, structure
and timeframe.
4.2 Information is presented in required medium in accordance
with organisational requirements using relevant technology.
5. Maintain 5.1 A range of standard and complex information systems and
information operations is used in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures.
5.2 Information and records are maintained in accordance with
organisational procedures to ensure data and system integrity.
5.3 Routine data and records are reconciled as required.
5.4 Inadequacies in system/s relating to information retrieval are
identified and corrected or reported to relevant staff as required.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and
environment in the context of information management
 accessing and using information ethically and legally
 using manual and computerised techniques for information management
 applying computer technology to data storage, security, retrieval and presentation
 using basic statistical and numerical manipulation
 using critical analysis techniques
 communicating with colleagues and supervisors
 presenting information in a range of ways such as report format, numerically, in
tables, with graphs, spatially
 using problem solving and referring problems as required
 applying equal employment opportunity, equity and diversity principles
 legislation, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to information handling in
the public sector, such as confidentiality, privacy, security, freedom of information
 data collection and management procedures
 organisational information handling and storage procedures
 cultural aspects of information and meaning
 sources of public sector work-related information
 economic, legal, security and social issues surrounding the use of information
 electronic and manual filing systems
 databases and data storage systems
the context of information management

Evidence Guide
Package.
 PSPCRT407A Undertake court listings
 PSPFIN401A Use public sector financial processes
 PSPFRAU401B Monitor data for indicators of fraud
 PSPGOV402B Deliver and monitor service to clients
 PSPGOV404B Develop and implement work unit plans
 PSPGOV407B Provide a quotation
 PSPIM401A Conduct initial claim assessments
the public sector
 PSPPM404A Carry out simple project activities
 PSPREG411A Gather information through interviews
 PSPREG412A Gather and manage evidence
 PSPSEC405A Handle security classified information
 information gathered and analysed in a range of (3 or more)
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to
information research, presentation and management
 access to electronic information/records management systems

 Case studies and workplace scenarios to capture the range of

situations likely to be encountered when gathering and
analysing information
encountered when gathering and analysing information,
including coping with difficulties, irregularities and
 information gathered and analysed in a range of (3 or more)
contexts (or occasions, over time).
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Information may include:  legislation, guidelines and awards

 organisation, legal and policy materials
 client information
 market trends
 media reports
 registries and file records
 library materials
 financial records
 basic statistical information
 human resources/personnel records
 asset records
 meta-data
Sources of information  those internal to the organisation such as:
may include:  intranet
 databases/files
 library collections
 internal publications
 annual reports
 newsletters
 other staff
 those external to the organisation such as:
 Internet
 local, state, national and international libraries and archives
 other organisations' publications
 staff in external organisations
Legislation, policy and  Commonwealth and State/Territory legislation, standards and
procedures may include: guidelines especially relating to privacy, confidentiality,
freedom of information, security, fraud control, copyright,
intellectual property
 national standards
 Australian standards such as records management, knowledge
management, risk management

 the organisation's policies/practices/code of conduct

Analysis of information  qualitative analysis
may include:  quantitative analysis
 critical analysis
 problem solving
 matching
 statistical analysis
 mathematical calculations
 forecasting
Presentation of  routine reports and submissions
information may include:  briefing notes, Ministerials
 proposals, project plans
 articles and promotional material
 tabular or graphical presentation
 overhead transparencies
 slideshow data presentation
 face-to-face
 telephone
Information systems may  file/records management systems
include:  personnel/human resources systems
 specific purpose databases
 library systems
 data warehouse systems
 web sites
 financial information systems
 workplace communication systems
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV413A Compose complex workplace documents Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers written communication involving the evaluation and composition of complex
workplace documents. It includes interpreting and evaluating workplace information,
composing complex written materials and editing.
In practice, composing complex workplace documents may overlap with other generalist or
applying government processes, gathering and analysing information, using resources, etc.
This is one of 5 units of competency in the Working in Government Competency Field that
deal with written communication. Related units are:
 PSPGOV313A Compose workplace documents
 PSPGOV513A Refine complex workplace documents
 PSPGOV606A Prepare high-level/sensitive written materials

 No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements apply to this unit at the
time of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Interpret and 1.1 Information is sourced from inside and outside the organisation
evaluate workplace in accordance with organisational requirements and sources
information analysed for reliability.
1.2 Cultural context of the information is distinguished and used to
aid in interpretation.
1.3 Information is analysed for relevance to own work and
assistance is sought with interpretation of complex materials in
accordance with organisational procedures.
1.4 Assumed prior knowledge underpinning workplace information
is identified and additional information is gathered if necessary
to allow interpretation.
1.5 Implications of information are passed on to relevant personnel
in accordance with legislation, policy and procedures.
2. Compose complex 2.1 The purpose, objectives and format for the materials are
written materials determined in accordance with organisational requirements.
2.2 Information to inform the document is sourced, collated in a
logical manner and assessed for relevance and inclusion.
2.3 Content, structure and sequencing of materials are determined
in line with the purpose and intended audience.
2.4 Options/recommendations are considered for inclusion.
2.5 Possible impact on the target audience is assessed and potential
criticism countered where necessary.
2.6 Written materials are composed, reviewed to confirm
objectives, organisational and legislative requirements are
met, and materials are submitted within required timeframes.
3. Edit written material 3.1 Intent of the communication is confirmed.
3.2 Content is checked and proofread for grammar, spelling and
punctuation.
3.3 Communication is assessed in light of the needs of the intended
audience.
3.4 Recommendations for improvement are made if necessary and
explained/recorded in a manner that provides a learning
opportunity for the future.
3.5 Information is amended if required, and submitted for approval
in accordance with organisational policy and procedures.


this unit.
Skill requirements:
 reading and writing at a complex level to cope with a range of workplace materials
 integrating information from a diverse number of sources in order to generate
meaning
 writing and sequencing abstract concepts according to the required purpose of
written material
 linking complex ideas in written material through selection and use of words,
grammatical structures, headings and punctuation appropriate to the purpose
 spelling, punctuation and grammar for workplace documents at an experienced
level
 implementing ergonomic requirements for office work
 complying with environmental policies such as those relating to paper
use/wastage/recycling
Knowledge requirements:
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to written
communication in the public sector such as privacy, freedom of information,
information security, confidentiality, copyright
 principles of effective written communication at a high level of complexity
 differences in register/style between workplace communication for different
purposes
 government style manual
 organisation protocols for a range of complex written communication
 channels of communication and processes for obtaining advice, approvals etc
 organisational policy for recordkeeping - paper-based and electronic
the context of preparing written materials

Evidence Guide
Package.
Units to be assessed  Pre-requisite units that must be achieved prior to this unit: Nil
together  Co-requisite units that must be assessed with this unit: Nil
the public sector
 PSPOHS401B Implement workplace safety procedures and
programs
 advanced communication strategies used in a range of (3 or
communication in the public sector, including freedom of
information, privacy, equal employment opportunity,
anti-discrimination, occupational health and safety
advanced communication situations likely to be encountered
and required in the public sector
encountered when using advanced communication strategies,

 advanced communication strategies used in a range of (3 or
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 observation
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Information for  applications

evaluation may include:  briefing papers
 discussion papers
 expert opinion
 literature
 minutes
 project briefs
 reports
 research
 speeches
 strategic and operational plans
 submissions
 web site information
Purpose may include:  to influence opinion
 to report on achievement
 to recommend options and corresponding actions
 to meet regulatory requirements
 to meet public sector reporting requirements
 to develop policy
 to document policy
 to obtain funding
 to provide briefing material
 to provide or contribute to strategic planning
 to respond to enquiries/complaints
Materials to be composed  position papers
may include:  discussion papers
 briefing materials
 funding submissions
 business cases
 project briefs
 reports
 operational and other plans
Content, structure and  facts and observations
 case studies

sequencing may include:  critical analysis

 opinion
 creative ideas
 recommendations and supporting arguments
 anticipated arguments and rebuttals
 conclusions
 division into chapters or sections
 tables of contents and indexes
 glossaries
 executive summary
 precis
 chronological structure
 alphabetic structure
 operating sequence
Organisational and  use of plain English
legislative requirements  style formats
may include:  acknowledgements
 particular terminology to be used/not used:
 acronyms
 technical terms
 bureaucratic language
 abbreviations
 requirements for minimising jargon in written materials
 requirements for written material to take account of cultural,
ethnic, religious or language differences, disabilities, etiquette
 guidelines for illustrative items
 standards for references, acknowledgements, citations,
footnotes, endnotes, bibliographies
 particular communication channels
 State/Territory or Commonwealth legislation, regulations,
policies, procedures and guidelines relating to the preparation
and security of written information in the public sector,
including freedom of information, copyright, privacy,
confidentiality, equal employment opportunity, diversity,
occupational health and safety
 risk assessment
 information security requirements
 codes of ethics
 private or confidential materials
 embargoed materials

 security requirements
 politically sensitive materials
 security standards for government information
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV421A Exercise delegations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV421A Exercise delegations

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the exercise of delegations in the public sector. It includes confirming the
delegation, applying other interacting legislation, policy and guidelines, and exercising
delegations.
In practice, exercising delegations may overlap with other generalist or specialist public sector
work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, applying government
processes, gathering and analysing information, using resources, etc.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Confirm delegation 1.1 Current information relating to enabling legislation, standards,
instructions and delegated authority is accessed and used to
maintain up-to-date knowledge of requirements.
1.2 Delegation provided under legislation and the boundaries of
that authority are confirmed.
1.3 Rights, responsibilities and accountabilities under the delegation
are identified and confirmed.
1.4 All levels of authority under the delegation are confirmed with
management and staff to ensure referrals as limits of authority
are reached.
2. Apply other 2.1 Other legislation, policies or instructions that impact on
legislation, policies authority under a delegation are identified and these
and instructions requirements confirmed.
2.2 Apparently conflicting legislative directions are resolved or
referred in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures.
3. Exercise delegations 3.1 Exercise of delegations is consistent with organisational
processes and the boundaries and authority contained in
legislation, policies and instructions.
3.2 Decisions are documented and records kept in accordance with
organisational policy and procedures to provide audit
information of delegated authority exercised.
3.3 Circumstances requiring the exercise of delegations that are
outside own limits are identified and approvals are obtained in
accordance with organisational policy and procedures.
3.4 Risks associated with the exercise of delegations are identified
and strategies to manage risks are identified in accordance with
the organisation's risk management strategy.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to delegations
 using information technology to access relevant legislation and procedures
 reading complex written materials such as legislation, instructions, and standards
and applying them to work practices
 scanning techniques to locate main ideas in legislation, policy documents and
instructions
 using questioning strategies to clarify understanding
 using communication strategies involving exchanges of often complex oral
information
 applying procedures relating to occupational health and safety and environment in
the context of exercising delegations
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to delegations
 the range of delegations applicable in the public sector
 instructions and standards relating to delegations
 organisational structure and levels of authority/delegations
the context of delegations

Evidence Guide
Package.
 PSPFIN401A Use public sector financial processes
 PSPHR402A Administer human resource processes
the public sector
 PSPPROC405B Dispose of assets
 PSPPROC406A Procure goods and services
 exercising delegations in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, standards, instructions and procedures
relating to delegations
situations likely to be encountered when exercising delegations
encountered when exercising delegations, including coping
with difficulties, irregularities and breakdowns in routine
 exercising delegations in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or


 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Enabling legislation may  State/Territory and Commonwealth legislation related to:

include:  public sector management, financial management, auditor
general
 customs and excise, quarantine, fisheries, agriculture, land
management, conservation, coastal management, environmental
protection, workers' compensation, workplace relations, legal
administration, planning, construction, transport, energy,
mining, communications, education and children's services,
employment, vocational education and training.
 audit, equal employment opportunity and anti-discrimination,
occupational health and safety, environment
Standards may include:  public sector standards, such as human resource management
standards
Instructions may include:  public service Commissioner's instructions
 chief executive officer's instructions
Delegations are:  functions or powers (under an act) assigned (by the Minister) to
others
 made to specified limits
 made to persons in specified positions (i.e. made to the position
rather than the individual)
Delegations may include:  financial
 human resources
 purchasing
 contracting
 industrial relations
 licensing
 regulatory powers
 legislation
Other legislation, policies  aspects of common law
and instructions may  contract law
include:  administrative law
 industrial relations law

 public service acts
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV503B Coordinate resource allocation and usage Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV503B Coordinate resource allocation and usage

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers coordination and monitoring of available resources to achieve work unit
outcomes. It includes allocating available resources, monitoring and evaluation of resource
usage and reporting on resource usage.
In practice, coordination of resource allocation and usage may overlap with other generalist or
leading a workgroup, working with diversity, research and analysis etc.
Competency Fields that deal with resources. Related units are:
 PSPGOV305B Access and use resources and financial systems
 PSPMNGT602B Manage resources

of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1. Allocate available 1.1 Required resources are identified, obtained and allocated to
resources to achieve enable achievement of work unit objectives.
results 1.2 Resource allocation is undertaken in accordance with
legislation, policies and guidelines.
2. Monitor and 2.1 Systems are implemented to enable timely and accurate
evaluate resource monitoring and evaluation of resource usage against targets and
usage organisational standards.
2.2 Records of resource allocation and usage are maintained in
accordance with relevant legislation and guidelines.
2.3 Resource usage issues are identified, analysed and addressed
within limits of individual delegation or referred in accordance
with organisational procedures.
2.4 Replacements or additional resources are allocated as required.
3. Report on resource 3.1 Resource usage is reported in required format and on a regular
usage basis in accordance with organisational requirements.
3.2 Reports are completed to indicate the level of performance
achieved and any follow-up action.
3.3 Technology is applied to resource management systems in
accordance with organisational requirements.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 accessing and using legislation and guidelines relating to resource allocation and
usage
 meeting organisational reporting requirements
 recordkeeping in relation to resource allocation and usage
 accessing and using information systems in the context of resource allocation and
usage
 applying public sector legislation including occupational health, safety and
environment and sustainability in the context of resource allocation and usage
 legislation, policy and guidelines relating to resource allocation and usage
 operational procedures for accessing, storing, maintaining and using resources
 stock handling procedures
 financial management principles and procedures
 budget processes
 fraud control guidelines
 government security procedures relating to resources
 public sector legislation including occupational health, safety and environment and
sustainability in the context of resource allocation and usage

Evidence Guide
Package.
 PSPETHC501B Promote the values and ethos of public
service
 PSPGOV502B Develop client services
 PSPGOV505A Promote diversity
 PSPGOV507A Undertake negotiations
 PSPGOV512A Use complex workplace communication
strategies
 PSPGOV517A Coordinate risk management
 PSPLEGN501B Promote compliance with legislation in the
public sector
 PSPOHS501A Monitor and maintain workplace safety
 coordination of resource allocation and usage in a range of (3 or
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to resource
allocation and usage
situations likely to be encountered when coordinating resource
allocation and usage

encountered when coordinating resource allocation and usage,

 coordination of resource allocation and usage in a range of (3 or
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 demonstration
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
The Range Statement provides information about the context in which the unit of
competency is carried out. The variables cater for differences between States and
Territories and the Commonwealth, and between organisations and workplaces. They
allow for different work requirements, work practices and knowledge. The Range
Statement also provides a focus for assessment. It relates to the unit as a whole. Text in
bold italics in the Performance Criteria is explained here.
Resources may  finances

include:  facilities
 equipment
 stock and supplies
 human
 technical expertise
 consultants
 information, knowledge and other intellectual resources
Legislation, policies  public sector legislation, policies and procedures
and guidelines may  procurement legislation and guidelines
include:  fraud control
 government security management
 organisational code of practice
 asset management legislation and guidelines
 financial management legislation and guidelines
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV504B Undertake research and analysis Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV504B Undertake research and analysis

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers research and analysis to develop advice and recommendations. It includes
identifying and undertaking research, analysing information and applying the results of
analysis, maintaining information systems, and compiling reports from information.
In practice, undertaking research and analysis may overlap with other generalist or specialist
public sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, providing
client service, developing policy, preparing for community engagement, initiating projects,
developing procedures for service delivery, undertaking scientific research, detecting fraud,
identifying contaminated sites, assessing security risks, undertaking court listing activities,
determining liability, etc.
Competency Fields that deal with information/knowledge management. Related units are:

time of publication

Not applicable.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify and 1.1 Information needs are defined based on work objectives and
undertake research client and organisation requirements.
1.2 Potential sources of information and the format in which they
are presented are evaluated and selected in line with the purpose
and audience for the research.
1.3 Strategies are developed to acquire required information in
accordance with legislation, policy and procedures.
1.4 Information is researched in a timely and thorough way and
within resource allocation.
1.5 Quantity, quality and relevance of initial search results are
assessed and gaps filled using the same or adjusted research
strategies.
1.6 The methods and outcomes of research, and the criteria used to
make information decisions and choices are clearly
communicated.
2. Analyse information 2.1 Information from various sources is examined, compared and
and apply the results evaluated for content, structure and logic.
of analysis 2.2 Analytical techniques and processes are selected in line with
defined objectives.
2.3 Information is collated, consolidated and analysed and
outcomes are advised to senior staff in accordance with
organisational policy and procedures.
2.4 Facts, issues, patterns, interrelationships and trends are
identified through analysis in accordance with research aims.
2.5 Agreed project timelines are met, and the defined standards of
the organisation are met for all work.
3. Maintain 3.1 Information systems are maintained, validated and reconciled
information systems so that data and system integrity are assured.
3.2 A range of standard and complex information systems and
applications is maintained in accordance with organisation
standards.
3.3 Information systems are reviewed and updated as necessary.
4. Compile reports 4.1 The findings from analysing information are used to meet
from information client/organisational needs and organisation standards.
systems 4.2 Content of reports is determined and organised in a manner that
supports the purposes and format of the organisation and
audience.
4.3 Reporting of results is sequenced logically, is concise and clear,
and includes predictions, assumptions and constraints where
relevant.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and
environment in the context of information management
 accessing and using information ethically and legally
 using manual and computerised techniques for information management
 applying computer technology to data storage, security, retrieval and presentation
 undertaking statistical analysis
 using critical analysis techniques
 communicating with colleagues and supervisors
 presenting information in a range of ways such as report format, numerically, in
tables, with graphs, spatially
 applying problem solving and referring problems as required
 legislation, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to information handling in
the public sector, such as confidentiality, privacy, security, freedom of information
 data collection and management procedures
 organisational information handling and storage procedures
 cultural aspects of information and meaning
 sources of public sector work-related information
 economic, legal and social issues surrounding the use of information
 standard reporting procedures
 electronic and manual filing systems
 databases and data storage systems
the context of information management

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
strategies
 PSPGOV520A Scope statistical data collection
 PSPGOV521A Collect statistical data
 PSPGOV522A Process statistical data
 PSPGOV523A Interrogate and analyse statistical data
 PSPGOV524A Interpret data and related statistics
 PSPSCI503A Develop and undertake
scientific/technological research
 PSPFRAU502B Anticipate and detect possible fraud
activity
 PSPLAND506A Identify and manage contaminated sites
 PSPSEC501A Assess security risks
 PSPCRT505A Undertake senior court listing activities
 research and analysis undertaken in a range of (3 or more)
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to research
and analysis
 access to electronic and other information sources relevant to
the workplace


situations likely to be encountered when undertaking research
and analysis.
encountered when undertaking research and analysis, including
routine
 research and analysis undertaken in a range of (3 or more)
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Sources of information  organisation materials

may include:  client information
 market trends
 library materials
 statistical information
 personnel/human resource records
 asset records
 legislation
 policies
Information format may  multimedia
include:  database
 web site
 dataset
 audio/visual
 word processed documents
 books
 gazettes and other publications
 reports
 pivot tables
Strategies may include:  research plan
 search strategy tailored to the information retrieval system
selected:
 using key concepts and terms
 using classification schemes
 using search engines
 using analysis systems
 using data warehouse systems
 using internal organisers such as indexes in books
Legislation, policy and  Commonwealth and State/Territory legislation, standards and
procedures may include: guidelines especially relating to privacy, confidentiality,
freedom of information, security, fraud control, copyright,
intellectual property

 Australian standards such as records management, knowledge
management, risk management
 Internet etiquette (netiquette)
Evaluation of content  reliability
may include:  validity
 accuracy
 authority
 currency
 point of view
 bias
 prejudice
 deception
 manipulation
 supporting arguments
 contradictions
 different viewpoints
 the cultural, physical or other context in which the information
was created
 the impact of context on interpretation of the information
 comparison of new knowledge with prior knowledge
 whether information contradicts or verifies information from
other sources
Analysis may include:  application of statistical methods
 mathematical calculations
 problem solving
 forecasting
Information systems may  computers and networks
contain:  communication channels
 records management guidelines
 data
 procedures
 protocols
 legislation, guidelines and awards
 organisation, legal and policy materials
 client information
 market trends


 library systems
 basic statistical information
 personnel records
Client/organisational  provision of advice
needs may include:  input into policy development
 solutions/options for action
 forecasting
 determining future outcomes
 identifying strategies derived from analysis of information
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV506A Support workplace coaching and mentoring Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers promotion and support for coaching and mentoring in the organisation. It
includes developing a coaching/mentoring strategy, establishing a coaching/mentoring
framework, implementing and supporting coaching/mentoring, monitoring coaching and
mentoring arrangements and consolidating opportunities for further coaching/mentoring.
In practice, supporting workplace coaching and mentoring in the organisation may overlap
with other generalist or specialist public sector work activities such as acting ethically,
complying with legislation, providing client service, leading a group, developing policy, etc.
This unit is one of 4 units of competency in the Working in Government Competency Field
that deal with coaching/mentoring. Related units are:
 PSPGOV311A Work with a coach or mentor
 PSPGOV414A Provide workplace mentoring
 PSPGOV415A Provide workplace coaching

time of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Develop coaching/ 1.1 The potential for coaching and mentoring within the work
mentoring strategy group/organisation is researched.
1.2 A strategy is developed to implement and promote a coaching
and mentoring framework, linked to other human resource
strategies in the organisation.
1.3 Benefits to all parties involved in coaching and mentoring are
clearly outlined, consistent with the organisation's philosophy
and goals.
1.4 Ground rules established for coaching and mentoring in the
organisation are contained within the strategy.
1.5 Timelines for the implementation of the strategy are developed
with key stakeholders.
1.6 Organisational support and resources are obtained for the
strategy in accordance with organisational procedures.
2. Establish a coaching/ 2.1 A range of coaching/mentoring models is identified to suit the
mentoring organisation's needs.
framework 2.2 Training is arranged for those interested in being coaches,
coached, mentors and/or mentored.
2.3 The requirements of coaching and mentoring
contracts/agreements are developed and monitored in
accordance with the coaching and mentoring strategy.
2.4 The range of stages in coaching and mentoring relationships is
identified and flexibility is built in to the framework to manage
the stages where necessary.
2.5 Protocols for matching participants and dealing with
difficulties, disputes and grievances are formalised in
accordance with the organisation's existing procedures.
3. Implement and 3.1 The value of coaching and mentoring is promoted at all levels
support coaching of the organisation in accordance with organisational policy and
and mentoring procedures.
3.2 Opportunities for mentoring and coaching are identified and
communicated to interested parties in accordance with the
strategy.
3.3 Internal and external networks are used to support coaching and
mentoring in accordance with legislation, policy and
procedures.
3.4 Techniques and practices are suggested for resolving
differences/problems without damaging relationships, or
assistance/referral is provided in accordance with organisational
4. Monitor coaching 4.1 People involved in coaching and mentoring are encouraged to


and mentoring reflect on organisational processes, organisational support and
arrangements their activities to identify opportunities for improvement and
innovation.
4.2 Recommendations made for improvements in the
coaching/mentoring strategy are evaluated and implemented as
necessary in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures.
5. Consolidate 5.1 The positive contributions of individuals to coaching and
opportunities for mentoring arrangements are recognised and acknowledged.
further coaching and 5.2 Positive changes created through coaching and mentoring
mentoring arrangements are celebrated and rewarded in accordance with
5.3 Ongoing opportunities for coaching and mentoring are
identified and promoted in accordance with individual and


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to workplace coaching and
mentoring
 undertaking research and analysis
 planning
 networking
 using effective communication with a diverse workforce including active listening,
giving and receiving feedback
 applying procedures relating to occupational health and safety and the environment
in the context of workplace coaching and mentoring
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to workplace
coaching and mentoring including privacy and freedom of information
 codes of ethics
 code of conduct
 policy and procedures for specific environment
 human resource strategies that link to a coaching/mentoring strategy
 strategic goals and direction/plan
 principles and practices of coaching and mentoring that need to be addressed in the
organisational strategy
 coaching/mentoring methodologies and strategies
 public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and the environment
in the context of workplace coaching and mentoring

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
 PSPGOV503B Coordinate resource allocation and usage
strategies
 PSPHR503A Facilitate performance management processes
 PSPHR504A Implement workforce planning and succession
strategies
 PSPHR508A Coordinate career development
public sector
 coaching and mentoring supported in the organisation in a
range of (3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time)
workplace coaching and mentoring
 current theory and practice for workplace coaching and
mentoring
situations likely to be encountered when supporting coaching

and mentoring in the organisation

encountered when supporting coaching and mentoring in the
organisation, including coping with difficulties, irregularities
and breakdowns in routine
 coaching and mentoring supported in the organisation in a
range of (3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time).
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Coaching:  has a focus on the acquisition of job skills and knowledge

and is generally short-term
 is a defined relationship to enhance performance
 is results oriented
 is performance or goal directed
 emphasises action or improved performance in a specific
area
 requires good interpersonal relations
 is identified on personal learning and development plans
 is provided by a coach who:
 provides learning opportunities
 monitors performance
 provides constructive feedback
 maintains confidentiality
 may have undertaken training/development to undertake
the role
 is not necessarily hierarchical
Mentoring:  generally has a longer-term focus on personal growth and
learning
 includes a wide range of learning oriented to:
 exchange of wisdom
 support
 guidance in personal or professional growth.
 is a relationship, not just a procedure or activity
 is one person professionally assisting the professional
development of another
 is a developmental effort to build skills and knowledge
for advancement based on merit, rather than
alliances/politically-based partnerships to advance
careers based on politics rather than aptitude
 is provided by a mentor who:
 facilitates the growth of the person being mentored and
professional development
 provides information, guidance and constructive

comments
 evaluates the plans of the person being mentored,
decisions, goals and objectives
 supports, encourages and, where necessary, highlights
shortfalls in agreed performance
 maintains confidentiality in the relationship
 does NOT take over problems and try to solve them
 does NOT give advice, criticisms or solutions, but
supports the person being mentored to make their own
decisions
 is not the direct manager of the person being mentored
Other human resource  performance management
strategies may include:  learning and development
 succession planning
 career management
Benefits may include:  for the organisation:
 increased productivity
 new competencies available
 more committed, involved and responsible personnel at
all levels
 personal and trusting developmental relationships
 knowledge sharing
 safeguarding investment in high potential people
 culture change
 for the person being coached or mentored:
 empowerment
 opportunity to acquire competencies and professional
experience
 insights into the organisational culture, attitudes,
protocols and expected behaviours
 increased potential for career mobility and promotion
 a supportive environment in which successes and
failures can be evaluated
 internal and external networking opportunities
 development of professional abilities and self-confidence
 recognition and job satisfaction
 mutual respect
 for the coach/mentor:
 renewed enthusiasm for the role (if an experienced
employee)
 challenging discussions with people who may have fresh

perspectives
 satisfaction from contributing to another's development
 opportunities to reflect upon and articulate the role of
coach/mentor
 improved ability to share experiences and knowledge
 opportunities to test new ideas
 being of service to others
 increased self-esteem
Ground rules may  relationship is voluntary, although the requirement to
include: participate in coaching may not be
 mentoring partners should not be in the same chain of
command
 supervisors of both partners must approve, if in-house rather
than out-sourced arrangement
 guidance and counsel from a coach/mentor does not
supersede that of the supervisor in work-related matters
 training for coaching and mentoring partners
 a formal agreement
 active involvement of both partners in the process
 commitment from the organisation and both parties to the
arrangement
 effectiveness measures
 requirements to monitor/evaluate and report on outcomes
 provision for either party can end the relationship any time
for any reason, or no reason
Stakeholders may  all those individuals and groups both inside and outside the
include: organisation that have some direct interest in the
organisation's behaviour, actions, products and services such
as:
 employees at all levels of the organisation
 other public sector organisations
 private sector organisations/businesses
 non-government organisations
 union and association representatives
 boards of management
 government
 Ministers
Matching participants  age
may include consideration  cultural background
of:  educational level
 ethnicity

 expertise
 family responsibilities
 gender
 goals
 interests
 interpersonal approach
 language
 learning/thinking styles
 life experience
 marital status
 personality
 physical ability
 religious belief
 sexual orientation
 socio-economic background
 work experience
 working style
 coach/mentor with particular attributes depending on the
purpose and objectives of the arrangement
Mentoring opportunities  secondments
may include:  relieving opportunities
 work shadowing
 project assignments
 intra- and inter-departmental release
 networks
 outsourced (paid) - business coach/mentor when none is
available internally
Networks may include:  professional organisations
 informal common interest groups
 public sector management consultants
Legislation, policy and  State/Territory and Commonwealth legislation and
procedures may include: regulations such as:

Techniques and practices  finding a mutually beneficial solution

for resolving differences  inviting discussion
may include:  providing explanations
 not taking it personally when information is rejected
 not laying blame
 using 'I' messages
 self-disclosure
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV511A Provide leadership Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers achievement of operational results and effective working relationships
through leadership, feedback and support of individuals in a workgroup that may exist in the
workplace, be formed for a special purpose or project, or consist of community members,
volunteers, inter-agency members, etc. It includes facilitating commitment to objectives and
required standards; contributing to the development of a cooperative, high performance
workgroup; giving and receiving feedback on performance; supporting and participating in
development activities; and providing leadership, direction and guidance in the workgroup.
In practice, leading a workgroup may overlap with other generalist or specialist public sector
work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, providing client service,
developing policy, building community relationships, improving workplace legislative
performance, providing technical expertise, etc.
 PSPMNGT701B Provide strategic direction
of publication

Not applicable.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Facilitate 1.1 The organisation's vision, strategic objectives and required
commitment to standards of performance are discussed and clarified with others
objectives and in accordance with the needs, communication and learning
required standards styles of workgroup members.
1.2 Establishment of the purpose, objectives, roles and
responsibilities in the workgroup is facilitated in accordance
with organisational requirements and objectives.
1.3 Commitment to objectives and standards is modelled to provide
leadership and develop workgroup commitment.
1.4 Equal employment opportunity, occupational health and safety,
diversity management and participative work practices are
modelled and promoted within the workgroup in accordance
with legislation, policy and procedures.
2. Contribute to the 2.1 Work contributions or suggestions are encouraged,
development of a acknowledged and considered constructively.
co-operative, high 2.2 Workgroup members are supported to use, share and develop
performance their skills according to work requirements.
workgroup 2.3 Work allocation is facilitated within the group on the basis of
current skills and development needs.
2.4 Implementation of new work practices is undertaken in
consultation with workgroup members.
2.5 Conflict and other issues which affect the performance of the
workgroup are resolved within the workgroup wherever
possible, or referred in accordance with organisational policy
and procedures.
3. Give and receive 3.1 Feedback is obtained from others outside the workgroup on
feedback on personal and workgroup performance, and open and
performance constructive responses to feedback are given.
3.2 Regular constructive feedback on all aspects of work
performance is gathered from and provided to the workgroup.
3.3 Performance is assessed and addressed in a fair and timely
manner and where possible notable performance is
recognised/rewarded in accordance with organisational policy
and procedures.
3.4 Under-performance of self and others is addressed in
accordance with relevant legislation, guidelines and procedures.
3.5 Feedback is used to continuously improve performance and
outcomes.
4. Support and 4.1 An action plan to meet individual and group learning and
participate in development needs is developed, agreed and implemented.
development 4.2 Individuals are supported to identify their specific


activities learning/development needs.
4.3 Workgroup members are encouraged and supported to take
advantage of development opportunities in accordance with
their needs and organisational requirements.
4.4 Learning and development opportunities are accessed to
continuously improve own leadership skills and other identified
development needs.
4.5 On-the-job learning opportunities are provided for in
accordance with individual needs and to the required standard.
4.6 Workgroup members are encouraged and supported in applying
new skills and knowledge in the workplace.
5. Provide leadership, 5.1 Participative decision making is used routinely in developing,
direction and implementing and reviewing the work of the group and the
guidance in the distribution of responsibilities, where appropriate.
workgroup 5.2 Opportunities and encouragement are given to workgroup
members to develop new and innovative work practices and
strategies.
5.3 Workgroup members are provided with the support, leadership,
advice and policy direction necessary to perform work safely
and effectively.
5.4 Tasks are allocated in accordance with the competencies of
workgroup members, and autonomy and authority are delegated
as appropriate.
5.5 Leadership and guidance strategies are varied to meet changing
priorities and situations, and take into account the differing
needs and skills of individuals and the requirements of the tasks
and workplace.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines
 providing leadership, supervision and performance feedback
 undertaking problem solving in a team environment
 using transparent decision making
 communicating with a diverse workplace including listening, facilitating,
negotiating, mentoring
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to the public
sector
 principles of effective team operation
 principles of facilitation and empowerment
 group processes
 group dynamics
 range of leadership styles and the application of these to suit different groups and
tasks
 learning and development in the workplace
 occupational health and safety and environment legislation in the context of leading
a workgroup

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
 PSPGOV506A Support workplace coaching and mentoring
 PSPGOV508A Manage conflict
strategies
public sector
 PSPWPI502B Facilitate improvement in workplace
legislative performance
 provision of leadership in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
occasions, over time)
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to the
public sector
situations likely to be encountered when providing leadership to
a workgroup


encountered when providing leadership to a workgroup,
 provision of leadership in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 observation
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Workgroup may include:  an existing team

 business unit
 group formed for a special purpose or project
 group of community members
 volunteers
 inter-agency members
 client group, such as employees on a safety committee
 group of employers
 members of the public in a special interest group etc
Issues affecting the  legislation
workgroup may include:  plans
 industrial awards and agreements
 organisation policies, plans, procedures and protocols
 performance management systems
 quality standards
 efficiency indicators
 consumer legislation
 environment legislation.
 risk management guidelines
Work allocation may  procedures and systems for team functioning
 procedures to identify development requirements

include:
Individual learning needs  needs of self and others

includes:  self-awareness
Learning and  formal course participation

development  on-the-job training
opportunities may  work experience
include:  staff exchanges
 mentoring
 coaching
 external study
 conference and seminar attendance
 induction
 job rotation
 projects
 secondment
 opportunities to act in higher positions
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV512A Use complex workplace communication strategies Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers complex workplace communication for working at middle management level
with internal and external clients, colleagues and other staff. It includes preparing for complex
communication, analysing and responding to opinions, presenting a convincing argument, and
developing a range of communication strategies.
In practice, using complex workplace communication strategies may overlap with other
generalist or specialist public sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with
legislation, applying government systems, managing change, managing diversity, etc.
deal with communication. Related units are:
 PSPGOV202B Use routine workplace communication techniques
 PSPGOV412A Use advanced workplace communication strategies
 PSPGOV605A Persuade and influence opinion

time of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Prepare for complex 1.1 Communication objectives are clarified, those to be present are
communication confirmed and communication mode is identified.
1.2 Analysis is undertaken to anticipate the likely positions to be
taken by those present on the matters under discussion.
1.3 Subject matter is researched/organised, key points to be
conveyed are identified and recorded, and information to
counter other positions is summarised.
1.4 Requirements of legislation, policy and guidelines relevant to
the discussion are identified and incorporated.
2. Analyse and respond 2.1 Discussion is evaluated to identify impartiality, bias or
to opinions unsupported argument.
2.2 Points of view of other speakers are noted and information to
counter opposing views is presented objectively in accordance
with required position.
2.3 Reaction to speakers and their point of view is analysed to
identify and manage emotional reactions and maintain
objectivity.
2.4 Opposing/challenging views are examined for their value in
achieving the same ends.
2.5 Active listening and questioning are used to clarify own
understanding, challenge or justify other points of view.
3. Present a convincing 3.1 Communication approach is chosen and used to suit the given
argument audience.
3.2 Prepared position is asserted with conviction and purpose.
3.3 Verbal and non-verbal behaviour are adjusted to maintain
listener interest if the audience is unresponsive.
3.4 Questions are used to elicit feedback and check audience
understanding.
3.5 Audience questions and argument are responded to objectively,
and answers are backed by reasoned explanation.
3.6 Agreement is negotiated where possible, concluding with a
summary of agreed items.
4. Develop a range of 4.1 Feedback from others is obtained and the outcomes of
communication communication are assessed.
strategies 4.2 Lessons learnt are recorded and used to underpin future
interactions.
4.3 Language structures and features that influence audiences to a
preferred point of view are developed and practised.
4.4 Communication strategies are explored and practised for a range
of workplace applications in accordance with organisational


requirements.

this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to communication in the
public sector
 analysing and using language structures and features that influence the
interpretation of spoken communication
 interacting confidently with groups on familiar topics in formal and informal
workplace situations
 speaking with confidence and listening critically
 clarifying meaning, exploring issues and problem solving
the context of high-level communication
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to
communication in the public sector
 the power and effect of spoken language
 knowledge of organisation processes and hierarchy
 techniques to deal with opposing views and positions
 emotional intelligence techniques
 organisational protocols and etiquette for communication in meetings
 communication strategies to suit different audiences, such as workgroup,
organisational, inter-agency
 ways to influence the interpretation of spoken communication

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
 PSPGOV515A Develop and use political nous
public sector
 use of complex communication strategies in a range of (3 or
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to public
sector communication
 current theory and practice on influencing skills for the public
sector
situations likely to be encountered when using complex
communication strategies


encountered when using complex communication strategies,
 complex communications strategies used in a range of (3 or
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 observation
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
Communication  share information

objectives may be to:  reach consensus
 contribute to policy
 represent the business unit's position/interests in internal
negotiations
 resolve differences
 negotiate a joint position/compromise
 build reputation (of self and organisation/business unit)
 market services
Those to be present  peers
may include:  colleagues
 those senior or junior to the position
 staff from other agencies
Mode of  telephone
communication may  teleconference
include:  video conference
 Internet (online forums)
 face-to-face
 one-on-one, or in a group
 forum, seminar or conference
Organisation of subject  identifying features, advantages and benefits and aligning
matter may include: evidence/examples
 anticipating likely disagreements and structuring material
to address these
Legislation, policy and  State/Territory and Commonwealth legislation,
guidelines may regulations, policies, guidelines and standards relating to
include: exchange of information in the public sector, such as:
 ethics and accountability guidelines/codes of practice
 information security standards
 principles of equal employment opportunity, equity
and diversity
 freedom of information and privacy.
 intellectual property
 fraud standards

 professional liability
Reaction to speakers  own reaction
may include:  others present
Communication  catering to political sensitivities

approach may include:  working within government processes and operational
frameworks
 balancing debate and action
 consideration of wider organisational/public sector issues
 speaking with confidence
 cultural, ethnic, diversity or equity considerations
 consultative
 collaborative
 assertive
 reasonable
 humorous
Verbal and non-verbal  inclusive language, ideas and information
behaviour may include:  congruent speech and body language
 impartiality
 responsiveness
 drawing on different sources of information
Language structures  use of metaphors and similes
and features may  use of analogy, imagery and other comparisons
include:  use of passive voice
 using personal names repeatedly to convey intimacy or
sincerity
 tone, style and point of view
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV513A Refine complex workplace documents Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
3 PSP12V1 Layout adjusted.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers written workplace communication at a level where preliminary research or
documents may have been prepared by others as input, and final documents are being
prepared. It includes critical analysis of workplace information, composition, revision and
refinement to meet workplace requirements.
In practice, refinement of complex workplace documents may overlap with other generalist or
providing client service, leading a group, developing policy, undertaking research and
analysis, etc.
 PSPGOV606A Prepare high-level/sensitive written materials

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.


Elements are the Together, performance criteria specify the requirements for
essential outcomes of the competent performance. Text in bold italics is explained in the
unit of competency. Range Statement following.


1. Critically analyse 1.1 Information is tested for relevance, reliability, consistency and
information usefulness to the task/organisation.
1.2 Fact is separated from opinion and underlying values and
beliefs are identified.
1.3 Cultural context of the information is taken into account in the
analysis.
1.4 Stereotypes, bias, prejudice and motive are recognised.
1.5 Conclusions are drawn and a critical analysis with supporting
evidence is prepared and submitted in accordance with
2. Compose/refine 2.1 The purpose, audience and objectives of complex documents
complex documents are confirmed in accordance with organisational requirements.
2.2 Structure and content of document is approved in line with the
purpose and intended audience.
2.3 Risk assessment is undertaken and risk management is
implemented in relation to document preparation and content, in
accordance with the nature and classification of the material.
2.4 Information/documents provided by others are analysed for
bias, gaps, the influence of values, attitudes and context,
conflicting advice/evidence and political implications.
2.5 Information is synthesised and complex documents are prepared
and submitted in accordance with organisational requirements,
legislation, policy and procedures.
2.6 Feedback is provided to contributors of information/documents
to improve future input in a manner that provides learning
opportunities for the researchers/authors.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 reading and writing at a level to cope with a range of complex and sensitive
workplace materials
 critically analysing and synthesising information to compose complex written
documents
 refining content, structure and sequence according to the required purpose of
written material
 using spelling, punctuation and grammar for workplace documents at an
experienced level
 providing feedback on other people's work in ways suited to the diversity of the
workplace, including creation of learning opportunities to improve
research/document input
communication in the public sector such as privacy, freedom of information,
information security, confidentiality, copyright, intellectual property
 critical analysis of complex information
 politically and culturally sensitive documents
 organisational requirements for complex written documents
 government style manual requirements
the context of preparing written materials

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
 PSPGOV515A Develop and use political nous
public sector
 complex workplace documents composed/refined in a range of
(3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time)
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to written
 examples of complex workplace documents
 government style guide
situations likely to be encountered when composing/refining
complex workplace documents
encountered when refining complex workplace documents,
 complex workplace documents composed/refined in a range of
(3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time).


 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Information for critical  applications

analysis may include:  briefing papers
 expert opinion
 literature
 plans
 policy advice
 project briefs
 reports
 research
 speeches
 submissions
 web site information
Purpose may include:  influencing opinion
 reporting on achievement
 recommending options and corresponding actions
 meeting regulatory requirements
 meeting public sector reporting requirements
 documenting policy
 developing policy
 obtaining funding
 providing briefing material
 contributing to strategic planning
 responding to enquiries/complaints
Complex documents may  funding submissions
include:  briefing papers
 speeches
 media briefs
 position papers
 business cases
 reports
 project briefs
 strategic and operational plans

 functional area strategy

 justification for policy development
 policy guidance
 counter argument to submission
Structure and content  executive summary
may include:  division into sections or chapters
 tables of contents and indexes
 conclusions
 glossaries
 footnotes/endnotes
 references
 facts and observations
 submissions
 creative ideas
 recommendations and supporting arguments
 opinion
 anticipated arguments and rebuttals
 case studies
Submission of document  approvals
may include:  sign-off procedures
Organisational  use of plain English

requirements may  style formats
include:  acknowledgements
 acronyms
 technical terms
 abbreviations
footnotes, endnotes
 using particular communication channels
Legislation, policy and  State/Territory or Commonwealth legislation, regulations,
procedures may include: policies, procedures and guidelines relating to the preparation
and security of written information in the public sector,
including freedom of information, copyright, privacy,
confidentiality, equal employment opportunity, diversity,

occupational health and safety

 risk assessment
 information security requirements
 codes of ethics
 embargoed material
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Working in Government

PSPGOV515A Develop and use political nous Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV515A Develop and use political nous

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the development and use of political nous to navigate and succeed in the
political environment of the public sector. It includes identifying the political terrain,
evaluating the political environment, forming alliances, and bargaining and negotiating to
achieve outcomes.
In practice, developing and using political nous may overlap with other generalist or specialist
public sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, providing
client service, leading a group, developing policy etc.
deal with government processes. Related units are:
 PSPGOV601B Apply government systems

time of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify the political 1.1 Stakeholder positions are identified and taken account of.
terrain 1.2 Corporate politics are analysed to identify agendas and players.
1.3 Awareness of and sensitivity to political agendas, both open and
hidden, are developed and utilised.
1.4 The current agenda is located in the wider context to appreciate
the big picture and provide more than one perspective.
1.5 The impact of the agenda on the work area is identified and
confirmed in accordance with organisational protocols.
2. Evaluate the political 2.1 Information is sourced from inside and outside the organisation,
environment and its authenticity and reliability are confirmed.
2.2 An analysis of the political, social and economic environment is
undertaken that takes into account emerging trends and current
and possible future goals of the organisation.
3. Form alliances 3.1 Power structure and sources of power are identified in the
organisation and the wider public sector.
3.2 People prepared to trade mutual support are identified and the
benefits assessed.
3.3 Risks and benefits of possible alliances are weighed.
3.4 Interested groups/individuals are lobbied to gain support and
acceptance of ideas/courses of action.
3.5 Influence is built with key policy makers, decision makers and
key influencers, in accordance with public sector standards and
legislation.
4. Bargain and 4.1 Sound positions are developed with supporting arguments.
negotiate to achieve 4.2 Responses to possible contradictory positions are formulated.
outcomes 4.3 Positions are negotiated and refined with feedback from the
negotiation process.
4.4 Consensus with others is achieved for one's position.
4.5 Outcomes are implemented in accordance with organisational


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to the public sector
 using a range of communication activities such as negotiating, consulting,
influencing, bargaining, resolving conflict, networking, etc
 applying risk management strategies
the context of the political environment.
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to the public
sector environment
 organisational and public sector power structures and sources of power
 macro view of agendas, positions, and power
 government directions and agendas
 public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and environment
and sustainability

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
public sector
 PSPGOV510A Undertake and promote career management
strategies
 PSPPOL501A Develop organisation policy.
 development and use of political nous in a range of (3 or more)
public sector
 organisational and public sector power structures and sources of
power
situations likely to be encountered when developing and using
political nous
encountered when developing and using political nous,

 development and use of political nous in a range of (3 or more)

 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Stakeholders may  people within the organisation and the public sector
include:  public sector organisations
 community organisations
 peak bodies
 lobby groups
 statutory bodies
 industry groups
 local government
Identification of  knowing who to talk to
positions may include:  recognising informal as well as formal structures
 using personal profile within the organisation
Power may include:  positional power
 coercive power
 power in relationships
 control of scarce resources
 information and knowledge
 interpersonal alliances
Key decision makers may  senior executive officers
include:  government bodies
 special interest groups
 policy officers
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV516A Develop and use emotional intelligence Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV516A Develop and use emotional intelligence

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the development and use of emotional intelligence to increase self-awareness,
self-management, social awareness and relationship management in the context of the
workplace. It includes identifying the impact of own emotions on others in the workplace,
recognising and appreciating the emotional strengths and weaknesses of others, promoting the
development of emotional intelligence in others and utilising emotional intelligence to
maximise team outcomes.
In practice, developing and using emotional intelligence may overlap with other generalist or
facilitating change, leading a group, developing policy etc.
 PSPMNGT701B Provide strategic

time of publication

Not applicable.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify the impact 1.1 Own emotional strengths and weaknesses are identified.
of own emotions on 1.2 Personal stressors and own emotional states related to the
others in the workplace are identified.
workplace 1.3 Awareness of own emotional triggers is developed and used to
enable control to be exercised over emotional responses.
1.4 Workplace behaviours that demonstrate management of
emotions are modelled.
1.5 Self-reflection is utilised and feedback from others is obtained
to improve development of emotional intelligence.
2. Recognise and 2.1 The emotional states of co-workers are assessed and emotional
appreciate the cues responded to.
emotional strengths 2.2 The varying cultural expressions of emotions are identified and
and weaknesses of utilised to respond to emotional cues in a diverse workforce.
others 2.3 Flexibility and adaptability are demonstrated in dealing with
others.
2.4 The emotions of others are taken into account when making
decisions.
3. Promote the 3.1 Opportunities are provided for others to express their thoughts
development of and feelings.
emotional 3.2 Others are assisted to understand the effect of their behaviour
intelligence in others and emotions on others in the workplace.
3.3 Self-management of emotions is encouraged in others.
3.4 Others are encouraged to develop their own emotional
intelligence to build productive relationships and maximise
workplace outcomes.
4. Utilise emotional 4.1 A positive emotional climate is encouraged in the workplace.
intelligence to 4.2 The strengths of workgroup members are used to achieve
maximise team workplace outcomes.
outcomes


Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to the public sector
 keeping check of emotions when challenges arise and maintaining composure
 perceiving the emotional motivators that drive individuals and groups in the workplace and
engaging those motivators, where appropriate, to optimise organisational performance
 using a variety of words and language structures to explain complex ideas to different
audiences
 applying procedures relating to occupational health and safety and environment
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to the public sector
 emotional intelligence principles and strategies
 the relationship between effective people and the attainment of business unit objectives
 communication with a diverse workforce
 varying cultural expressions of emotion
context of using emotional intelligence

Evidence Guide
Package.
 PSPCOM502A Develop and implement community
engagement strategies
 PSPCOM503A Build and maintain community relationships
service
strategies
public sector
 PSPPOL501A Develop organisation policy
 development and use of emotional intelligence in a range of (3
or more) contexts (or occasions, over time)
public sector
 emotional intelligence background material and workplace
strategies
situations likely to be encountered where the use of emotional
intelligence is relevant


encountered when developing and using emotional intelligence,
 development and use of emotional intelligence in a range of (3
or more) contexts (or occasions, over time).
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 observation
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Emotions may include:  anger

 anxiety
 apathy
 apprehension
 caring
 confidence
 depression
 elation
 enthusiasm
 excitement
 fear
 happiness
 inadequacy
 joy
 nervousness
 over-confidence
 pride
 stress
 under-confidence
 unhappiness
Emotional intelligence is:  widely recognised as the ability of an individual to monitor

their own and others' emotions in a social or work environment,
to discriminate among the emotions and to use the information
to guide their thinking and actions
 characterised by:
 self-awareness (personal)
 self-management (personal)
 social awareness (social)
 relationship management (social)
Development of  mentoring
emotional intelligence  shadowing
may include:  coaching
 training
 simulation

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV518A Benchmark performance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers benchmarking performance of a functional area or business unit of an
organisation. It includes designing a benchmarking approach, establishing benchmarks,
establishing and managing a benchmarking exercise, gathering and analysing information and
reporting on/acting on benchmarking outcomes.
In practice, benchmarking performance may overlap with other generalist or specialist public
sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, providing client
service, leading a group, developing policy, etc.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Design 1.1 The organisation's core business, functions, and purpose are
benchmarking confirmed to provide a context for the benchmarking exercise.
approach 1.2 The organisation's strategic and organisational context is
analysed to identify factors with current or future impact on the
organisation.
1.3 The scope of the benchmarking exercise is established and
objectives, desired outcomes, timeframes and resources are
determined.
1.4 A benchmarking approach is designed in accordance with the
scope, desired objectives/outcomes and available resources.
1.5 A project plan is prepared and approved in accordance with
2. Establish 2.1 Key result areas are identified for benchmarking in accordance
benchmarks with determined scope and objectives.
2.2 Research is conducted to establish the benchmarks to be used
for the measurement of organisational performance.
2.3 Consultation to consider and confirm the validity and usefulness
of the benchmarks is conducted with key stakeholders.
2.4 Benchmarks are confirmed and obtained, or arrangements made
to develop/use them in accordance with legislation, standards,
policies and guidelines.
3. Establish and 3.1 Staffing arrangements are established and resourced in
manage accordance with project plan.
benchmarking 3.2 Consultation, communication with stakeholders and ongoing
exercise progress reports are included as a feature of the management of
the exercise to ensure the engagement and cooperation of those
people in the areas being benchmarked.
3.3 Benchmarking exercise is managed in accordance with
timeframes and budgetary constraints.
4. Gather and analyse 4.1 Networking and consultation are undertaken with staff in the
information areas to be benchmarked, to gather tacit knowledge.
4.2 Encouragement of open and honest input is provided to ensure
outcomes are valid, reliable and useful for improving
performance.
4.3 Organisational data is gathered, collated with information from
consultation and analysed against benchmarks in accordance
with the project plan.
4.4 Benchmarking findings are discussed with staff and
management, and feedback is incorporated into final results.
5. Report on/act on 5.1 Benchmarking report is written to meet audience needs and is


benchmarking presented in accordance with organisational requirements.
outcomes 5.2 Areas of excellence/strengths and recommendations for
improvement are identified in the report in accordance with
pre-determined objectives and outcomes.
5.3 When required, a strategy is developed for phased
implementation of recommendations that meet organisational
requirements.
5.4 Research information is preserved and stored in accordance
with organisational and security requirements to provide
historical data for subsequent benchmarking exercises.
5.5 Benchmarking outcomes are acted upon/recommendations
implemented in accordance with organisational requirements.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to benchmarking
 planning and managing projects
 collecting, recording and collating information
 using records management systems
 interpreting organisational information
 communicating/consulting with a range of diverse stakeholders
 writing recommendations and reports requiring formality of expression
 using numeracy skills for data analysis
the context of benchmarking
benchmarking
 principles of benchmarking performance
 organisational structure and functions, systems and processes
 public sector standards including ethics and security relating to organisational
information
 project management
the context of benchmarking

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
 PSPIM503A Maintain and monitor service standards
strategies
public sector
 PSPPM502B Manage complex projects
 PSPSEC502A Develop security risk management plans
 performance benchmarked in a range of (3 or more) contexts
(or occasions, over time)
benchmarking
 industry best practice standards for benchmarks
 access to similar organisations/areas/functions for comparison
situations likely to be encountered when benchmarking

performance
encountered when benchmarking performance, including
routine
 performance benchmarked in a range of (3 or more) contexts
(or occasions, over time).
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Benchmarking is:  an activity undertaken by an organisation to gauge its

performance against a set of internal or industry-specific best
practice standards
 applied organisation-wide, to departments or business units or
to areas such as finance, human resources, customer
service/satisfaction, etc
Scope may include:  organisation-wide
 functional area
 business unit
 skill area, such as management behaviours and practices
 procedures, policies, guidelines, work instructions
 resource deployment and usage
 business practices
 performance outcomes
 organisational processes
Resources may include:  personnel
 funding
 downtime when benchmarking is underway
 equipment and supplies
 research materials
 technology
Benchmarking approach  a project team approach
may include:  comparison with similar organisation/function
 visit to and critique of a similar organisation
 collaboration in 'critical friends' program
 comparison with pre-determined standard
 identifying and setting targets for improved performance
 change management
 resourcing commensurate with the size and perceived
importance of the exercise
 training/education about benchmarking
 benchmarking networks
Key result areas may  service delivery
include:  finance

 people management
 client service
 administration
 safety
 security
 fraud control
 process improvement, especially key business processes
Research may include:  key stakeholders
 current literature
 industry research
 internal, local, national or international search for benchmarks
 ensuring benchmarks are valid (comparing apples with apples)
and reliable
 identifying confounding variables
Benchmarks may  internal standards/performance indicators
include:  historical data - past performance
 external standards
 industry standards
 best/leading practice standards
 international standards
include: organisation that have some direct interest in the organisation's
behaviour, actions, products and services, including:
 clients
 contractors
 government
 Ministers
 service providers
 suppliers
 the public
 volunteers
Legislation, standards,  public sector management acts
policies and guidelines  financial management acts
may include:  audit acts


 risk management guidelines
 Australian standards, such as accounting standards, audit
standards, risk management standards, knowledge management
standards, quality standards
 codes of conduct
 confidentiality agreements
Staffing arrangements  internal
may be:  external
 contracted expertise
Tacit knowledge is:  knowledge that is not written down/recorded that resides in the
mind and may include aspects of culture or 'ways of doing
things'
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV519A Manage performance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV519A Manage performance

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers supervision and performance management in accordance with the
organisation's performance management system. It includes linking individual/workgroup
activities to organisational goals, setting performance expectations, measuring performance
achievements, and renegotiate performance and development plans.
In practice, performance management may overlap with other generalist or specialist public
sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, leading a group,
managing projects, supervising inspections, benchmarking performance, etc.
deal with performance. Related units are:
 PSPGOV315A Give and receive workplace feedback
 PSPGOV416A Monitor performance and provide feedback
 PSPMNGT603B Facilitate people management

time of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Link 1.1 The organisation's mission, vision and goals are identified,
individual/workgrou linked and explained in accordance with each individual's
p activities to needs.
organisational goals 1.2 Individual and workgroup activities are aligned with
organisational goals in consultation with workgroup members.
1.3 Individual and workgroup activities are prioritised in
accordance with organisational directions.
2. Set performance 2.1 Performance standards are identified and clarified in
standards accordance with organisational policy and procedures.
expectations 2.2 Performance standards are consulted upon, negotiated and
agreed.
2.3 Performance and learning/development plans are developed and
agreed, to document team and individual performance targets,
standards and professional development objectives.
2.4 Performance targets and key performance indicators are
developed that are specific, realistic and measurable.
2.5 Performance plans are implemented in accordance with
3. Measure 3.1 Individual performance is monitored, appraised and measured
performance against performance goals and required business outcomes.
achievements 3.2 Performance is assessed and addressed in a fair and timely
manner in accordance with legislation, policy and procedures.
3.3 Disagreement or conflict is managed and documented in
3.4 Where possible, outstanding performance is
recognised/rewarded in accordance with organisational policy
and procedures.
3.5 Under-performance is addressed promptly in accordance with
organisational guidelines, procedures and the principles of
natural justice.
3.6 Areas/strategies for improvement are identified and
implemented to continuously improve performance and
outcomes.
4. Renegotiate 4.1 The results of performance management are documented in
performance and accordance with legislative and organisational requirements and
learning/ used to identify strengths and performance gaps.
development plans 4.2 Learning is captured to inform knowledge management
strategies and transfer skills to other staff.
4.3 Performance standards are renegotiated and agreed in
accordance with organisational procedures.


4.4 Learning and development objectives are identified and agreed
to enhance performance and meet developing organisational and
workgroup goals.
4.5 Agreed performance standards and related professional
development are documented in accordance with organisational


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to performance
management
 giving feedback on performance
 maintaining confidentiality
 communicating with a diverse workforce including listening, questioning,
clarifying, negotiating and managing conflict
 identifying future learning and development requirements
 applying time management
 recordkeeping
the context of performance management
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to performance
management such as:
 grievance procedures
 disciplinary procedures
 code of conduct
 organisation's performance management system
 organisation's learning and development system
 impact of learning and development opportunities on performance
 remuneration systems
 equity and diversity principles
the context of performance management

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
strategies
 PSPGOV518A Benchmark performance
public sector
 performance management in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
performance management
 performance management processes
 access to previous performance assessments
situations likely to be encountered when managing performance

encountered when managing performance, including coping

with difficulties, irregularities and breakdowns in routine
 performance management in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
 women
 young people
 older people
this competency may include a combination of 2 or more of:
 demonstration
 observation
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Workgroup may include:  an existing team

 group formed for a special purpose or project
 business unit
Organisational directions  strategic plan
may relate to:  business plan
 operational plan
 sector-wide requirements
 organisational capability framework
Performance standards  selection criteria
may include:  best practice standards
 organisational practice standards
 competencies
 service level standards
 standards in codes of ethics/conduct/confidentiality
 standards in legislation/regulations/policy/guidelines
 agreed goals and outcomes at workgroup (business) and
organisation (strategic) level
Appraisal processes may  360° feedback
include:  performance data
 supervisor/employee feedback
 peers
 client/customer feedback
 assessor feedback
 evaluation of job position statement against current job role
 validation feedback
 feedback from subject matter experts
 results of training needs analyses for workgroup/individual
 previous performance and development plans with agreed goals

 employment legislation
 occupational health and safety legislation.
 international legislation/codes of behaviour
 enterprise bargaining agreements
 award conditions/requirements
 strategic and business plans
Learning and  formal course participation
development  on-the-job training
opportunities may  work experience
include:  staff exchanges
 mentoring
 coaching
 external study
 conference and seminar attendance
 induction
 job rotation
 higher duties
 work shadowing opportunities
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV524A Interpret data and related statistics Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the interpretation of data and related statistics. It includes interpreting graphs
or tables, interpreting data and its summarised highlights, interpreting a range of official
statistics in a policy environment, presenting statistical results and guiding others in the
interpretation of data.
In practice, interpreting data and related statistics may overlap with other generalist or
working safely, conducting research and analysis, etc.
deal with statistics. Related units are:
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Interpret a graph or 1.1 Reports based on the data are written which identify relevant
table relationships within the data.
1.2 Row and column percentages are calculated from a table.
1.3 A table/graph is interpreted in accordance with data reflected.
2. Interpret data and 2.1 Data summaries and trends are defined and explained in a
its summarised manner suited to the audience.
highlights 2.2 Survey data is interpreted according to accepted standards.
2.3 Data is interpreted and its highlights are summarised.
2.4 Interpretation is verified with a suitably qualified person.
3. Interpret a range of 3.1 Data summaries and trends are identified and explained.
official statistics in a 3.2 Statistical tests are interpreted and this interpretation explained.
policy environment 3.3 The sampling method/survey design is critiqued.
3.4 Interpretation of the data is undertaken in such a way as to
inform decision making.
3.5 Interpretation is verified with a suitably qualified person.
3.6 The shortcomings of statistical applications in the policy
environment are identified.
4. Present statistical 4.1 Data is presented in tables, charts and maps so that the reader
results does not misconstrue it.
4.2 Glossaries, technical notes and referencing are included where
required.
4.3 Reports that include statistical concepts, tables, charts and maps
are prepared and presented in accordance with organisational
4.4 Findings are presented in a way that is most appropriate for the
audience.
4.5 Charts are used appropriately in presentations for the variables
being charted and conform to accepted standards.
5. Guide others in the 5.1 Data summaries and trends are clearly defined and
interpretation of communicated to staff involved in the project.
data 5.2 Report findings are presented in a way that is most appropriate
for the audience.
5.3 The assumptions on which the interpretation is based are
communicated in accordance with audience needs.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to statistical work
 explaining the results of an analysis in writing
 constructing graphs, tables and maps using software
 using presentation software
 communicating with diverse audiences including explaining, interpreting,
presenting results
the context of statistical interpretation
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to statistical
work
 summary statistics
 statistical tests and related assumptions
 different methodologies and related assumptions
 the quality of a statistic
 sources of error including standard error
 data collection methodologies
 sources of expertise within the organisation
 'how numbers relate' or the associations between statistics
 the ethical issues associated with presenting statistical results
 intellectual property issues and how they might relate to the data
 confidentiality issues relating to the data
 relevant style manuals
the context of statistical work

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
public sector
 interpretation of data and related statistics in a range of (3 or
interpretation of statistics
 tools/equipment for interpreting and explaining statistics
situations likely to be encountered when undertaking statistical
interpretation
encountered when interpreting data and related statistics,
 interpretation of data and related statistics in a range of (3 or


 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses
assessment ensure the person can achieve the unit outcome and/or apply the

Range Statement
explained here.
Accepted standards for  showing awareness of data accuracy and reliability

survey data may include:  identifying other related issues, such as sample size
Statistical tests include:  equivalence of means and proportions

 tests of association and prediction
Data presentation may  the use of footnotes, caveats and references
include:
Statistical concepts  the results of statistical tests

include:  trends over time
 statistical associations
 variability
 sampling error
Presentation of findings  a mix of text, tables, charts, maps etc
may include:
Accepted standards for  appropriately labelled

charts may include:  appropriate scale selection
 clear formatting
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV602B Establish and maintain strategic networks Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV602B Establish and maintain strategic networks

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers establishing, expanding and utilising strategic networks. It includes
identifying features of required strategic networks, identifying or establishing network links
with key stakeholders and building strategic relationships.
In practice, establishing and maintaining strategic networks may overlap with other generalist
applying government systems, managing change, managing diversity, etc.
This unit is one of 3 units of competency in the Working in Government Competency Field
that deal with networks. Related units are:
 PSPGOV303B Build and maintain internal networks
 PSPGOV418A Develop internal and external networks
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify features of 1.1 The strategic value and likely outcomes of participating in
required strategic networks are identified at an individual and organisational level.
networks 1.2 The benefits of existing networks are researched and assessed.
1.3 Key stakeholders and their needs, expectations and roles are
identified.
2. Identify or establish 2.1 Existing network links between key stakeholders are identified,
network links with and strategies to maintain or expand them are identified and
key stakeholders initiated.
2.2 New network links between self and key internal and external
stakeholders are established and used effectively.
2.3 Strong working relationships are developed and maintained
among network members.
3. Build strategic 3.1 Effective communication channels are established to exchange
relationships strategic information for the mutual benefit of network
members.
3.2 Interaction and consultation with key stakeholders are used to
anticipate developments that may impact on the organisation
and require a strategic approach to dealing with them.
3.3 Misunderstandings and conflict situations are identified and
constructively addressed in accordance with principles of
conflict resolution.
3.4 Opportunities are sought and acted upon to improve
communication processes and achieve mutually beneficial
outcomes.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to public sector environment
 using a range of communication methods with diverse strategic networks including
consultation, liaison, negotiation, building influence and reputation, transparency
 using formal and informal industry communication channels
 resolving conflict in a strategic networking context
the context of strategic networking
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to work in a
public sector environment
 local/national/international public sector structures/protocols
 industry/professional communication channels and networks
 principles of interpersonal, group and inter-agency communication
 principles of conflict resolution in a strategic context
the context of strategic networking

Evidence Guide
Package.
 PSPETHC601B Maintain and enhance confidence in public
service
 PSPLEGN601B Manage compliance with legislation in the
public sector
 PSPMNGT605B Manage diversity
 PSPMNGT609B Formulate business strategies
 PSPMNGT613A Develop partnering arrangements
 strategic networks established/maintained in a range of (3 or
 organisational charts
situations likely to be encountered when establishing and
maintaining strategic networks
encountered when establishing and maintaining strategic
networks, including coping with difficulties, irregularities and
 strategic networks established/maintained in a range of (3 or


 women
 young people
 older people
 people in rural and remote locations
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Networks may include:  formal or informal networks

 circulation lists
 e-networks
 bulletin boards
 virtual communities
 mailing lists
Key stakeholders may  officers from other government organisations
include:  Ministerial advisers
 community members
 council members
 industry representatives
 professional associations
 international public sector staff
 international associations
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV605A Persuade and influence opinion Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV605A Persuade and influence opinion

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers high-level workplace communication for working at a senior level with
internal and external clients, colleagues and other staff. It includes preparing for high-level
communication, critically analysing and responding to opinions, persuading and influencing
others, and reflecting on and honing communication strategies.
In practice, persuading and influencing others may overlap with other generalist or specialist
public sector work activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, applying
government systems, managing change, managing diversity, etc.
deal with communication. Related units are:
 PSPGOV202B Use routine workplace communication techniques
 PSPGOV412A Use advanced workplace communication strategies
 PSPGOV512A Use complex workplace communication skills

of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Prepare for 1.1 Communication objectives are clarified, those to be present are
high-level confirmed and communication mode is identified.
communication 1.2 Analysis is undertaken to anticipate the likely attitudes of and
positions to be taken by those present on the matters under
discussion.
1.3 Communication styles of those to be present are considered and
their effect on the tone and likely direction/progress of the
discussion is assessed.
1.4 Critical self-evaluation of communication strengths and
vulnerabilities is undertaken and compared with other
participant/s knowledge, styles and likely approaches in planned
encounters.
1.5 Subject matter is researched/organised, key messages to be
conveyed are distilled and tactics planned to utilise personal
strengths and maximise outcomes for the organisation in
accordance with legislation, policy and guidelines.
2. Critically analyse 2.1 Others are listened to critically and responsively to evaluate
and respond to complex levels of meaning in spoken communication and to
opinions identify impartiality, bias or unsupported argument.
2.2 Tone, style, non-verbal elements and points of view of speakers
are noted and their use in influencing and affecting particular
outcomes is considered.
2.3 Reaction to speakers and their point of view is analysed to
identify and manage emotional triggers and maintain
objectivity.
2.4 Opposing/challenging views are welcomed and examined for
their value in achieving the same ends.
2.5 Communication is examined for subtext, significant inclusions
and exclusions, socio-cultural values, attitudes and assumptions.
2.6 Complex concepts and ideas are explored to clarify
understanding, and to challenge and justify interpretations based
on underlying assumptions, beliefs and values.
3. Persuade and 3.1 Communication approach is chosen and used to maximise
influence others effect with the given audience.
3.2 Sustained points of view are asserted with determination and
conviction.
3.3 Content and approach are modified when speaking to an
unresponsive audience, and diversions and unexpected
questions handled confidently.
3.4 A variety of verbal and non-verbal behaviour is used to
explain abstract ideas and expand on complex issues to maintain


listener interest.
3.5 Complex questions and arguments are responded to quickly and
saliently, backed by reasoned explanation.
3.6 Disagreements or conflicting personalities are handled
objectively and agreements are negotiated where possible,
concluding with positive summaries of achievement.
4. Reflect on and hone 4.1 Feedback from others is obtained, outcomes are assessed and
communication underlying interactions and motivations analysed.
strategies 4.2 Own vulnerability to emotional and other seductive appeals is
analysed dispassionately.
4.3 Lessons learnt are articulated and used to underpin future
interactions.
4.4 Sophisticated language structures and features that influence
audiences to a preferred point of view are developed and
practised.
4.5 Creative and innovative communication strategies are explored
and practised for a range of workplace applications in


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to communication in the
public sector
 analysing and using language structures and features that influence the
interpretation of spoken communication
 interacting responsively, critically and confidently with both familiar and
unfamiliar groups on specialised topics in formal and informal workplace situations
 speaking with confidence and listening evaluatively and critically
 the power and effect of spoken language
 stylistic devices and their ethical use for calculated effect
 the ways in which socio-cultural factors, language features and structures, and
non-verbal elements combine to influence the interpretation of spoken
communication

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
 PSPGOV602B Establish and maintain strategic networks
public sector
 PSPMNGT606B Manage quality client service
 PSPOHS602A Manage workplace safety
 opinion influenced in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to public
sector communication
 current theory and practice on influencing skills for the public
sector
situations likely to be encountered when persuading and
influencing opinion


encountered when persuading and influencing opinion,
 opinion influenced in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 observation
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Communication  share information

objectives may include:  brief Minister
 reach consensus
 shape opinion
 influence policy
 represent the organisation's position
 represent the business unit's interests in internal negotiations
 resolve differences
 negotiate a joint position/compromise
 build reputation (of self and organisation)
 market services
Those to be present may  peers
include:  colleagues
 those senior or junior to the position
 staff from other agencies
 senior executives/chief executive
 ministerial liaison personnel
 Minister
 Minister's chief of staff
Mode of communication  telephone
may include:  teleconference
 video conference
 Internet (online forums)
 face-to-face
 one-on-one, or in a group
 forum, seminar or conference
Communication styles  inter-cultural, equity or diversity considerations
may include:  consultative
 collaborative
 competitive
 confrontational
 soft
 passive
 assertive

 aggressive
 reasonable
 bombastic
 humorous
 anticipating likely disagreements and structuring material to
address these
Legislation, policy and  State/Territory and Commonwealth legislation, regulations,
guidelines may include: policies, guidelines and standards relating to exchange of
information in the public sector, such as:
 principles of equal employment opportunity, equity and
diversity
 freedom of information and privacy acts
 intellectual property guidelines and policy
 fraud standards
 professional liability requirements
Reaction to speakers may  own reaction
include:  others present
Communication  catering to political sensitivities

approach may include:  working within government processes and operational
frameworks
 balancing intellectual debate and action
 considering wider organisational/public sector issues
 using language calculated to appeal emotionally to a particular
audience, such as humorous, serious, cajoling, authoritarian
 speaking with confidence and authority
 covering cultural, ethnic, diversity or equity considerations
 selecting a communication style appropriate to the
occasion/audience such as consultative, collaborative, assertive,
reasonable etc
Verbal and non-verbal  inclusive language, ideas and information
behaviour may include:  congruent speech and body language
 impartiality
 responsiveness
 drawing on different sources of information
Sophisticated language  use of metaphors and similes
structures and features  use of analogy, imagery and other comparisons

may include:  stylistic devices such as using pronounced downward inflection

to convey 'the final word', or upward inflection to invite
opinion/agreement
 use of passive voice
 using personal names repeatedly to convey intimacy or sincerity
 using 'we' rather than 'I' to infer corporate rather than personal
position
 tone, style and point of view
 rhetorical devices
 irony
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPGOV606A Prepare high-level/sensitive written materials Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPGOV606A Prepare high-level/sensitive written materials

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers high-level written communication including the preparation of complex,
sensitive materials. It includes preparing for high-level written communication, critically
analysing other positions and preparing persuasive written communication.
In practice, preparing high-level/sensitive written materials may overlap with other generalist
applying government systems, managing change, managing diversity, etc.

time of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Prepare for 1.1 Communication objectives are clarified, stakeholders are
high-level written identified and political or other sensitivities are determined.
communication 1.2 Research is undertaken to anticipate the likely attitudes of and
positions of stakeholders on the matter/s under consideration.
1.3 Subject matter is researched/organised, key messages to be
conveyed are distilled and tactics are planned to utilise written
materials to maximise outcomes for the organisation in
accordance with legislation, policy and guidelines.
2. Critically analyse 2.1 Other positions are considered critically to evaluate complex
other positions levels of meaning in written communication and to identify
impartiality, bias or unsupported argument.
2.2 Written materials are examined for subtext, significant
inclusions and exclusions, socio-cultural values, attitudes and
assumptions.
2.3 Complex concepts and ideas are explored to clarify
understanding, and justify, or challenge interpretations based on
underlying assumptions, beliefs and values.
2.4 Evidence is compared and contrasted and sources referred to are
evaluated for reliability and authenticity.
2.5 Evidence is used to test other positions and draw conclusions
about their validity and strengths.
3. Prepare persuasive 3.1 Communication approach is chosen and used to positively
written influence and remove barriers to understanding for the given
communication audience.
3.2 Risk assessment is undertaken and risk management is
implemented in relation to document preparation and content.
3.3 Input information/documents provided by others are analysed
for fit with the chosen approach and to ensure consistency of
values, attitudes and opinions.
3.4 Information is synthesised and complex documents are
prepared in accordance with organisational requirements,
3.5 Feedback from others is obtained on the documents'
effectiveness for the purpose intended, outcomes are assessed
and lessons learnt are articulated and used to underpin future
writing.
3.6 Feedback is provided to contributors of information/documents
to improve future input in a manner that provides learning
opportunities for the contributors.


Skill requirements
 reading and writing at a level to cope with a range of complex and sensitive workplace
materials
 critically analysing and synthesising information to compose complex written documents
 researching other pertinent information, such as supporting/opposing position papers
 refining content, structure and sequence according to the required purpose of written
material
 analysing and using language structures and features that influence the interpretation of
written communication
 using spelling, punctuation and grammar for workplace documents at an experienced level
 providing feedback on other people's work in ways suited to the diversity of the workplace,
including creation of learning opportunities to improve research/document input
 cross-cultural communication requirements
communication in the public sector such as privacy, freedom of information, information
security, confidentiality, copyright, intellectual property
 critical analysis of complex information in a government context
 politically and culturally sensitive documents
 organisational requirements for complex written documents
 government style manual requirements
 persuasive written language devices and their ethical use for calculated effect
 the ways in which socio-cultural factors, language features and structures combine to
influence the interpretation of written information
context of preparing complex/sensitive written materials

Evidence Guide
Package.
service
 PSPMNGT608B Manage risk
public sector
 preparation of high-level/sensitive written materials in a range
of (3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time)
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to written
 examples of complex workplace documents
 government style guide
 organisational writing guides
situations likely to be encountered when preparing
high-level/sensitive written materials
encountered when preparing high-level/sensitive written

materials, including coping with difficulties, irregularities and

 preparation of high-level/sensitive written materials in a range
of (3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time).
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Communication  influencing opinion

objectives may include:  share information
 brief Minister
 reach consensus
 shape opinion
 influence policy
 represent the organisation's position
 represent the business unit's position
 build reputation (of self and organisation)
 market services
 obtain funding
include: government that have some direct interest in government
conduct, actions, products and services, such as:
 employees at all levels of the public sector
 government
 Ministers
 clients
 the public
 other jurisdictions
 international governments
 international bodies
 community groups
 special interest groups
 key individuals of influence
 anticipating likely disagreements and structuring material to
address these

Legislation, policy and  State/Territory and Commonwealth legislation, regulations,

guidelines may include: policies, guidelines and standards relating to high-level written
communication in the public sector, such as:
 principles of equal employment opportunity, equity and
diversity
 confidentiality
 privacy
 fraud standards
 copyright
 risk management
Communication  consideration of wider organisational/public sector issues
approach may include:  consideration of political sensitivities
 language calculated to appeal emotionally to a particular
audience, such as authoritative, serious, informal, informative
 cultural, ethnic, diversity or equity considerations
 working within government processes and operational
frameworks
 consultative
 collaborative
 assertive
 reasonable
Complex documents may  Cabinet submissions
include:  briefing papers
 speeches
 media briefs
 position papers
 business cases
 reports
 public policy strategies
 justification for policy development
 policy guidance
Organisational  use of plain English
requirements may  style formats
include:  acknowledgements
 acronyms

 technical terms
 abbreviations
footnotes, endnotes
 use of particular communication channels
 embargoed material
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPHR504A Implement workforce planning and succession strategies Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPHR504A Implement workforce planning and succession

strategies

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers workforce planning and succession to underpin the organisation's strategic
and business decisions. It includes, conducting workforce analysis and assisting with
workforce planning and succession management.
In practice, workforce planning overlaps with other generalist and specialist workplace
activities such as promoting ethical behaviour and compliance with legislation, capitalising on
diversity, initiating projects, providing client service.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Conduct 1.1 In-depth analysis is conducted of current workforce practices,
workforce analysis numbers, deployment, diversity and competencies to provide a
baseline for workforce planning and management.
1.2 Workforce data is analysed and when required benchmarked
against comparable data, trends are identified and interventions
are suggested to address developments that do not support the
organisation's strategic or business directions.
1.3 Labour market and industry analysis is undertaken to identify
factors and trends that may impact on the organisation and the
implications of these for workforce planning and management.
1.4 Scenario planning or other forecasting tools are used to predict
and assess likely futures for the organisation with their
associated implications and risks.
1.5 The results of workforce analysis are presented in objective and
unbiased terms and reported in a form and language to suit the
intended audience of the presentation.
1.6 The results of workforce analysis are contributed to corporate
decision making about projected future workforce requirements.
2. Contribute to 2.1 Information and advice is provided to managers on all aspects
workforce planning of workforce planning according to their requirements for
business planning/outcomes.
2.2 Workforce planning tools are developed/provided to managers,
and assistance is given in their use and the analysis of
outcomes.
2.3 Solutions are developed and suggested for current and future
workforce planning and management issues in accordance with
2.4 Consultancy services are provided to develop the human
resource aspects of organisational and business unit plans to
ensure the right numbers of appropriately diverse and skilled
staff are available for future needs.
2.5 Managers are assisted to question current work practices and
structures and to prepare workforce plans to translate future
business requirements into actionable human resource
strategies.
3. Assist with 3.1 The critical role of succession planning in managing the
succession organisation's intellectual capital is communicated to managers
management and staff in ways suited to their level of understanding or
experience.
3.2 A succession management strategy is developed and candidate
pools are identified for imminent and longer term future


vacancies in accordance with legislation, policy and procedures
and business unit needs.
3.3 Succession processes are developed and agreed and the
succession management strategy is implemented to meet
3.4 The results of workforce analysis and planning are used to assist
managers to undertake succession planning to identify
requirements and manage transition when staff leave the
organisation or business unit.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 analysing information and trends
 consulting, negotiating and advising on workforce planning and succession
management
 leading and influencing in relation to workforce analysis and planning
 applying problem solving
 using a variety of words and language structures to explain ideas to different
audiences
 interpreting and explaining data and assisting others to apply the outcomes in
the workplace
 preparing written advice and reports requiring reasoning and precision of
expression
 applying occupational health and safety procedures and sustainability practices
in the context of implementing workforce planning and succession strategies
 data analysis
 forecasting and planning
 scenario planning
 strategic thinking and analysis
 organisational business planning cycle and processes
 organisational goals, policies and procedures related to workforce planning and
analysis
 standard and content requirements of workforce analysis and planning reports
 jurisdictional legislation applying to human resources, including freedom of
information, privacy, confidentiality, occupational health and safety and
environment and sustainability practices

Evidence Guide
Package.
Units to be assessed  Pre-requisite units that must be achieved prior to this

together unit:Nil
 Co-requisite units that must be assessed with this unit:Nil
increase the efficiency and realism of the assessment
process include, but are not limited to:
service
strategies
 PSPLEGN501B Promote compliance with legislation in
the public sector
 PSPPM501B Design complex projects
 PSPPM502B Manage complex projects
 application of the Employability Skills as they relate to this
unit (see Employability Summaries in Qualifications
Framework)
 workforce planning and succession strategies implemented
in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time)
carry out assessment  legislation, policies and procedures
 workplace scenarios and case studies
 forecasting models
 workforce data for analysis
 workforce planning guidelines and other relevant workplace
materials


assess evidence  a workplace environment or one that closely resembles
normal work practice and replicates the range of conditions
likely to be encountered when implementing workforce
planning and succession strategies, including coping with
difficulties, irregularities and breakdowns in routine
 workforce planning and succession strategies implemented
in a range of (3 or more) contexts (or occasions, over time)
 people from culturally and linguistically diverse
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Workforce diversity data  age

may include:  gender
 diversity profile
 competency profile
 qualifications
Workforce data may  absenteeism
include:  age profile of staff
 complaints
 conference leave
 costs associated with under-staffing
 current functions, services and workplace practices
 grievances
 hard to fill jobs
 learning and development
 leave - annual, sick, recreation, personal
 leave without pay
 number, gender and diversity of staff at each classification
level and across business units
 permanent versus temporary versus contract workforce
 recruitment and retention
 staff nearing retirement
 staff retention rates
 staff satisfaction/dissatisfaction
 staff turnover
 study leave
 sustainability practices
 use of employee assistance program
 vacancies
Scenario planning is:  a process for outlining the possible future as far as the
organisation is concerned and developing a plan for dealing
with that future. The uncertainty of both the forecasting
process and the future itself may make it desirable to draw
up a number of different scenarios. It is often advantageous

to assign a degree of probability to a range of competing

scenarios, for example, optimistic (best case scenario) or
pessimistic (worst case scenario)
Results may include:  matrix of required skills
Managers may include:  line managers

 business unit managers
 senior executives
Aspects of workforce  downsizing
planning may include:  human resource forecasts
 job redesign
 labour market projections
 organisational design
 recruitment
 retention strategies
 skill set availability
 supply and demand forecasting
 sustainability/environmental practice requirements
 workforce capability requirements
Future workforce  future workforce requirements (size and skill set)
planning and  projected labour shortages
management issues may  projected skill shortages
include:  interventions to address projected shortages
 over-supply
 hard to recruit jobs
 retention of skilled staff
 diverse workforce composition
Succession planning is:  '... more than fingering a slate of replacements for certain
positions. It is a deliberate and systematic effort to project
leadership requirements, identify a pool of high potential
candidates, develop leadership competencies in those
candidates through intentional learning experiences, and
then select leaders from among the pool of potential leaders'
National Academy of Public Administration, Washington
(1997)
Succession planning  inclusion of future development opportunities in position
strategy may include: descriptions to encourage future progression
Candidate pools may be  leadership assessment activities

identified through:
Legislation, policy and  Commonwealth and State/Territory legislation including

procedures may include: equal employment opportunity, anti-discrimination and
privacy law
 national and international codes of practice and standards
 environmental/sustainability policies
 codes of ethics/conduct
Succession processes  expressions of interest
may include:  formal interview process
 acceptance into a candidate pool
 learning and development
 shadowing
 coaching
 mentoring
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Human Resource Management.

PSPHR620A Manage organisational development Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers management of organisational development in order to facilitate optimal
performance by the business unit(s) or the organisation as a whole. It includes determining
organisational development needs and opportunities, and planning and implementing
intervention strategies.
In practice, managing organisational development overlaps with other generalist and specialist
workplace activities such as managing change, managing diversity, managing policy
implementation, facilitating workforce effectiveness.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Determine 1.1 An environmental scan is undertaken to determine internal and
organisational external factors which will impact on organisational
development needs performance.
and opportunities 1.2 A consultation process is agreed with stakeholders in line with
organisational policy and legislation.
1.3 Ethical principles are applied in consulting with key
stakeholders.
1.4 Information gathered through consultative processes is analysed
and presented to a diverse stakeholder base and options are
determined.
1.5 Recommendations are made to management on a proposed
organisational development strategy, resourcing implications,
risk assessment and timeframes.
2. Plan intervention 2.1 Intervention strategies that support the organisation's strategic
strategies goals and stakeholder responses are agreed.
2.2 The organisation's culture and legislative and policy framework
are considered in developing the strategies.
2.3 Feedback is obtained from stakeholders and is used to
redevelop/redefine the strategies prior to implementation.
2.4 Strategies are developed to embody the principles of natural
justice, equity and fairness.
2.5 Information and advice are provided to facilitate effective
implementation, monitoring and evaluation of intervention
strategies.
3. Implement an 3.1 Resources are obtained and deployed to implement the strategy,
intervention strategy and reports on progress are provided on a regular basis.
3.2 Facilitation and advice are provided to champion required
changes using a range of communication strategies to suit a
diverse workforce and support implementation of the strategy.
3.3 Systems are developed and used to monitor the effectiveness of
the strategy and to determine necessary adjustments.
3.4 Procedures are developed to allow the business unit
self-sufficiency in continuing implementation.
3.5 Legislative and policy requirements are complied with in
implementing the strategy.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 engaging in effective consultation with stakeholders using a variety of words
and language structures to explain complex ideas to different audiences
 undertaking project management and evaluation
 undertaking counselling and negotiation
 using effective leadership involving systems and people
 analysing and explaining complex, formal documents and assisting others to
apply them in the workplace
 preparing written advice and reports requiring reasoning and precision of
expression
 undertaking training, coaching, mentoring and facilitation
 applying public relations strategies
 applying occupational health and safety, environmental and sustainability
procedures relevant to organisational development and change management
 a range of evaluation methodologies related to organisational development
 change management strategies
 employee involvement strategies
 employment relations in the context of organisational development
 organisational learning
 human resource policies and practices
 human resource strategy and planning
 industry trends
 jurisdictional legislation applying to organisational development including
occupational health and safety and environmental and sustainability
requirements
 needs analysis techniques in the context of organisational development
 organisational development theory and practices including national and/or
international good practice models and conceptions of organisation
development
 organisational culture and dynamics

 organisational planning - vision, mission, values, goals

 the concept of diversity and its integration within and across all human resource
functions and areas
 the relationships between human resource functions

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
 PSPETHC601B Maintain and enhance confidence in
public service
 PSPHR603B Provide advisory and mediation services
 PSPHR615A Manage human resource development
strategies
 PSPLEGN601B Manage compliance with legislation in
the public sector
 PSPMNGT611A Manage evaluations
Framework)
 organisational development managed in a range of (3 or
carry out assessment  legislation, organisational policies and procedures
 workplace scenarios and case studies to capture the range of
situations likely to be encountered when managing
organisational development
 reference materials for organisational development


likely to be encountered when managing organisational
development, including coping with difficulties,
irregularities and breakdowns in routine
 organisational development managed in a range of (3 or
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
Sources of information  statistical analyses

for environmental scan  interviews with stakeholders
may include:  surveys
 focus groups interviews
 research on existing programs
 solicited and unsolicited feedback
 organisational reviews
 workforce management data
 work level standards
Stakeholders may  all those individuals and groups both inside and
include: outside the organisation that have some direct interest
in the organisation's behaviour, actions, products and
services including:
 users of the human resource service
 strategic planners
 executive
 decision makers
 inter-agency forums
 government
 Ministers
 clients
Organisational policy  Commonwealth and State/Territory legislation
and legislation may including equal employment opportunity,
include: anti-discrimination and employment law
 public sector management legislation
 national and international codes of practice and
standards

 codes of ethics
 security policy and procedures
 sustainability/environmental standards
Organisational  the human resource business unit
development strategies  one or more of the business units within the
may be developed and organisation
applied to:  the entire organisation
Intervention strategies  business planning
may include:  performance incentives
 business re-engineering
 rewards and recognition awards schemes
 market testing
 organisational skills profiling
 team enhancement
 quality management
 organisational culture development
 individual enhancement/coaching/mentoring
 learning and development activities
 workforce planning
Championing required  consulting
changes may include:  advising
 leading
 persuading
 influencing
 communicating
 facilitating
 assisting
 developing and delivering awareness/briefing sessions
Communication may  email
include:  intranet
 web site
 face-to-face
 pamphlets
 newsletters
 manuals
Business unit may refer  a program

to:  sub-program
 cost centre
 area
 division
 branch
 production unit or section located within the
organisation
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Human Resource Management.

PSPMNGT602B Manage resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPMNGT602B Manage resources
2 PSP04V4.2. Layout adjusted. No changes

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers management of resources in accordance with planned business strategies. It
includes analysing resource requirements, developing resource plans, allocating resources,
and reviewing and reporting on resource usage.
In practice, the management of resources occurs in the context of other generalist or specialist
public sector work activities such as managing people, managing diversity, managing risk,
developing a business case, formulating business strategies etc.
This unit is one of 6 units of competency in the Working in Government and Management
Competency fields that deal with resources. Related units are:
This unit replaces and is equivalent to PSPMNGT602A Manage resources.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Analyse resource 1.1 Resource bids are developed in line with outputs identified in
requirements business plans.
1.2 Key stakeholders are consulted in determining the nature and
level of resources required.
1.3 Analysis of resource requirements is used to identify proposed
costs and benefits.
1.4 Opportunities to share resources across business units within
the organisation are identified.
2. Develop resource 2.1 Resource plans are developed that detail the acquisition and
plans to support allocation of resources, and the relationship to business
achievement of strategies, contingencies, plans, programs and processes.
business unit 2.2 Internal resourcing capabilities and external resourcing
objectives requirements are identified.
2.3 Procedures for the evaluation of resource allocation are
identified in resource plans.
2.4 Processes for managing changing government priorities are
included in resource plans.
2.5 Approval for resource plans is obtained from senior
management.
3. Allocate resources to 3.1 Resources are allocated in accordance with relevant legislation,
achieve stated organisational policy and practices.
business objectives 3.2 Resource allocation is managed to enable achievement of
business unit objectives.
3.3 Resources are negotiated and obtained within required
timeframe to enable achievement of business unit objectives.
3.4 Systems are developed and implemented to enable timely and
accurate monitoring and review of resource usage.
3.5 Efficient use of technology is incorporated into work practices.
4. Review and report 4.1 Procedures to review resource allocation against business unit
on resource usage objectives are developed and implemented.
4.2 Compliance with program and project budgets is monitored and
corrective action is recommended and actioned where
necessary.
4.3 Reports are prepared that clearly indicate the level of
performance achieved and any action taken to adjust or rectify
procedures in meeting service and product delivery standards.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to
resource management in the public sector
 using effective consultation and negotiation with stakeholders
 writing reports requiring reasoning and precision of expression
 communicating using complex exchange of oral information
 applying budgeting and financial management
 applying occupational health and safety and environmental strategies to
resource management
 resource plans
 financial management and budgetary processes in the organisation
 business strategies
 risk management concepts
 organisational goals, policies and procedures
 jurisdictional legislation and guidelines applicable to resource management,
including occupational health and safety and environment

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
public service
the public sector
 PSPMNGT610A Manage public sector financial
resources
 PSPPOL603A Manage policy implementation
Framework)
 management of resources in a range of (3 or more) contexts
carry out assessment  procedures and protocols
 jurisdictional legislation and guidelines applicable to
resource management
 workplace information such as resource allocations,
resource plans
situations likely to be encountered when managing
resources
assess evidence  a workplace environment, or one that closely resembles


likely to be encountered when managing resources,
 management of resources in a range of (3 or more) contexts
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
as:
 government
 Ministers
Resources may include:  human
 physical
 financial
 technological and information resources
Business units may be:  programs
 sub-programs
 cost centres
 areas
 divisions
 branches
 production units or sections located within the organisation
Business strategies may  programs, projects, processes and plans used to attain the
include: business unit's strategic objectives
Legislation,  Commonwealth and State/Territory legislation including

organisational policies equal employment opportunity and anti-discrimination law
and practices may  national and international codes of practice and standards
include:  the organisation's policies and practices
Technology may include:  computers and computer software
 photocopiers
 communication systems

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Management.

PSPMNGT608B Manage risk Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPMNGT608B Manage risk

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers maximising results and minimising consequences for a business unit activity
by managing risk. It includes establishing the risk management context, planning for risk
management, managing risk and evaluating the risk management plan.
In practice, managing risk may overlap with other generalist or specialist public sector work
activities such as acting ethically, complying with legislation, applying government systems,
managing resources, managing change, managing diversity, formulating business strategies,
etc.
The unit is one of 4 in the Working in Government and Management Competency fields
dealing with risk. Related units are:
 PSPMNGT704A Undertake enterprise risk management
This unit replaces and is equivalent to PSPMNGT608A Manage risk.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Establish the risk 1.1 The nature and extent of business unit activity, its objectives
management context and outcomes are established within the organisational context.
1.2 The strategic and risk management context are identified in
1.3 Stakeholders are identified and consulted to ensure their views,
concerns and needs are taken into account in the risk
management process.
1.4 Criteria for risk assessment are determined in accordance with
1.5 Risk management criteria are determined to provide guidance
on balancing risk, costs, benefits and opportunities.
1.6 Risk management criteria are monitored, reviewed and adjusted
to ensure opportunities and current and emerging trends are
reflected.
2. Plan for risk 2.1 Sources of risk are investigated and potential, perceived and
management actual risks are identified and consulted upon to ensure full
coverage.
2.2 Risks are analysed and documented in consultation with
stakeholders, and levels of risk are determined as the basis for
risk management planning in a specific activity.
2.3 Risk management methods/techniques/tools are selected and
modified as necessary to evaluate risks to determine those that
are acceptable and those that are unacceptable.
2.4 Risk treatment options are identified for unacceptable risks and
preferred risk treatment approaches are determined.
2.5 A risk management plan is developed and communicated to
key stakeholders to ensure clarity and achievement of objectives
throughout the activity's life cycle.
3. Manage risk 3.1 Activity is managed in accordance with agreed risk
management plan.
3.2 Performance is reviewed, variance is analysed and risk
responses are initiated to achieve objectives with minimal
disruption and conflict.
3.3 Internal and external risks to outcomes are monitored and
remedial actions are initiated to achieve business unit
objectives.
4. Evaluate the risk 4.1 A valid and reliable evaluation methodology is developed and
management plan implemented.
4.2 Outcomes are reviewed and analysed to assess the effectiveness
of current risk management strategies.


4.3 Evaluation is used to monitor existing risks, identify new risks
and identify any trouble spots.
4.4 A variety of information, including the perspectives of key
stakeholders, is obtained and utilised.
4.5 Recommendations on enhancements to the plan are formulated
and acted upon to inform subsequent risk management
processes.
4.6 The outcomes of evaluation are communicated to relevant
personnel.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying legislation, regulations and policies relating to risk management
 researching and analysing the wider context affecting the organisation
 assessing and evaluating risks
 monitoring and reviewing risks and risk treatments
 using communication and consultation with a diverse range of stakeholders
 applying problem solving using conceptual and reasoning skills
 using formal language and style for written plans
 engaging in discussion using exchange of complex oral information
 using a variety of words and language structures to explain complex, formal
documents and assisting others to apply them in the workplace
 applying procedures relating to occupational health and safety and environment
in the context of risk management
 legislation, regulations, policies, procedures and guidelines relating to risk
management
 Australian and New Zealand standards - Risk management AS/NZS 4360:1999
or as revised
 international standards such as SIRCA 8001:2003
 Guidelines for managing risk in the Australian and New Zealand public sector -
HB 143:1999 or as revised
 risk management cycle
 the relationship of risk to context - how the context may define the risks
 the importance of consultation and communication at every stage of the risk
management cycle
 legal requirements related to the activity
 whole-of-life considerations
 approval processes
 range of evaluation methodologies
 the diversity of risks in the public sector
in the context of risk management


Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
public service
the public sector
 PSPMNGT611A Manage evaluations
 PSPMNGT612A Review and improve business
performance
Framework)
 management of risk in a range of (2 or more) contexts (or
carry out assessment  legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to risk
management
 Australian and New Zealand standards - Risk management

AS/NZS 4360:1999 or as revised

 Guidelines for managing risk in the Australian and New
Zealand public sector - HB 143:1999 or as revised
 other national and international standards relating to risk
management such as SIRCA 8001:2003
risk management situations likely to be encountered
likely to be encountered when managing risk, including
routine
 management of risk in a range of (2 or more) contexts (or
literacy, and the needs of particular target groups, such as:
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Business unit may refer  a program

to:  sub-program
 cost centre
 area
 division
 branch
 production unit or section located within the organisation
Organisational context  the organisation, how it is organised, and its capabilities
may include:  any official resources, including physical areas and assets,
that are vital to the operation of the organisation
 key operational elements and services of the organisation
 any major projects
Strategic and risk  the relationship between the organisation and the
management context may environment in which it operates
include:  the organisation's functions:
 political
 operational
 financial
 social
 legal
 commercial
 the various stakeholders and clients
Stakeholders may  employees
include:  managers
 volunteers
 unions
 financial managers
 self-insurers
 clients
 suppliers
 contractors
 service providers

 the public
Risk management:  is a logical and systematic process of identifying, analysing,
evaluating, treating, and monitoring risks related to any
strategy plan, process, program or procedure that will enable
the organisation to minimise losses and maximise
opportunities
 may be considered in relation to an organisation's:
 people
 assets and physical environment
 reputation and image
 legal issues
 business continuity
 finances
 may include written procedures to ensure staff know:
 what
 how
 when, and
 by whom, action is to be taken to treat risks in the
organisation
Risk evaluation criteria  used to rank risks and decide whether they are acceptable or
are: not
 affected by:
 legal requirements
 perceptions of internal/external stakeholders
 cost-benefit analysis, for example, cost of risk management
being less than financial cost if the risk occurred
Legislation, policy and  Commonwealth and State/Territory legislation relating to
procedures may include: risk management
 national and international codes of practice and standards,
such as SIRCA 8001:2003
 the organisation's risk management policies and practices
 codes of conduct/codes of ethics
 Australian and New Zealand standards - Risk management
AS/NZS 4360:1999 or as revised
 Guidelines for managing risk in the Australian and New
Zealand public sector - HB 143:1999 or as revised
 professional standards for risk management, for example
CPRM - certified practising risk manager
 jurisdictional policies, guidelines and web sites, for example
www.riskmanagement.qld.gov.au

Sources of risk may  human behaviour

include:  technology/technical issues
 occupational health and safety
 legal
 political
 property/equipment
 environmental
 financial/market
 natural events
Risks may be:  internal
 external
 random
 real
 perceived
Risks may include:  physical injury or death
 failure of machinery or equipment
 breaches of security
 fraud
 litigation
 client dissatisfaction
 unfavourable publicity
Analysis of risks  likelihood of risks:
includes:  almost certain
 likely
 possible
 unlikely
 rare
 consequences of risks:
 insignificant
 minor
 moderate
 major
 catastrophic
 current control measures
Documentation of  table showing all risks, any existing controls, likelihood of
analysis may include: occurring, consequences and subsequent level of risk
Level of risk may be:  low, treated with routine procedures

 moderate, with specific responsibility allocated for the risk,

and monitoring and response procedures implemented

 high, requiring action, as it has potential to be damaging to
the organisation
 extreme, requiring immediate action, as the potential could
be devastating to the organisation
Methods/techniques/  computer modelling
tools may include:  sensitivity analysis
 structured interviews
 statistical data
 questionnaires
 fault trees
 analysis of consequences - loss of money, time, labour,
intangibles
Acceptable risks are:  those which an organisation has determined have the least
potential for harm
 not necessarily insignificant
Risks may be acceptable  the risk level is so low that it does not warrant spending
because: time and money to treat it
 the risk is low and the benefits outweigh the cost of treating
it
 the opportunities presented are much greater than the threat
Unacceptable risks are:  those which an organisation has determined have the most
potential for harm
Options for treating risks  avoiding the risk, for example, by terminating the activity or
may include: conducting it in another way (these actions may have
different risks attached)
 controlling the risk, by reducing the likelihood of the risk
occurring, the consequences of the risk, or both
 transferring the risk, for example, by arranging insurance,
contracting some or all of the activity to another
organisation or person, etc
 retaining the risk, and making contingency plans/funds
allocation for covering any loss or other negative effect
from the risk
Risk management plan  sources of risk and risk events
may include:  analysis of risks - likelihood, consequences and risk levels
 prioritised list of unacceptable risks
 treatment options selected
 person/s responsible for implementing treatment options
 resources required
 performance measures

 timeframe for implementation

 timetable for review of plan
Evaluation methodology  observations
may include:  physical inspections
 incident reports
 questionnaires
 interviews with stakeholders
 regular reviews of risk treatment procedures
 repeat of the risk management process
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Management.

PSPMNGT610A Manage public sector financial resources Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPMNGT610A Manage public sector financial resources

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers input into public sector budgeting, financial forecasting and reporting
requirements, and the allocation and management of resources to achieve the required outputs
of the business unit. It includes contributing to financial bids and estimates, allocating funds,
managing budgets and reporting on financial activity.
In practice, the management of public sector financial resources may occur in the context of
other generalist or specialist public sector workplace activities such as managing compliance
with legislation, maintaining and enhancing ethical practice, managing people, policy etc.
This unit is one of 6 units of competency in the Working in Government and Management
Competency fields that deal with resources.
Related units are:
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Contribute to 1.1 Organisational initiatives requiring the preparation of bids and
financial bids and estimates are identified in accordance with resource constraint s
estimates and organisational needs.
1.2 Information for bids/estimates is substantiated, contains logical
assumptions and takes account of strategic plans, government
policies and priorities.
1.3 Information for bids/estimates is prepared in accordance with
government budgetary requirements including a timeframe to
meet critical submission dates.
1.4 Documentation to support bids/estimates is prepared in
accordance with budget guidelines.
2. Allocate funds 2.1 Budgets are approved and financial resources are allocated
according to organisational priorities/business plan.
2.2 Allocations are made in accordance with organisational policy
and procedures and take account of any statutory requirements
or constraints.
2.3 Audit trails are maintained to ensure accurate tracking and to
identify variances between agreed and actual allocations.
2.4 Financial allocation is monitored against organisational
objectives and priorities and corrective action is taken as
required in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures.
3. Manage budgets 3.1 Budget management is undertaken that meets the financial
accountability requirements of the organisation.
3.2 Expenses are monitored against budget and authorised in
accordance with financial delegation and organisational
financial controls.
3.3 Financial reports are obtained and provided in accordance with
3.4 Expenses are monitored through analysis of financial
information/reports and problems are resolved or referred in
accordance with organisational procedures and financial
delegation.
3.5 Expenditure is aligned with service delivery
milestones/expectations.
3.6 Changes to the budget are negotiated to account for potential
under-spending, delays in service/program delivery, overruns
and unneeded line items in accordance with organisational
4. Report on financial 4.1 Requirements for financial management and reporting are
activities identified in accordance with the public sector financial


management framework.
4.2 Financial management and reporting are undertaken in
accordance with organisational requirements and public sector
financial management policy and procedures.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 preparing information and reports requiring precision of expression
 meeting formatting and process requirements for bids and estimates and
linkages to strategic plans
 monitoring financial information
 interpreting and signing off on financial reports
 interpreting organisational information in financial terms
 adjusting communication to suit different audiences
 using cross-cultural communication relating to financial management - across
professional cultures such as accounting, IT, arts, policy areas
 accessing information and legislation electronically or in hard copy
 applying environmental, sustainability and occupational health and safety
procedures relating to working in the public sector
 financial management principles
 legislation, policies and processes relating to public sector financial
management, such as conflicts of interest, procurement, value for money
 the organisation's financial accountability mechanisms
 corporate governance requirements
 internal controls and why they are used
 delegations and why the public sector uses them
 public sector financial management framework (detailed knowledge) and the
relationship between the elements of the framework
 documents that make up the financial management framework
 legislation related to working in the public sector such as equal employment
opportunity, environmental, sustainability and occupational health and safety
requirements

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
public service
the public sector
 PSPMNGT603B Facilitate people management
Framework)
 management of public sector financial resources in a range
carry out assessment  public sector and organisational financial procedures and
protocols
situations likely to be encountered when managing public
sector financial resources
 financial legislation and guidelines such as central agency
guidelines
 budget process and guidelines


likely to be encountered when managing public sector
financial resources, including coping with difficulties,
 management of public sector financial resources in a range
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Bids may include:  program discretionary bids

 program, sub-program, section, business unit bids
 portfolio managed bids
Estimates may include:  budget estimates
 additional estimates
 forward estimates
 long-term estimates
 forecasts
Information may include:  historical information
 cost-benefit analysis
 staff requirements
 contractual information
 efficiency/sustainability requirements
Budgetary requirements  zero-based budgeting
may include:  accrual budgeting
 activity-based costing/management
 output-based budgeting
 top-down/bottom-up approach
 base plus increment
Supporting  phasing for liability and expenditure/cash flow implications
documentation may  impact statements
include:  reasons for major variations to financial guidance
 staffing resources
Budgets may include:  capital expenses
 recurrent expenses
 staffing costs
 cash flow
 forward estimates
Corrective action may  re-prioritising activities
include:  funds transfer
 re-phasing liability/expenditure

Delegations are:  functions or powers (under an act) assigned to others

 limited to specified powers or amounts
 made to persons in specified positions
Financial controls  identify, record and measure revenue, expenses, assets,
should: liabilities and equity
 ensure assets are safeguarded and used to avoid waste,
extravagance, loss and misuse
 ensure liabilities are not incurred without proper authority
 ensure correct valuation, cut-off, presentation and disclosure
of financial balances and transactions
 be linked to the organisation's risk management strategy
Financial reports may  program, sub-program, section, business unit financial
include: reports
 accrual reports
 monthly/quarterly financial reports including cost/unit, costs
incurred compared with share of program delivered
 annual reports
Elements of the public  internal controls
sector financial  segregation of duties
management framework  delegations
may include:  corporate governance requirements
 service level agreements
 internal and external reporting
 risk management
Public sector financial  financial management acts and regulations
policies and procedures  financial administration and audit acts
may include:  Treasury guidelines
 public sector finance standards
 financial management benchmarking studies
 the organisation's:
 financial management practice manual
 delegation manual
 budget manual/instructions
 style manual
 quality manual
 government financial policy statements

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Management.

PSPMNGT613A Develop partnering arrangements Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPMNGT613A Develop partnering arrangements

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the exploration of opportunities for government organisations to develop
partnering arrangements with the private sector and to proceed to formal agreement based on
evaluation to ensure the public interest is fully protected. It includes exploring partnering
opportunities, assessing feasibility, establishing partnering arrangements and fostering
productive partnering relationships
In practice, development of partnering arrangements may overlap with other generalist or
specialist public sector workplace activities such as applying government systems,
establishing and maintaining strategic networks, planning procurement, managing risk etc.
This is one of two units dealing with partnering arrangements. The second unit is an imported
unit, CHCCD19A Establish and maintain community, government and business partnerships
from the Community Services Training Package which may be used in Diploma or Advanced
Diploma qualifications.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Explore partnering 1.1 Rigorous assessment is undertaken to establish the potential for
opportunities private sector involvement in the delivery of public sector
services or infrastructure.
1.2 Need, affordability and priority for private sector partnering are
determined to ensure the public interest is fully protected.
1.3 The service/infrastructure requirement to be provided through a
partnering arrangement is identified, benefits to the community
are confirmed and potential partners are identified.
2. Assess feasibility 2.1 A full feasibility study is conducted that includes environmental
analysis, social impact and cost-benefit analysis to confirm the
merits of partnering options for financing, delivery and value
for money.
2.2 A full assessment of risk is conducted, including the risks and
costs the government would be prepared to retain.
2.3 A detailed assessment of costs and potential revenue streams is
undertaken and a comparison is undertaken with the costs
associated with public sector provision.
2.4 Community stakeholders are consulted to provide input in the
feasibility and planning stages of any partnering arrangement.
3. Establish partnering 3.1 Detailed requirements are determined for the partnering
arrangements arrangement in accordance with government policy and
priorities.
3.2 Procurement options are investigated, including a full public
tender process, in accordance with legislative and organisational
requirements.
3.3 Contracts are arranged that specify partnering duration, outputs,
benefits and performance incentives, if any, in accordance with
government policy and procedures.
3.4 Risk is allocated to whichever party is best able to manage it
and an accountability structure and approval process is
developed.
3.5 Government approvals are obtained and contractual
arrangements are entered into in accordance with organisational
4. Foster productive 4.1 Reasons/benefits for the partnering arrangement, roles,
partnering limitations and expectations are affirmed throughout the life of
relationships the relationship.
4.2 Ongoing communication is used to confirm vision, agreed
goals, outcomes, measures of performance, agreed
accountabilities and the limits of the arrangement for both
parties.


4.3 Ethical standards and public sector accountabilities are
maintained and, when necessary, explained to partners in a
manner suited to their requirements.
4.4 Strategies for solving problems and dealing with conflict are
agreed and used in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures to build trust/mutual respect for the benefit of both
parties.

this unit.
Skill requirements
 establishing and fostering trusting, ongoing relationships with individuals and
businesses
 using a range of communication styles to suit different audiences and purposes
 explaining complex and formal policies and concepts to a variety of audiences
 applying workplace safety procedures to partnering activities
 accessing/preparing information electronically or in hard copy
 probity
 public sector ethics and accountability
 public sector values and codes of conduct
 government/agency policies and procedures relating to public private partnering
 relationship contracting with the private sector
 relationship management in the context of partnering
 management of expectations in the context of partnering
 principles of cultural awareness and cross-cultural communication
 workplace safety issues relating to public private partnering

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
 PSPPROC604A Plan for strategic procurement
outcomes
Framework)
 development of 1 significant long-term partnering
arrangement or a number of (2 or more) smaller
arrangements
carry out assessment  workplace scenarios or case studies
 government partnering policy, principles and practices
 legislation related to public private partnering arrangements
 relationship contracts
 government requirements for value for money, public
benefit testing
 public sector comparator
likely to be encountered when developing partnering
arrangements, including coping with difficulties,


 development of 1 significant long-term partnering
arrangement or a number of (2 or more) smaller
arrangements
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Partnering with the  harnessing private sector management skills, innovation and
private sector may efficiencies
include:  significant private sector involvement in provision of
infrastructure or service need
 qualitative risk transfer to the private sector
 long-term output based contract arrangements
 relationship contract
 community input into specifications
Potential partners will  an identifiable market of private sector bidders prepared to
consist of: compete for the partnering opportunity
Value for money may be  the project size justifies the transaction and management
achieved where: costs
 there is a defined measurable service delivery function or
output mechanism
 there is scope within the project delivery for the
optimisation and the allocation of manageable risk to the
private sector, delivering a cost-effective outcome
 there is scope for sector private sector innovation, value
adding and/or cost reductions in the delivery and operation
of the service
 there is real value in transferring responsibility for the
operational and maintenance phase of the project to the
private sector
 there is an identifiable market of private sector bidders
prepared to compete for the opportunity to deliver the
project
as:
 community
 clients

 private sector
 government
 Ministers
Requirements for the  statement of benefits
partnering arrangement  specified outputs
may include:  contract term
 risk assessment and management plan
 accountability structure
 performance incentives
 operational or management efficiencies
 optimally developed relationship contract
 best value for money
 responsible use of public and private resources
 probity
 transparency
 fair appeals process
 market sounding
 financing options
Risk management may  acceptance of risks
include:  avoidance of risks
 minimisation of risks
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Management.

PSPMNGT615A Influence workforce effectiveness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPMNGT615A Influence workforce effectiveness

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competency to ensure the effectiveness of the workforce, whether staff or
contractors, in promoting the attainment of strategic objectives. It includes providing
leadership to individuals and work teams, creating a cooperative work environment,
capitalising on workplace emotions, motivating the workforce to achieve quality results, and
delegating work to achieve strategic objectives, and managing up.
In practice influencing workforce effectiveness occurs in the context of other generalist or
specialist work functions such as managing performance, managing diversity, managing
change, managing client service.
This unit is one of a series of 4 units of competency relating to working with others, located in
the Competency fields of Working in Government and Management. Related units are:
This unit replaces PSPMNGT601A Facilitate workforce effectiveness. The units are not
equivalent as elements dealing with emotional intelligence and managing up have been added.
of publication

Not applicable.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Provide leadership to 1.1 The vision and strategic goals of the organisation that impact on
individuals and work the work area are identified and promoted.
teams 1.2 Workforce members are regularly consulted on business
objectives, plans and operational issues to minimise role
ambiguity and uncertainty.
1.3 Roles, functions, responsibilities and work goals are defined in
accordance with organisational requirements, and are
communicated and agreed.
1.4 Opportunities are provided for workforce members to clarify
aspects of particular tasks, resolve issues and seek feedback or
further direction.
1.5 Encouragement is provided to develop new and innovative
practices, procedures, processes, technologies and strategies in
line with corporate values, vision and goals.
1.6 Leadership is provided appropriate to changing priorities and
situations and takes account of the specific needs of a diverse
workforce.
2. Create a cooperative 2.1 Cooperation in the work environment is actively facilitated
work environment through balanced and fair work allocation and recognition of all
contributions.
2.2 Teams and individuals are encouraged to find styles of working
which are consistent both with team and individual
competencies, preferences and business unit objectives.
2.3 Conflict management strategies are used to facilitate a
cooperative work environment.
2.4 Cooperative and productive relationships with individuals and
teams are established.
2.5 Leadership style and guidance that take into account the
differing needs and background of a diverse workforce are used.
3. Monitor and respond 3.1 Emotional strengths and triggers are identified for self and
to workplace others in the workplace, and communication, client service or
emotions work allocations are tailored to take account of these.
3.2 Self-reflection and feedback is used to identify the effect on
others of own emotions, and emotional control is exerted to
model positive workplace behaviour.
3.3 Opportunities are provided for others to express their thoughts
and feelings, and emotions are taken into account in decision
making to maintain a positive emotional climate in the
workplace.
3.4 Assistance is provided to others to identify the effect of
emotions in the workplace and to develop and use their own


emotional intelligence to build productive relationships and
maximise workplace outcomes.
4. Motivate the 4.1 Ways to motivate a diverse workforce are explored and matched
workforce to achieve to individual needs.
quality results 4.2 Opportunities are identified for individuals to develop
competencies required to meet work objectives.
4.3 Individuals' career development requirements are recognised
and balanced with team objectives.
4.4 Feedback that is prompt, consistent and constructive and
ongoing is provided on performance.
4.5 Achievements are promoted and rewarded in a way which
openly acknowledges the contribution of individuals and teams.
4.6 Team building strategies are applied to strengthen individual
and team commitment to organisational vision and work unit
goals.
5. Delegate work to 5.1 Work is delegated in accordance with individual competencies
achieve business unit or as development opportunities arise, and sufficient
strategic objectives information is communicated, resources allocated and support
provided to enable tasks to be completed successfully.
5.2 Responsibilities are delegated while still accepting
accountability for their success/failure.
5.3 Mechanisms for monitoring progress in achieving work goals
are established and implemented in accordance with
organisational policy and practices.
5.4 Areas for improvement are determined collaboratively and
improved processes/strategies are implemented.
5.5 Tasks are delegated effectively to facilitate the attainment of
business unit objectives and the continuous improvement of
business processes.
5.6 Up-to-date and accessible record of delegations is maintained in
6. Manage up 6.1 People and influences outside the immediate work environment
with the potential to affect work priorities, outcomes and
resources are identified.
6.2 Role relationships and responsibilities for managing up are
analysed.
6.3 Strategies are developed and implemented to ensure executives
consider the operational consequences of policy changes.
6.4 Strategies are used to engage support for public sector activities
and ensure sufficient resources are provided to implement
initiatives.
6.5 Self-evaluation and feedback from others on own performance


is used to continuously improve performance and outcomes.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 delegating work to others
 counselling and resolving conflict in teams
 using team building strategies
 using facilitation, negotiation and consultation requiring exchanges of complex
oral information
 using consensual decision making skills
 keeping check of emotions when challenges arise, maintaining composure,
perceiving the emotional motivators that drive individuals and groups in the
workplace and engaging those motivators, where appropriate, to optimize
organisational performance
 using a variety of words and language structures to explain complex ideas to
different audiences
 interpreting and explaining complex, formal documents and assisting others to
 applying occupational health and safety strategies relevant to managing and
working with others in a public sector workplace
 the relationship between effective human resource functions and the attainment
of business unit objectives
 group processes and facilitation techniques
 team building strategies
 the organisation's career and human resource development strategies, programs
and plans
 conflict resolution strategies
 jurisdictional legislation applicable to management and human resource
management functions
 occupational health and safety issues relevant to managing and working with
others in a public sector workplace
 environmental and sustainability issues relevant to managing and working in a


Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
public service
the public sector
Framework)
 workforce effectiveness influenced in a range of (3 or more)
contexts (or occasions, over time) such as working with
staff, clients and contractors
carry out assessment  procedures and protocols
 public sector policies and legislation such as those dealing
with:
 human resource management and development
 workforce capability
situations likely to be encountered when influencing
workforce effectiveness

likely to be encountered when facilitating workforce

effectiveness, including coping with difficulties,
 workforce effectiveness influenced in a range of (3 or more)
contexts (or occasions, over time) such as working with
staff, clients and contractors
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
Workforce members  employees

may include:  consultants
 external contractors
 job rotation staff
 trainees
Leadership refers to:  the process of influencing others to engage in work
behaviours that facilitate the attainment of the business
unit's strategic objectives
Business unit may  a program
refer to:  sub-program
 cost centre
 area
 division
 branch
 production unit or section located within the
organisation
Emotional strengths  monitor and control negative emotions
may include ability to:  recognise and respond to others' emotional states
 see beyond an immediate emotional reaction to the
real cause, rather than responding to the emotions on
face value
Identification of  the varying cultural expressions of emotion
emotions may need to
take account of:
Others in the  management

workplace may include:  staff
 clients
 contractors
Emotions may include:  anger
 anxiety
 apprehension
 caring

 confidence
 depression
 elation
 enthusiasm
 excitement
 fear
 happiness
 inadequacy
 joy
 nervousness
 over-confidence
 pride
 stress
 under-confidence
 unhappiness
Development of  mentoring
emotional intelligence  shadowing
may occur through:  coaching
 training
 simulation
Emotional intelligence  widely recognised as the ability of an individual to
is: monitor their own and others' emotions in a social or
work environment, to discriminate among the
emotions and to use the information to guide their
thinking and actions
 characterised by self-awareness (personal),
self-management (personal), social awareness (social)
and relationship management (social)
Team building  defining and clarifying objectives/work area plans
strategies may include:  strengthening communication processes
 clarifying ground rules and behavioural expectations
 fostering creativity
 offering constructive feedback
 providing facilitated meetings
 recognising achievements
Others may include:  superiors
 reportees

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Management.

PSPMNGT701B Provide strategic direction Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPMNGT701B Provide strategic direction

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the provision of strategic direction within the organisation. It includes
analysing factors in the operating environment, developing and coordinating a strategy for
determining strategic priorities, and formulating and communicating strategic priorities.
In practice, providing strategic direction overlaps with other generalist or specialist public
sector work activities such as providing ethical leadership, influencing strategic policy,
managing diversity, leading human resources etc.
This unit replaces and is equivalent to PSPMNGT701A Provide strategic direction.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Analyse factors in 1.1 The organisation's purpose and direction within the overall
the operating government strategy, and its integration with other government
environment service providers, are analysed with a view to determining key
factors and issues for consideration and response.
1.2 The organisation's culture, values and strategic priorities are
analysed with a view to determining key factors and issues for
consideration and response.
1.3 Internal and external factors likely to impact upon the
organisation are continually monitored and analysed.
1.4 Best practice models related to the nature of the organisation's
core business are explored.
1.5 Client needs and preferences are identified and analysed.
1.6 Legislation and organisational policies and practices that may
impact upon organisation's operations are identified and
analysed.
2. Develop and 2.1 Consultation with key stakeholders is conducted in a manner
coordinate a strategy that maximises their commitment and contribution.
for determining 2.2 Constructive solutions are found where stakeholders are in
strategic priorities conflict.
2.3 Analysis and evaluation of information gained from a variety of
sources, including key stakeholders, is used to identify strategic
options for prioritisation.
2.4 Benchmarking is undertaken with other organisations or best
practice standards to inform development of strategic priorities.
2.5 Priorities of other government service providers are considered
to ensure duplication will be avoided and services integrated for
the benefit of clients.
3. Formulate and 3.1 Strategic priorities are developed that support overall
communicate government strategy.
strategic priorities 3.2 Strategic priorities are developed that embody the organisation's
values, beliefs and philosophy.
3.3 Strategic priorities are used to draw together and reflect the
suggestions and interests of stakeholders.
3.4 Strategic priorities are developed that embody a shared vision
for the future and set out challenging but realistic objectives that
encourage staff to be creative and innovative in their approach
to attaining objectives.
3.5 Strategic priorities are communicated to stakeholders using a
variety of strategies and in such a way as to attract their support.
3.6 Implementation is monitored to ensure strategic priorities are
addressed through related business unit and individual


objectives.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 delegating work to others
 counselling and resolving conflict in teams
 using team building strategies
 using facilitation, negotiation and consultation requiring exchanges of complex
oral information
 using consensual decision making skills
 keeping check of emotions when challenges arise, maintaining composure,
perceiving the emotional motivators that drive individuals and groups in the
workplace and engaging those motivators, where appropriate, to optimise
organisational performance
 using a variety of words and language structures to explain complex ideas to
different audiences
 interpreting and explaining complex, formal documents and assisting others to
 applying occupational health and safety, environmental and sustainability
strategies relevant to managing and working with others in a public sector
workplace
 the relationship between effective human resource functions and the attainment
of business unit objectives
 group processes and facilitation techniques
 team building strategies
 the organisation's career and human resource development strategies, programs
and plans
 conflict resolution strategies
 jurisdictional legislation applicable to management and human resource
management functions
 occupational health and safety issues relevant to managing and working with

others in a public sector workplace

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
 PSPETHC701A Lead and influence ethical practice in
the public sector
 PSPHR703A Provide leadership in strategic human
resource management
 PSPMNGT702A Influence and shape diversity
management
 PSPPOL701A Influence strategic policy
Framework)
 provision of strategic direction in a range of (2 or more)
carry out assessment  strategic planning guidelines
 relevant legislation, procedures and protocols
 workplace information such as mission, vision, goals etc
 case studies and scenarios to capture the range of situations
likely to be encountered when providing strategic direction
likely to be encountered when providing strategic direction,

 provision of strategic direction in a range of (2 or more)
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Best practice models may  state, national and international models

include:
Legislation,  Commonwealth and State/Territory legislation including

organisational policies equal employment opportunity and anti-discrimination law
and practices may  national and international codes of practice and standards
include:  environmental/sustainability standards
organisation's behaviour, actions, products and services,
such as:
 government
 Ministers
Strategic priorities may  objectives in key result areas identified through the
be: organisation's strategic planning process that have the
highest priority rating demanding immediate action
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Management.

PSPPM401B Design simple projects Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPM401B Design simple projects

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the planning and development of simple, generally low risk projects that may
be small scale and managed by one person or by a person with a small team. It includes
identifying project requirements, preparing a business case, preparing the project plan and
establishing project infrastructure. Contract management requirements are not included as this
aspect is addressed by units of competency within the Competency field of Procurement and
Contract Management.
In practice, project planning and development overlaps with other generalist and specialist
work activities such as applying government processes, using resources, developing work
plans, gathering information.
This unit, and unit PSPPM405A Administer simple projects, are mutually exclusive. One or
the other, but not both, may contribute to a qualification.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify project 1.1 A rationale for the project is outlined that identifies the purpose,
requirements outcomes and likely benefits for the user/s.
1.2 Stakeholders are identified and their input is obtained at the
planning stage to ensure the project proposal and its objectives
are required and achievable.
1.3 The project environment is assessed and environmental issues
are addressed in the project proposal.
1.4 Project parameters are determined and a project proposal is
completed to organisational standards and within guidelines.
1.5 The project proposal is structured so it is compatible with
organisational objectives and other organisational projects, and
is designed in accordance with the organisation's policies and
procedures and in consultation with specialists to meet
user/client requirements.
2. Prepare business 2.1 Research and analysis is undertaken to identify impacts and
case risks, constraining factors and alternate options.
2.2 Options and solutions are identified, advice is obtained and
recommendations are made in accordance with the strategic
direction of the organisation/work unit.
2.3 A report is prepared that demonstrates a business case for the
project in accordance with organisational requirements.
2.4 Approvals for the project proposal are obtained in accordance
with organisational policy and procedures.
3. Prepare project plan 3.1 Project scope is determined in terms of objectives, outcomes
and project deliverables.
3.2 Specialists are consulted where necessary, to advise on potential
risks, and options to manage risks are investigated and
recorded in the project plan.
3.3 Each of the parameters identified in the proposal are addressed
in the project plan in consultation with relevant parties and
appropriate approvals are sought and recorded.
3.4 Project management tools are utilised for planning in
accordance with project requirements.
3.5 Project outputs are determined that are measurable and
achievable and indicators to monitor the performance of the
project are developed, under guidance, and agreed by relevant
parties in accordance with organisational policy and procedures.
4. Establish project 4.1 An implementation strategy is developed in accordance with the
infrastructure project plan and organisational guidelines, and presented to
stakeholders to gain project support.
4.2 Terms of reference and project infrastructure requirements for


set-up and implementation of the project are clarified in the
implementation strategy in accordance with the project plan.
4.3 Resources are obtained to set up the project office, and roles and
responsibilities are assigned to team members and stakeholders
as agreed in the project plan.
4.4 Processes identified for monitoring, evaluating and reporting
performance against project objectives are established in
accordance with the project plan.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 detailing requirements, writing recommendations and preparing plans requiring
precision of expression
 negotiating timelines, roles and responsibilities with stakeholders or team
members
 communicating with stakeholders or team members using a range of
communication styles to suit different audiences and purposes
 using project management tools
 applying workplace safety procedures in line with project planning
requirements
 legislation, organisational policies and procedures that may impact on the
project and management of the project, for example:
 public sector codes of ethics/conduct
 occupational health and safety and environment requirements
 risk management
 financial management
 procurement
 human resources
 organisational project approval processes
 scheduling
 project planning methods for small scale or low risk projects
 project management tools to suit the projects planned
 principles relating to the planning phase of project management for small scale
or low risk projects

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
strategies
 PSPGOV416A Monitor performance and provide
feedback
 PSPLEGN401A Encourage compliance with legislation
 PSPOHS401B Implement workplace safety procedures
and programs
 PSPPROC409A Receive and select offers
 PSPPM403B Close simple projects
 Excluded units that may not contribute to the same
qualification as this unit:
 PSPPM405A Administer simple projects
Framework)

 design of simple projects in a range of (2 or more) contexts

carry out assessment  legislation, guidelines, procedures and protocols relating to
project management
 workplace project documentation
 scenarios and case studies
 documented information and/or examples of the assessee's
personal work
 project management tools
likely to be encountered when planning projects, including
routine
 design of simple projects in a range of (2 or more) contexts
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses


Range Statement
explained here.
Stakeholders may  project sponsor/funding bodies

include:  clients or customers (internal and external)
 industry
 other agencies
 general public
 relevant interest groups
 unions
 functional areas
 the organisation's senior management
 Ministers
 project team
 steering committee
 end user
 supplier/service provider
Project parameters  project scope - outcomes, objectives, project deliverables
include:  feasibility
 skills required for project team
 people required for project including specialist expertise
 communications including reporting requirements
 risks associated with project including people, environment,
resources, technology change during the life of the project,
if applicable
 steering committee arrangements
 timeframe and milestones
 cost
 resources for project
 acquisition/procurement
 organisational structure for project
 project quality control and operational flexibility
 project governance structure
 monitoring through staged rollout
 project delivery requirements
 pilot outcomes

 integration of project within organisation
 transition arrangements
 project evaluation
Policies and procedures  government legislation (Federal, State and Local) affecting
may include: organisation's administration such as:
 financial management and accounting legislation and
regulations
 government and organisational guidelines and procedures
relating to:
 project governance
 resourcing
 security
 strategic plans
 recruitment
 risk management
 procurement guidelines
 designation approvals
 industrial agreements
Specialists may include:  legal
 technical
 financial
 other functional areas
 other relevant agencies
 logistics
Constraining factors may  political
include:  industrial
 legislative
 technical
 financial
 resourcing
 social and cultural considerations
 cultural change management (internal)
 security/privacy
 environmental
 logistic support

Analysis report will  cost-benefit analysis

contain:
Approval may be required  project sponsor/funding body

from:  business owner of the project
 program manager
 line manager
 project governance office/personnel in the organisation
 chief executive officer, manager or management
representative
 customer or client
Project scope is defined  objectives - aims/goals for doing the project
by:  outcomes - measurable benefit achieved from the utilisation
of the outputs delivered by the project
 outputs/project deliverables - the services/products delivered
by the project
Options to manage risks  acceptance
may include:  avoidance
 minimisation
 transfer
 strategies
 flexibility
 empathy
 emotional intelligence
Project plan will include  acquisition strategies
some or all of:  budget and financial management strategy
 contract management
 cost estimates
 evaluation criteria
 expected outcomes/measurable benefits of the project
 facilities
 inclusions and exclusions from project
 information/communication strategy
 intellectual property strategies
 milestones
 objectives
 outputs/project deliverables and their acceptance criteria
 people plan including human resource management and
human resource development
 performance criteria/indicators

 project control mechanisms

 project implementation strategy
 project governance strategy
 purpose
 quality control
 quality standards for project
 rationale
 required project resources
 resource management
 risk management
 schedule/timeline
 task/work breakdown structure (WBS)
Project parameters  risk management
include:  schedule management
 communication, including reporting
 resources management
 logistics management
 scope management
 occupational health and safety management
Project management  risk analysis
tools may include:  organisational project governance framework
 communications plan
 reporting framework
 project management software and other tools:
 Gantt and bar charts
 Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT)
charts
 Critical Path Method
 cost schedule control system
 logistics support analysis
 life cycle cost analysis
 spreadsheets
 recording systems - electronic and manual

Project infrastructure  staffing levels/need for recruitment action and training

may include:  equipment and technical support
 resource requirements including travel, finance etc
 project office accommodation
 management infrastructure
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Project Management.

PSPPM402B Manage simple projects Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPM402B Manage simple projects

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers management of generally low risk projects that may be small scale and
managed by one person or a person with a small team. It includes implementing project
start-up activities, coordinating project implementation, monitoring the project and arranging
follow-up activities. Contract management requirements are not included as this aspect is
addressed by units of competency within the Competency field of Procurement and Contract
Management.
In practice, managing simple projects overlaps with other generalist and specialist work
activities such as applying government processes, using resources, gathering information,
managing contracts etc.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Implement start-up 1.1 The project plan is updated with confirmed information for key
activities dates and activities, resources and project governance details in
accordance with the project implementation strategy.
1.2 Project stakeholders' understanding of and agreement to fulfil
the project requirements and their roles and responsibilities are
confirmed.
1.3 Required systems are established and maintained throughout the
project in accordance with the project plan.
1.4 A working knowledge of project management tools is used to
facilitate integration of project activities and achievement of
project outcomes.
2. Coordinate project 2.1 Integration and management of project activities are handled
implementation in accordance with the project plan.
2.2 Stakeholder input and expectations are managed and their
commitment is maintained throughout the life of the project in
accordance with organisational policy and procedures and the
project plan.
2.3 Disagreements and disputes are resolved or referred to a higher
authority in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures.
2.4 Project change proposals are received and changes are
recommended/made in accordance with the project plan, and
documented in accordance with policy and procedures.
3. Monitor project 3.1 All aspects of the project are continually monitored and
corrective action is taken as necessary to maintain progress in
accordance with the project plan.
3.2 Consultation and reporting mechanisms are applied in
accordance with the communication plan when dealing with
management, staff and/or contractors, steering committee
members or other stakeholders.
3.3 Project governance plans and any related contracts are
monitored, reviewed and amended as appropriate, and results
are reported in accordance with the communication plan.
3.4 Project progress is monitored against agreed milestones in
accordance with the project plan to provide a measure of
performance throughout the life of the contract.
3.5 Programmed review of objectives and achievement is
implemented in accordance with the project plan.
4. Arrange project 4.1 Project deliverables are analysed against specifications,
follow-up activities performance standards and project objectives, under broad
guidance, and the results are reported to stakeholders.


4.2 An initial support package or product manual is produced, if
required, to provide guidance for stakeholders who will be
required to apply the project results.
4.3 The support package includes options for stakeholders to take
account of environmental and cultural factors in applying
project results.
4.4 Operational and support authorities are consulted to research
any testing/trialling/building requirements resulting from the
project, and evaluation of any recommendations are included in
the project report.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 leading and mentoring people to achieve project deliverables
 maintaining agreement of stakeholders and team members to timelines, roles
and responsibilities
 communicating with stakeholders and team members using a range of
 using project management tools applicable to small scale or low risk projects
 applying ethical decision making and problem solving related to project
management of small scale or low risk projects
 writing recommendations and preparing implementation support packages
requiring precision of expression
 applying workplace safety procedures in line with project requirements
 legislation, organisational policies and procedures that may impact on project
management, for example:
 project governance requirements
 risk management
 human resources
 project management tools to suit a range of small scale or low risk projects
 project management principles
 organisational and political context

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
strategies
 PSPPM403B Close simple projects
Framework)
 simple projects managed in a range of (3 or more) contexts
project management


 examples of project management tools
likely to be encountered when implementing projects,
 simple projects managed in a range of (3 or more) contexts
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.

 cost estimates
 facilities
 milestones
 objectives
 purpose
 quality control
 rationale
 risk management

 industry
 other agencies
 general public
 unions
 Ministers
 project team
 steering committee members
 end user
Required systems for  planning and monitoring system
project management may  financial management including:
include:  budget allocation/funding
 income generated
 expenditure
 recordkeeping for documented information such as:
 correspondence
 quality data including survey, needs, test results
 contracts
 time allocated and spent on each aspect of the project
 progress reports
 performance reports against milestones
 project outcomes
 samples, prototypes, models
charts
 spreadsheets


Integration of project  scope
activities may include:  time
 cost
 quality
 human resources
 communications
 risk
 procurement
Management may  scope management
include:  communication and reporting
 schedule management
 resources management
 logistics management
 risk management
Change proposals may  scope
include:  administration
 engineering, technical, technology changes
 time
 cost
 resources
Policy and procedures  government legislation (Federal, State and Local) affecting
regulations
relating to:
 resourcing
 security
 strategic plans
 recruitment

 risk management
Specifications may  functional
include:  technical
 performance
 material
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Project Management.

PSPPM403B Close simple projects Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPM403B Close simple projects

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers project evaluation and reporting for generally low risk projects that may be
small scale and managed by one person or a person with a small team. It includes
implementing project review activities and finalising projects. Contract management
requirements are not included as this aspect is addressed by units of competency within the
Competency field of Procurement and Contract Management.
In practice, closing simple projects may overlap with other generalist and specialist work
activities such as applying government processes, using resources, gathering information,
providing input to change, managing contracts etc.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Implement project 1.1 Evaluation of project process and achievement against
review activities objectives is undertaken in consultation with stakeholders and
results are reported in accordance with the project plan and
1.2 Action to rectify problems in meeting client needs is
recommended and documented.
1.3 Implications of project results for policies and operating
procedures are identified and recommendations are made for
their amendment.
1.4 Information obtained from the evaluation of the project is
structured so it may be used to improve relevant policy and
practice in accordance with organisational requirements.
2. Finalise project 2.1 Contracts are finalised and financial records are checked for
accuracy and completed in accordance with organisational
procedures.
2.2 Project wind-down is managed, documentation is completed,
records are archived and approvals are obtained in accordance
with the project plan and organisational policy and procedures.
2.3 Project stakeholders are debriefed, and recommendations are
made for redeployment of infrastructure/resources in
2.4 Project hand-over to user/s is completed in accordance with
organisational procedures and lessons learnt are documented
and reported to stakeholders to assist in continuous
improvement.
2.5 Stakeholders are advised of procedures and authorities for initial
support to implement project deliverables where relevant, and
strategies are devised to manage long-term project momentum
in accordance with organisational requirements.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 analysing results and evaluating results against objectives
 writing recommendations and preparing reports requiring precision of
expression
 communicating with stakeholders and team members using a range of
 debriefing project team members
 reporting on resource expenditure including time and costs
 using project management tools suited to small scale or low risk projects
 legislation, organisational policies and procedures that may impact on project
finalisation, for example:
 risk management
 human resource management and development
 project management tools to suit a range of small scale or low risk projects
 project management principles
 organisational and political environment

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
strategies
Framework)
 closure of simple projects in a range of (3 or more) contexts
project close-out


likely to be encountered when closing projects, including
routine
 closure of simple projects in a range of (3 or more) contexts
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.

 industry
 other agencies
 general public
 unions
 Ministers
 project team
 end user
 cost estimates
 facilities
 milestones
 objectives


 purpose
 quality control
 rationale
 risk management
regulations
relating to:
 resourcing
 security
 strategic plans
 recruitment
 risk management
Management of project  risks
wind-down may include:  issues
 assets
 consultants
 project team
 support staff
Documentation may  project completion report
include:  supplier performance reports
 whole-of-life support plans
 transfer documents

 financial reports and acquittals
Approvals may be  project sponsor/funding body

required from:  business owner of the project
 program manager
 line manager
 project governance office/personnel in the organisation
representative
 customer or client
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Project Management.

PSPPM504A Carry out complex project activities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the work activities required to carry out complex project activities or multiple
projects simultaneously. Typically this work is undertaken by project officers who are
required to work on projects for multiple clients, or all aspects of larger projects. They are
sometimes responsible for all the project deliverables, and at other times they work in teams
on aspects of a number of projects. Contract management requirements are not included, as
this aspect is addressed by units of competency within the Competency field of Procurement
and Contract Management.
The unit includes reviewing and confirming requirements of each project/activity, organising
and undertaking project activities, managing the progress of multiple projects/activities and
finalising projects/activities.
In practice, conducting complex project activities overlaps with other generalist and specialist
work activities such as acting ethically, coordinating resource allocation and usage,
developing client services, undertaking research and analysis.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Review and confirm 1.1 Limits of own responsibility and reporting requirements are
project requirements confirmed for each of the projects/project activities assigned.
1.2 Information and supporting materials for each project/project
activity are obtained in accordance with project requirements,
1.3 Project plans are analysed and requirements, timeframes, roles,
responsibilities and stakeholder involvement are confirmed for
each.
1.4 Project management procedures and controls are confirmed in
accordance with each project plan, and any required changes are
negotiated according to the project plan change management
strategy.
1.5 Project plans are updated with confirmed information for
milestones, resources, team members and steering committee
details.
2. Organise and 2.1 Personal work plans are prepared to assign activities,
undertake project timeframes and milestones for all projects/project activities to a
activities single planning management framework to meet the progress
requirements for each project/project activity.
2.2 Where project requirements cannot be accommodated and
clashes occur, negotiations are conducted with project managers
and/or supervisory staff to find a compromise satisfactory to all
stakeholders.
2.3 Project tasks are accomplished in accordance with project plans
and any changes are managed in accordance with the approved
project change strategy.
2.4 Project data is captured and recorded in accordance with
project requirements.
2.5 Specialist advice and support are provided to project managers,
steering committees and stakeholders as required to achieve
project objectives.
3. Manage progress of 3.1 Project management tools are used for integration and timing
multiple of project activities and achievement of project outcomes.
projects/activities 3.2 Risks to progress and achievement of project objectives are
anticipated and reported to project management for action in
accordance with risk management plans.
3.3 Completion of project activities and progress against targets and
milestones are monitored and corrective action is taken if
needed, in accordance with project plans and in consultation
with project managers.
3.4 Problem solving to find innovative solutions to project


problems or unplanned-for contingencies is undertaken in
consultation with project management.
3.5 Progress reports are provided as required by project
communication plans.
4. Finalise project 4.1 Project deliverables for each project/activity are completed to
activities the required standard in the required timeframes.
4.2 Recordkeeping associated with each project is completed as
required by project plans.
4.3 Project processes are evaluated, issues identified and
recommendations made for continuous improvement of
projects/activities.
4.4 Project reports are prepared containing required information
completed to the required standard using agreed style, voice and
formats.
4.5 Project hand-overs of deliverables and return of
borrowed/unused materials are completed in accordance with
project plans and organisational procedures.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 managing the logistics of dealing with multiple projects/activities, masters and
milestones
 managing self, time and costs
 using project management tools
 negotiating changes to timelines, roles and responsibilities
 communicating with project managers and other stakeholders using a range of
 recording information, writing recommendations and preparing reports
requiring complex language structures and precision of expression
 legislation, organisational policies and procedures that may impact on projects
and management of the projects, for example:
 occupational health and safety and environmental and sustainaibilty
standards
 risk management
 procurement
 human resources
 principles of project management
 project management tools to suit the combination of projects/activities carried
out
 risk management strategies for carrying out multiple projects

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
service
strategies
 PSPPROC501A Manage contract risk
 PSPPROC502A Establish contract management
arrangements
 PSPPROC503A Manage contract performance
Framework)
 complex project activities carried out in a range of (3 or
project management


likely to be encountered when conducting multiple project
activities, including coping with difficulties, irregularities
 complex project activities carried out in a range of (3 or
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
regulations
relating to:
 resourcing
 security
 strategic plans
 recruitment
 risk management
 environmental and sustainability standards
Project plans will include  acquisition strategies
 cost estimates
 facilities
 milestones
 objectives
 occupational health and safety plan


 purpose
 quality control
 rationale
 risk management
Stakeholders may include  project sponsor/funding bodies
 clients or customers (internal and external)
 industry
 other agencies
 general public
 unions
 Ministers
 project team
 end user
Project data may include  research data
 quality data including trials or test results
 draft materials
 samples, prototypes, models
 project outcomes
 record of time spent on project and progress in completing
project
 correspondence
 financial data including costs, expenditure, income

generated, purchases
charts
 spreadsheets
Risk management may  removing the risk
include:  transferring the risk
 minimising the risk
 accepting the risk
 preparing a contingency plan
 keeping reserves
Consultation with project  steering committees
managers may also  project sponsors
include:  business owners of the projects
 program managers
 specialist project management office
representative
 funding body representatives
 customers or clients
Solutions to problems  reducing costs
may include:  researching and applying more efficient methods of
completing project tasks
 seeking further resources to meet deadline
 negotiating an extension of deadline or redefining
completion or quantities or quality of outcomes
 sharing of ideas to gain improvements to work undertaken
within the project
 outsourcing aspects of the project
 changing roles and responsibilities within project team

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Project Management.

PSPPOL404A Support policy implementation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPOL404A Support policy implementation

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the identification and application of policy in a public sector work
environment. It includes identifying relevant policy, implementing policy, and monitoring and
reporting on policy implementation.
In practice, supporting policy implementation occurs in the context of other generalist or
specialist work activities such as delivering client services, providing input to change,
implementing workplace safety procedures, awarding contracts.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify relevant 1.1 Work situations that are shaped by government or organisation
policy policy are identified in accordance with public sector
guidelines.
1.2 Policy relating to particular work situations is identified and
located.
2. Implement policy 2.1 Policy to be implemented is interpreted under direction to
identify and plan for change in work practices.
2.2 The implications of policy for individual work practices are
identified, and practices are confirmed/adjusted to reflect policy
requirements in accordance with organisational procedures.
2.3 Others affected by policy requirements are supported to
accommodate those requirements.
2.4 Policy is implemented to support achievement of outcomes
intended in specific work areas.
3. Monitor and report 3.1 Information that will assist with the evaluation of the
on policy effectiveness of policy implementation is gathered, recorded
implementation and reported under direction in accordance with organisational
procedures.
3.2 Information that will assist with the evaluation of the impact of
policy implementation on organisational outcomes is gathered,
recorded and reported under direction in accordance with


this unit.
Skill requirements
 reading complex and formal documents such as policy and legislation and
providing information on their application
 researching and providing information
 preparing written reports requiring accuracy of expression and language and
structures suited to the intended audience
 working with legislation drafters and legal advisers
 writing guidelines in plain English
 working as a member of a team to consult on and prepare policy guidelines
 gathering and analysing policy feedback
 accessing policies and legislation electronically or in hard copy
 identifying and addressing the environmental and occupational health and safety
implications of policy/s being implemented
 practices and procedures for developing policy guidelines
 policy feedback mechanisms
 current organisation policies
 whole of government policies and international policy obligations that impact
on organisation policy
 organisation and government procedures and protocols
 public sector code/s of ethics and code/s of conduct
 environmental and occupational health and safety implications of policy/s being
implemented

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
process include, but are not limited to, public sector
generalist and specialist units in the Certificate IV in
Government.
Choice from the following is recommended:
 PSPREG407B Produce formal record of interview
 PSPREG410B Give evidence
 PSPPROC409A Receive and select offers
Framework)
 policy implementation supported in a range of (2 or more)
carry out assessment  relevant policy and legislation
 public sector standards, procedures and protocols
 policy guidelines
likely to be encountered when supporting policy
implementation, including coping with difficulties,


 policy implementation supported in a range of (2 or more)
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Work situations may  processes

include:  outcomes
 priorities
 client services
 core business
 service delivery mode/s
 organisational structure
Policy may include:  government policy
 organisation policy
Information for  statistical data
evaluation may include:  qualitative data
 anecdotal feedback
 survey data
 stakeholder opinions
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Policy.

PSPPOL602A Provide policy advice Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the provision of policy advice to policy developers, internal policy staff,
other staff, and for external queries from the government, Ministers, other public sector
organisations, the public, etc. It includes interpreting and advising on public policy, and
providing input to policy evaluation and review.
In practice, the provision of policy advice may overlap with other generalist and specialist
work activities such as managing change, managing diversity, managing workplace safety,
managing the delivery of client services, managing risk, directing the management of
contracts.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Interpret and advise 1.1 Policy is analysed and interpretations on its intent and
on public policy implications are provided in accordance with organisational
procedures.
1.2 Interpretive advice is provided on the relevant acts, regulations,
procedures, codes of practice, standards and guidelines related
to policy, in accordance with organisational procedures.
1.3 Written interpretations are provided, supported by defensible
evidence and reflect consideration of their intended use and
consequences in accordance with legislative requirements.
1.4 Policy advice is communicated in a manner that addresses the
requirements of users.
1.5 Policy questions referred by policy staff are resolved or
consultative mechanisms are used to gain additional
clarification or opinions.
2. Provide input to 2.1 Policy feedback data is captured and analysed to identify
policy evaluation and strengths, weaknesses, and any implementation issues in
review accordance with organisational requirements.
2.2 Both planned and unintentional outcomes of policy
implementation are analysed and feedback is provided against
the evaluation criteria in the policy implementation plan.
2.3 A comparison of the intended versus actual outcomes of policy
implementation is prepared and provided in accordance with
2.4 The internal and external environments are monitored for policy
implications, and strategies are prepared to respond to potential
or impending policy changes in accordance with organisational
requirements.
2.5 Recommendations for continuous improvement, termination or
succession of policies are prepared in accordance with


this unit.
Skill requirements
 reading and evaluating complex and formal documents such as policy and
legislation
 researching, analysing and presenting information
 preparing written reports requiring precision of expression and language and
structures suited to the intended audience
 working as a member of an inter-agency team to consult on and validate policy
 dealing with different points of view and dissenting stakeholders
 accessing policies and legislation electronically or in hard copy
implications of policy/s being developed
 policy development processes and practices in the public sector
 current policies underpinning the work area
 government procedures and protocols
 principles of community engagement in policy development
developed

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
 PSPPROC602B Direct the management of contracts
Framework)
 provision of policy advice in a range of (3 or more) contexts
carry out assessment  public sector policy and legislation
 precedents for policy interpretation
 policy evaluation guidelines
likely to be encountered when advising on policy, including
routine
 provision of policy advice in a range of (3 or more) contexts


backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Policy may include:  public policy

 public sector policy
 central agency policy
 organisation policy relevant to any aspect of an
organisation's business, such as policies relating to:
 core business
 client services
 business structure
 human resources
 administration
 work practices
 training
 information technology
 technical/professional requirements
 legal requirements
Policy advice may be  government
provided to:  Ministers
 community groups
 the public
 policy developers
 internal policy staff
 other staff
Consultative mechanisms  discussion with other policy managers
may include:  seeking clarification from the policy developer
 seeking legal opinion
 workplace consultative committees
Policy changes may be  machinery of government changes
caused by:  a shift to designing policy around a set of government
priorities not organisational structures/individual agencies
 a focus on whole of government policies

 changes to legal risks

 emphasis on policy research focused on the mid to long
term, as well as that developed to meet immediate needs of
government
 national or international events such as:
 change in government
 changes in government policy
 changes in strategic direction
 changes in legislation
 changes in the policies of other governments
 changing social trends
 economic/technological change
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Policy.

PSPPOL603A Manage policy implementation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the interpretation of policy and the management of the policy implementation
process. It includes interpreting and communicating the requirements of policy, and policy
implementation.
In practice, the management of policy implementation occurs in the context of other generalist
and specialist work activities such as managing change, managing diversity, managing
workplace safety, managing the delivery of client services, managing risk, directing the
management of contracts.
of publication

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Interpret and 1.1 The expected outcomes of policy implementation are identified
communicate and explained to staff in a manner suited to their levels of
requirements of understanding, experience and specific needs.
policy 1.2 Policy is interpreted relative to workplace responsibilities and
accountabilities.
1.3 The impact on work activities of policy implementation is
communicated to staff.
1.4 Staff are assisted with the interpretation of policy and its
application to their work.
1.5 Policy and its implications are explained to other stakeholders
using language and materials to suit their current level of
knowledge, experience and specific needs.
2. Implement policy 2.1 Potential or impending policy changes are identified and
strategies are prepared to accommodate and communicate those
changes
2.2 Work plans are prepared in consultation with staff and
management to ensure that policy is implemented as intended.
2.3 Staff performance is monitored to ensure that it complies with
policy and corrective action is taken as necessary.
2.4 Staff are assisted in adjusting to changes in accordance with
their needs and experience.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 interpreting complex and formal documents such as policy and legislation, and
assisting others to apply them in the workplace
 using communication to suit different audiences
 accessing legislation and codes of ethics electronically or in hard copy
 preparing work plans requiring attention to detail and the interpretation and
application of complex language and/or concepts
 providing leadership to the workgroup in the interpretation and implementation
of policy
implications of the policy/s to be implemented
 range and type of policies relating to the public sector
 organisation and government procedures
implemented

Evidence Guide
Package.
Units to be assessed  Pre -requisite units that must be achieved prior to this
together unit:Nil
 Co -requisite units that must be assessed with this unit:Nil
 Co -assessed units that may be assessed with this unit to
 PSPPROC602B Direct the management of contracts
Framework)
 management of policy implementation in a range of (2 or
carry out assessment  relevant policy and legislation
 policy guidelines
likely to be encountered when managing the implementation
of policy, including coping with difficulties, irregularities
 management of policy implementation in a range of (2 or


backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Specific needs may  educational level

include:  preferred language
 literacy or numeracy
 cultural background
 ethnicity
 gender
 preferred interpersonal approach
 physical ability
 thinking/learning styles
 work experience
 working styles
Policy may include:  government policy
 organisation policy
Work activities may  processes
include:  outcomes
 priorities
 client services
 core business
 service delivery mode/s
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Policy.

PSPPROC303A Carry out basic procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
3 PSP12V1 Layout adjusted. No changes

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the expenditure of public monies for simple purchasing that requires simple
and routine purchasing tasks to be undertaken under supervision. Goods and services are of
low value or low risk, and purchasing is in accordance with government policy, public
accountability requirements and organisational procedures. The unit includes planning for and
undertaking procurement, and receiving goods and services.
In practice, undertaking basic procurement may overlap with other generalist or specialist
work activities, such as working effectively in the organisation, upholding the values of public
service or local government, complying with legislation, and using resources and financial
systems.
of endorsement.

This unit applies to those who undertake purchasing as part of their role, whether as an
initiator of a purchase or as an approver. This unit may not be appropriate for those who have
a significant role in procurement.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.


range statement. Assessment of performance is to be


1. Plan for basic 1.1. Delegation/limit of authority for basic procurement
procurement of of goods or services is confirmed.
goods or services 1.2. Procurement requirements are researched, confirmed
and clarified as necessary with relevant personnel.
1.3. Most suitable option for acquiring goods or services
is determined in accordance with legislation, policy and
procedures, and value for money considerations.
1.4. Approval processes for procurement options are
identified.
1.5. Risk planning is conducted for the procurement
activity in accordance with procedures, delegation and
guidelines.
2. Undertake 2.1. Approvals are obtained as necessary for procurement
procurement of goods or services in accordance with organisational
2.2. Quotations are obtained if necessary in accordance
with legislation, policy and procedures, and any conflict
of interest is declared and resolved in accordance with
2.3. Suppliers or service providers are assessed and
selected on the basis of best value for money.
2.4. Procurement is initiated or orders are placed in
accordance with selected procurement option.
2.5. Procurement is conducted in accordance with the
organisation's probity and governance requirements.
2.6. Procurement is conducted in line with the
organisation's financial management system.
3. Receive goods or 3.1. Goods are received or provision of services is
services accepted in accordance with procurement requirements.
3.2. Quality assurance processes are implemented to
ensure goods or services meet procurement
specifications and outcomes required.
3.3. Action is taken to resolve non-compliance with
specifications within limits of own authority, or is
referred according to organisational policy and
procedures.
3.4. Receipt of goods or services is confirmed and
accounts are processed for payment according to
3.5. Records are maintained and reporting obligations are
met according to organisational and legal requirements

to provide an audit trail and for other organisational

purposes.


Required skills
 write and communicate procurement requirements in unambiguous terms
 consult and negotiate with providers
 provide feedback
 teamwork skills to:
 work independently or under direction as appropriate to the situation
 respond to diversity
 refer issues to the correct person
 assess procurement options and select the most suitable option
 assess goods and services against specifications
 initiative and enterprise skills to apply OHS and environmental requirements to
basic procurement requirements
 planning and organising skills to apply risk-management processes
 self-management skills to apply codes of conduct, codes of practice and
standards of individual behaviour
 learning skills to keep up-to-date with relevant procurement legislation, policies
and procedures
 technology skills to:
 operate organisational IT systems
 use electronic procurement templates
Required knowledge
 commonwealth, state or territory, and local government procurement
guidelines, including environmental purchasing guidelines
 organisation's code of conduct, codes of practice and standards of individual
behaviour relating to procurement of goods and services, in particular
identifying and managing conflict of interest, gifts and inappropriate
relationships with providers
 procurement options and methods
 probity and ethical issues
 procedures for receipt and payment of goods or services, including credit card
procedures
 procurement approval procedures
 financial and government accountability requirements
 public sector legislation and guidelines, including OHS and environment


Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated by undertaking basic

procurement of goods or services consistently in accordance with
legislative and organisational requirements.
Critical aspects for Assessment must confirm the ability to:

assessment and evidence  produce a procurement plan appropriate to the scale,
required to demonstrate complexity and risk of the procurement
competency in this unit
 implement the procurement plan in a way that reflects
organisational policies and approaches
 use relevant template documents
 accept delivered goods and services into use
 operate within own delegations and seek advice when
appropriate
 keep records of procurement activities.
Consistency in performance
Competency should be demonstrated by providing evidence of
undertaking a range of relevant work tasks in an actual or
simulated procurement environment on at least three separate
occasions.
Context of and specific The unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace or a

resources for assessment simulated workplace environment.
 legislation, policy, procedures and protocols relating to
basic procurement of goods and services
 codes of conduct and codes of practice
 workplace scenarios and case studies relating to a range of
basic procurement activities
 case studies that incorporate dilemmas, and probity
requirements relating to basic procurement of goods and
services.
Method of assessment The following assessment methods are suggested:
 questions to assess understanding of relevant legislation
and procedures
 review of strategies selected for basic procurement
 review of basic procurement plans, requests for quotation,
quotation evaluation plans, selection reports, credit card

purchase documents, approvals obtained, simple budgets,

invoices paid, other financial documents and other
documentation prepared by the candidate in a range of
contexts
 feedback from peers or supervisors on actions taken to
monitor and review contract performance
In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by
questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of
competency which are difficult to assess directly. Questioning
techniques should suit the language and literacy levels of the
candidate.
Guidance information for Evidence must be gathered over time in a range of contexts to
Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry
sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for example:
 PSPETHC301B Uphold the values and principles of
public service
 PSPGOV301B Work effectively in the organisation
 PSPGOV305B Access and use resources and financial
systems
 PSPGOV309A Address client needs
 PSPLEGN301B Comply with legislation in the public
sector

Range Statement
Delegation/limit of  low value or low risk procurement

authority may include:  one-off purchases
 expenditure approval limits
 approval processes
 procurement decision making
Relevant personnel may  internal user of procured goods or services
include:  supervisor
 specialist procurement personnel
 supplier
Options for acquiring  purchasing off an existing contract, standing offer or
goods or services may multi-use list
include:  government credit card transactions
 direct purchase from retail or wholesale outlets
 petty cash
 standard electronic commerce or online transactions
Risk planning may  stakeholder consultation
include:  confirmation that a procurement process is
necessary
 confirmation that funds are available
 confirmation that required approvals have been
obtained
Best value for money  availability
includes:  ease of disposal
 price
 through life support
 warranty
 quality and suitability of product
Financial management  procurement and contracts' register
system may include:  delegations and authorities
 record keeping
 receiving and accepting deliverables

 payment approval process

 credit card process
Confirmation may  verbal and written
include:  internal and external
 to users
 to management.
Records may include:  purchase requests and orders
 invoices and payment requests
 statements and petty cash vouchers
 records of authorised decisions
 corporate credit card transaction statements
 records of supplier performance
 financial statements
 asset registers
 actions taken to manage identified conflict of
interest
 records of conversation
 procurement reporting
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Procurement and Contract Management.

PSPPROC405C Dispose of assets Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the disposal of assets effectively, and focuses on gaining a return from sales.
It includes identifying assets for disposal, developing and implementing an asset disposal
strategy, and evaluating asset disposal.
In practice, disposing of assets overlaps with other generalist and specialist public sector work
activities, such as upholding and supporting the values and principles of public service or
local government, identifying and treating risks, exercising delegations, applying government
processes, encouraging compliance with legislation in the public sector or local government,
planning procurement, developing and distributing requests for offers, selecting providers and
managing contracts.
of endorsement.

This unit applies to people who may have to organise or carry out the disposal of assets as
part of their role.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Identify assets for 1.1. Assets are identified for disposal in accordance with
disposal. legislation, policy and organisational needs.
2. Develop a strategy 2.1. Potential market value of assets is determined in
for the disposal of accordance with policy, practice and public sector
assets. standards.
2.2. Case for expending resources to add value to assets
prior to sale is evaluated and decisions are made
according to organisational policy and procedures.
2.3. Options for disposal are investigated and the method
providing maximum return is determined in the context
of policy, probity requirements and desired outcomes.
2.4. Disposal requirements for special categories of
assets are taken into account, including environmental
and corporate social responsibility issues.
2.5. Stakeholders are consulted about disposal strategy
and their feedback is incorporated.
3. Implement a 3.1. Goods are written off and disposed of according to
disposal strategy. approved disposal plan, policy, probity requirements and
organisational/industry practice.
3.2. Records of disposal activity are maintained for audit
and evaluation purposes according to policy and
practice.
4. Evaluate asset 4.1. Disposal of assets is evaluated against expected
disposal. outcomes, including forecast market value of assets, and
is documented according to policy and guidelines.


Required skills
 prepare documentation and audit trail for disposed assets
 communicate and network with a range of audiences, such as clients,
suppliers, stakeholders and end users
 model team leadership approaches if appropriate
 read complex, formal documents, such as legislation and guidelines and
apply them to asset disposal
 make judgements to provide maximum return from asset disposal
 planning and organising skills to:
 manage projects relating to asset disposal
 manage financial and other resources in the context of asset disposal
 research information about asset disposal
 apply workplace safety and environmental and sustainability procedures in
the context of asset disposal
 apply probity requirements in relation to the disposal of assets
and procedures
Required knowledge
 commonwealth, state or territory, and local government procurement guidelines
 requirements of financial rules and regulations relating to asset disposal
 legal aspects of disposals
 disposal approval processes
 implications of particular contracting agreements for asset disposal
 implications of asset disposal for whole-of-life considerations
 options for government disposal

 risk management procedures for disposal of assets

 disposal requirements for special categories of assets
 probity principles and issues
 codes of conduct, codes of practice and standards of individual behaviour
relating to disposal of assets
 legislation, policy and procedures relating to asset disposal, including
occupational OHS, environmental, sustainability and corporate social
responsibility considerations

Evidence Guide
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to dispose

of assets consistently and in accordance with legislative

assessment and evidence  use different methods to identify assets for disposal
required to demonstrate
competency in this unit  develop a strategy for the disposal of assets that
considers all relevant disposal options
 develop a disposal strategy, which may be from a
template
 implement a disposal strategy
 review the disposal activity and make
recommendations about improvements that could be
implemented in future disposals
 act within own delegations and refer issues to
higher authority when necessary.
Competency should be demonstrated by providing
evidence of undertaking a range of relevant work tasks in
an actual or simulated procurement environment on at least
two separate occasions.
Context of and specific The unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace

resources for assessment or a simulated workplace environment.
 legislation, policy, procedures and protocols
relating to disposing of assets
 workplace scenarios and case studies relating to a
range of procurement activities associated with
disposal of assets
requirements relating to disposal of assets.
 questions to assess understanding of relevant
legislation and procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for

disposal of assets
 review of disposal plans, plans for disposing of
specific classes of assets, budgets, contracts, risk
assessments and other documentation prepared by
the candidate in a range of contexts
 review of stakeholder engagement approaches
adopted by the candidate.
questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those
aspects of competency which are difficult to assess
directly. Questioning techniques should suit the language
and literacy levels of the candidate.
Guidance information Evidence must be gathered over time in a range of contexts

for assessment to ensure the person can achieve the unit outcome and
apply the competency in different situations or
environments.
sector, workplace and job role is recommended, for
example:
 PSPGOV421A Exercise delegations
 PSPPROC411A Plan procurement
 PSPPROC412A Develop and distribute requests for
offers
 PSPPROC413A Select providers and develop contracts
 PSPPROC414A Manage contracts.

Range Statement
Legislation and policies  Commonwealth or state and territory legislation,

may include: including legislation that may apply specifically to
disposal activities, such as environmental, hazardous
materials, cultural and heritage
 council rules and by-laws
 organisational policies and practices
 probity guidelines
Options for disposal may  controlled reclamation
include:  public sale
 auction
 tenders
 private treaty
 trade-in
 pre-priced sales
 transfer to another government organisation
 agents and brokers
 conversion to training aids
 destruction
 transfer to museums
 donation
Special categories of  reusable and recyclable items
assets may include:  information technology equipment
 vehicles
 heritage and cultural interest items
 arms and controlled defence and related goods
 security classified material
 staff housing
 stores located overseas
 buildings for removal
 goods and services forfeited to the government
 dangerous goods and hazardous materials

Stakeholders may  end users, customers or clients, and sponsors

include:  current or potential providers or suppliers
 technical or functional experts or advisers
 commonwealth, state or territory, and local
government departments
 own organisation
 employees, unions and staff associations
 industry bodies
 local communities
 lobby groups
 special user groups
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC411A Plan procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to plan, justify and approve of procurement requirements to
achieve the required outcome. It includes defining and justifying the need, researching
potential impact and risks, and securing organisational support to proceed with procurement
activity.
In practice, planning procurement overlaps with other generalist and specialist public sector
and local government work activities, such as upholding and supporting the values and
principles of public service, identifying and treating risks, exercising delegations, applying
government processes, encouraging compliance with legislation in the public sector or local
government, developing and distributing requests for offers, selecting providers and managing
contracts.
of endorsement.

The unit applies to those who plan for procurement, including those who specialise in
procurement.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Interpret 1.1. Consultation is undertaken with stakeholders to
procurement determine whether viable alternatives to procurement
requirements exist that address identified business need, to define and
clarify requirements, and to justify the procurement
decision.
1.2. Scoping of procurement requirements is conducted
identifying outcomes, objectives and logistics/supply
chain factors.
1.3. Market analysis is conducted to identify factors that
may impact on procurement decisions.
1.4. Procurement approvals and appropriations are
confirmed for whole-of-life of the activity.
1.5. Information on sources of supply is accessed to
determine possible providers and any conflict of interest
is identified and resolved.
1.6. Planned provider contract arrangements are
specified in accordance with legislation, policy and
probity requirements.
1.7. Issues and opportunities are investigated for
integration into procurement activity.
2. Plan procurement 2.1. Procurement requirement that meets legislative,
activities policy and probity requirements is outlined from
transition to close-out.
2.2. Opportunities to obtain stakeholder input at all
stages of the procurement process are actively planned.
2.3. Resource requirements are confirmed and
committed in a timely manner and responsible
authorities are nominated.
2.4. Strategies for briefing potential bidders are included
when required, are practical and meet probity
requirements of fairness and impartiality, public sector
standards and organisational protocols.
2.5. Consideration is given to environmental and
sustainability practices along with corporate social
responsibility practices at all stages of the procurement
process.
3. Develop 3.1. Procurement approval documentation and
procurement plans procurement plan are developed and approved which
contain relevant detail about the procurement process
and desired business outcomes, according to
organisational policy and public sector standards.

3.2. Stakeholder input is sought at all stages during the

development of the procurement plan.
3.3. Probity risks in the procurement process are
expressly considered during the development of the
procurement plan.
3.4. Approved procurement plan or strategy is
communicated to stakeholders.


Required skills
 consult with stakeholders, involving complex oral and written exchanges of
information
 write a procurement requirement, which may require complex style and
language expressed in unambiguous terms
 undertake analysis of issues relating to procurement need
 make comparisons, justify a point of view and provide supporting evidence
 initiative and enterprise skills to apply OHS, environmental, sustainability and
corporate social responsibility practices in the context of developing requests
for offers
 research issues relating to procurement need
 plan issues relating to procurement need
and procedures
Required knowledge
 commonwealth, state or territory, and local government legislation, policies,
practices and guidelines:
 relating to contract management, including environmental purchasing and
corporate social responsibility guidance
 such as OHS and equity and diversity
 organisational procurement policies, practices and approval processes
relating to procurement
 life cycle costs

 technical knowledge or subject matter expertise in the goods or services being
procured
 aspects of law of contract, laws of tort, trade practices law, commercial law and
other legislation relating to receipt and evaluation of offers, negotiation and
award of contracts

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to plan

procurement consistently in accordance with legislative and

assessment and evidence  consult with a wide range of stakeholders in order to
required to demonstrate identify, confirm and clarify procurement requirements
 undertake market research
 develop business case, using templates if available
 develop a procurement plan, using templates if available
 act within own delegations and refer issues to higher
authority when necessary.
simulated procurement environment on at least two separate
occasions.

procuring goods and services
 workplace scenarios and case studies relating to a range
of procurement activities
requirements relating to planning procurement of goods
and services.
and procedures
 review of strategies selected for procurement planning
 review of business cases, budgets, procurement plans,
risk assessments, procurement approvals and other
documentation prepared or obtained by the candidate in a
range of contexts

 review of stakeholder engagement approaches adopted by

the candidate.
candidate.
 PSPPROC412A Develop and distribute requests for
offers
 PSPPROC413A Select providers and develop contracts.

Range Statement
work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised wording,
if used in the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that
may be present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of
the candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may
also be included.

 commonwealth, state or territory, and local government
 the organisation
 industry bodies
 lobby groups and special user groups
 experts, including financial, legal, technical, commercial
and probity.
Market analysis may  structure of market
include:  'players' in the market
 market capability
 market maturity
 market strength
 factors or conditions that may affect supply
 supplier positioning and referencing
 supplier viability analysis
 potential impact of intended contracting activity.
Procurement approvals  ministerial authorisation
and appropriations  compliance with instructions or finance circulars
may require:  CEO or board authorisation
 confirmation by chief financial officer
 delegate approval
 budget approval
 business case approval
 special consideration if they concern:
 long-term travel deals
 long-term computer deals
 long-term lease deals

 issuing indemnities.
Information on  Yellow Pages
sources of supply may  buyers guides, supplier brochures and advertisements
include:  purchasing contract awareness service
 suppliers' previous histories and files
 peer, supplier and customer networks
 computer-aided purchase of computers
 newspapers, journals, bulletins or directories
 government gazettal notices
 internet.
Legislation, policy and  commonwealth or state and territory legislation
probity requirements  equal employment opportunity and anti-discrimination
may include: law
 commonwealth, and state or territory government
procurement guidelines
 probity guidelines
 codes of conduct, codes of practice and standards of
individual behaviour relating to procurement
 security and confidentiality
 risk management
 environmental, sustainability and corporate social
responsibility principles.
Issues and  risk sharing
opportunities may  cost sharing
include:  cost escalation
 intellectual property rights
 knowledge management
 corporate knowledge
 libraries and archives
 capital equipment and asset ownership
 value engineering
 value management
 innovation
 continuous improvement
 future organisational requirements
 quality
 organisational integration and cooperation.

Resource requirements  facilities

may include:  information technology
 personnel
 budget support equipment
 use of contractor staff
 professional service providers
 risk assessment.
Procurement approval  business case
documentation may  justifications
include:  delegate submissions.
Procurement plan may  formal documented procurement plan, either using an
include: organisational template or not using a template
 procurement strategy
 acquisition strategy
 leasing strategy.
Probity risks may  corruption
include:  fraud
 conflict of interest (actual, perceived or potential)
 unfair treatment of providers or potential providers
 misuse of resources
 misuse of information
 manipulation of the marketplace.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC412A Develop and distribute requests for offers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competencies required to develop and disseminate a request for offers to
fulfil procurement requirements. It includes specifying the requirement, developing the formal
request for offer documents and developing the offer evaluation plan.
In practice, developing and distributing requests for offers overlaps with other generalist and
specialist public sector and local government work activities, such as upholding and
supporting the values and principles of public service, identifying and treating risks,
exercising delegations, applying government processes, encouraging compliance with
legislation in the public sector or local government, planning procurement, selecting providers
and managing contracts.
of endorsement.

The unit applies to those who plan, prepare and develop formal requests for offers, including
those who specialise in procurement.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Specify 1.1. Scoping of requirement is undertaken to identify
procurement outcomes, objectives and practical requirements.
requirement. 1.2. Statement of requirement is prepared that meets
organisational requirements for format and content and
is acceptable to stakeholders.
1.3. Needs of clients, end users and other stakeholders
are considered and incorporated into statement of
requirement.
1.4. Procurement outcome is fair to, and achievable by,
potential providers.
1.5. Planned provider contract arrangements are specified
according to policy and guidelines.
1.6. Standards of performance and codes of practice,
incentives, disincentives and performance measures are
specified.
2. Develop request for 2.1. Request for offers and contractual conditions
offers. suitable for procurement activity are developed and
clarified with clients, providers and/or experts as
necessary.
2.2. Contractual conditions suitable for procurement
activity are developed and clarified with clients,
providers and/or experts as necessary.
2.3. When possible and appropriate, input on content of
request for offer documents and proposed contractual
conditions is obtained from market according to probity
requirement of impartiality.
2.4. Approvals to approach marketplace are obtained
2.5. Records relating to documenting request, and
seeking, processing and closing offers, are maintained
according to organisational procedures and legal
requirements.
3. Develop offer 3.1. Offer evaluation plan, including criteria for
evaluation plan. evaluation, is developed, documented and approved
prior to releasing formal request documentation to the
market.
3.2. Where used, specialist expertise is arranged to
evaluate offers and the structure and membership of
evaluation panel.
3.3. Offer evaluation plan complies with probity
requirements, in particular impartiality and management

of conflict of interest.
4. Manage distribution 4.1. Request for offers is disseminated according to
and receipt of organisational procedures and guidelines, and public
offers. sector standards.
4.2. Briefings and clarification of information in the
request for offer are undertaken as required according to
procurement plan, organisational procedures and
guidelines, public sector standards and probity
requirements of fairness and impartiality.
4.3. Offers are received according to organisational
procedures and guidelines, and public sector standards.
4.4. Requests for offers and closing offers are
disseminated in line with probity issues.
4.5. Late offers and non-conforming bids are dealt with
according to procurement plan and request for offer
documentation.


Required skills
 consult with stakeholders, specialists and providers involving complex oral
and written exchanges of information
 read complex documents, such as contracts, legislation and guidelines
 write requests for offers, which may include complex style and language
expressed in unambiguous terms
 apply probity requirements in specifying and developing requests for offers,
providing briefings and information, and receiving offers
 apply OHS requirements (where safety or security may be an issue) when
developing requests for offers
 initiative and enterprise skills to:
 apply the content of complex documents, such as contracts, legislation and
guidelines
 apply OHS, environmental, sustainability and corporate social responsibility
practices in the context of developing requests for offers
 planning and organising skills to manage the release of documents to
stakeholders
and procedures
Required knowledge
 relating to requests for offers, including environmental purchasing and


relating to developing and receiving requests for offers
 issues to be considered when developing requests for offers, including things
like buying locally, and open or restricted opportunities to tender
other legislation relating to requests for offers

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the development and

distribution of requests for offers; performed consistently and in
accordance with legislative and organisational requirements.

assessment and evidence  consult with stakeholders to develop a specification suited
required to demonstrate to the particular procurement being completed
 develop request for offer documentation, using templates
where available
 develop offer evaluation plans with suitable evaluation
criteria and evaluation process, using templates where
available
 manage the release of requests for offers to industry
 manage the receipt of responses from industry
 apply probity principles relevant to this stage of the
procurement process
occasions.

procurement of goods and services
procurement activities associated with developing and
distributing requests for offers
requirements relating to developing and distributing
requests for offers
and procedures

 review of strategies and approaches adopted for developing

and distributing requests for offers
 review of requests for offers (including specifications),
offer evaluation plans, industry briefs, risk assessments and
other documentation prepared by the candidate in a range
of contexts
 review of stakeholder engagement strategies used by the
candidate.
In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by questions
to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of
candidate.
Guidance information Evidence must be gathered over time in a range of contexts to

for assessment ensure the person can achieve the unit outcome and apply the
Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry sector,
workplace and job role is recommended, for example:
the public sector
 PSPPROC413A Select providers and develop contracts

Range Statement
Practical requirements  phases or stages of the procurement activity

may include:  timeframes
 expertise needed
 facilities needed
 software and other tools needed
government
 industry bodies
Standards of  value for money
performance and codes of  quality measures
practice may include:  benchmarks
 milestones and timeframes
 codes of practice and standards of behaviour
Requests for offers may  tenders
include invitations to  proposals
submit:  quotations
 expressions of interest
Input may be obtained  exposure of draft request for offer
through:  request for information
 industry comment process
Offers may include:  tenders
 written quotations
 proposals

 expressions of interest
Offer evaluation plan  be consistent with public sector and organisational
should: legislation, policy and guidelines, such as:
 commonwealth or state and territory legislation,
including:
 equal employment opportunity and
anti-discrimination
 risk management
 security and confidentiality
 commonwealth, and state or territory
government procurement guidelines, including
environmental purchasing, access and equity,
social justice guidelines
 environmental, sustainability and corporate
social responsibility principles
 include practical and measurable criteria for
selecting the provider and explanation of process
that will be used to make selection
Criteria for evaluation  value for money
may include:  demonstrated capacity to deliver outcomes
 available expertise
 project management expertise to deliver the
outcomes on time and within budget
 meeting specific policy requirements, such as
buying locally and environmental sustainability
 innovation
Specialist expertise may  financial
include:  legal
 technical and user representatives
 commercial
 probity
 logistics
Probity requirements:  may include:
 accountability
 transparency
 confidentiality
 managing conflict of interest
 impartiality
 are maintained to:

 ensure conformity to processes

 facilitate accountability
 ensure proponents are treated in a fair and
equitable manner
 encourage commercial completion
 preserve public and private sector confidence in
government processes
Offers are received:  using a variety of forms, including:
 traditional paper-based tender responses
 computer disk
 electronic, such as internet, email, facsimile, and
electronic tendering system
 by a variety of delivery methods, including:
 post
 courier
 by hand
 electronic lodgement
Probity issues may  equity of access to tender documents
include:  fairness in provision of information
 decisions about when to accept or reject late tenders
 inappropriate assistance to prepare a tender
 conflict of interest.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC413A Select providers and develop contracts Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to select preferred providers as a result of a formal request for
offer process. It includes evaluating offers, selecting preferred providers, obtaining approvals,
developing and formalising contractual arrangements, and debriefing the market and other
stakeholders.
In practice, selecting providers overlaps with other generalist and specialist public sector and
local government work activities, such as upholding and supporting the values and principles
of public service, identifying and treating risks, exercising delegations, applying government
processes, encouraging compliance with legislation in the public sector or local government,
planning procurement, developing and distributing requests for offers and managing
contracts.
of endorsement.

The unit applies to those who undertake the selection of providers, including those who
specialise in procurement.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Select preferred 1.1. Evaluation panel is formed and coordinated.
providers 1.2. Offers are evaluated according to evaluation plan
and organisational probity requirements which relate to
managing conflicts of interest and adherence to public
sector standards.
1.3. Specialist expertise is obtained where necessary to
assist with evaluation of offers.
1.4. Clarification and negotiation of matters contained in
offers are undertaken with bidders according to
organisational guidelines and public sector standards.
1.5. Preferred providers are selected and
recommendations for allocation of business are
developed, justified and documented against selection
criteria according to policy, procedures and governance
requirements.
1.6. Approvals are obtained for the recommended offers.
1.7. Successful providers are notified in line with
organisational protocols.
2. Develop and 2.1. Approvals are obtained to enter negotiations, when
formalise required, and negotiation of the final wording of
contractual contract is conducted according to organisational policy
arrangements and procedures and defined probity frameworks as set
out in the evaluation plan.
2.2. Approvals to enter into contracts are obtained
according to policy and procedures.
2.3. Commitments are not made and contractors do not
commence until contracts are signed.
2.4. Contracts are structured to capture and address
identified risks, protect both parties, provide the basis
for due performance, and outline expected standards of
behaviour.
2.5. Contracts are entered into that are valid and legally
binding to the parties.
3. Debrief market and 3.1. Advice on the contractual arrangements is provided
other stakeholders to internal stakeholders according to organisational
3.2. Unsuccessful bidders are informed and debriefed
upon request with constructive feedback on their
proposals.
3.3. Details of successful providers are made public
according to probity requirements, organisational

protocols and public sector standards.


Required skills
 consult and negotiate with contractors and stakeholders, involving complex
oral and written exchanges of information
 network within probity boundaries with diverse stakeholders and contractors
 problem-solving skills to apply probity requirements in evaluating offers,
formalising contracts and debriefing stakeholders
guidelines
practices in the context of selecting providers and developing contracts
 planning and organising skills to analyse and compare written information to
ensure key elements from the specification and the procurement plan are
captured in the written contract
and procedures
Required knowledge
 relating to award of contracts, including environmental purchasing and
relating to receipt and selection of offers

other legislation relating to receipt and evaluation of offers, negotiation and
award of contracts

Evidence Guide
Overview of Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to select providers

assessment and develop contracts consistently in accordance with legislative and

assessment and  apply recognised offer evaluation methodologies to select a
evidence required to preferred provider
demonstrate
competency in this  make provider selections in accordance with the offer
unit evaluation plan, procurement plan and relevant policy and
legislation
 work with subject matter experts, such as legal, financial,
commercial and technical
 adhere to probity requirements
 make written recommendations about suppliers to delegates
and higher management
 act within the scope of own delegations
 keep appropriate records
 debrief relevant stakeholders about their performance.
undertaking a range of relevant work tasks in an actual or simulated
procurement environment on at least two separate occasions

resources for simulated workplace environment.
assessment Access may be required to:
selecting providers and developing contracts
procurement activities associated with selecting providers and
developing contracts
requirements relating to selecting providers and developing
contracts
 questions to assess understanding of relevant legislation and

procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for selecting
providers and developing contracts
 review of selection reports, approvals and sign-offs,
negotiation plans, draft contracts, final contracts, risk
assessments and other documentation prepared by the
candidate in a range of contexts
 review of stakeholder engagement approaches adopted by the
candidate
In all cases, practical assessment should be supported by questions to
assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of competency
which are difficult to assess directly. Questioning techniques should
suit the language and literacy levels of the candidate.
Guidance Evidence must be gathered over time in a range of contexts to ensure

information for the person can achieve the unit outcome and apply the competency in
assessment different situations or environments.
 PSPETHC401A Uphold and support the values and principles
of public service
 PSPLEGN401A Encourage compliance with legislation in the
public sector
 PSPPROC412A Develop and distribute requests for offers

Range Statement
Offers may include:  delivery of goods for use or into store

 provision of services
 maintenance agreements
 leasing agreements
 consultancies
 research and development
 infrastructure assets
Evaluation:  must include:
 processing offers
 determining value for money
 checking and investigating
 collating information
 comparative statements
 accountability
 may include staged procurement
Probity requirements:  may include:
 accountability
 transparency
 confidentiality
 impartiality
 encourage conformity to processes
 ensure proponents are treated in a fair and equitable
manner
Allocation of business may  single successful contractor
include:  multiple successful contractors
 standing offer (panel)
 multiple contracts as a result of a single request for offer

Contracts may  memoranda of understanding and memoranda of agreement

include:  in-house option directives
 common use arrangements and standing offers
 inter and intra-government agreements
 service level agreements
 deeds of agreement
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC414A Manage contracts Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to manage contracts. It includes undertaking preparations,
establishing and maintaining contract management arrangements, monitoring and maintaining
contract performance, and completing and reviewing contracts.
In practice, managing contracts overlaps with other generalist and specialist public sector
work activities, such as upholding and supporting the values and principles of public service
and local government, identifying and treating risks, exercising delegations, applying
government processes, encouraging compliance with legislation in the public sector or local
government, planning procurement, developing and distributing requests for offers and
selecting providers.
Those who specialise in procurement are catered for by the units PSPPROC503B,
PSPPROC504B, PSPPROC505A and PSPPROC506A, which address in depth the aspects of
contract management performed by those who specialise in procurement.
of endorsement.

This unit applies to those who are not specialist contract managers, but manage contracts as
part of their role rather than as their primary role.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Prepare to manage 1.1. Contract requirements, approvals and funding
a contract arrangements are confirmed and clarified where
necessary, and obligations and limits of authority as
contract manager are identified in line with contractual
1.2. Operational elements of the contract are confirmed
and contact is made with specialists and stakeholders to
clarify and assist with contract administration issues.
1.3. Key contract clauses are identified and their content
is clarified as necessary to ensure contract requirements
are understood.
1.4. Process, timings, and key performance indicators are
identified from the contract and confirmed with
stakeholders.
1.5. Risks are confirmed and a risk management plan is
developed or reviewed in line with contract requirements
and organisational policy and procedures.
1.6. Contract management strategy is developed or
obtained and key details are entered from the contract.
1.7. Contract management team is formed and roles and
responsibilities are allocated.
2. Implement a 2.1. Start-up or transition arrangements are confirmed
contract and implemented according to contract requirements and
management organisational procedures.
strategy 2.2. Information and communication strategies are
established to meet contractor, stakeholder and
organisational needs.
2.3. Risk management plan is monitored for
effectiveness and adapted as necessary during the life of
the contract.
2.4. Relationship with contractors and stakeholders is
established and managed according to organisational
policy and procedures and probity requirements.
2.5. Specialist expertise is obtained as necessary for
progress meetings and for advice on or resolution of
contract issues.
2.6. Consideration is given to OHS, environmental and
sustainability principles and corporate social
responsibility principles as they apply to the contract.
2.7. Contract information/documentation is maintained
for organisational purposes according to organisational


3. Monitor and 3.1. Obligations to contractor and stakeholders are met
maintain according to contractual arrangements and
performance of a organisational financial management requirements.
contract 3.2. Monitoring and control measures and performance
indicators are used to manage performance of contract
and ensure that all obligations under the agreement are
being met.
3.3. Contract variations are managed in accordance with
the contract, organisational policy and procedures, and
probity requirements.
3.4. Disputes and complaints are investigated and
resolved or referred according to contract requirements.
3.5. Negotiation of issues relating to the contract is
managed and approvals are obtained according to
stipulations in the contract proper.
3.6. Communication is maintained with all stakeholders
on the performance of the contract according to
organisational protocols and public sector standards.
4. Complete and 4.1. Client satisfaction with contract deliverables is
review contract. confirmed.
4.2. Contracts are finalised, amended, cancelled or
terminated according to contractual arrangements.
4.3. Strategies are applied to manage close-out, and
ensure renewal of contract or transition to a new contract
meet organisational guidelines, probity requirements and
public sector standards.
4.4. Review is undertaken of contract management,
contractor performance relevant to measures at each
stage of the contract, user satisfaction and audit results,
when necessary.
4.5. Where measures or outcomes are not met in full,
variances are documented and explained.
4.6. Information from the review and audit is used to
report on contractor performance, to review contract
management practice and make recommendations for
improvement.


Required skills
 network, within probity boundaries, with diverse stakeholders and
contractors
 problem-solving skills to apply simple supply chain management and supplier
issues management to the process of contract management
guidelines
practices in the context of contract management
 planning and organising skills to manage contract documentation
and procedures
Required knowledge
 contract performance management
 privacy and confidentiality issues

relating to managing contracts and relationships with contractors

 whole-of-life considerations relating to the ownership, operation and
disposal/completion of the goods or services
 financial and accounting issues relevant to the contract

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to manage

contracts consistently in accordance with legislative and

assessment and evidence  develop a contract management strategy in consultation
required to demonstrate with key stakeholders
 develop a suitable contract management plan, using
templates if available
 implement the contract management plan
 manage the performance of contractors
 provide contractors with performance feedback
 manage contract disputes to achieve prompt resolution and
refer to higher authority when necessary
 review contracts throughout to identify opportunities for
authority when necessary
 uphold probity standards in all dealings with contractors.
occasions.

procuring goods and services and managing contracts
procurement activities associated with managing contracts
requirements relating to managing contracts.

and procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for managing
contracts
 review of contract management plans, contracts, contract
variations, contractor performance reports, contract closure
documents and other documentation prepared by the
candidate in a range of contexts
the candidate.
candidate.

the public sector
 PSPPROC412A Develop and distribute requests for offers
 PSPPROC413A Select providers and develop contracts.

Range Statement
Contracts may include:  memoranda of understanding and memoranda of

agreement
 in-house option directives
 common use arrangements/standing offers
 letters of intent
 licensing agreements
Specialists may include:  procurement and contracting
 corporate finance
 outsourced procurement or contracting advisers
 legal advisers
 functional/business
 technical
 business owner of the contract
 OHS
 environmental
 audit and probity
 appropriate cross-government department experts
government
 industry bodies
Key contract clauses  specifications
may include:  variations
 insurances

 notices
 disputes
 privacy
 confidentiality
 milestones
 payments
 breaches
 penalties
 expected standards of behaviour
Risks may include:  contractor inability to meet agreements
 end user or buyer inability to meet obligations
 limited number of suppliers
 corruption risks
 probity risks
Contract management  formal contract management plan
strategy may include:  contract management checklist
 setting up routines
 checking quality assurance systems
 transferring legal responsibility
 avoiding implied acceptance of varied conditions
through non-enforcement of contractual obligations
 applying environmental, sustainability and corporate
responsibility principles
Contract management  procurement/contracting area
strategy may be obtained  specialist contract managers
from:  central agencies, such as state supply boards, and
contract and management services
 finance area
 legal advisers
 outsourced providers of contracting services
Communication  setting regular times to talk, meet or check on
strategies may include: progress
 protocols for dealing with other stakeholders
 emergency contact arrangements
 diary system to monitor milestones, timeframes,
receipt of deliverables, etc.
 strategies for ensuring information flow at critical
stages of the contract
Monitoring and control  inspections

measures may include:  tests

 audits
 reviews
 meetings
 progress reports
 verifications
 identification of non-conformances
 corrective actions
Contract variations may  change of scope
include:  change in prices
 change in quantity
 change to specifications
 negotiation of new terms and conditions
 dissolution of contracts
 in writing
 verbal variations, confirmed in writing
 variations by action/inaction
Disputes may include:  disputes over:
 requirements
 delivery schedules
 price changes
 additional tasking
 payment schedules
 complaints from third parties
Techniques available to  conference
resolve disputes include:  negotiation
 mediation
 expert determination
 arbitration
 resort to contractual conditions
 legal considerations
Negotiation of issues  contract variations
may include:  continuous improvement
 innovations
 non-compliance
 consequences
Review may include:  planning process
 evaluation considerations at each stage of the
contract

 sources and methods of gathering data

 role of audit trails, where applicable
 measuring outputs
 meeting client needs
 considering new and different ways of delivering the
service or product in the future
 strategies for continuous improvement
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC503B Manage contract performance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competency required by people whose primary role is contract
management to implement strategies that ensure effective contract performance. It includes
managing the business relationship, performance of the contract, and contract issues; and
implementing a communication strategy.
In practice, managing contract performance may overlap with other public sector and local
government generalist and specialist work activities, such as promoting the values and ethos
of public service or local government, undertaking negotiations, promoting compliance with
legislation in the public sector, finalising contracts, managing procurement risk, planning to
manage a contract, planning for procurement outcomes and making procurement decisions.
PSPPROC414A Manage contracts is the appropriate unit for people undertaking contract
management as a minor part of their work role.
of endorsement.

This unit applies to those who may or may not have had involvement in the procurement
process preceding execution of the contract.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Manage the business 1.1. Probity is managed in accordance with
relationship organisational requirements, legislation, policy and
public sector standards.
1.2. Obligations to the contractor are met according to
contractual arrangements.
1.3. Consideration of conflicts of interest and their
resolution are recorded according to public sector
standards and organisational requirements.
1.4. Business relationship with contractor is managed in
the public interest through formal and informal
mechanisms according to public sector standards and
2. Manage 2.1. Start-up or transition arrangements are implemented
performance of the according to contract requirements and organisational
contract procedures.
2.2. Contract management plan is monitored for
effectiveness on a regular basis and adapted as necessary
during the life of the contract.
2.3. Performance of contract is monitored against key
performance indicators and tracking milestones to
ensure obligations under the agreement are being met.
2.4. E-procurement, financial and other resources are
managed as necessary according to contract
requirements and organisational procedures.
2.5. Emerging and potential risks are identified and
managed according to organisational risk management
procedures.
3. Manage contract 3.1. Contract variations are managed according to
issues contract management plan, organisational policy and
procedures, and probity requirements.
3.2. Early signs of under-performance are identified,
and action is taken to improve performance to the
agreed level and documented according to contract's
communication and information policy.
3.3. Disputes and complaints are investigated and
resolved or referred according to contract's management
plan and contractual arrangements.
3.4. Negotiation of issues relating to the contract is
conducted and approvals are obtained according to
stipulations in the contract.
3.5. Conflict is addressed and resolved where possible or

other actions are taken according to contractual

arrangements.
3.6. Non-compliance with codes of conduct, codes of
practice and standards of behaviour is dealt with in a
timely manner.
4. Implement 4.1. Communication on the performance of the contract
communication and is maintained with all stakeholders according to
information strategy organisational protocols and public sector standards.
4.2. Management reporting is carried out according to
tracking milestones and organisational requirements.
4.3. Contract information is maintained for
organisational purposes according to organisational


Required skills
 network, within probity boundaries, with contractors and stakeholders
 write management reports and keep records of meetings, liaison, notes and
follow-up actions
 build effective working relationships with contractors and stakeholders,
within probity boundaries
 model effective team management approaches
 resolve disputes, conflict and complaints
 make judgements about when to refer disputes, conflict and complaints to
others
 apply understanding of supplier issues/supply chain management in the
context of contract management
guidelines
practices in the context of contract management
 manage contract documentation
 plan and organise contract meetings, reports and reviews
 learning skills to keep up-to-date with:
 best practice examples in procurement practice
 relevant procurement legislation, policies and procedures
Required knowledge


 contract management for a range of contractual situations
relating to management of contracts and relationships with contractors
 legal aspects of negotiation
 aspects of law of contracts, trade practices law and commercial law relevant to
the management of contracts relating to complex procurement
 equal employment opportunity relevant to the management of contracts
 OHS requirements relevant to the management of contracts
 environmental, sustainability and corporate social responsibility principles
relevant to the management of contracts

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in managing contract

performance consistently in accordance with legislative and

assessment and evidence  develop and implement an appropriate contract
required to demonstrate management plan, using templates where available
 develop and implement an appropriate transition plan,
using templates where available
 develop and maintain a sound business relationship with
contractors within probity guidelines, upholding probity
standards in all dealings with them
 manage contractor performance so that goods and services
are delivered according to the contract
 provide the contractor with performance feedback
 deal promptly and proactively with contract issues and
disputes and refer to higher authority when this is not
possible
 communicate effectively with internal and external
stakeholders about the operation of the contract.
occasions.

procurement activities associated with managing contract
performance
 case studies that incorporate dilemmas and probity
requirements relating to managing contract performance.


and procedures
contract performance
variations, contractor performance reports, communication
strategy and other documentation prepared by the candidate
in a range of contexts
the candidate.
candidate.

service
 PSPLEGN501B Promote compliance with legislation in
the public sector
 PSPPROC504B Finalise contracts
 PSPPROC505A Manage procurement risk
 PSPPROC506A Plan to manage a contract
 PSPPROC507A Plan for procurement outcomes
 PSPPROC508A Make procurement decisions.

Range Statement
Probity principles:  may include:

 accountability
 transparency
 confidentiality
 impartiality
 ensure proponents are treated in a fair and
equitable manner
government processes.
Legislation, policy and  financial management legislation
public sector standards  government procurement, purchasing and
may include: contracting legislation, policy and guidelines
 codes of conduct, codes of practice and standards of
individual behaviour
 cross-cultural and social justice issues
 environmental and sustainability policies
 corporate social responsibility policies.
Formal and informal  non-confrontational interaction
mechanisms may  hospitality
include:  formal contract variations
 formal negotiations
 formal and informal meetings
 regular and ad hoc reporting
 review processes.
Contract management  risk management plan
 contingency plan

plan may include:  communication and public relations plan

 human resource management plan
 disposal plan
 contract review plan
 quality assurance systems
 arrangements for transfer of legal responsibility
 insurances
 strategies to avoid implied acceptance of varied
conditions through non-enforcement of contractual
obligations
 environmental/green procurement, sustainability and
corporate social responsibility principles.
Contracts may include:  formal written contracts
 standing offers (panels)
 multi-use lists and similar arrangements
 memoranda of understanding and memoranda of
agreement
 in-house option directives.
Risks may include:  supplier inability to meet obligations
 scope creep
 client requirements not fully understood
 becoming too dependent on a single supplier
 disruption to continuity and consistency of service if
too many suppliers are selected
 other environmental influences
 probity risks.
Variation to agreements  change of scope
may arise from:  negotiation of new terms and conditions
 dissolution of contracts
 inability to deliver.
Early signs of  tracking milestones
under-performance may  regular meetings
be detected through:  meeting records and follow-up
 file management and audit trail

 stakeholder surveys on performance

 ongoing review of deliverables.
Actions taken to improve  discussion with contractor
performance may  regular interaction
include:  ongoing performance feedback
 provision of support
 expert advice.
 requirements
 price changes
 formal and informal.
Techniques available to  conference
resolve disputes include:  negotiation
 mediation
 arbitration
 litigation.
Negotiation of issues  contract variations
may include:  continuous improvement
 innovations
 non-compliance
 consequences.
Actions as a result of  mediation
unresolved conflict may  court action
include:  termination of contract.
Communication  clear communication
strategies may include:  understanding the needs of the service provider and
the client
 setting regular times to talk, meet or check on
progress
 protocols for dealing with other stakeholders
 diary system to monitor milestones, timeframes,
receipt of deliverables, etc.
 strategies for ensuring information flow at critical

stages of the contract.

Contract information  contract and variations
may include:  contract management plan
 financial records, including funding submissions,
budgets, delegations, invoices and payments
 contractor performance information
 contract reports
 information about disputes and other issues
 complaints and compliments.
Organisational purposes  probity and accountability
may include:  budget reporting
 feeding into future procurement processes
 performance management of suppliers
 internal and external reviews and audits
 governance requirements
 legal compliance.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC504B Finalise contracts Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

to content.

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to finalise processes for contracts. It includes completing contracts
and implementing a contract review strategy.
In practice, finalising contracts may overlap with other public sector generalist and specialist
work activities, such as promoting the values and ethos of public service and local
government, undertaking negotiations, promoting compliance with legislation in the public
sector or local government, managing contract performance, managing procurement risk,
planning to manage a contract, planning for procurement outcomes and making procurement
decisions.
of endorsement.

The unit applies to those whose primary role is contract management.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Complete contracts 1.1. Contracts due to expire are reviewed to determine
future requirements, and options for meeting those
requirements are canvassed in sufficient time for
decision making and transition to occur.
1.2. Strategies are implemented to manage closure,
renewal of contracts, or transition to a new contract
according to organisational guidelines, probity
requirements and public sector standards.
1.3. Contracts are finalised, amended, cancelled or
terminated according to contractual arrangements.
1.4. Consultation is undertaken with contractor, and a
contract completion report is issued addressing the
performance of contractor and contract manager
according to organisational requirements and public
sector standards.
2. Implement contract 2.1. Timing of contract review is determined to ensure a
review strategy smooth transition to post-contract arrangements.
2.2. Contract review is undertaken covering contract
management, contractor performance relevant to
measures at each stage of the contract, user satisfaction
and audit results.
2.3. Where measures or outcomes are not met in full,
variances are documented and explained.
2.4. Review report is prepared documenting outcomes
against plans, final costs, user satisfaction, lessons learnt
and any shortcomings in contract planning, management
2.5. Recommendations for improvement are made and
supported with evidence, as a result of lessons learnt.


Required skills
 consult and negotiate with contractors and stakeholders, involving complex oral
and written exchanges of information
 write review and closure reports
 make recommendations about improvements to the contract management
process
 problem-solving skills to finalise outstanding issues so the contract can be closed
 initiative and enterprise skills to identify improvements to the contract management
process of contract management
 manage contract closure documentation
 plan and organise contract closure meetings, reports and reviews
Required knowledge
 relating to contract finalisation and review, including environmental purchasing
and corporate social responsibility guidance
 contract finalisation and review for a range of contractual situations
 privacy and confidentiality issues, including the requirement to appropriately
classify information to ensure transparency as well as to treat bids as
commercial-in-confidence
 codes of conduct, codes of practice and standards of individual behaviour relating

to finalising contracts
 information, knowledge management and record keeping for official or historical
records
 aspects of contract law, trade practices law and commercial law relevant to the
finalisation of contracts relating to complex procurement

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to finalise

contracts consistently in accordance with legislative and

assessment and  develop and implement an appropriate review strategy for
evidence required to contracts that are ending
demonstrate
 complete relevant contract closure processes
 ensure appropriate records have been kept
 apply contract review techniques
 make written recommendations for improvements to the
procurement process based on review results
procurement environment on at least two separate occasions.

procuring goods and services, and managing and finalising
contracts
procurement activities associated with finalising contracts
requirements relating to finalising contracts.
procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for finalising
contracts
variations, contractor performance reports, contract closure
plans, transition plans, risk assessments and other contract
finalisation documentation prepared by the candidate in a range

of contexts
candidate.
to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects of competency
which are difficult to assess directly. Questioning techniques
should suit the language and literacy levels of the candidate.

 PSPETHC501B Promote the values and ethos of public service
public sector
 PSPPROC503B Manage contract performance

Range Statement

agreement
 in-house option directives.
Timing of contract  periodically throughout the contract
review may include:  when performance issues arise
 prior to contract completion
 concurrently with contract renewal process
 after the contract is completed.
Contract review may  planning process
include:  evaluation considerations at each stage of contract
 role of audit trails
 key performance indicators and their review
 innovation
 strategies for continuous improvement.
Variances may include:  change of scope
 negotiation of new terms and conditions
 strategies for dealing with contractor performance
 dissolution of contract.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.

Competency field

PSPPROC505A Manage procurement risk Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC505A Manage procurement risk
PSPPROC505A Release 2: Layout adjusted. No changes to content.
PSPPROC505A Release 1: Primary release.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to manage risks associated with all stages of procurement. It
includes assessing risk, and preparing, implementing and reviewing a risk management plan.
In practice, managing procurement risk may overlap with other public sector and local
legislation in the public sector, managing contract performance, finalising contracts, planning
to manage a contract, planning for procurement outcomes and making procurement decisions.
of endorsement.

The unit applies to those in specialist procurement who plan for procurement risks across all
stages of the procurement cycle.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Assess risk 1.1. Legislation, policies, business processes and
resources impacting on the contract are identified.
1.2. Procurement outcomes and internal inputs necessary
for effective performance are identified.
1.3. Critical success factors necessary for the
achievement of procurement outcomes are identified and
confirmed.
1.4. Non-trivial procurement risks relating to the
procurement activity are identified.
1.5. Potential probity risks are identified.
1.6. Causes of risk are analysed and their potential
impact is determined.
1.7. Likelihood and consequences of risks are
determined and risk assessments are developed.
2. Prepare risk 2.1. Preliminary risk management plan is developed that
management plan addresses risks identified in planning phase of
procurement activity.
2.2. Risks that will be accepted and those requiring
treatment are identified.
2.3. Treatments that reduce risks to an acceptable level
are designed according to organisational requirements.
2.4. Plan for implementing new treatments, additional
risk controls or modifications to existing controls is
developed.
2.5. Risk level is re-checked at key points during
procurement process, and risk management plan is
reviewed and adjusted to cover procurement activity
risks not already identified.
3. Implement and 3.1. Risk controls and treatments are implemented
review risk according to the treatment plan.
management plan 3.2. Risk management plan is implemented, and
regularly reviewed and revised to include potential or
emerging risks during the life of the procurement
activity.
3.3. Review results are used to improve risk treatments
and controls.


Required skills
 write risk management plans using templates or a recognised risk management
methodology
 interpret complex, formal documents
 make verbal and written recommendations about the management of
procurement and contracting risks
 problem-solving skills to analyse risks associated with procurement and contract
using a recognised risk management methodology
 initiative and enterprise skills to identify procurement risks and opportunities using
a recognised risk management methodology
 planning and organising skills to manage and update the risk management plan
Required knowledge
 relating to contract risk management
 risk management procedures
 probity principles and issues, particularly as they relate to probity risks
to the procurement process
 risks associated with financial and accounting issues relevant to procurement and
contract management
 supplier issues and supply chain management in the context of procurement risk
management
 aspects of law of contracts, trade practices law and commercial law relevant to risk

management relating to complex procurement

 OHS requirements relevant to procurement and contract management
 equal employment opportunity relevant to procurement and contract management
 environmental, sustainability and corporate social responsibility principles relevant
to procurement and contract management

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to manage

procurement risk consistently in accordance with legislative and

assessment and evidence  use recognised risk management methodologies to identify
required to demonstrate and assess risks for all stages of a procurement activity
 prepare a risk management plan for a procurement activity,
using templates where available
 implement risk management plans
 review and revise risk management plans to reflect the
changing procurement context and environment during the
procurement activity
 liaise and consult with stakeholders to ensure that risks are
appropriately identified and managed
 make recommendations to higher management about options
for the management of procurement risks.
occasions.

procuring goods and services and managing procurement risk
procurement activities associated with managing procurement
risk
 case studies that incorporate dilemmas and probity
requirements relating to managing procurement risk.
procedures

procurement risk
 review of risk assessments, risk management plans, contract
management plans, contracts, probity plans, budgets, transition
plans and other documentation prepared by the candidate in a
range of contexts
candidate.
candidate.

service
public sector

Range Statement
Legislation and policies  commonwealth or state and territory legislation,

may include: including equal employment opportunity and
anti-discrimination law
 national and international codes of practice and risk
management standards
 national competition policy.
Procurement risks may  contextual and environmental factors
include:  too many or too few potential suppliers
 unsophisticated marketplace
 timeframes for procurement too short
 inappropriate method of procurement used
 inadequate budget and other resources
 inappropriate form of contract selected
 supplier inability to meet obligations
 unclear contract terms and conditions
 contractual disputes
 factors outside the control of either party, such as global
health pandemic, failure of third-party businesses or
natural disasters
 implications if dependence on one supplier, versus risks
in lack of continuity and consistency of services
provided
 changes to government policy.
Probity risks may  corruption
include:  fraud
 conflict of interest (actual, perceived or potential)
 unfair treatment of providers or potential providers
 misuse of resources
 misuse of information
 manipulation of the marketplace.

Risk assessments  high impact/consequence/likelihood

differentiate between  low impact/consequence/likelihood.
risks that have:
Risk management is  people

often considered in  assets and physical environment
relation to an  reputation and image
organisation's:  legal issues
 business continuity
 finances
 stated outcomes.
Risk treatments may  avoid risk
include those that:  transfer risk
 reduce likelihood
 reduce consequence
 partially reduce assessed risk level so that risk can be
accepted.
Risk controls may  legislation
include:  government policies and guidance
 organisational policies, processes and procedures
 standardised documentation and templates
 hierarchy of controls, such as fraud control plans and
security plans
 staff skills and knowledge.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC506A Plan to manage a contract Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to establish arrangements for contract management. It includes
confirming contract requirements, preparing a contract management plan, and implementing
contract strategies and contractual arrangements.
In practice, planning to manage a contract may overlap with other public sector and local
legislation in the public sector, managing contract performance, finalising contracts,
managing procurement risk, planning for procurement outcomes and making procurement
decisions.
of endorsement.

This unit applies to those whose primary role is contract management, and who may or may
not have had involvement in the procurement process preceding execution of the contract.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Confirm contract 1.1. Legislation, public sector standards and
requirements organisational requirements relating to probity, financial
management, approvals and other considerations are
identified for inclusion in the contract management plan.
1.2. Contract requirements are re-confirmed with all
parties.
1.3. Obligations to the contractor, limits of authority and
delegations relating to contract are determined according
to contractual arrangements and organisational policy and
procedures.
1.4. Start-up or transition arrangements are confirmed.
2. Prepare contract 2.1. Contract risks are identified and risk management
management plan plan is developed in line with contract requirements and
2.2. Procedures to identify, receive and address contract
variations are determined according to contract
requirements and organisational policy and procedures.
2.3. Procedures to investigate, resolve or refer disputes or
complaints are determined according to contract
requirements and organisational policy and procedures.
2.4. Key performance indicators are developed and
negotiated, and administrative processes are identified
and approved for the life of the contract according to
organisational policy procedures.
2.5. Contract management plan that addresses key
elements is documented, approved and maintained
according to organisational requirements.
2.6. Expected standards of behaviour, probity and privacy
principles are applied to all elements of contract
management plan.
2.7. Environmental, sustainability and corporate social
responsibility principles are applied to all elements of
contract management plan.
3. Develop 3.1. Stakeholder networks and relationships are
stakeholder identified.
relationships 3.2. Networking strategies are used, within probity
boundaries, to establish, develop and maintain working
relationships to promote benefits to the contract
requirements.
3.3. Confidence of stakeholders is developed and
maintained through high standards of behaviour and

ethical conduct.
3.4. Negotiation strategies are used to achieve positive
outcomes when difficult situations arise.
3.5. Communication requirements are identified and
confirmed in line with contractual obligations and
stakeholder needs.
4. Implement 4.1. Requirements of confidentiality and freedom of
contract strategies information are identified for the contract.
4.2. Communication/information strategy is developed
that matches needs of the organisation, the contract and
the contractor's business environment.
4.3. Contract review requirements are established with
stakeholders.
4.4. Contract review strategy is developed to review
management of the contract, contractor performance and
user satisfaction.
5. Implement 5.1. Business relationship with contractor is established
contractual and managed according to organisational policy and
arrangements procedures and probity requirements.
5.2. Start-up or transition arrangements are implemented.
5.3. Financial, administrative and information
management processes are established.
5.4. Contractual arrangements are implemented according
to contract management plan.
5.5. Appropriate contract records are maintained for the
life of the contract.


Required skills
 consult and negotiate with contractors and stakeholders
 network, within probity boundaries, with contractors and stakeholders
 develop a written contract management plan and sub-plans
 apply OHS requirements in the context of contract management
 apply understanding of supplier issues and supply chain management in the
context of procurement risk management
guidelines
practices in the context of planning for contract management
 planning and organising skills to manage and update the contract management plan
and sub-plans
Required knowledge
 relating to contract management, including environmental purchasing,
sustainability and corporate social responsibility guidance relevant to the
contract
 contract management planning for a range of contractual situations


to management of contracts and relationships with contractors
 equal employment opportunity relevant to the contract
 OHS requirements relevant to the contract

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to plan to manage

a contract consistently in accordance with legislative and

assessment and  develop a contract management strategy in consultation with
evidence required to key stakeholders
demonstrate
 develop a contract management plan suited to more complex
contracts, using templates if available, which may include
sub-plans such as risk, transition and probity
 implement the contract management strategy and the contract
management plan
 develop and maintain a sound business relationship with
internal and external stakeholders
 manage the performance of contractors to ensure the effective
delivery of value for money outcomes under the contract
 manage more complex contract disputes to achieve prompt
resolution and refer to higher authority when necessary
 review contract throughout to identify opportunities for
 act within own delegations and refer issues to higher authority
when necessary.
procurement environment on at least two separate occasions.

procurement activities associated with planning to manage a
contract
requirements relating to planning to manage a contract.


procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for planning to
manage a contract
 review of contract management plans, contracts, probity plans,
budgets, transition plans, approvals and sign-offs, and other
documentation prepared by the candidate in a range of contexts
candidate.
which are difficult to assess directly. Questioning techniques
should suit the language and literacy levels of the candidate.

 PSPETHC501B Promote the values and ethos of public service
public sector

Range Statement
Legislation, public  financial management legislation

sector standards and  government procurement, purchasing and contracting
organisational legislation, policy and guidelines
requirements may  ethics standards
include:  codes of conduct and codes of practice
 environmental purchasing
Probity principles:  may include:
 accountability
 transparency
 confidentiality
 impartiality
 ensure proponents are treated in a fair and equitable
manner
Other considerations  corporate governance
may include:  intellectual property
 privacy
 freedom of information requirements
 public liability insurance considerations
agreement

Contract requirements  terms and conditions

may include:  specifications
 risk
 managing hospitality
 clauses dealing with:
 variations
 insurances
 notices
 disputes
 privacy
 confidentiality
 milestones
 payments
 breaches
Delegations may  financial delegations
include:  procurement delegations
 compliance with instructions or finance circulars
 special consideration if they concern travel, computers or
software, leasing arrangements or issuing indemnities, or
other special categories of goods and services
 other delegations, such as disposals and human resources
 ministerial authorisation
Contract risks may  contextual/environmental factors
include:  supplier inability to meet obligations
 unclear contract terms and conditions
 contractual disputes
 factors outside the control of either party, such as global
health pandemic, failure of third-party businesses, and
natural disasters
 implications if dependence on one supplier, versus risks
in lack of continuity and consistency of services provided
Variation to  change of scope
agreements may arise  negotiation of new terms and conditions
from:  dissolution of contracts
Procedures to resolve  conference

disputes may include:  negotiation
 mediation
 arbitration


 litigation
 requirements
 price changes
Administrative  file and records management
processes may include:  audit trail
 methodology for recording meetings
 notes and follow-ups of meetings and actions agreed
 management reporting
Contract management  risk management plan
plan may include:  contingency plan
 communication and public relations plan
 human resource management plan
 disposal plan
 contract review plan
 arrangements for transfer of legal responsibility
 insurances
 strategies to avoid implied acceptance of varied
conditions through non-enforcement of contractual
obligations
 environmental/green procurement, sustainability and
corporate social responsibility principles
Stakeholders may  contractor
include:  buying organisation
 board of management
 steering committee
 advisory panel
 staff
 union
 industry
 client
 end user
 parliamentarian
 the public

Communication/  setting regular times to talk, meet or check on progress

information strategies  protocols for dealing with other stakeholders
may include:  appeals mechanisms for resolving conflict between
clients and service providers
 clear communication
 reliability
 diary system to monitor milestones, timeframes, receipt
of deliverables, etc.
 strategies for ensuring information flow at critical stages
of the contract
Contract review  planning process
strategy may include:  evaluation considerations at each stage of the contract
 role of audit trails
 innovation
 strategies for continuous improvement
Contract records may  contract and variations
include:  contract management plan
 financial records, such as funding submissions, budgets,
delegations, invoices and payments
 contractor performance information
 contract reports
 information about disputes and other issues
 complaints and compliments
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC603C Divest strategic assets Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC603C Divest strategic assets
PSPPROC603C Release 2: Layout adjusted. No changes to content.
PSPPROC603C Release 1: Primary release.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competencies required to dispose of high risk and high value government
assets, such as government businesses, property, strategic infrastructure, intellectual property
and other high value items. It includes identifying strategic assets for disposal, developing a
disposal plan for divesting strategic assets, divesting the assets and evaluating the divestment
activity.
In practice, divesting strategic assets may occur in the context of other generalist and
specialist work activities, such as maintaining and enhancing confidence in public service or
local government, establishing and maintaining strategic networks, managing compliance
with legislation in the public service or local government, managing risk, developing a
business case, planning for strategic procurement, coordinating strategic procurement,
negotiating strategic procurement and managing strategic contracts.
of endorsement.

This unit applies to people who may have to organise or carry out the divestment of strategic
assets as part of their role.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable




1. Identify strategic 1.1. Strategic assets are identified and delineated for
assets for divestment in accordance with legislation, government
divestment objectives, policies, practice and probity requirements.
1.2. Disposal plans developed at the time of purchase are
identified and examined.
1.3. Potential market value of assets is determined and
substantiated.
2. Develop a disposal 2.1. Business case to commence the divestment strategy
plan for divesting is developed which includes examination of options for
strategic assets disposal and explanation of the recommended strategy.
2.2. Continuing government or organisational obligations
post-divestment are identified and strategies are
developed to address them.
2.3. Disposal plan is developed.
2.4. Disposal plan is evaluated and modified prior to
approval, if required.
2.5. Required approvals are obtained according to
3. Implement disposal 3.1. Approved disposal plan is actioned.
plan 3.2. Business case is developed, based on prices offered
and according to disposal plan.
3.3. Negotiations are conducted and finalised according
to the plan.
4. Evaluate divestment 4.1. Disposal plan, immediate outcome of divestment,
activity and long-term outcomes for service provision and
government are evaluated.
4.2. Recommendations are made for future divestment.


Required skills
 consult and negotiate with stakeholders
 network, within probity boundaries, with stakeholders
 build and manage effective working relationships
 write business cases, disposal plans, reports, submissions and other complex
documents
 manage strategic relationships
 model effective management and leadership approaches
 problem-solving skills to apply decision-making processes or methodologies
 identify and assess divestment options for strategic assets
practices in the context of divesting strategic assets
 planning and organising skills to manage financial and other resources
 best practice examples in strategic procurement
Required knowledge
 relating to divesting strategic assets
 such as OHS and equity and diversity, and environment
 commonwealth, state or territory, and local government disposal guidelines,
policies and practices
 financial rules and regulations relating to divestment of strategic assets
 legal requirements of government strategic asset disposal
 implications of divestment of service provision

 disposal approval processes
 codes of practice, codes of conduct and standards of individual behaviour relating
to asset divestment
 law of contract relating to strategic asset disposal
 trade practices law relating to strategic asset disposal
 commercial law relating to divesting strategic assets
to the disposal of strategic assets

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in divesting strategic assets

consistently and in accordance with legislative and

assessment and evidence  use different methods to identify strategic assets for disposal
required to demonstrate
 develop a strategy for the divestment of strategic assets that
considers all relevant disposal options
 develop a disposal plan
 implement a disposal plan
 review the disposal activity and make recommendations
about improvements that could be implemented in future
disposals of strategic assets
authority when necessary.
occasions.

divesting assets at the strategic level
 long-term government policy papers, such as White Papers
strategic procurement and disposal activities.
procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for divesting
strategic assets
 review of strategic procurement plans, business cases,
strategic disposal plans, disposal budgets, disposal tender
documentation, formal sign-offs and approvals, and other

documentation prepared or reviewed by the candidate in a

range of contexts
the candidate.
questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those aspects
of competency which are difficult to assess directly. Candidates
for this qualification must demonstrate a high level of
understanding and practical workplace application of
underpinning knowledge. Questioning techniques should suit the
language and literacy levels of the candidate.
service
public sector
 PSPMNGT607B Develop a business case
 PSPPM601B Direct complex project activities
 PSPPROC606B Negotiate strategic procurement
 PSPPROC607A Manage strategic contracts.

Range Statement
Strategic assets may  property, including housing:

include:  listed properties
 highly polluted properties
 high-end military equipment
 strategic infrastructure
 high value items, e.g. computer mainframes
 government businesses.
Legislation, government  commonwealth, state and territory, and local
objectives, policies and government legislation and regulations
practice may include:  council rules and by-laws
 national competition policy
 sectoral or organisational policies on:
 procurement
 disposal
 human resource management
 severance, transfer and redeployment
 environmental legislation and policy
 broad government policies, including Minister's public
announcements and party platforms.
Options for divestment  sale of business or business assets
may include:  sale of business with strategic assets leased
 employee buy-out
 tender
 auction.
Disposal plan takes  human resources
account of:  industrial relations issues
 service continuity
 government policies
Required approvals may  Minister
include:  Cabinet
 regulatory agencies.

Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC604B Plan for strategic procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC604B Plan for strategic procurement
PSPPROC604B Release 2: Layout adjusted. No changes to content.
PSPPROC604B Release 1: Primary release.
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit covers the ability to plan for highly complex, innovative,
sophisticated and often long-term strategic procurement within
established guidelines, policies and procedures. This may involve
high-level capability development for government.
Strategic procurement is high risk, often involving political
elements. The unit includes conducting a procurement business
analysis, defining procurement requirements, and justifying
procurement expenditure.
In practice, planning for strategic procurement may occur in the
context of other generalist and specialist work activities, such as
maintaining and enhancing confidence in public service or local
government, establishing and maintaining strategic networks,
managing compliance with legislation in the public service or local
government, managing risk, developing a business case,
coordinating strategic procurement, negotiating strategic
procurement and managing strategic contracts.
No licensing, legislative, regulatory or certification requirements
apply to this unit at the time of endorsement.

This unit applies to those in specialist procurement and contracting.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Conduct 1.1. Organisation's corporate procurement plan,
procurement procurement-related expenditure, associated levels of
business analysis risk and supply markets are analysed.
1.2. Procurement profile is prepared that identifies past
and projected procurement expenditure and associated
levels of risk.
1.3. Supply positioning is undertaken, categorising
goods and services by their relative expenditure and
difficulty of securing supply, to assist in the
development of procurement objectives.
1.4. Supplier preferencing is used to identify how
suppliers view the organisation as a client.
1.5. Other factors likely to affect strategic procurement
are identified and documented according to
1.6. Due diligence is undertaken to investigate existing
relationships with suppliers, notably coordinated
procurement contracts (CPCs) or coordinated
procurement opportunities.
2. Define procurement 2.1. Procurement requirements are determined through
requirements consultation and negotiation with stakeholders and
experts and defined to reflect organisational needs.
2.2. Accountability measures are identified and
incorporated into procurement plans according to
organisational policy and guidelines.
2.3. Appropriations to fund strategic procurement are
obtained in accordance with legislative and
2.4. Approvals to address procurement requirements are
obtained according to organisational policy and
procedures.
3. Justify procurement 3.1. Business case is developed with stakeholders to
expenditure determine viability of proposed procurement
expenditure.
3.2. Reasons for procurement requirement, timeframes
and expected whole-of-life costs and benefits are
established in the business case.
3.3. Output specification is developed with stakeholders
to assist in achieving procurement outcomes.


Required skills
 write business cases, plans, reports, submissions and other complex documents
 apply decision-making processes or methodologies
context of strategic procurement
 identify and assess strategic procurement options and alternatives
practices in the context of strategic procurement
 undertake research and business analysis
 manage financial and other resources
Required knowledge
 relating to strategic procurement

 aspects of law of contract, trade practices law, and commercial law relating to
strategic procurement
to procurement decisions
 government procurement environment
 legal requirements of government procurement
 implications of particular procurement arrangements
 cultural issues relating to strategic procurement and industry development in
certain industry sectors
 relationship management at all personnel levels
to strategic procurement

Evidence Guide
The Evidence Guide provides advice on assessment and must be read in conjunction
Overview of Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to plan for

assessment strategic procurement consistently in accordance with

assessment and  prepare procurement profiles and supplier profiles
evidence required to
 conduct procurement analysis of own organisation's
demonstrate
buying requirements
competency in this
unit  consult with procurement stakeholders to inform the
development of procurement requirements
 use results of procurement analysis to develop
procurement requirements
 define strategic procurement requirements
 prepare complex business cases or other documents to
justify procurement decisions and expenditure.
Competency should be demonstrated by providing evidence
of undertaking a range of relevant work tasks in an actual or
occasions.
Context of and specific The unit of competency is to be assessed in the workplace or

resources for a simulated workplace environment.
planning for strategic procurement
 long-term government policy papers, such as White
Papers
 strategic procurement plans and direction statements
 workplace scenarios and case studies relating to a range
of strategic procurement and disposal activities.
and procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for planning
for strategic procurement
 review of strategic procurement plans, business cases,

procurement justifications, budgets, supplier analysis,

market analysis, risk assessment, tender documentation,
formal sign-offs and approvals, and other documentation
prepared or reviewed by the candidate in a range of
contexts
 review of stakeholder engagement approaches adopted
by the candidate.
questions to assess underpinning knowledge and those
aspects of competency which are difficult to assess directly.
Candidates for this qualification must demonstrate a high
level of understanding and practical workplace application of
underpinning knowledge. Questioning techniques should suit
the language and literacy levels of the candidate.
Guidance information Evidence must be gathered over time in a range of contexts

for assessment to ensure the person can achieve the unit outcome and apply
the competency in different situations or environments.
public service
the public sector
 PSPPROC605B Coordinate strategic procurement

Range Statement
Procurement may  public private partnerships (PPP)

include:  leasing or buying
 short-term or long-term arrangements
 sole or multiple suppliers
 maintenance and support arrangements
 incentive contracting
 firm or variable pricing regimes
 franchising
 pre-qualification of suppliers
 standing orders
 standard form agreements
 common use contracts
 facilities management
 prime contractor and subcontractor
 gain sharing/open book
 alliancing
 coordinated procurement
 whole of government procurement
 cooperative procurement
Procurement  products purchased
expenditure may  quantities
include:  suppliers
 locations
 types, values and volumes of transactions
Risk may include:  goods and services critical to the organisation
 product-related risk
 organisation-related risk
 supplier-related risk
 market-related risk
 national security risk
 political risk
 corruption risk
 probity risk

Supply positioning  easy to secure supply and low relative expenditure

results in four  easy to secure supply and high relative expenditure
categories:  difficult to secure supply and low relative expenditure
 difficult to secure supply and high relative expenditure
Supplier preferencing  nuisance account
may categorise clients  development potential
as:  exploitable
 core business
Suppliers may include:  commercial companies
 international companies
 other governments, including commonwealth, state or
territory, local and international
 non-profit organisations
 in-house
Other factors likely to  value of business involved
affect strategic  complexity of marketplace
procurement may  capacity of market
include:  strategic and tactical issues
 political influence
 political imperatives and strategies
 budgetary constraints
 collaborative arrangements
 Australian industry involvement requirements
 environmental issues
 extent of competition
 protection of both parties
 value for money considerations
 degree of dependency of organisation programs on the
procurement
 where and why the need arises and for which unit or
location
 level of risk, complexity and sensitivity of the
procurement
 whether the need is for the replacement or enhancement
of existing resources, or to meet an entirely new
capability
 joint ventures with the private sector to fund portions of
the project in exchange for financial returns or
intellectual property rights
 alternatives, such as change in policy/process, equipment
or equipment life extensions
 use of in-house resources

 leasing instead of up-front capital investment

 consideration of supply chain issues
responsibility principles
 international governments
 industry bodies
Organisational needs  political directives
may include:  commonwealth, and state or territory, and local
government needs
 responses to government White Papers, for example on
long-term capability of the public sector to deliver
government policy objectives
Appropriations may  delegates
require:  ministerial authorisation
 compliance with instructions or finance circulars
 special consideration if they concern:
 long-term travel deals
 long-term computer deals
 long-term lease deals
 issuing indemnities
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC605B Coordinate strategic procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC605B Coordinate strategic procurement
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to analyse, influence and develop markets and implement
activities for highly complex, innovative and often long-term strategic procurement within
established guidelines, policies and procedures.
Strategic procurement is high risk, often involving political elements. The unit includes
undertaking market analysis, influencing and developing markets, and implementing strategic
procurement activities.
In practice, coordinating strategic procurement may occur in the context of other generalist
and specialist work activities, such as maintaining and enhancing confidence in public service
or local government, establishing and maintaining strategic networks, managing compliance
business case, planning for strategic procurement, negotiating strategic procurement and
managing strategic contracts.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Undertake market 1.1. Organisation's strategic procurement requirements
analysis and commercial and policy factors impacting
procurement are identified.
1.2. Extent to which a competitive market exists to meet
the organisation's needs is researched.
1.3. Number of suppliers, their market share and the
degree and type of competition between suppliers are
identified.
1.4. Nature, quality and maturity of the supply chain are
analysed.
1.5. Environmental, sustainability and corporate social
responsibility factors affecting the supply market are
identified and analysed.
1.6. Expert assistance is engaged as necessary to assist
with market analysis.
2. Influence and 2.1. Supply markets and strategic industries are
develop markets identified and analysed to identify emerging and
predicted trends.
2.2. Analysis of supply markets and strategic industries
is undertaken, including capabilities, limitations,
financial standing and past performance of existing and
potential suppliers.
2.3. Range of strategies, within probity boundaries, is
used to influence markets.
2.4. Market development strategies are used to develop
and influence market capability within probity
boundaries.
2.5. Implications of procurement threats and
opportunities imposed by supply markets are identified
and communicated to stakeholders according to
organisational guidelines and public sector standards.
3. Implement strategic 3.1. Procurement methodologies are determined
procurement according to organisation's strategic procurement plan.
activities 3.2. Requirements are designed to deliver business
outcomes and provide value for money, including
whole-of-life considerations.
3.3. Methodologies are guided by constraints,
complexity and importance of procurement requirement
and the marketplace.
3.4. Procurement activities are determined and teams are
formed and coordinated to manage strategic

3.5. Performance measures are determined to suit the
range of procurement activities.
3.6. Performance is analysed against measures, and a
cycle of continuous improvement is implemented to
improve procurement performance.


Required skills
 manage teams of experts in functions such as finance, legal, technical and
engineering
 identify and resolve strategic procurement issues
 identify and assess opportunities for development of strategic
markets/industries
 manage procurement projects
Required knowledge

 relating to strategic procurement

 aspects of contract law, trade practices law, and commercial law relating to
contract management in the context of strategic procurement
to procurement
 competition policy theory, including competitive neutrality
 supply chain management
 legal requirements of government procurement
 financial rules and regulations
 implications of particular market arrangements
 supplier issues and supply chain management in the context of strategic
procurement
 procurement management processes
 cultural issues relating to strategic procurement and industry development

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to coordinate

strategic procurement consistently in accordance with legislative

assessment and evidence  use recognised methodologies to conduct market research and
required to demonstrate analysis
 undertake activities to influence supply markets, within
probity and other guidelines
 undertake industry development activities consistent with
government policy
 consider and select procurement methodologies that reflect
the complexity and risks of the strategic procurement being
undertaken
 develop performance measures for application during the
procurement process
 review procurement performance using performance
measures
 implement continuous improvement to procurement
processes.
occasions.

coordinating strategic procurement

procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for coordinating
 review of strategic procurement plans, supplier analysis,
market analysis, market development plans or activities, risk
assessments, procurement methodologies or procurement
approaches, formal sign-offs and approvals, and other
range of contexts
candidate.
competency which are difficult to assess directly. Candidates for
this qualification must demonstrate a high level of understanding
and practical workplace application of underpinning knowledge.
Questioning techniques should suit the language and literacy
levels of the candidate.
service
public sector
 PSPPROC604B Plan for strategic procurement

Range Statement

 franchising
 standing orders and deeds of standing orders
 cooperative procurement.
Commercial and policy  value or market share of business involved
factors may include:  complexity of marketplace
 degree of dependency of organisation programs on the
procurement
 capture and assessment of identified risks
 protection of both parties
 value for money
 basis of due performance
 broader governmental policies that may affect the
market or industry sector
 competitive neutrality
Markets may include:  local
 national

 international
 regional.
Suppliers may include:  commercial companies
 other governments, including commonwealth, state or
territory, local and international
 non-profit organisations
 in-house.
Criteria for assessment of  financial viability/capacity, including insurances
supplier capability may  past performance and infrastructure
include:  skills and experience of key personnel
 quality accreditations
 earned value performance management
 adequacy of proposed methodology and approach
 technical merit of the proposed goods or service
 industrial relations record
 willingness to work towards common goals
 observance and promotion of OHS requirements
 technical and contractual compliance
 compliance with commonwealth, state and territory
policies regarding discrimination, workplace relations,
environmental, sustainability and corporate social
responsibility
 compliance with codes of conduct, codes of practice
and expected standards of behaviour.
Market development  market management, including development of key
strategies may include: supply markets where these markets are not meeting
the organisation's needs
 supplier development, including identification of new
local suppliers, development of the capabilities of
existing suppliers and development of new products
 reverse marketing
 tactics to increase skill levels of suppliers, particularly
in dealing with government
 creating the supplier environment
 communicating changes
 procurement strategies, including splitting contracts,
short-term development contracts, inviting companies
to work together where each has skills.

government
 industry bodies
 lobby groups and special user groups.
Whole-of-life  benchmarks of expected financial performance
considerations may  calculations of discounted cash flows
include:  net present value
 return on investment
 transition costs in establishing initial contract
 transition costs in renewing or extending contract
 net return or cost on disposal of assets.
Teams may include:  financial
 legal
 technical
 functional
 engineering
 scientific and research
 human resource
 commercial or business
 consultants.
Performance measures  purchase price reduction
may include:  cost reduction
 value of additional negotiated benefits
 improvement in payment terms
 improved warranties
 cost-saving measures
 new sources of supply
 substitute goods and services
 improved supplier performance
 reduction of demand
 improved access to market information for early
identification of supply problems
 improved supply chain efficiencies
 reduction if risk exposure
 improved supplier attitude
 eliminating supply monopolies
 improved participation of local suppliers.
Range of procurement  easy to secure supply and high relative expenditure
 easy to secure supply and low relative expenditure

activities may include:  difficult to secure supply and low relative expenditure
 difficult to secure supply and high relative expenditure.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC606B Negotiate strategic procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC606B Negotiate strategic procurement
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to negotiate strategic procurement agreements within established
guidelines, policies and procedures. It includes planning and preparing for negotiation, and
undertaking and finalising the negotiation process for strategic procurement.
In practice, negotiating strategic procurement may occur in the context of other generalist and
business case, planning for strategic procurement, coordinating strategic procurement, and
managing strategic contracts.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Plan and prepare 1.1. Input and advice are obtained from key stakeholders
for strategic and the procurement and negotiating context is
procurement identified.
negotiations 1.2. Information is gathered on suppliers and a best
alternative to negotiating an agreement is developed.
1.3. Objectives, targets and bottom line position are
determined for negotiations.
1.4. Composition of negotiating team and limits on
negotiators' authority are determined according to
1.5. Negotiation process, timeframes and strategies are
determined to suit complexity of procurement and
supplier characteristics.
1.6. Negotiation plan/directive is developed that
identifies negotiation roles of team members, lead
negotiator, negotiating styles, tactics and
boundaries/limits of authority to suit the procurement
activity.
1.7. Negotiation plan is authorised and signed off
2. Undertake strategic 2.1. Negotiations are opened, supplier tactics identified,
procurement and issues and options explored to identify mutually
negotiations compatible interests.
2.2. Minor and major issues are dealt with and
concessions to terms and conditions are negotiated to
improve overall value for money of the procurement.
2.3. Concessions are made such that agreements remain
consistent with original intentions and with
procurement, organisational objectives and probity
requirements.
2.4. If negotiations stall, tactics are used to break
deadlocks and continue negotiations according to
negotiation plan and organisational policy and
procedures.
2.5. Negotiations are conducted and an offer is made in
accordance with legislative requirements, organisational
policy and procurement guidelines.
3. Finalise strategic 3.1. Negotiations are closed and agreements are finalised
procurement according to procurement guidelines.
negotiations 3.2. Where agreement is not possible immediately,
communication channels are kept open while additional

support, arguments and supporting evidence are

obtained.
3.3. Where agreement is not possible and the best
alternative is to be pursued instead, negotiations are
terminated in a way that preserves the relationship with
the supplier for possible future business and deters the
possibility of legal liability.
3.4. Where agreements may have wider implications for
procurement and the organisation, those implications are
considered and necessary consultation is carried out.
3.5. Details and outcomes of negotiations are
documented according to organisational policy and
procedures.


Required skills
 achieve negotiation outcomes desired by the organisation
 manage teams of expert negotiators in functions such as finance, legal,
technical and engineering
 identify and apply strategies and tactics for breaking deadlocks during a
negotiation
 identify and assess negotiation approaches to yield results
 manage procurement projects

Required knowledge
 relating to strategic procurement, including environmental purchasing guidance
negotiation of strategic procurement arrangements
to negotiation
 legal requirements of government contracting
 implications of particular contracting arrangements
 cultural issues relating to strategic procurement and industry development

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to negotiate for

strategic procurement consistently in accordance with legislative

assessment and evidence  prepare negotiation plans (or similar) for strategic
required to demonstrate procurements
 implement negotiation plans
 respond flexibly, but within the boundaries of the plan, to
issues, deadlocks and other situations that arise during
negotiations
 finalise strategic procurement negotiations with an agreement
that captures the negotiated positions of all parties
 act within own delegations and promptly escalate issues to
higher authority when required
 uphold high standards of public sector ethics and behaviour
when negotiating with potential suppliers.
occasions.

negotiating strategic procurement
procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for planning for

 review of negotiation process used, negotiation plans,

negotiation directives, contracts or other agreements reached,
notes from negotiations, risk assessments, formal sign-offs and
approvals, and other documentation prepared or reviewed by
the candidate in a range of contexts
candidate.

service
public sector

Range Statement

 industry bodies
 franchising
 standing orders
 cooperative procurement
Procurement and  nature of procurement in terms of:
negotiating context may  risk
include:  expenditure
 complexity
 nature of supply market, such as:

 fully competitive
 dominated by a few large suppliers
 sole supplier
 unsophisticated suppliers
 rural and remote issues
 one-off negotiation versus need to maintain long-term
relationship
 existing relationship with supplier. including:
 previous negotiations
 supplier's business approach to government as client
 state of current relationship
 political or community sensitivities
 skill and experience of negotiating team
 balance of power in the negotiations
Negotiating team  financial
members may include:  legal
 technical
 functional
 engineering
 scientific and research
 human resource
 commercial or business
Negotiating styles may  competitive
include:  accommodating
 avoidance
 compromising
 collaborative
Terms and conditions  technical support aspects, such as:
may include:  warranties
 life-cycle support
 maintenance agreements
 financial aspects, such as:
 deposits
 payment terms
 discounts
 travel costs
 cancellation penalties
 risk management aspects
 management information

 government support
 timeframes
 performance incentives and penalties
 general matters, such as subcontracting
 contract price
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC607A Manage strategic contracts Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC607A Manage strategic contracts
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competencies required to manage contracts for strategic purchases, to
effectively minimise risks and achieve value for money to meet an organisation's core
objectives. It includes managing the establishment, performance and evaluation of strategic
contracts.
In practice, managing strategic contracts may occur in the context of other generalist and
business case, planning for strategic procurement, coordinating strategic procurement and
negotiating strategic procurement.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Manage contract 1.1. Requirements of contracts and strategic initiatives
establishment are discussed, clarified and agreed by all parties.
1.2. Responsibilities for establishing and carrying out
procedures are assigned to achieve contract outcomes.
1.3. Effective communication strategies and processes
are established and implemented to assist ongoing
communication between internal and external
stakeholders and contractors.
1.4. Relationship management is undertaken of all levels
of personnel involved in procurement and contract
management, within probity boundaries.
1.5. Strategic relationships are established and managed
within probity boundaries to improve procurement
capability and performance.
1.6. Risk management plans are updated according to
2. Manage contract 2.1. Progress of contracts is monitored against set targets
performance and performance measures to ensure success of
2.2. Should monitoring find that set targets, performance
measures and probity requirements are not being met,
action is taken to rectify performance in a timely
manner.
2.3. Advice and support are provided to solve problems,
make improvements and maintain progress.
2.4. Disputes are managed promptly according to
contractual conditions to achieve resolution and
maintain contract performance and progress.
2.5. Opportunities to continuously improve procurement
outcomes are sought and negotiated with contractors.
2.6. Approvals are provided or gained for contract
variations that are negotiated and agreed between the
parties.
2.7. Opportunities are provided for stakeholders and
contractors to have input into and receive feedback on
progress during the performance of the contract.
2.8. Internal and external stakeholders are engaged as
necessary throughout the life of the contract to maintain
progress.
3. Manage contract 3.1. Evaluation of contract performance is undertaken
evaluation relative to planned performance measures and in

consultation with stakeholders and contractors.

3.2. Where stakeholders and contractors do not agree,
dispute resolution is undertaken according to
3.3. Conclusions are detailed against agreed criteria to
provide a complete picture of performance of
contractors, organisation's procurement processes and
value for money.
3.4. Performance of strategic initiatives is measured
relative to planned outcomes in consultation with
industry and other stakeholders.
3.5. Lessons learnt from evaluations of contracts and
strategic initiatives are documented according to
organisational requirements and used to continuously
improve future procurement activities.
3.6. Contractors and stakeholders are advised of
evaluation outcomes in a timely manner according to
organisational guidelines.


Required skills
 identify and resolve strategic contract management issues
context of managing strategic contracts
 identify, assess and implement opportunities for performance improvement
practices in the context of managing strategic contracts
 manage strategic procurement contracts, contract management plans and
sub-plans
Required knowledge


 relating to managing strategic contracts, including environmental purchasing
guidance
managing strategic contracts
to management of contracts and relationships with contractors
 legal requirements of government contracting
 implications of particular contracting arrangements
 procurement management processes
 cultural issues relating to contract management and industry development
to managing strategic contracts

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in managing strategic

contracts consistently and in accordance with legislative and

assessment and evidence  develop contract management plans and sub-plans suited to
required to demonstrate the nature of the contracts
 establish contract management relationships with stakeholders
using strategic techniques such as start up workshops, service
level agreements, etc.
 implement contract management plans
 manage contractors to ensure the delivery of contract
outcomes, using flexibility and initiative to deal with issues as
they arise
 implement contract performance measures
 provide contractors with performance feedback
 deal promptly and proactively with contract disputes and refer
to higher authority when this is not possible
 communicate effectively with internal and external
stakeholders about the operation of contracts
occasions.

managing strategic contracts


procedures
strategic contracts
 review of contract management plans and related sub-plans,
such as transition plans, probity plans, contract variations,
contract performance reports and reviews, budgets, negotiation
notes from meetings with contractors, risk assessments, formal
sign-offs and approvals, contract closure reports, and other
range of contexts
candidate.

service
public sector
 PSPPROC606B Negotiate strategic procurement.

Range Statement
Contracts and strategic  non-traditional procurement and finance activities

initiatives may include:  strategic procurement activities, such as industry
development
agreement
 public private partnerships (PPP)
 purchases from suppliers
 coordinated procurement arrangements
 whole of government procurement arrangements
 cooperative procurement arrangements.
Stakeholders may  end users
include:  customers or clients
 sponsors
 current or potential providers or suppliers
 industry bodies
Monitoring may involve:  progress meetings and regular progress reports from
contractor
 visits to contractor's premises
 provision of samples
 tests and verification
 independent audit
 end-user feedback.
Contract variation may  targets
include modification of:  performance measures
 procurement plans
 resourcing

 monitoring and evaluation processes.

Evaluation of contractor  strengths and weaknesses
performance may  client acceptance of service delivery (client
include: satisfaction)
 meeting delivery and completion dates
 compliance with other contractual requirements
 performance in relation to relevant policy objectives,
such as industry development, care for the
environment, OHS and affirmative action
 achievements of the contractor in developing
Australian and New Zealand supply networks
 general relationships, including effectiveness of
communication at all levels
 performance of key technical personnel
 acceptability and cost of whole-of-life technical
support, including lead times and availability of spares
and maintenance services
 achievements in innovation and quality improvement
programs
 acceptability and suitability for future agreements,
including potential status as an approved contractor
 adherence to codes of practice and codes of conduct.
Evaluation of  effectiveness of project management, including project
organisation's plan and responsibilities and accountabilities set out in
procurement processes it
may focus on:  quality of the business case, as indicated by
achievement of planned outcome and contribution to
program objectives
 effectiveness of contractor qualification processes
 value obtained in bid clarification and post-tender
negotiation
 effectiveness of project management systems, focusing
particularly on management information
 effectiveness of risk management, including corruption
risks and probity risks
 methods for controlling variations in cost, time, quality
and performance from initial planning to completion
 adequacy of safeguards against fraud, error and
impropriety
 incidence of material losses due to waste or
inefficiency
 overall performance in terms of cost, time, service and
quality
 compliance with procurement policy.

Value for money must  whole-of-life program benefits

reflect:  residual values
 disposal costs or disposal return
 costs of parts
 servicing and maintenance
 industry benchmarks.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC704A Influence and define strategic procurement Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC704A Influence and define strategic procurement
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the ability to formulate an organisation's strategic procurement goals and take
action to gain support for strategic procurement directions. It includes ensuring that the
organisation's strategic procurement direction is aligned with that of the government.
In practice, influencing strategic procurement directions may overlap with other public sector
or local government generalist and specialist work activities, such as providing strategic
direction, influencing strategic policy, leading and influencing ethical practice in the public
sector or local government, and undertaking strategic risk management.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Formulate strategic 1.1. Procurement direction is determined through open
procurement goals and ethical consultation with organisation's governing
body and stakeholders.
1.2. Strategic procurement goals are formulated that are
consistent with organisation's business plan, strategic
direction, mission and values, and take into account the
requirements, expectations and interests of organisation's
governing body and stakeholders.
1.3. Strategic procurement goals are developed that
support the ethos of the organisation and accurately
reflect its role in its environment.
1.4. Strategic procurement goals are developed that
support and align with the policy expectations of
government for the organisation.
1.5. Strategic procurement goals are reviewed to ensure
that opportunities and current and emerging trends are
reflected.
1.6. Strategic procurement goals are used to guide
procurement processes that deliver best value for
money.
2. Gain support for 2.1. Strategic procurement goals are presented to
strategic stakeholders in such a way as to gain their support.
procurement 2.2. Where stakeholder interests are in conflict, realistic
direction and rational compromises are found that balance
interests and acknowledge concerns.
2.3. Where less than full support is obtained,
consequences for the organisation are identified and
steps are taken to minimise potential problems.
2.4. Ongoing consultation with stakeholders is
maintained to ensure support for and ownership of the
organisation's strategic procurement goals.
2.5. Outcomes of the consultation process are recorded
and considered before procurement decisions are
reached.


Required skills
 consult and negotiate with stakeholders at the highest levels of organisations
and the community
 engage in strategic networking, within probity boundaries, with key
stakeholders
 convey complex ideas to a wide range of audiences
 persuade and influence, within probity boundaries, stakeholders and decision
makers
 read, write and approve business cases, plans, reports, submissions and other
high level complex documents
 provide leadership within the organisation
 identify, assess and implement opportunities for performance improvement
 undertake research and business analysis relating to strategic procurement and
high level business issues
 manage strategic procurement systems, processes and policies


Required knowledge
 financial rules and regulations relating to strategic procurement
 legal requirements of government procurement and contracting
 competition theory as it relates to strategic procurement
 supply chain principles
 strategic industry development
 strategic procurement planning processes
 procurement best practice standards

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in the ability to influence and

define strategic procurement consistently in accordance with

assessment and evidence  formulate strategic procurement goals in line with
required to demonstrate organisation's business direction and government policy
competency in this unit imperatives
 reflect the organisation's ethos in its strategic procurement
goals
 encourage wide input into the development of strategic
procurement goals and direction
 encourage consideration of innovation and new opportunities
in procurement direction for the organisation
 publicise organisation's strategic procurement goals and
direction
 work effectively with disagreement between stakeholders
 use recognised approaches to gain support for the strategic
procurement direction established for the organisation
 demonstrate effective implementation of goals even when full
support is not gained.
Candidates for this qualification must demonstrate a high level of
understanding of underpinning knowledge and the ability to
apply this to practical workplace situations.

procuring goods and services and managing contracts at the
strategic level
 published performance audits or similar relating to strategic
procurement issues
strategic procurement activities.


procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for influencing
strategic procurement direction
 preparation of formal written papers covering strategic
procurement issues
 review of strategic plans, strategic procurement plans,
long-term budgets, forward procurement plans, industry
engagement plans, responses to performance audits covering
strategic procurement issues and other documentation
prepared or reviewed by the candidate in a range of contexts
candidate.
candidate.
Guidance information for Sufficient evidence must be gathered to ensure the person can
assessment achieve the unit outcome and apply the competency in different
situations or environments.
 BSBFIM701A Manage financial resources
 BSBINN801A Lead innovative thinking and practice
 BSBREL701A Develop and cultivate collaborative
partnerships and relationships
 PSPETHC701A Lead and influence ethical practice in the
public sector
 PSPPROC705A Establish strategic procurement context
 PSPPROC706A Evaluate and improve strategic procurement
performance.

Range Statement
Determining procurement  stakeholder needs and intentions

direction may be influenced by:  end user requirements
 government policies
 potential provider/supplier base
 industry development requirements
 disposal of assets
 probity requirements
responsibility issues
Stakeholders may include:  end users
 customers or clients
 sponsors
 potential providers or suppliers
 current providers or suppliers
government
 industry bodies
Developed goals:  are challenging, realistic, achievable and measurable
 encourage members of the organisation to be creative
and innovative within procurement guidelines
Value for money may include:  fitness for purpose
 whole-of-life costs
 fair and reasonable market prices
 timely delivery
 post-delivery support
 effective warranties
 price basis
 disposal options

 whole of government perspective

 effects of government buying on market structure and
sustainability
 market competitiveness and sophistication
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPPROC705A Establish strategic procurement context Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPPROC705A Establish strategic procurement context
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competencies required to establish the broad context in which strategic
procurement takes place. It includes undertaking environmental analysis; analysing,
developing and monitoring procurement capability; influencing and developing strategic
industries; and establishing and managing risk exposure. It also includes understanding the
government and political context for strategic procurement.
In practice, establishing the strategic procurement context may overlap with other public
sector generalist and specialist work activities, such as providing strategic direction,
influencing strategic policy, leading and influencing ethical practice in the public sector or
local government, and undertaking strategic risk management.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Analyse the 1.1. Knowledge of the legal, political and financial
procurement environment is applied to establish strategic context.
environment 1.2. Relationship between the organisation and its
procurement environment is examined and defined.
1.3. Existing and potential stakeholders and their
strengths and weaknesses are identified.
1.4. Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats are
identified using information that is up-to-date, reflects
emerging and predicted trends, and takes account of the
possible future procurement interests and activities of
the organisation and government directions.
1.5. Organisation's procurement strategies and plans are
adjusted in light of information gathered, and
comparative targets are identified.
1.6. Any case for possible collaboration with other
organisations is supported by evidence, analysed for
risks, and is consistent with organisational plans and
future directions.
2. Analyse 2.1. Organisation's strengths, weaknesses, opportunities
procurement and threats are considered in light of internal and/or
capability external factors and organisation's strategic procurement
goals.
2.2. Analyses of organisational capability take into
account possible future procurement interests and
activities of the organisation, its strategic industries,
collaborators, requirements of government and other
organisations.
2.3. Suggestions for improvements to existing
organisational structures and procurement systems are
made that are realistic and achievable and will aid
achievement of the procurement mission statement and
strategies drawn from both internal and external
stakeholders.
2.4. Consultation on proposed improvements is
undertaken with those affected, in time for their views to
be taken into account.
2.5. Proposed improvements are justified on the basis of
known internal and external factors, and take into
account stakeholder needs and expectations.
3. Develop and 3.1. Improvements to develop procurement capability
monitor are implemented in time to meet new circumstances.
procurement

capability 3.2. Practical requirements for implementing

improvements are comprehensively defined and
communicated to those affected.
3.3. Difficulties associated with implementing
improvements are identified as early as possible in order
to minimise their effect.
3.4. Implemented improvements to organisational
structures and procurement systems are monitored,
reviewed and modified as required to assist achievement
of procurement outcomes.
4. Influence and 4.1. Strategic industries are monitored and opportunities
develop strategic are taken to influence key opinion formers and decision
industries makers to change, encourage and nurture industry
capability.
4.2. Problems, limitations and new opportunities in
strategic industries are identified in response to internal
and external factors and are based on quantitative and
qualitative data.
4.3. Ethical methods are used to influence strategic
industries, consistent with the organisation's values and
procurement policies, and sensitive to the values and
practices of key opinion formers and decision makers.
5. Establish and 5.1. Total organisational risk is defined, analysed and
manage risk monitored to minimise loss and maximise opportunity.
exposure 5.2. Risk management system is established,
implemented and maintained that is consistent with the
organisation's strategic context, goals, risk management
policies and nature of its business.
5.3. Performance of risk management system is
monitored, reviewed and modified to reflect
procurement opportunities and current and emerging
trends.


Required skills
 consult and negotiate with stakeholders at the highest levels of organisations
and the community
 engage in strategic networking, within probity boundaries, with key
stakeholders
 convey complex ideas to a wide range of audiences
 persuade and influence, within probity boundaries, stakeholders and decision
makers
 read, write and approve business cases, plans, reports, submissions and other
high level complex documents
 provide leadership within the organisation
 manage procurement performance and identify, assess and implement
opportunities for performance improvement
 undertake research and business analysis relating to strategic procurement and
high level business issues
 manage strategic procurement systems, processes and policies


Required knowledge
 risk management systems
 financial rules and regulations relating to strategic procurement
 legal requirements of government procurement and contracting
 competition theory as it relates to strategic procurement
 strategic industry development
 strategic procurement planning processes
 delegation authorities
 organisational procurement performance
 procurement best practice standards
 OHS requirements relevant to strategic procurement

Evidence Guide
Overview of assessment Competency must be demonstrated in establishing a strategic

procurement context consistently and in accordance with

assessment and evidence  use recognised techniques to analyse the procurement
required to demonstrate environment, including state of the supply market, stakeholder
competency in this unit issues, and organisational and government context for the
procurement
 use recognised techniques to analyse the buying organisation's
procurement capability
 make recommendations to improve and develop procurement
capability
 implement improvements to procurement capability
 use ethical methods to influence and develop strategic
industries to improve value for money opportunities
 apply sophisticated risk management techniques.
Candidates for this qualification must demonstrate a high level of
understanding of underpinning knowledge and the ability to apply
this to practical workplace situations.

procuring goods and services and managing contracts at the
strategic level
 published performance audits or similar relating to strategic
procurement issues
strategic procurement activities.
procedures
 review of strategies and approaches adopted for establishing

strategic procurement context

 preparation of formal written papers covering strategic
procurement issues
 review of strategic plans, strategic procurement plans,
long-term budgets, risk assessments, industry assessments,
supplier capability assessments, market research, industry
engagement plans, responses to performance audits covering
strategic procurement issues and other documentation prepared
or reviewed by the candidate in a range of contexts
candidate.
which are difficult to assess directly. Candidates for this
qualification must demonstrate a high level of understanding and
practical workplace application of underpinning knowledge.
Questioning techniques should suit the language and literacy levels
of the candidate.
Guidance information Sufficient evidence must be gathered to ensure the person can
for assessment achieve the unit outcome and apply the competency in different
situations or environments.
 BSBFIM701A Manage financial resources
 BSBINN801A Lead innovative thinking and practice
 BSBREL701A Develop and cultivate collaborative
partnerships and relationships
 PSPETHC701A Lead and influence ethical practice in the
public sector
 PSPPROC704A Influence and define strategic procurement
direction
 PSPPROC706A Evaluate and improve strategic procurement
performance.

Range Statement
Strategic context may  financial

include:  operational
 competitive
 political
 public perception or image
 social
 cultural
 client
 legal aspects of organisation's functions
 nature of supplier market
 environmental and sustainability issues
 corporate social responsibility.
Stakeholders may  end users
include:  customers or clients
 sponsors
 potential providers or suppliers
 current providers or suppliers
 industry bodies
Collaboration may  public private partnerships (PPP)
include:  strategic financing arrangements
 build, own, operate and transfer type arrangements
 cooperative procurement opportunities with other public
sector organisations
 lead agency arrangements.
Factors may include:  value of business
 complexity of marketplace
 capacity of market

 supply chain
 political influence
 political imperatives
 budgetary constraints
 collaborative arrangements
 environmental issues
 value for money considerations
 degree of dependency of organisation on procurement
 where and why the need arises and for which unit or
location
 level of risk, complexity and sensitivity of the
procurement
 new capability or replacement/enhancement of existing
resources
 intellectual property ownership
 policy requirements or changes, e.g. ethical and social.
Procurement capability  procurement systems, structures and processes used in
may include: organisation
 procurement guidance documents developed by
organisation
 procurement or other relevant capability frameworks
 staff profile in terms of experience, skills and knowledge
 procurement training programs.
Industry capability may  structure of marketplace
include:  impact of globalisation
 location of suppliers
 maturity and sophistication of suppliers
 capacity of industry to absorb work in the volume that is
required
 willingness of industry to move into new areas of
business to provide required goods or services
 staffing profiles of industry and skills shortages or
surpluses
 industry training programs.
Organisational risks  supplier failure to meet agreements
may include:  government failure to meet agreements
 political and public sensitivities
 community lobbying
 asset security and threat management
 information security and threat management
 physical security and threat management

 health management issues

 industrial relations issues
 terrorism and world events
 impact of globalisation
 contingency management and business continuity
 environmental and sustainability issues
 corporate social responsibility issues
 probity risks.
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field

PSPREG411A Gather information through interviews Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPREG411A Gather information through interviews

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers gathering information through interviews that do not result in a formal record
of interview in the legal sense. Interviews may be conducted in a range of locations for a
range of reasons. They may be overt or covert. The unit includes preparing for the interview,
conducting the interview, and reviewing and correlating interview information.
Verbal questioning and other interactions undertaken outside a formal interview structure are
not addressed in this unit as these are covered in other communication units in the Training
Package, such as PSPGOV412A Use advanced workplace communication strategies.
In practice, gathering information through interviews may overlap with other generalist or
specialist public sector work activities such as acting ethically, exercising regulatory powers,
applying government processes, gathering and analysing information, assessing compliance,
receiving and validating information.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




1. Prepare for 1.1 The need for an interview is determined, and the context and
interview requirements are established in accordance with organisational
and legislative requirements.
1.2 Interview planning is undertaken to ensure desired outcomes
are achieved.
1.3 Interview arrangements are made in accordance with legislative
1.4 Materials to be used during the interview are prepared as
required.
1.5 Advice is obtained as required on legislative or administrative
issues relating to the conduct of the interview.
2. Conduct interview 2.1 Commencement of the interview is undertaken following
organisational protocols and complies with legislative
requirements.
2.2 Interview is conducted in a planned manner, with the sequence
evident to others who may use the outcomes.
2.3 Questions are selected and used that are relevant,
comprehensive, appropriate to the situation and the interviewee
and adhere to the rules of evidence.
2.4 Problem solving skills are used to test, compare and contrast
information as it is provided to influence the direction of further
questions.
2.5 Information is recorded in accordance with organisational
2.6 Personal conduct is maintained in accordance with legal and
organisational requirements and takes account of cultural and
ethical issues.
3. Review and correlate 3.1 Information is reviewed and clarified to ensure its relevance and
information sufficiency prior to concluding the interview.
3.2 Information is transcribed if necessary and sensitive information
is dealt with in accordance with organisational policy and
procedures.
3.3 Detailed analysis is conducted, and incomplete and irregular
information is identified and noted or followed up in accordance
with the nature of the interview and organisational
requirements.
3.4 Behavioural characteristics of significance to the purpose of the
interview are confirmed.
3.5 Post-interview activities are undertaken as required in


this unit.
Skill requirements
 using interviewing techniques to suit a range of situations and interviewees
 engaging in exchanges of sometimes complex oral information
 varying style and language structure to suit a range of interviewees
 using techniques to deal with difficult interview situations
 using a range of communication techniques that include establishing rapport,
listening, probing, reflecting, negotiation, conflict resolution
 using critical analysis, evaluation and deductive reasoning
 using problem solving and decision making related to interviewing
 using judgment, to test the veracity of information and vary questions and
interviewing techniques to suit
 preparing interview documentation requiring accuracy of expression and
formality in structure and format
 operating technical and electronic equipment, where necessary
 applying public sector standards and legislation such as occupational health and
safety and environment in the context of interviewing
 application of legislation to interviewing including privacy, ethics,
confidentiality and freedom of information
 organisational policies and guidelines relating to interviews
 questioning techniques
 legal and ethical considerations for conducting interviews
 cultural awareness in the context of interviewing
 procedures for using interpreters
 legal and organisational requirements for documentation
 legal requirements relating to recording of information
 public sector legislation such as occupational health and safety and
environment, relating to interviews

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
 PSPREG401C Exercise regulatory powers
 PSPREG403B Assess compliance
 PSPREG415A Receive and validate information
Framework)
 information gathered via interviews in a range of (3 or
gathering information through interviews
situations likely to be encountered when gathering
information through interviews
likely to be encountered when gathering information

through interviews, including coping with difficulties,

 information gathered via interviews in a range of (3 or
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 observation
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Contexts may include:  informal interviews

 interviews against set criteria
 interviews to assess applications
 initial investigation of complaints
 audits
 intelligence gathering
 threat assessment
 security vetting
 overt interviews
 covert interviews, under specific legislative powers
Requirements may  interview location/environment:
include:  office
 designated interview room
 in the field (including overseas)
 private home
 at a client/contractor location
 in other agencies
 timing
 personnel present:
 senior staff
 colleagues
 interpreter
 support persons
 method of recording:
 tape recording
 videotaping
 hand written
 typewritten/word processed
 file notes
 equipment:
 electronic equipment
 recording equipment

 computer equipment
 availability of interviewee
Organisational and  organisational policy, procedures and guidelines
legislative requirements  international treaties and protocols
may include:  cross-jurisdictional protocols
 organisation's strategic objectives
 national strategic objectives
 security constraints
 public sector codes of conduct/ethics
 confidentiality requirements
 Commonwealth, State/Territory or Local Government
legislation such as:
 Freedom of Information Act 1982
 Privacy Act 1988
 Archives Act
 Crimes Act 1914 and Criminal Code 1995
 Evidence Act
 the organisation's enabling legislation
Interview planning may:  purpose
include  structure
 context
 expectations
 intended/desired outcomes
 criteria for assessment
 risk management considerations
 key questions in sequential order, highlighting main points
 assessing sources of information
 interview strategies appropriate to the situation and purpose
of the interview, such as:
 direct questioning
 empathetic questioning
 investigative interviewing
 exclusion of leading questions
 avoidance of cross-examination
 safety requirements for interviewer, interviewee and others
present
Materials may include:  paper-based and electronic documents, including:
 maps
 photographs

 videotapes
 physical objects and materials
 audiotapes
Commencement  introductions
protocols may include:  producing identification/authority
 explaining the purpose, process and recording requirements
 confirming confidentiality of information, if appropriate to
the interview purpose
Questioning techniques  summarising
may include:  re-phrasing
 paraphrasing
 open and closed questions
 cognitive interviewing
 using silence
 using and recognising body language
 identifying and overcoming barriers to communication
 investigative interviewing techniques
Recording may include:  hand written record of interview
 typewritten record of interview
 audiotapes
 videotapes
Dealing with sensitive  information security procedures
information may include:
Post-interview activities  interview report

may include:  interview assessment report
 informal judgment
 recommendations with supporting reasons/evidence
 suggesting solutions to problems encountered during the
interview
 informing stakeholders of outcome of interview
 providing briefings on outcomes
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.

Competency field
Regulatory.

PSPREG418A Advise on progress of investigations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPREG418A Advise on progress of investigations

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers ongoing review of activities throughout an investigation to ensure the
effective outcome of the investigation. It includes summarising and reporting on the progress
of an investigation, identifying and analysing problems and recommending further action.
In practice, advising on the progress of investigations may overlap with other generalist or
applying government processes.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Summarise and 1.1 Ongoing monitoring of the investigation, changes in direction
report on progress of and resource implications are recorded and reported.
investigation 1.2 Progress, problems and resource usage are reviewed in
accordance with the investigation plan.
1.3 Progress reports/briefings are prepared and disseminated in
1.4 Records and systems are secured and updated regularly in
2. Identify and analyse 2.1 Problems are recorded and suggestions made for resolving or
problems referring them.
2.2 Modifications to the process of investigation are suggested and
solutions are implemented where practicable.
2.3 Referral of the investigation to another agency is recommended
where jurisdiction/resources make this the preferred option
under organisational policy and procedures.
2.4 If no further action is to be taken on an investigation, reasons
and supporting documentation are recorded in accordance with
2.5 If an investigation is terminated, recommendations for referral
to another organisation are made if appropriate and are
documented for the organisation's information in future similar
cases.
3. Recommend further 3.1 Any areas of potential risk identified by/affecting the
action investigation are notified in accordance with organisational
policy and procedures, together with suggestions for early
intervention measures.
3.2 Suggestions are made regarding further avenues of enquiry.
3.3 Follow-up tasks are identified and actioned in accordance with


this unit.
Skill requirements
 undertaking analysis and problem-solving
 engaging in exchanges of sometimes complex oral information
 varying style and language during briefings to suit a range of audiences
 writing summaries, briefing papers and reports requiring clarity, accuracy and
formality of structure and language
 applying public sector standards and legislation such as occupational health and
safety and environment in the context of investigations
 legislation relating to the offences under investigation
 procedures for investigation
 administrative legislation relating to the organisation
 organisational guidelines for reporting and information management
 legal and organisational requirements for documentation
 ethical standards
relating to the conduct of investigations

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
 PSPREG401C Exercise regulatory powers
 PSPREG404C Investigate non-compliance
 PSPREG412A Gather and manage evidence
 PSPREG419A Finalise and report on investigations
Framework)
 advice on the progress of investigations in a range of (3 or
investigations
situations likely to be encountered when advising on the
progress of an investigation
likely to be encountered when advising on the progress of
investigations, including coping with difficulties,


 advice on the progress of investigations in a range of (3 or
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 demonstration
 observation
 portfolios
 projects
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Progress in an  effective administrative processes for all aspects of the

investigation requires: investigation
 appropriate resource allocation
 correct evidence collection and management
 availability of witnesses and evidence
 authorisations (e.g. from an authorised justice)
Briefings may include:  written
 oral
 formal
 informal
Securing records and  standard security procedures
systems may include:  security classification of records
 restricting access to records
 restricting electronic access to systems
 restricting physical access to systems and records
Modifications may  re-evaluating the resources of the investigation
include:  referring the matter to another organisation
Areas of potential risk  those affecting the investigation:

may include:  public interest in investigation
 hostile witness/es
 ill-health of witness
 flight risk of those being investigated
 those identified by the investigation:
 potential for fraud/corruption elsewhere in an
organisation or other organisations
 inadequate security arrangements uncovered
 likelihood of other potential perpetrators
Follow-up tasks may  referrals to prosecution organisations
include:  completion of documentation
 referral for recovery action, which may be accompanied by
liquidity analysis
 reporting results to superiors

 updating files
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Regulatory.

PSPSEC602A Manage security awareness Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PSPSEC602A Manage security awareness

to content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers activities required in promoting and disseminating the organisation's
approach to security management internally and to external clients and the broader
community. It includes disseminating the security strategy, championing security awareness
and marketing security management both inside and outside the organisation.
In practice, managing security awareness may overlap with other generalist or specialist
public sector workplace activities such as managing compliance with legislation and ethics
requirements, managing risk, networking, implementing policy, managing change.
of endorsement.

Not applicable.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Disseminate security 1.1 Profile of security management is raised to highest level to
policy indicate its key focus in the organisation.
1.2 Security standards for the organisation are articulated in a
manner suited to the level and experience of staff.
1.3 Ways in which the security policy and plan contribute to the
achievement of organisational corporate goals are articulated.
1.4 Roles and responsibilities of key people in the organisation
regarding implementation of security measures are articulated.
1.5 Dissemination methods take account of various audiences and
information is presented in a way that meets particular audience
needs.
2. Champion security 2.1 Leadership and motivation are provided in highlighting the role
awareness of security processes as integral to effective management
practices.
2.2 Methods underpinning the championing of security awareness
are based on an in-depth understanding of the organisation's
culture and structure, and the nature of both internal and
external clients.
2.3 A positive tone is set in the organisation regarding security
through engendering trust and confidence in security measures.
2.4 Guidelines for the establishment of formal and informal
networks are established to nurture cooperative and ethical
client relationships.
3. Market security 3.1 Potential activities to promote security and its importance to the
management inside overall objectives of the organisation are identified and assessed
and outside the in relation to the security policy and plan in place.
organisation 3.2 Implementation is coordinated with management and key
stakeholders who play a role in implementation.
3.3 Shared ownership of security processes is encouraged through
ongoing consultation and information sharing.
3.4 Promotion activities are organised to raise stakeholder
awareness of both the ethical and financial aspects of security
and to facilitate endorsement of the concept and practice of
security management.
3.5 Trends are monitored in order to ensure currency in the
organisation's security measures.


this unit.
Skill requirements
 applying leadership
 synthesising and articulating broader policy issues
 using a range of communication, negotiation and presentation styles to suit
different audiences and purposes
 applying occupational health and safety and environmental procedures in the
context of managing security awareness
 corporate plan and strategic directions of the organisation
 structure and core business activities of the organisation
 organisation's security policy and plans
 external expectations placed on the organisation by external stakeholders such
as government
 the incorporation of constraints imposed by the culture of the organisation and
operational factors into security management issues and practices
 organisational change practices
 public sector legislation, policies and procedures including anti-discrimination
and diversity legislation, occupational health and safety, and environment in the
context of security management

Evidence Guide
Package.

together unit:Nil
public service
the public sector
 PSPSEC601A Define information systems framework
Framework)
 management of security awareness in a range of (3 or more)
carry out assessment  legislation, policy and procedures relating to government
security management
 security guidelines and standards
security awareness situations likely to be encountered

likely to be encountered when managing security awareness,

 management of security awareness in a range of (3 or more)
backgrounds
 women
 young people
 older people
of 2 or more of:
 case studies
 portfolios
 questioning
 scenarios
courses

Range Statement
explained here.
Information may include:  instructions

 guidelines
 case briefings
 research outcomes
 outcomes of analyses
Stakeholders may  relevant government Ministers
include:  agency staff and senior management
 agency clients
 contractors and consultants
 suppliers and customers
 industry associations
 other agencies with a mandate for security management
 law enforcement agencies
 prosecution agencies
 internal/external audit
Trends are monitored  research of national and international material
through:  surveys
 data matching
 internal and external networks
 information on security breaches
 aggregated national data relating to government security
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Competency field
Government Security Management.

PUACOM007B Liaise with other organisations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PUACOM007B Liaise with other organisations
3 PUA12 V2.1 Editorial changes.
2 PUA12 V2 Layout adjusted. Application added.
1 PUA00 V8.1 Primary release.
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competency to develop networks and relationships and liaise effectively
with other organisations.

This unit applies to workers who have a role that includes formally liaising with other
organisations in order to increase response effectiveness and community safety. While all
workers should engage in networking opportunities with like-minded organisations in order to
increase the effective of response in incidents, this unit is focussed at a more strategic liaisons,
from local public safety group level to organisation wide.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
PUACOM005B Foster a positive organisational image in the community (Fire sector specific)



Elements describe the Performance Criteria describe the required performance
essential outcomes of a Unit needed to demonstrate achievement of the element.
of Competency. Where bold italicised text is used, further information is
detailed in the Range Statement. Assessment of
performance is to be consistent with the Evidence
Guide.

1. Establish networks and 1.1 Formal and informal networks are established to
relationships support ongoing and future liaisons and
collaboration.
1.2 Relationships are developed and used in a way
which provides identifiable benefits to the
organisation from shared expertise, information
and/or resources.
1.3 Participation in regular meetings and forums
supports mutual cooperation.
1.4 Consultation with affected and interested parties is
undertaken to support the organisational goals and
objectives.
2. Communicate and 2.1 Information is provided to other organisations in a
interact with other clear, concise and comprehensive manner.
organisations 2.2 Communication with other organisations is
conducted in accordance with organisational policy
and procedures.
2.3 Information from other organisations is gathered to
inform the improvement of services and to avoid
duplication of effort.


Required Skills
 chairing meetings
 networking and developing relationships
 public speaking
 using networks effectively
Required Knowledge
 awareness of role and responsibilities of other organisations
 chairing meetings
 knowledge of current practices and procedures for communicating in the workplace
 meeting protocols and procedures
 organisation's confidentiality requirements
 organisational policy and procedures relating to liaison with other organisations
 role
Evidence Guide
Critical aspects for It is essential for this unit that competence be
assessment and evidence demonstrated as follows:
required to demonstrate  Networks and relationships developed and used
competency in this unit effectively
 All information provided is accurate and clear
Evidence should be gathered over a period of time in a
range of actual or simulated workplace environments.
Context of and specific Context of assessment

resources for assessment On the job or in a simulated work environment.
Specific resources for assessment
No special requirements.

Range Statement
The Range Statement relates to the Unit of Competency as a whole. It allows for
different work environments and situations that may affect performance. Bold italicised
wording in the Performance Criteria is detailed below.
Affected and interested  local community
parties may include:  business community
 commonwealth
 state and territory and local governments
Organisational goals and  organisational performance standards
objectives may vary between  organisational personnel practices and guidelines
sectors and organisations and  organisational quality standards
may include:
 customer focussed service delivery
 community awareness of public safety issues
 effective response to
incidents/operations/emergencies
 community participation in public safety activities
 inter-organisation cooperation and collaboration
 organisational goals and objectives may vary
between sectors and organisations
Organisations may include:  public safety organisations
 government organisations
 emergency response organisations
 local
 state/territory and commonwealth
 government
 suppliers
 non-government organisations e.g. Red Cross
 Salvation Army
 volunteers
 rescue etc
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.

PUADEFVH001A Conduct recovery vehicle operations in a field environment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PUADEFVH001A Conduct recovery vehicle operations in a field

environment
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
Unit Descriptor This unit covers the competency required to undertake
recovery of broken down vehicles and equipment,
requiring the operation of specialist recovery vehicles
and equipment.
Recovery involves dispatching the recovery vehicle to
an incident site, retrieving disabled equipment and
moving to a place of repair.
This unit does not cover the extraction of the disabled
equipment by winching techniques, which is covered by
PUADEFVH002A Extract disabled equipment using
winching techniques in a field environment.

Application of the Unit This unit includes the skills and knowledge to lead a
small team to recover vehicles and equipment. Specialist
recovery vehicles and equipment includes the operation
of towing, lifting and winching equipment.
Personnel must be capable of assessing recovery
situations in remote environments and tasking personnel
to complete operations in isolation from supervision or
support.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.

Employability Skills This unit contains employability skills.
Pre-requisite Unit/s Nil

detailed in the Required Skills and Knowledge and/or
the Range Statement. Assessment of performance is to
be consistent with the Evidence Guide.


1. Prepare for recovery 1.1 Orders and instructions are received and
tasks confirmed
1.2 Recovery vehicle and equipment are checked
and prepared for deployment in accordance with
1.3 Resources required for operational tasks are
confirmed and organised
1.4 Recovery crew is briefed on task in accordance
with workplace procedures
1.5 Identified problems/shortfalls are reported to
appropriate personnel in accordance with
workplace procedures so corrective action can
occur prior to deployment
1.6 Occupational health and safety (OH&S)
requirements and recognised safety precautions
are applied throughout operation in accordance
with standard procedures
1.7 Environmentally sustainable work practices are
identified, assessed and implemented where
feasible
2. Deploy on recovery tasks 2.1 Recovery vehicle is deployed to recovery site in

accordance with workplace procedures
2.2 Liaison with disabled equipment stakeholders is
conducted to ensure everyone is aware of
recovery procedures


3. Recover disabled 3.1 Equipment casualty faults are diagnosed, where
equipment possible, to ensure recovery actions are the most
efficient and cost effective
3.2 Recovery situation is assessed in accordance
with workplace procedures to determine recovery
method
3.3 Safety risks associated with recovery task are
assessed and measures to ensure a safe working
environment are implemented in accordance with
3.4 Briefing of on site personnel is conducted and
tasks are allocated and supervised
3.5 Recovery tasks are completed in accordance with
3.6 Minor problems are dealt with in accordance
3.7 Major incidents outside scope of own
capabilities are reported to appropriate personnel
4. Transport disabled 4.1 Disabled equipment is secured to recovery

equipment vehicle in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and workplace procedures
4.2 Stability and braking capability of recovery
vehicle is tested to ensure it is safe to transport
disabled equipment
4.3 Recovery vehicle is driven to maintenance
facility
4.4 Unforseen incidents are managed as they occur


5. Finalise recovery tasks 5.1 Equipment casualty is handed over to owner or
recovered further in accordance with workplace
procedures
5.2 Documentation, including reports and returns,
are completed in accordance with workplace
procedures
5.3 Maintenance is supervised and conducted in
5.4 Faulty equipment is reported and actions are
taken in accordance with workplace procedures
5.5 Recovery crew is debriefed as required


Required Skills
 allocate appropriate materials and personnel to tasks
 communicate effectively in the workplace
 direct, brief, coordinate and monitor personnel
 interpret instructions and directions
 operate specialist recovery vehicles and equipment
 perform basic mathematical calculations
 solve task specific problems
Required Knowledge
 basic vehicle mechanical principles
 basic engineering principles including:
 material capabilities
 theory of levers and pulleys
 characteristics and capabilities of recovery vehicles and equipment
 functions and responsibilities of team members
 maintenance requirements and procedures
 organisational OH&S procedures relevant to field recovery operations
 recovery methods and procedures
 reporting requirements and procedures
 safety precautions associated with tasks
Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

EVIDENCE GUIDE

assessment and evidence  take into account the characteristics of both the
required to demonstrate equipment casualty and recovery equipment when
competency in this unit determining suitable recovery methods
 perform a lift/tow recovery of a light and a
medium/heavy rigid vehicle
 perform a trailer recovery involving a
medium/heavy rigid vehicle (or equivalent).
Competency should be demonstrated across a variety of
situations within the workplace.

resources for assessment Competency should be assessed in a field environment.
Access is required to:
 recovery vehicle, associated equipment and crew
 actual or simulated vehicle/equipment casualties
 specific workplace operating procedures and
publications.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Recovery vehicle and Hand tools

equipment may include Lifting and recovery equipment
Material handling equipment
Personal protective equipment
Recovery vehicle variants and associated equipment
Workshop equipment
Workplace procedures may Australian Standards

include Briefs
Duty statements
Legislative requirements
Manufacturers' handbooks, industry specifications and
technical instructions
OH&S regulations
Organisational policies and procedures
Procedure manuals
Relevant state/territory or federal legislation
Standard operating procedures
Written or verbal instructions
Equipment casualty faults  Damaged driveline

may include  Electrical system faults
 Engine/transmission faults
 Fuel system faults
Assessment of the recovery Available resources to conduct recovery
situation may include Capabilities of recovery vehicle and equipment
Environmental conditions
Faults within equipment casualty
Size and weight of equipment casualty
Safety risks associated with  Environmental conditions

RANGE STATEMENT
recovery tasks may include Equipment failures including:
 breakage of cables and chains
 component failure
 Exhaust fumes
 Exposure to hazardous substances
 Fatigue
 Manual handling of equipment
 Road hazards
 Unpredictable reaction to applied force
Briefing of on site personnel  Communication procedures
may include  Emergency procedures
 Recovery method
 Safety requirements
Recovery tasks may include  Lifting
 Towing
 Winching
Minor problems may  Avoidable damage to equipment casualty during
include recovery operations
 Minor malfunctions and breakages within recovery
equipment
 Unforeseen minor hazards
Major incidents may  Major malfunctions and/or breakages within
include recovery vehicles or equipment
 Requirements for recovering equipment casualty
exceeding capabilities of recovery vehicle
 Rollover or major damage to equipment casualty
 Serious injuries to on site personnel
Unforseen incidents may  Flat tyre
include  Loose load
 Loss of load
 Traffic accident
 Vehicle breakdown
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.

Corequisite Unit/s
Co-requisite Unit/s Nil

PUADEFVH002A Extract disabled equipment using winching techniques in a field environment Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
PUADEFVH002A Extract disabled equipment using winching

techniques in a field environment
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
Unit Descriptor This unit covers the competency required to assess
equipment and vehicles requiring recovery and to
employ suitable winching techniques and procedures to
extricate casualties utilising specialist recovery vehicles
equipped with motorised winching equipment.

Application of the Unit This unit applies to the operation of winching equipment
capable of extracting a range of vehicles and equipment.
Winching may be necessary to extract vehicles and
equipment which have become bogged or broken down
and due to terrain or environmental factors, cannot be
extracted by other means.
Typically, winching operations are conducted by
individuals acting independently or in charge of a small
team, isolated from assistance or supervision.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.

2017

Pre-requisite Unit/s Nil


2017

1. Respond to call for 1.1 Winching tasks are received and details are
assistance confirmed
1.2 Tasks are assessed to determine equipment
requirements
1.3 Recovery vehicle is checked and prepared for
task in accordance with workplace procedures
1.4 Recovery vehicle is deployed to casualty site in
preparation to conduct task
2. Assess winching task 2.1 Liaison is conducted with on site personnel
2.2 Equipment casualty is assessed to determine
suitability for winching
2.3 Site is inspected, hazards andobstacles
associated with winching are identified and
measures are implemented to overcome obstacles
2.4 Winching equipment requirements to extricate
casualty are determined to ensure recovery
vehicle and equipment are suitable for task
2.5 Winching procedure is developed taking into
account terrain conditions, requirements of
casualty, site, recovery equipment and vehicle
capabilities
2.6 Occupational health and safety (OH&S)
requirements are determined and applied during
winching operations
3. Prepare for winching 3.1 Equipment casualty is prepared for winching in

task accordance with winching procedure
3.2 Winching equipment is prepared in accordance
with winching procedure
3.3 Briefing of on site personnel is conducted and
tasks are allocated and supervised

2017

4. Extricate equipment 4.1 Winching process is closely controlled and
casualty using winch conducted in accordance with winching
procedure
4.2 Minor problems are dealt with as they arise
4.3 Assistance is sought from appropriate personnel
when major problems outside scope of own
capabilities occur
5. Finalise winching 5.1 Equipment casualty is handed over to owner or

operations recovered further in accordance with workplace
procedures
5.2 Winching equipment is recovered and inspected
for damage in accordance with workplace
procedures
5.3 Unserviceable equipment is reported and suitable
actions are taken in accordance with workplace
procedures
5.4 Equipment is maintained in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and workplace
procedures
5.5 Documentation is compiled and reports are made
in accordance with workplace procedures
5.6 Worksite is refurbished in accordance with

2017

Required Skills
 allocate appropriate materials and personnel to task
 assess risks
 brief and direct personnel
 communicate effectively in the workplace
 perform basic mathematical calculations
 provide reports and appropriate documentation
 solve problems relevant to task
Required Knowledge
 basic vehicle mechanical principles
 basic engineering principles including:
 theory of levers and pulleys
 material capabilities
 characteristics and capabilities of recovery vehicles and equipment
 maintenance requirements and procedures
 organisational OH&S procedures relevant to winching operations
 recovery methods and procedures
 reporting requirements and procedures
Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

2017
EVIDENCE GUIDE

assessment and evidence  conduct winching operations on ground which is
required to demonstrate soft enough to simulate the conditions encountered
competency in this unit when winching bogged vehicles
 conduct a winching operation to extricate a light and
a medium/heavy rigid vehicle
 utilise motorised winches, winch ropes and
associated fittings.
Competency should be demonstrated over time using a
variety of equipment casualties and situations which the
candidate is likely to encounter within the workplace.

resources for assessment Competency should be assessed in areas of difficult
terrain incorporating undulating ground.
Access is required to:
 recovery vehicles and winching equipment
 actual or simulated equipment casualties
 specific workplace operating procedures and
publications.

2017
Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Workplace procedures may Australian Standards

include Briefs
Duty statements
Legislative requirements
Manufacturers' handbooks, industry specifications and
technical instructions
OH&S regulations
Organisational policies and procedures
Procedure manuals
Relevant state/territory or federal legislation
Standard operating procedures
Written or verbal instructions
Equipment casualties may Construction equipment

include Light vehicles
Medium or heavy rigid vehicles
Plant equipment
Hazards associated with Environmental hazards

winching may include Equipment failure
Fatigue
Hazardous materials contained within equipment
casualties
Manual handling of heavy and/or awkward loads
Obstacles to winching may Distance between casualty and winching point

include Soil conditions
Terrain
Vegetation
Weather conditions

2017
RANGE STATEMENT
Winching equipment may Chains

include Joining devices including:
 hammerlocks
 oblong links
 shackles
 swivels
Pulleys
Winches
Winch ropes and fittings
Winching procedure may Attachment method

include Contingencies
Equipment layout
Mechanical advantage
Resources
Safety procedures
Sequence of events
Total pull required
Velocity ratio
OH&S requirements may Personal protective equipment

include Safety distances
Safety equipment
Warning devices
Briefing of on site personnel  Communication procedures

may include  Emergency procedures
 Safety requirements
 Winching procedures
Minor problems may  Avoidable damage to equipment casualty during
include winching operations
 Minor malfunctions and breakages within winching
equipment
Major problems may  Breakage of winch rope
include  Major malfunctions within winching equipment
 Requirements for extricating equipment casualty
exceeding capabilities of recovery vehicle

2017
RANGE STATEMENT
 Rollover of equipment casualty
 Serious injuries to on site personnel
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Corequisite Unit/s

PUAOPE001B Supervise response Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PUAOPE001B Supervise response
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
Unit Descriptor This unit covers the competency to supervise a response
by a small team to incidents and may include the use of
aircraft, which are time critical and/or potentially
threatening to life, property or the environment.
The unit includes the competency to proceed to the
incident, assess the incident, and plan and implement an
operational response and post-response activities.

Application of the Unit The application of this unit in the workplace - the
environments, complexities and situations involved -
will be written during Phase II of the Review of the
PUA00 Public Safety Training Package.
This text will be useful for the purposes of job
descriptions, recruitment advice or job analysis; where
possible, it will not be too job specific to allow other
industries to import it into other Training Packages,
where feasible.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite Unit/s PUAFIR302B Suppress urban fire OR PUAFIR303B
Suppress wildfire (Fire specific)




1.1 Requests for response are received and dealt with
in accordance with organisational policy and
1. Receive incident guidelines
response request
1.2 Relevant incident information is obtained and
assessed to enable personnel to make appropriate
preparations
1.3 An appropriate response is determined according
to the type of incident and information available
in accordance with organisational policies and
procedures
1.4 The location of the incident and the most
appropriate route to the incident are ascertained
2. Proceed to incident 2.1 Personnel, equipment and transport resources are
dispatched promptly, consistent with the nature
of the incident and the information available
2.2 Communication is established and maintained
2.3 An appropriate route to the incident is followed
to minimise response time
2.4 En-route hazards are recognised and negotiated
to minimise risk
2.5 Multi-vehicle response is conducted in
accordance with the organisation's procedures
3. Assess the incident 3.1 Observations are made en route to assist with
incident assessments
3.2 Assigned personnel's arrival at the incident is
confirmed according to organisational policies
and procedures
3.3 Communication with on-site personnel is
established
3.4 An initial assessment of the incident is carried
out promptly
3.5 Hazards or potential hazards are assessed and
minimised or controlled
3.6 Assigned resources to deal with the incident are
established at the earliest opportunity
3.7 The need for additional resources is identified
and resources requested in accordance with
3.8 Hazards are monitored during the incidents and
changes in the situation acted upon


4. Plan and implement an 4.1 A safe and effective operational environment is
operational response to established and maintained in accordance with
the incident occupational health and safety guidelines and
organisation's policies and procedures
4.2 Incident information is communicated to
assigned personnel clearly, accurately and in a
timely manner
4.3 Incident plan is developed based on available
information and organisational procedures
4.4 Strategies and tactics are determined and tasks
allocated to appropriate personnel
4.5 An incident plan is implemented, continually
monitored, reported and reviewed in the light of
additional information and communicated in
accordance with the organisation's policies and
procedures
4.6 Leadership and supervision are provided to
ensure that performance and practice are to
operational standards
4.7 Appropriate equipment and materials are
deployed to deal with the incident
4.8 Changes in the incident plan are communicated
to relevant personnel and organisations
5. Conclude operation 5.1 Incident is terminated in accordance with the
organisation's procedures
5.2 Incident records of incident actions and decisions
are maintained in accordance with the
organisation's requirements
5.3 Incident assessment is conducted in accordance
with the organisation's requirements
6. Supervise post-response 6.1 Equipment cleaning, repair, storage and
activities replenishment is supervised
6.2 Debriefing requirements are met
6.3 Post operation reports are prepared to
organisation's requirements
6.4 Welfare of team members is monitored and
appropriate action taken


Required Skills
 analyse an incident
 assess risks and apply safe work practices
 communicate effectively
 conduct an incident assessment
 conduct briefings and debriefings for aircraft based work
 deploy personnel and equipment to deal with the incident
 for aircraft based work the ability to work in an aircraft for an extended period
 make decisions
 respond promptly to an incident
 use communication equipment
Required Knowledge
 hazards/potential hazards and their effects
 knowledge of current navigational practices to perform navigation
 knowledge of current practices to perform conduct briefings and debriefings
 organisational policies and procedures relating to operations
Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE

EVIDENCE GUIDE
Critical aspects for It is essential for this unit that competence be

assessment and evidence demonstrated in implementation of an appropriate
required to demonstrate strategy to deal effectively with the incident
Evidence should be gathered over a period of time in a
range of actual or simulated workplace environments

resources for assessment Evidence of competent performance should be obtained
by observing an individual in responding to and dealing
with an actual or simulated incident operation and
supplemented by appropriate questions
Assessment of this competency will require access to
relevant transport, communication and emergency
equipment
Guidance information for Information that will assist or guide assessment will be
assessment written during Phase II of the Review of the PUA00
Public Safety Training Package.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Incidents may include fires

public disorder
crime
flood
storms
accident
hazardous materials incidents
rescues
Transport may include on-road

off-road
aviation
maritime
En route hazards may smoke

include crowds
traffic
unauthorised redirection
prevailing weather
road conditions
terrain
debris
tidal flow
spot fires
restricted areas
wires
masts/aerials
other aircraft
interference to communications

RANGE STATEMENT
Hazardous conditions may adverse weather and fire behaviour

include after-dark operations
difficult terrain
dangerous goods and substances
time pressure
level of visibility
structural collapse
Incident assessment may type and size of incident

include risk to life
property and environment
hazards/no go areas
climatic and weather conditions
capability of assigned personnel
adequacy of allocated equipment
information gathered from existing plans/databases
forecasts and meteorological profiles
crowds gathering
installed fire protection
type of building
building construction
persons trapped
exposures
access
Resources may include aircraft (rotary and fixed wing)

personnel trained for the task
specialised personnel
protective clothing
equipment
materials
navigation aids
maps

RANGE STATEMENT
aide memoirs
pumps
appliances
specialist appliances
Communications equipment radio (eg VHF aeronautical)

may include telephone
computer
facsimile
pager
mobile data terminal
audible alarms/whistles
Communications may ground to air

include hand signals
distress signal units
whistles
verbal and written instructions
radio
telephone
mobile phone
Incidents may include life threatening situations

protection of property and the environment
armed offenders
explosive devices
Incident plan may include incident objectives or goals

roles and responsibilities of personnel
resource requirements and limitations
communication procedures
strategies and tactics to be employed
contingency arrangements
planning checklists
flight plans

RANGE STATEMENT
emergency landing areas for aircraft
Welfare of team members physical stress

may include physiological stress
physical needs such as refreshments
fatigue
relief
Organisational policy, legislation relevant to the operation/incident/response

procedures, requirements legislation relevant to the organisation
and guidelines may vary
between sectors and operational
organisations and may corporate and strategic plans
include
operational procedures
operational performance standards
organisational personnel practices and guidelines
organisational quality standards
interagency liaison
Civil Aviation Orders and requirements
search and rescue time/procedures/action
incident management systems
When dealing with aircraft task

response, performance may range
be affected by
engine type-piston
turbine
wing configuration
twin/single engine
load capacity
airstrip length requirements
pilot ability
weather
fire behaviour
terrain
When dealing with aircraft, visibility

suitability may be affected

RANGE STATEMENT
by range
speed
take off capability
communications system availability
pilot local knowledge
When dealing with aircraft, temporary restricted airspace

supervising of aircraft aircraft separation-vertically and horizontally
management procedures
includes height separation
direction
inbound/outbound calls
Fire Common Traffic Advisory Frequency (F-CTAF)
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.
Corequisite Unit/s

PUAWER005B Operate as part of an emergency control organisation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
PUAWER005B Operate as part of an emergency control

organisation
Release TP Comments
version
2 PUA12 Layout adjusted. Application revised.
V1
1 PUA00 First release in TGA.
V8.1
Unit Descriptor
This unit covers the competency required to implement the emergency response specified in
the workplace emergency procedures or specified by a person at a higher level in the
emergency control organisation.
People who undertake this work will be working within the command, control and coordinate
structure of the emergency control organisation.
This unit has been developed to cover the broad range of emergencies and workplaces as
considered in Australian Standard 3745-2010.

This unit applies to employees in the workplace within all industries and in all contexts.
This unit places responsibility on individual employees who are delegated responsibility as
part of an emergency control organisation to participate in the preparation of workplace
emergency procedures; alert and report potential workplace emergencies; evaluate the need to
evacuate a work area; prepare for an evacuation; and assist people who may require assistance
in accordance with workplace emergency procedures.
The knowledge and skills gained through the completion of this unit may be applied by
employees across all industries.
Not applicable.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.


detailed in the Range Statement. Assessment of
performance is to be consistent with the Evidence
Guide.


1. Respond to emergency 1.1 Emergency reports, signals and warnings are
reports, signals and identified and appropriate action is taken.
warnings 1.2 Emergency situations and possible further
development are assessed and relevant action is
taken according to workplace emergency
procedures.
1.3 Arrangements are made for people who may require
assistance.
1.4 Emergency stations are attended and operated
according to workplace emergency procedures.
1.5 Suitable identification is worn according to
workplace emergency procedures and relevant
standards.
2. Initiate and control 2.1 Initial emergency response is initiated and carried
initial emergency out according to the workplace emergency
response procedures or authorised instruction.
2.2 Evacuated areas are checked according to workplace
2.3 Results of the evacuation of an area are reported to
the relevant person according to the workplace
2.4 People are accounted for appropriately after the
evacuation and the results are reported to the
relevant person according to the workplace
2.5 Persons not accounted for are reported in accordance
with workplace emergency procedures.
3. Anticipate the further 3.1 Emergency responses are based on the emergency
development of management plan, taking into account the current
emergencies situation and possible further development.
3.2 Possible further development of emergency
situations is continually assessed, reported to the
relevant person and acted on according to workplace
4. Assist with post initial 4.1 Emergency evacuation or alternative action is
response completed before any post initial response activities
are undertaken.
4.2 Post initial response activities are conducted under
the control of the relevant person and are consistent
with the workplace emergency plan.


Required Skills
 ability to relate to a range of people from a range of cultural, linguistic, social and
ethnic backgrounds, and a range of physical and intellectual abilities
 apply methods of accounting for people
 assist people who need assistance
 carry out a search pattern within an area
 communicate clearly by the means specified in the workplace emergency procedures
 contribute to emergency management planning
 exercise leadership within a workplace emergency context
 use equipment assigned to assist with implementing the workplace emergency
procedures
Required Knowledge
 arrangements for evacuating people who need support
 assessing and anticipating the progress of emergencies that might reasonably be
expected in the workplace
 command, control and coordinate function of the emergency control organisation
 context of own role within the workplace emergency procedures
 emergency assessment and reporting procedures
 emergency reporting signals, alarms, warnings and procedures
 emergency response and operating procedures
 members of the emergency control organisation and their roles and responsibilities
 evacuation priorities
 hazard identification
 precautions to be taken during emergencies and during an evacuation
 methods of accounting for people during and after emergencies
 methods of summoning first aid to occupants or visitor injured during an emergency
evacuation
 need to keep the relevant person informed of the developing situation
 post initial response emergency activities
 responses to meet the various situations
 workplace procedures

Evidence Guide
Critical aspects for Assessment must confirm the ability to respond to
assessment and evidence emergency reports, signals and warnings appropriately;
required to demonstrate to supply clear directions under emergency conditions;
competency in this unit to make decisions appropriate to the situation; to keep
others appropriately informed; to respond according to
the workplace emergency procedures; and to take on a
leadership role consistent with the emergency control
organisation.
Competency should be demonstrated over time with a
range of emergencies that could be expected in the
workplace.

resources for assessment Competency should be assessed in the workplace or in a
simulated workplace.
Access to scenarios that reflect a range of emergency
situations that may be expected in the workplace.

Range Statement
Emergency reports, signals  audible/visual alarms

and warnings may include:  audible or vibrating pagers
 coded or uncoded public address announcements
 e-mail
 screen alerts
 stench alarms
 verbal alert
People who may require  babies and children
assistance may include:  people with a mobility, intellectual, visual, auditory
or sensory impairment, either temporary or
permanent, who require assistance during an
emergency response
 people from diverse cultural and linguistic
backgrounds
 people who are injured
 people who are not able to comprehend the
instructions given
 pregnant women
 the elderly
Emergency stations may  assembly or marshalling points
include:  designated telephone or intercom
 designated muster points
 emergency control point
 master emergency control point
 warden’s inter-communication point (WIP) phones
Identification may include:  armbands
 helmets, caps, hats
 uniforms
 tabards, vests or other distinguishing/distinctive
clothing
Initial emergency response  to evacuate
may include:  not to evacuate
 to partially evacuate
 advice or requests for emergency services
 alternative evacuation
 lateral evacuation
 any guidance from emergency response team

 designated assembly area

 evacuation routes and destination
 not to re-enter the evacuated area until directed by
emergency personnel
 shelter in place/lockdown
 relocating or providing welfare services for
evacuated persons
 restricting entry to danger areas
 searching floors or areas
 supplying emergency equipment
 use of response equipment
Relevant person may include:  emergency control organisation members
 emergency services personnel
 people with overall evacuation control responsibility
or a person delegated with this responsibility
 police, fire and emergency services
Post initial response activities  assisting with recovery activities
may include:  assisting with authorised restoration of normal
activity
 participating in debriefing
 providing advice
 requests for emergency services or specialist
response team
 relocating or providing welfare services for
evacuated persons
 restricting entry to danger areas
 security
 supplying emergency equipment
 checking the welfare of evacuees
Unit Sector(s)
Not applicable.

RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIBEF402A Supervise on-site operations
2 Corrected numbering in Performance Criteria.
3 Required frequency and volume of evidence amended in Performance

evidence.
Substantial amendments made in Assessment Conditions field, including:
references to Industry Sectors, assessor and subject matter expert experience
requirements, how assessment should be conducted and what it should
confirm.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to supervise on-site
operations in the Resources and Infrastructure Industries.
This unit is appropriate for those working in supervisory roles.
Licensing, legislative, regulatory and certification requirements that apply to this unit can
vary between states, territories, and Industry sectors. Relevant information must be sourced
prior to application of the unit.

1 Manage on-site safety 1.1 Access, interpret and apply site documentation and ensure the
work activity is compliant
1.2 Relay safety rules and regulations, legislation and specific site
instructions to personnel
1.3 Conduct equipment safety audits as required
1.4 Identify and document in writing hazards
1.5 Determine a range of preventative measures for potential
hazards
1.6 Communicate procedures for the use and wear of personal
protective equipment and installed safety equipment to personnel
1.7 Provide clear and concise instructions to others in emergency
drills and their application
1.8 Establish methods for contacting all necessary medical
services
1.9 Provide safety and/or equipment safety induction to new
personnel and visitors
1.10 Complete work health and safety records
2 Communicate 2.1 Brief personnel and other relevant parties regularly on up to

regularly with client, date scope of activities
personnel, and other 2.2 Maintain a good working relationship with landholder/client
relevant parties
2.3 Honour confidentiality clauses in contract
2.4 Communicate verbally and in writing progress, problems
encountered/anticipated and results regularly to
landholder/client/supervisor
2.5 Maintain regular communication by radio/telephone or other
means to report progress and/or request information or assistance
3 Diagnose and solve 3.1 Confirm, by investigation, the existence and immediate
routine and non-routine effects/potential effects of the problem

problems 3.2 Identify a clear and accurate definition of the problem

3.3 Identify, through analysis of information, the preferred options
and formulate action plans
3.4 Obtain additional equipment, contractors and/or advice as
needed
3.5 Outline contingency plans
3.6 Organise alternative duties for personnel if problems cause
hold-ups in production
3.7 Implement the preferred option
4 Control work 4.1 Monitor work progress regularly and take corrective action
program to ensure 4.2 Ensure availability of materials for schedules and tasks
objectives are met
4.3 Allocate specific tasks to make effective use of personnel
4.4 Prepare alternative plans if required
4.5 Implement alternative plans to meet work program objectives
5 Coordinate work of 5.1 Make all personnel aware of their roles and responsibilities in
personnel the work plan
5.2 Set operational targets in consultation with personnel, and
check at regular intervals
5.3 Provide assistance when requested, to meet operational targets
5.4 Acquire resources required to support changing work
requirements
5.5 Allocate workloads and required resources in accordance with
modified work plans
5.6 Communicate agreed time lines for tasks to personnel
6 Maintain operating 6.1 Determine range of records, reports and their required
records frequency
6.2 Keep daily written running records to facilitate reporting
6.3 Complete written logs/records and/or shift reports
6.4 Note variations to contract requirements on log and discuss
with originator and management
6.5 Complete required written reports and submit/distribute
6.6 Take and record in writing accurate measurements

Foundation Skills
Foundation skills essential to performance are explicit in the performance criteria of this unit.
Further information is available in the Resources and Infrastructure Industry Training Package
Companion Volume.

RIIBEF402A Supervise on-site operations
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=88a61002-9a21-4386-aaf8-69c76
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site

operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIBEF402A Supervise on-site operations
2 Corrected numbering in Performance Criteria.

evidence.
confirm.

Evidence is required to be collected that demonstrates a candidate’s competency in this unit.
Evidence must be relevant to the roles within this sector’s work operations and satisfy all of
the requirements of the performance criteria of this unit and include evidence that the
candidate:
 locates and applies relevant legislation, documentation, policies and procedures
 works effectively with others to supervise on-site operations that meet all of the required
outcomes including:
 applying a range of communication techniques to clearly and concisely train and
instruct others
 applying a range of communication techniques to communicate/consult clearly and
concisely all technical information, rules, procedures and regulations to others
 demonstrates completion of supervising on-site operations that safely, effectively and
efficiently meets all of the required outcomes on more than one (1) occasion including:
 identifying hazards on site and determining a range of preventative measures
 inducting new personnel and visitors about on-site and equipment safety procedures
 identifying and defining potential problems and impact through investigating and
analysis of available information
 outlining contingency plans and implementing appropriate action to resolve the
problem
 reviewing the outcome of work and refining decisions for future activity
 allocating tasks to others and ensuring compliance to policies and meeting targets
 managing people and process effectively including conflict resolution and negotiation
with others
 maintaining written records and logs
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge when supervising on-site operations through:
 operational and maintenance procedures
 fault finding and troubleshooting techniques
 working in teams
 communication systems, processes and procedures (e.g. two way radio)
 graphical representation (e.g. maps, diagrams, and their uses for interpretation and
prediction)
 maintaining required documentation (e.g. requisition forms, daily log reports)

 An assessor of this unit must satisfy the requirements of the NVR/AQTF or their
successors; and Industry regulations for certification and licensing; and,
 this unit must be assessed in the context of this sector’s work environment; and,
 this unit must be assessed in compliance with relevant legislation/regulation and using
policies, procedures, processes and operational manuals directly related to the industry
sector for which it is being assessed; and,
 assessment may be conducted in conjunction with the assessment of other Units of
Competency; and,
 assessment must confirm consistent performance can be applied in a range of relevant
workplace circumstances; and,
 assessors must demonstrate the performance evidence, and knowledge evidence as
outlined in this Unit of Competency, and through the minimum years of current* work
experience specified below in an Industry sector relevant to the outcomes of the unit; or,
 where the assessor does not meet experience requirements a co-assessment or partnership
arrangement must exist between the qualified assessor and an Industry subject matter
expert. The Industry subject matter expert should hold the unit being assessed (or an
equivalent unit) and/or demonstrate equivalence of skills and knowledge at the unit level.
An Industry technical expert must also demonstrate skills and knowledge from the
minimum years of current work experience specified below in the Industry sector,
including time spent in roles related to the unit being assessed; and,
 assessor and Industry subject matter expert requirements differ depending on the
Australian Qualifications Framework Level (AQF) of the qualification being assessed
and/or Industry Sector as follows:
Required assessor or Industry
Industry sector AQF** Level subject matter expert
experience
Drilling, Metalliferous Mining, Coal 1 1 Year

Mining, Extractive (Quarrying) and Civil
Construction 2 2 Years

Drilling, Coal Mining and Extractive

3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)
Metalliferous Mining and Civil

3-6 5 Years
Construction
Where this Unit is being assessed outside of

the Resources and Infrastructure Sectors
assessor and/or Industry subject matter expert
experience should be in-line with industry
Other sectors
standards for the sector in which it is being
assessed and where no Industry standard is
specified should comply with any relevant
regulation.
*Assessors can demonstrate current work experience through employment within Industry in
a role relevant to the outcomes of the Unit; or, for external assessors this can be demonstrated
through exposure to Industry by conducting frequent site assessments across various
locations.
**Where a unit is being delivered outside of a Qualification the first numeric character in the
Unit code should be considered to indicate the AQF level
Links
e675272

RIICBS312D Conduct bitumen tanker operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIICBS312D Conduct bitumen tanker operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICBS312A Conduct bitumen tanker operations
2 Required frequency and volume of evidence amended in Performance evidence.

Substantial amendments made in Assessment Conditions field, including: references
to Industry Sectors, assessor and subject matter expert experience requirements, how
assessment should be conducted and what it should confirm.
Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to conduct bitumen tanker
operations in Civil Construction.
This unit is appropriate for those working in operational roles.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and 1.1 Access, interpret and apply bitumen tanker operations
prepare for bitumen documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
tanker operations 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
1.3 Identify and address potential risks, hazards and
environmental issues, and implement control measures
1.4 Select and wear personal protective equipment appropriate for
work activities
1.5 Select and check for faults plant, tools and equipment to carry
out tasks
1.6 Confirm and apply environmental protection and safety
requirements
1.7 Obtain and interpret emergency procedures, and be prepared
for fire/accident/emergency
2. Set up tanker 2.1 Carry out pre-operational checks on bitumen tanker

for operation 2.2 Fill ancillary tanks and ensure adequate materials are available
to perform tanker operations
2.3 Check tanks to prevent contamination
2.4 Obtain load details, including correct amount of any additives
3. Load tanker 3.1 Carry out pre-start and start-up procedures

3.2 Drive and operate tanker
3.3 Check previous load details for compatibility
3.4 Load tank with the prescribed amount of material
3.5 Add and mix additives to specifications
3.6 Check temperature of the material and ensure compliance with
manufacturer’s specifications
3.7 Measure, calculate and record material quantities and
additives
3.8 Heat materials in accordance with manufacturer’s/suppliers’
instructions
4. Transfer 4.1 Set up transfer site

materials 4.2 Confirm transfer procedures with depot supervisor/sprayer
driver
4.3 Transfer materials
4.4 Record details of transferred materials

5. Empty tanker 5.1 Empty tank into storage or waste

5.2 Clean tank interior
6. Carry out 6.1 Prepare machine for maintenance

operator maintenance 6.2 Conduct inspection and fault finding
6.3 Carry out scheduled maintenance tasks
6.4 Process written maintenance records
7. Clean up 7.1 Clear work area and dispose of or recycle materials

7.2 Clean, check, maintain and store plant, tools and equipment
7.3 Carry out housekeeping requirements
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIICBS312A Conduct bitumen tanker operations
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIICBS312D Conduct bitumen tanker operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIICBS312D Conduct bitumen

tanker operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICBS312A Conduct bitumen tanker operations


candidate:
 locates and applies applicable legislation, documentation, policies and procedures
 implements the requirements, procedures and techniques for the safe, effective and
efficient completion of the conduct of bitumen tanker operations including:
 select and use relevant tools and equipment safely
 identify and report on hazards related to the worksite and work activity
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete the conduct of bitumen tanker
operations that meets all of the required outcomes including:
 complying with written and verbal reporting requirements and procedures
 communicating clearly and concisely with others to receive and clarify work
instructions
 communicating clearly and concisely with others to resolve coordination requirements
prior to commencing and during work activities
 demonstrates completion of conducting bitumen tanker operations that safely, effectively
and efficiently meets all of the required outcomes on more than one (1) occasion
including:
 transfer a minimum of three (3) different materials, one of which must be a PMB;
 loaded from a refinery or depot
 mixed and heated
 transferred to at least one roadside and one storage depot
 calculation and recording of all details for the activities
 compliance with the instructions for transferring listed in Austroads Bitumen Sealing
Safety guide
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge in conducting bitumen tanker operations through:
 accessing, interpreting and applying legislative, organisation and site requirements and
procedures for:
 site and equipment safety requirements
 heating bitumen
 housekeeping
 equipment types, characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations
 understanding bituminous materials and their characteristics
 complying with the operational, maintenance and basic diagnostic procedures
 safety data sheets and materials handling methods
 understanding the treatment for bitumen burns
 complying with the quality requirements and environmental systems and standards
 understanding the handling and safe use of bitumen hoses
 preparing and/or implementing JSAs/JSEA/safe work method statements

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIICCM201D Carry out measurements and calculations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM201A Carry out measurements and calculations.
2 Editorial corrections
Amended Performance Evidence.

requirements, how assessment should be conducted and what it should confirm.
Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to carry out measurements
and calculations in Civil Construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction

RIICCM201D Carry out measurements and calculations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply measurements and calculations
measurements and documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
calculations 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
1.3 Select, and check for faults, equipment/tools for work
activities
2. Perform 2.1 Select and apply method of obtaining the measurement

measurements
2.2 Obtain measurements using appropriate tool, and ensure
required accuracy
2.3 Confirm and record measurements
3. Perform calculations 3.1 Select appropriate calculation method

3.2 Calculate values for the project using the appropriate factors
3.3 Confirm and record results
4. Estimate quantities 4.1 Select appropriate formulas for calculating quantities

4.2 Make calculations for determining quantities
4.3 Estimate quantities from the calculations taken
4.4 Confirm and record quantities for the project within project
tolerances
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIICCM201A Carry out measurements and calculations
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIICCM201D Carry out measurements and calculations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM201D Carry out

measurements and calculations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM201A Carry out measurements and calculations.


candidate:
 locates and applies applicable documentation, policies and procedures
efficient carrying out of measurements and calculations including:
 calculating each of the following using a realistic civil construction project:
 quantity
 length
 perimeter
 circumference
 area
 volume
 number
 ratio
 percentage
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete measurements and calculations
that meet all of the required outcomes, including:
 using a range of communications techniques and equipment
 demonstrates completion of measurements and calculations that safely, effectively and
 completing measurements, calculations and estimations of quantities for projects of
varying complexity
 measuring using a rule or tape measure for a variety of tasks within 98% accuracy
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when carrying out measurements
and calculations:
 accessing, interpreting and applying the organisation and site requirements and procedures
for:
 using operational tools and equipment safely and effectively
 achieving project quality and accuracy
 using JSA’s/JSEA/Safe work methods
 conversion of different metric values e.g. metres to millimetres
 understanding tolerances
 completing measuring, calculating, geometry and determination of quantities
 caring for measuring equipment
 working with civil construction terminology

 this unit is best assessed in the context of this sector’s work environment;
 where personal safety or environmental damage are limiting factors, assessment may
occur in a simulated environment provided it is realistic and sufficiently rigorous to cover
all aspects of this sector’s workplace performance, including environment, task skills, task
management skills, contingency management skills and job role environment skills; and,
Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIICCM203D Read and interpret plans and job specifications Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM203A Read and interpret plans and specifications.
2 Editorial corrections.
3 Amended Performance Evidence.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to read and interpret plans
and specifications in Civil Construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply plans and job specification
read and interpret plans documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
and job specifications 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
1.3 Identify the main types of plans and drawings used in the
Industry
1.4 Identify the key functions of each type of drawing
1.5 Recognise and adhere to quality requirements of company
operations
1.6 Identify environmental controls from the job plans,
specifications and environmental plan
2. Recognise 2.1 Check title panel to verify latest amendments to drawing

amendments 2.2 Check amendments to specifications and ensure currency of
information
3. Recognise commonly 3.1 Identify and confirm civil construction symbols and
used symbols and abbreviations
abbreviations
3.2 Locate and interpret legend on project drawings
4. Locate and identify 4.1 Achieve orientation of the plan with the site
key features on site 4.2 Identify and locate key features of the site
plan
4.3 Gain access to site and identify services, main features,
contours and datum
5. Read and interpret job 5.1 Identify and confirm job specifications from drawings, notes
specifications and descriptions
5.2 Identify and confirm standards of work, finishes and
tolerances from job specifications
5.3 Identify and confirm material attributes from job
specifications
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.


RIICCM203A Read and interpret plans and specifications
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIICCM203D Read and interpret plans and job specifications Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM203D Read and interpret

plans and job specifications
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM203A Read and interpret plans and specifications.
3 Amended Performance Evidence.

candidate:
efficient completion of the reading and interpreting of plans and specifications including:
 communicating effectively to clarify instructions/information
 orienting/confirming the orientation of a plan
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete the reading and interpreting of
plans and specifications that meet all of the required outcomes including:
 using a range of communications techniques and equipment
 demonstrates completion of reading and interpreting plans and specifications that safely,
effectively and efficiently meets all of the required outcomes on more than one (1)
occasion including:
 identifying key features on site plans
 recognising clear discrepancies and verifications between the documents (map, plan,
specifications) and the actual site and taking action to correct
 gaining access to sites and identifying symbols, abbreviations, services, main features,
contours and datum

2017
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when reading and interpreting
plans and specifications:
for:
 identifying and reporting on hazards
 achieving project quality and accuracy
 using JSA’s/JSEA/Safe work methods
 planning and organising work activities
 working with civil construction terminology
 identifying types of services/utilities and providers
 using construction principles
 carrying out basic calculations of heights, areas, volumes and grades
 interpreting features of plans and elevations including direction, scale, key, contours,
symbols and abbreviations
 interpreting commonly used civil construction symbols and abbreviations
 application of scales in plan preparation and interpretation
 identifying key features of formal job specifications
 complying with drawing conventions

2017
Competency; and,
experience


2017

3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIICCM205D Carry out manual excavation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM205A Carry out manual excavation.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to carry out manual
excavation in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply manual excavation documentation,
manual excavation and ensure the work activity is compliant
1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
work activities
1.5 Identify, obtain and implement traffic signage requirements
1.6 Select, and check for faults, equipment and/or attachments for
work activities
2. Dig small 2.1 Confirm the location and specifications of the intended
excavations by hand excavation
2.2 Identify service markers/taped areas
2.3 Determine and confirm location of underground services and
avoid damage/interference
2.4 Use hand tools, and dig post holes, small pits and trenches to
the required dimensions
2.5 Undertake trench collapse prevention procedures, where
excavation is in unstable ground
2.6 Place barricades around the excavation
3. Complete and isolate 3.1 Clean loose material out of excavation using hand tools
the excavation 3.2 Check excavation complies with the specification/work
instruction
3.3 Clear loose material away from the edge of excavation
4. Conduct 4.1 Clear work area and dispose of or recycle materials

housekeeping activities 4.2 Clean and maintain condition of equipment, ensure suitability
for use, and address/report issues
4.3 Manage/report hazards, and maintain a safe working
environment
4.4 Process written records

Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIICCM205A Carry out manual excavation
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIICCM205D Carry out manual excavation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM205D Carry out manual

excavation
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM205A Carry out manual excavation.

candidate:
efficient completion of manual excavation including:
 using manual excavation tools
 using concreting tools, plant and equipment
 communicating effectively to receive and clarify work instructions
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete the manual excavation in a way
that meets all of the required outcomes including:
 using a range of communications techniques and equipment to convey information to
others
 demonstrates completion of manual excavation that safely, effectively and efficiently
meets all of the required outcomes on more than one (1) occasion including:
 identifying the location of underground services
 digging post holes, small pits and trenches to the required dimensions
 applying trench collapse prevention procedures in unstable ground

Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when carrying out manual
excavation:
for:
 using JSAs/safe work methods
 achieving project quality outcomes
 identifying and reporting on hazards related to the worksite and work activity
 organising work activities
 using relevant tools and equipment safely
 identifying types, uses, limitations and maintenance requirements of manual excavation
tools
 applying basic principles of soil technology for civil works
 using basic trench collapse prevention techniques including benching and battering
 identifying site isolation and traffic control responsibilities and authorities
 using civil construction terminology
 completing housekeeping activities

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIICCM207D Spread and compact materials manually Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM207A Spread and compact materials manually.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to spread and compact
materials manually in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply spreading and compacting
manually spreading and materials documentation, and ensure the work activity is compliant
compacting materials 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
work activities
work activities
2. Conduct compaction 2.1 Carry out pre-start, start-up and shutdown procedures
machine operational 2.2 Check machine controls and functions for serviceability, and
checks rectify or report any faults
3. Spread and compact 3.1 Conduct basic field identification test and identify material
materials type
3.2 Direct trucks to required location for loading/dumping
3.3 Direct delivered/relocated materials to correct location
3.4 Check manufactured material for segregation
3.5 Conduct field test to ensure material moisture is suitable
3.6 Direct machine operator to spread materials to specified levels
3.7 Finish materials by hand to specified levels
3.8 Operate mechanical compaction equipment and consolidate
materials into layers
3.9 Conduct field test to ensure compaction has been achieved in
restricted locations

environment

Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIICCM207A Spread and compact materials manually
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIICCM207D Spread and compact materials manually Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM207D Spread and compact

materials manually
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM207A Spread and compact materials manually.

candidate:
efficient completion of the manual spreading and compacting of materials including:
 selecting and using relevant tools/equipment
 carrying out equipment pre-start, start-up and shutdown
 conducting practical field tests for moisture content, shrinkage and compaction
 communicating effectively to direct operators
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete the manual spreading and
compacting of materials that meets all of the required outcomes including:
others
 demonstrates completion of manually spreading and compacting materials that safely,
occasion including:
 completing the hand spreading and the mechanical (hand operated) compaction of two
(2) different material types to site specification

Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when spreading and compacting
materials manually:
for:
 using JSAs/JSEA/safe work methods
 applying materials handling methods and using safety data sheets
 identifying hand operated mechanical compaction machine types, characteristics,
technical capabilities and limitations
 applying basic principles of soil technology for civil works
 identifying basic soil compaction theory including the effects of moisture and mechanical
interlock

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIICCM208D Carry out basic levelling Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIICCM208D Carry out basic levelling
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM208A Carry out basic levelling.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to carry out basic levelling in
Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply basic levelling documentation, and
basic levelling ensure the work activity is complaint
work activities
1.6 Select equipment and/or attachments for work activities, and
check for faults and serviceability within specified tolerances
1.7 Identify environmental protection requirements
2. Establish offsets to 2.1 Establish offset and recovery pegs from survey controls to
plans and drawings specified plans and drawings
2.2 Re-establish earthwork and pavement control lines from
offsets and/or recovery pegs
2.3 Establish drainage offsets from survey control
3. Set up and use 3.1 Identify heights to be transferred/established from project

levelling device plans or instructions
3.2 Set up and use levelling instruments, and complete levelling
3.3 Transfer heights from the known to the required
3.4 Document results of levelling procedure

environment

Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIICCM208A Carry out basic levelling
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIICCM208D Carry out basic levelling Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM208D Carry out basic

levelling
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM208A Carry out basic levelling.


candidate:
efficient completion of basic levelling including:
 carrying out basic leveling mathematics
 following basic civil construction processes
 communicating effectively to confirm work requirements/plans/drawings
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete the basic levelling in a way that
meets all of the required outcomes, including:
others
 demonstrates completion of carrying out basic levelling that safely, effectively and
 conducting different levelling tasks, at least one (1) utilising an automatic level. One
(1) of the tasks must include closed traverse utilising either the height of instrument or
rise and fall method of reduction
 conducting a peg test with an automatic level, to confirm instrument meets
manufacturer’s tolerances
 accurately recording of the results of each levelling procedure to organisational
requirements
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when carrying out basic
levelling:
for:
 identifying leveling devices, characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations
 read, interpret and applying civil construction plan, symbols and construction terminology

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIICCM209D Carry out concrete work Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM209A Carry out concrete work.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to carry out concrete work in
Civil Construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply concrete work documentation, and
concrete work ensure the work activity is compliant
work activities
work activities
1.7 Identify environmental protection requirements
2. Select materials 2.1 Determine location requirements of steel reinforcement and

formwork
2.2 Confirm reinforcement requirements
2.3 Select formwork components/materials
2.4 Select and use fixing/fasteners
3. Set out for concrete 3.1 Set string lines accurately from existing pegs
work 3.2 Check grades and ensure correct fall
3.3 Identify services, protect and prevent damage
4. Construct and fit 4.1 Cut and bend reinforcing fabric and bars
reinforcement 4.2 Tie/fix fabric and bars to configuration
4.3 Attach stiffening rods to panels as required to facilitate
handling
4.4 Locate reinforcement material in formwork, and place it on
bar chairs/spacers, and confirm clearance from formwork
4.5 Locate and secure cast-ins
5. Erect formwork 5.1 Clear work area and prepare surface for erection of
formwork
5.2 Set out formwork
5.3 Assemble/erect and brace formwork
5.4 Position expansion joints to specification and to relevant
Australian standard

5.5 Position dowel joints

5.6 Remove debris, sawdust and other waste material from
formwork
5.7 Apply release agent to manufacturer’s specifications
6. Carry out concrete 6.1 Place concrete to specified levels and grades and avoid
work segregation
6.2 Compact concrete using immersion vibrator or other specified
method
6.3 Screed, finish and apply curing process to concrete
6.4 Cover and protect concrete surface
7. Strip formwork 7.1 Remove edge boxing and braces sequentially

7.2 Denail, clean, store/stack timber components
7.3 Clean, oil, store/stack steel components
7.4 Discard damaged formwork components after stripping
7.5 Clean screens before movement

environment
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIICCM209A Carry out concrete work

Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIICCM209D Carry out concrete work Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIICCM209D Carry out concrete

work
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIICCM209A Carry out concrete work.


candidate:
efficient completion of concrete work including:
 carrying out steel reinforcement
 completing formwork
 communicating effectively to confirm work requirements/drawings/specifications
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete concrete work that meets all of
the required outcomes including:
 using a range of communications techniques and equipment to convey information
to others
 demonstrates completion of carrying out concrete work that safely, effectively and
 set up string lines, framework and reinforcements
 position expansion and dowel joints
 place concrete according to job specifications
 compact concrete
 screed/finish concrete surface
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when carrying out concrete
work:
for:
 identifying equipment types, characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations
 identifying concrete characteristics and properties
 using concreting principles
 using structural technology

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIHAN301D Operate elevating work platform Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIHAN301B Operate elevating work platform
2 Editorial corrections; Amend reference to Licensing requirements in Unit

Application

evidence.
confirm.
Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to operate an elevating work
platform in the Resources and Infrastructure Industries.
vary between states, territories and Industry sectors. Relevant information must be sourced


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply elevating work platforms
operating an elevating documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
work platform 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
work activities
1.4 Identify and select any required tools and equipment, check
for serviceability and rectify or report, verbally or in writing, any
faults prior to commencement
1.5 Perform pre-start and post-start inspections/checks
1.6 Coordinate activities with others prior to commencement of,
and during, the work activity
2. Conduct work 2.1 Stabilise elevating work platform

activities from 2.2 Place tools and equipment into bucket/platform
elevating work
platform 2.3 Use approved safety devices, ensure safety of personnel and
surrounding site
2.4 Act on or report, verbally or in writing, monitoring systems
and alarms
2.5 Recognise and respond to hazardous and emergency situations
2.6 Complete work and shut-down in accordance with agreed
work plan
3. Carry out operator 3.1 Carry out work platform inspections and fault finding
maintenance 3.2 Carry out routine operational servicing, lubrication and
housekeeping tasks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and site authorised procedures and practices
3.3 Carry out minor operator maintenance to manufacturer's
instructions and site requirements
4. Clean up 4.1 Clear work area and reuse, recycle or dispose of materials
4.2 Check, clean, maintain and store plant, tools and equipment

Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIHAN301B Operate elevating work platform
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIHAN301D Operate elevating work platform Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIHAN301D Operate elevating

work platform
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIHAN301B Operate elevating work platform
2 Editorial corrections; Amend reference to Licensing requirements in Unit

Application

evidence.
confirm.

candidate:
 locates and applies relevant documentation, policies and procedures
efficient completion of operating elevating work platforms including:
 selecting and using the required plant, tools and equipment
 planning and preparing for operating elevating work platforms
 identifying, addressing and/or reporting, verbally or in writing monitoring systems and
alarms
 identifying and following procedures in emergency or hazardous situations
 applying hand-eye coordination
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete the operation of elevating work
platforms that meet all of the required outcomes including:
 using a range of communication techniques and equipment to coordinate activities
with others
 maintaining written and verbal reporting requirements and procedures
 demonstrates completion of operating elevating work platforms that safely, effectively and
 stabilising elevating work platform
 selecting safety devices and correctly ensuring safety of personnel and surrounding
site
 completing work platform inspections and fault finding
 completing operational servicing, lubrication and housekeeping tasks
 disposing of environmentally sensitive oils, fluids and materials
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when operating an elevating
work platform:
 the appropriate National Certification Standards
 equipment characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations
 elevating work platform operational procedures
 basic geological and survey data related to elevating work platforms
 site environmental requirements and constraints related to elevating work platforms

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIMPO317D Conduct roller operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIMPO317D Conduct roller operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO317A Conduct roller operations.

Performance Criteria amended to include Manoeuvring, Driving and Parking Up;
made requirements more explicit; introduced Housekeeping element.
2 Editorial corrections; Modification History added.
3 Removed repetition from Performance Criteria; amended Performance Evidence

wording; editorial corrections.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to conduct roller operations
in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare 1.1 Access, interpret and apply roller operations documentation
roller operations and ensure the work activity is compliant
1.3 Identify and address risks, hazards and environmental issues
and implement control measures
work activities
1.5 Identify, obtain and implement traffic management signage
requirements
work activities
2. Operate roller 2.1 Carry out Pre-start, start-up, park, shutdown and secure
equipment procedures
2.2 Coordinate activities with others at the site prior to
commencement of, and during, the work activity
2.3 Continually monitor hazards and risks , and ensure safety of
self, other personnel, plant and equipment
2.4 Drive and operate roller, and modify the operating technique to
meet changing work conditions
2.5 Complete work plan within the operating capacity of the
equipment
2.6 Engage and disengage the compacting device
2.7 Identify, remove or manage contaminants
2.8 Act on or report monitoring systems and alarms
3. Select, remove and 3.1 Select attachment for the task

fit attachments 3.2 Remove and fit attachment
3.3 Test attachment to ensure correct fitting and operation
3.4 Use attachment in accordance with recommendations and
design limits
3.5 Clean and store removed attachments in designated location
4. Relocate the roller 4.1 Prepare the roller for relocation

4.2 Move the machine between worksites, observing relevant
codes and traffic management requirements

4.3 Load and unload machine from float/trailer
5. Carry out machine 5.1 Prepare machine for maintenance

5.4 Return machine to service

housekeeping activities 6.2 Process records
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

No equivalent unit
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO317D Conduct roller operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO317D Conduct roller

operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO317A Conduct roller operations.


wording; editorial corrections.


candidate:
efficient completion of roller operations in the civil construction Industry including:
 conducting prestart checks prior to commencing operations and shutdown procedures
on completion of operations
 carrying out vehicle refuelling requirements and procedures
 driving and operating the equipment to site conditions
 applying safe work practices and identifying and reporting all potential hazards, risks
and environmental issues
 applying problem solving and troubleshooting techniques
 applying operating techniques for leveling and compacting
 selecting and using the required tools and equipment
 working safely around other machines and personnel
 safe parking and securing of equipment
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete roller operations in the civil
construction industry that meet all of the required outcomes including:
others
 organising work activities to meet all task requirements
instructions
 demonstrates completion of conducting roller operations that safely, effectively and
 completion of operations using a variety of different material types and include the
mandatory tasks of:
 compacting materials to pattern and density
 sealing and finishing
 the removal and fitting of at least one attachment

Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when conducting roller
operations:
 identifying, interpreting ground conditions
 communicating and performing isolation procedures
 identifying equipment processes, technical capability and limitations
 being prepared for fire/accident/emergency
 identifying signs of operator fatigue and how it should be managed
 interpreting drawings and sketches
 complying with project quality requirements
 applying basic principles of soil technology and soil compaction for civil works
 using basic earthworks calculations
 using civil construction activity sequences of road construction, earthworks and
drainage
 applying operational, maintenance and basic diagnostics

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIMPO318D Conduct civil construction skid steer loader operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIMPO318D Conduct civil construction skid steer loader

operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO318B Conduct civil construction skid steer loader
operations.
2 Amend terminology used in Performance Evidence; amend reference to

Licensing requirements in Unit Application.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to conduct civil construction
skid steer loader operations in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply skid steer loader operations
skid steer loader documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
operations 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
work activities
1.5 Obtain, identify and implement traffic signage requirements
work activities
2. Operate skid steer 2.1 Carry out pre-start, start-up, park, shutdown and secure
loader equipment procedures
2.4 Drive and operate loader, and modify the operating technique
to meet changing work conditions
equipment
3. Load, carry and 3.1 Conduct communication practices associated with

place materials transportation and lifting of materials
3.2 Establish weight of load and ensure it is within safe
operational limits of the machine
3.3 Select, attach and apply slings and/or lifting gear in
accordance with safe working load requirements
3.4 Position machinery to ensure stability and locate to effectively
shift materials according to job specifications
3.5 Shift load safely and effectively
3.6 Move load using hand/audible/communication signals


4.3 Test attachment and ensure correct fitting and operation

design limits
5. Relocate the skid 5.1 Prepare for relocation of skid steer loader
steer loader 5.2 Move skid steer loader safely between worksites, observing
relevant codes and traffic management requirements


Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIMPO318B Conduct civil construction skid steer loader operations
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO318D Conduct civil construction skid steer loader operationsDate this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO318D Conduct civil

construction skid steer loader operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO318B Conduct civil construction skid steer loader
operations.
2 Amend terminology used in Performance Evidence; amend reference to



May 2017
candidate:
efficient completion of civil construction skid steer loader operations including:
 applying leveling techniques
 safely parking and securing equipment
 applying methods of changing machine attachments
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete civil construction skid steer
loader operations that meet all of the required outcomes including:
others
instructions
 demonstrates completion of conducting civil construction skid steer loader operations that
safely, effectively and efficiently meets all of the required outcomes on more than one (1)
occasion including:
 completion of operations to specification using a variety of material types during the
three occasions, including:
 stripping/spreading topsoil and materials
 backfilling
 lifting, loading vehicles
 excavations
 mixing materials
 site clean-up

May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when conducting civil
construction skid steer loader operations:
 identifying and interpreting ground conditions
drainage
 using methods for calculating safe working loads

May 2017
Competency; and,
experience


May 2017

3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIMPO319D Conduct backhoe/loader operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIMPO319D Conduct backhoe/loader operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO319A Conduct backhoe loader operations.
2 Amended Performance Evidence and Performance Criteria; amend reference to


Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to conduct backhoe/loader
operations in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply backhoe/loader operations
backhoe/loader documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
operations 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work instructions
work activities
1.5 Identify, obtain and implement signage traffic management
requirements
work activities
2. Operate backhoe/ 2.1 Carry out pre-start, start-up, park, shutdown and secure
2.4 Drive and operate machine, and modify the operating
technique to meet changing work conditions
equipment
3. Load, carry and 3.1 Conduct communication practices associated with

place materials transportation and lifting of materials
3.3 Select, attach and apply slings and lifting gear in accordance
with safe working load requirements
3.4 Position and locate machinery to ensure stability to effectively



design limits
5. Relocate the 5.1 Prepare backhoe/loader for relocation

backhoe/ loader 5.2 Move backhoe/loader safely between worksites, observing

7. Clean up 7.1 Clear work area and dispose of or recycle materials

7.2 Process records
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIMPO319A Conduct backhoe loader operations
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO319D Conduct backhoe/loader operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO319D Conduct

backhoe/loader operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO319A Conduct backhoe loader operations.
2 Amended Performance Evidence and Performance Criteria; amend reference to



candidate:
efficient completion of backhoe/ loader operations including:
 safely parking and securing of equipment
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete backhoe/ loader operations that
meet all of the required outcomes including:
others
instructions
 demonstrates completion of conducting backhoe/loader operations that safely, effectively
including:
 completion of operations to specification using a variety of material types including:
 stripping/spreading topsoils and materials
 trench excavation
 backfilling
 lifting and carrying materials
 loading dump trucks, wagons, hoppers, chutes, and cutting/boxing
 fitting and removal a variety of attachments selected from the following:
 extending devices
 tilt bucket
 buckets
 compaction wheel
 ripper
 plate compactor

 rock breaker
 auger
 broom
 mower/slasher
 forklift
 4 in 1 bucket and free/rock grab
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when conducting backhoe/loader
operations:
drainage

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIMPO320D Conduct civil construction excavator operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIMPO320D Conduct civil construction excavator operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO320B Conduct civil construction excavator operations.
2 Performance Evidence wording amended; removed repetition from Performance

Criteria; amend reference to Licensing requirements in Unit Application.

Application
excavator operations in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply excavator operations
excavator operations documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
work activities
1.5 Obtain, identify and implement traffic management signage
requirements
work activities
2. Operate excavator 2.1 Carry out pre-start, start-up, park, shutdown and secure
2.3 Continually monitor hazards and risks, and ensure safety of
2.4 Drive and operate excavator, and modify the operating
3. Lift, carry and place 3.1 Conduct communication practices associated with
materials transportation and lifting of materials
3.3 Select, attach and use slings and lifting gear in accordance
3.4 Position machinery and ensure stability and locate to
effectively shift materials according to job specifications

fit attachments 4.2 Remove and fit attachment according to manufacturer's
manual and site requirements

design limits
4.5 Remove, clean and store attachments in designated location
5. Relocate the 5.1 Prepare excavator for relocation

excavator 5.2 Move excavator safely between worksites, observing relevant
codes and traffic management requirements


Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIMPO320B Conduct civil construction excavator operations
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO320D Conduct civil construction excavator operations Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017

construction excavator operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO320B Conduct civil construction excavator operations.



2017
candidate:
efficient completion of excavator operations including:
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete excavator operations that meet all
of the required outcomes including:
others
instructions
 demonstrates completion of conducting civil construction excavator operations that safely,
occasion including:
 loading
 bulk excavation
 backfilling
 trench excavation
 stockpiling
 battering
 benching
 site clean up
 fitting and removal of a variety of attachments selected from the following:
 tilt bucket
 buckets
 lifting device

2017
 vibrating compaction wheel

 ripper/tyne
 compaction plate
 compaction wheel
 rock breaker
 auger
Knowledge Evidence
construction excavator operations:
drainage

2017
Competency; and,
experience


2017

3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIMPO321D Conduct civil construction wheeled front end loader operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIMPO321D Conduct civil construction wheeled front end

loader operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO321B Conduct civil construction wheeled front end loader
operations.


Application
wheeled front end loader operations in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply wheeled front end loader
wheeled front end operations documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
loader operations 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work instructions
work activities
requirements
work activities
2. Operate front end 2.1 Carry out pre-start, start-up, park, shutdown and secure
2.3 Continually monitor hazards and risks, and ensure safety of
2.4 Drive and operate front end loader, and modify the operating
equipment
3. Attach, secure, lift, 3.1 Conduct communication practices associated with

carry and place transportation and lifting of materials
materials 3.2 Establish weight of load and ensure it is within safe
3.3 Select, attach and use slings and lifting gear in accordance



design limits
5. Relocate the front 5.1 Prepare front end loader for relocation
end loader 5.2 Move front end loader safely between worksites, observing


Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIMPO321B Conduct civil construction wheeled front end loader operations
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=ca051b1b-5101-4ec2-ac1c-49699
303188d

Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO321D Conduct civil construction wheeled front end loader operations Date this document was

construction wheeled front end loader operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO321B Conduct civil construction wheeled front end loader
operations.



candidate:
efficient completion of civil construction wheeled front end loader operations including:
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete civil construction wheeled front
end loader operations that meet all of the required outcomes including:
others
instructions
 demonstrates completion of civil construction wheeled front end loader operations that
safely, effectively and efficiently meets all of the required outcomes including:
 completion of operations to specification in a minimum of two different material types
including:
 loading, cutting/boxing
 backfilling
 site clean-up on
 select, fit and remove an attachment

Knowledge Evidence
construction wheeled front end loader operations:
drainage

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
https://vetnet.education.gov.au/Pages/TrainingDocs.aspx?q=ca051b1b-5101-4ec2-ac1c-49699
303188d

RIIMPO322D Conduct civil construction tracked front end loader operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIMPO322D Conduct civil construction tracked front end loader

operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO322A Conduct civil construction tracked front end loader
operations.

wording; amend reference to Licensing requirements in Unit Application; editorial
corrections.

Application
tracked front end loader operations in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply tracked front end loader operations
tracked front end loader documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
operations 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work instructions
work activities
1.5 Identify, obtain and implement traffic management signage
requirements
work activities
2. Operate front end 2.1 Carry out pre-start, start-up, park, shutdown and secure
2.4 Drive and operate front end loader, and modify the operating
equipment
3. Attach, secure, lift, 3.1 Conduct communication practices associated with

carry and place transportation and lifting of materials
3.3 Select , attach and use slings and lifting gear in accordance
4. Relocate the front 4.1 Prepare front end loader for relocation
end loader 4.2 Move front end loader safely between work sites, observing



5.4 Return machine to service
6. Conduct 6.1 Clear work area and dispose of or recycle materials in

housekeeping activities accordance with project environmental management plan
6.2 Process records
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

No equivalent unit
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO322D Conduct civil construction tracked front end loader operations Date this document was

construction tracked front end loader operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO322A Conduct civil construction tracked front end loader
operations.

wording; amend reference to Licensing requirements in Unit Application; editorial
corrections.


candidate:
efficient completion of tracked front end loader operations including:
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete tracked front end loader
operations that meet all of the required outcomes including:
others
instructions
 demonstrates completion of civil construction tracked front end loader operations that
safely, effectively and efficiently meets all of the required outcomes on more than one (1)
occasion including:
 loading
 cutting/boxing
 backfilling
 site clean-up

Knowledge Evidence
construction tracked front end loader operations:
drainage

Competency; and,
experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIMPO326D Conduct civil construction water cart operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIMPO326D Conduct civil construction water cart operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO326A Conduct civil construction water cart operations.


Application
water cart operations in Civil construction.
Unit Sector
Civil construction


1. Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply water cart operations
water cart operations documentation and ensure the work activity is compliant
1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work instructions
work activities
requirements
work activities
2. Operate water cart 2.1 Carry out pre-start, start-up, park, shutdown and secure
2.4 Manage engine power to ensure efficiency of water cart
platform movements and to minimise damage to the engine and gears
2.5 Coordinate engine power with gear selection to ensure smooth
transition and operation within torque range
2.6 Drive and operate water cart, and modify the operating
2.7 Bring vehicle to a halt smoothly, minimising the wear and tear
on vehicle using the engine retarder, gears and brakes
3. Load, transport and 3.1 Position water cart at load and discharge/distribution points
distribute water 3.2 Load water cart to within the authorised carrying capacity and
to suit the site and task conditions
3.3 Carry out water haulage operations efficiently, safely and
smoothly avoiding surge and sway
3.4 Discharge/distribute water efficiently in accordance with
requirements and procedures
3.5 Monitor and maintain discharge and distribution systems
throughout the operations
3.6 Complete work the workplan within the operating capacity of

the equipment


Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIMPO326A Conduct civil construction water cart operations
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIMPO326D Conduct civil construction water cart operations Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017

construction water cart operations
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIMPO326A Conduct civil construction water cart operations.



2017
candidate:
efficient completion of water cart operations including:
 applying water distribution techniques
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete water cart operations that meet
all of the required outcomes including:
others
instructions
 demonstrates completion of civil construction water cart operations that safely, effectively
including:
 completion of the loading, transporting, discharging and distribution of water
including:
 completion of pressure and gravity discharging of water evenly in civil
construction compaction operations in a minimum of two different soil types to
meet moisture content requirements
 completion of pressure and gravity distribution of water into two separate water
storage facilities/receptacles
 completion of dust suppression operations

2017
Knowledge Evidence
construction water cart operations:
 identifying basic soil types and characteristics
 communicating basic soil compaction theory including the effects of moisture content
and mechanical interlock
 applying practical field tests for moisture content
 using pumps and pumping system operations
 identifying water distribution systems types, characteristics, technical capabilities and
limitations
 describing basic dust suppression theory
 identifying the causes and effects of surge and sway in bulk fluid loads
drainage

2017
Competency; and,
experience


2017

3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIRIS401D Apply site risk management system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIRIS401A Apply site risk management system


Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to apply the site risk
management system in the Resources and Infrastructure Industries.
publication.

1. Plan and 1.1 Access, interpret and apply risk management documentation
prepare to provide and ensure the work activity is compliant
information to the work 1.2 Clearly and concisely explain risk management compliance
group documentation
1.3 Provide documents and reference information for risk
management policies, procedures and programs in an accessible
manner
1.4 Maintain risk management communication through regularly
providing clear information about identified hazards and the outcomes
of risk assessment and control
2. Apply and 2.1 Explain the importance of effective consultative mechanisms

monitor participative in managing risk
arrangements 2.2 Conduct and monitor consultative procedures for
management of hazards
2.3 Promptly deal with issues raised through consultation
2.4 Record and promptly communicate the outcomes of
consultation of risk management issues
3. Apply and 3.1 Systematically identify risk management training needs

monitor the procedures 3.2 Make arrangements, in consultation with relevant individuals,
for providing training to meet risk management training needs
3.3 Provide learning opportunities, and coaching and mentoring

assistance to achieve training needs
4. Apply and 4.1 Identify and report hazards and risks

monitor procedures for 4.2 Coordinate others to routinely carry out hazard identification
identifying hazards and and risk assessments
assessing risks
4.3 Select and implement actions from hazard reports promptly
5. Apply and 5.1 Maintain standard for risk management and apply procedures
monitor the procedures for controlling risks using the hierarchy of controls
for controlling risks

5.2 Consider potential risks and plan for their management

5.3 Identify and report inadequacies in existing risk control
measures
5.4 Monitor outcomes of reported inadequacies to ensure a prompt
response
6. Apply and 6.1 Ensure accurate written completion and maintenance of risk
monitor the procedures management records
for maintaining records 6.2 Use collated information and data records to forecast and
identify hazards and monitor effectiveness of risk control procedures
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIRIS401A Apply site risk management system
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIRIS401D Apply site risk management system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIRIS401D Apply site risk

management system
Release Comment
1 This unit replaces RIIRIS401A Apply site risk management system

candidate:
 obtain and applies relevant legislation, documentation, policies and procedures
 demonstrates completion of the application of the site risk management system that safely,
occasion including:
 working with others to plan, prepare and apply the site risk management system
 identifying risk management training needs of others and prepare training plans
 providing clear and timely instruction and supervision to those involved in applying
the site risk management system
 analysing and prioritising hazards and risks
 considering and selecting most appropriate options for managing site risk using the
hierarchy of controls
 implementing selected options for managing risk
 monitoring outcomes of risk management implementations
 maintaining written records and reports for risk management systems activity and
outcomes
 using aggregate risk and hazard data to forecast and identify hazards and monitor
effectiveness of risk control procedures

Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following in applying the risk management
process through:
 key component of the sites risk management system
 responsibilities for applying site risk management system
 work instructions and processes
 using communication skills, including questioning and active listening skills with
supervisors and other employees
 writing reports to communicate procedural activity, breach or inadequacies to procedure
and review process

Competency; and,

experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIWHS202D Enter and work in confined spaces Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
RIIWHS202D Enter and work in confined spaces
Release Comment
1 The unit replaces RIIOHS202A Enter and work in confined spaces.
3 Amended Application field.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to enter and work in
confined spaces in the Resources and Infrastructure Industries.
This unit is appropriate for those working in operational roles undertaking work in confined
spaces.
Note: The terms Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) and Work Health and Safety (WHS)
National Model WHS Legislation has not been implemented RTOs are advised to
contextualise the unit of competency by referring to the existing State/Territory OHS


1 Plan and prepare for 1.1 Access, interpret and apply procedures for confined space
working in confined entry and the environmental management plan and ensure the work
space activity is compliant
1.2 Obtain, confirm, clarify and apply work instructions and
agreed procedure
1.3 Obtain, confirm, clarify and apply safety requirements
1.4 Obtain and confirm authorisation (entry permit) meets
1.5 Confirm the emergency response procedure is with the
stand-by person and understood
1.6 Identify, obtain and implement signage and barrier
requirements
1.7 Select tools and equipment for the tasks, check for
serviceability and rectify or report any faults
1.8 Identify, confirm and apply the environmental protection
requirements
1.9 Position rescue equipment by the entry permit
2 Work in confined 2.1 Gain access to confined space

space 2.2 Ensure that the atmosphere is tested and monitored for
harmful elements
2.3 Correctly apply tagging and lock-out procedures
2.4 Enter the confined space correctly
2.5 Maintain ongoing communication with the stand-by person
2.6 Comply with entry permit requirements
2.7 Monitor and adhere to allocated entry time
3 Exit confined space 3.1 Exit confined space correctly

3.2 Recover tools, equipment and materials
3.3 Conduct inspection of the confined space
3.4 Secure access to the confined space
3.5 Remove tagging and lock-out
3.6 Accurately complete confined space entry permit
4 Clean up 4.1 Clear work area and dispose of or recycle materials

4.2 Clean, check, maintain and store tools and equipment
4.3 Remove, clean and store barriers and signs

Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIOHS202A Entering and working in confined spaces
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS202D Enter and work in confined spaces Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS202D Enter and work in

confined spaces
Release Comment
1 The unit replaces RIIOHS202A Enter and work in confined spaces.

candidate:
 demonstrates completion of entering and working in confined spaces that safely,
occasion including:
 obtain appropriate entry permit and instructions for performing work in confined space
 interpreting and applying safe work method statements
 apply tagging and lock out
 selecting, wearing and caring for personal protective equipment applicable to all tasks
and environment identified
 entering the confined space
 using atmospheric monitoring devices prior to entering the confined space
 working in the confined space
 using atmospheric monitoring devices during confined space activity
 applying safe materials handling methods
 exiting the confined space
 remove tagging and lock out

Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of enter and work in confined spaces through:
 identifying areas that constitute confined spaces
 complying with site and equipment safety requirements
 complying with the entry and exit procedures, risks and regulations
 types of air contaminants and toxic gases
 identifying the limitations of breathing apparatus
 complying with site isolation and site control responsibilities and authorities
 locations of safety data sheets (SDS) information and application
 using confined space and Industry terminology

Competency; and,

experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIWHS204D Work safely at heights Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comments
1 This unit replaces RIIOHS204A Work safely at heights.
2 Formatting corrections.
3 Inserted Application information.


Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to work safety at heights in
the Resources and Infrastructure Industries.
This unit it appropriate for those working in operational roles where they are required to
perform work at heights.

1. Identify work 1.1 Access, interpret and apply height safety procedures and
requirements ensure the work activity is compliant
1.2 Inspect site to determine layout and physical condition,
condition of structures, prevailing weather conditions, equipment
requirements and potential hazards
1.3 Adhere to WHS requirements
1.4 Identify, select and check safety equipment for serviceability
1.5 Identify, manage and report potential risks and hazards
2. Identify work 2.1 Consult with authorised personnel to select materials, tools
procedures and and equipment and check for serviceability
instructions 2.2 Select, wear and care for personal protective equipment
2.3 Inspect/install fall protection and perimeter protection
equipment
2.4 Identify approved methods of moving tools and equipment to
work area and minimise potential hazards associated with tools at
heights
2.5 Ensure safety system has been installed correctly
2.6 Select and install appropriate signs and barricades
3. Access and install 3.1 Consult with authorised personnel to ensure anchor fall
equipment protection and associated equipment is correctly fitted and adjusted
3.2 Ensure all required equipment is installed
3.3 Use recommended methods to access work area for people,
tools and equipment

3.4 Locate tools and materials to eliminate or minimise the risk of

items being knocked down
4. Perform work at 4.1 Check access from ground to work area and ensure it is safe
heights 4.2 Keep fall equipment in place and adjusted appropriately for
movement during work
4.3 Undertake manual handling of materials and equipment
4.4 Locate materials and equipment ensuring that they are safely
secured and distributed
4.5 Check safety system periodically for compliance
4.6 Monitor risk control measures to ensure that they are effective
and appropriate
4.7 Reassess risk control measures, as required, in accordance
with changed work practices and/or site conditions and undertake
alterations
5. Clean up work area 5.1 Consult with authorised personnel to ensure safety system is
dismantled and removed
5.2 Clear work area and dispose of or recycle materials
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIOHS204A Working safely at heights
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS204D Work safely at heights Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS204D Work safely at

heights
Release Comments
1 This unit replaces RIIOHS204A Work safely at heights.
2 Formatting corrections.
3 Inserted Application information.

candidate:
 demonstrates completion of working safely at heights that safely, effectively and
 accessing, interpreting and applying technical and safety information for working at
heights
 assessing hazards and risk associated with working at heights and implement control
methods
 selecting wearing and caring for personal protective equipment
 identifying required safety systems including fall protection and associated equipment
 checking that fitting, adjusting and anchoring of fall protection and associated
equipment is correct
 performing work safely at heights

Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of the following when working safely at heights:
 names and functions of equipment, components and materials
 complying with equipment manufacturer’s instructions and specifications
 safe shifting and handling of tools and materials
 adhering to statutory and regulatory authority requirements
 the nature of work undertaken at heights
 complying with heights safety systems
 the processes of providing for safe working practices
 using safety equipment/systems and considerations to facilitate working safely at heights
 complying with safe work methods

Competency; and,

experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIWHS205D Control traffic with stop-slow bat Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 The unit replaces RIIOHS205A Control traffic with stop-slow bat.
2 Editorial corrections; Performance Criteria numbering for element 1 corrected.

Application
This unit describes a participant’s skills and knowledge required to control traffic with
stop-slow bat in the Resources and Infrastructure Industries.


1. Plan and prepare 1.1 Access, interpret and apply site traffic plan procedures and
ensure the work activity is compliant
1.2 Obtain, confirm, clarify and apply work instructions
1.3 Obtain, confirm, clarify and apply safety requirements
1.4 Identify, obtain and implement signage and devices
1.5 Select tools and equipment, check for serviceability and
rectify or report any faults
1.6 Identify, confirm, clarify and apply environmental protection
requirements
2. Control traffic 2.1 Position or confirm temporary traffic signs and barriers
2.2 Direct traffic correctly
2.3 Control vehicles and pedestrian traffic and ensure safety
2.4 Monitor traffic, make adjustments for changing conditions and
position waiting vehicles for smooth traffic flow
2.5 Use hand held stop/slow bats
2.6 Use visibly clear and unobstructed hand signals
2.7 Report traffic offenders
3. Operate 3.1 Adjust communication device controls for optimum

communication devices reception/transmission results
3.2 Transmit messages clearly and concisely
3.3 Maintain communication device power supply
3.4 Check communications contact after nominated period of
non-contact
4. Clean up 4.1 Remove or cover signs and devices sequentially to provide

warning to motorists during shutdown
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.


RIIOHS205A Control traffic with stop-slow bat
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS205D Control traffic with stop-slow bat Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS205D Control traffic with

stop-slow bat
Release Comment
1 The unit replaces RIIOHS205A Control traffic with stop-slow bat.
2 Editorial corrections; Performance Criteria numbering for element 1 corrected.

candidate:
 demonstrates completion of controlling traffic with a stop-slow bat that safely, effectively
including:
 reading and interpreting the work instruction and planning work activity accordingly
 positioning signage and barriers
 directing and controlling vehicle traffic
 directing and controlling pedestrian traffic
 communicating to drivers and pedestrians clearly using hand signals
 using approved communication devices such as hand held radios or phones to transmit
message and report of offenders
 removing or covering signs after work completion

Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of controlling traffic with stop-slow bat through:
 traffic controlling requirements and procedures
 complying with traffic management plans
 erecting traffic control signage and barricades
 communication device operations
 determine equipment types, characteristics, technical capabilities and limitations
 operational and maintenance procedures for equipment
 detailing site isolation and traffic control responsibilities and authorities
 describing the effects of travel speed and vehicle mass on stopping distances
 interpreting and implementing safe work method statement

Competency; and,

experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

RIIWHS302D Implement traffic management plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Release Comment
1 The unit replaces RIIOHS302A Implement traffic management plan.

Application
This unit develops a participant’s skills and knowledge required to implement a traffic
management plan in Civil construction.


1 Plan and prepare to 1.1 Access, interpret and apply traffic management documentation
implement traffic and ensure the work activity is compliant
management plan 1.2 Obtain, read, interpret, clarify and confirm work requirements
1.3 Identify, address and report potential risks, hazards and
environmental issues and implement control measures
1.4 Select and wear personal protective equipment appropriate
for the work activity
1.5 Identify, obtain and implement traffic control signage and
devices
1.6 Select, and check for faults, tools and equipment to carry out
tasks
1.7 Identify, confirm and apply environmental protection
requirements
1.8 Check the designated traffic controllers’ training and
qualifications for currency
1.9 Advise traffic controllers of the traffic flow requirements
2 Set out the traffic 2.1 Select traffic guidance scheme to suit site conditions, traffic
guidance scheme volumes and work activities
2.2 Determine and ensure adherence to work schedule, maximum
traffic delays, signals and site communications
2.3 Ensure signs and devices are correctly positioned on the
approaches to the work area
2.4 Ensure that signs and devices are positioned and displayed on
each approach
2.5 Ensure signs and devices are positioned and displayed
laterally
2.6 Ensure traffic is controlled effectively to protect the work
crew
3 Monitor traffic 3.1 Ensure traffic flow is monitored and effectiveness of guidance
guidance scheme scheme determined
3.2 Monitor work activities and provide guidance to adjust
scheme
3.3 Apply process for dealing with traffic controllers who fail to
adhere to approved procedures
3.4 Apply procedures to deal with offending motorists
4 Close down traffic 4.1 Ensure traffic is controlled to protect work crew removing

guidance scheme traffic control devices

4.2 Ensure signs are removed in sequence to provide maximum
warning during removal
4.3 Ensure guidance scheme details are recorded and reported as
required
4.4 Ensure incidents are recorded and reported as required
5 Clean up 5.1 Ensure work area is appropriately cleared

5.2 Ensure tools and equipment are cleaned, checked, maintained
and stored
Foundation Skills
Companion Volume.

RIIOHS302A Implement traffic management plan
Links
e675272

Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS302D Implement traffic management plan Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for RIIWHS302D Implement traffic

management plan
Release Comment
1 The unit replaces RIIOHS302A Implement traffic management plan.


candidate:
 works effectively with others to undertake and complete the traffic management plans that
meet all of the required outcomes including:
instructions
 communicating clearly and concisely with others to resolve coordination requirements
prior to commencing and during work activities
 demonstrates completion of implementing traffic management plans that safely,
occasion including:
 complying with State/Territory regulations on three separate live traffic projects, and
 completing one (1) project controlling site construction vehicles
 identify and select traffic guidance scheme according to conditions
 identify and select traffic guidance scheme according to conditions select and
implement signage and device requirements, position and display according to site
plan
 monitor and adjust scheme according to variances in requirements
 apply procedures to deal with non-compliant crew and motorists
Knowledge Evidence
The candidate must demonstrate knowledge of implementing a traffic management plan
through:
 accessing, interpreting and applying legislative, organization and site requirements and
procedures for:
 JSAs/JSEA/Safe work method statement
 potential hazards and risks
 controlling traffic
 basic signalling
 signs and devices
 radio operations
 identifying quality requirements
 applying civil construction terminology

Competency; and,

experience



3-6 3 Years
(Quarrying)

3-6 5 Years
Construction

Other sectors
regulation.
locations.
Links
e675272

SIRCDIS302 Deliver medicines to customers outside the pharmacy Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
SIRCDIS302 Deliver medicines to customers outside the

pharmacy
The version details of this endorsed unit are in the table below. The latest information is at the
top.
Release Comments
First This is an updated unit, based on and equivalent to SIRPDIS002A Deliver

Release prescription medicines to customers outside the pharmacy.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to plan and
carry out home delivery of dispensed medications and other pharmacy products to community
pharmacy customers.

This unit applies to pharmacy assistants and dispensary assistants who work in community
pharmacies.
A person undertaking this role is required to work under the supervision and direction of a
pharmacist.
All relevant federal, state or territory legislation, Pharmacy Board of Australia Guidelines,
and established practice and quality assurance standards are to be met.
Pre-Requisites
SIRCHCS201 Support the supply of Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only Medicines



essential outcomes of a achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used,
unit of competency. further information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge
section and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be
1. Confirm customer 1.1.Identify pharmacy products to be delivered to customer.
delivery 1.2.Identify prescription items required.
requirements. 1.3.Confirm customer details.
1.4.Confirm delivery information with the customer.
2. Prepare and plan 2.1.Confirm that items are ready for delivery.
prescription 2.2.Liaise with a pharmacist to confirm method of providing
deliveries. customer advice.
2.3.Prepare items for delivery to meet handling and storage
requirements.
2.4.Confirm that delivery documentation is accurate and complete.
2.5.Use available aids to plan the most efficient delivery route.
2.6.Schedule deliveries to suit requirements of the pharmacy and
customers.
3. Distribute medicine 3.1.Verify customer or agent identity and any special delivery
to customers instructions.
outside the 3.2.Explain information provided on medicines and, where
community instructed by the pharmacist, question to confirm customer or
pharmacy. agent’s understanding.
3.3.Request a dated signature as evidence of receipt of goods.
3.4.Arrange for pharmacist follow-up in situations requiring
additional assistance or therapeutic advice.
3.5.Finalise the sales transaction if appropriate.
4. Reconcile delivered 4.1.Reconcile medicines and other items collected for delivery with
items and records. items distributed.
4.2.Reconcile cash payment with the value of items sold.
4.3.Complete delivery documentation and records.
4.4.Follow pharmacy procedures to make alternative arrangements
where unplanned factors have prevented delivery of medications.


Required skills
 confirm that the person receiving medicines and delivery information is authorised to
do so
 confirm that the person receiving medicines is not a child
 explain information contained on cautionary and advisory labels in a level of English
suited to customer communication requirements
 question to confirm that the customer correctly understands the information provided
 invite further questions from the customer
 seek direction from the dispensing pharmacist
 use and interpret non-verbal communication
 follow pharmacy procedures
 check prescription information
 read directions and maps to locate addresses and plan efficient delivery routes
 plan delivery routes to achieve efficient delivery outcomes
 arrange for a customer to make contact with a pharmacist where more detailed support
or advice is required
 problem-solving skills to respond to situations where no authorised person is available to
receive items
Required knowledge
 pharmacy procedures relating to:
 delivery of prescription items to customers outside the pharmacy
 response to unavailability of the customer or an authorised agent to accept delivery
 responding to customer questions
 arranging for a pharmacist to provide follow-up therapeutic advice and information to
the customer
 protecting security of self, product and cash
 response in the event of theft, loss or accident
 product and delivery:
 charges
 payment options and procedures
 privacy principles as they relate to home delivery of medicines
 label information, such as:

 dosage regimen, e.g. dose time in relation to food

 frequency
 duration of treatment
 special storage requirements, e.g. cold chain
 role boundaries and responsibilities and circumstances under which referral to a
pharmacist or other pharmacy staff is required

Evidence Guide
Critical aspects for Evidence of the ability to:

assessment and evidence  apply pharmacy procedures when delivering dispensed
required to demonstrate medicines and other products outside the pharmacy
 provide information in ways appropriate to customer
needs and demonstrate relevant techniques to confirm
understanding
 apply correct storage and transport conditions and any
special delivery requirements for dispensed items
 recognise and arrange follow-up contact, in situations
requiring referral to a pharmacist.
Context of and specific Assessment must ensure that competency is:
resources for assessment  demonstrated over a period of time and observed by the
assessor or the technical expert working in partnership
with the assessor as described in the assessment
 demonstrated in a real workplace environment that meets
relevant industry standards and which may include client
interruptions and involvement in other related activities
normally expected in the pharmacy.
Assessment must ensure access to:
 a range of customers or their agents with different
locations and delivery requirements who are typical of the
customer base
 dispensed items and other products for delivery to the
customer or their agent
 dispensed items requiring special handling
 delivery documentation and record-keeping systems
 payment systems
 relevant documentation, such as:
 customer details
 delivery checklists
 maps or location information
 pharmacy procedures
 real or simulated prescriptions
 CMI.

Method of assessment A range of assessment methods should be used to assess

practical skills and knowledge. The following examples are
appropriate for this unit:
 observation of the candidate:
 preparing for deliveries
 delivering items to customers outside the pharmacy
 completing documentation and records relevant to
delivering prescription and other pharmacy items
 seeking direction from the dispensing pharmacist
 review of portfolios of evidence and third-party
workplace reports of on-the-job performance
 role plays to:
 confirm communication skills that meet diverse
customer requirements
 demonstrate understanding of contingency
management procedures
 written or oral questions appropriate to the language and
literacy level of the learner to test relevant underpinning
knowledge.
Guidance information for Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry
assessment sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement
Pharmacy products may  prescription medicines

include:  Pharmacy Medicines (S2)
 non-scheduled pharmacy products.
Customer may include people:  from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds
and with varying mental and physical abilities
 in their own home or contacting the pharmacy by phone
 in residential care settings
 with special needs, such as:
 the elderly
 infants
 who are:
 drug or alcohol affected
 emotionally unstable
 mentally unstable
 physically unwell.
Customer details may include:  patient name
 delivery address
 telephone number
 suitable delivery times
 specific location advice.
Delivery information may  items on the prescriptions to be dispensed
include:  other products required
 estimated delivery time
 persons authorised to accept delivery
 payment method.
Ready for delivery may include:  assembled items are complete, clearly and correctly
labelled, and match customer requirements
 a pharmacist has verified dispensed items
 required information and advice accompanies the items
 items are packaged appropriately to protect customer
privacy and product integrity.
Handling and storage  temperature control and cold chain items
requirements may include:  light-sensitive items
 heat-sensitive items.

Delivery documentation may  prescription documentation to be signed by customer or

include: agent
 self-care and health information
 other information supplied by a pharmacist
 delivery check sheets
 customer location details.
Information provided on  pharmacy labels
medicines may include:  cautionary and advisory labels
 additional information or advice prepared by a
pharmacist
 information provided by the supplier
 self-care and health information
 Consumer Medicine Information (CMI).
Unit Sector(s)
Community Pharmacy
Competency field
Dispensary

SIRCHCS201 Support the supply of Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only MedicinesDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
SIRCHCS201 Support the supply of Pharmacy Medicines and

Pharmacist Only Medicines
The version details of this endorsed unit are in the table below. The latest information is at the
top.
Release Comments
First This is a revised unit, based on and equivalent to SIRPPKS001A Support the sale
Release of pharmacy and pharmacist-only medicines.
New functional area. Unit descriptor expanded to define regulatory environment.
Application statement expanded to define scope and boundaries of the pharmacy
assistant role. No change to the overall scope or outcomes of the unit.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to support the
supply of Pharmacy Medicines (S2) and Pharmacist Only Medicines (S3).

This unit applies to community pharmacy employees working as pharmacy assistants or
dispensary assistants. Pharmacy assistants work directly with customers, suggesting Pharmacy
Medicines and unscheduled medicines. In situations where customers require referral to a
pharmacist for therapeutic advice, or where the supply of Pharmacist Only Medicines or
products is required, the pharmacy assistant gathers information, refers the customer on, and
then supports the pharmacist by finalising the supply of medicines and products.
A person undertaking this role is required to work under the supervision of a pharmacist.
All relevant federal, state or territory legislation, Pharmacy Board of Australia Guidelines,
and established practice and quality assurance standards are to be met relating to the
promotion and supply of Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only Medicines.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



essential outcomes of achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text is used, further
a unit of competency. information is detailed in the required skills and knowledge section
and the range statement. Assessment of performance is to be
1. Identify and locate 1.1.Follow pharmacy procedures that address legal requirements and
scheduled industry standards for the supply of medicines and products to
medicines in the customers in community pharmacies.
pharmacy. 1.2.Identify medicines, storage locations and requirements according
to the Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Medicines and
Poisons (SUSMP).
1.3.Identify common medicine categories for which Pharmacy
Medicines or Pharmacist Only Medicines are available.
2. Assess customer 2.1.Follow pharmacy protocols and procedures to determine
needs. customer needs, applying tact and discretion when collecting
information.
2.2.Assess response from customer.
2.3.Identify and act on triggers for referral to a pharmacist.
3. Supply scheduled 3.1.Apply pharmacy procedures for complying with the conditions
medicines. relating to the supply of scheduled medicines.
3.2.Supply medicines and products to meet customer needs where
relevant.
3.3.Finalise supply of Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only
Medicines and products to customers following pharmacist
provision of therapeutic advice.
3.4.Access relevant information sources to provide product, lifestyle
and self-care advice to customers and check customer
understanding.


Required skills
 interact with the customer to:
 obtain and provide information
 confirm understanding
 suggest and supply medicines and products
 ask questions to identify and confirm requirements
 learning skills to maintain currency of the schedule of the SUSMP
 follow pharmacy protocols and procedures
 interpret information on product labels
 record customer information
 teamwork skills to operate as part of a pharmacy team, providing relevant information and
seeking advice from a pharmacist and other pharmacy staff as required
 technology skills to access and use information systems required by the role
Required knowledge
 broad factors taken into account when determining scheduling, e.g. quantities and
concentration of active ingredients in packaged medicine
 common problems or health conditions for which Pharmacy Medicines or Pharmacist
Only Medicines are used
 health privacy principles
 legal requirements and pharmacy procedures for positioning and advertising scheduled
items in a pharmacy
 personal role boundaries and responsibilities, and circumstances under which referral to a
pharmacist or other pharmacy staff is required
 pharmacy protocols and procedures relating to Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only
Medicines, including:
 maintaining privacy and confidentiality of customer information
 referring to a pharmacist
 supplying Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only Medicines
 roles of the:
 Advisory Committee in Chemicals Scheduling
 Advisory Committee on Medicines Scheduling
 Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) in approving registration of new medicines
 sources of information on scheduled medicines
 system for scheduling medicines
 schedule of medicines, including:

 Pharmacy Medicine (S2)

 Pharmacist Only Medicine (S3)
 Prescription Only Medicine (S4)
 Caution (S5)
 Poison (S6)
 Dangerous Poison (S7)
 Controlled Drug (S8)
 Prohibited Substance (S9)

Evidence Guide
Critical aspects for assessment Evidence of the ability to:

and evidence required to  apply knowledge of commonly requested medicines
demonstrate competency in scheduled as Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only
this unit Medicines
 follow pharmacy protocols and procedures to identify
customer supply needs
 operate within the role boundaries that apply to a
pharmacy assistant and follow pharmacy protocols and
procedures when supplying Pharmacy Medicines and
 refer all requests for Pharmacist Only Medicines to a
pharmacist, and recognise and act on other triggers for
referral.
Context of and specific Assessment must ensure that competency is:
resources for assessment  observed by the assessor or the technical expert working
in partnership with the assessor as described in the
assessment guidelines
 demonstrated across a range of customers over
sufficient time to include handling of a range of
contingencies
 demonstrated in a real or simulated pharmacy
environment, which may include customer interruptions
and involvement in other related activities normally
expected in the pharmacy.
Assessment must ensure access to:
 a range of real or simulated customers with different
requirements
 a range of Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only
Medicines
 typical pharmacy storage locations, shelf facings and
signage for a community pharmacy, including
unscheduled medicines, Pharmacy Medicines and
 pharmacy protocols and procedures
 relevant regulations and guidelines
 relevant documentation, such as:

 consumer product information

 self-care advice.
 observation of the candidate in the workplace:
 applying tact and discretion when collecting
information from and providing information to
customers
 following pharmacy procedures when supplying
Pharmacy Medicines and Pharmacist Only
Medicines
 responding to product and symptom-based requests
 written or oral questions appropriate to the language and
literacy level of the learner to test relevant underpinning
knowledge
 role plays to confirm communication skills required to
meet diverse customer requirements
workplace reports of on-the-job performance.
Guidance information for Holistic assessment with other units relevant to the industry
assessment sector, workplace and job role is recommended.

Range Statement
Legal requirements and industry  consumer law, environmental law, work health and
standards may vary between States safety (WHS); and welfare law drugs, poisons and
and Territories and may include: controlled substances legislation
 Health Act and related regulations
 Pharmacy Board of Australia guidelines and
directives
 pharmacy and pharmacist Acts and related
regulations
 Pharmaceutical Society of Australia’s Professional
Practice Standards
 Therapeutic Goods Administration guidelines and
requirements
 SUSMP.
Customers may include people:  from a range of social, cultural and ethnic
backgrounds and with varying mental and physical
abilities
 visiting the pharmacy, contacting the pharmacy by
phone, or in their own home
 with special needs, such as:
 the elderly
 infants
 who are:
 drug or alcohol affected
 emotionally unstable
 mentally unstable
 physically unwell.
Standards for the Uniform  general sales medicines (unscheduled)
Scheduling of Medicines and  Pharmacy Medicine (S2)
Poisons may include:  Pharmacist Only Medicine (S3)
 Prescription Only Medicine (S4)
 Controlled Drug (S8).
Protocols and procedures may  questioning the customer to establish:
include:  who the product is for
 symptoms

 duration of symptoms
 other existing health conditions
 other medications being used by the customer
 if the customer has seen a doctor in the past 12
months
 assessing:
 customer responses to questions
 own confidence that the product or service
requested by the customer or recommended by
the pharmacy assistant is right for the customer’s
symptoms.
Triggers for referral to a  customer who is:
pharmacist may include:  a child under 2
 an aged person
 pregnant or breastfeeding
 taking other medicines
 customer who has:
 had the complaint for some time
 other health conditions, such as asthma, diabetes
and high blood pressure
 used the product before but is not satisfied with
its efficacy
 pharmacy assistant is unsure and needs confirmation
of the medicine selected, even if the product has been
requested by name
 customer who appears to be:
 sick
 confused
 uncertain
 dissatisfied
 angry
 under the influence of drugs or alcohol
 personal concern regarding the accuracy of the
information given by the customer
 request for Pharmacist Only Medicine.
Information sources may include:  self-care and health-care information
 product brochures and leaflets supplied by a
pharmacist
 manufacturer information
 Consumer Medicine Information (CMI) website and
phone line
 industry and professional publications.

Unit Sector(s)
Community Pharmacy
Competency field
Health Care Support

SITHFAB201 Provide responsible service of alcohol Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
SITHFAB201 Provide responsible service of alcohol
The version details of this endorsed unit of competency set are in the table below. The latest
information is at the top.
Version Comments
2.0 Amendments to the Evidence Guide which better define the assessment environment
and assessment requirements of the unit.
1.0 E
Replaces and is equivalent to SITHFAB009A Provide responsible service of
alcohol.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to responsibly
sell or serve alcohol.

Responsible practices must be undertaken wherever alcohol is served or sold, including where
alcohol samples are served during on-site product tastings. This unit, therefore, applies to any
workplace where alcohol is served or sold, including all types of hospitality venues, retail
liquor outlets and wineries, breweries and distilleries.
This unit applies to all levels of sales personnel involved in the sale, service and promotional
service of alcohol in licensed premises. Those selling or serving alcohol may include food and
beverage attendants; retail liquor sales persons; winery, brewery and distillery cellar door staff
and supplier sales representatives. It also applies to security staff who monitor customer
behaviour and to the licensee who is ultimately responsible for RSA management.

The unit incorporates the knowledge requirements, under state and territory liquor licensing
law, for employees engaged in the sale or service of alcohol.
Certification requirements differ across states and territories. In most cases all people
involved in the sale, service and promotional service of alcohol in licensed premises must be
certified in this unit. This can include the licensee and security staff.
This unit covers the Responsible Service of Alcohol (RSA) skill and knowledge requirements
common to all States and Territories. Some legislative requirements and knowledge will differ
across borders. In some cases after completion of this unit, state and territory liquor
authorities require candidates to complete a bridging course to address these specific
differences.
Those developing training to support this unit must consult the relevant state or territory
liquor licensing authority to determine any accreditation arrangements for courses, trainers
and assessors.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1. Sell or serve alcohol 1.1 Sell or serve alcohol according to provisions of relevant
responsibly. state or territory legislation, licensing requirements and
responsible service of alcohol principles.
1.2 Provide accurate information to customers on alcoholic
beverages according to organisation or house policy and
government legislation, including types, strengths,
standard drinks and the alcoholic percentages of a range of
frequently sold alcoholic beverages.
1.3 Assist customers with information on the range of non
alcoholic beverages available for purchase.
1.4 Identify issues related to the sale and service of alcohol to
different types of customers, especially those at risk, and
incorporate them into sales or service.
2. Assist customers to 2.1 Prepare and serve standard drinks or samples according
drink within to industry requirements.
appropriate limits. 2.2 Encourage customers courteously and diplomatically to
drink within appropriate limits.
2.3 Recognise erratic drinking patterns as an early sign of
possible intoxication and take appropriate action.
2.4 Monitor emotional and physical state of customers for
signs of intoxication and ill effects of illicit or other drug
usage.
2.5 Where appropriate, offer food and non alcoholic
beverages.
2.6 Politely decline requests for alcohol to be dispensed in a
manner that is irresponsible, or which encourages the
rapid or excessive consumption of alcohol, and advise
customers of the reasons for the refusal.
3. Assess alcohol affected 3.1 Assess intoxication levels of customers using a number of
customers and identify methods, including observing changes in behaviour,
customers to whom observing emotional and physical state, and monitoring
sale or service must be noise levels and drink purchases.
refused. 3.2 When assessing intoxication, take into account factors
that may affect individual responses to alcohol.
3.3 Identify customers to whom sale or service must be

refused according to state and territory legislation,

including minors, those purchasing on behalf of minors,
intoxicated persons, and persons affected by the
consumption of illicit and other drugs.
3.4 Where appropriate, request and obtain acceptable proof of
age prior to sale or service.
4. Refuse to provide 4.1 Refuse service in a polite manner and state reasons for the
alcohol. refusal.
4.2 Speak to intoxicated customers in a suitable and
consistent manner, minimising confrontation and
arguments and point out signage.
4.3 Provide appropriate assistance to customers when
refusing service.
4.4 Where appropriate, give customers a verbal warning and
ask them to leave the premises according to organisation
or house requirements, the specific situation and
provisions of state or territory legislation and regulations.
4.5 Use appropriate communication and conflict resolution
skills to handle difficult situations.
4.6 Refer difficult situations beyond the scope of individual
responsibility to the appropriate person.
4.7 Promptly identify situations that pose a threat to the safety
or security of colleagues, customers or property, and seek
assistance from appropriate colleagues according to
organisational policy.


Required skills
 communication to:
 provide complex information on responsible service of alcohol laws in a way that is
readily understood by customers
 speak firmly and clearly with intoxicated customers
 deal with customers sensitively, courteously and discreetly using non-confrontational
language
 critical thinking skills to assess intoxication levels of customers
 initiative and enterprise skills to offer food and non-alcoholic beverages to assist
customers
 learning skills to continuously update knowledge of changing responsible service of
alcohol laws and regulations
 read and interpret documents such as identification (ID) cards, proof of age cards,
driver’s licences, statutory signage, warning signs and wording within advertising or
promotional material, in-house policies and procedures and any general plain English
regulatory and advisory information issued by local, or state and territory liquor
licensing authorities
 numeracy skills to measure and calculate standard drinks or samples and calculate blood
alcohol levels to determine alcohol consumption
 identify customers to whom sale or service must be refused
 identify intoxicated persons and refuse service
 identify situations that pose a safety threat and seek assistance from appropriate
colleagues
 teamwork skills to share customer information with team members to ensure proper
responsible service of alcohol practices within the organisation.
Required knowledge
 public interest reasons for implementation of responsible service of alcohol practices,
including:
 government and community concern with alcohol misuse and abuse
 crime, violence and anti-social behaviour associated with alcohol abuse
 impact of excessive drinking on:
 local neighbourhood and community
 premises and staff
 customers
 particular types of customers who may be at heightened risk such as young people,
pregnant women and minors

 government agencies such as the local police, health facilities and road authority
 key agencies and how to source relevant information on laws, regulations and codes of
practice or conduct
 current promotional and strategic community education campaigns developed and
conducted by agencies and industry groups
 effects of alcohol on:
 emotional state
 health
 physical alertness
 factors that affect individual responses to alcohol, including:
 gender
 weight
 general health
 rate of consumption
 food intake
 other substances taken
 time for effects of alcohol to be registered
 standard drinks and acceptable measures of alcohol
 indicators of intoxication, including ways of assessing intoxication of customers
 ways of assessing customers affected by the consumption of illicit and other drugs
 principles of harm minimisation and strategies to minimise the harm associated with
liquor abuse:
 strategies laid down in legislation and codes of conduct developed by government
agencies or industry groups
 organisational policies that are designed to reduce the harm associated with liquor
abuse
 the key provisions of liquor laws and regulations at a depth relevant to the scope of job
responsibility within licensed premises, including the following list that expresses general
statements about requirements of liquor legislation and information that must be
customised for each State or Territory:
 legislative definition of intoxication; intoxicated person and unduly intoxicated
 role of individual staff members and supervisors or managers in providing responsible
service of alcohol, including seller or server duty of care and liability
 requirement to adopt and use statutory signage on the premises for the entire range of
circumstances applicable to the organisation
 requirements for mandatory content of any warning signs and wording within
advertising or promotional material of any form, such as print advertising or internet
sales
 requirements for the remote sale and delivery of alcohol sales generated via the
telephone, fax, email or mail
 requirements for proof of age and obligations to minors under local legislation
 provisions for retaining and reporting falsified proof of age documents

 provisions for requiring someone to leave the premises

 transportation options
 barring procedures
 opening and closing hour provisions
 requirements for monitoring noise and disturbances in and around licensed premises
 requirements laid down in codes of practice or conduct developed by government
agencies or industry groups
 requirements described by an in-house policy, standard or code of practice or conduct
 training and record keeping requirements
 banned or undesirable products
 personal and business implications of breaching any laws, regulations, government or
industry-driven codes of practice or conduct
 offences and penalties relating to offences
 legal restrictions on alcohol use customised to state or territory legislation, including
intoxication provisions of liquor licensing laws
 legal drink and drive limits.

Evidence Guide

and evidence required to  responsibly sell or serve alcohol on multiple occasions
demonstrate competency in this to customers
unit
 satisfy the legal requirements for responsible sale or
service of alcohol for the local state or territory law
 follow organisational policies and procedures for the
responsible service of alcohol
 demonstrate knowledge of:
 reasons for and benefits of responsible service of
alcohol
 principles of responsible service of alcohol and
harm minimisation
 the key provisions of liquor laws and regulations at
a depth relevant to the scope of job responsibility
within licensed premises
 the ramifications of non-compliance with the law
and industry codes for the organisation, licensee
and individual staff members.
Context of and specific Assessment must ensure use of:
resources for assessment  a real or simulated workplace
 a range of industry equipment to demonstrate standard
drink measures or samples
 relevant and current publications, signage, information
and plain English fact sheets distributed by
government regulators and industry bodies.
the practical skills and knowledge required to sell or serve
alcohol responsibly.
The following examples are appropriate for this unit:
 role-plays or case studies simulating customers,
intoxicated patrons and alcohol that allow assessment
of the individual’s ability to:
 interact with customers and explain organisational
legal requirements to sell or serve alcohol
responsibly

 explain in-house policies for the service of alcohol

 refuse service to people to whom alcohol cannot
be served
 speak to intoxicated customers to minimise
confrontation
 case studies and problem-solving activities to assess
the individual’s ability to respond to:
 situations where customers are engaging in erratic
drinking patterns
 signage deficiencies
 situations that pose a safety threat
 written or oral questioning to assess knowledge of
legislation and all other knowledge components of this
unit
workplace reports of on-the-job performance by the
individual.
Guidance information for The assessor should design integrated assessment
assessment activities to holistically assess this unit with other units
relevant to the industry sector, workplace and job role, for
example:
 SITHFAB202 Operate a bar
 SITHFAB302 Conduct a product tasting for alcoholic
beverages
 SITHFAB303 Prepare and serve cocktails
 SITHFAB304 Provide advice on beers, spirits and
liqueurs
 SITHFAB305 Provide advice on Australian wines
 SITHFAB306 Provide advice on imported wines
 SITHFAB307 Provide table service of food and
beverage.

Range Statement
Accurate information may be provided to  by use of fact sheets and advertising

customers: material that comply with legislative
requirements
 by use of mandatory signage
 verbally.
Issues may include:  demeanour and mood
 familiarity with specific customers
 perceived effects of illicit and other drug
usage
 perceived health status
 physical stature
 social context.
Those at risk may include:  Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islanders
 minors
 people affected by the consumption of
illicit and other drugs
 people from non-English speaking
backgrounds
 women
 young customers.
Standard drinks should be measured using:  appropriate nip measures
 appropriately sized sample glasses
 electronic dispensing and measuring
devices.
Samples may include tastings of any item for  brewery
sale in a:  distillery
 hospitality venue
 retail liquor outlet
 winery.
Erratic drinking patterns may include:  mixing a wide range of drink types
 drinking quickly and asking for more
immediately
 ordering more than one drink for
self-consumption
 mixing alcohol consumption with
consumption of prescription or illicit

drugs
 consistently returning to the tasting site to
request more samples
 ordering multiple samples
 ordering large samples
 ordering ‘triple shots’ or extra large
drinks.
Requests for drinks to be dispensed in a  jugs of spirits and mixers
manner that is irresponsible, or which  large samples
encourages the rapid or excessive  laybacks
consumption of liquor include:  multiple samples for self-consumption
 rocket fuel
 shooters
 test tubes
 yard glasses.
Changes in behaviour may involve the  aggressive
customer becoming:  disorderly
 quarrelsome
 violent.
Factors include:  food intake
 gender
 general health
 other substances taken, especially illicit
and other drugs
 rate of consumption
 weight.
Proof of age includes:  current drivers licence
 passport
 photo card
 proof of age card.
Intoxicated denotes:  drunk
 those to whom service may be refused
due to excessive consumption of alcohol
 ‘unduly intoxicated’ may also be used in
some state or territory legislation.
Signage may include:  signs produced in-house that comply with
wording required by legislation
 standard promotional signs issued by the
relevant state or territory licensing
authority
 warning notices within any form of
advertising.

Appropriate assistance may include:  assisting the customer to connect with

their designated driver
 offering alternatives to alcohol, including
food
 offering to sell or serve non-alcoholic
drinks
 organising transport for customers
wishing to leave
 providing information on taxis.
Communication and conflict resolution skills  using open and non-aggressive body
may include: language
 using a number of strategies to diffuse a
situation, such as taking the person away
from an audience or blaming the refusal
on the ‘law’
 monitoring the reactions of other
customers
 picking early warning signs and
intervening before the person is
intoxicated
 not using physical touch or body
language
 remaining calm and using tactful
language.
Unit Sector(s)
Hospitality
Competency Field
Food and Beverage

SITXCOM401 Manage conflict Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Version Comments
1.0 E
Replaces and is equivalent to SITXCOM003A Deal with conflict situations.
Title changed to better reflect the complexity of the unit. Re-worked Elements,
Performance Criteria, Required Skills and Knowledge to more fully articulate
content.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to resolve
complex or escalated complaints and disputes with internal and external customers and
colleagues. It requires the ability to use effective conflict resolution techniques and
communication skills to manage conflict and develop solutions. It does not cover formal
negotiation, counselling or mediation.

This unit applies to all tourism, travel, hospitality and event sectors.
The unit applies mainly to senior operational personnel, supervisors and managers who
operate with some level of independence and use discretion and judgement to resolve
conflicts.
of endorsement.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1. Identify conflict 1.1 Identify potential for conflict and take swift and tactful action
situations. to prevent escalation.
1.2 Identify situations where personal safety of customers or
colleagues may be threatened and organise appropriate
assistance.
1.3 Identify and use resources to assist in managing conflict.
2. Resolve conflict. 2.1 Take responsibility for finding a solution to conflict.
2.2 Establish and agree on the nature and details of conflict with all
parties and assess impact.
2.3 Deal with conflict sensitively, courteously and discreetly.
2.4 Minimise impact on other colleagues and customers.
2.5 Use effective conflict resolution techniques and
communication skills to manage the conflict and develop
solutions.
2.6 Encourage all points of view, acknowledge them and treat them
with respect.
2.7 Identify and evaluate the impact of conflict on business
reputation and legal liability.
2.8 Evaluate options to resolve the dispute taking into account any
organisational policies and constraints.
2.9 Implement the best solution and complete required
documentation.
3. Evaluate conflicts 3.1 Communicate with the parties involved to seek and provide
and resolutions. feedback on conflict and its resolution.
3.2 Evaluate and reflect on the situation and effectiveness of the
solution.
3.3 Determine possible causes of workplace conflict and provide
input for workplace enhancement and improvements.


Required skills
 communication skills to deal with conflict sensitively, courteously and discreetly through
use of conflict resolution techniques
 critical thinking skills to analyse and decide on the best resolution for conflict
 initiative and enterprise skills to consider and suggest changes to workplace practices to
avoid future conflict
 research sources of internal and external assistance to resolve the conflict
 write reports, including comprehensive details of the conflict, the parties involved,
discussions with all parties and the resolution
 problem-solving skills to identify and resolve conflicts and minimise impact on other
colleagues and customers
 self-management skills to take responsibility for conflict outcomes
 teamwork skills to discuss and resolve conflicts between team members.
Required knowledge
 types of conflict in the tourism, travel, hospitality and event industries, typical causes and
resolutions
 conflict theory, including signs, stages, levels, factors involved and results
 conflict resolution and communication techniques, including:
 assertiveness
 non-verbal communication
 language style
 negotiation
 use of appropriate communication
 organisational policies and procedures for complaint, conflict and dispute resolution.

Evidence Guide

and evidence required to  resolve different workplace conflicts using a range of
demonstrate competency in this conflict resolution and communication techniques
unit
 demonstrate knowledge of commonly occurring
conflict situations in the workplace and the stages of
conflict.
resources for assessment  a real or simulated tourism, hospitality or event
industry environment where conflicts occur
 current commercial policies and procedures for
complaint, conflict and dispute resolution
 others with whom the individual can interact to
resolve conflicts.
practical skills and knowledge. The following examples
are appropriate for this unit:
 direct observation, using role plays, of the individual
resolving conflicts using a range of communication
techniques
 use of simulated activities to assess participation in
conflicts involving:
 customers refusing to leave or be pacified
 drug or alcohol-affected persons
 people who appear to be violent or are threatening
 use of problem-solving activities so the individual can
analyse and find solutions for various conflicts arising
in the workplace
 written or oral questioning to assess knowledge of:
 types of conflict
 conflict theory
 conflict resolution and communication techniques
 content of policy and procedures for refunds or
exchange

individual.

example:
 BSBDIV501A Manage diversity in the workplace
 SITHACS201 Provide porter services
 SITHACS303 Provide accommodation reception
services
 SITTGDE303 Lead tour groups
 SITTGDE401 Coordinate and operate tours
 SITXCCS302 Provide club reception services
 SITXCCS303 Provide service to customers
 SITXCCS401 Enhance the customer service
experience
 SITXHRM503 Monitor staff performance.

Range Statement
Conflict may relate to:  customers whose special needs or expectations have not
been met
 delays or poor timing of product or service supply
 difficult or complex customer complaints
 difficult or demanding customers
 disputes or arguments among work colleagues
 ejection from premises
 escalated customer or staff complaints leading to disputes
 human resource issues:
 counselling
 incorrect pay
 job duties
 lack of competence
 worker mistakes
 rosters
 dismissals
 misunderstandings or communication barriers
 problems or faults with a service or product
 refused entry.
Situations may involve:  customers refusing to leave or be pacified
 people who appear to be violent or are threatening
 people involved in physical violence
 people with guns or arms
 situations where someone has been or may be hurt.
Customers or colleagues may  internal or external customers
include:  those from a range of social and cultural backgrounds
 outside contractors
 suppliers
 workmates.
Resources may include:  counsellors
 internal security staff
 mediators
 other staff members

 police
 senior staff.
Conflict resolution  negotiation
techniques may include:  use of appropriate communication skills.
Communication skills may  ability to speak clearly, be understood and use appropriate
include: language, style and tone
 asking questions to gain information, clarify ambiguities
and adequately understand requirements
 assertiveness
 empathising with the person’s situation while upholding
organisational policy
 non-verbal communication and recognition of non-verbal
signs
 questioning techniques, such as asking the right question
to elicit the other parties’ needs
 rephrasing and repeating questions, requests and
statements to confirm that they have been correctly
understood
 those appropriate to different social and cultural groups.
Policies and constraints may  complaints
include:  customer service
 disputes
 exchanges
 refunds
 staff grievance
 costs and budgets
 lack of availability of replacement products or services
 organisational policy on refunds or exchange.
Causes of workplace conflict  changes to practices and procedures
may include:  complaints
 cultural misunderstanding
 lack of empathy
 lack of information
 poor communication
 rostering issues
 workplace systems.

Unit Sector(s)
Cross-Sector
Competency Field
Communication and Teamwork

SITXEVT605 Develop event transport plans Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Version Comments
1.0 E
Replaces and is equivalent to SITXEVT018B Develop a transport strategy for an
event.
Simplified title. Re-worked Elements, Performance Criteria, Required skills and
Required knowledge to more fully articulate content. Re-worked Evidence Guide to
better articulate rigorous assessment requirements.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to analyse event
transport needs and develop appropriate plans and procedures for transporting people to, from
and between event venues. It requires the ability to use critical thinking, planning and
organisational skills, combined with a knowledge of transport management issues and
options.

Events are diverse in nature and this unit is relevant to any type of event coordinated in any
industry context, including the tourism, hospitality, sport, cultural and community sectors.
This unit applies to event managers who operate with significant autonomy and who are
responsible for making a range of strategic event management decisions. They may work in
event management companies, in event venues, or in organisations that organise their own
events.
The unit may have particular application in the transport industry, where transport companies
may be called upon to work on the development of an event transport strategy. However, the
unit does not cover the specialist skills required to manage and monitor large transport fleets,
as these roles are undertaken by people working as transport specialists.
of endorsement.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1. Analyse transport 1.1 Determine event transport needs based on analysis of key event
needs. information.
1.2 Identify and assess transport needs of different event
stakeholders, including those with special needs.
1.3 Assess need for assistance from transport specialists or
involvement of authorities in the transport planning process.
2. Develop transport 2.1 Identify and analyse transport options and resources in
strategies. consultation with relevant suppliers.
2.2 Assess transport issues and risks presented by event location
and geography.
2.3 Analyse and respond to compliance requirements.
2.4 Analyse and incorporate transport issues and risks into
transport strategy development.
2.5 Evaluate and respond to broader event management
constraints and issues as they relate to event transport.
2.6 Consult with event stakeholders about transport strategies at
appropriate times prior to the event.
2.7 Develop evaluation criteria for the transport strategy in
consultation with stakeholders.
3. Develop transport 3.1 Develop and document transport procedures for event
operational plan. components, including contingency procedures.
3.2 Determine and document internal and external resource
requirements to maximise efficient use, cost effectiveness and
profitability.
3.3 Identify critical tasks and allocate responsibilities and
timelines.
3.4 Develop contractor specifications as required.
3.5 Obtain approval for plan from relevant stakeholders.
3.6 Provide operational information to staff and other
stakeholders.
4. Evaluate transport 4.1 Evaluate efficiency and effectiveness of the transport strategy
strategies. based on agreed evaluation criteria.
4.2 Incorporate outcomes of evaluation into future planning.


Required skills
 communication skills to consult with diverse stakeholders on complex management and
operational issues
 critical thinking skills to:
 analyse complex event information to determine nature of transport requirements
 develop practical and operationally sound event transport solutions
 interpret complex event documentation
 develop plans and operational documents for the management of event transport
 numeracy skills to work with event budgets
 planning and organisational skills to develop cohesive operational plans and procedures
 problem-solving skills to anticipate and respond to potential transport risks and problems
with effective strategies and procedures.
Required knowledge
 role of transport planning in the overall context of event management
 types of events that require the development of dedicated transport strategies
 sources of specialist assistance for complex transport planning
 transport alternatives for consideration in the planning process:
 private
 public
 air, land and sea
 legislation, regulations and industry codes that affect transport planning
 transport strategy resource requirements:
 financial
 human
 physical
 issues and risks associated with event transport:
 access
 availability of services
 congestion
 distance
 sustainability considerations.

Evidence Guide
Overview of
assessment

assessment and  develop transport plans for events involving:
evidence required to
demonstrate  comprehensive event plans
competency in this unit  dedicated event budgets
 formal communications plans
 multiple operational components
 an event operations team
 a wide range of stakeholders
 analyse event transport needs and develop resource and cost
efficient strategies and operational plans for multiple and
diverse events
 integrate knowledge of:
 transport alternatives
 legislation, regulations and industry codes that affect
transport planning
 transport strategy resource requirements
 issues and risks associated with event transport.
resources for  real or simulated events for which transport plans are
assessment developed. Events may be created for the specific purpose of
skills assessment, but must still meet the requirements outlined
under Critical aspects of assessment, and have commercial,
community or business relevance. Small personal events are not
appropriate as a means of assessing an individual’s skills and
knowledge
 comprehensive event plans
 dedicated event budgets
 formal communications plans
 current industry documentation and publications relating to
transport options
 event stakeholders with whom the individual consults.
Method of assessment A range of assessment methods should be used to assess practical
skills and knowledge. The following examples are appropriate for
this unit:

 evaluation of event transport strategies and operational plans

prepared by the individual
 use of case studies to assess individual’s ability to develop
transport strategies for a range of different events
 written or oral questioning to assess detailed knowledge of
different event transport issues and options
 review of portfolios of evidence and third party workplace
reports of on-the-job performance by the individual.
Guidance information The assessor should design integrated assessment activities to
for assessment holistically assess this unit with other units relevant to the industry
sector, organisation and job role.

Range Statement
Events may include:  business and corporate

 entertainment and leisure
 exhibitions, expositions and fairs
 festivals
 fundraising
 government and civic
 marketing
 meetings and conventions
 social
 sports.
Key event information may relate  dates and times
to:  duration
 management structures
 general nature of event
 level of government involvement
 location
 number and type of activities
 numbers attending
 scope of physical staging elements.
Event stakeholders may include:  attendees:
 audience
 competitors
 delegates
 participants
 spectators
 VIPs
 authorities:
 emergency services
 local government
 roads authorities
 media
 officials
 organising committees
 staff:

 paid
 voluntary.
Authorities may include:  emergency services
 land management and protection agencies
 government:
 local
 state
 industry bodies.
Transport options and resources  private transport system, including:
may include:  airlines
 coach services
 taxis
 hire cars, minibuses and limousines
 private vehicles
 charter services
 dedicated disabled transport, including taxis and
buses
 animal transport
 public transport system, including:
 trains
 bus network
 ferries
 light rail and trams.
Transport issues and risks may  access:
relate to:  road surface
 terrain
 availability of services
 communication considerations:
 mobiles
 radios
 walkie talkies
 congestion:
 pedestrian
 traffic
 distance:
 between event venues
 between event venues and other facilities such as
accommodation and service centres
 environmental sensitivity
 location type:

 major metropolitan
 regional
 country
 remote
 security:
 access restrictions
 accreditation
 threats
 signage.
Broader event management  overall event management structures
constraints and issues may  specific event objectives
include:  budget
 human resources
 other staging requirements
 factors external to the event, such as other events
 requirements to manage minimal impact to the
natural environment of access to and the site itself.
Evaluation criteria may relate to:  attendance targets
 efficient use of combined transport options to
maximise profitability for the event operator
 environmental targets
 financial targets
 service quality
 time targets for movement of people and equipment.
Transport procedures may relate  adequate provision for buses
to:  adequate provision for disabled people
 arrival of clients – dump or trickle
 communication
 contingency and backup options
 emergency services presence and access
 human resource requirements:
 drivers
 guides
 marshals
 site supervisors
 parking
 pick-up and drop-off
 security
 timetabling
 training requirements
 vehicle refuelling.

Contingency procedures may  breakdown

relate to:  delays:
 internal
 external
 illness
 weather.
Resource requirements may be:  financial
 human:
 drivers
 guides
 interpreters
 marshals
 on-site supervisors
 volunteers
 physical:
 equipment
 signage
 vehicles
 vessels.
Operational information may  contingency procedures
include:  emergency information
 event information:
 rosters
 running sheets
 schedules
 maps and other geographical information:
 route maps between venues and sites
 information for venues, sites and local area.
Unit Sector(s)
Cross-Sector
Competency Field
Events

SITXFIN402 Manage finances within a budget Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
SITXFIN402 Manage finances within a budget
Version Comments
1.0 E
Replaces and is equivalent to SITXFIN004A Manage finances within a budget.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to take
responsibility for budget management where others may have developed the budget. It
requires the ability to interpret budgetary requirements, allocate resources, monitor actual
income and expenditure and report on budgetary deviations.
The skills and knowledge for budget development are found in unit SITXFIN501 Prepare and
monitor budgets.

This unit applies to all tourism, hospitality and event sectors and the budget may be for an
entire organisation, for a department or for a particular project or activity.
It applies to those people who operate independently or with limited guidance from others.
This includes supervisors and departmental managers.
of endorsement.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1. Allocate budget 1.1 Allocate funds according to budget and agreed priorities.
resources. 1.2 Discuss changes to income and expenditure priorities with
appropriate colleagues prior to implementation.
1.3 Consult with and inform all relevant personnel about resource
decisions.
1.4 Promote awareness of the importance of budget control.
1.5 Maintain detailed records of resource allocation according to
organisational control systems.
2. Monitor financial 2.1 Use financial records to regularly check actual income and
activities against expenditure against budgets.
budget. 2.2 Include financial commitments in all documentation to ensure
accurate monitoring.
2.3 Identify and report deviations according to significance of
deviation.
2.4 Investigate appropriate options for more effective management
of deviations.
2.5 Advise appropriate colleagues of budget status in relation to
targets.
3. Identify and 3.1 Assess existing costs and resources and proactively identify
evaluate options areas for improvement.
for improved 3.2 Discuss desired budget outcomes with relevant colleagues.
budget 3.3 Undertake appropriate research to investigate new approaches
performance. to budget management.
3.4 Define and communicate the benefits and disadvantages of
new approaches.
3.5 Take account of impacts on customer service levels and
colleagues in developing new approaches.
3.6 Present clear and logical recommendations for budget
management.
4. Complete financial 4.1 Complete financial and statistical reports within designated
and statistical timelines.
reports. 4.2 Prepare and present clear and concise information to enable
informed decision making.


Required skills
 communication skills to discuss budget requirements and to seek and provide feedback
 critical thinking skills to analyse resource use and costs
 initiative and enterprise skills to proactively identify better resource usage and budgetary
improvements
 read and interpret a wide range of business and financial documents
 research options for more effective budgetary control
 write budget reports and recommendations
 numeracy skills to interpret and use budget figures in day-to-day work operations, and to
calculate budget estimates and scenarios for performance improvement
 planning and organising skills to produce budgetary reports within designated timelines
 problem-solving skills to identify budget deviations and deficiencies and develop options
for improved budgetary performance
 self-management skills to take responsibility for budget management
 teamwork skills to discuss desired budget outcomes with team members and provide
direction on resource usage
 technology skills to use accounting software packages.
Required knowledge
 a range of formats for, use and contents of:
 budgets
 financial reports
 statistical reports
 budget terminology
 for the specific industry sector and organisation:
 use of budgets to control costs and enhance profitability
 importance of budget control
 techniques for maximising budget performance
 financial reporting procedures and cycles
 features and functions of accounting software programs used to manage budgets.

Evidence Guide

and evidence required to  interpret and manage multiple budgets to meet
demonstrate competency in this specific and differing workplace needs
unit
 monitor income and expenditure and evaluate
budgetary performance over a budgetary life-cycle
 use correct budget terminology
 integrate knowledge of the formats, use and contents
of budgets, financial and statistical reports
 complete financial reports within designated
timelines.
resources for assessment  a real or simulated tourism, hospitality or event
industry business operation or activity for which
budgets are managed
 computers, printers and accounting software packages
currently used by the tourism, hospitality and event
industries
 budgets for specific projects, events or operational
activities.
 projects and activities that allow assessment of the
individual’s ability to:
 interpret and manage budgets; monitor income and
expenditure
 produce financial and statistical reports
 report on overall budgetary performance
 evaluation of reports produced by the individual
detailing the processes undertaken to manage finances
within a budget
budget terminology, format and content
individual.


example:
 BSBPMG501A Manage projects
 SITXFIN401 Interpret financial information
 SITXFIN501 Prepare and monitor budgets.

Range Statement
Budget may include:  budgets for micro, small, medium or large

businesses
 cash budgets
 cash flow budgets
 departmental budgets
 event budgets
 project budgets
 purchasing budgets
 sales budgets
 wage budgets
 whole of organisation budgets.
Financial records may include:  bank deposit documentation
 bank statements
 banking summaries
 business activity statements
 cheque books
 credit card transaction statements
 invoices
 journal entries
 labour and wages reports
 merchant statements
 merchant summaries
 transaction reports.
Appropriate colleagues may include:  internal or external financial specialists
 managers
 operational staff.
Research to investigate new approaches  discussions with existing suppliers
may include:  evaluating staffing and rostering requirements
 potential roster changes
 reviewing operating procedures
 sourcing new suppliers.
Financial and statistical reports may  cash flow
relate to:  commercial account activity
 commission earnings
 covers and financial return

 daily, weekly and monthly transactions

 expenditure
 income
 occupancy rates and financial return
 performance of:
 department
 project
 products and services
 sales performance
 sales returns
 staff costs
 stock levels
 variance in income and/or expenditure
 wastage
 yield.
Unit Sector(s)
Cross-Sector
Competency Field
Finance

SITXFSA101 Use hygienic practices for food safety Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Version Comments
1.0 E
Replaces and is equivalent to SITXOHS002A Follow workplace hygiene
procedures.
Updated and re-categorised to Food Safety.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to use personal
hygiene practices to prevent contamination of food that might cause food-borne illnesses. It
requires the ability to follow predetermined organisational procedures and to identify and
control food hazards.

This unit applies to all tourism, hospitality and catering organisations with permanent or
temporary kitchen premises or smaller food preparation or bar areas.
This includes restaurants, cafes, clubs, hotels, bars, tour operators, attractions, function, event,
exhibition and conference caterers, educational institutions, aged care facilities, correctional
centres, hospitals, defence forces, cafeterias, kiosks, canteens, fast food outlets, residential
caterers, in-flight and other transport caterers.
It applies to food handlers which can be any person who directly handles food or food contact
surfaces food such as cutlery, plates and bowls. People at many levels use this skill in the
workplace during the course of their daily activities, including cooks, chefs, caterers, kitchen
stewards, kitchen hands, bar and food and beverage attendants and sometimes room
attendants and front office staff.
Food handlers must comply with the requirements contained within the Australia New
Zealand Food Standards (ANZFS) Code (the Code).
In some states and territories businesses are required to designate a food safety supervisor
who is required to be certified as competent in this unit through a registered training
organisation.

Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1. Follow hygiene 1.1 Follow organisational hygiene procedures.
procedures and 1.2 Promptly report unsafe practices that breach hygiene
identify food procedures.
hazards. 1.3 Identify food hazards that may affect the health and safety of
customers, colleagues and self.
1.4 Remove or minimise the hygiene hazard and report to
appropriate person for follow up.
2. Report any 2.1 Report any personal health issues likely to cause a hygiene
personal health risk.
issues. 2.2 Report incidents of food contamination resulting from
personal health issues.
2.3 Cease participation in food handling activities where a health
issue may cause food contamination.
3. Prevent food 3.1 Maintain clean clothes, wear required personal protective
contamination. clothing and only use organisation-approved bandages and
dressings.
3.2 Prevent food contamination from clothing and other items
worn.
3.3 Prevent unnecessary direct contact with ready to eat food.
3.4 Avoid unhygienic personal contact with food or food contact
surfaces.
3.5 Avoid unhygienic cleaning practices that may cause
food-borne illnesses.
4. Prevent cross 4.1 Wash hands at appropriate times and follow hand washing
contamination by procedures consistently.
washing hands. 4.2 Wash hands using appropriate facilities.


Required skills
 communication skills to verbally report hygiene hazards and poor organisational practice
 literacy skills to comprehend workplace documents or diagrams that interpret the content
of:
 organisational food safety program
 hygiene and food safety procedures
 Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points (HACCP) practices
 problem-solving skills to identify and report hygiene hazards.
Required knowledge
 basic aspects of national, state or territory food safety laws, standards and codes. This
would include:
 meaning of contaminant, contamination and potentially hazardous foods as defined by
the Code
 hygiene actions that must be adhered to by businesses to avoid food-borne illnesses
 employee responsibility to participate in hygienic practices
 reasons for food safety programs and what they must contain
 role of local government regulators
 ramifications of failure to observe food safety law and organisational policies and
procedures
 basic aspects of HACCP method of controlling food safety
 for the specific industry sector and organisation:
 major causes of food contamination and food-borne illnesses
 sources and effects of microbiological contamination of food
 workplace hygiene hazards when handling food and food contact surfaces
 basic content of organisational food safety program
 the contents of hygiene and food safety procedures
 hygienic work practices for individual job roles and responsibilities.

Evidence Guide

assessment and evidence  integrate the use of predetermined hygiene procedures and
required to demonstrate food safety practices within day-to-day food handling work
competency in this unit functions
 integrate, into daily work activities, knowledge of the basic
aspects of food safety standards and codes and the
ramifications of disregarding this.
resources for assessment  an operational commercial food preparation area, bar or
kitchen with the fixtures, large and small equipment and
workplace documentation defined in the Assessment
Guidelines; this can be a:
 real industry workplace
 simulated industry environment such as a training
kitchen servicing customers
 food ingredients and ready to eat food items
 current plain English regulatory documents distributed by
the national, state, territory or local government food safety
authority
 the Code
 current commercial food safety programs, policies and
procedures used for the management of food safety.
 direct observation of the candidate using hygienic work
practices during an integrated assessment of operative
functions, such as cleaning and tidying bars, cooking at a
camp site, preparing meals in a commercial kitchen, storing
unused foodstuffs
 use of problem-solving exercises so the individual can
respond to a range of situations where food hazards exist
 written or oral questioning to assess knowledge of the
content of hygiene procedures and food safety standards
and codes
 review of portfolios of evidence and third-party workplace

reports of on-the-job performance by the individual.
Guidance information for The assessor should design integrated assessment activities to
assessment holistically assess this unit with other units relevant to the
industry sector, workplace and job role, for example:
 SITXFSA201 Participate in safe food handling practices
 SITXFSA202 Transport and store food
 any commercial cookery, commercial catering, patisserie,
Asian cookery or food and beverage unit involving food
preparation.

Range Statement
Hygiene procedures:  may cover:

 cleaning and sanitising practices to avoid contamination
of food
 food storage
 handling and disposal of garbage
 personal hygiene
 regular hand washing
 safe and hygienic handling of food and beverages
 safe handling and disposal of linen and laundry
 suitable dress and personal protective equipment and
clothing
 use of cleaning equipment, clothes and materials to
avoid contamination of food
 may be:
 covered by staff training programs
 documented in the organisational food safety program
 required by the national food safety code.
Unsafe practices may  being asked to participate in unhygienic work practices
include:  food handling practices that may result in the contamination
of food
 ignoring the direction of:
 hygiene signage
 supervisors
 managers
 lack of:
 required hygiene signage
 training in hygiene procedures
 outdated practices not in keeping with current
 poor personal hygiene and cleaning practices that may
result in cross-contamination of food and other items
 practices inconsistent with organisational food safety
program
 seeing others using unhygienic work practices
 use of broken or malfunctioning equipment.

Food hazards may include:  airborne dust

 colleagues without appropriate training or understanding of
good hygiene practices, policies and procedures
 contaminated food
 contaminated garbage
 dirty equipment and utensils
 equipment not working correctly, such as fridge and
temperature probes
 items, such as linen, tea towels and towels that may be
contaminated with human waste, such as blood and body
secretions
 use of practices not in keeping with current organisational
activities
 vermin.
Health issues may relate to:  airborne diseases
 food borne diseases
 infectious diseases.
Other items worn may  bandages
include:  hair accessories
 jewellery
 watches.
Unhygienic personal  transferring micro-organisms by:
contact may involve:  blowing nose
 coughing
 drinking
 eating
 scratching skin and hair
 sneezing
 spitting
 touching wounds
 transmitting tobacco products by smoking.
Food contact surfaces may  chopping boards
include:  containers
 cooking utensils
 crockery
 cutlery
 glassware
 pots and pans
 sinks
 workbenches.
Unhygienic cleaning  cleaning food contact surfaces with linen, tea towels and

practices may involve: towels that may be contaminated with human waste:
 blood
 body secretions
 faeces
 using dirty:
 cleaning cloths
 tea towels
 spreading bacteria from bathroom or bedroom areas to
mini-bar or kitchen areas in an accommodation facility.
Wash hands at appropriate  before commencing or recommencing work with food
times might include:  immediately after:
 handling raw food
 smoking, coughing, sneezing, blowing the nose, eating,
drinking, and touching the hair, scalp or any wound
 using the toilet.
Appropriate facilities for  designated hand washing sink
hand washing may include:  liquid soap
 single use towels
 warm running water.
Unit Sector(s)
Cross-Sector
Competency Field
Food Safety

SITXFSA201 Participate in safe food handling practices Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
SITXFSA201 Participate in safe food handling practices
Version Comments
1.0 E
Replaces and is equivalent to SITXFSA001A Implement food safety procedures.
Prerequisite removed. Minor adjustments to expression of content to streamline and
improve unit. Change to title for greater consistency across Training Package.
Wording adjusted to better reflect regulatory requirements.
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to handle food
safely during the storage, preparation, display, service and disposal of food. It requires the
ability to follow predetermined procedures as outlined in a food safety program.

This unit applies to all tourism, hospitality and catering organisations with permanent or
temporary kitchen premises or smaller food preparation areas.
This includes restaurants, cafes, clubs, hotels, tour operators, attractions, function, event,
exhibition and conference caterers, educational institutions, aged care facilities, correctional
centres, hospitals, defence forces, cafeterias, kiosks, canteens, fast food outlets, residential
caterers, in-flight and other transport caterers.
Safe food handling practices are based on an organisation’s individual food safety program.
The program would normally be based on the Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points
(HACCP) method, but this unit can apply to other food safety systems.
It applies to food handlers who directly handle food. People at many levels use this skill in the
workplace during the course of their daily activities, including cooks, chefs, caterers, kitchen
hands and food and beverage attendants.

Food handlers must comply with the requirements contained within the Australia New
Zealand Food Standards (ANZFS) Code (the Code).
In some states and territories businesses are required to designate a food safety supervisor
who is required to be certified as competent in this unit through a registered training
organisation.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



1. Follow food safety 1.1 Access and use relevant information from organisational food
program. safety program.
1.2 Follow policies and procedures in food safety program.
1.3 Control food hazards at critical control points.
1.4 Complete food safety monitoring processes and complete
documents as required.
1.5 Identify and report non-conforming practices.
1.6 Take corrective actions within scope of job responsibility for
incidents where food hazards are not controlled.
2. Store food safely. 2.1 Select food storage conditions for specific food type.
2.2 Store food in environmental conditions that protect against
contamination and maximise freshness, quality and
appearance.
2.3 Store food at controlled temperatures and ensure that frozen
items remain frozen during storage.
3. Prepare food 3.1 Use cooling and heating processes that support microbiological
safely. safety of the food.
3.2 Monitor food temperature during preparation using required
temperature measuring device to achieve microbiological
safety.
3.3 Ensure safety of food prepared, served and sold to customers
under other conditions.
4. Provide safe single 4.1 Store, display and provide single use items so they are
use items. protected from damage and contamination.
4.2 Follow instructions for items intended for single use.
5. Maintain a clean 5.1 Clean and sanitise equipment, surfaces and utensils.
environment. 5.2 Use appropriate containers and prevent accumulation of
garbage and recycled matter.
5.3 Identify and report cleaning, sanitising and maintenance
requirements.
5.4 Dispose of or report chipped, broken or cracked eating,
drinking or food handling utensils.
5.5 Take measures within scope of responsibility to ensure food

handling areas are free from animals and pests and report
incidents of animal or pest infestation.
6. Dispose of food 6.1 Mark and keep separate from other foodstuffs any food
safely. identified for disposal until disposal is complete.
6.2 Dispose of food promptly to avoid cross contamination.


Required skills
 communication skills to report food safety hazards
 read and interpret food safety program, including policies, procedures and flow charts
that identify critical control points
 complete documentation for monitoring food safety
 numeracy skills to calibrate and use a temperature probe and calculate timings
 problem-solving skills to identify and respond to routine food safety issues
 planning and organising skills to coordinate a range of different food handling tasks to
take account of food safety issues
 self-management skills to take responsibility for food safety at an operational level.
Required knowledge
 key features of federal, state or territory and local food safety compliance requirements as
they impact workers at an operational level, including:
 contents of national codes and standards that underpin regulatory requirements
 reasons for food safety programs and what they must contain
 local government food safety regulations and inspection regimes
 consequences of failure to observe food safety policies and procedures
 meaning of contaminant, contamination and potentially hazardous foods as defined by
the Code
 HACCP or other food safety system principles, procedures and processes as they apply to
particular operations and different food types, including:
 critical control points for the specific food production system and the predetermined
methods of control, especially time and temperature controls used in the receiving,
storing, preparing, processing, displaying, serving, packaging, transporting and
disposing of food
 main types of safety hazards and contamination
 conditions for development of microbiological contamination
 environmental conditions, including temperature controls, for storage
 temperature danger zone and the two-hour and four-hour rule
 contents of organisational food safety program, especially procedures and monitoring
documents
 equipment operating procedures, especially how to calibrate, use and clean a temperature
probe and how to identify faults
 choice and application of cleaning, sanitising and pest control equipment and materials
 high risk customer groups, such as:
 children or babies
 pregnant women

 aged persons
 people with immune deficiencies or allergies.

Evidence Guide

and evidence required to  consistently use safe food handling practices in a range
demonstrate competency in of different food handling circumstances
this unit
 demonstrate knowledge of food safety program and
requirements, including critical control points and
methods of food hazard control for each critical control
point.
resources for assessment an operational food preparation area or commercial kitchen
with the fixtures, large and small equipment and workplace
documentation defined in the Assessment Guidelines; this
can be a:
 real industry workplace
 simulated industry environment such as a training
kitchen servicing customers
 food ingredients and ready to eat food items
 current plain English regulatory documents distributed
by the national, state, territory or local government
food safety authority
 the Code
 current commercial food safety programs, policies and
procedures used for the management of food safety.
 direct observation of the individual completing tasks in
a food handling facility
 use of case studies to assess ability to react to a range
of incidents where hazards have not been controlled
 oral or written questioning to assess knowledge of food
safety legislative requirements, policies and
procedures, including hazard control measures
individual.
Guidance information for The assessor should design integrated assessment activities

assessment to holistically assess this unit with other units relevant to

the industry sector, workplace and job role, for example:
 SITXFSA101 Use hygienic practices for food safety
 any commercial cookery, commercial catering,
patisserie, Asian cookery or food and beverage unit
involving food preparation.

Range Statement
Policies and procedures may relate to:  cleaning and sanitation

 hazards:
 control methods for each critical control
point
 corrective actions
 systematic monitoring of hazard controls
and record keeping
 equipment maintenance
 food:
 receiving
 storage
 preparation
 display
 service
 disposal
 personal considerations:
 dress
 hygiene
 protective equipment and clothing
 pest control
 record maintenance
 training.
Food hazards may be:  actual or potential
 chemical
 insects and vermin
 microbiological:
 bacteria
 natural poisons
 moulds
 yeast
 physical:
 broken glass
 metal
 foreign objects

 process-related where food is vulnerable to

contamination:
 displayed food
 need for food to be touched by hand
 re-thermalisation or defrosting
 processes involving temperatures that
promote rapid growth of micro-organisms.
Critical control points are specific steps  receiving
where control of food hazards is essential  storing
to maintain the safety and suitability of  preparing
the food, including:  processing
 displaying
 serving
 packaging
 transporting
 disposing.
Food safety monitoring may involve:  bacterial swabs and counts
 checking and recording that food is stored in
appropriate timeframes
 chemical tests
 monitoring and recording food temperatures
using a temperature measuring device accurate
to plus or minus 1 degree Celsius
 monitoring and recording temperature of cold
and hot storage equipment
 visual examination of food for quality review.
Incidents may include:  customer complaints
 existence of pests and vermin
 food not under temperature control
 food poisoning
 misuse of single use items
 spoilt or contaminated food
 stocks of out-of-date foodstuffs
 unclean equipment.
Food type may include:  dairy
 dried goods
 eggs
 frozen goods
 fruit and vegetables
 meat and fish.
Safety of food served and sold to  packaging control:
customers under other conditions may be  using packaging materials suited to foods

achieved by:  monitoring of packaging damage

 protective barriers
 temperature control
 supervision of food displays
 utensil control:
 providing separate serving utensils for each
dish.
Food prepared, served and sold to  drink dispensing
customers under other conditions may  pre-packaged food items
relate to:  self-service food.
Items intended for single use may  disposable items:

include:  cutlery
 crockery
 face wipes and serviettes
 individually packaged items:
 beverages
 condiments
 jams and spreads.
Cleaning, sanitising and maintenance  cleaning:
may involve:  dirt
 food waste
 grease
 pest waste removal
 maintenance:
 recalibration of measurement and
temperature controls
 minor faults
 sanitising:
 eating and drinking utensils
 food contact surfaces.
Food identified for disposal must be held  clearly identified as not safe, or suspected of
and kept separate and either: not being safe, for consumption
 destroyed
 disposed of so that it cannot be used for human
consumption
 returned to supplier
 subject to recall.

Unit Sector(s)
Cross-Sector
Competency Field
Food Safety

SITXMPR404 Coordinate marketing activities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
SITXMPR404 Coordinate marketing activities
Version Comments
1.2 Correction to mapping to show non equivalence.
1.0 N
Replaces and is not equivalent to SITXMPR004A Coordinate marketing activities.
Minor adjustments to expression of content to streamline and improve unit. Added
innovation, legal, ethical and sustainability. Added more on new technologies and
media.
Unit Descriptor
coordinate a range of marketing and promotional activities at an operational level. The unit
incorporates knowledge of marketing principles.

This unit applies to all industry sectors, and to individuals who take responsibility for
coordinating marketing activities within the parameters of an established marketing strategy.
People working independently with limited supervision undertake this role. This could
include marketing coordinators or managers and owner-operators of small businesses.
of endorsement.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.



Not applicable.

1. Plan and organise 1.1 Plan marketing activities according to marketing plan or other
marketing organisational systems.
activities. 1.2 Identify, analyse and incorporate relevant market information
and legal, ethical and sustainability issues into short term
planning.
1.3 Confirm target markets and marketing medium.
1.4 Evaluate potential and suitability of marketing opportunities
that arise.
1.5 Proactively seek and evaluate innovative marketing
opportunities, including use of new technologies and media.
1.6 Develop and implement action plans to address operational
details.
2. Undertake a 2.1 Establish and conduct positive relationships with industry and
general public media colleagues.
relations role. 2.2 Use networks to support marketing activities.
2.3 Develop public relations resources as required, including
media releases and industry or media support materials.
3. Review and report 3.1 Review activities according to agreed evaluation methods and
on marketing incorporate results into future planning.
activities. 3.2 Prepare reports according to organisational policy and required
timeframes.
3.3 Present current and clear market intelligence to inform sales
and marketing planning.


Required skills
 communication skills to establish and conduct positive business relationships
 critical thinking skills to evaluate the potential of different marketing activities
 initiative and enterprise skills to proactively identify and respond to new opportunities
 interpret market trend information and marketing plans
 develop detailed action plans for marketing activities
 prepare media releases and marketing reports
 numeracy skills to work within marketing budgets
 planning and organising skills to coordinate diverse and unpredictable operational details
 problem-solving skills to proactively identify and respond to potentially complex
implementation challenges
 self-management skills to take responsibility for the quality and outcomes of marketing
activities
 technology skills to work with current web based marketing technologies.
Required knowledge
 content and structure of marketing plans
 key marketing principles, including the marketing management process and the four Ps -
product, place, price and promotion
 industry structure and interrelationships, industry networks and information sources
 industry and market knowledge appropriate to the sector and organisation, including:
 distribution and marketing networks, especially those that support the product or
service being promoted, including e-business options and major promotional events
 commission structures
 current customer and market trends and preferences
 features, benefits and practical application of marketing activities commonly used in the
service industries, including:
 advertising
 familiarisations
 in-house promotions
 public relations
 social media
 trade and consumer shows
 signage and display
 legal issues that impact on the marketing of products and services, including consumer
protection provisions
 ethical considerations for marketing activities, including:

 appropriate use of images and text

 protection of children
 targeting of particular groups in the community
 sustainability considerations for marketing activities, including:
 reducing waste of printed materials
 sustainability as a marketing tool.

Evidence Guide

and evidence required to  plan and coordinate multiple and different marketing
demonstrate competency in this activities for an operation, product or service
unit
 integrate knowledge of the relevant industry,
including structure and interrelationships, industry
networks, information sources, and distribution and
marketing networks
 integrate knowledge of the types of marketing
activities used in the relevant industry sector and
major industry promotional events
 demonstrate knowledge of marketing principles and
their application to practical workplace activities.
resources for assessment  real or simulated products or services for which the
individual can conduct marketing activities
 current information and communications technology
used by industry for marketing activities
 marketing plans and operational marketing
documents, such as action plans and marketing
reports.
 evaluation of marketing activities planned and
conducted by the individual, including reports on
lessons to be learned for future activities
 evaluation of critiques prepared by the individual
about industry marketing activities
 use of case studies to assess the application of
marketing knowledge to different industry situations
marketing principles, structure of the industry,
industry interrelationships, distribution networks and
legal compliance issues
individual.


example:
 SITXMPR403 Plan and implement sales activities.

Range Statement
Marketing activities may include:  advertising

 display and signage
 events
 familiarisations:
 media
 trade
 industry and public relations activities
 market research
 product development within scope of
individual responsibility
 web-based and social media activities.
Information to be incorporated into the  competitive activity
planning process may include:  financial statistics
 marketing reports
 marketplace trends
 sales reports.
Legal, ethical and sustainability issues may  consumer law and trade practices
relate to:  work health and safety obligations
 resource conservation
 targeting of particular groups
 ways of presenting information.
Potential and suitability of promotional  consistency with overall marketing
activities may relate to: direction
 exposure to be achieved
 matching of attendees to target markets
 resource considerations:
 financial
 human
 timing of the activity or event.
Operational details may include:  administrative and procedural requirements
 availability of promotional materials
 available technology
 contracting of other services, such as
display
 equipment requirements

 need for external assistance

 potential for cooperative approaches
 public relations implications
 staffing requirements and briefings
 strategies to ensure maximum benefits
 travel arrangements.
Unit Sector(s)
Cross-Sector
Competency Field
Marketing and Public Relations

TAEASS401B Plan assessment activities and processes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TAEASS401B Plan assessment activities and processes
Version Comments
TAEASS301B Released with TAE10 Training and Education Training Package version 2.0
Unit Descriptor
organise the assessment process, including recognition of prior learning (RPL), in a
competency-based assessment system. It also includes the development of simple assessment
instruments.

This unit typically applies to assessors and workplace supervisors with assessment planning
responsibilities; and trainers or other assessors responsible for planning assessment, including
RPL.
The unit is suitable for those with an existing assessment strategy which documents the
overall framework for assessment.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.




essential outcomes of a demonstrate achievement of the element. Where bold italicised text
unit of competency. is used, further information is detailed in the required skills and
knowledge section and the range statement. Assessment of

1. Determine assessment 1.1 Identify candidate and confirm purposes and context of
approach assessment/RPL with relevant people according to legal,
organisational and ethical requirements
1.2 Identify and access benchmarks for assessment/RPL and any
specific assessment guidelines
2. Prepare the assessment 2.1 Determine evidence and types of evidence needed to demonstrate
plan competence, according to the rules of evidence
2.2 Select assessment methods which will support the collection of
defined evidence, taking into account the context in which the
assessment will take place
2.3 Document all aspects of the assessment plan and confirm with
relevant personnel
3. Develop assessment 3.1 Develop simple assessment instruments to meet target group
instruments needs
3.2 Analyse available assessment instruments for their suitability
for use and modify as required
3.3 Map assessment instruments against unit or course requirements
3.4 Write clear instructions for candidate about the use of the
instruments
3.5 Trial draft assessment instruments to validate content and
applicability, and record outcomes


Required skills
 cognitive interpretation skills to:
 interpret competency standards and other assessment documentation, including material
relating to reasonable adjustment
 identify opportunities for integrated competency assessment
 contextualise competency standards to the operating assessment environment, including
RPL
 consider access and equity needs of diverse candidates
 technology skills to use appropriate equipment and software to communicate effectively
with others
 research and evaluation skills to:
 obtain competency standards, assessment tools and other relevant assessment resources
 research candidate characteristics and any reasonable adjustment needs
 evaluate feedback, and determine and implement improvements to processes
 literacy skills to read and interpret relevant information to design and facilitate assessment
and recognition processes
 communication skills to discuss assessment, including RPL processes with clients and other
assessors
 interpersonal skills to:
 demonstrate sensitivity to access and equity considerations and candidate diversity
 promote and implement equity, fairness, validity, reliability and flexibility in planning
an assessment processes.
 Required knowledge
 ethical and legal requirements of an assessor
 competency-based assessment, including:
 work focused
 criterion referenced
 standards based
 evidence based
 different purposes of assessment and different assessment contexts, including RPL
 how to read and interpret the identified competency standards as the benchmarks for
assessment
 how to contextualise competency standards within relevant guidelines
 four principles of assessment and how they guide the assessment process
 purpose and features of evidence, and different types of evidence used in competency-based
assessments, including RPL
 rules of evidence and how they guide evidence collection
 different types of assessment methods, including suitability for collecting various types of
evidence

 assessment instruments and their purpose; different types of instruments; relevance of

different instruments for specific evidence-gathering opportunities.

Evidence Guide
Critical aspects for  Evidence of the ability to:

assessment and evidence  plan and organise the assessment process on a minimum of
required to demonstrate two occasions
competency in this unit  collect evidence that demonstrates:
 documented assessment plans
 having covered a range of assessment events
 catering for a number of candidates
 different competency standards or accredited curricula
 an RPL assessment
 contextualisation of competency standards and the
selected assessment tools, where required
 incorporation of reasonable adjustment strategies
 development of simple assessment instruments for use
in the process
 organisational arrangements.
Context of and specific Evidence must be gathered in the workplace wherever possible.
resources for assessment Where no workplace is available, a simulated workplace must
be provided.
Assessment must ensure access to training products, such as
training packages and accredited course documentation.
Method of assessment

assessment

Range Statement
the performance criteria, is detailed below. Essential operating conditions that may be
present with training and assessment (depending on the work situation, needs of the
candidate, accessibility of the item, and local industry and regional contexts) may also be
included.
Purposes of assessment/ RPL  recognising current existing competence of candidates
may include:  determining if competence has been achieved following
learning
 establishing candidate progress towards achievement of
competence
 determining language, literacy and numeracy needs of
candidates
 certifying competence through a qualification or Statement
of Attainment
 licensing or regulatory requirements.
Context of assessment/ RPL  environment in which the assessment/RPL will be carried
may include: out, including real or simulated workplace
 opportunities for collecting evidence in a number of
situations
 relationships between competency standards and:
 evidence to support RPL
 work activities in the candidate’s workplace
 learning activities
 who carries out the assessment/RPL.
Organisational, legal and  assessment system policies and procedures
ethical requirements may  assessment strategy requirements
include:  reporting, recording and retrieval systems for assessment,
including RPL
 business and performance plans
 access and equity policies and procedures
 collaborative and partnership arrangements
 defined resource parameters
 mutual recognition arrangements
 industrial relations systems and processes, awards, and
enterprise agreements
 Australian Quality Training Framework
 registration scope
 human resources policies and procedures
 legal requirements, including:

 job role, responsibilities and conditions
 relevant industry codes of practice
 confidentiality and privacy requirements
 OHS considerations, including:
 ensuring OHS requirements are adhered to during the
assessment process
 identifying and reporting OHS hazards and concerns to
relevant personnel.
Benchmarks for  criterion against which the candidate is assessed or prior
assessment/RPL may include: learning recognised, which may be:
 competency standard/unit of competency
 assessment criteria of course curricula
 performance specifications of an enterprise or industry
 product specifications.
Types of evidence may  direct
include:  indirect
 supplementary.
Rules of evidence ensure that  valid
evidence collected is:  sufficient
 authentic
 current.
Assessment methods are the  direct observation, for example:
particular techniques used to  real work/real time activities at the workplace
gather evidence and may  work activities in a simulated workplace environment
include:  structured activities, for example:
 simulation exercises and role-plays
 projects
 presentations
 activity sheets
 questioning, for example:
 written questions, e.g. on a computer
 interviews
 self-assessment
 verbal questioning
 questionnaires
 oral or written examinations (applicable at higher AQF
levels)
 portfolios of evidence, for example:

 collection of work samples compiled by candidate

 product with supporting documentation
 historical evidence
 journal or log book
 information about life experience
 review of products, for example:
 testimonials and reports from employers and supervisors
 evidence of training
 authenticated prior achievements
 interview with employer, supervisor, or peer.
Assessment plan may include:  overall planning document describing:
 what is to be assessed
 when assessment is to take place
 where assessment is to take place
 how assessment is to take place.
Simple assessment  instruments developed by an assessor as part of formative
instruments may include: or summative assessment activities, including:
 profiles of acceptable performance measures
 templates and proformas
 specific questions or activities
 evidence and observation checklists
 checklists for the evaluation of work samples
 recognition portfolios
 candidate self-assessment materials
 instruments developed elsewhere that have been modified
by the assessor for use with a particular client group.
Available assessment  commercially available instruments
instruments may include:  those created by others inside the registered training
organisation.
Map assessment means:  showing a clear relationship between the evidence and the
requirements of the unit.
Unit Sector(s)
Assessment


Not applicable.

TAEASS402B Assess competence Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TAEASS402B Assess competence
Version Comments
TAEASS402B Released with TAE10 Training and Education Training Package version 2.0
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to assess the
competence of a candidate.

This unit typically applies to assessors.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.





1. Prepare for assessment 1.1 Interpret assessment plan and confirm organisational, legal and
ethical requirements for conducting assessment with relevant people
1.2 Access and interpret relevant benchmarks for assessment and
nominated assessment tools to confirm the requirements for
evidence to be collected
1.3 Arrange identified material and physical resource requirements
according to assessment system policies and procedures
1.4 Organise specialist support required for assessment
1.5 Explain, discuss and agree details of the assessment plan with
candidate
2. Gather quality 2.1 Use agreed assessment methods and instruments to gather,
evidence organise and document evidence in a format suitable for determining
competence
2.2 Apply the principles of assessment and rules of evidence in
gathering quality evidence
2.3 Determine opportunities for evidence gathering in actual or
simulated activities through consultation with the candidate and
relevant personnel
2.4 Determine opportunities for integrated assessment activities and
document any changes to assessment instruments where required
3. Support the candidate 3.1 Guide candidates in gathering their own evidence to support
recognition of prior learning (RPL)
3.2 Use appropriate communication and interpersonal skills to
develop a professional relationship with the candidate that reflects
sensitivity to individual differences and enables two-way feedback
3.3 Make decisions on reasonable adjustments with the candidate,
based on candidate’s needs and characteristics
3.4 Access required specialist support in accordance with the
assessment plan
3.5 Address any OHS risk to person or equipment immediately
4. Make the assessment 4.1 Examine collected evidence and evaluate it to ensure that it
decision reflects the evidence required to demonstrate competence
4.2 Use judgement to infer whether competence has been
demonstrated, based on the available evidence
4.3 Make assessment decision in line with agreed assessment
procedures and according to agreed assessment plan
4.4 Provide clear and constructive feedback to candidate regarding

the assessment decision and develop any follow-up action plan

required
5. Record and report the 5.1 Record assessment outcomes promptly and accurately
assessment decision 5.2 Complete and process an assessment report according to agreed
assessment procedures
5.3 Inform other relevant parties of the assessment decision
according to confidentiality conventions
6. Review the assessment 6.1 Review the assessment process in consultation with relevant
process people to improve own future practice
6.2 Document and record the review according to relevant
assessment system policies and procedures


Required skills
 analysis and interpretation skills to:
 break down competency standards
 interpret assessment tools and other assessment information, including those used in
RPL
 identify candidate needs
 make judgements based on assessment of available evidence
 observation skills to:
 recognise candidate’s prior learning
 determine candidate’s performance
 identify when candidate may need assistance during the assessment processes
 research and evaluation skills to:
 access required human and material resources for assessment
 access assessment system policies and procedures
 access RPL policies and procedures
 evaluate evidence
 evaluate assessment process
 cognitive skills to:
 weigh up the evidence and make a judgement
 consider and recommend reasonable adjustments
 decision-making skills to:
 recognise a candidate’s prior learning
 make a decision on a candidate’s competence
 read and interpret relevant information to conduct assessment
 prepare required documentation and records or reports of assessment outcomes in
required format
 communication and interpersonal skills to:
 explain the assessment, including RPL process
 give clear and precise instructions
 ask effective questions
 provide clarification
 discuss process with other relevant people
 give appropriate feedback
 discuss assessment outcome
 use language appropriate to candidate and assessment environment
 establish a working relationship with candidate.

Required knowledge
 competency-based assessment, including:
 vocational education and training as a competency-based system
 criterion-referenced assessment as distinct from norm-referenced assessment
 competency standards as the basis of qualifications
 structure and application of competency standards
 principles of assessment and how they are applied
 rules of evidence and how they are applied
 range of assessment purposes and assessment contexts, including RPL
 different assessment methods, including suitability for gathering various types of
evidence, suitability for content of units, and resource requirements and associated costs
 reasonable adjustments and when they are applicable
 types and forms of evidence, including assessment instruments that are relevant to
gathering different types of evidence used in competency-based assessment, including
RPL
 potential barriers and processes relating to assessment tools and methods
 assessment system, including policies and procedures established by the industry,
organisation or training authority
 RPL policies and procedures established by the organisation
 cultural sensitivity and equity considerations
 relevant policy, legislation, codes of practice and national standards, including
commonwealth and state or territory legislation that may affect training and assessment in
the vocational education and training sector, such as:
 copyright and privacy laws in terms of electronic technology
 security of information
 plagiarism
 training packages and competency standards
 licensing requirements
 industry and workplace requirements
 duty of care under common law
 recording information and confidentiality requirements
 anti-discrimination, including equal employment opportunity, racial vilification and
disability discrimination
 workplace relations
 industrial awards and enterprise agreements
 OHS responsibilities associated with assessing competence, such as:
 requirements for reporting hazards and incidents
 procedures for use of relevant personal protective equipment
 safe use and maintenance of relevant equipment

 sources of OHS information.


Evidence Guide

assessment and  assess competence of a number of candidates within the
evidence required to vocational education and training context against different units
demonstrate of competency or accredited curricula, following the relevant
competency in this unit assessment plan
 assess at least one candidate for RPL
 consider reasonable adjustment and the reasons for decisions in
at least one assessment
 cover an entire unit of competency and show:
 the application of different assessment methods and
instruments involving a range of assessment activities and
events
 two-way communication and feedback
 how judgement was exercised in making the assessment
decision
 how and when assessment outcomes were recorded and
reported
 assessment records and reports completed in accordance with
assessment system and organisational, legal and ethical
requirements
 how the assessment process was reviewed.
Context of and specific Evidence must be gathered in the workplace whenever possible.
resources for Where no workplace is available, a simulated workplace must be
assessment provided.
Guidance information
for assessment

Range Statement
included.
Assessment plan may  overall planning, describing:
include:  what is to be assessed
 when assessment is to take place
 where assessment is to take place
 how assessment is to take place.
Benchmarks for  refer to a criterion against which the candidate is assessed
assessment:  may be a competency standard/unit of competency, assessment
criteria of course curricula, performance specifications, or
product specifications.
Assessment tools  the learning or competency unit(s) to be assessed
include:  the target group, context and conditions for the assessment
 the tasks to be administered to the candidate
 an outline of the evidence to be gathered from the candidate
 the evidence criteria used to judge the quality of performance
(i.e. the assessment decision-making rules)
 the administration, recording and reporting requirements
 the evidence of how validity and reliability have been tested and
built into the design and use of the tool.
Specialist support may  assistance by third party, such as carer or interpreter
include:  support from specialist educator
 provision of developed online assessment activities
 support for remote or isolated candidates and assessors
 support from subject matter or safety experts
 advice from regulatory authorities
 assessment teams and panels
 support from lead assessors
 advice from policy development experts.
Assessment methods  particular techniques used to gather different types of evidence,

include: such as:
 direct observation

 structured activities
 oral or written questioning
 portfolios of evidence
 review of products
 third-party feedback.
Individual differences  English language, literacy and numeracy barriers
may include:  physical impairment or disability
 intellectual impairment or disability
 medical condition that may impact on assessment, such as
arthritis, epilepsy, diabetes and asthma
 learning difficulties
 mental or psychological disability
 religious and spiritual observances
 cultural images and perceptions
 age
 gender.
Feedback may include:  ensuring assessment/RPL process is understood
 ensuring candidate concerns are addressed
 enabling questions and answers
 confirming outcomes
 identifying further evidence to be provided
 discussing action plans
 confirming gap training needed
 providing information regarding available appeal processes
 suggesting improvements in evidence gathering and
presentation.
Consultation may  moderation with other assessors, or training and assessment
involve: coordinators
 discussions with client, team leaders, managers, RPL
coordinators, supervisors, coaches and mentors
 technical and subject experts
 English language, literacy and numeracy experts.
Unit Sector(s)
Assessment


Not applicable.

TAEDEL301A Provide work skill instruction Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
Unit descriptor This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and
knowledge required to conduct individual and group
instruction and demonstrate work skills, using existing
learning resources in a safe and comfortable learning
environment. The unit covers the skills and knowledge
required to determine the success of both the training
provided and one's own personal training performance. It
emphasises the training as being driven by the work
process and context.

Application of the unit This unit supports a wide range of applications across any
workplace setting and so can be used by any organisation.
Its use is not restricted to training organisations.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units





1. Organise instruction 1.1. Gather information about learner characteristics
and demonstration and learning needs
1.2. Confirm a safe learning environment
1.3. Gather and check instruction and demonstration
objectives and seek assistance if required
1.4. Access and review relevant learning resources and
learning materials for suitability and relevance, and
seek assistance to interpret the contextual application
1.5. Organise access to necessary equipment or physical
resources required for instruction and demonstration
1.6. Notify learners of details regarding the
implementation of the learning program and/or
delivery plan
2. Conduct instruction 2.1. Use interpersonal skills with learners to establish a
and demonstration safe and comfortable learning environment
2.2. Follow the learning program and/or delivery plan to
cover all learning objectives
2.3. Brief learners on any OHS procedures and
requirements prior to and during training
2.4. Use delivery techniques to structure, pace and
enhance learning
2.5. Apply coaching techniques to assist learning
2.6. Use communication skills to provide information,
instruct learners and demonstrate relevant work
skills
2.7. Provide opportunities for practice during instruction
and through work activities
2.8. Provide and discuss feedback on learner
performance to support learning
3. Check training 3.1. Use measures to ensure learners are acquiring and
performance can use new technical and generic skills and
knowledge
3.2. Monitor learner progress and outcomes in
consultation with learner
3.3. Review relationship between the trainer/coach and
the learner and adjust to suit learner needs
4. Review personal 4.1. Reflect upon personal performance in providing
training performance instruction and demonstration, and document
and finalise strategies for improvement
documentation 4.2. Maintain, store and secure learner records according


to organisational and legal requirements


Required skills
 verbaland non-verbal communication techniques, such as:
 asking relevant and appropriate questions
 providing explanations
 demonstrating
 using listening skills
 providing information clearly
 safety skills to implement OHS requirements, by acting and responding safely in
order to:
 identify hazards
 conduct prestart-up checks if required
 observe and interpret learner behaviour that may put people at risk
 time-management, skills to:
 ensure all learning objectives are covered
 pace learning
 reflection skills in order to:
 identify areas for improvement
 maintain personal skill development
 complete and maintain documentation
 read and follow learning programs and plans
 read and analyse learner information
 technology skills to operate audio-visual and technical equipment
 engage, motivate and connect with learners
 provide constructive feedback
 maintain appropriate relationships
 establish trust
 use appropriate body language
 maintain humour
 demonstrate tolerance
 manage a group
 recognise and be sensitive to individual difference and diversity
 observation skills to:
 monitor learner acquisition of new skills, knowledge and competency


requirements
 assess learner communication and skills in interacting with others
 identify learner concerns
 recognise learner readiness to take on new skills and tasks
Required knowledge
 learner characteristics and needs
 content and requirements of the relevant learning program and/or delivery plan
 sources and availability of relevant learning resources and learning materials
 content of learning resources and learning materials
 training techniques that enhance learning and when to use them
 introductory knowledge of learning principles and learning styles
 key OHS issues in the learning environment, including:
 roles and responsibilities of key personnel
 responsibilities of learners
 relevant policies and procedures, including hazard identification, risk
assessment, reporting requirements, safe use of equipment and emergency
procedures
 risk controls for the specific learning environment

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
Overview of assessment Assessment must address the scope of this unit and reflect all
components of the unit. A range of appropriate assessment methods
and evidence-gathering techniques must be used to determine
competency. A judgement of competency should only be made
when the assessor is confident that the required outcomes of the unit
have been achieved and that consistent performance has been
demonstrated.

assessment and evidence  carry out aminimum of three training sessions, involving
required to demonstrate demonstrating and instructing particular work skills for different
competency in this unit groups; with each session addressing:
 different learning objectives
 a range of techniques and effective communication skills
appropriate to the audience.
resources for assessment Where no workplace is available, a simulated workplace must be
provided.
Guidance information for For further information about assessment of this and other TAE
assessment units, refer to relevant implementation guidance published on the
IBSA website (www.ibsa.org.au).

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Learner characteristics  language, literacy and numeracy levels

may include:  learning styles
 past learning and work experiences
 specific needs
 workplace culture.
Safe learning  exit requirements
environment may  personal protective equipment
include:  safe access
 safe use of equipment.
Instruction and  competencies to be achieved
demonstration objectives  generic and technical skills, which may be:
may include:  provided by the organisation
 developed by a colleague
 individual or group objectives
 learning outcomes.
Learning resources may  any material used to support learning, such as:
include:  learner and user guides
 trainer and facilitator guides
 example training programs
 specific case studies
 professional development materials
 assessment materials
 a variety of formats
 those produced locally
 those acquired from other sources.
Learning materials may  handouts for learners
include:  materials sourced from the workplace, e.g. workplace
documentation, operating procedures, and
specifications.
Details may include:  location and time
 outcomes of instruction or demonstration

RANGE STATEMENT
 reason for instruction or demonstration
 who will be attending instruction session.
OHS procedures may  emergency procedures
include:  hazards and their means of control
 incident reporting
 use of personal protective equipment
 safe work practices
 safety briefings
 site-specific safety rules.
Delivery techniques may  coaching
include:  demonstration
 explanation
 group or pair work
 providing opportunities to practise skills and solve
problems
 questions and answers.
Coaching may include:  learning arrangements requiring immediate interaction
and feedback
 on-the-job instruction and 'buddy' systems
 relationships targeting enhanced performance
 short-term learning arrangements
 working on a one-to-one basis.
Measures may include:  informal review or discussion
 learner survey
 on-the-job observation
 review of peer coaching arrangements.
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Delivery and facilitation
Competency field
Competency field

Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

TAEDEL404A Mentor in the workplace Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TAEDEL404A Mentor in the workplace
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
knowledge required to establish and develop a professional
mentoring relationship with a learner, in particular an
apprentice or trainee employed by, or undertaking work
placement in, a workplace. It includes establishing the need
for mentoring, developing a mentoring plan/framework,
facilitating and monitoring the mentoring relationship, and
evaluating the effectiveness of mentoring.

Application of the unit This unit typically applies to workplace supervisors or
other work colleague with responsibility for mentoring in
the workplace.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units





1. Develop a mentoring 1.1. Identify scope and boundaries of the mentoring
plan relationship according to organisational procedures
1.2. Establish ground rules and negotiate realistic
expectations
1.3. Establish and maintain confidentiality of the
relationship in accordance with legislation, policy
and procedures
2. Facilitate mentoring 2.1. Develop learner's confidence, self-esteem, respect
relationship and trust in the mentoring relationship
2.2. Share personal experiences and knowledge with the
person being mentored according to agreed
objectives
2.3. Support the person being mentored to develop and
use skills in problem solving and decision making
2.4. Use personal and professional networks to assist the
person being mentored
2.5. Provide information, guidance and constructive
guidance to enhance engagement in the workplace
2.6. Use techniques for resolving differences without
damaging the relationship, and obtain assistance
according to organisational policy and procedures
3. Monitor mentoring 3.1. Provide planning assistance and guidance as
relationship requested by the person being mentored in a form
and style to suit their requirements
3.2. Provide feedback to the person being mentored on
progress towards achieving the expectations and
goals of the mentoring process
3.3. Recognise and discuss changes in the mentoring
relationship with appropriate stakeholders
3.4. Negotiate and manage closure of the mentoring
arrangement once objectives have been met
4. Evaluate 4.1. Establish and discuss benefits gained from the
effectiveness of mentoring process
mentoring 4.2. Reflect on and articulate the personal benefits gained
from providing mentoring
4.3. Identify and report the outcomes of the mentoring
arrangement and the benefits to the organisation
according to organisational policy and procedures to
improve the mentoring system or program


Required skills
 planning and time-management skills to mentor in a workplace
 oral communication and language skills to motivate learners
 organisational skills to provide guidance and feedback to individuals
 engage in relationship building, including building trust and maintaining
confidentiality
 respond to diversity, including gender and disability
 communication skills to use a range of communication strategies, including
listening, questioning, and giving andreceiving feedback
 initiative and enterprise skills to apply procedures relating to OHS and
environmentallegislation in the context of workplace mentoring
Required knowledge
 relevant policy, legislation, codes of practice and national standards likely to
impact on the provision of workplace mentoring
 training contracts and responsibilities of employer, registered training organisation
(RTO) and funding body
 training plans and responsibilities
 training products and strategies for learning
 mentoring methodologies and strategies
 acceptable behaviour in the mentoring relationship
 OHS relating to the work role, including:
 hazards relating to the industry and specific workplace
 reporting requirements for hazards and incidents
 specific procedures for work tasks
 safe use and maintenance of relevant equipment
 sources of OHS information

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
components of the unit. Arange of appropriate assessment methods
demonstrated.

assessment and evidence  prepare a mentoring plan between the mentor and learner that
required to demonstrate reflects the scope and substance expected within a plan prepared
competency in this unit for a learner undertaking a contracted apprenticeship or
traineeship
 facilitate at least three mentoring sessions
 provide information on sessions, including comments and notes
from both mentor and learner.
provided.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Mentoring may include:  long-term focus on personal growth and learning

 wide range of learning oriented to:
 support
 guidance in personal or career growth
 relationship, not just a procedure or activity
 one person professionally assisting the career
development of another.
Ground rules may  training for mentoring partners
include:  mentoring agreement
 active involvement of both partners in the mentoring
process.
Legislation, policy and  commonwealth and state or territory legislation and
procedures may include: regulations, such as:
 equal employment opportunity, anti-discrimination
and harassment legislation
 OHS legislation
 user choice
 organisational policy, procedures and protocols.
Techniques for  finding a mutually beneficial solution
resolving differences  self-disclosure
may include:  inviting discussion
 providing explanations
 accessing assistance.
Mentoring relationship  informal workplace development program
may include:  formal mentoring process associated with a contracted
apprenticeship or traineeship, involving a formal
training plan.
Stakeholders may  trainee or apprentice
include:  manager or supervisor
 RTO
 learning support services, including assistive technology

RANGE STATEMENT
and diagnostic testing
 funding organisation
 supplier of learning resources.
Benefits may include:  insights into organisational culture, attitudes and
expected behaviours
 supportive environment in which successes and failures
can be evaluated
 networking opportunities
 development of workplace competence and
self-confidence
 recognition and job satisfaction
 mutual respect.
Benefits to the  increased productivity
organisation may  new competencies in the person being mentored
include:  staff motivation
 more committed, involved and responsible learners.
Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Delivery and facilitation
Competency field
Competency field
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

TAEDES401A Design and develop learning programs Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Not applicable.
Unit Descriptor
knowledge required to conceptualise, design, develop and
review learning programs to meet an identified need for a
group of learners. The unit addresses the skills and
knowledge needed to identify the parameters of a learning
program, determine the design, outline the content and
review its effectiveness.

Application of the unit This unit typically applies to a trainer or facilitator who
designs or develops learning programs. A learning
program can be discrete, providing a planned learning
approach that relates to specific learning and training
needs, or it may form part of the learning design for a
qualification.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Prerequisite units





1. Define parameters of 1.1. Clarify purpose and type of learning program with
the learning program key stakeholders
1.2. Access and confirm the competency standards and
other training specifications on which to base the
learning program
1.3. Identify language, literacy and numeracy
requirements of the program
1.4. Identify and consider characteristics of the target
learner group
2. Work within the 2.1. Access relevant VET policies and frameworks, and
vocational education apply to work practices
and training (VET) 2.2. Identify changes to training packages and accredited
policy framework courses and apply these to program development
2.3. Conduct work according to organisational quality
assurance policies and procedures
3. Develop program 3.1. Research, develop and document specific subject
content matter content according to agreed design options
3.2. Evaluate existing learning resources for content
relevance and quality
3.3. Specify assessment requirements of the learning
program
4. Design structure of 4.1. Break the learning content into manageable
the learning program segments and document timeframe for each segment
4.2. Determine and confirm delivery strategies and
required assessment methods and tools
4.3. Document complete learning program in line with
4.4. Review complete program with key stakeholders and
adjust as required
4.5. Ensure a safe learning progression by analysing risks
in the learning environment and including a risk
control plan


Required skills
 organisational skills to ensure resources are available and suitable
 evaluation skills to determine the time required for each learning segment and the
overall timelines of the learning program
 cognitive skills to develop the learning program content and design its structure
 language and literacy skills to read and interpret a range of documentation,
including technical and subject matter documents, references and texts
Required knowledge
 information about training package developers and course accreditation agencies
responsible for specific learning program parameters
 training packages and relevant competency standards to be used as the basis of the
learning program
 other performance standards and criteria to be used as the basis of the learning
program, where relevant
 distinction and relationship between a training package/accredited course, learning
strategy and learning program, where linked
 different purposes and focus of learning programs
 sound knowledge of learning principles
 instructional design principles relating to different design options for learning
program design and structure
 availability and types of different relevant learning resources, learning materials
and pre-developed learning activities
 methodology relating to developing and documenting new learning activities and
related learning materials
 different delivery modes and methods
 relevant policies, legal requirements, codes of practice and national standards,
including commonwealth and state or territory legislation that may affect training
and assessment in the VET sector
 relevant OHS knowledge relating to the work role, and OHS considerations that
need to be included in the learning program

Evidence Guide
EVIDENCE GUIDE
components of the unit. Arange of appropriate assessment methods
demonstrated.

assessment and evidence  design, develop and review learning programs within the VET
required to demonstrate context
 prepare and develop a minimum of two learning programs:
 that contain differentiated learning program designs to reflect
particular needs, contexts and timelines
 at least one of which must be based on competency standards
or accredited courses and must cover at least one entire unit
of competency or accredited course module.
Context of and specific Evidence must be gathered in the workplace whenever possible.
provided.

Range Statement
RANGE STATEMENT
Purpose may include:  developing vocational competency or vocational skills

 developing language, literacy and numeracy skills
 developing general education
 meeting legislative, licensing and registration
requirements, such as OHS requirements.
Other training  curriculum specifications
specifications may  product specifications
include:  organisational work requirements and training needs
 induction needs
 language, literacy and numeracy development needs
 regulatory and licensing requirements.
Vocational education  policies and procedures set by national organisations,
and training policies such as the National Quality Council
may include:  Australian Quality Training Framework
 other relevant policies.
Delivery strategies may  focus of delivery in terms of size and type of group
include:  context of delivery, for example:
 in the workplace
 in a training room
 in a community setting
 mode of delivery, for example:
 face-to-face
 online
 blended delivery mode
 delivery methods, for example:
 lock-step, learner-paced and mixed
 interactive, participative and collaborative
 blended delivery methods.

Unit Sector(s)
Unit sector Learning design
Competency field
Competency field
Co-requisite units
Co-requisite units

TAETAS501B Undertake organisational training needs analysis Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TAETAS501B Undertake organisational training needs analysis
Version Comments
TAETAS501B Released with TAE10 Training and Education Training Package version 2.0
Unit Descriptor
This unit describes the performance outcomes, skills and knowledge required to undertake a
training needs analysis (TNA) to identify the training and assessment needs of an
organisation.

This unit typically applies to those working in roles that require them to work with
organisations to identify training needs.
Not applicable.
Pre-Requisites
Not applicable.






1. Identify the 1.1 Discuss with relevant staff from the organisation their objectives,
organisation’s needs expectations and organisational requirements
1.2 Use appropriate communication and interpersonal skills to
develop a professional relationship with the organisation.
1.3 Identify, analyse and address any existing or potential issues that
may impact on the organisation’s objectives and requirements
1.4 Identify and access resources in accordance with organisational
requirements
1.5 Develop a project plan with relevant persons to be negotiated
and agreed by the organisation
2. Conduct training needs 2.1 Use reliable, appropriate and efficient methods for collecting
analysis information and data on current, emerging and future training needs
2.2 Analyse the organisation’s work roles to determine skills and
competencies needed for effective performance
2.3 Follow legal, organisational and ethical requirements to gather
information and data to assess the current skills and competencies of
staff
2.4 Use reliable and valid data analysis methods to determine current
and emerging organisational training needs
3. Provide advice to the 3.1 Provide the organisation with clear advice and recommendations
organisation on training and assessment needs
3.2 Provide the organisation with options for meeting identified
training needs
3.3 Obtain feedback and comments from the organisation on the
suitability and sufficiency of advice and recommendations
3.4 Use legal requirements to process, complete and present final
report to the organisation


Required skills
 cognitive skills to analyse and interpret research and conceptualise and synthesise issues
around training needs
 communication and interpersonal skills to consult with client and relevant people, to discuss
client needs and provide observations and recommendations for training development
 literacy skills to critically evaluate information and prepare reports providing advice and
recommendations
 negotiation and facilitation skills for research, presenting and discussing recommendations
and obtaining feedback
 numeracy skills to analyse data and present statistical information
 problem solving skills to apply effective approaches to training needs
 research skills to collect information around training needs, including observation and
consultation.
Required knowledge
 competency standards and Training Packages/accredited courses
 Australian Quality Training Framework (AQTF) requirements and standards
 risk identification and management strategies
 industry and enterprise knowledge
 evaluation and research methodologies
 relevant social, political, economic and technological developments
 principles of intellectual property
 training and development strategies
 change management concepts/strategies
 occupational health and safety (OHS) relating to undertaking an organisational training
needs analysis.

Evidence Guide

and evidence required to  research, conduct and provide advice through a
demonstrate competency in this training needs analysis
unit
 prepare at least two training needs analyses for one or
more organisations
 collect evidence that demonstrates:
 processes that were used to determine the
organisation’s needs
 details of research methods undertaken to identify
suitable training and/or assessment
 planning for the training needs analysis
 presentations that outline advice and
recommendations.
Context of and specific resources Evidence must be gathered in the workplace wherever
for assessment possible. Where no workplace is available, a simulated
workplace must be provided.

assessment

Range Statement
included.
Objectives may include:  improved individual learning outcomes for new or
existing staff
 access to government training incentives and funding
 productivity improvement
 developing administration and records management
systems
 compliance with, or knowledge of, legislative or
government regulatory requirements
 individualised organisational training and skill
requirements.
Options may include:  developing in-house capacity to meet identified needs
 identifying training and/or assessment organisations
to meet needs
 identifying specific units of competency,
qualifications/courses to meet needs
 consultancy services.
Unit Sector(s)
Training advisory services

Not applicable.

TLIA0001 Complete import procedures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA0001 Complete import procedures
Release 1. This is the first release of this unit of competency in the TLI Transport and
Logistics Training Package.
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to complete importation procedures as
part of an international freight forwarder’s role.
It includes ensuring compliance with all Australian government regulations, workplace
requirements and other compliance requirements, and meeting customer needs.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
A ‒ Handling Cargo/Stock
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare for import 1.1 Parties involved and their responsibilities are identified
1.2 Various sources of necessary information are identified
1.3 Shipment details and customer requirements are verified
1.4 Working relationships with all parties concerned are

established
1.5 Communication with relevant parties and authorities is

undertaken to prepare for freight arrival
1.6 Discrepancies are noted and appropriate actions are

undertaken in accordance with workplace procedures
2 Complete and check 2.1 All relevant documents required for import are identified
documentation
2.2 Documentation is checked for accuracy against import details
2.3 Workplace documentation is prepared and issued in

accordance with workplace procedures and customer
requirements
2.4 Cargoes or shipments where permits or other regulatory

documents are required, are identified
2.5 Required information is reported to relevant authorities in

accordance with regulatory requirements
2.6 Issues of non-conformance and discrepancies are actioned

and a resolution is sought with relevant parties
3 Communicate with 3.1 Various communication methods are identified as required by

relevant parties workplace procedures
3.2 Communication with suppliers about arrival and shipment

details is established
3.3 Communication is undertaken with government authorities

within required timeframes
3.4 Arrival details are communicated to relevant parties
3.5 Problems arising from import process are identified and

action is taken to resolve problems in accordance with
4 Prepare cargo for 4.1 All relevant regulatory and workplace procedures are
final delivery completed and compliance is achieved
4.2 Authorisation for cargo release is checked and approval is

determined
4.3 Delivery orders or release authorities are issued in accordance

with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
4.4 Clearance statuses are checked prior to shipment release

4.5 Special requirements are identified and discussed with clients

in accordance with workplace requirements
4.6 Import charges and freight costs are accurately calculated and
any discrepancies are actioned
5 Manage records 5.1 Records of all communications and shipment details are
retained and filed in accordance with regulatory requirements
5.2 Copies of relevant records are forwarded to client in

accordance with workplace requirements
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
Range is restricted to essential operating conditions and any other variables essential to the
work environment.
Non-essential conditions can be found in the Companion Volume Implementation Guide.

This is a new unit.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA0001 Complete import procedures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA0001 Complete import

procedures
the requirements of the elements and performance criteria on at least one occasion and
include:
 calculating import charges and freight costs
 communicating effectively with a range of parties
 confirming customer requirements
 developing working relationships
 identifying discrepancies
 identifying necessary information
 identifying special requirements
 maintaining records of communications
 making decisions
 managing time effectively
 preparing workplace documents
 reporting information
 solving problems
 verifying details.

Knowledge Evidence
the requirements of the elements and performance criteria and include knowledge of:
 how to resolve issues of non-conformance
 import charges and freight costs
 parameters of freight forwarder role in import processes
 permits, authorities and other regulatory documents
 purpose of shipment details
 responsibilities of import parties
 sources of information
 variety of communication methods to use with suppliers, regulators and customers
 workplace procedures.
assessment.
assessment.
Assessment must occur in workplace operational situations where it is appropriate to do so.
Where this is not appropriate, assessment must occur in simulated workplace operational
situations that replicate workplace conditions.
Assessment processes and techniques must be appropriate to the language, literacy and
numeracy requirements of the work being performed and the needs of the candidate.
Resources for assessment include:
 a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or simulations
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice
and operation manuals
 relevant materials, tools, equipment and personal protective equipment currently used in
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIA0002 Prepare cargo for export Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA0002 Prepare cargo for export
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to prepare cargo for export and includes
confirming correct preparation of the consignment, organising cargo loading and processing
documentation.
Work must be must be carried out in compliance with relevant international and domestic
legislation, regulations and codes of practice for exporting cargo.
Work is performed under general supervision, with some accountability and responsibility for
self and others in achieving prescribed outcomes.
Work involves the application of routine freight forwarding principles and procedures to
prepare cargo for export.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
A – Handling Cargo/Stock
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Confirm correct 1.1 Consignment is checked to ensure cargo is consistent with

preparation of packing specification and is suitable for mode and method of
consignment transport
1.2 Consignment is checked to ensure labelling and marking of

cargo conforms with domestic and international regulations,
and workplace requirements and that packaging of cargo
conforms to regulatory requirements and is appropriate for
transport method
1.3 Cargo is checked for dangerous goods or explosives and

conformance of packaging and labelling with Australian and
international dangerous goods or explosives codes is confirmed
as required
1.4 Discrepancies in composition or preparation of cargo are noted

and appropriate action is undertaken in accordance with
2 Organise cargo 2.1 Handling methods and equipment suitable for goods, transport
loading mode and method are selected
2.2 Goods transfer methods between modes of transport are

selected as required
2.3 Procedures for cargo loading are organised and followed in

accordance with legislative and workplace requirements
3 Process 3.1 All relevant documentation is consolidated and checked for

documentation completion and accuracy
3.2 Discrepancies in documentation are identified and appropriate

action is undertaken in accordance with workplace procedures
3.3 Dangerous goods declaration is obtained from consignor as

required
3.4 Copies of documents are retained in accordance with

regulatory requirements and workplace procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces but is not equivalent to TLIA4030A Organise cargo for export.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA0002 Prepare cargo for export Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA0002 Prepare cargo for export
include:
 analysing information and making decisions based on information provided
 applying relevant legislation and workplace procedures
 assessing and reporting unusual occurrences in relation to cargo export
 communicating effectively with others
 completing documentation related to organising cargo export
 identifying and solving problems that may occur when organising cargo export
 interpreting client requirements
 monitoring work activities in terms of planned schedule
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information, labels and
documents
 responding appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace
 working collaboratively with others when organising cargo export
 working systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self or others, or
damage to goods or equipment.
Knowledge Evidence

 applicable legislation, regulations and codes including:

 Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for handling and
transporting dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including:
 Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code
 Australian and international explosives codes
 Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime Dangerous Goods
(IMDG) Code
 International Air Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations
(DGR)
 international transport regulations, codes and procedures
 relevant Australian and international standards and certification requirements
 relevant international and Australian state/territory road rules and transport regulations
 relevant legislative requirements, codes and regulations for cargo export
 relevant state/territory environmental protection legislation
 relevant state/territory work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety
(OHS) legislation
 contacts and sources of information/documentation needed when organising cargo export
 procedures for batching, dating and numbering
 procedures for calculating weights, volumes and dimensions
 procedures for completing consignment documentation
 procedures for reviewing transport options and availability of carriers
 workplace customer service policies and procedures.
assessment.
assessment.


industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA1001 Secure cargo Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to secure cargo in accordance with
procedures and regulatory requirements as part of work activities within the transport and
logistics industry.
It includes preparing to secure cargo/containers, lashing and unlashing cargo, protecting cargo
from weather, and packing and unpacking cargo.
Work is performed under some supervision generally within a team environment.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare to secure 1.1 Work area is prepared and maintained in accordance with
cargo/containers national standards, safety codes and site operating procedures
1.2 Unsafe work practices and/or equipment are reported to

appropriate personnel
1.3 Appropriate protective clothing, equipment and fittings are

selected
1.4 Formwork is erected where no lashing points exist
1.5 Lashing plan is read and interpreted
2 Lash and unlash 2.1 Work is conducted in accordance with industry standards,
cargo statutory requirements, safety codes, site operating
requirements and any special cargo requirements
2.2 Lashing points are identified and appropriate fittings and

lashing equipment are used for each lashing point
2.3 Cargo is lashed and secured to lashing points ensuring the

correct spread of lashings and that lashings are secured,
attached and tensioned
2.4 Tensioners are securely fastened
2.5 When unlashing, fittings are released, disconnected and

removed from the cargo
2.6 Lashing equipment is placed in designated storage areas or

cleared from work area
2.7 No injury to personnel or damage to machinery or cargo

during lashing/unlashing operations is ensured
2.8 Lashing is completed in accordance with lashing plan
3 Protect cargo from 3.1 Cargo is covered/uncovered safely ensuring appropriate

weather covering and lashing, no injury to personnel or damage to
cargo or equipment
3.2 Work is conducted in accordance with the requirements of

national standards, safety codes and site operating procedures
4 Pack and unpack 4.1 Damaged cargo is identified and reported in accordance with
cargo enterprise procedures
4.2 Cargo is sorted and stacked prior to packing or after

unpacking, ensuring the stack is in the correct location, in
accordance with national standards, safety codes, and site
4.3 Cargo is identified through the interpretation of marks or

numbers

4.4 Tight stow of cargo is maintained
4.5 Cargo is handled ensuring no injury to personnel or damage

to cargo or equipment
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA1001A Secure cargo.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA1001 Secure cargo Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA1001 Secure cargo
include:
 applying precautions and required action to minimise, control or eliminate hazards that
may exist during work activities
 communicating effectively with others when securing cargo or freight
 completing documentation related to securing cargo or freight
 identifying cargo, container and goods, coding, Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG)
and International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) markings and where applicable,
emergency information panels
 identifying, selecting and using relevant equipment, processes and procedures when
securing cargo or freight
 interpreting and following operational instructions and prioritising work
 operating and adapting to differences in cargo handling equipment in accordance with
standard operating procedures
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems, faults or malfunctions promptly, in
accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
 reading and interpreting instructions, procedures, information and labels relevant to
securing cargo or freight
 selecting and using required personal protective equipment conforming to industry and
work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) standards
 using lashing and protection equipment
 working collaboratively with others when securing cargo or freight
 working systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self or others,
or damage to goods or equipment.

Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international standards, codes and regulations relevant to securing cargo or
freight including ADG and IMDG codes
 cargo marking and numbering systems
 focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems
for securing cargo or freight
 problems that may occur when securing cargo or freight and appropriate action that can
be taken to resolve these problems
 procedures for managing and controlling hazardous situations when carrying out work
activities
 relevant bond, quarantine or other legislative requirements
 relevant handling and safety codes
 relevant WHS/OHS and environmental procedures and regulations
 workplace procedures and policies for securing cargo or freight.

requirements in the Standards for Registered Training Organisations, current at the time of
assessment.
assessment.
Assessment must occur in workplace operational situations where it is appropriate to do so;
where this is not appropriate, assessment must occur in simulated workplace operational
 relevant and appropriate materials, tools, equipment and personal protective equipment
currently used in industry
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of
practice and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIA2003 Connect and disconnect reefer units Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to connect and disconnect reefer units in
accordance with workplace requirements as part of work activities in the stevedoring,
transport, distribution and allied industries.
It includes plugging and unplugging reefer units to/from power sources, attaching and
detaching reefer units, and identifying and reporting any problems with reefer unit operation.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Plug/unplug reefer 1.1 Appropriate personal protective equipment is selected and

units to power sources used
1.2 Reefer units are plugged/unplugged safely in accordance

1.3 Reefer units are checked to be running correctly after being

plugged in
1.4 Problems with the operation of reefer units are identified

and reported to appropriate personnel in accordance with
1.5 Faults in reefer units are investigated and reported in

1.6 Reefer units are unplugged as required and cables are

cleared from units
2 Attach/detach units 2.1 Units are attached/detached safely in accordance with

regulatory and code of practice requirements, and workplace
procedures
2.2 Problems with the operations of units are identified and


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2003A Connect and disconnect reefer units.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2003 Connect and disconnect reefer units Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2003 Connect and disconnect

reefer units
include:
 applying precautions and required action to minimise, control or eliminate identified
hazards
 identifying and using relevant equipment
 identifying cargo, container and goods, coding, Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code
and International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code markings and where
applicable emergency information panels
 implementing contingency plans
 modifying activities depending on operational contingencies, risk situations and
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in equipment in accordance with standard operating
procedures
 reading, interpreting and following relevant instructions, procedures, information and
signs
 receiving, acknowledging and sending messages with available communications
equipment
 reporting and/or rectifying problems, faults or malfunctions promptly, in accordance with
 working collaboratively with others

Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international standards, codes of practice and regulations relevant to

connecting and disconnecting reefer units
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for the
connection and disconnection of reefer units
 problems that may occur when connecting and disconnecting reefer units and appropriate
action that can be taken to resolve the problems
 relevant (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) and environmental protection
procedures and guidelines
 site layout and location of reefer units
 workplace procedures and policies for connecting and disconnecting reefer units.
assessment.
assessment.
Where this is not appropriate, assessment on connecting and disconnecting reefer units must
occur in a simulated workplace operational situation that replicates workplace conditions.
practice and operation manuals
 relevant materials, tools, equipment and personal protective equipment currently used
in industry.

Links
036d851

TLIA2009 Complete and check import/export documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to complete and check import and export
documentation in accordance with the requirements of Customs and related legislation and
workplace procedures.
It includes identifying procedures required for documenting import/export of goods,
completing documentation to meet legislative and workplace requirements, checking
documentation to ensure it meets legislative requirements and lodging documentation for
processing.
Work is performed under some supervision generally within a team environment. Work is
undertaken in a range of environments including small to large worksites in the customs
broking and freight forwarding industries.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Identify procedures 1.1 Documents required for import/export of goods are identified
required for
documentation for 1.2 Required documents are sourced
import/export of
goods 1.3 Content requirements for each section of the documentation
are applied
1.4 Timelines for completion of documents are identified and

noted
1.5 Requirements for permits and other documentation (such as

quarantine) are identified and implications are noted
1.6 Procedures for obtaining clearances are identified and

followed in accordance with the requirements of Customs,
related legislation and workplace procedures
1.7 Letters of credit are identified and implications of each are

noted
1.8 Assistance is sought as required to identify necessary

documents and to commence process of assessing or
completing these documents
1.9 Documentation is lodged as required by legislation
2 Complete 2.1 Content requirements for each section of the documentation

documentation to are identified and applied in accordance with the
meet legislative and requirements of Customs, related legislation and workplace
requirements
2.2 Workplace procedures for authorisations are followed
2.3 Data entry for documents is completed
2.4 Problems arising in completing required documents are

identified and assistance is sought to resolve these in
accordance with the requirements of Customs, related
legislation and workplace procedures
2.5 Actions are taken to meet deadlines
2.6 Assistance is sought as required in completing required

documents
3 Check 3.1 Documents are collated and checked before forwarding to

documentation to supervisor, manager or more senior personnel for checking
ensure it meets within designated timelines, in accordance with the
legislative requirements of Customs, related legislation and workplace
requirements procedures
3.2 Declarations are checked to ensure they meet the

requirements of Customs, related legislation and workplace
procedures
3.3 Letters of credit are checked to ensure they meet commercial,

transport and overseas requirements
3.4 Dangerous goods documentation is checked in accordance

with the requirements of Customs, related legislation and
3.5 Document revisions are finalised, rechecked and forwarded

to supervisor, manager or more senior personnel prior to
lodgement
4 Lodge 4.1 Documents are forwarded to relevant personnel in

documentation for accordance with the requirements of Customs, related
processing legislation and workplace procedures
4.2 Documents are filed, stored and retained in accordance with

the requirements of Customs, related legislation and

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2009A Complete and check import/export
documentation.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2009 Complete and check import/export documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2009 Complete and check

import/export documentation
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when completing import and export
documentation
 completing and checking documentation and records to meet relevant Customs legislation,
related legislation and workplace requirements
 completing and/or assessing accuracy of import and export documentation
 identifying procedures required for documentation for import/export of goods
environments
 providing customer/client service
 reading, interpreting and following import and export instructions, procedures and labels
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems promptly, in accordance with regulatory
requirements and workplace procedures
 selecting and using relevant communications, computing and office equipment when
completing import and export documentation.

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2009 Complete and check import/export documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international standards, codes, conventions and regulations relevant to

importing and exporting cargo and freight
 Customs Act 1901and related legislation
 documentation requirements for importing and exporting cargo and freight
for completing import/export cargo and freight documentation
 problems that may occur when completing import and export documentation and
appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 relevant work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) and
environmental protection procedures and guidelines
 workplace procedures and policies for completing import and export documentation.
assessment.
assessment.
 a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or other simulations
and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIA2011 Package goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to package goods in accordance with
regulatory and workplace requirements as part of work activities undertaken within the
It includes selecting materials, packing, and labelling packaged products/loads to the required
labelling standards.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Select materials and 1.1 Packaging specifications and order packaging documentation
pack products are correctly interpreted
1.2 Packaging technology suitable for the goods to be packed is

selected

TLIA2011 Package goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
1.3 Packaging materials are identified and matched to

specifications
1.4 Work plan is followed, materials are used economically and

appropriate packaging is used to minimise loss and damage in
transit or storage
1.5 Work is planned in accordance with work health and safety

(WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) requirements
1.6 Completed packed goods are stacked to minimise damage

from within and outside
2 Label packaged 2.1 Workplace labelling standards are identified

products/loads
2.2 Appropriate goods handling, labelling and other identification
symbols are used
2.3 Invoices and picking slips are attached as required
2.4 Workplace documentation is completed
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2011A Package goods.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2011 Package goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2011 Package goods
the requirements of the elements, and performance criteria on at least one occasion and
include:
 checking operation of packaging equipment in terms of service schedule and standard
 communicating and working effectively with others when packaging goods
 completing documentation related to work activities when packaging goods
 estimating the size, shape and special requirements of goods and loads
 implementing contingency plans when packaging goods
environments
 monitoring equipment performance when packaging goods
 operating and adapting to differences in equipment in accordance with standard
 reading and interpreting instructions, procedures and labels relevant to packaging
goods
 selecting and using relevant communications, computing equipment and materials
when packaging goods

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2011 Package goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to packaging goods

 documentation requirements for packaging goods, such as a workplan
 housekeeping standards and procedures
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for
packaging goods
 problems that may occur when packaging goods and appropriate action that can be
taken to resolve these problems
 relevant WHS/OHS and environmental protection procedures and guidelines
 site layout and obstacles
 workplace procedures and policies for packaging goods.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA2012 Pick and process orders Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to pick and process orders in accordance
with relevant codes, regulations and workplace requirements within the transport and logistics
industry.
It includes identifying workplace order picking processes, policies and procedures; picking
and despatching orders; and recording stock levels.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify workplace 1.1 Workplace procedures for order picking and related
order picking workplace documentation are interpreted
processes, policies
and procedures 1.2 Stock allocation and location systems are identified and
located

1.3 Appropriate manual handling equipment is selected in

accordance with work health and safety (WHS)/occupational
health and safety (OHS) regulations and workplace
procedures
2 Pick and despatch 2.1 Work requirements are planned and appropriate equipment
an order and documentation is assembled
2.2 Warehouse zones where required products are stored, are

identified and located
2.3 Pick path is established
2.4 Appropriate pallet/s for orders are selected and stacked to

minimise stock damage and to maximise stability, as
required
2.5 Products are selected and consolidated
2.6 Products/pallets are located in despatch areas
2.7 Products are assembled to meet workplace schedules
2.8 Orders are consolidated, secured, arranged and placed in

storage zones in accordance with schedules
3 Record stock levels 3.1 Storage areas are checked and stocks are noted for
replenishment in accordance with workplace procedures
3.2 Workplace records are completed in accordance with

workplace requirements

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2012A Pick and process orders.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2012 Pick and process orders Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2012 Pick and process orders
include:
may exist when picking and processing orders
 communicating and working effectively with others when picking and processing orders
 completing documentation related to picking and processing orders
 estimating the size, shape and special requirements of goods/loads
 identifying relevant stock and goods coding and labelling, including Australian Dangerous
Goods (ADG) and International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) markings
procedures
 reading, interpreting, and following instructions, procedures, signs and labels relevant to
picking and processing orders
 selecting and using relevant equipment and communications technology when picking and
processing orders

Knowledge Evidence
 documentation and record requirements when picking and processing an order

 equipment used during picking and processing operations and the precautions and
procedures to be followed in its use
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for picking
and processing orders
 problems that may occur when picking and processing an order and appropriate action that
can be taken to resolve these problems
 regulations relevant to picking and processing orders, including relevant bond, quarantine
or other legislative requirements
 workplace procedures and policies for picking and processing orders.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA2013 Receive goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to receive goods in accordance with
regulatory and workplace requirements as part of work activities undertaken within the
It includes identifying workplace procedures and documentation requirements for receiving
goods; checking and inspecting goods on arrival and completing workplace documentation;
and unloading, unpacking and storing stock.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

Elements describe the essential Performance criteria describe the performance

1 Identify workplace procedures and 1.1 Workplace procedures for receiving goods are
documentation requirements for identified
receiving goods
1.2 Purpose of documents associated with

receiving goods is interpreted
1.3 Workplace documentation requirements for

receiving goods and reporting damage are
identified
2 Check and inspect goods on arrival 2.1 Procedures for checking goods against orders
and complete workplace or manifests are identified and followed
documentation
2.2 Discrepancies and/or damaged goods are
reported
2.3 Non-conforming goods are appropriately

documented and despatched or stored in
accordance with company procedures
3 Unload, unpack and store stock 3.1 Appropriate manual handling techniques and
equipment are identified
3.2 Safe work procedures are used when unloading,

unpacking and storing stock
3.3 Advice is sought on appropriate storage

locations and requirements for particular
products
3.4 Goods are unloaded and unpacked in

3.5 Assistance is sought from others as required to

maintain safe and effective work
3.6 Directions are followed to store stock in

appropriate areas
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.


This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2013A Receive goods.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2013 Receive goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2013 Receive goods
include:
may exist when receiving goods
 communicating and working effectively with others when receiving goods
 completing documentation related to receiving goods
 identifying containers and goods coding, Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) and
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) markings and where applicable,
 implementing contingency plans when receiving goods
environments
 reading, interpreting and following instructions, procedures, information, labels and
signs relevant to receiving goods
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems promptly, in accordance with
 selecting and using relevant load handling equipment when receiving goods

Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to receiving goods

including the ADG Code and relevant bond, quarantine or other legislative
requirements
 documentation requirements for receiving goods
 focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating
systems for receiving goods
 problems that may occur when receiving goods and appropriate action that can be
 specifications and standards for checking and inspecting received goods
 workplace procedures and policies for receiving goods.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA2014 Use product knowledge to complete work operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to use product knowledge to complete
work operations in accordance with workplace requirements and relevant regulations, as part
of work activities within the transport and logistics industries.
It includes identifying products in a subsection of a warehouse or other storage area,
examining quality, reporting on products, as well as using inventory and labelling systems to
identify and locate products.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

Elements describe the essential Performance criteria describe the performance needed to
outcomes. demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify products in a 1.1 Products are identified against specified criteria in

subsection of a warehouse or accordance with workplace procedures
other storage area
1.2 Storage and handling characteristics are identified

TLIA2014 Use product knowledge to complete work operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
and applied consistently
1.3 Products are described to internal customers

identifying features that may affect location, safety
or storage requirements
2 Examine quality and report on 2.1 Products are inspected in accordance with workplace
products quality assurance procedures
2.2 Workplace procedures are followed to replace,

return or dispose of stock/products that are not
useable
2.3 Non-conforming products are recorded/reported in

3 Use inventory and labelling 3.1 Inventory and labelling systems are used to locate
systems to identify and locate products within the workplace
products
3.2 Goods are physically located and identified
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2014A Use product knowledge to complete work
operations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2014 Use product knowledge to complete work operationsDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2014 Use product knowledge

to complete work operations
include:
 adapting to differences in products and services in accordance with standard operating
procedures
 communicating and working effectively with others when handling, transporting and
storing products and providing information on products and services
 completing documentation related to work activities
 identifying containers and goods coding, Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) and
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) markings and where applicable,
 reading and comprehending simple statements in English
 reading, interpreting and following instructions, procedures, information and signs
relevant to handling, transporting, storing products and providing information on
products and services
 selecting and using relevant communications, computing and load handling equipment
work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) standards.

2017
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian codes and regulations relevant to products being identified, handled,

transported, stacked and/or stored as part of work operations
 categories or groups of products and requirements for special handling, stacking and
storage
 documentation requirements including reports and records concerning damaged or
contaminated goods
systems for packaging goods
 purpose and use of cataloguing and labelling systems
 strategies to seek out sources of product knowledge and to use this information to
inform work
 types of equipment and storage areas appropriate for different categories of goods
including perishable, fragile, dangerous, composition/state goods
 workplace procedures and policies for identifying, handling, stacking and storing
particular categories of products.

2017
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA2020 Replenish stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to replenish stock in accordance with
workplace requirements as part of work activities undertaken within the transport and
logistics industry.
It includes applying product knowledge to participate in stock rotation activities, interpreting
and filling replenishment requests, and completing all required stock replenishment tasks.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Participate in stock 1.1 Stock levels are counted against appropriate documentation
rotation activities
1.2 Stock levels are recorded and reported
1.3 Stocks are replenished, adjusted or rotated in accordance with


1.4 Stock re-ordering processes are activated when appropriate
1.5 Routine and non-routine problems with products or storage

systems are reported in accordance with workplace procedures
2 Interpret and fill 2.1 Order request documentation is interpreted

replenishment
request 2.2 Product/s in order are noted and workplace location/s are
identified
2.3 Workplace and product knowledge is used to plan sequence of

work
2.4 Appropriate materials handling equipment is selected in

accordance with workplace procedures and timeframes, and
work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety
(OHS) regulations
2.5 Required schedules for order movement and despatch or

storage are identified
3 Complete stock 3.1 Products are sorted, assembled and consolidated in the
replenishment appropriate storage areas
3.2 Work is checked in accordance with company procedures
3.3 Documentation and records are completed in accordance with


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2020A Replenish stock.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2020 Replenish stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2020 Replenish stock
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when replenishing stock
 completing documentation related to replenishing stock
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in stock and equipment in accordance with standard
 reading, interpreting and following instructions, procedures and labels relevant to
replenishing stock
replenishing stock

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2020 Replenish stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian codes and regulations relevant to replenishing stock

 computer records and documentation requirements for replenishing stock
systems for replenishing stock
 principles of operation and functions of stock control systems
 workplace procedures and policies for replenishing stock.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA2021 Despatch stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to despatch stock in accordance with
codes/regulations and workplace requirements as part of work activities undertaken within the
It includes analysing orders to identify work requirements, following workplace order picking
processes to prepare goods for despatch, and completing despatch tasks in accordance with
workplace procedures and schedules.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Analyse order to identify 1.1 Order request and consignment note documentation is
work requirements interpreted
1.2 Required schedules for despatch are identified

1.3 Product(s) in order are identified
1.4 Workplace and product knowledge is used to plan

sequence of work
1.5 Appropriate materials handling equipment is selected

within required work health and safety
(WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) regulations
and timeframe for the despatch
2 Follow workplace order 2.1 Goods for despatch are selected and checked against
picking processes to product knowledge, labels and other identification
prepare goods for systems
despatch
2.2 Products are sorted, assembled and consolidated
2.3 Orders are secured and placed in storage/despatch zones,

in accordance with schedule
2.4 Order is checked against despatch schedule and order

form
3 Complete despatch 3.1 Workplace records are completed, and labels and
following workplace appropriate documentation are attached
procedures and schedules
3.2 Load labels and documentation are checked and loading
is organised in accordance with workplace procedures
and Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code as
required
3.3 Final check of load labels and documentation is

completed in accordance with requirements
3.4 Transportation requirements are communicated to driver

as required

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2021A Despatch stock.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2021 Despatch stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2021 Despatch stock
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when organising despatch
operations
 completing documentation related to organising despatch operations
 estimating size, shape and special requirements of goods and loads
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in goods and equipment in accordance with
organising despatch operations
 selecting and using relevant equipment and communications technology when

Knowledge Evidence
 documentation and record requirements for despatch operations

 equipment used during despatch operations and the precautions and procedures that
should be followed in its use
despatching goods
 problems that may occur when despatching goods and appropriate action that can be
 regulations relevant to despatch operations, including the Australian Dangerous Goods
(ADG) Code and relevant bond, quarantine or other legislative requirements
 workplace procedures and policies for organising despatch operations.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA2022 Participate in stocktakes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to participate in stocktakes in accordance
with relevant regulations and workplace requirements within the transport and logistics
industry.
It includes product knowledge, preparing and conducting stocktakes, counting and identifying
stock discrepancies and completing all required documentation.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
A  Handling Cargo/Stock
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare for stocktake 1.1 Goods to be counted and appropriate inventory systems
are identified
1.2 Required resources including equipment and record

keeping systems are identified

1.3 Allocated tasks, zones and work requirements are

identified
1.4 Sequencing of work activities is planned in a time

effective manner
2 Stocktake and count 2.1 Stocktaking and cyclical counts are undertaken in
stock accordance with workplace policies and procedures
2.2 Inventory data is interpreted
2.3 Inventory data is confirmed to match stock
2.4 Stock levels are accurately counted and documented
3 Identify stock 3.1 Discrepancies in type, number and quality of stock are
discrepancies accurately recorded and documented
3.2 Products stored in inappropriate storage locations are

relocated and stock records are adjusted
4 Complete documentation 4.1 Inventory data is reconciled to match warehouse stock in


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2022A Participate in stocktakes.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2022 Participate in stocktakes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2022 Participate in stocktakes
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when conducting stocktakes
 completing documentation related to conducting stocktakes
environments
conducting stocktakes
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems promptly, in accordance with
 selecting and using relevant communication, computing and office equipment when
conducting stocktakes.

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2022 Participate in stocktakes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian codes and regulations relevant to conducting stocktakes

 principles of operation and functions of stocktake systems
 workplace procedures and policies for conducting stocktakes
 workplace processes for managing records and producing stocktake reports.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA2041 Manually sort mail and parcels Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manually sort mail and parcels in
accordance with workplace requirements, as part of work activities in the postal and allied
industries.
It includes carrying out required preparations of the work area, manually sorting mail and
parcels as well as finalising the required sorting processes.
The sorting processes include accurately and efficiently organising mail and parcels into
groups for further processing or distribution, and containerising processed mail and parcels
ready for transfer to the next processing or distribution point.
Work is normally performed under general supervision, usually in a team or outstation
environment.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Prepare to sort mail 1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are
and parcels manually identified and confirmed
1.2 All work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and

safety (OHS) and environmental protection workplace
procedures and requirements are identified, accessed and
applied
1.3 Availability of mail and parcels to be processed is identified

and confirmed
1.4 Mail and parcels to be processed are transferred to processing

point
1.5 Labels for identifying the destination of mail are created and
affixed to trays
2 Sort mail and parcels 2.1 Internal operating procedures and standards are applied to the
manually manual processing of parcels and mail
2.2 Mail and parcels are inspected to ensure all criteria have been
met
2.3 Mail and parcels are sorted accurately and correctly in

compliance with priority for processing and manual sorting
procedures
2.4 Mail and parcels are handled safely to minimise risk of injury
to people and damage to mail and parcels
2.5 Mail and parcels that are damaged, underpaid, incorrectly

classified, or are non-conforming are identified, separated and
re-processed in accordance with workplace procedures
2.6 Legal requirements and workplace policies and procedures in

relation to the security of mail and parcels are followed
3 Complete process for 3.1 Mail and parcel sorting frames/bag racks are cleared down,
manually sorting mail and mail and parcel containers/bags are sealed and labelled in
and parcels accordance with workplace procedures
3.2 Mail and parcels are transferred to next processing or

distribution point using appropriate shifting equipment and

labels are scanned as required
3.3 Information required to complete records of mail and parcels

processed is provided and recorded
3.4 Excess equipment is removed and work area is prepared for

next activity/shift
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2041A Manually sort mail and parcels.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2041 Manually sort mail and parcels Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2041 Manually sort mail and

parcels
include:
 applying security and safety precautions and required action to minimise, control or
eliminate identified hazards
 communicating and working effectively with others
 completing relevant documentation
 identifying, selecting and using relevant equipment, processes and procedures
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in equipment and systems in accordance with
 planning and prioritising own work, predicting consequences and identifying
improvements
signs
WHS/OHS standards

Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to mail operations
 hazards that may occur when manually sorting mail and parcels, and ways of controlling
the risks involved
manually sorting mail and parcels
 problems that may occur when manually sorting mail and parcels and appropriate action
that can be taken to resolve/avoid these problems
 relevant WHS/OHS and environmental protection procedures and guidelines, including
relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for use
 requirements of mail sorting systems, operations and relevant equipment
 workplace procedures and policies for manually sorting mail and parcels.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIA2042 Despatch mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to despatch mail in accordance with
regulatory and workplace requirements.
It includes preparing to and despatching mail, and completing despatch operations. It also
includes all actions from the receipt of mail for consolidation to the despatch and maintenance of
records.
Work is normally performed under general supervision, usually within a team environment.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

essential outcomes. achievement of the element.
1 Prepare to 1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are
despatch mail identified and confirmed

1.2 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control measures are
implemented
1.3 All work health safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety

(OHS) and workplace environment protection procedures and
requirements are identified, accessed and applied
1.4 Mail to be despatched is identified and accessed, and priority for

despatching is established
2 Despatch mail 2.1 Internal operating procedures and standards are applied to
processing mail
2.2 Mail is processed accurately and correctly in accordance with

priority for despatching
2.3 Mail is handled and equipment is operated safely to minimise risk

of injury to people and damage to mail
2.4 Mail to be despatched is weighed and/or scanned to ensure it is in

2.5 Mail is placed in appropriate mail transport devices for despatch
2.6 Mail transport devices are moved to holding/loading areas in

3 Complete 3.1 Information required to complete records of mail despatched is

despatch of mail provided and recorded, and records are processed in accordance
3.2 Excess equipment is removed and work area is prepared for next
activity/shift

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2042A Despatch mail.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2042 Despatch mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2042 Despatch mail
include:
 applying safety and security precautions and required action to minimise, control or
 interpreting and applying relevant agreements, codes of practice or other legislative
requirements
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in equipment in accordance with workplace
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures and labels
 selecting and using required personal protective equipment (PPE) conforming to industry
and work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) standards

Knowledge Evidence
 operating work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems, site layout,
and workplace procedures and policies for despatching mail
 performance standards and regulations relevant to mail operations
 problems that may occur when despatching mail and appropriate action that can be taken
to resolve or avoid these problems
 relevant WHS/OHS and environmental protection procedures and guidelines including
relevant PPE and procedures for its use
 safety and security hazards that may occur when despatching mail and ways of controlling
the risks involved.

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA2043 Consolidate mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to consolidate mail in accordance with
regulations and workplace requirements.
It includes preparing for and consolidating mail, and completing mail consolidation process.
It also includes the initial identification and separation of mail prior to movement to the
despatch dock as part of work activities in the postal and allied industries.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Prepare for 1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are
consolidation of identified and confirmed
mail
1.2 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control measures
are implemented

(OHS) and environment protection procedures and requirements
for the workplace are identified, accessed and applied
1.4 Mail to be consolidated is identified and accessed
2 Consolidate mail 2.1 Internal operating procedures and standards are applied to the
consolidation of mail
2.2 Mail is consolidated accurately and correctly in accordance with

workplace requirements
2.3 Mail is handled safely to minimise risk of injury to people and

damage to mail
2.4 Mail to be consolidated is placed into mail containers for

movement to next process point
3 Complete 3.1 Mail containers are sealed and labelled accurately and correctly
consolidation of in accordance with workplace procedures
mail
3.2 Information required to complete records of mail processed is
provided and recorded, and records are processed in accordance
3.3 Mail containers are transferred to designated storage area to

await movement to next processing point using appropriate
shifting equipment
3.4 Excess equipment is removed from work area and is stored

appropriately

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2043A Consolidate mail.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2043 Consolidate mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2043 Consolidate mail
include:
requirements
environments
 planning own work, predicting consequences and identifying improvements
 selecting and using required personal protective equipment (PPE) conforming to industry
damage to mail or equipment.
Knowledge Evidence
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems, site layout
and workplace procedures and policies for consolidating mail

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2043 Consolidate mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

 problems that may occur when consolidating mail and appropriate action that can be taken
to resolve or avoid these problems
relevant PPE and procedures for its use
 safety and security hazards that may occur when consolidating mail and ways of
controlling the risks involved.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA2044 Carry out delivery operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to deliver mail and/or consignments to
residential and business customers, in accordance with regulations and workplace requirements
within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes carrying out required preparations, delivering mail and/or consignment to special
routes in accordance with workplace procedures, and reporting on delivery activity.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
A – Handling Cargo Stock
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare to deliver mail 1.1 Mail and/or consignment for delivery and associated items
are identified and collected promptly from specific

and/or consignment locations
1.2 Mail and/or consignment is sorted accurately into route

order
1.3 Mail and/or consignment is handled in a manner that

minimises the risk of damage
1.4 Special items are identified accurately
1.5 Mail and/or consignment is organised into bundles and is

kept in sequence for delivery
1.6 Mail and/or consignment is handled securely
2 Deliver 2.1 Established laws, by-laws and procedural guidelines are

mail/consignment to confirmed and applied
specific route
2.2 Mail and/or consignment is delivered in good condition
and in specified sequence
2.3 Deliveries are completed within specified times
2.4 Mail and/or consignment is kept secure to minimise the

risk of damage, theft, mis-delivery and loss
2.5 Items requiring special treatment are delivered as specified

and relevant documentation is completed accurately
2.6 Contact with customers is conducted courteously and in a

manner that encourages customers to continue to use and
recommend mail services
2.7 Hazards associated with delivery round are identified and

required action is taken to minimise, control or eliminate
identified hazards
3 Report on delivery 3.1 Incidents involving customers and/or identified hazards are
activity reported accurately to relevant person
3.2 Opportunities for developing workplace business, together

with competitor activity, identified during delivery
operations are recorded and reported to appropriate person
3.3 Undelivered and undeliverable mail/consignment is

processed in accordance with workplace policies and
procedures
3.4 Documents are completed, checked for accuracy and

returned promptly to appropriate person

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2044A Carry out delivery operations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2044 Carry out delivery operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2044 Carry out delivery

operations
include:
 interpreting and applying relevant agreements, codes of practice, workplace procedures
and other legislative requirements
environments
 reading, interpreting and following relevant instructions, procedures and labels

Knowledge Evidence
for delivery operations
 hazards that may occur during delivery operations and ways of controlling the risks
involved
 problems that may occur when conducting delivery operations and appropriate action that
can be taken to resolve/avoid these problems
 relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for its use
 requirements of delivery systems, operations and relevant equipment
 site layout
 workplace procedures for conducting delivery operations.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIA2045 Process international parcels and letters Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to prepare and process international parcels
and letters for both air and surface movement, in accordance with regulations and workplace
requirements within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes preparing to process international parcels and mail, processing airmail parcels and
letters, and processing economy air surface parcels.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare to process 1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are
international parcels identified and confirmed

and mail 1.2 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control
measures are implemented

(OHS) and workplace environment protection procedures
and requirements are identified, accessed and applied
1.4 Availability of parcels and mail for processing is identified

and confirmed
1.5 Parcels and mail received from streaming are segregated into
airmail, economy air and surface categories
1.6 Mail and parcels are weighed prior to processing
2 Process airmail 2.1 Operating procedures and performance standards are applied
parcels and letters to sorting parcels and letters
2.2 Parcels are handled safely to minimise risk of injury to

people and damage to parcels and letters
2.3 Airmail parcels are quarantined for stipulated period
2.4 Parcels and letters are sorted accurately and correctly by

nation, in accordance with established priorities
2.5 Parcels and letters are documented and placed in appropriate

containers
2.6 Completed bags are weighed and labels are generated and
scanned
2.7 Containers of parcels are moved to consolidation/despatch

area

next activity/shift
2.9 International parcels and letters processes and surveys are

conducted as required
2.10 Parcels and letters incorrectly classified and non-conforming

items are identified, separated and re-sorted
3 Process economy air 3.1 Operating procedures and performance standards are applied
surface parcels to sorting parcels and mail
3.2 Economy air and surface parcels and mail are held in
temporary storage for the service standard time

3.3 Parcels and mail are scanned and sorted accurately and
correctly by nation in accordance with established practices
3.4 Parcels and mail are documented and placed in containers
3.5 Containers of parcels and mail are moved to

consolidation/despatch area using correct shifting equipment
and labels

next activity/shift
3.7 Information required to complete record of mail and parcels

is provided and recorded, and records are processed in
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2045A Process international parcels and letters.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2045 Process international parcels and letters Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2045 Process international

parcels and letters
include:
 interpreting and applying relevant agreements, codes of practice, workplace procedures
and other legislative requirements
environments
damage to mail or equipment.
Knowledge Evidence

processing international parcels and letters
 problems that may occur when processing international parcels and letters and appropriate
action that can be taken to resolve/avoid these problems
 requirements of international parcels processing systems, operations and relevant
equipment
 safety and security hazards that may occur when processing international parcels and
letters, and ways of controlling the risks involved
 site layout
 workplace procedures and policies for the processing of international parcels and letters.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links


036d851

TLIA2046 Process parcels and letters Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manually process parcels and letters in
accordance with regulations and workplace requirements.
It includes preparing and carrying out the processing of parcels and mail manually, and
completing all processing operations. It also includes all actions after receipt, from streaming up
to immediately prior to despatch, as part of work activities.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare to process 1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are
parcels and mail identified and confirmed

manually 1.2 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control measures
are implemented

(OHS) and environment protection procedures and requirements
for the workplace are identified, accessed and applied
1.4 Availability of parcels and mail to be processed is identified and

confirmed
1.5 Appropriate sort-plan is identified, accessed and applied
1.6 Parcels and mail to be processed are transferred to processing

point
1.7 Labels for identifying mail destination are created and affixed to
trays
2 Process parcels and 2.1 Operating procedures and performance standards are applied to
mail manually manual processing of parcels and mail
2.2 Parcels and mail are processed accurately and correctly in

accordance with priority for processing
2.3 Parcels and mail are handled safely to minimise risk of injury to
people and damage to parcels
2.4 Parcels and mail incorrectly classified and non-conforming

items are identified, separated and re-processed
2.5 Parcels and mail are sorted to their correct destination and
placed in appropriate mail container for distribution
3 Complete parcels 3.1 Parcel and mail containers/bag racks are cleared down, sealed
and mail process and labelled
3.2 Parcel and mail containers are weighed and labelled in

3.3 Information required to complete records of parcels and mail

processed is provided and recorded, and records are processed
3.4 Parcels and mail are transferred to next processing point using
appropriate shifting equipment, and labels are scanned as
required

next activity/shift

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2046A Process parcels and letters.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2046 Process parcels and letters Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2046 Process parcels and

letters
include:
hazards
requirements
Knowledge Evidence

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2046 Process parcels and letters Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems, site layout,
and workplace procedures and policies for processing parcels and letters
 problems that may occur when processing parcels and letters and appropriate action that
can be taken to resolve/avoid these problems
relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for its use
 safety and security hazards that may occur when processing parcels and letters and ways
of controlling the risks involved.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA2047 Stream mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to stream mail in readiness for the next
stage of processing, in accordance with regulations and workplace requirements.
It includes preparing to stream mail and carrying out the task of streaming mail in accordance
with workplace procedures, and finalising all required streaming operations.
Work is normally performed under general supervision, usually within a team environment.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Prepare to stream 1.1 Individual and work team priorities and responsibilities are
mail identified and confirmed


(OHS) and workplace environment protection procedures and
requirements are identified, accessed and applied
1.3 Mail to be streamed is identified, accessed and prepared
2 Stream mail 2.1 Internal operating procedures and standards are applied to
streaming mail
2.2 Mail is categorised and streamed accurately and correctly in

accordance with priority for streaming
2.3 Mail is handled safely to minimise risk of injury to people and

damage to mail
3 Complete mail 3.1 Mail containers are loaded onto appropriate mail movement
streaming device and labelled
3.2 Information required to complete records of mail processed is

provided and recorded, and record are processed in accordance
3.3 Mail containers are transferred to next processing point using

appropriate shifting equipment
3.4 Excess equipment is removed and work area is prepared for next
activity shift

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2047A Stream mail.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2047 Stream mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2047 Stream mail
include:
requirements
 operating and adapting to differences in equipment in accordance with operating
procedures
Knowledge Evidence
 hazards that may occur when streaming mail and ways of controlling the risks involved
 how to open, face up and tray mail
 operating work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems, site layout
and workplace procedures and policies for streaming mail

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2047 Stream mail Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 problems that may occur when streaming mail and appropriate action that can be taken to
resolve or avoid these problems
relevant personal protective equipment and procedures for its use.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA2050 Lash and unlash cargo and containers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to lash and unlash cargo and containers
in compliance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements in the stevedoring,
transport, distribution and allied industries.
It includes preparing to lash and unlash cargo and containers, implementing the container
lashing plan, and completing lashing and unlashing operations.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare to lash and 1.1 Work area and safety zones are prepared and maintained
unlash cargo and in accordance with national standards, safety codes and
containers site operating procedures

1.2 Work area hazards are identified and corrective action is

taken prior to commencing lashing and unlashing
operations
1.3 Relevant information and documentation are identified

and accessed
1.4 Appropriate personal protective equipment, lashing

equipment and fittings are selected and used
1.5 Work cage and/or working at height (WAH) requirements

are identified and appropriate WAH equipment is selected
1.6 Marks, numbers and/or codes are used to identify cargo

and containers
1.7 Cargo is sorted and stacked in correct location in

accordance with national standards, safety codes and site
1.8 Containers are stowed in accordance with stowage plan,

and reefer containers are identified and connected in
accordance with ship procedures, national standards and
safety codes
1.9 Damaged cargo and containers are identified, reported

and dealt with in accordance with site operating
procedures
1.10 Potential unsafe work practices and/or equipment are

2 Implement cargo and 2.1 Cargo or container lashing and unlashing plan is accessed
container lashing and and read, and potential issues are clarified with supervisor
unlashing procedures
2.2 Procedures for managing and controlling hazardous
situations when carrying out work activities are
implemented
2.3 Safety procedures and safety zones are implemented

when working with mobile equipment and cranes in
accordance with national standards, safety codes and site
2.4 Work is conducted in accordance with industry standards,

statutory requirements, safety codes, site operating
requirements, cargo and container requirements
2.5 Work cage and/or WAH is completed in accordance with

national standards, safety codes and site procedures
2.6 Appropriate and effective communication is maintained

in work area
2.7 Cargo and container are lashed and unlashed in

accordance with site procedures, and cargo and containers
are lashed and unlashed in accordance with lashing and
unlashing plan
2.8 Correct manual handling techniques are used when

lashing and unlashing cargo and containers
2.9 Identified problems, faults and malfunctions are promptly

reported and/or rectified in accordance with regulatory
2.10 Contingency plans are implemented as required
3 Complete cargo and 3.1 Cargo and container are covered and uncovered safely
container lashing and ensuring appropriate covering and lashing, no injury to
unlashing operations persons in work area or damage to cargo, container and
equipment
3.2 Lashing equipment and tools are cleared from work area
and placed in designated storage areas
3.3 All safety equipment and radios are returned to

designated area
3.4 Relevant documentation is completed and filed in

accordance with site operating procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA2050A Lash and unlash cargo and containers.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA2050 Lash and unlash cargo and containers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA2050 Lash and unlash cargo

and containers
the requirements of the elements, performance criteria on at least one occasion and include:
 applying appropriate fatigue management techniques as required

hazards
 being aware of own ability and limits to rectify irregularities or faults
 fastening tensioners securely
 identifying and correctly using relevant equipment
 identifying cargo, containers and goods, Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code and
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code markings and emergency
information panels
 identifying lashing points
 maintaining tight stow of cargo
environments
 monitoring and prioritising work activities in terms of planned schedule
 operating and adapting to differences in cargo and container lashing and unlashing
equipment in accordance with standard operating procedures
signs
equipment
 releasing fittings, and disconnecting and removing them from cargo
 securing cargo to lashing points ensuring correct spread of lashings and that lashings are
secured, attached and tensioned
 selecting and using required:
 personal protective equipment conforming to industry and work health and safety
(WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) standards
 work cage and/or working at height (WAH) personal protective equipment conforming
to industry and WHS/OHS standards

 using appropriate fittings and lashing equipment for each lashing point
 working systematically with required attention to detail and without injury to self or
others, or damage to goods or equipment.

Knowledge Evidence
the requirements of the elements, performance criteria and include knowledge of:
 basic fatigue management techniques

 cargo and container marking and numbering systems
 operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for lashing
and unlashing cargo and containers
 problems that may occur and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve them
 relevant Australian and international standards, codes of practice and regulations required
to perform the job requirements relating to this unit, including:
 ADG Code
 Australian and international explosives Codes
 IMDG Code
 International Air Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations (DGR)
 Marine Orders
 relevant workplace procedures and policies.
assessment.
assessment.
Assessment must occur in workplace operational situations where lashing and unlashing cargo
and containers can be demonstrated. Where this is not appropriate, assessment must occur in
simulated workplace operational situations that replicate workplace conditions.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice and
operation manuals, including:
 ADG Code
 Australian and international explosives Codes

 IMDG Code
 IATA DGR
 Marine Orders
 personal protective clothing and equipment, including:
 fall arrest safety harness
 gloves
 protective clothing
 safety glasses
 safety headwear and footwear
 relevant materials, tools and equipment currently used in industry, including:
 chains
 chocks
 fibre ropes
 lashing bars
 racks
 twistlocks
 turnbuckles
 webbing straps and ratchets
 wire ropes.
Links
036d851

TLIA3002 Maintain container/cargo records Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to maintain container/cargo records, in
accordance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements as part of work activities
It includes processing container and/or cargo documentation, maintaining records of
container/cargo movements, monitoring container/cargo including reefer units and maintaining
records.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Process 1.1 Container/cargo documentation is processed in accordance

container/cargo with workplace procedures and statutory authority

documentation requirements
1.2 Movements of containers/cargo are recorded in accordance

with workplace procedures and statutory authority
requirements
2 Maintain records of 2.1 Container/cargo records are updated each time

container/cargo containers/cargo are moved within the yard
movements
2.2 Containers/cargo are checked using markings to ensure
correct identification when updating records
3 Monitor 3.1 Containers/cargo are monitored on a daily basis and specified

container/cargo and information is recorded
maintain records
3.2 Problems with controlled systems on containers/cargo are
reported on appropriate forms and forwarded to maintenance
area
3.3 Log cards on containers/cargo with controlled systems are

checked on completion of monitoring, and all unit or system
breakdowns and/or faults are logged in breakdown log diary
3.4 Movement of containers/cargo is monitored on a daily basis

and information is recorded

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3002A Maintain container/cargo records.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3002 Maintain container/cargo records Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3002 Maintain

container/cargo records
include:
 estimating size, shape and special requirements of loads
Code/International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code markings and emergency
information panels
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information and labels
equipment
Knowledge Evidence

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3002 Maintain container/cargo records Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 Australian and International Standards, codes of practice and regulations relevant to

maintaining container and cargo records including the current ADG Code
for maintaining container and cargo records
 problems that may occur when maintaining container and cargo records and appropriate
action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 relevant handling and safety codes of practice
 site layout and location of reefer units
 workplace procedures and policies for maintaining container and cargo records.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, ADG Code, codes
of practice and operation manuals
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3004 Process receipt and delivery of containers and cargo Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to process the receipt and delivery of
containers and cargo, in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements as part
of work activities within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes checking the stacking/discharge list at commencement of a shift, assessing and
planning container/cargo consolidation, allocating stack positions, identifying and checking
containers/cargo, and checking and completing required documentation.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Check stacking/ 1.1 Yard or terminal stacking/discharge lists are checked

discharge list at shift against container/cargo documentation and operational

commencement order of work, taking into account both ship and shore
operations
1.2 Stacking discharge lists are continually updated to reflect

correct location of containers and cargo
2 Assess and plan 2.1 Yard or terminal plans are assessed and consolidation of
container/cargo container/cargo within the yard or terminal is planned as
consolidation required
2.2 Consolidation plans are prepared to ensure efficiency of

operations and efficient use of available yard/terminal
space
2.3 Final yard/terminal positions are obtained from

consolidation plans and are recorded
3 Allocate stack positions 3.1 Stack positions are allocated based on nature of
container/cargo concerned and requirements of
yard/terminal operations
3.2 Stacking plan is communicated to relevant personnel in

4 Identify and check 4.1 Containers/cargo are identified and checked at point of
containers/cargo entry to yard and prior to stacking
4.2 Agreement between numbers and marks on

container/cargo and shipping documentation is confirmed
4.3 Cargo/containers are inspected and appropriate action is

taken to report identified damage or defects in accordance
4.4 Stacking plans are followed and efficient movement

within the yard is facilitated
4.5 Documentation is checked prior to performing completion

procedures, in accordance with workplace procedures and

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3004A Process receipt and delivery of containers
and cargo.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3004 Process receipt and delivery of containers and cargo Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3004 Process receipt and

delivery of containers and cargo
include:
 applying effective eye-hand coordination
Code/International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code markings and emergency
information panels
environments
procedures
 receiving, acknowledging and sending messages using appropriate communications
equipment
Knowledge Evidence

2017
 Australian and International Standards, codes and regulations relevant to processing the
receipt and delivery of containers and cargo including current ADG Code
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for the
receipt and delivery of containers and cargo
 problems that may occur when processing the receipt and delivery of containers and
cargo, and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 site layout, stacking plans and available stacking space
 workplace procedures and policies for processing the receipt and delivery of containers
and cargo.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links

2017

036d851

TLIA3008 Transfer cargo Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to transfer cargo in accordance with relevant
regulations, and workplace requirements as part of work activities in the transport and logistics
industry.
It includes preparing for load transfer, safely transferring cargo using appropriate lifting
equipment, finalising a transfer, and completing all required documentation.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Prepare for load 1.1 Load characteristics are identified to determine special handling
transfer or equipment requirements

1.2 Job hazards are identified and required action is taken to

minimise, control or eliminate identified hazards
1.3 Location of load in yard is confirmed and transfer method is

determined
1.4 Pathway for load transfer is established consistent with

workplace procedures, and obstacles and particular safety
precautions are noted
1.5 Working area is prepared in accordance with national standards,

safety codes and site operating procedures
1.6 Personal protective equipment and other safety equipment is

assembled
1.7 Safe working load (SWL) or working load limit (WLL) is

calculated using appropriate formulae for type of lifting
equipment
1.8 Lifting equipment is inspected, before it is used, to identify any

manufacturing faults or damage, in accordance with
manufacturer specifications and workplace procedures
1.9 Unsafe equipment is isolated, marked as unsafe and reported to

2 Transfer cargo 2.1 Cargo is steadied and secured using appropriate devices
2.2 Load is lifted and shifted safely following national standards,

safety codes and site operating procedures
2.3 Load is transferred and set down, ensuring no injury to personnel

or damage to machinery or cargo
3 Complete transfer 3.1 Securing arrangements are released from load, ensuring no injury
to personnel or damage to machinery or cargo
3.2 Relevant documentation is completed including reporting of

damaged cargo in accordance with workplace reporting
requirements
3.3 Equipment is returned to store and work area is returned to

normal working condition

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3008A Transfer cargo.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3008 Transfer cargo Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3008 Transfer cargo
include:
hazards
 conducting checks on equipment used when transferring cargo and freight in terms of
service schedule and operating procedures
environments
 monitoring performance of load transfer equipment
procedures
 prioritising work
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information and signs
 receiving, acknowledging and sending messages using appropriate communications
equipment
Knowledge Evidence

 Australian and International Standards, codes and regulations relevant to transferring

cargo/freight including the current Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code
 high risk licencing lifting equipment requirements
 lifting equipment manufacturer specifications
transferring cargo/freight
 problems that may occur when transferring cargo/freight and appropriate action that can
 relevant load handling and safety codes of practice and guidelines
 requirements for safe working load (SWL) and working load limit (WLL) of load shifting
equipment
 types of equipment used to transfer loads in terminals/wharves, their applications and
procedures and precautions for their use
 workplace procedures and policies for transferring cargo and freight.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, ADG Code,
national Load Restraint Guide (LRG), codes of practice and operation manuals
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIA3010 Coordinate goods to bond premises Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to coordinate goods to bond premises in
accordance with regulatory and workplace requirements, as part of work activities in the
It includes identifying and listing goods for bonding, arranging the transfer of goods to a bond
store, and preparing and issuing bond lists.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify and list 1.1 Goods are identified for bonding when not cleared for release
cargo that requires by Australian customs or quarantine
bonded movement
1.2 Types of cargo for underbond movements are identified

1.3 Appropriate facilities are identified for storage of uncleared

cargo
1.4 Facility licencing requirements are identified for storage of

bonded cargo in accordance with regulatory requirements and
2 Arrange transfer of 2.1 Arrangements for the transfer of goods to bond store are made
goods to bond store in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace
procedures
2.2 Carrier and/or bond facility is notified of storage or yard

location, marks and quantity, and is provided with relevant
documentation in accordance with regulatory requirements
3 Prepare and issue 3.1 Bonded movements are prepared in accordance with
bonded movement workplace requirements and relevant Australian government
regulations
3.2 Bonded movements, endorsed with the relevant information,

is issued to carrier and/or bond facility in accordance with

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3010A Coordinate goods to bond premises.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3010 Coordinate goods to bond premises Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3010 Coordinate goods to

bond premises
include:
signs
 selecting and using relevant communications, computing and office equipment
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to coordinating goods to bond
premises
coordinating goods to bond premises
 workplace procedures and policies for coordinating goods to bond premises.

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3010 Coordinate goods to bond premises Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
assessment.
assessment.
 Resources for assessment include:
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3015 Complete receival/despatch documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to complete receival/despatch
documentation in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements as part of
work activities within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes analysing orders to identify work requirements to fill order, following workplace
order documentation processes, and finalising documentation in accordance with workplace
procedures and any relevant regulatory requirements.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Analyse order to 1.1 Order request documentation is interpreted

identify work
requirements to fill 1.2 Product/s in order are noted and workplace location/s are
order identified
1.3 Workplace and product knowledge are used to organise

documentation
1.4 Required schedules for order movement are identified and

noted as required
1.5 Special aspects of order such as dangerous/hazardous goods

or temperature controlled goods are identified and
information on required documentation procedures and
relevant regulatory requirements is identified, accessed and
interpreted
2 Follow workplace 2.1 Workplace procedures for order documentation are identified
order documentation
processes 2.2 Workplace documentation is completed in accordance with
workplace procedures and relevant regulatory requirements
3 Finalise 3.1 Order is checked against schedule and order form

documentation
3.2 Workplace records are completed, and labels and appropriate
documentation are attached in accordance with workplace
procedures and relevant regulatory requirements
3.3 Special transportation requirements are identified and

conveyed to appropriate personnel
3.4 Required documentation for dangerous goods and hazardous

materials is completed in accordance with relevant
regulations and current Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG)
Code, as required

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3015A Complete receival/despatch
documentation.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3015 Complete receival/despatch documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3015 Complete

receival/despatch documentation
include:
 completing receival and despatch documentation
 identifying containers and goods coding, Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code
markings and emergency information panels
 selecting and using relevant computer, communications and office equipment
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and International Standards, codes and regulations relevant to completing

receival/despatch documentation, including current ADG Code and relevant bond,
quarantine or other legislative requirements
 documentation requirements for receiving and despatching goods
for receiving and despatching goods
 problems that may occur when completing receival and despatch documentation and

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3015 Complete receival/despatch documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 specifications and standards for checking and inspecting received and despatched goods
 workplace procedures and policies for completing receival/despatch documentation.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to organise stock control Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to organise stock control
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to use inventory systems to organise
stock control in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements, as part of
work activities in the transport and logistics industry.
It includes identifying inventory and stock control systems in use in the workplace, using
re-order procedures to maintain stock levels, organising cyclical stock counts and reporting
discrepancies or variances.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify inventory 1.1 Workplace inventory and stock control equipment, software
and stock control and systems are identified
systems in use in the
1.2 Reasons for common database approach to inventory records

workplace and documentation in the warehouse are explained
1.3 Procedures for identifying and reporting discrepancies or

variances are identified
2 Use re-order 2.1 Stock level maintenance checking is conducted

procedures to
maintain stock levels 2.2 Stock is re-ordered to meet stock level maintenance
requirements in accordance with workplace policies and
procedures
2.3 Data is accurately entered and extracted from the

inventory/records system using appropriate workplace
procedures
3 Organise cyclical 3.1 Process for cyclical stock count is planned and work is
stock counts and allocated to team members
report discrepancies
or variances 3.2 Clear directions on tasks to be performed are given
3.3 Stocktake activities are conducted in accordance with

3.4 Types and causes of record discrepancies are identified
3.5 Procedures for noting and correcting minor discrepancies are

used
3.6 Major discrepancies are reported in accordance with

4 Produce reports on 4.1 Types of reports to be produced from inventory records

record keeping and systems are identified
inventory functions
4.2 Reports are produced in accordance with workplace
procedures and relevant regulatory requirements

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3016A Use inventory systems to organise stock
control.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to organise stock controlDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3016 Use inventory systems to

organise stock control
include:
environments
procedures
signs

Knowledge Evidence
 applications of different types of inventory systems and stock management approaches

 Australian codes and regulations relevant for organising stock control
 computer records and documentation requirements for stock control, including forms,
checklists and inventory reports
 operational inventory systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for
controlling stock
 principles of operation and functions of inventory systems
 workplace procedures and policies for using inventory systems to organise stock control
 workplace processes for records management and producing inventory reports.

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3017 Identify products and store to specifications Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to identify products and store to
specifications, in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements, as part of
work operations in the transport and logistics industry.
It includes identifying and categorising products, matching products to locations based on
specified criteria, and assisting individuals to solve stock identification and location problems.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Identify and categorise 1.1 Products are identified in terms of specified criteria in
products accordance with workplace procedures
1.2 Products are categorised in terms of specified criteria in

2 Match products to locations 2.1 Locations for products are determined based on
based on specified criteria specified criteria
2.2 Labels, inventory systems and other information

sources are used to assist in identifying products, and
handling and storage requirements
3 Assist individuals to solve 3.1 New stock items are identified and particular product
stock identification and information is brought to the attention of relevant
location problems personnel
3.2 Stock queries are predicted and team members are

assisted to locate and assimilate information relevant to
these products
3.3 Personnel are assisted with routine and non-routine

stock enquiries and actions are taken to update product
information for relevant personnel
3.4 Personnel are encouraged to maintain and build product

knowledge by accessing product information and
applying problem solving and information analysis
skills
4 Identify appropriate 4.1 Resources used to transfer different products through

transfer and handling the storage zones are identified and evaluated
requirements
4.2 Work in receival and despatch areas is supported by
identifying and reporting variances
4.3 Stock re-ordering is informed by knowledge of product

source, frequency of pick destination or seasonality of
products and potential for supply problems
4.4 Relevant documentation is completed in accordance

5 Contribute to continuous 5.1 Knowledge of customer requirements is used to

improvement determine work design
5.2 Potential problems are predicted and notified to

5.3 Opportunities for improvements to own work methods

are identified and notified to appropriate personnel

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3017A Identify products and store to
specifications.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3017 Identify products and store to specifications Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3017 Identify products and

store to specifications
include:
 accessing, reading and interpreting relevant product information, policies and regulatory
requirements
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in products and services in accordance with
 using information on products/stock to determine, plan and organise processes used for
receival, storage, goods movement, despatch, stock levels and re-ordering processes

Knowledge Evidence
 codes of practice and regulations relevant to workplace activities

 documentation requirements including reports and records concerning damaged or
contaminated goods
 information on various categories or groups of products including their key characteristics
and hazards, and any special handling, stacking and storage requirements
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems
 product sources, destinations and potential problems
 re-ordering procedures and just-in-time planning principles
 requirements for workplace documentation, inventory systems and records
 sources of product information
 strategies to seek out sources of product knowledge and to use this information to inform
work
 types of equipment and storage areas appropriate for different types of goods including
perishable, fragile and/or dangerous/hazardous goods
 workplace procedures and policies relevant to the application of product knowledge to the
organisation of workplace operations.

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3018 Organise despatch operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to organise despatch operations in
accordance with codes/regulations and workplace requirements in the transport and logistics
industry.
It includes planning and organising despatch operations, organising the storage and despatch
of stock, and completing all required documentation and records.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Plan and organise 1.1 Knowledge of product characteristics and workplace procedures
despatch operations are applied to stock analysis
1.2 Resources including manual handling equipment, employee

competencies, storage areas and goods management equipment

are identified to match product characteristics
1.3 Deadlines are scheduled to meet order requirements
1.4 Work processes are planned to meet deadlines
2 Organise the 2.1 Employees, equipment and storage areas are allocated and
storage and supervised
despatch of stock
2.2 Individuals are informed of work requirements and deadlines
2.3 Work processes are monitored to ensure that human resources

and equipment are maintained at productive levels in
accordance with workplace procedures and work health and
safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS)
requirements
2.4 Stock discrepancies are noted and reported in accordance with

company procedures
3 Complete 3.1 Required despatch documentation and records are confirmed

documentation
3.2 Required despatch documentation and records are completed
clearly and proofread
3.3 Required despatch documentation and records are processed in


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3018A Organise despatch operations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3018 Organise despatch operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3018 Organise despatch

operations
include:
Goods (ADG) Code and International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code
markings
environments
procedures
signs
 selecting and using relevant equipment and communications technology
WHS/OHS standards.

Knowledge Evidence
 documentation and record requirements for despatch operations

 equipment used when organising despatch operations, and the precautions and procedures
that should be followed in its use
 problems that may occur and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these
problems
 regulations relevant for organising despatch operations, including the ADG Code and
relevant bond, quarantine or other legislative requirements
 workplace procedures and policies for organising despatch operations.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIA3019 Organise receival operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to organise receival operations in
accordance with regulations, codes of practice and workplace requirements in the transport
and logistics industry.
It includes planning and organising receival operations, storing received stock and completing
all required documentation and records.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Plan and organise 1.1 Knowledge of product characteristics and workplace procedures
receival operations are applied to stock analysis

competencies, storage areas and goods management equipment

are identified to match product characteristics
1.3 Deadlines are scheduled to enable receival of stock in storage

zones
1.4 Work processes are planned to meet specified deadlines
2 Organise the 2.1 Employees, equipment and storage areas are allocated and
storage of stock supervised
2.2 Individuals are informed of work requirements and deadlines
2.3 Work processes are monitored to ensure human resources, and

equipment are maintained at productive levels in accordance
with workplace procedures and work health and safety
2.4 Discrepancies in stocks are noted and reported in accordance

3 Complete 3.1 Documentation and records regarding receival operations are

documentation confirmed
3.2 Documentation and records are completed clearly and proofread
3.3 Documentation and records are filed/despatched in accordance

with workplace procedures and relevant regulatory requirements

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3019A Organise receival operations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3019 Organise receival operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3019 Organise receival

operations
include:
Goods (ADG) Code and International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code
markings
environments
procedures
 selecting and using relevant equipment and communications technology
WHS/OHS standards.
Knowledge Evidence
 documentation and record requirements for receival operations

 equipment used for organising receival operations, and the precautions and procedures
that should be followed in its use

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3019 Organise receival operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
organising receival operations

problems
 regulations relevant for organising receival operations, including the ADG Code and
relevant bond, quarantine or other legislative requirements
 workplace procedures and policies for organising receival operations.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3023 Coordinate stocktakes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to coordinate stocktakes in accordance
with relevant regulations and workplace requirements within the transport and logistics
industry.
It includes planning and coordinating stocktake activities, identifying stock discrepancies and
adjusting documentation.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Plan stocktake 1.1 Goods to be counted and appropriate inventory systems are
identified

1.2 Required resources including equipment, record keeping

systems and personnel are identified
1.3 Team members are instructed and assisted
1.4 Team members are allocated to particular tasks and zones

and given clear directions for work requirements
1.5 Stocktake sequence and operations are planned in a time

effective manner
2 Coordinate stocktake 2.1 Stocktaking and cyclical counts are coordinated in

accordance with workplace policies and procedures
2.2 Inventory data is interpreted
2.3 Inventory data is confirmed to match stock
2.4 Stock levels are accurately counted and documented
3 Identify stock 3.1 Discrepancies in type, number and quality of stock are
discrepancies accurately recorded and documented
3.2 Possible reasons for discrepancies are identified
3.3 Products stored in inappropriate storage locations are

relocated and stock records are adjusted in accordance with
4 Adjust documentation 4.1 Inventory data is reconciled to match warehouse stock in

accordance with regulations, workplace practices, policies
and procedures
4.2 Information is reconciled with audit requirements

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3023A Coordinate stocktakes.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3023 Coordinate stocktakes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3023 Coordinate stocktakes
include:
hazards
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in stock and equipment in accordance with standard
work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) standards.

Knowledge Evidence
 Australian codes and regulations relevant to coordinating stocktakes

 computer records and documentation requirements for coordinating stocktakes
 principles and functions of stocktakes
 problems that may occur when coordinating a stocktake and appropriate action that can be
taken
 site layout
 workplace procedures and policies for coordinating stocktakes
 workplace processes for records management and producing stocktake reports.

assessment.
assessment.
Links
036d851

TLIA3024 Organise warehouse records operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to organise warehouse records operations
in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements in the transport and
logistics industry.
It includes identifying record management databases, storage types and technologies, and
using record management systems to store and retrieve information.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Identify record management 1.1 Requirements for records operations are identified
databases, storage types and and defined
technologies
1.2 Types of record systems that might meet workplace
requirements are identified and reviewed

1.3 Advantages and disadvantages of identified systems

are evaluated and noted
1.4 Record management systems are selected in

1.5 Appropriate action is taken to establish the selected

record system in accordance with workplace
procedures and operational requirements
2 Store warehouse records 2.1 Warehouse records are collected and consolidated in
2.2 Records are stored manually and/or electronically as

required in accordance with system developer
2.3 Records are maintained in accordance with

3 Use record management 3.1 Responses to requests for information are processed
systems to retrieve promptly
information
3.2 Required records are accessed and retrieved in

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3024A Organise warehouse records operations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3024 Organise warehouse records operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3024 Organise warehouse

records operations
include:
environments
 reading, interpreting and following relevant instructions, procedures and label advice
organising warehouse management system.
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian codes and regulations relevant for organising warehouse records operations
 computer records and documentation requirements for organising warehouse records
operations
 operational records systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for
organising warehouse records
 principles of operation and functions of warehouse management systems
 problems that may occur when organising warehouse records operations and appropriate
action that can be taken
 requirements for accessibility, security and confidentiality of records
 site layout

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3024 Organise warehouse records operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 workplace procedures and policies for organising warehouse records operations.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3026 Monitor storage facilities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA3026 Monitor storage facilities
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to monitor storage facilities in
accordance with relevant regulations and workplace requirements in the transport and
logistics industry.
It includes determining site functions and operations, monitoring storage operations and
taking appropriate action in response to identified discrepancies, changes to storage
requirements or breaches in operational procedures.
Work is performed under general supervision.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Determine site 1.1 Layout of storage facilities, work flow and activities undertaken
functions and in each zone are identified
operations

are implemented
1.3 Type of storage facilities, their purpose and associated risk

factors are identified
1.4 Inventory lists are accessed through record management system
1.5 Storage separations and co-storage applications are identified
2 Monitor storage 2.1 Inventory data is confirmed to match goods/freight and

operations applicable storage requirements
2.2 Storage areas are supervised to ensure movement of personnel

and goods/freight are in accordance with workplace procedures
2.3 Storage facilities are checked to ensure appropriate operational

capacity
2.4 Integrity of goods/materials are monitored to ensure appropriate

quality is maintained
2.5 Discrepancies/changes to storage requirements and/or inventory

lists are noted and action is undertaken in accordance with
2.6 Appropriate action/s are initiated in response to breaches of

operational procedures or to an emergency/incident
2.7 Operational actions and investigative outcomes are documented


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3026A Monitor storage facilities.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3026 Monitor storage facilities Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3026 Monitor storage facilities
include:
hazards
 monitoring equipment performance
procedures
 reading, interpreting and following relevant instructions, procedures and signs
 using information on products and stock to determine, plan and organise processes used
for monitoring storage facilities.

Knowledge Evidence
 Australian codes and regulations, permit and licence requirements relevant to workplace
activities
 equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control mechanisms
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems
 information on various categories or groups of products including their key characteristics
and hazards, and the special handling, stacking and storage requirements for each
 problems that may occur and appropriate action that can be taken
 requirements for workplace documentation reports and records
 site layout
 types of storage areas and related equipment appropriate for different types of goods
including perishable, fragile and/or hazardous/dangerous goods
 workplace procedures and policies relevant to the monitoring of storage facilities.

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3038 Control and order stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to control and order stock for a
workplace store in accordance with relevant codes of practice, regulations and workplace
procedures.
It specifically covers maintaining stock levels and records, organising and administering
stocktakes, identifying stock losses, processing stock orders and following up orders.
self and others in achieving prescribed outcomes.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Maintain stock levels 1.1 Stock levels are monitored and maintained at levels
and records prescribed by workplace specifications
1.2 Stock security systems are monitored and adjusted as required

1.3 Stock re-order cycles are maintained, monitored and adjusted

as required
1.4 Colleagues are informed about their individual

responsibilities for recording stock
1.5 Stock storage and movement records are maintained in

1.6 Stock performance is monitored and fast/slow moving items

are identified and reported in accordance with workplace
procedures
2 Organise and 2.1 Stocktakes are organised at the appropriate time and
administer stocktakes responsibilities are allocated to staff
2.2 Accurate reports on stocktake data are produced within

designated timelines
3 Identify stock losses 3.1 Losses are accurately identified, recorded and assessed
against potential loss as forecast, on a regular basis
3.2 Identified losses are reported in accordance with workplace

procedures
3.3 Avoidable losses are identified, reasons are established, and

appropriate solutions are recommended and implemented to
prevent future avoidable losses
4 Process stock orders 4.1 Orders for stock are accurately processed in accordance with
4.2 Stock ordering and recording systems are accurately

maintained
4.3 Purchase and supply agreements are correctly used and

appropriate details are recorded
4.4 Negotiated purchase and supply agreements are recorded

accurately and filed for retrieval
5 Follow up orders 5.1 Delivery process is monitored to meet agreed deadlines
5.2 Appropriate liaison is undertaken with colleagues and

suppliers to ensure continuity of supply
5.3 Routine supply problems are followed up or referred to the

appropriate person in accordance with workplace policy

5.4 Stock is distributed in accordance with agreed allocations
6 Complete 6.1 Required records and documentation are confirmed

documentation
6.2 Required records and documentation are completed clearly
and proofread
6.3 Required records and documentation are processed in

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3038A Control and order stock.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3038 Control and order stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3038 Control and order stock
include:
 adapting to differences in stock and systems in accordance with standard operating
procedures
 monitoring stock levels
 selecting and using relevant communications and computing equipment.

Knowledge Evidence
 contacts and sources of information and documentation needed when controlling and
ordering stock
 customer service policies and procedures
 how to interpret workplace specifications and orders for supplies
 principles of stock control
problems
 procedures for ordering stock
 protocols and procedures for liaising with supplier representatives, drivers and colleagues
using appropriate technology
 relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements (for example dangerous goods
regulations, health and hygiene regulations)
 site layout
 stock control documentation and systems used in workplace stores
 stock security systems
 systems for completing relevant records and documentation.

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA3039 Receive and store stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to receive and store stock for a
workplace store in an enterprise/organisation in a transport, logistics, production, hospitality,
retail or other relevant industry sector, in compliance with relevant codes of practice,
regulations and workplace procedures.
Work must be carried out for receiving and storing stock in a workplace store. It specifically
covers taking delivery of stock, storing, rotating and maintaining stock received, and
completing documentation.
self and others in achieving the prescribed outcomes.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Take delivery of 1.1 Incoming stock is accurately checked against orders and
stock delivery documentation in accordance with workplace
procedures
1.2 Variations are accurately identified, recorded and

communicated to appropriate person
1.3 Items are inspected for damage, quality, use-by dates, breakages
and discrepancies, and records are made in accordance with
workplace policy
2 Store stock 2.1 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control measures
are implemented
2.2 Stock is promptly and safely transported to appropriate storage

area without damage
2.3 Stock is stored in appropriate location within area and in

accordance with workplace security procedures
2.4 Appropriate personal protective equipment is correctly used

during receival and storage operations
2.5 Stock levels are accurately recorded in accordance with

2.6 Stock is labelled in accordance with workplace procedures
3 Rotate and 3.1 Stock is rotated as required in accordance with workplace

maintain stock policy
3.2 Stock is moved using appropriate equipment in accordance with

work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety
(OHS) requirements, relevant regulations and workplace
procedures
3.3 Quality of stock is checked and reported
3.4 Appropriate action is taken where stock quality is identified as

outside specified standards
3.5 Stock is placed in storage or disposed of in accordance with

workplace policy

4 Complete 4.1 Required documentation procedures and processes are

4.2 Records and documentation are completed legibly and

proofread
4.3 Records and documentation are processed in accordance with

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3039A Receive and store stock.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3039 Receive and store stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3039 Receive and store stock
include:
procedures
 selecting and using relevant communications and computing equipment
Knowledge Evidence
 contacts and sources of information and documentation needed when receiving and
storing stock
 interpretation of workplace specifications and orders for supplies
 principles of stock control
 problems that may occur when receiving and storing stock and appropriate action that can
 procedures for operating electronic communications equipment
 protocols and procedures for liaising with supplier representatives, drivers and colleagues
using appropriate technology

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3039 Receive and store stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 purpose and procedures for using relevant personal protective equipment

 relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements (for example dangerous goods
regulations, health and hygiene regulations)
 safe lifting and handling procedures
 site layout
 stock control documentation and systems used in workplace stores
 stock security systems
 systems for completing relevant records and documentation.
assessment.
assessment.
Links
036d851

TLIA3055 Coordinate terminal/wharf equipment operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to coordinate terminal/wharf equipment
operations in accordance with workplace requirements.
It includes identifying, assessing and managing potential risks; monitoring work performance
and progress; monitoring the status of pending work; solving problems and making decisions;
completing all shift requirements; and preparing for the next shift.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Coordinate 1.1 Equipment, machinery and personnel are coordinated to

equipment, facilitate the safe and efficient loading and unloading of ship
machinery and and terminal yard, in accordance with operational plan
personnel
1.2 Liaison is maintained with supervisors to ensure availability of

adequate resources
2 Identify, assess and 2.1 Potential risks are identified and assessed, and appropriate
remove potential solutions are developed and applied in accordance with
risks workplace procedures and in consultation with supervisors
2.2 Potential risks to safe and efficient operations are removed

from work area or other arrangements are made to ensure
conditions for safe work
2.3 Supervisors are advised of potential risks or emergency

situations and liaison is maintained until risk has been removed
or emergency situation has been alleviated
3 Monitor work 3.1 Work performance and progress is monitored through an

performance and appropriate terminal management system to ensure work is
progress performed in accordance with established guidelines and
procedures, and that safe work practices are maintained
3.2 Methods and procedures of work are monitored and refined in

consultation with supervisors and operational personnel
3.3 Work performance rates are monitored through an appropriate

terminal management system and delays are minimised to
ensure work program objectives are met
3.4 Work practices are monitored to ensure compliance with

national standards and safety codes
3.5 Environmental conditions are monitored to ensure safe

working conditions are maintained
3.6 Operational delays, equipment or maintenance issues are

monitored and reported to supervisor in accordance with
workplace operational procedures and processes
4 Monitor status of 4.1 Status of pending work is monitored, in order of priority, in

pending work accordance with needs of ship and terminal/wharf
4.2 Issues that will impact on work performance and progress are
identified, and plans are amended or work flows are altered to
ensure efficiency is maintained throughout operation

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA3055A Coordinate terminal/wharf equipment
operations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3055 Coordinate terminal/wharf equipment operationsDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA3055 Coordinate

terminal/wharf equipment operations

hazards
 dealing with internal and external customers
Code/International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code markings, emergency
information panels
 maintaining container terminal tracking operations systems efficiently and effectively
environments
procedures
signs
 receiving, acknowledging and sending messages with appropriate communications
equipment
 selecting and using appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) conforming to
industry, work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) and
Australian standards
 working systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self or others or


Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international standards, codes and regulations relevant to operating

terminals/wharves including the ADG Code and the IMDG Code
organising and monitoring terminal/wharf operations
problems
 site layout of container or cargo terminal or wharf
 workplace procedures and policies for organising and monitoring terminal/wharf
operations.
assessment.
assessment.
situations that replicate workplace conditions including controlled or open environments,
exposed conditions and limited or restricted spaces.
 relevant materials, tools and equipment currently used in industry
 gloves


 safety glasses
 two-way radios.
Links
036d851

TLIA4005 Check and evaluate records and documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to check and evaluate records and
documentation in accordance with regulatory and workplace requirements, as part of work
activities within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes checking documentation, and analysing and evaluating records.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Check documentation 1.1 Documentation regulatory and workplace requirements are

confirmed
1.2 Documentation is checked to ensure compliance with

regulatory and workplace requirements

TLIA4005 Check and evaluate records and documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
1.2 Documentation is checked regularly and personnel

responsible for documentation are advised of deadlines
1.3 Appropriate systems are used to ensure maintenance of

records complies with regulatory and workplace requirements
2 Analyse and evaluate 2.1 Records are analysed to identify unexpected deviations from
records plans or possible future problems with plant and/or equipment
2.2 Advice is provided to appropriate personnel when problems

are identified
2.3 Security of records and documentation is maintained at all

times and access is granted to authorised personnel in
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4005A Check and evaluate records and
documentation.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4005 Check and evaluate records and documentation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4005 Check and evaluate

records and documentation
include:
 communicating effectively with others when checking and evaluating transport
documentation
and International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) markings, and emergency
information panels
 identifying, selecting and using relevant equipment, processes and procedures when
checking and evaluating documentation for local and/or international transport of
cargo and containers
environments
equipment
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems, faults or malfunctions, in accordance
with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
 working collaboratively with others when checking and evaluating transport
documentation.

Knowledge Evidence
 Australian and international standards, codes and regulations relevant to local and
international cargo/container transport documentation requirements, including the
ADG and IMDG Codes
checking and evaluating cargo/container transport documentation
 problems that may occur when checking and evaluating documentation, and
 site layout, loading/unloading plans and sequence sheets
 types of cargo, containers and transport modes and their documentation requirements
 workplace procedures and policies for checking and evaluating documentation for
local and/or international transport of cargo and containers.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA4006 Organise and monitor terminal/wharf operations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA4006 Organise and monitor terminal/wharf operations
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to organise and monitor terminal or
wharf operations in accordance with standards, regulations and workplace requirements, as
part of work activities in the stevedoring, transport, distribution and/or allied industries.
It includes organising equipment, machinery and personnel; managing potential risks;
monitoring work performance and progress; monitoring the status of pending work; solving
problems and making decisions; completing all shift requirements; and preparing for the next
shift.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Organise equipment, 1.1 Equipment, machinery and personnel are organised to

machinery and facilitate the safe and efficient loading and unloading of the
personnel ship
1.2 Liaison is maintained with supervisors to ensure availability

of adequate resources
2 Manage potential 2.1 Potential hazards are identified, risks are assessed and
risks appropriate controls are implemented in accordance with
2.2 Potential risks to safe and efficient operations are removed

from work area and/or other arrangements are made to ensure
conditions for safe work
2.3 Supervisors are advised of potential risks and liaison is

maintained until risks have been removed
3 Monitor work 3.1 Work performance and progress are monitored to ensure
performance and work is performed in accordance with established guidelines
progress and procedures, and that safe work practices are maintained
3.2 Work methods and procedures are monitored and refined in

consultation with supervisors and operational personnel
3.3 Work performance rates are monitored and delays are

minimised to ensure work program objectives are met
3.4 Work practices are monitored to ensure compliance with

national standards and safety codes
3.5 Environmental conditions are monitored to ensure safe

working conditions are maintained
4 Monitor status of 4.1 Pending work needs of the ship and the terminal or wharf are
pending work identified
4.2 Work priorities are determined
4.3 Status of pending work is monitored, in order of priority,

taking into account the needs of the ship and the terminal or
wharf

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4006A Organise and monitor terminal/wharf
operations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4006 Organise and monitor terminal/wharf operationsDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4006 Organise and monitor

terminal/wharf operations
include:
hazards
 completing documentation related to organising and monitoring terminal and wharf
operations
and International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) markings and emergency
information panels
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information and labels
 receiving, acknowledging and sending messages with appropriate communications
equipment
 selecting and using appropriate personal protective equipment conforming to industry
 working collaboratively with others when organising and monitoring terminal and
wharf operations

Knowledge Evidence

terminals or wharves including the ADG and IMDG Codes
organising and monitoring terminal or wharf operations
 problems that may occur when organising and monitoring terminal or wharf operations
and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 workplace procedures and policies for organising and monitoring terminal or wharf
operations.

assessment.
assessment.
situations that replicate workplace conditions including limited or restricted spaces, exposed
conditions and controlled or open environments.
 relevant and appropriate materials, tools and equipment currently used in industry
 personal protective equipment, including
 gloves
 safety glasses
 two-way radios

Links
036d851

TLIA4025 Regulate temperature controlled stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to regulate temperature controlled stock
in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures within the transport and
logistics industry.
It includes identifying goods requiring temperature control, monitoring temperature of goods,
and identifying and rectifying identified problems.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify goods requiring 1.1 Goods requiring temperature control are identified

temperature control 1.2 Temperature for short-term and long-term storage is

selected to match product type
1.3 Upper and lower limits for temperature control are

identified
1.4 Storage separations and co-storage applications are

identified for products
2 Monitor temperature 2.1 Appropriate methods for determining temperature of goods

are identified

2.3 Storage areas are monitored for temperatures within range

for product types
2.4 Products are monitored to ensure compliance with

temperature storage requirements
2.5 Short-term storage times are identified for transit goods
2.6 Documentation is completed in accordance with workplace

procedures
3 Identify and rectify 3.1 Implications of incorrect temperature are identified

problems
3.2 Damaged goods are identified and appropriate action is
taken in accordance with workplace procedures
3.3 Causes of out-of-temperature range are identified
3.4 Appropriate personnel are notified for problem

rectification
3.5 Goods handling workplace procedures for maintenance of

stock under temperature control are identified and
implemented

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4025A Regulate temperature controlled stock.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4025 Regulate temperature controlled stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4025 Regulate temperature

controlled stock
include:
 checking refrigeration equipment operation in terms of maintenance schedule and
 operating and adapting to differences in stock and equipment in accordance with
 selecting and using relevant equipment, processes and procedures
Knowledge Evidence
for regulating temperature controlled stock
 hazards when regulating and working with temperature controlled stock and appropriate
action to control the risks involved
 problems that can occur with temperature controlled stock and appropriate action that can
be taken
 procedures for pre-cooling and snap freezing
 relevant codes of practice, food safety standards and regulations for temperature

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4025 Regulate temperature controlled stock Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
controlled stock
 relevant work health safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) and
 special handling, stacking and storage requirements for temperature controlled stock
 workplace procedures and policies for regulating temperature controlled stock.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, food safety
standards, codes of practice and operation manuals
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA4028 Assess and monitor optimum stock levels Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to assess and monitor optimum stock
levels in accordance with workplace requirements and relevant regulations, as part of work
activities undertaken within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes assessing projected demand, assessing variables that impact on optimum stock
levels, and determining and monitoring optimum inventory levels.
Work is performed under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work. It requires the
exercise of discretion and judgement for self and others in planning and using resources,
services and processes to achieve required outcomes within organisational policy and
procedures.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Assess projected 1.1 Information/data from sales plan or stock movement is

demand analysed
1.2 Projected high and low volume periods are determined from
the analysis of sales plan and/or stock movement data
1.3 Seasonal nature of stock demand is determined from the

analysis of sales plan and/or stock movement data
1.4 Required inventory levels at different production and sales

cycle stages are determined from the analysis of sales plan
and/or stock movement data
2 Assess variables that 2.1 Stock manufacturing/supply and consignment delivery lead
impact on optimum times are determined
stock levels
2.2 Internal processing and distribution times are determined
2.3 Spoilage and obsolescence times are calculated as required
2.4 Maximum stock carrying capacity is assessed
2.5 Physical and human resources are assessed in relation to

projected required stock levels
2.6 Contingencies are developed for abnormal distribution

stoppages/slow-downs to supply chain
3 Determine optimum 3.1 Production and sales cycle stages are correlated to stock
inventory levels manufacturing supply and distribution lead times
3.2 Safety stock levels are calculated
3.3 Optimum inventory levels are identified
4 Monitor optimum 4.1 Inventory benchmarks are continually compared to current and
inventory levels known future sales turnover/production requirements
4.2 Adjustments to inventory levels are undertaken in accordance

with reassessed sales turnover/production requirements,
workplace procurement processes and within scope of
authority
4.3 Changes and/or requests for adjustments to inventory levels are

documented in accordance with workplace policies
4.4 Resources are assembled in accordance with identified

optimum inventory levels

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4028A Assess and monitor optimum stock levels.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4028 Assess and monitor optimum stock levels Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4028 Assess and monitor

optimum stock levels
include:
environments
 planning and organising resource availability including the competencies of individuals in
a team or group
 reading, interpreting and following relevant instructions, procedures and policies
 selecting and applying relevant technology, information systems and procedures
Knowledge Evidence
 Australian codes and regulations relevant to optimising stock levels

 computer records/documentation requirements when assessing and monitoring optimum
stock levels
 focus of operation of supply arrangements, resources, management and workplace
operating systems
 problems that may occur when assessing and monitoring optimum stock levels and

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4028 Assess and monitor optimum stock levels Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 purpose and use of key information required when optimising stock levels including
supply requirements, supplier information, enterprise contract procedures, sales plan and
distribution times
 workplace business policies and plans including procedures for maintaining
confidentiality
 workplace procedures and policies for assessing and monitoring optimum stock levels
 worksite layout and organisational structure.
assessment.
assessment.
Links
036d851

TLIA4031 Consolidate freight Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to consolidate freight in accordance with
relevant codes of practice and regulations, and to apply routine principles, procedures and
regulations to effectively and efficiently combine and consolidate freight prior to shipment.
It includes assessing the scope to consolidate freight, combining or consolidating multiple
shipments of products into higher volume shipments, and preparing related consignment
documentation.
It is performed under general supervision, with some accountability and responsibility for self
and others in achieving prescribed outcomes.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Assess scope to 1.1 Capacity and capability of different transport modes available
consolidate freight to the organisation are assessed against proposed task
1.2 Individual consignment loads are evaluated to identify

relevant information needed to combine or consolidate freight
1.3 Information is analysed to determine where opportunities for

freight consolidation exist
1.4 Regulatory packaging and labelling requirements for

consolidated cargo are followed
1.5 Procedures for loading cargo are planned in accordance with

established industry practice and Australian Dangerous Goods
(ADG) Code
1.6 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control

1.7 Volumes and dimensions of proposed consolidation are

calculated
1.8 Proposed consolidation is matched against operational

capacity and capability of carrier
2 Prepare consignment 2.1 Consignment documentation required for consolidated cargo

documentation is confirmed
2.2 Labelling and marking requirements of cargo are documented

in accordance with domestic and international regulations,
ADG Code and workplace requirements
2.3 Consignment documentation is completed and filed/stored in

accordance with workplace procedures including dangerous
goods declaration as required
2.4 Freight is consolidated taking into account segregation

requirements for dangerous goods as required

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4031A Consolidate freight.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4031 Consolidate freight Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4031 Consolidate freight
include:
hazards
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in freight and equipment in accordance with
 operating electronic communications equipment to required protocol
signs
 selecting and using required computer and communications equipment
Knowledge Evidence
the requirements of the elements and performance criteria, include knowledge of:

 procedures for planning freight/cargo loading such as:
 using available space efficiently
 packing goods for ease of inspection and to meet delivery and customer requirements

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4031 Consolidate freight Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 securing goods and ensuring no damage to contents

 ensuring weight and volume of consolidated cargo conforms to specifications
 procedures for calculating volumes and dimensions
 procedures for completing consignment documentation
 procedures for identifying and evaluating information needed to facilitate freight
consolidation
 relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international
freight regulations
environmental procedures and regulations
 sources of information and documentation for consolidating freight.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA4032 Organise transport of freight or goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to organise the transport of freight or
goods in compliance with relevant codes of practice and regulations, and to apply routine
principles and procedures to organise the transport of freight or goods prior to shipment.
It includes planning transport operations, organising freight transport, completing the required
documentation and finalising organisational processes.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Plan transport 1.1 Knowledge of product to be freighted and workplace procedures

operations are applied to the transportation analysis process
1.2 Domestic and international regulations, codes and procedures for

transporting freight are identified
are implemented

competencies, storage areas, goods management equipment and
transportation equipment are identified to match the task
1.5 Work processes are planned to meet agreed timelines
1.6 Types of transportation required for the freight or goods is

identified to match customer requirements, freight type and
delivery time
1.7 Multiple transport modes are identified as required
1.8 Goods transfer methods between modes of transport are selected

as required
2 Organise freight 2.1 Employees, equipment and temporary storage areas (as required)
transport are allocated and supervised
2.2 Freight is secured ensuring no damage to contents
2.3 Handling methods suitable to the goods and transport method are
selected
2.4 Individuals are informed of work requirements and timelines
2.5 Work processes are monitored to ensure human resources and

equipment are maintained at productive levels in accordance with
workplace and work health and safety (WHS)/occupational
health and safety (OHS) requirements
2.6 Discrepancies in freight are noted and appropriate action is

undertaken in accordance with workplace procedures
3 Complete 3.1 Monitoring processes to track freight movement are implemented

organisational
processes 3.2 Reporting requirements are communicated to appropriate
personnel
3.3 Workplace documents and records are checked for completion

and are filed/stored in accordance with workplace procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4032A Organise transport of freight or goods.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4032 Organise transport of freight or goods Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4032 Organise transport of

freight or goods
include:
hazards
 establishing effective working relationships with colleagues and clients
environments
procedures
 planning own work, prioritising work activities, predicting consequences and identifying
improvements
 reading, interpreting and following relevant instructions, procedures and signs
 selecting and using required communications equipment, computers and systems

Knowledge Evidence
 procedures for assessing storage and transport requirements and options
 procedures for calculating/estimating weight, volumes and dimensions
 procedures for coordinating the transfer and storage of goods including multi-modal
transport
 procedures for identifying and evaluating information needed to facilitate the transport of
freight
 procedures for selecting transport/storage equipment and systems
 procedures for organising required permits and for completing transport documentation
 relevant legislative requirements and codes of practice
 sources of information and documentation for organising the transport of freight and
goods.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIA4033 Organise international transport of freight Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to organise the international transport of
freight in accordance with relevant codes of practice and regulations.
It includes confirming customer requirements, organising freight arrangements and
communicating with shipping agents and authorities.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Confirm customer 1.1 Customer requirements for moving cargo in terms of the
requirements nature of goods, the countries of origin and destination, the
timescales for collection and delivery and the estimated
budget for the transaction are confirmed
1.2 Customer priorities for the shipment are confirmed
1.3 Decisions on possible routes, taking into account known

variables, are undertaken
2 Organise freight 2.1 International regulations and codes of practice for

arrangements transporting freight are confirmed
2.2 Work processes are planned to meet agreed timelines
2.3 Transport modes (including multi-modal options) are

matched to customer requirements, freight type and delivery
times
2.4 Availability of selected carrier/s is checked including modes

of transport, scheduled departure dates and times, transfer
times and costs for each shipment stage
2.5 Arrangements are made to consolidate freight, where

appropriate
2.6 Freight carrier booking/s are confirmed
2.7 Transport of freight to selected international carrier is

organised
3 Communicate with 3.1 Freight documentation is checked for accuracy and

shipping agents and forwarded as appropriate to shipping agents and authorities
authorities
3.2 Confirmation of despatch of freight from international carrier
is obtained
3.3 Arrival of cargo at port of entry is confirmed
3.4 Acceptance of freight documentation is confirmed
3.5 Payments are authorised

3.6 Cargo is on-forwarded from point of entry, as required
3.7 Customer is advised that freight has been forwarded to point

of destination
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4033A Organise international transport of freight.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4033 Organise international transport of freight Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4033 Organise international

transport of freight
include:
environments
procedures
 using relevant communications, computer equipment and systems

Knowledge Evidence
 contacts and sources of information/documentation needed for organising international

transport of freight
 procedures for:
 interpreting client requirements
 reviewing transport options and availability of carriers
 identifying and evaluating information needed to organise the international transport of
freight
 calculating volumes and dimensions
 completing consignment documentation
 liaising with Australian and international contacts using appropriate technology
 relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international
freight regulations
environmental procedures and regulations.

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA4040 Implement and monitor stevedoring regulations Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA4040 Implement and monitor stevedoring regulations
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to implement and monitor stevedoring
regulations in accordance with relevant Australian and international stevedoring regulations,
codes of practice and workplace requirements, as part of work activities in the stevedoring
and/or allied industries.
It includes accessing appropriate information on relevant regulations and codes, interpreting
regulations and codes relevant to workplace activities, implementing and monitoring
compliance with identified regulations and codes, and completing all required documentation
in accordance with regulatory and workplace requirements.
Work is performed under limited supervision generally within a team environment.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Access information on 1.1 Australian and international regulations and codes of

relevant regulations and practice relevant to workplace stevedoring operations are
codes identified in accordance with workplace procedures and in
consultation with relevant personnel
1.2 Information on identified regulatory and/or code

requirements relevant to workplace functions and limits of
responsibility are accessed in accordance with workplace
procedures
2 Interpret relevant 2.1 Information on identified regulatory and/or code

regulations and codes requirements relevant to workplace functions and limits of
responsibility is examined and interpreted in terms of its
impact and implications for workplace activities
2.2 Compliance requirements are clarified and obligations

under regulations falling within limits of responsibility and
duty of care of various staff/team members are confirmed
2.3 Staff/team members/team leaders/supervisors are made

aware of the identified regulatory/code requirements as
they relate to workplace roles and responsibilities
3 Implement and monitor 3.1 Regulatory requirements relevant to workplace activities

compliance with are implemented in accordance with relevant
regulations and codes regulations/codes and workplace procedures
3.2 Appropriate information, training and/or instruction are

organised to ensure personnel are aware of compliance
requirements
3.3 Procedures for monitoring compliance with operations in

terms of regulatory requirements and workplace policies
and procedures are followed
3.4 Problems that may lead to non-compliance are promptly

and fully identified
3.5 Timely remedial action is taken to ensure continuity in

workplace compliance with relevant regulations

3.6 Failure to comply with regulatory requirements and

workplace policy is identified and action is taken in
accordance with workplace policies and procedures
4 Complete required 4.1 Advice/reports on compliance issues are provided to

documentation relevant personnel and authorities in accordance with
workplace procedures and relevant regulatory requirements
4.2 Documentation, records, reports and other information

required within regulatory requirements are completed,
proofread and processed in accordance with the regulations
4.3 Documentation is kept secure in accordance with

workplace procedures and policy
4.4 Workplace computer backup procedures are followed
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4040A Implement and monitor stevedoring
regulations.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4040 Implement and monitor stevedoring regulationsDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4040 Implement and monitor

stevedoring regulations
include:
 communicating and negotiating effectively with others
 coordinating compliance activities in the workplace
 dealing with internal or external customers in large, medium or small workplaces
 following processes for monitoring compliance with regulatory requirements
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant regulatory requirements, instructions, procedures and
labels
 reporting and/or rectifying identified breaches of stevedoring regulations promptly, in
 reporting on compliance related issues
 resolving everyday conflict situations
 selecting and using appropriate personal protective equipment conforming to industry
 working collaboratively with others when implementing and monitoring stevedoring
regulations

Knowledge Evidence
stevedoring operations
 problems that may occur when implementing and monitoring compliance with
stevedoring regulatory requirements, and appropriate action that can be taken to
resolve these problems
 relevant Australian and international regulations and codes of practice
 relevant customs, bond, quarantine and other legislative requirements including
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Codes and Marine Orders
 roles and responsibilities of various workplace personnel in terms of workplace
activities and regulatory requirements
 workplace/standard operating procedures and policies for implementing and
monitoring compliance with stevedoring regulatory requirements.

assessment.
assessment.
situations that replicate workplace conditions where implementing and monitoring
stevedoring regulation can be demonstrated.
 relevant and appropriate materials, tools and equipment
 personal protective equipment, including
 gloves
 safety glasses
 two-way radios

Links
036d851

TLIA4062 Implement safety stock systems Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA4062 Implement safety stock systems
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to implement safety stock systems in
various contexts in the transport and logistics industry. It has particular application in a
storage facility such as a warehouse.
It includes planning, preparing and maintaining safety stock levels as well as reviewing the
safety stock system.
The unit generally applies to those who lead individuals or teams.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Plan and prepare 1.1 Determined optimum safety stock levels are maintained to
safety stock levels ensure constant productivity
1.2 Purchase, receipt, storage and issue of stock is undertaken as

required

1.3 Safety stock is valued using the nominated valuation method, as

required
are implemented
1.5 Safety stock rotation procedures are implemented
2 Maintain safety 2.1 Records are checked against stock and continuously adjusted
stock levels and updated as required
2.2 Safety stock levels are maintained in accordance with

organisational policy and procedures, and safety stock plan
2.3 Records are stored for future access
2.4 Safety stock levels are reconciled with paperwork and

discrepancies are rectified or reported to nominated
person/section within designated timelines
3 Review safety stock 3.1 Safety stock records are reviewed for discrepancies regarding
system target outcomes
3.2 Improvements of safety stock system reviewed with all

variables affecting discrepancies, are identified
3.3 Required improvements are reported in accordance with


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4062A Implement safety stock systems.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4062 Implement safety stock systems Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4062 Implement safety stock

systems
include:
hazards
environments
signs.

Knowledge Evidence
 definitions of commonly used terminology such as lead time, lead time demand, forecast,
demand history, order cycle
 principles, purpose and location of controls, monitoring devices and systems
 procedures for identifying problems with the safety stock system in use
 relevant sections of national and state/territory regulatory requirements and codes of
practice
 requirements for completing relevant documentation including commonly used methods
to estimate required safety stock levels
 steps involved in planning work activities
 typical problems that can occur and related action that should be taken.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links


036d851

TLIA4063 Coordinate stevedoring clerical functions Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA4063 Coordinate stevedoring clerical functions
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to coordinate stevedoring clerical
functions in accordance with relevant standards, regulations and workplace requirements, as
part of work activities in the stevedoring, transport, distribution and/or allied industries.
It includes monitoring clerical functions; solving operational problems; arranging
container/cargo inspection/survey; preparing for the next shift, and completing and handing
over the shift.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Monitor clerical 1.1 Duties and the relationship of the duties to organisational
functions procedures are outlined and explained in accordance with
1.2 Clerical work is monitored to ensure it meets workplace

requirements
2 Solve operational 2.1 Potential and actual problem/s are identified and or
problems anticipated
2.2 Information and evidence surrounding the problem is

collected and analysed
2.3 Options are identified, evaluated and optimal solution is

selected
2.4 Chosen solution is implemented in accordance with

2.5 Effectiveness of the solution is evaluated against

workplace requirements to resolve the problem
3 Arrange container/cargo 3.1 Arrangements are made to allow access to identified

inspection/survey containers/cargo by authorised personnel
3.2 Records of allowed access are completed in accordance

4 Prepare for next shift 4.1 Personnel requirements for next shift are determined to
ensure safe and efficient operations
4.2 Container/cargo movements in the yard are checked and

recorded to ensure incoming shift has up-to-date
information on work status and container/cargo location

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA4063A Coordinate stevedoring clerical functions.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA4063 Coordinate stevedoring clerical functions Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA4063 Coordinate stevedoring

clerical functions
include:
 communicating effectively with others when coordinating clerical functions at a
container or cargo terminal or wharf
 dealing with internal and external customers in small, medium or large workplaces
environments
 operating electronic communications equipment to required protocol when
coordinating clerical functions at a container or cargo terminal or wharf
 working collaboratively with others when coordinating clerical functions at a container
or cargo terminal or wharf
Knowledge Evidence


terminals or wharves including the Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) and
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)Codes
systems relevant to coordinating clerical functions at a container or cargo terminal or
wharf
 problems that may occur when coordinating clerical functions at a container or cargo
terminal or wharf and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 types of cargo including goods with specialist requirements, temperature controlled
goods and dangerous goods
 workplace procedures and policies for coordinating clerical functions at a container or
cargo terminal or wharf.

assessment.
assessment.
situations that replicate workplace conditions including limited or restricted spaces, exposed
conditions and controlled or open environments.

Links
036d851

TLIA5029 Plan and manage storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIA5029 Plan and manage storage of dangerous goods and

hazardous substances
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and manage the storage of
dangerous goods and hazardous substances in accordance with all relevant regulatory
requirements, standards, and workplace procedures including the current Australian
Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code.
It includes defining the objectives of required handling and storage operations, specifying
equipment and system performance requirements, evaluating and selecting bulk handling and
storage resources and completing all required documentation.
Work is carried out under general guidance. It requires discretion and judgement for self and
others in planning and using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes.
The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and
allocation, who lead individuals or teams.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Define objectives of 1.1 Requirements for bulk handling and storage activities are
required handling and identified in accordance with workplace requirements
storage operation
1.2 Current best practice and future trends for handling and
storage equipment are assessed and compared to present
operations
1.3 Consideration of workplace goals and present capabilities

and constraints is undertaken when selecting bulk
handling and storage resources
2 Specify equipment and 2.1 Bulk handling and storage equipment and system
system performance requirements are documented
requirements
2.2 Performance measures for equipment and system
operations are developed and documented
2.3 Consultations are conducted with relevant employees and

management to verify documented requirements
3 Evaluate and select bulk 3.1 Range of bulk handling and storage equipment and
handling and storage facilities that meet specifications are researched for costs
resources and benefits as well as potential adaptability for new
business opportunities
3.2 Rating system is instigated to facilitate comparisons of

cost/benefit and other qualitative properties of bulk
handling and storage equipment and systems
3.3 Analysis of current employee competency in relation to

required competency is undertaken and documented
3.4 Equipment is selected based on comparisons of

performance specifications including cost, output, set-up
requirements, maintenance and retraining
4 Complete documentation 4.1 Workplace documentation is completed as required
4.2 Handling and storage requirements are documented and

communicated to relevant personnel
4.3 Reports are compiled and forwarded to appropriate

personnel

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA5029A Plan and manage storage of dangerous
goods and hazardous substances.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA5029 Plan and manage storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances Date this document was
Assessment Requirements for TLIA5029 Plan and manage

storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when planning and managing the
storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
 completing documentation as required for the storage of dangerous goods and
 controlling risks
 determining required permits/licences
 estimating weight and volume of goods to be stored and any special requirements
 identifying container markings and HAZCHEM codes
 identifying potential hazards and planning work to minimise risks when storing
dangerous goods and hazardous substances
 planning and assessing options for the safe and efficient storage of dangerous goods
and hazardous substances to regulatory requirements, as a minimum
 prioritising work and coordinating self and others in relation to activities
 providing leadership to others when planning and managing the storage of dangerous
goods and hazardous substances
 reading, interpreting and following procedures, technical data, drawings, instructions
and manuals relevant to planning and managing the storage of dangerous goods and
 recognising hazards and applying precautions and required action to minimise, control
or eliminate hazards that may exist during work activities
 selecting and applying appropriate technology, information systems and procedures
when planning and managing the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous
substances
 undertaking a hazard analysis and risk assessment.

Knowledge Evidence
 application of all relevant Australian and International Standards

 application of current competencies within functional activity
 Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for handling and
transporting dangerous goods and hazardous substances
 coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share knowledge and
skills
 equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control
mechanisms
 hierarchy of risks and hazards related to the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous
substances, and ways of controlling the risks involved
 operational procedures for safe transfer and storage of dangerous goods and hazardous
substances
 operational work systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
 problems that may occur when planning and managing the storage of dangerous goods
and hazardous substances, and action that can be taken to resolve or report these
problems
 relevant permit and licence requirements
 relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and
international regulations relevant to handling and storage
 relevant workplace documentation procedures
 resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the team and group
 workplace procedures for planning and managing the storage of dangerous goods and
hazardous substances.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA5035 Manage international freight transfer Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and manage international freight
transfer, according to relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including
the Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) and International Dangerous Goods (IDG) codes.
It includes analysing freight transfer requirements, planning and establishing processes,
monitoring and coordinating systems and processes for international freight transfer and
completing all required documentation.
Work is carried out under general guidance. It requires discretion and judgement for self and
others in planning and using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes.
The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and
allocation, who lead individuals or teams.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Analyse freight 1.1 Australian and international codes and regulations, and
transfer workplace policies for international freight transfer are
requirements identified
1.2 Information on current and potential customers, and their

international freight requirements is obtained and analysed in
1.3 Special characteristics and customer requirements for the

types of freight to be transferred are identified, interpreted
and considered in accordance with workplace procedures
1.4 Appropriate options for international freight transfer are

evaluated in terms of identified special requirements,
customer need and relevant regulatory requirements,
including Australian and international codes for the transfer
of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
1.5 Selected options for freight transfer arrangements are

documented in accordance with workplace policy and related
regulations
2 Plan systems and 2.1 Workplace policies and mission statement are interpreted to
processes for define the process requirements for international freight
international freight transfer
transfer
2.2 Appropriate systems are evaluated and
established/coordinated to facilitate the organisation of
international freight transfer, including suitable risk analysis
2.3 Human resources needed to organise international freight

transfer are identified and documented
2.4 Action is initiated to ensure staff are assigned, recruited

and/or trained in accordance with identified human resource
requirements
2.5 Office, computer and communications equipment is

identified and action is initiated for appropriate assignment
or procurements
2.6 Quality standards and procedures for proposed international

freight transfer processes are documented/updated in

3 Monitor and 3.1 International freight forwarding operations are monitored

coordinate systems against identified quality standards and for compliance with
and processes for Australian and international regulatory requirements
international freight
transfer 3.2 Non-compliance with quality standards or regulatory
requirements is identified and appropriate action is initiated
to report and rectify identified problems
3.3 Customer satisfaction with international freight transfer

services is monitored using appropriate methods
3.4 Customer concerns and suggestions for service

improvements are acted upon in accordance with workplace
procedures
3.5 Reports and other required documentation related to

international freight transfer operations are completed and
referred to relevant personnel in accordance with workplace
procedures
3.6 Any changes in Australian and international regulations and

codes of practice relevant to international freight transfer are
monitored, identified and appropriate action is initiated to
ensure ongoing compliance of workplace processes and
systems

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA5035A Manage international freight transfer.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA5035 Manage international freight transfer Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA5035 Manage international

freight transfer
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when managing international
freight transfer operations
 completing documentation related to managing international freight transfer operations
 maintaining workplace records and documentation when managing international
freight transfer operations
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in freight and systems in accordance with
 planning and organising systems and activities when managing international freight
transfer operations
 providing leadership to others when managing international freight transfer operations
 reading and interpreting instructions, procedures, information and labels relevant to
managing international freight transfer operations
when managing international freight transfer operations

Knowledge Evidence
 application of relevant Australian Standards and associated certification requirements
 contacts and sources of information/documentation needed when managing
international freight transfer systems
 operational requirements for the safe transfer and storage of dangerous goods and
 operational work systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
 procedures for establishing and monitoring suitable international freight transfer
operations
 procedures for liaising with relevant Australian and international contacts using
appropriate technology
 procedures for reviewing options for international freight transfer systems
 procedures for identifying and evaluating information needed to manage the
international transfer of freight
 procedures for identifying and interpreting requirements of current and potential
clients
 quality and customer service policies and procedures
 relevant Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative
requirements including local and international freight regulations
 relevant permit and licence requirements
 relevant workplace documentation procedures applicable to the international transfer
of freight.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA5058 Manage facility and inventory requirements Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
his unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manage a facility and its inventory
requirements, in various contexts within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes identifying space, safety and security requirements; developing a documentation
system; designing storage zones and evaluating facility utilisation.
This unit generally applies to those who provide leadership of others individually or in teams.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify space 1.1 Organisational medium-term and long-term storage needs are
requirements assessed to facilitate planning, in accordance with the
enterprise business plan and legislative requirements
1.2 Product type, picking frequencies, value, fragility, weight,

handling characteristics, quantity and holding periods are

assessed to consider type and amount of storage
1.3 Facility is assessed to determine stock holding and handling

requirements for each inventory item
1.4 Volume requirements are calculated to ensure ongoing stock

holding needs are met
1.5 Total space requirement is calculated and used to formulate a

space utilisation plan
2 Identify safety and 2.1 Assessment is made of risks to ensure maximum safety and
security requirements security for personnel, stock and facilities
2.2 Storage handling security and incident/emergency procedures

for each class or type of product are identified and
documented
2.3 Fire prevention and firefighting systems are identified in

accordance with building code regulations and storage
material requirements
2.4 Evacuation plan is developed in accordance with the

enterprise safety program
3 Develop and 3.1 System for recording and tracing stock location, receival,
implement throughput and despatch is developed and implemented to
documentation system enable reporting, quality assurance and financial
requirements to be met
3.2 System for recording communication with carriers, customers

and employees is developed and implemented to assess
operational effectiveness and to provide data for system
improvement
4 Design storage zones 4.1 Space requirements and equipment operation are accurately
assessed to facilitate warehouse zone planning
4.2 Assessment is made of the facility to enable the most

effective use of available space
4.3 Positioning of storage areas, bays, work stations and the like
is undertaken in accordance with planning process data
4.4 Provision for maintenance and cleaning is catered for

5 Evaluate facility 5.1 Continual system of review is used involving regular checks
utilisation to ensure storage areas and systems are functioning at
optimum levels
5.2 Receiving and despatching systems are assessed to ensure

they provide efficient operations
5.3 Storage and handling systems are assessed to ensure they

provide ease of access and comply with ergonomic principles
5.4 Product handling and storage process are assessed to ensure

minimisation of product damage, contamination and stock
losses
5.5 Flexibility of facility layout to meet changing storage and

handling requirements is maintained
5.6 Appropriate reporting systems are established and used to

capture and maintain data to design improved facilities and
systems

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA5058A Manage facility and inventory
requirements.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA5058 Manage facility and inventory requirements Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA5058 Manage facility and

inventory requirements
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when managing facility and
inventory requirements
 developing and implementing contingency plans
 prioritising work and coordinating the work of others
 providing leadership to others when managing facilities and inventory requirements
 reading and interpreting plans, diagrams, regulations, codes of practice and other
documentation relevant to managing facilities and inventory requirements
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems promptly
when managing facility and inventory requirements.

Knowledge Evidence
 enterprise business policies and plans including procedures for facility operations
 operational warehouse systems, resources, management and workplace operating
systems
 principles, purpose and location of controls, monitoring devices and systems
 procedures for managing and controlling hazardous situations when carrying out work
activities, particularly those that relate to storing materials
 relevant sections of national and state/territory regulatory requirements and codes of
practice, including applicable facility fire safety and building regulations
 requirements for completing relevant documentation
 selection and appropriate application of technology, information systems and
procedures
 throughput and storage requirements for specific types of inventory.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIA5059 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by sea and multimodal transportDate this document was generated: 18
May 2017
TLIA5059 Plan and organise the international forwarding of

freight by sea and multimodal transport
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and organise international
forwarding of freight by sea and multimodal transport (covering importing, exporting and
transiting freight).
Typically, individuals work independently or as part of a team under direct and/or indirect
supervision, perform detailed analyses, use discretion and judgement, and take responsibility
for the quality of their outputs.
All activities are carried out in accordance with relevant organisational policy and procedures,
as well as national and global codes of practice and regulations applicable to international
freight forwarding.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


May 2017

1 Select routing for sea and 1.1 Requirements for international sea and
multimodal freight transport multimodal freight transport services are
confirmed and clarified with customer
1.2 Critical logistics aspects of freight transport are

determined, analysed and considered in
planning freight forwarding solution/s
1.3 Checks are made to ensure all routing

requirements for international sea and
multimodal freight transport are fulfilled
1.4 Special transport services advice is sought as

required
1.5 Suitable routing for sea or multimodal transport

is selected after considering options available
and analysing risks involved
1.6 Alternative routing options are identified for use

in contingencies
2 Advise on and organise packaging, 2.1 Given cargo type, transport mode, destination
packing, stowage and storage of and selected route/s, suitable options for
freight for sea and multimodal packaging, packing, stowage and storage of
freight transport freight are determined
2.2 Container types suitable for sea and multimodal

transport and appropriate for freight type, are
reviewed and appropriate options are selected
2.3 Advice is provided to customer on packaging,

packing, stowage and storage of freight,
including loading and packing of suitable
container types
2.4 Pricing of containers and other forms of suitable

freight packaging is calculated and advice is
provided to customer
2.5 Appropriate actions are taken to organise for

planned forwarding project
2.6 Shipping documents required for selected

containers or other forms of packaging are
prepared in accordance with regulatory

May 2017
requirements and standard operating procedures
3 Assist in organising insurance for 3.1 Risks involved in planned sea or multimodal
sea and multimodal freight freight forwarding solution are identified and
transport analysed
3.2 Transport and liability insurance requirements

for proposed forwarding solution are evaluated
and considered
3.3 Assistance in selecting and organising

appropriate insurance options is provided to
customer in accordance with applicable
regulatory requirements and standard operating
procedures
4 Organise permits and 4.1 Documentation requirements are determined for

authorisations needed for sea and cargo, transport mode/s) and selected routing
multimodal freight transport concerned, including all permits and
authorisations
4.2 Documentation requirements are organised,

completed and processed in accordance with
applicable regulatory requirements and standard
5 Liaise with freight forwarding 5.1 Appropriate liaison with agents, carriers and
global network others in the global network and supply chain is
undertaken to plan and organise freight
forwarding project
5.2 Appropriate information is communicated when

liaising with the freight forwarding global
network in accordance with regulatory
6 Track international cargo being 6.1 International cargo being transported by sea or
forwarded by sea or multimodal multimodal freight transport is tracked using
freight transport available systems and technologies
6.2 Problems with transiting freight identified

during tracking activities are evaluated and
appropriate actions are initiated to address these
problems
6.3 Advice on progress of shipment and any action

taken to address unexpected contingencies, is

May 2017
7 Complete required documentation 7.1 All forms and other documentation required for
and records freight forwarding project are completed in
accordance with applicable regulatory
7.2 Records of arrangements and transactions made

are kept in accordance with applicable
regulatory requirements and standard operating
procedures
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIA5059A Plan and organise the international
forwarding of freight by sea and multimodal transport.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA5059 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by sea and multimodal transport Date
this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIA5059 Plan and organise the

international forwarding of freight by sea and multimodal
transport
include:
 applying relevant codes of practice and applicable legislative requirements to the task
 communicating effectively with others including checking to confirm messages and
responses are correctly and clearly understood (particularly in situations where
communication is with a person for whom English is a second language)
 completing documentation accurately
 completing freight forwarding estimates and calculations of variables such as size, weight,
distance, risks and costs
 liaising with the freight forwarding global network and modifying activities as needed
 monitoring work activities in terms of planned schedule and deadlines
 organising permits and authorisations needed for sea and multimodal freight transport
 reading and interpreting instructions, procedures, information and signs
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems in accordance with regulatory requirements
 selecting routing for sea and multimodal freight transport
 working collaboratively with others.
Knowledge Evidence

 applicable regulations and legislation:

 Australian and international regulations, conventions and codes of practice for
international forwarding of freight
 Australian and international standards and certification requirements
 relevant Australian and international environmental protection legislation
 relevant Australian and international transport security and safety legislation
 relevant regulations for importing and exporting cargo
 relevant regulations for international trading and financial transactions
 Australian and international regulations and conventions applicable to planning and
organising international freight forwarding by sea or multimodal transport (including
importing, exporting and transiting goods)
 cargo types, consignments and consolidations
 containers and containerisation, including types, purposes, dimensions and specifications;
loading principles and processes; load planning for containers
 definitions, purpose and uses of Incoterms and Combiterms
 major trade routes, services, conferences, ports and freight terminals as they apply to
maritime and multimodal freight transport
 maritime terminals, cargo handling and terminal equipment at major worldwide ports and
freight terminals
 packaging cargo for transit by sea
 parameters of freight transport services
 principles and forms of maritime and multimodal freight transport
 principles and techniques of closed-loop communication in which checks are made to
confirm that messages and responses being given or received are unambiguous and are
correctly and clearly understood
 principles of international trade and commerce
 principles of quality assurance and customer service standards, policies and procedures as
they apply in the international freight forwarding industry
 processes for chartering vessels – types of charter, terms and contracts
 sources of information and documentation for planning and organising international
freight forwarding by sea or multimodal transport, including regulatory bodies, permits
and authorisations
 standard procedures, codes of practice and protocols for planning and organising
international freight forwarding by sea or multimodal transport (including importing,
exporting and transiting goods)
 types of marine cargo vessels – their applications, capacity and routes
 types of multimodal transport
 types of pre-transport issues in freight forwarding , including adequacy of insurance and
packaging, security, stowage and handling in transit
 typical problems that can occur when planning and organising international freight
forwarding by sea or multimodal transport and related appropriate action that can be taken
to prevent or solve these problems.

assessment.
assessment.
Assessment port must occur in workplace operational situations where it is appropriate to do
so. Where this is not appropriate, assessment must occur in simulated workplace operational
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA5060 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by air transport Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

freight by air transport
Application
forwarding of freight by air transport (covering importing, exporting and transiting freight).
Typically these individuals work independently or as part of a team under direct and/or
indirect supervision, perform detailed analyses, use discretion and judgement, and take
responsibility for the quality of their outputs.
freight forwarding.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Select routing for air freight 1.1 Requirements for international air freight transport
transport services are confirmed and clarified with customer

analysed and considered in planning freight
forwarding solution/s
1.3 Checks are made to ensure all routing requirements

for international sea and multimodal freight
transport are fulfilled

required
1.5 Suitable routing for air freight transport is selected

after considering options available and analysing
risks involved
1.6 Alternative routing options are identified for

possible use in contingencies
2 Advise on and organise 2.1 Given cargo type, transport mode, destination and
packaging, packing, stowage selected route/s, suitable options for packaging,
and storage of freight for air packing, stowage and storage of freight are
transport determined
2.2 Container types suitable for sea and multimodal

transport and appropriate for freight type are
2.3 Advice is provided to customer on packaging,

packing, stowage and storage of freight, including
loading and packing of suitable container types
2.4 Pricing of containers and other forms of suitable

freight packaging is calculated and advice is
2.5 Appropriate actions are taken to organise for

planned forwarding project
2.6 Air freight documents required for selected

containers or other forms of packaging are prepared
in accordance with regulatory requirements and

3 Assist in organising insurance 3.1 Risks involved in planned air freight forwarding
for air freight transport solution are identified and analysed
3.2 Transport and liability insurance requirements for

proposed forwarding solution are evaluated and
considered
3.3 Assistance in selecting and organising appropriate

insurance options is provided to customer in
accordance with applicable regulatory requirements
and standard operating procedures
4 Organise permits and 4.1 Documentation requirements for cargo, transport

authorisations needed for air mode/s and selected routing concerned, including all
freight transport permits and authorisations, are determined
4.2 Documentation requirements are organised,

completed and processed in accordance with
applicable regulatory requirements and standard
5 Liaise with freight forwarding 5.1 Appropriate liaison with agents, carriers and others
global network in the global network and supply chain is undertaken
to plan and organise freight forwarding project

liaising with freight forwarding global network in
accordance with regulatory requirements and
6 Track and trace international 6.1 International cargo being transported by air freight
cargo being forwarded by air transport is tracked and traced during a freight
transport forwarding project using available systems and
technologies
6.2 Problems with transiting freight identified during

tracking activities are evaluated and appropriate
action is initiated to address these problems in
accordance with standard operating procedures
6.3 Advice is provided to customer on progress of

international air freight transport project and action
taken to address unexpected contingencies is

7 Complete required 7.1 All forms and other documentation required for
documentation and records planned freight forwarding project are completed in
accordance with applicable regulatory requirements
and standard operating procedures
7.2 Records of arrangements and transactions made are

kept in accordance with applicable regulatory
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.
Non essential conditions can be found in the Companion Volume Implementation Guide.

forwarding of freight by air transport.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA5060 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by air transportDate this document was

international forwarding of freight by air transport
include:
 assisting in organising insurance for air freight transport
 communicating effectively with others and confirming messages and responses are
correctly and clearly understood (particularly in situations where communication is with a
person for whom English is a second language)
 completing documentation and records required for air freight transport accurately
 completing freight forwarding estimates and calculations for air freight transport
 liaising with the freight forwarding global network when organising air freight transport
 organising permits and authorisations needed for air freight transport
 reading and interpreting instructions, procedures, information and relevant signs
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems promptly in accordance with regulatory
 selecting routing for air freight transport
 tracking international cargo being forwarded by air transport
 working systematically with required attention to detail.

Knowledge Evidence
 airports, cargo handling and terminal equipment at major worldwide airports and freight
terminals
 aircraft containers and containerisation, including types, purposes, dimensions and
specifications; loading principles and processes; load planning for containers
 aircraft types used for international air freight transport, including their applications,
capacity and routes
international forwarding of freight by air transport
organising international freight forwarding by air transport (including importing,
exporting and transiting goods)
 cargo types, consignments and consolidations
 definitions, purpose and use of Incoterms and Combiterms
 global time zones and hours of operation
 major air routes, services, conferences, airports and freight terminals as they apply to air
freight transport
 parameters of air freight transport including transport security requirements
 pre-transport issues for air transport
 principles of quality assurance and customer service standards, policies and procedures as
they apply in the international freight forwarding industry
 processes for chartering aircraft – types of charter, terms and contracts
 sources of information and documentation for international freight forwarding by air
transport, including permits and authorisations
 standard procedures, codes of practice and protocols for planning and organising
international freight forwarding by air transport (including importing, exporting and
transiting goods)
 types of packaging for air transport
 typical problems that can occur when planning and organising international freight
forwarding by air transport and related appropriate action that can be taken to prevent or

solve these problems.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIA5061 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by road and rail transportDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017

freight by road and rail transport
Application
forwarding of freight involving road and rail transport (covering importing, exporting and
transiting freight).
Typically these individuals work independently or as part of a team under direct and/or
indirect supervision, perform detailed analyses, use discretion and judgement, and take
responsibility for the quality of their outputs.
freight forwarding.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


2017
Elements describe the essential Performance criteria describe the performance needed
outcomes. to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Select routing for road and rail 1.1 Requirements for international road and rail
freight transport freight transport services are confirmed and
clarified with customer

determined, analysed and considered in planning
freight forwarding solution/s
1.3 Checks are made to ensure all conventions for

international road and rail freight transport are
fulfilled

required
1.5 Suitable routing for road and rail freight transport

is selected after considering options available and
analysing risks involved
1.6 Alternative routing options are identified for

possible use in contingencies
2 Advise on and organise 2.1 Given cargo type, transport mode, destination and
packaging, packing, stowage and selected route/s, suitable options for packaging,
storage of freight for road and packing, stowage and storage of freight are
rail transport determined
2.2 Container types suitable for road and rail freight

transport and appropriate for freight type, are
2.3 Restrictions on dimensions of containers for

transport by road and/or rail are considered when
selecting container types
2.4 Pricing of containers and other forms of freight

packaging suitable for road and rail freight
transport is calculated and advice is provided to
customer
2.5 Advice is provided to customer on selection,

loading and packing of suitable container types
and other forms of freight packaging
2.6 Documentation required is prepared in accordance

with regulatory requirements and standard

2017
2.7 Advice on packaging, packing, stowage and

storage of freight is provided to customer
3 Assist in organising insurance 3.1 Risks involved in the planned road and rail freight
for road and rail freight forwarding solution are identified and analysed
transport
3.2 Transport and liability insurance requirements for
the proposed forwarding solution are evaluated
and considered
3.3 Assistance in selecting and organising appropriate

insurance options is provided to the customer as
per applicable regulatory requirements and
4 Organise permits and 4.1 Documentation requirements are determined for

authorisations needed for road cargo, transport mode/s and selected routing
and rail freight transport concerned, including all permits and
authorisations
4.2 Documentation requirements are organised and

processed in accordance with standard procedures
and applicable regulatory requirements
5 Liaise with freight forwarding 5.1 Appropriate liaison with agents, carriers and
global network others in the global network and supply chain is
conducted to plan and organise freight forwarding
project

liaising with the freight forwarding global network
in accordance with regulatory requirements and
6 Track international cargo being 6.1 International cargo being transported by road or
forwarded by road and rail rail freight transport is tracked and traced during
transport freight forwarding project using available systems
and technologies
6.2 Problems with transit of freight identified during

tracking activities are evaluated and appropriate
actions are initiated to address these problems in
accordance with standard procedures
6.3 Advice on progress of international road and rail

freight transport project and actions taken to
address unexpected contingencies, is provided to

2017
customer
7 Complete required 7.1 All forms and other documentation required for
documentation and records planned freight forwarding project are completed
in accordance with applicable regulatory
7.2 Records of arrangements and transactions made

are kept in accordance with applicable regulatory
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.
Non essential conditions can be found in the Companion Volume Implementation Guide.

forwarding of freight by road and rail transport.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIA5061 Plan and organise the international forwarding of freight by road and rail transport Date this
document was generated: 18 May 2017

international forwarding of freight by road and rail transport
include:
 applying relevant codes of practice and applicable legislative requirements
 assisting in organising insurance for road and rail freight transport
 communicating effectively with others including checking to confirm messages and
responses are correctly and clearly understood (particularly in situations where
communication is with a person for whom English is a second language)
 completing documentation and records required for road and rail freight transport
 completing freight forwarding calculations for road and rail freight transport
 liaising with the freight forwarding global network
environments
 organising permits and authorisations needed for road and rail freight transport
 performing required estimates and calculations of variables such as size, weight, distance,
risk and costs
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems in accordance with regulatory requirements
 selecting routing for road and rail freight transport
 tracking international cargo being forwarded by road and rail transport
 working with required attention to detail.

Knowledge Evidence

international forwarding of freight
organising international freight forwarding involving road and rail transport (including
importing, exporting and transiting goods)
 definitions, purpose and use of Incoterms and Combiterms
 forms of road and rail freight transport
 freight handling and terminal equipment at major worldwide road and rail freight
terminals
 freight types, consignments and consolidations
 major road and rail routes, services, conferences, road and rail freight terminals as they
apply to road and rail freight transport
 packaging cargo for transit by road and rail
 parameters of freight transport services
 quality assurance and customer service standards, policies and procedures as they apply in
the international freight forwarding industry
 relevant environmental regulations
 road and rail containers and containerisation, including types, purposes, dimensions and
specifications; loading principles and processes; load planning for containers
 sources of information and documentation needed when planning and organising
international freight forwarding by road and rail transport, including permits and
authorisations
 standard procedures, for planning and organising international freight forwarding
involving road and rail transport
 types of pre-transport issues in freight forwarding , including adequacy of insurance and
packaging, security, stowage and handling in transit
 types of road vehicles, trains and rolling stock – their applications, capacity and routes
 typical problems that can occur and related appropriate actions that can be taken to
prevent or solve these problems.

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB0117 Assist with preparation of a train prior to operation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB0117 Assist with preparation of a train prior to operation
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to assist with the preparation of a train
prior to operation in accordance with organisational procedures, and the requirements of
relevant safeworking rules and codes of practice.
It includes preparing for and implementing the prescribed pre-departure checks, completing
required train documentation and confirming the train can proceed.
People achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the applicable state/territory
legislated rail safety requirements and to comply with relevant codes of practice and/or
guidelines.
Work is performed in conjunction with a train driver. It involves the application of routine
operational principles and procedures when preparing for train operations, as part of
workplace activities across a variety of operational contexts within the Australian rail system.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
B – Equipment Checking and Maintenance
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Prepare for 1.1 Required checks and relevant procedures and standards are
pre-departure checks identified
1.2 Purpose of the journey and activities to be undertaken are

identified
1.3 Constraints and special instructions that may apply for the
journey are identified
1.4 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and risk control
1.5 Documentation is read to identify and confirm consist,

attach/detach information and characteristics of the train
2 Implement 2.1 Train, or relevant portion of the train, is checked to ensure

pre-departure checks that rolling stock is coupled and sequenced correctly
2.2 Rolling stock is checked to ensure it is fit for operation in

accordance with regulatory requirements and organisational
procedures
2.3 Assistance is provided when train braking systems are tested

to ensure they are operating effectively
2.4 Visual inspection is conducted to identify obvious faults or

defects that would prevent safe transit
2.5 Action is taken within limits of own role to rectify faults and
ensure minimum delay to planned running schedule
2.6 Relevant work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health

and safety (OHS) requirements are followed to prevent injury
and damage
3 Confirm train can 3.1 Documentation is completed after checking rolling stock and
proceed train equipment in accordance with organisational procedures
3.2 Relevant personnel are promptly advised of the result of

completed checks
3.3 Authority to proceed relevant to the operational situation is

obtained and followed

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB0117A Assist with preparation of a train prior to
operation.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB0117 Assist with preparation of a train prior to operation Date this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0117 Assist with preparation

of a train prior to operation
include:
 applying relevant workplace procedures
 carrying out all pre-departure checks in accordance with workplace procedures
 communicating effectively with others when preparing a train for operation
 identifying job hazards and taking required action to minimise, control or eliminate
identified hazards
 identifying typical faults and defects for the type of rolling stock being operated
environments
procedures
 reporting and rectifying within limits of own role identified problems, faults and
malfunctions, in accordance with workplace procedures
 testing braking systems in accordance with workplace procedures

2017
Knowledge Evidence
 applicable state/territory legislated rail safety requirements and relevant codes of practice
and/or guidelines
 contingency management processes
 pre-departure train testing procedures
 procedures for preparing a train for operation
 relevant methods to overcome identified faults and defects
 safeworking systems and requirements
 train characteristics and specifications
 train coupling equipment and methods
 train preparation documentation procedures.

2017
assessment.
assessment.
Assessment must occur in workplace operational situations or, where this is not available, in
simulated workplace operational situations that replicate rail corridor workplace conditions.

Links
036d851

TLIB0127 Certify rolling stock prior to handover Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB0127 Certify rolling stock prior to handover
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to certify rolling stock as fit for purpose
in accordance with relevant organisational procedures, rail industry standards, rules,
regulations and codes of practice.
It includes completing certification and documentation in accordance with organisational or
client requirements.
This unit applies to workers required to carry out these activities as part of a maintenance role
within a defined location on behalf of their own or a client’s organisation.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Complete 1.1 Certification requirements for particular rolling stock are

certification confirmed by reference to applicable specifications
requirements
1.2 Planned activities are identified in accordance with
are implemented
1.4 Completed maintenance activities are verified against planned

activities
1.5 Completed maintenance activities are validated as required in

accordance with organisational procedures
1.6 Where maintenance activities are not completed an

assessment is carried out to confirm rolling stock is fit for
purpose in accordance with organisational procedures
1.7 Completed maintenance activities are confirmed against

operational performance requirements
1.8 Certificate is issued in accordance with organisational

procedures

2.2 Documentation is filled in legibly and proofread, in

accordance with organisational procedures and regulatory
requirements
2.3 Required documentation is archived in accordance with

organisational procedures and regulatory requirements

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB0127A Certify rolling stock prior to handover.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB0127 Certify rolling stock prior to handover Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0127 Certify rolling stock

prior to handover

identified hazards
 reading and interpreting relevant procedures and standards.
Knowledge Evidence
 applicable specifications for the type of rolling stock being certified

 organisational requirements for certifying rolling stock
environmental procedures and relevant regulations
 requirements for completing relevant documentation when certifying rolling stock prior to
handover
 requirements of organisational maintenance systems, procedures, rail industry standards,
codes of practice and schedules.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB0127 Certify rolling stock prior to handover Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, rail industry
standards, codes of practice and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIB0128 Conduct pre-movement checks on motive power units Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB0128 Conduct pre-movement checks on motive power units
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to conduct pre-movement checks on
motive power units in accordance with relevant organisational procedures, rules and codes of
practice.
It includes conducting pre-start checks, and starting and positioning motive power units in
accordance with workplace requirements.
This unit applies to people required to carry out these activities as part of a maintenance role
within a defined location.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Carry out pre-start 1.1 Allocation of motive power units is checked in conjunction with
checks appropriate personnel
1.2 Motive power unit to be inspected and prepared is located
1.3 Completion of all maintenance activities is confirmed
1.4 Checks for safety controls are conducted in accordance with

1.5 Internal and external integrity checks are conducted in

accordance with organisational procedures
1.6 Fluid levels are checked and appropriate action is taken as

required
2 Start motive power 2.1 Motive power unit is started in accordance with manufacturer
unit instructions and/or organisational procedures, and faults are
recognised, diagnosed, reported and recorded in appropriate
records for follow-up
2.3 For critical or serious equipment faults that cannot be readily

rectified, motive power unit is shut down, faulty equipment is
isolated and tagged, and problem is reported for rectification
2.4 All instruments and gauges are observed, readings are

interpreted to confirm effective air and electrical operation, and
where a problem is indicated, action is taken to determine the
cause and to rectify or report the situation
2.5 Fluid levels are rechecked after starting and appropriate action is
taken as required
2.6 Pre-movement checks are carried out to ensure motive power

unit is braking and powering effectively and is safe to move

3 Complete 3.1 All required documentation concerning inspecting the motive

documentation power unit is completed and processed in accordance with
3.2 Logbook and other maintenance records on the motive power

unit are completed and processed in accordance with
4 Position motive 4.1 Authority to move and position motive power unit is obtained
power unit and relevant personnel are advised of intention and procedures
4.2 Relevant personnel are made aware that motive power unit is
about to be moved in accordance with organisational procedures
4.3 Motive power unit is operated in accordance with standard

procedures and regulatory requirements, and within operating
and operational constraints
4.4 Motive power unit is positioned in accordance with operational

requirements and directions
4.5 Motive power unit performance is monitored during operation to

confirm effective operation and/or to identify defects
4.6 Equipment defects are identified, reported, rectified and

recorded or relevant personnel are advised for assistance
4.7 Relevant work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and

safety (OHS) and regulatory requirements are followed to ensure
safety and to prevent injury and damage
4.8 Relevant personnel are advised that the motive power unit is
secured in the required position and is ready for service

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB0128A Conduct pre-movement checks on motive
power units.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB0128 Conduct pre-movement checks on motive power unitsDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0128 Conduct pre-movement

checks on motive power units
include:
 adapting to differences in motive power units and associated equipment and procedures
 communicating effectively with others when inspecting and preparing a motive power unit
identified hazards
 identifying who is responsible for authorising the movement of rolling stock
 interpreting and following instructions and prioritising work
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information and signs.
Knowledge Evidence
 procedures for managing and controlling hazardous situations when preparing and starting
up a motive power unit
 procedures for conducting pre-movement checks prior to moving a motive power unit
 relevant work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) and rail
safety requirements
 requirements for completing relevant documentation when inspecting and preparing a
motive power unit
 start-up requirements for a motive power unit and associated manufacturer instructions
and organisational procedures.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB0128 Conduct pre-movement checks on motive power unitsDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, rules, codes of practice and
operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIB0132 Start up and shut down a single locomotive Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB0132 Start up and shut down a single locomotive
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to start up and shut down a single
locomotive.
It includes inspecting, preparing and starting up a single locomotive; conducting in-cab and
post start-up checks; completing start-up documentation; stabling locomotive; and carrying
out post-operational checks.
Locomotives may include:
 diesel locomotives
 electric locomotives
 railcars.
This work is conducted as part of operating locomotives and may be carried out by different
personnel working within rail operations.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Inspect and prepare 1.1 Identification and location of locomotive is confirmed

locomotive
1.2 Logbook and locomotive are checked for out of service
indications and to confirm serviceability
1.3 Locomotive kit and equipment are checked as required, and

defects and deficiencies are recorded and rectified, isolated,
tagged or reported as required, in accordance with
1.4 Fuel, lubricating oils, water, coolant and sand equipment are
checked as required and then replenished as required, in
accordance with manufacturer and/or organisational
procedures
are implemented
1.6 External visual checks are conducted in accordance with

manufacturer and/or organisational policies and procedures
2 Start up locomotive 2.1 Locomotive is started in accordance with manufacturer

instructions and/or organisational procedures
2.2 Operating faults are identified, diagnosed, rectified and/or

reported and recorded in appropriate records
2.3 All instruments and gauges are observed and readings are
interpreted to confirm effective operation in accordance with
manufacturer and/or organisational procedures
2.4 Fluid levels are rechecked after starting, as required, and

appropriate action is taken as required
3 Conduct in-cab 3.1 Locomotive in-cab checks are conducted in accordance with
checks manufacturer and/or organisational policies and procedures
3.2 Vigilance and safety controls and indicators are checked to

ensure they are functioning correctly and appropriate action is
taken if they are not working correctly
3.3 Communications equipment is checked to ensure it is

functioning correctly and appropriate action is taken if it is not

working correctly
3.4 Personal in-cab equipment and crew comfort requirements are

checked and adjusted for correct functionality and comfort
3.5 Auxiliary and emergency equipment is checked and confirmed

to be operational in accordance with operating requirements
4 Conduct post 4.1 Post start-up checks are carried out to ensure locomotive is
start-up checks braking and powering effectively and is safe to move, in
accordance with manufacturer and/or organisational policies
and procedures
4.2 Communications equipment is obtained and checked, as

required, to ensure it is functional
4.3 Pantographs are raised or lowered and confirmed to be

operational, as required, in accordance with manufacturer
instructions and/or organisational procedures
5 Complete start-up 5.1 All required documentation concerning inspecting the

documentation locomotive is completed and processed in accordance with
5.2 Logbook and other locomotive service records are completed

and stored in accordance with organisational policies and
procedures
6 Stable locomotive 6.1 Location for stabling locomotive is identified and confirmed
with appropriate personnel
6.2 Directions of appropriate personnel are interpreted and

followed as required
6.3 Locomotive is stabled and shut down in accordance with

manufacturer and/or organisational procedures
6.4 Locomotive is secured in accordance with organisational

6.5 Control equipment and cab are secured in accordance with

6.6 Additional protection is set in place as required, in accordance

with organisational policies and procedures
7 Carry out 7.1 Fuel, oil, water and sand levels are checked as required and
post-operational then replenished as required
checks
7.2 Outcomes of post-operational checks are recorded and

processed in accordance with organisational policies and

procedures
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB0132A Start up and shut down a single
locomotive.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB0132 Start up and shut down a single locomotive Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB0132 Start up and shut down

a single locomotive
include:
 adapting to differences in locomotives and associated equipment and procedures
 completing all pre start-up checks on a locomotive
identified hazards
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures and information and signs.

Knowledge Evidence
 auxiliary systems on a locomotive, and related checks and workplace procedures

 braking and safety system procedures for a locomotive
 defects that can occur on a locomotive and related action that should be taken
 external features of a locomotive that must be checked during a visual inspection
 functions of all supervisory indicators and controls, and related checks for correct
operation
 inspection procedures for a locomotive
 lubrication requirements for a locomotive
 procedures and required protocol for operating electronic communications equipment
 purpose and location of controls, monitoring devices, braking, power source and traction
systems
 relevant state/territory legislated rail safety requirements, codes of practice and/or
guidelines
environmental procedures and regulations.
assessment.
assessment.
simulated workplace operational situations that replicate rail workplace conditions.

Links
036d851

TLIB1024 Clean transportation units and facilities for passenger use Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB1024 Clean transportation units and facilities for passenger

use
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to clean transportation units and facilities
for passenger use in accordance with workplace and codes/regulatory requirements as part of
work activities within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes identifying and preparing for cleaning, cleaning the facility or unit, identifying
minor maintenance requirements of transportation units and facilities, and completing all
work requirements.
Work is performed under some supervision, generally within a team environment.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
B ‒ Equipment Checking and Maintenance
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Identify and prepare 1.1 Transportation units and facilities are inspected for hygiene
for cleaning and cleanliness on an ongoing basis
1.2 Customer complaints regarding lack of hygiene and

cleanliness within transport units and facilities are
investigated
1.3 Transport units or areas requiring cleaning and the nature of

the material to be cleaned is identified to determine
appropriate response
1.4 Cleaning procedures are identified, and cleaning materials

and equipment are organised in accordance with workplace
procedures
1.5 Areas that require cleaning that breach work health and
safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS)
regulations or workplace standards are cordoned off to
prevent access by staff and customers
2 Clean facility or unit 2.1 Transportation units and facilities are cleaned or detailed to
workplace standards
2.2 Cleaning equipment is operated in accordance with

WHS/OHS regulations, codes of practice, and workplace
procedures
2.3 Chemicals are used in accordance with WHS/OHS

legislation, codes of practice, policies and procedures
2.4 Hazardous and general waste is removed in accordance with

WHS/OHS regulations, codes of practice and workplace
procedures
3 Identify minor 3.1 Transport units and facilities are inspected to identify
maintenance maintenance requirements
requirements of
transportation units 3.2 Minor maintenance of transport units and facilities is
and facilities conducted in accordance with workplace policies and
procedures
3.3 Minor maintenance actions are reported in accordance with

3.4 Further maintenance requirements of transport units or

facilities are reported in accordance with workplace
procedures
4 Complete the work 4.1 Cordoned off area is re-opened for use when safe for staff
and customer access
4.2 Transportation units/facilities cleanliness and appearance is

verified prior to being released for service
4.3 Cleaning equipment stocks are monitored and replenished as

required
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB1024A Clean transportation units and facilities for
passenger use.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB1024 Clean transportation units and facilities for passenger useDate this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1024 Clean transportation

units and facilities for passenger use
include:
may exist when cleaning transportation units and facilities
 applying relevant legislation and workplace procedures in reference to cleaning
transportation units and facilities for passenger use
 communicating and working effectively with others when cleaning transportation units
and facilities
 demonstrating an understanding of work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health
and safety (OHS) requirements for cleaning transportation units and facilities
 demonstrating an understanding of WHS/OHS requirements for cordoning off an area
to the public when cleaning transportation units and facilities
 handling and storing hazardous substances and materials
environments
 operating electronic communication equipment to required protocol
relevant to cleaning transportation units and facilities
 selecting and safely using relevant equipment and materials when cleaning
transportation units and facilities
WHS/OHS standards
 selecting, mixing and applying appropriate cleaning materials

May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 communication requirements when cleaning transportation units and facilities

 documentation and record requirements
 equipment, chemicals and materials used when cleaning transportation units and
facilities for passenger use, and the precautions and procedures to be followed in their
use
cleaning transportation units and facilities for passenger use
 problems that may occur when cleaning transportation units and facilities, and
 regulations relevant to cleaning transportation units and facilities for passenger use
including, where relevant, the Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code and relevant
health and hygiene requirements
 site layout
 workplace procedures and policies for cleaning transportation units and facilities for
passenger use, including discharging waste and charging water containers.

May 2017
assessment.
assessment.
Performance is demonstrated consistently over time and in a suitable range of contexts.

Links
036d851

TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand tools Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to maintain and use hand tools in
accordance with workplace procedures and safeworking codes across a variety of operational
workplace contexts within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes selecting and using hand tools to complete workplace tasks, maintaining basic
hand tools in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and securing and storing hand
tools in accordance with workplace procedures.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Select and use 1.1 Correct tools are chosen to complete workplace tasks and to
hand tools ensure efficient and safeworking conditions
1.2 Appropriate personal safety protection is used to minimise

TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand tools Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
personal injury risk
2 Maintain hand 2.1 Equipment is cleaned and maintained in accordance with

tools manufacturer’s specifications and/or local instructions to ensure
correct functionality of equipment
2.2 Unserviceable tools are repaired, replaced or reported to relevant

personnel to ensure correct functionality
3 Secure and store 3.1 Tools are transported in a safe, secure, efficient manner to
hand tools minimise risk of injury to personnel and damage to equipment
3.2 Tools are stored and secured according to manufacturer’s or

workplace procedures to prevent damage to, and losses of,
equipment
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB1028A Maintain and use hand tools.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand tools Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand

tools
include:
hazards
 identifying, selecting, and efficiently and effectively using relevant hand tools and related
materials
signs.
Knowledge Evidence
 materials for maintaining and using hand tools and the procedures and precautions for
their care, use and storage
 problems that can occur maintaining and using hand tools and related action that should
be taken
 relevant work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS), and
 relevant sections of state/territory regulations, codes of practice and safeworking system
requirements
 workplace documentation and records requirements
 workplace procedures and policies for maintaining and using hand tools.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB1028 Maintain and use hand tools Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB1030 Undertake general site maintenance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to undertake general site housekeeping
and maintenance in depots, sub-depots, factories, compounds and campsites according to
safeworking and regulatory requirements and workplace procedures.
It includes preparing for work, conducting site housekeeping functions, applying pest and
vegetation control measures, and completing all work requirements.
Work is performed under minimal supervision, generally within a team environment.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare for work 1.1 Works order including drawings, sketches and material lists
is received/accessed, analysed and confirmed as required by
site inspection
1.2 Resources, including equipment and materials, are identified

and obtained
1.3 Liaison and communication issues with other personnel at

the site are resolved
1.4 Hazards are identified prior to commencing work
1.5 Site safety requirements are observed
2 Conduct site 2.1 Stores, materials and equipment are loaded/off-loaded safely
housekeeping and secured
functions
2.2 Site, including stores and materials, is laid out to plan
2.3 Stores and materials are checked for serviceability, cleaned

as required and prepared for use
2.4 Minor earthwork maintenance is conducted
2.5 Excess materials and refuse are disposed of/returned, as

required by workplace procedures
3 Apply pest and 3.1 Pest and vegetation control requirements are identified and
vegetation control appropriate control measure is selected in accordance with
measures workplace procedures
3.2 Chemical control agents are prepared in accordance with

safety requirements and workplace procedures
3.3 Pest control measures are applied, monitored and varied to

maintain effectiveness
3.4 Control measures are applied, and pests and vegetation are
removed/neutralised
4 Complete work 4.1 Worksite is rehabilitated
4.2 Work completion details are finalised and recorded/advised

to appropriate personnel

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB1030A Undertake general site maintenance.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB1030 Undertake general site maintenance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1030 Undertake general site

maintenance
include:
 communicating and working effectively with others when carrying out general site
maintenance
 completing documentation related to general site maintenance
 identifying and organising resources required for work activities
 implementing contingency plans and modifying activities depending on operational
contingencies, risk situations and environments that may occur when carrying out
general site maintenance
signs relevant to general site maintenance
 using hand tools and minor plant

Knowledge Evidence
 characteristics of plant and equipment, transport, structures, hardware and electrical

components used in work activities
 contents of workplace technical manuals and instructions relating to the work activities
concerned
 hazardous chemicals used in general site maintenance, and related precautions and
personal protection measures
 hazards that may exist during site maintenance activities and ways of controlling the
risks involved
 impact on work activities of regulatory requirements
 problems that may occur during site maintenance activities, and action that can be
taken to report or resolve these problems
 relevant recording and documentation procedures
 relevant sections of applicable regulatory requirements
 workplace documentation and records system management related to the work
concerned
 workplace procedures for general site maintenance.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB1031 Clean up plant, equipment and worksite Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to clean up plant, equipment and
worksite in accordance with state/territory Acts and regulations, nationally approved
compliance codes and/or guidelines and workplace procedures.
Work is undertaken as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational contexts
It includes planning and preparing work, arranging the clear up and disposal/reclamation of
material, operating cleaning equipment and mobile plant, finalising the work and restoring the
site.
Work is performed under minimal supervision, generally within a team environment.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Plan and prepare 1.1 Details of cleaning requirements are identified by

work instructions, inspections, work orders and schedules
1.2 Materials and equipment are identified and obtained
1.3 Relevant legislative, statutory and workplace requirements

and standards are identified and built into the planning
process
1.4 Environmental regulatory requirements are identified and

built into the planning process to ensure site is left in an
environmentally sound condition
1.5 Required materials to be removed and methods of removal

are identified to facilitate clean up
2 Arrange clear up 2.1 Storage/disposal areas and quarantine zones are identified
and disposal/ and arranged to ensure environmentally sound disposal
reclamation of
material 2.2 Reclaimed material is removed to storage areas using
appropriate methods
2.3 Non-required materials/services are removed and disposed of

in appropriate manner to ensure clean and environmentally
stable site
2.4 Site is inspected for overlooked materials to minimise

wastage and losses
3 Operate cleaning 3.1 Cleaning equipment and mobile plant are operated to site and
equipment and manufacturer’s requirements
mobile plant
3.2 Operator maintenance is performed to manufacturer’s/site
standards
3.3 Cleaning equipment is cleaned and stored
4 Finalise work and 4.1 Drainage is established/restored as necessary to ensure well

restore site drained site
4.2 Re-vegetation/environmental repair is arranged as required to

return site to environmentally sound condition

4.3 Barriers are removed or checked for integrity to ensure

access to correct areas
4.4 Access roads are closed as required to prevent unauthorised

access to closed site
4.5 Site level and surface condition are left in a suitable state to
ensure an environmentally sound, safe and clean site
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB1031A Clean up plant, equipment and worksite.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB1031 Clean up plant, equipment and worksite Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1031 Clean up plant,

equipment and worksite
include:
 applying cleaning agents, sealants and chemicals
 communicating and working effectively with others when cleaning up plant,
equipment and worksites
 completing documentation related to cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites
 handling hazardous materials
 identifying and reclaiming salvageable materials
 identifying and removing water/waste/surplus materials
 implementing contingency plans when cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites
 levelling and re-vegetating sites
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in equipment and sites in accordance with
 operating and maintaining relevant mobile plant and mobile plant equipment
relevant to cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites
 using barriers correctly
 using hand and power tools

Knowledge Evidence
 applicable legislated safety requirements including state/territory Acts, regulations and

nationally approved compliance codes and/or guidelines
 applications and characteristics of plant and equipment
 cleaning agents/sealants and their properties and precautions for their use
 cleaning equipment, related materials and their applications
 hazards that may exist when cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites and ways of
controlling the risks involved
 manufacturer instructions for servicing and cleaning equipment
 permit to work system
 plant and equipment cleaning procedures and instructions
 problems that may occur when cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites, and action
that can be taken to report or resolve these problems
 relevant recording and documentation requirements
 workplace procedures for cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB1080 Use, clean and maintain towing equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB1080 Use, clean and maintain towing equipment
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to use, clean and maintain towing
equipment in accordance with regulations, workplace procedures and workplace
requirements.
It includes carrying out pre-operation checks on equipment, carrying out basic routine
servicing of equipment, using towing equipment, cleaning equipment, and recording and
reporting check results.
Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil relevant work health and safety
(WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) legislation and regulations covering using,
cleaning and basic servicing of a towing vehicle and equipment concerned.
Work is performed under limited supervision.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Visually inspect 1.1 Towing vehicle and equipment are visually inspected prior to
vehicle and towing operations in accordance with standard pre-operational
equipment functional and safety check workplace procedures and
manufacturer specifications
are implemented
1.3 Aspects of vehicle or equipment found to be faulty or outside

manufacturer or workplace specifications are reported to
designated persons for appropriate action
2 Check vehicle and 2.1 Towing vehicle and equipment are checked to ensure they can
towing equipment be operated in accordance with manufacturer specifications
for operational and workplace procedures
capability
2.2 All safety systems are checked for operational effectiveness
2.3 Routine servicing and lubrication checks of towing vehicle and

its equipment are carried out in accordance with the service
schedule for a vehicle and the equipment concerned
3 Identify and assess 3.1 Effect of identified faults on the operation of a towing vehicle
impact of faults on and equipment is assessed
towing operations
3.2 Faulty equipment or components that may affect the safe
operation of a vehicle and equipment are isolated, tagged and
reported to appropriate personnel for rectification
4 Use towing 4.1 Towing equipment is operated in accordance with

equipment on vehicle manufacturer specifications and regulatory requirements
4.2 Attachment points used in towing operation and weight of

vehicle being towed or load being carried are checked to
ensure they are consistent with established towing practice,
regulatory requirements and permissible safe working loads
for towing vehicle and its associated towing equipment
4.3 Safety precautions are followed when using towing equipment

on a towing vehicle in accordance with workplace procedures
and WHS/OHS requirements
4.4 Personal protective equipment (PPE) is worn in accordance

with workplace procedures and WHS/OHS requirements

5 Clean towing vehicle 5.1 Appropriate cleaning process is selected for type of towing
and its equipment vehicle and its equipment in accordance with workplace
procedures
5.2 Cleaning materials are prepared in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions and workplace procedure
5.3 Required PPE and safety equipment is selected and used in

accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace
procedures
5.4 Towing vehicle is cleaned using appropriate cleaning materials

and tools in accordance with workplace procedures
6 Record and report 6.1 Results of visual inspection and operational checks are
results of visual accurately reported in accordance with regulatory
inspection and requirements, workplace policy and workplace procedures
operational checks
6.2 Clear, unambiguous and concise records are kept in
accordance with workplace policy
6.3 Clear reference is made to any items that may affect the future
safety of a towing vehicle or equipment

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB1080A Use, clean and maintain towing
equipment.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB1080 Use, clean and maintain towing equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1080 Use, clean and maintain

towing equipment
include:
 adapting to changes in towing vehicles, associated equipment and workplace procedures
hazards
 modifying activities depending on towing contexts, risk situations and environments
 recognising problems concerning the safety and operational capability of a towing vehicle
and its equipment and taking appropriate action
 selecting and using relevant equipment, tools and cleaning agents
 using required personal protective equipment conforming to industry and work health and
safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) standards including the operation of
portable fire extinguishers
 working safely and collaboratively with others.
Knowledge Evidence

 characteristics, capabilities and limitations of towing vehicle and its equipment

 documentation and record requirements when using, cleaning and servicing a towing
vehicle and its equipment
 focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and workplace operating
systems for using, cleaning and servicing a towing vehicle and its equipment
 hazards that may exist when using, cleaning and servicing a towing vehicle and its
equipment, and the precautions and action that should be taken to minimise or eliminate
hazards concerned
 operational safety requirements for towing vehicle and equipment concerned
problems
 relevant regulations and standards
 safe working loads for towing vehicle
 tools, materials and equipment for using , cleaning and maintenance of a towing vehicle
and its equipment, and the precautions and procedures that should be followed in their use
 workplace procedures and policies for using, cleaning and servicing of a towing vehicle
and its equipment.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, load restraint
guide, codes of practice and operation manuals
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIB1093 Clean equipment and restore worksite Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to clean up plant, equipment and
worksite in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace
procedures.
It includes planning and preparing work, arranging the clear up and disposal/reclamation of
material, operating cleaning equipment and mobile plant, finalising the work and restoring the
site.
Work is performed under some supervision, generally within a team environment. It involves
the application of routine operational principles and procedures when cleaning up plant,
equipment and worksite, as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational
contexts within the Australian rail system.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Plan and prepare work 1.1 Details of cleaning requirements are identified by referring
to instructions, inspections, work orders and schedules

1.3 Cleaning material and equipment are identified and obtained
1.4 Required materials to be removed and methods of removal

are identified to facilitate clean up
2 Clear up and dispose of 2.1 Storage/disposal areas and quarantine zones are identified to
or reclaim material ensure environmentally sound disposal
2.2 Reclaimed material is removed to storage areas using

appropriate methods
2.3 Non-required material/services are removed and disposed of

appropriately to ensure clean and environmentally stable site
is maintained
2.4 Site is inspected for overlooked material to minimise

wastage and losses
3 Operate cleaning 3.1 Cleaning equipment and mobile plant are operated safely to
equipment and mobile minimise risk of injury to people and equipment damage
plant
3.2 Personal protective equipment required to operate cleaning
equipment and mobile plant is identified, obtained and worn
as required
3.3 Site/manufacturer requirements for operating cleaning

equipment and mobile plant are confirmed, clarified as
required and followed
3.4 Site/manufacturer requirements for maintaining cleaning

equipment and mobile plant are confirmed, clarified as
required and followed
3.5 Cleaning equipment is cleaned and stored in accordance

with site/manufacturer requirements

4 Finalise work and 4.1 Barriers are removed or checked for integrity to ensure
restore site access to correct areas as required
4.2 Site is left in suitable surface condition to ensure an

environmentally sound, safe and clean site
4.3 Required documentation is completed and processed in

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB1093A Clean equipment and restore worksite.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB1093 Clean equipment and restore worksite Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB1093 Clean equipment and

restore worksite
include:
 applying cleaning agents, sealants and chemicals in accordance with safety data sheets
(SDSs)/material safety data sheets (MSDSs) and/or manufacturer instructions and
 disposing of waste materials in accordance with workplace procedures
 identifying and obtaining correct materials and equipment
 identifying and reclaiming salvageable materials
 identifying and removing water/waste/surplus materials
 interpreting and following operational instructions
identified hazards
 leaving site in a suitable condition
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in equipment and sites in accordance with operating
procedures
 operating and maintaining relevant cleaning equipment in accordance with workplace
procedures
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems promptly, in accordance with workplace
procedures
 using quarantine zone and barriers in accordance with environmental and workplace
procedures when disposing of material

Knowledge Evidence
 cleaning agents/sealants and their properties and precautions for their use
 cleaning equipment and related materials, and their applications
 hazards that may exist when cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites, and ways of
 manufacturer instructions for cleaning equipment
 problems that may occur when cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites, and action
 relevant rail danger zones
 relevant recording and documentation requirements
 relevant safety, work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) and
environmental procedures and codes of practice
 SDSs/MSDSs, manufacturer instructions and organisational procedures
 workplace procedures for cleaning up plant, equipment and worksites.

assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, SDSs/MSDSs,
codes of practice and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIB2001 Check and assess operational capabilities of equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to check and assess the operational
capabilities of equipment in accordance with regulations, workplace procedures and
requirements, within the transport and logistics industry.
It includes inspecting equipment and the work area, checking the operational capability of
equipment and its safety devices, identifying and assessing the impact of faults on safety and
work requirements, and recording and reporting inspection and testing results.
Safety checks and equipment tests are performed under limited supervision.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Inspect equipment and 1.1 Equipment is inspected prior to start-up in accordance

work area with workplace pre-operational functional safety check
procedures and manufacturer’s specifications
1.2 Aspects of equipment/work area found to be outside

manufacturer’s and/or workplace specifications are
reported to designated persons for appropriate action
2 Check equipment 2.1 Equipment and components are tested after start-up in
operational capability accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and
2.2 Warning systems are checked for operational

effectiveness
3 Identify and assess impact 3.1 Faults are identified and assessment is made of the
of faults on work potential effect on the operation of the equipment for the
requirements required work
3.2 Faults that may affect the safe operation of the equipment
are reported to the appropriate personnel for rectification
4 Record and report 4.1 Inspection and testing results are accurately reported in
inspection and testing accordance with regulatory requirements, workplace
results policies and industry guidelines
4.2 Clear, unambiguous and concise records are kept, in

accordance with workplace policies
4.3 Clear reference is made to any items that may affect the
future safety of the equipment
Foundation Skills
of competency.

Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2001A Check and assess operational capabilities
of equipment.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2001 Check and assess operational capabilities of equipment Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2001 Check and assess

operational capabilities of equipment
include:
 checking and replenishing fluids and carrying out lubrication processes during work
activities
 communicating and working effectively with others when checking and assessing
equipment operational capability
 completing documentation related to checking and assessing equipment operational
capability
 implementing contingency plans and modifying activities depending on operational
contingencies, risk situations and environments
signs relevant to the checking and assessing of the operational capability of equipment
 selecting and using relevant equipment and communications technology when
checking and assessing equipment operational capability
 servicing equipment in terms of maintenance schedule and standard operating
procedures

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2001 Check and assess operational capabilities of equipment Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 equipment characteristics, capabilities, limitations and operational safety requirements

 housekeeping procedures
checking and assessing equipment operational capability
 problems that may occur when checking and assessing equipment operational
capability and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 tools and equipment used when checking and assessing equipment operational
capability and the precautions and procedures to be followed in their use.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2003 Carry out vehicle servicing and maintenance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2003 Carry out vehicle servicing and maintenance
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out basic servicing and
maintenance of a commercial vehicle, in accordance with relevant roads and traffic authority
regulations.
It includes actions to implement vehicle manufacturer specifications for routine checks and
maintenance, to ensure all specified safety requirements are met, and to ensure vehicle is
operational to workplace requirements and relevant state/territory roads and traffic authority
regulations.
Work is performed with limited supervision, and with duty of care responsibility for self and
others in achieving the prescribed outcomes.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Maintain and service vehicle 1.1 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control
systems measures are implemented
1.2 Fluid levels are checked and adjusted in accordance

with manufacturer specifications and workplace
procedures
1.3 Air levels are checked and adjusted in accordance

with manufacturer specifications and workplace
procedures
1.4 Routine checks are made of vehicle systems and

appropriate action is initiated for maintenance as
required in accordance with workplace procedures
1.5 Appropriate precautions and procedures are followed

when servicing/maintaining a vehicle to ensure
adequate protection of the environment
1.6 Work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health

and safety (OHS) procedures are followed when
carrying out routine servicing and maintenance of a
vehicle
2 Carry out minor vehicle 2.1 Vehicle components are removed, repaired or
repairs replaced and refitted to vehicle using correct tools in
accordance with manufacturer instructions and
2.2 Tyres on vehicle are repaired or replaced in

accordance with workplace procedures and
manufacturer instructions
2.3 Worn brakes are identified and action is taken in

2.4 Need for more complex maintenance procedures is

identified and problem is correctly referred in
3 Diagnose minor vehicle faults 3.1 Minor faults in vehicle systems are identified,
and undertake repairs for the diagnosed and repaired in accordance with
safe operation of a vehicle manufacturer specifications and workplace
procedures
3.2 Identified faults that create a safety hazard are

reported and appropriate action is taken to remove

vehicle from operation pending repair
4 Complete documentation 4.1 Routine servicing, maintenance and repair record

requirements are confirmed
4.2 Records of routine servicing, maintenance and

repairs are kept in accordance with workplace
procedures
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2003A Carry out vehicle servicing and
maintenance.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2003 Carry out vehicle servicing and maintenance Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2003 Carry out vehicle

servicing and maintenance
include:
hazards
 checking and replenishing fluids and carrying out lubrication processes
environments
 monitoring performance of equipment
procedures
signs
 servicing equipment in terms of maintenance schedule and standard operating procedures
damage to vehicle or equipment.
Knowledge Evidence

 basic fault finding procedures required for routine servicing and maintenance of vehicles
 basic principles for operating systems on commercial vehicles, including electrical
systems, fuel systems, cooling systems, steering systems, exhaust systems, tyres and
brakes
 housekeeping standards for routine servicing and maintenance
 problems that may occur during vehicle routine servicing and maintenance and
appropriate action and solutions
 procedures for checking, and routine servicing and maintenance of a commercial vehicle,
in accordance with workplace and manufacturer requirements, and established safety rules
and regulations
 procedures for use and maintenance of materials, tools and parts required for routine
 procedures required to minimise waste during routine servicing and maintenance
 recognition and diagnosis of faults and vehicle irregularities
 relevant duty of care requirements for routine servicing and maintenance of vehicles
 relevant WHS/OHS and pollution control procedures
 reporting and documentation requirements.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIB2004 Carry out vehicle inspection Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out an inspection of a
commercial vehicle, in accordance with relevant roads and traffic authority regulations for
inspecting commercial vehicles.
It includes action to implement vehicle manufacturer specifications for routine checks, to
clean vehicle, to ensure all specified safety requirements are met, and to ensure vehicle is
regulations.
Work is performed with limited or minimum supervision, and with duty of care responsibility
for self and others in achieving the prescribed outcomes.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Check vehicle 1.1 Vehicle hazards are identified and required action is taken to
1.2 Visual check of internal and external condition of vehicle is

carried out in accordance with workplace procedures
1.3 Pre-operational inspections and checks of the vehicle tyres,

suspension, fluid levels and other critical features are carried out
to ensure conformance with relevant roads and traffic authority
requirements, manufacturer specifications and workplace
procedures
1.4 Associated equipment is tested to ensure it functions correctly to

1.5 Post start-up and shut-down checks are carried out after engine is
started to identify possible engine or electrical problems
1.6 Warning systems (instruments and gauges) are checked to ensure

they are operational
1.7 Vehicle monitoring device is logged on/off in accordance with

manufacturer instructions and workplace procedures as required
2 Clean vehicle 2.1 Vehicle is cleaned in accordance with workplace procedures
2.2 Vehicle associated equipment is cleaned in accordance with

3 Complete 3.1 Vehicle faults are identified and/or diagnosed, and appropriate
documentation action is taken to report or remedy identified faults as required
by workplace procedures
3.2 Records of inspection are updated and recommended repairs are

documented in accordance with workplace procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2004A Carry out vehicle inspection.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2004 Carry out vehicle inspection Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2004 Carry out vehicle

inspection
include:
 carrying out vehicle inspections in accordance with workplace and manufacturer
requirements
 completing documentation related to routine vehicle inspection
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information and manuals
accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures.
Knowledge Evidence
 duty of care requirements for routine vehicle inspections

 principles of systems operation on commercial vehicles including:
 brakes
 cooling systems
 electrical systems
 exhaust systems
 fuel systems
 steering systems
 tyres
 problems that may occur during routine vehicle inspections and appropriate actions and
solutions

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2004 Carry out vehicle inspection Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 relevant reporting and documentation requirements

 relevant roads and traffic authority
pollution control procedures
 workplace procedures and manufacturer requirements for:
 pre-operational inspection of a commercial vehicle
 visual inspection
 checking warning systems.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of trailers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of trailers
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out an inspection of a
commercial trailer, in accordance with relevant roads and traffic authority regulations for
inspecting commercial trailers.
It includes action to implement trailer manufacturer specifications for routine checks, to clean
trailer, to ensure all specified safety requirements are met, and to ensure trailer is operational
to workplace requirements and relevant state/territory roads and traffic authority.
Work is performed with limited supervision and with duty of care responsibility for self and
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Check trailer 1.1 Trailer hazards are identified and required action is taken to
1.2 Visual check of internal and external condition of trailer is

1.3 Pre-operational inspections and checks of trailer brake systems,

suspension and axles, electrical systems, wheels and tyres are
carried out to ensure conformance with road safety standards
1.4 Associated equipment is tested to ensure it functions correctly

to manufacturer specification
2 Clean trailer 2.1 Trailer is cleaned in accordance with workplace procedures
2.2 Associated equipment is cleaned in accordance with workplace

procedures
3 Complete 3.1 Faults are identified and/or diagnosed and appropriate action is
documentation taken to report or remedy identified faults as required by
3.2 Records of inspection are updated and recommended repairs

are documented in accordance with workplace policies

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2008A Carry out inspection of trailers.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of trailers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of

trailers
include:
 completing relevant documentation for inspecting trailers
 monitoring and checking condition of trailer and its equipment in terms of maintenance
schedule and operating procedures
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures and information
accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures.
Knowledge Evidence
 principles of operation of systems on commercial trailers, including electrical systems,

tyres, brakes and coupling systems
 procedures for routine inspection of a commercial trailer in accordance with workplace
and manufacturer requirements, and established safety rules and regulations including
visual inspection procedures and pre-operational checking procedures
 relevant duty of care requirements for routine inspection of trailers

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2008 Carry out inspection of trailers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017

assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB2009 Check conveyor operational status Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to check conveyor operational status, in
accordance with workplace procedures and relevant regulatory requirements within the
It includes inspecting conveyor system and work areas, checking equipment operational
capability, identifying and assessing faults and reporting inspection results.
Safety checks and equipment tests are performed under limited supervision.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Inspect conveyor 1.1 Conveyor equipment is checked prior to start-up in

system and work area accordance with workplace procedures and manufacturer
safety checks and specifications, to ensure it is free from
damage and obstructions that may limit operational capability

1.3 Work area is checked to ensure it is safe and appropriate for

required task
2 Check equipment 2.1 Conveyors are inspected after start-up in accordance with
operational capability manufacturer specifications, and workplace inspection
specifications and procedures
2.2 Warning systems are checked for operational effectiveness
2.3 Records are checked to determine maintenance history and

requirements and goods carried
3 Identify, assess faults 3.1 Faults are identified and assessments are made of potential
and report inspection effect on equipment operation for required work, and details
and testing results are forwarded to relevant personnel in accordance with
3.2 Accurate reporting of inspection and testing results is kept in

accordance with regulatory requirements, workplace policy
and industry guidelines
3.3 Clear reference is made to any items that may affect future
equipment safety/operation
3.4 Conveyor system is continually monitored for safe and

efficient operation

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2009A Check conveyor operational status.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2009 Check conveyor operational status Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2009 Check conveyor

operational status
include:
hazards
environments
 monitoring performance of conveyor equipment
labels
work health safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) standards
 servicing conveyor equipment in terms of maintenance schedule and standard operating
procedures
Knowledge Evidence

 conveyor purpose, characteristics, capabilities, requirements and limitations

for checking and assessing conveyor operational capability
 function and principles of operation of belt cleaning systems
 housekeeping procedures
 operational safety requirements for conveyor concerned
 problems that may occur when checking and assessing conveyor operational capability
and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 regulations relevant to checking and assessing conveyor operational capability including:
 current Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code and relevant bond, quarantine or
other legislative requirements
 safe guarding of plant and equipment
 conveyor operations guidelines
 tools and equipment used and precautions and procedures that should be followed in their
use
 workplace procedures and policies for checking and assessing conveyor operational
capability.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice,
safe plant and equipment guidelines and operation manuals
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify minor faults Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify minor faults
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to identify, diagnose and rectify minor
faults in accordance with regulations, safe working codes of practice and workplace
requirements, across a variety of operational transport contexts.
It includes identifying maintenance and/or repair requirements, conducting minor
maintenance and routine repairs, checking and reporting minor repairs and/or maintenance,
and providing support in accordance with workplace procedures.
Work is performed without supervision, generally within a team environment.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Identify 1.1 Job hazards are identified and required action is taken to
maintenance/repair minimise, control or eliminate identified hazards
requirements
1.2 Condition of vehicle and/or motive power unit ancillary
equipment are assessed
1.3 Faulty or damaged components or equipment are identified

and assessed for component exchange or minor repair
1.4 Required equipment and tools are identified and obtained
1.5 Work areas and equipment are prepared and made safe for
repair/maintenance/component exchange activities
2 Conduct minor 2.1 Minor repair/maintenance/component exchange activities

maintenance and are carried out to comply with manufacturer specifications
routine repairs and workplace procedures
2.2 Required equipment, tools and materials are operated,

applied and handled to conform to work health and safety
and manufacturer specifications, to prevent injury and
damage
3 Check and report 3.1 Minor repair/maintenance/component exchange activities

minor are checked for accordance with safety requirements and
repairs/maintenance workplace procedures
3.2 Equipment is checked to confirm it has been restored to

3.3 Repair/maintenance/component exchange activities are

documented in appropriate records or logbooks
4 Provide support 4.1 Repairs/maintenance/component exchange activities

requiring support are identified and level of support is
established
4.2 Assistance to repair/maintenance/component exchange

activities is provided as required
4.3 Repair/maintenance/component exchange work not able to

be undertaken or completed is reported to appropriate
personnel for follow-up action
4.4 Work site is checked for cleanliness and operational safety,

and appropriate action is taken to restore site and equipment

procedures
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2022A Diagnose and rectify minor faults.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify minor faults Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify

minor faults
include:
hazards
environments
signs
Knowledge Evidence

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2022 Diagnose and rectify minor faults Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
environmental protection requirements
 tools and equipment used and procedures and precautions for their care, use and storage
 typical minor repair problems that can occur and related action that should be taken
 workplace component and material supply system
 workplace procedures for diagnosing and repairing minor faults.
assessment.
assessment.
Assessment occur in workplace operational situations where it is appropriate to do so; where
this is not appropriate, assessment must occur in simulated workplace operational situations
that replicate workplace conditions.
and manufacturer operational manuals
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB2023 Provide sanitation and water services support to passenger transportation unitsDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2023 Provide sanitation and water services support to

passenger transportation units
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to provide sanitation and water services
support to passenger transportation units in accordance with workplace and regulatory
requirements, in the transport and logistics industry.
It includes planning the decanting and watering of passenger vehicles, carriages or vessels;
providing a decanting and watering service; and completing all decanting and watering
operations.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Plan decanting and 1.1 Transport systems vehicles, carriages or vessel type are
watering of identified to assess nature and extent of servicing required
passenger
vehicles/carriages/ve 1.2 Job hazards are identified and required action is taken to
ssels minimise, control or eliminate identified hazards
1.3 Sanitary waste removal and water system refill are planned
to ensure minimal inconvenience and delay to customers and
services
2 Provide decanting 2.1 Decanting unit is connected to transport unit waste tanks in
service accordance operational requirements
2.2 Transport unit waste is removed to holding tanks in

2.3 Decanting unit is disconnected from transport unit and unit is

cleaned in accordance with workplace and health and
hygiene regulations
3 Provide water 3.1 Water supply is connected to transport unit water storage
service tanks in accordance with operational requirements
3.2 Transport unit water storage tanks are filled in accordance

with work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and
safety (OHS) regulations
3.3 Water supply is disconnected from transport unit and unit is

cleaned in accordance with workplace and health and
hygiene regulations
4 Complete decanting 4.1 Sanitary waste is removed and stored in accordance with
and watering environmental workplace procedures
4.2 Housekeeping and equipment storage requirements are

maintained in accordance with workplace procedures
4.3 Documentation is completed and proofread in accordance


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2023A Provide sanitation and water services
support to passenger transportation units.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2023 Provide sanitation and water services support to passenger transportation units Date this
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2023 Provide sanitation and

water services support to passenger transportation units
include:
 applying precautions and required action to minimise, control or eliminate hazards
 handling and storing hazardous substances and materials
environments
procedures
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information, labels and signs
 selecting and safely using relevant equipment and materials
 selecting, mixing and applying appropriate cleaning materials
 storing cleaning materials and equipment
Knowledge Evidence

 communication requirements, including radio operation

 current Australian Drinking Water Guidelines (ADWG)
 equipment, chemicals and materials used and the precautions and procedures that should
be implemented in their use
 food safety standards
providing sanitation and water services support to passenger transportation units
 problems that may occur when providing sanitation and water services support to
passenger transportation units and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve these
problems
 site layout
 workplace policies, procedures and guidelines for:
 discharging/decanting of waste and charging water containers
 providing sanitation and water services support to passenger transportation units
 sanitary waste storage
 WHS/OHS.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, food safety
standards, codes of practice and operation manuals
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIB2029 Use and maintain minor mechanical equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to use and maintain minor mechanical
equipment in accordance with workplace procedures, safe working codes of practice and
regulatory requirements across a variety of operational workplaces within the transport and
logistics industry.
It includes carrying out pre-operational checks on equipment, operating mechanical equipment,
conducting routine maintenance, and securing and storing equipment. Minor mechanical
equipment may encompass hand and power tools.
Work is performed under some supervision, generally in a team environment.
Where required to operate mechanical plant or equipment, the operator must hold the relevant
licence, permit or certificate for the class/type of equipment being operated.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Carry out 1.1 Pre-operational checks are conducted to manufacturer

pre-operational checks specifications to ensure optimum equipment functionality
1.2 Necessary adjustments to equipment are made in

accordance with manufacturer instructions to ensure
efficient operation
1.3 Faulty equipment is reported to relevant person to ensure

equipment is safe and effective to use
2 Operate mechanical 2.1 Equipment is operated in accordance with manufacturer and

equipment workplace operating instructions to ensure safe and
effective operation
2.2 Appropriate personal safety protection is used to minimise

risk of injury
2.3 Work operational hazards are eliminated or controlled

appropriately when using equipment to ensure safe working
conditions
2.4 Assisting personnel are given clear instructions about their

duties to ensure safe and effective working conditions, as
required
3 Conduct routine 3.1 Equipment is cleaned and maintained in accordance with

maintenance manufacturer specifications to ensure optimum
functionality
3.2 Detailed and accurate records are maintained in accordance

4 Secure and store 4.1 Equipment is handled and transported in a safe, secure and
mechanical equipment efficient manner to minimise risk of injury to personnel and
damage to equipment
4.2 Equipment is stored and secured according to manufacturer

and workplace procedures to prevent damage to and loss of
equipment

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2029B Use and maintain minor mechanical
equipment.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2029 Use and maintain minor mechanical equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2029 Use and maintain minor

mechanical equipment
include:
hazards
 carrying out one routine maintenance in a safe manner
 completing a pre-operational check on one piece of equipment used in the job function
environments
procedures
 operating mechanical equipment to manufacturer and workplace requirements
 reporting identified problems, faults and malfunctions promptly, in accordance with
 selecting and using required personal protective equipment
Knowledge Evidence
 problems that can occur when using and maintaining minor mechanical equipment and
related action that should be taken to resolve these problems

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2029 Use and maintain minor mechanical equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
 tools and equipment for using and maintaining minor mechanical equipment, and the
procedures and precautions for their care, use and storage
 workplace procedures for using and maintaining minor mechanical equipment.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB2034 Maintain poles and associated hardware Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2034 Maintain poles and associated hardware
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to maintain poles and associated
hardware, in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements and workplace
procedures.
It includes planning for the maintenance of poles and associated hardware, preparing the
worksite, conducting the maintenance of poles and associated hardware, and completing all of
the work requirements.
guidelines.
Work is performed under minimal supervision, generally within a team environment. It
involves the application of routine operational principles and procedures when maintaining
poles and associated hardware, as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Plan for maintenance of 1.1 Works order is received/accessed, analysed and

poles and associated confirmed, as required by site inspection
hardware
1.2 Resources required for the job are identified and
scheduled

1.4 Replacement or additional poles, associated hardware

and plant/equipment are transported to the worksite
1.5 Liaison and communication issues are acknowledged

and resolved
2 Prepare the worksite 2.1 Personnel participating in task, including plant operators
and contractors, are fully briefed
2.2 Road signs, barriers and warning devices are positioned,

and worksite protection is provided
2.3 Safeworking rules are observed within the rail corridor
2.4 Replacement or additional poles and associated

hardware are placed in planned assembly and/or pre-lift
location
2.5 Excavation/foundation is inspected and confirmed as

being in accordance with the works order or
specification
3 Conduct maintenance of 3.1 Actual maintenance requirement is confirmed by site

poles and associated inspection
hardware
3.2 Pole and associated hardware to be maintained is
stabilised as required
3.3 Maintenance of pole and associated hardware is carried

out in accordance with the work order and workplace
requirements

4 Complete work 4.1 Worksite is rehabilitated, and work is completed in an

agreed time and with minimum waste
4.2 System data and pole records are updated in accordance

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2034A Maintain poles and associated hardware.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2034 Maintain poles and associated hardware Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2034 Maintain poles and

associated hardware
include:
 adapting to differences in tools and equipment in accordance with operating procedures
identified hazards
environments

Knowledge Evidence
 applicable state/territory legislated rail safety and safeworking requirements, relevant

codes of practice and/or guidelines
 characteristics, capabilities, uses, limitations and location standards for different types of
poles
 documentation and records systems related to pole management
 hazards that may exist when maintaining poles and associated hardware and ways of
 pole maintenance techniques and processes
 pole treatment chemicals and HAZCHEM requirements in accordance with safety data
sheets (SDSs)/material safety data sheets (MSDSs) and/or manufacturer instructions and
 procedures for support plant and equipment
environmental procedures and regulations including WHS/OHS instructions related to
pole erection, site safety and rescue techniques
 responsibilities in relation to other authorities, clients and land-owners
 workplace procedures for maintaining poles and associated hardware
 workplace technical manuals and instructions for maintaining poles and associated
hardware.
assessment.
assessment.

 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, SDSs/MSDSs, regulations,

codes of practice and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIB2073 Clean road tankers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to clean road tankers in accordance with
workplace procedures and work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety
(OHS) and environmental protection regulations.
It includes preparing for cleaning operations, steam cleaning a tanker, cleaning a tanker using
water and detergent, finalising cleaning operations, and completing all required
documentation.
Work is performed under some supervision, usually in a team environment. Work involves
the application of routine principles and procedures to clean commercial tankers across a
variety of operational contexts.
Work must be carried out in accordance WHS/OHS and environmental protection regulations
and workplace procedures.
No licencing, legislative or certification requirements apply to this unit at the time of
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Prepare for cleaning 1.1 Vehicle is positioned under gantry in accordance with
operations workplace procedures

1.3 Documentation is obtained from vehicle driver to determine

product that has been previously carried in tanker
1.4 Vehicle keys are taken from driver to prevent accidental

drive off, before cleaning process is completed
1.5 Appropriate cleaning process is selected for type of

tanker/load in accordance with workplace procedures
1.6 Cleaning materials are prepared in accordance with

manufacturer instructions and workplace procedures
1.7 Required personal protective equipment and safety

equipment is selected and used in accordance with regulatory
2 Steam clean a tanker 2.1 Vehicle is earthed to prevent sparks and explosions
2.2 Valves are opened to allow draining of wash materials and

hoses are attached in accordance with manufacturer
2.3 All access points, including vents and washing points, are
opened and heat-sensitive auto fill probes are removed in
2.4 Where tank has held oil/diesel, a wash consisting of

detergent wash and hot water rinse is carried out followed by
the application of steam
2.5 Where tank has only held petrol, a steam clean only is carried
out in accordance with workplace procedures
2.6 After wash, unit is left to drain until liquid ceases to drain
from outlet valves and steam stops leaving vents on top of
tank
2.7 All vents and valves are closed and auto fill probes are

reconnected
2.8 Plastic seals are placed on valves to signify completed

cleaning of tanker as required in accordance with workplace
procedures
3 Clean a tanker using 3.1 High pressure water and detergent are used to clean around
water and detergent top of tanker vents and hatches to remove dirt, and then top
of tanker vents and hatches are rinsed clean with water
3.2 Valves on outlet manifold are opened and connected with

flexible pipes to waste storage facility or recycling tanks for
tank cleaner
3.3 All hatches are opened, spray balls are placed into tanks after
visually checking tank condition, and solid materials present
are washed out with high pressure water, prior to starting
cleaning cycle
3.4 Tank is rinsed, washed with tank wash until waste is clear
and recycled into a holding tank for reuse, leaving tanker
tank to drain
3.5 Water in holding tank is topped up, ph is tested and solution

is replaced as required in accordance with workplace
procedures
3.6 Tank is rinsed with water in short bursts until liquid leaving
tank is clear
3.7 Top of tank is hosed off again with water, and spray balls are
removed
3.8 Tank is visually checked through hatches with a torch, for

cleanliness
3.9 When cleanliness standards have not been achieved, tanker is

rewashed or re-rinsed as required and hatches are closed
3.10 At conclusion of cleaning operations, drainage hoses are

removed, manifold is checked for cleanliness, and drainage
valves are closed and sealed to indicate completed process in
4 Complete cleaning 4.1 Due care is taken to ensure disposal of used cleaning
operations materials is in accordance with environmental protection
4.2 Wash water is suitably treated using available water cleaning

and separation processes before draining into sewerage

system
4.3 Cleaning equipment is cleaned, dried, checked and stored in

4.4 Cleaning operations documentation is completed in

accordance with workplace procedures and is returned to
driver along with vehicle keys
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2073A Clean road tankers.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2073 Clean road tankers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2073 Clean road tankers
include:
hazards
 carrying out required cleaning operations
 minimising waste during cleaning operations
procedures
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, labels and manuals
 selecting and using appropriate cleaning equipment and materials
Knowledge Evidence
 hazards that may exist when cleaning road tankers and ways of controlling the risks
involved
 housekeeping standards
 materials identification, handling and storage
 precautions and procedures to dispose of or reprocess cleaning waste in accordance with
 procedures for cleaning a commercial tanker in accordance with workplace and

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2073 Clean road tankers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
manufacturer requirements, and established safety rules and regulations

 relevant codes such as the current Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code
 relevant duty of care requirements for routine tanker cleaning
 relevant legislation and workplace procedures
 relevant technical knowledge to clean road tankers
 relevant WHS/OHS and pollution control procedures.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB2079 Set up and secure a towing situation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan a towing job and to set up towing
with reference to regulations and standard operating procedures.
It includes obtaining and confirming job instructions, assessing towing requirements,
determining a plan of action, and carrying out all required action to set up and secure a towing
situation.
Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the applicable work health and
safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) legislation and other relevant regulations
covering setting up and securing a towing situation.
Work is performed under limited supervision.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Obtain information 1.1 Information on towing job is obtained from base or depot in
on towing job accordance with operating procedures
1.2 Further information on towing requirements is obtained at

scene of job
2 Assess towing 2.1 Equipment requirements and techniques to carry out towing
requirements job are assessed
2.2 Potential hazards that may be experienced at towing site and

during towing operation are identified and appropriate
precautions and strategies are adopted to manage and control
the risks involved
2.3 Type of vehicle to be towed is identified and critical aspects

of vehicle design are determined
3 Determine 3.1 Sequence of action and plan for towing activity and safety
appropriate plan of and security of persons, vehicles and property, are determined
action in accordance with regulatory requirements and standard
3.2 Towing vehicle and associated equipment to carry out job are
organised to be available for the work
4 Set up and secure 4.1 Setting up and securing of towing situation is carried out in
towing situation accordance with established action plan
4.2 Safety equipment, witches hats and safety signs are deployed
in accordance with standard operating procedures and
4.3 Onlookers and other personnel in the vicinity of towing

situation are managed in accordance with applicable safety
management procedures and security requirements
4.4 Vehicle or equipment to be towed is manoeuvred into position

using relevant equipment in accordance with standard
operating procedures and regulatory requirements
4.5 Vehicle or equipment to be towed is secured using

appropriate winches, ropes and cables in accordance with
relevant load restraint regulations and standard operating
procedures

5 Record and report 5.1 Assessment of towing situation and action taken are
inspection and testing accurately reported in accordance with regulatory
results requirements, workplace policy and industry guidelines
5.2 Clear, unambiguous and concise records are kept in

5.3 Clear reference is made to issues, hazards or incidents that

may have arisen when attending towing situation and related
action taken
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2079A Set up and secure a towing situation.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2079 Set up and secure a towing situation Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2079 Set up and secure a

towing situation
include:
hazards
 modifying activities depending on workplace contexts, risk situations and towing
situations
 planning and prioritising own work, predicting consequences and identifying
improvements
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures and information
 recognising problems and taking appropriate action
 selecting and use personal protective equipment in accordance with work health and
safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) requirements
 selecting and using relevant equipment and tools
 working safely and collaboratively with others.
Knowledge Evidence

 documentation and record requirements when checking and assessing equipment

operational capability
 hazards that may exist when setting up and securing a towing situation and precautions
and action that should be taken to minimise or eliminate identified hazards
 operational of work systems, equipment, management and workplace standard operating
systems for checking and assessing equipment operational capability
 operational safety requirements for equipment concerned
 problems that may occur when setting up and securing a towing situation and appropriate
action that can be taken to resolve these problems
 regulations and standards relevant to setting up and securing a towing situation
 tools and equipment used when setting up and securing a towing situation and the
precautions and procedures that should be followed in their use
 towing equipment characteristics, applications, capabilities and limitations
 workplace procedures and policies for checking and assessing equipment operational
capability.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIB2081 Repair timber structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2081 Repair timber structures
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to repair timber structures and their
components, in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace
procedures.
It includes determining job requirements; preparing and maintaining components, and
performing repairs; cleaning up the site after maintenance activities; and completing
documentation.
guidelines.
involves the application of routine operational principles and procedures when repairing
structures and their components, as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Determine job 1.1 Structures are inspected as required to locate defects

requirements
1.3 Job requirements are determined in accordance with

workplace procedures, and scope of work and resources
required are identified
2 Prepare component 2.1 Components requiring replacement are checked against

for repair standards and are measured for preparation of replacement
component
2.2 Materials required for job are identified and organised as

required to enable appropriate replacement of components
2.3 Replacement components are cut and shaped to the required

standard in accordance with workplace procedures
2.4 Surfaces of components are treated using appropriate

methods and materials as required
3 Perform repairs 3.1 Component is replaced to required standard in accordance

3.2 Connections between timber members are tightened, repaired

or replaced using approved material and techniques
3.3 External timber deficiencies in components are treated with

suitable materials as required to minimise degradation of
components
4 Clean up site 4.1 Workplace procedures and environmental regulations and

standards relevant to site clean-up are confirmed and clarified
as required
4.2 Waste is minimised and reused or disposed of in accordance

with relevant workplace procedures, and environmental
regulations and standards
4.3 Cleaning products and materials are disposed of in

accordance with relevant workplace procedures, and
environmental regulations and standards

4.4 Established site restoration practices are followed and

problems with these practices are identified and reported

5.2 Documentation is filled in legibly and proofread
5.3 Documentation is processed in accordance with workplace

procedures
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2081A Repair timber structures.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2081 Repair timber structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2081 Repair timber structures
the requirements of the elements and performance criteria on at least three separate
occasions and include:
 adapting to differences in tools, equipment and work requirements in accordance with
 following operational instructions and work sequences when undertaking timber structures
repair
 identifying defects in accordance with workplace procedures
identified hazards
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant plans and specifications
 repairing a range of defect types
 repairing existing timber structures using a range of repair techniques
 replacing timber components in accordance with workplace procedures
 selecting and using relevant tools and equipment
 working collaboratively with others.

Knowledge Evidence
 carpentry principles
 functions of different types of timber structures
 hazards that may exist when repairing structures and/or components, and ways of
 problems that may occur during the repair of structures and/or components, and action
that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
 safety data sheets (SDSs)/material safety data sheets (MSDSs) and/or manufacturer
instructions
 timber structures repair methods and techniques
 types of timber and their characteristics and features
 workplace procedures for the repair of timber structures and/or components.

assessment.
assessment.
Practical assessment must occur in an appropriate range of situations, techniques and defect
types in the workplace.
 a range of relevant exercises, case studies and/or simulated practical and knowledge
assessments

Links
036d851

TLIB2082 Repair steel structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2082 Repair steel structures
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to repair steel structures and their
components in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace
procedures.
It includes determining job requirements, preparing and maintaining components, performing
repairs, cleaning up the site after maintenance activities and completing documentation.
guidelines.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.




requirements

2 Prepare component 2.1 Components requiring repair are prepared in accordance with
for repair requirements

required to enable appropriate repair of components
2.3 Surfaces of components are treated using appropriate

methods and materials as required
2.4 Components are assembled using appropriate lifting methods

to ensure safety
2.5 Connection locations are checked for clearances and

tolerances to allow smooth fitting of components
2.6 Fastening of components is performed to specification as

required
3 Perform repairs 3.1 Steel members are accurately marked, drilled and cut in
3.2 Component is replaced or repaired to required standard in

3.3 Replaced or repaired components are connected to the

structure by approved methods in accordance with workplace
procedures
3.4 Connections between steel members are tightened, repaired

or replaced using approved material and techniques
3.5 External steel deficiencies in components are treated with

suitable materials as required to minimise degradation of
components


as required

with relevant workplace procedures and environmental

accordance with relevant workplace procedures and



procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2082A Repair steel structures.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2082 Repair steel structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2082 Repair steel structures
the requirements of the elements and performance criteria on at least three separate occasions
and include:
 adapting to differences in tools and equipment and work requirements in accordance with
 following operational instructions and work sequences when undertaking steel structures
repair
identified hazards
environments
 repairing a range of defect types in accordance with workplace procedures
 repairing existing steel structures using a range of repair techniques
 replacing steel components in accordance with workplace procedures
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems, faults or malfunctions, in accordance with
 selecting and using relevant tools and equipment in accordance with workplace
procedures.

Knowledge Evidence
 basic steel component assembly techniques

 functions of different types of steel structures
 hazards that may exist when repairing structures and/or components and ways of
 information on the use of epoxy and grouts for mortar pads in accordance with safety data
sheets (SDSs)/material safety data sheets (MSDSs) and/or manufacturer instructions and
 problems that may occur during the repair of steel structures and action that can be taken
to report or resolve these problems
 relevant rail safety, work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS)
and environmental procedures and regulations
 steel structures repair methods and techniques
 workplace procedures for repairing steel structures.

assessment.
assessment.
Practical assessment must occur in an appropriate range of situations, techniques and defect
types in the workplace.
assessments

Links
036d851

TLIB2083 Maintain bridge bearings Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2083 Maintain bridge bearings
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to maintain bridge bearings in
accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace procedures.
It includes determining job requirements, maintaining bridge bearings, cleaning up the site
after maintenance activities, and completing documentation.
guidelines.
bridge bearings, as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational contexts within
the Australian rail system.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Determine job 1.1 Bridges are inspected as required to locate bearings requiring
requirements maintenance


2 Perform bearing 2.1 Components requiring maintenance are cleaned and prepared
maintenance in accordance with workplace procedures
2.2 Bearing components are maintained to standard in


as required





procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2083A Maintain bridge bearings.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2083 Maintain bridge bearings Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2083 Maintain bridge

bearings
and include:
 cleaning and servicing bridge bearing components in accordance with workplace
procedures
 following operational instructions and work sequences
identified hazards
 identifying minor defects in accordance with workplace procedures
 inspecting bearings and determining work requirements in accordance with workplace
procedures
environments
regulatory requirements and workplace procedures.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2083 Maintain bridge bearings Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 functions of different types of bridge bearings

 hazards that may exist when maintaining bridge bearings and ways of controlling the risks
involved
 problems that may occur when maintaining bridge bearings, and action that can be taken
 routine maintenance methods and techniques
 workplace procedures for maintaining bridge bearings.
assessment.
assessment.
Practical assessment must occur in an appropriate range of situations in the workplace.
assessments

Links
036d851

TLIB2084 Carry out routine maintenance of structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2084 Carry out routine maintenance of structures
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out routine maintenance of
structures in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace
procedures.
It includes determining job requirements, performing routine maintenance, cleaning up the
site after maintenance activities, and completing documentation.
guidelines.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Determine job 1.1 Structures are inspected as required to locate and evaluate
requirements defects


2 Perform routine 2.1 Components are cleaned and cleared in accordance with
maintenance workplace procedures
2.2 Fastenings are tightened to required standard in accordance

2.3 Minor defects that cannot be rectified are reported in


as required





procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2084A Carry out routine maintenance of
structures.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2084 Carry out routine maintenance of structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2084 Carry out routine

maintenance of structures
and include:
 cleaning structures and components routinely in accordance with workplace procedures
 identifying defects and remedies
identified hazards
environments
 operating communications equipment to required protocol
 selecting and using required tools and equipment
 tightening a range of fastener types.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2084 Carry out routine maintenance of structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 hazards that may exist when completing routine maintenance of structures and ways of
 problems that may occur during the routine maintenance of structures and action that can
be taken to report or resolve these problems
 routine maintenance methods and techniques
 workplace procedures for maintaining structures.
assessment.
assessment.
Practical assessment must occur in an appropriate range of situations and fastener types in the
workplace.

Links
036d851

TLIB2085 Apply track fundamentals Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to apply fundamentals of track
maintenance and construction, and to carry out basic track measurement, in accordance with
approved rail industry standards, safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace
procedures.
It includes identifying track terminology, track components and track tools and equipment;
and undertaking basic track measurement.
guidelines.
the application of routine operational principles and procedures to the fundamentals of track
maintenance and construction, as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify track and 1.1 Basic track and structures infrastructure terminology is
structures infrastructure explained
1.2 Track geometry features are explained
2 Identify track components 2.1 Principal track components are identified and their
purpose is explained
2.2 Principal turnout components are identified and their

3 Identify track tools and 3.1 Tools and equipment for track installation and
equipment maintenance are identified
3.2 Track machines for track installation and maintenance

are identified
4 Undertake basic track 4.1 Terminology for track measurement is identified and
measurement defined
4.2 Measuring equipment is identified and relevant

equipment is selected for taking basic track
measurements
4.3 Measuring equipment is checked for accuracy
4.4 Measurements are taken accurately and recorded in


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2085A Apply track fundamentals.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2085 Apply track fundamentals Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2085 Apply track

fundamentals
include:
 completing documentation related to basic track measurement
 identifying job hazards and required action to minimise, control or eliminate identified
hazards
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information, technical data,
standards and drawings
 selecting equipment used for basic track measurement

Knowledge Evidence
 authorisation/approval processes and procedures

 fundamentals of track layout and geometry
 fundamentals of track structures
 hazards that may exist when measuring track and ways of controlling the risks involved
 problems that may occur when measuring track and action that can be taken to report or
resolve these problems
 relevant safeworking systems and procedures
 tools and equipment used in track construction and repair
 track components including rails, rail connectors, sleepers, ballast, points, and crossings
(and substitute devices, as required)
 workplace procedures for measuring track.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2086 Apply awareness of structures fundamentals Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2086 Apply awareness of structures fundamentals
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to apply awareness of structures
fundamentals in accordance with approved rail industry standards, safeworking and regulatory
requirements, and workplace procedures.
It includes identifying types of structures, structures terminology and conventions, and defect
categories; and locating and identifying defects in structures.
guidelines.
involves the application of routine operational principles and procedures when applying
awareness of structures fundamentals, as part of workplace activities across a variety of
operational contexts within the Australian rail system.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify types of bridges and 1.1 Principal bridge types and their purpose are identified
structures
1.2 Other principal structure types and their purpose are
identified
2 Identify structures 2.1 Basic terminology for structures infrastructure is

terminology and conventions defined
2.2 Principal components of structures and their purpose

are identified
2.3 Conventions for numbering structures and their

components are explained
3 Identify defect categories 3.1 Types of defect are identified
3.2 Conventions for categorising defects are explained
4 Locate structures defects 4.1 Hazards are identified, risks are assessed and control
4.2 Tools and equipment for visual inspection of

structures are identified and selected
4.3 Previously identified defects in structures are located

and identified
4.4 Defects in structures are located and identified

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2086A Apply awareness of structures
fundamentals.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2086 Apply awareness of structures fundamentals Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2086 Apply awareness of

structures fundamentals
include:
 following operational instructions and work sequences when locating defects in structures
hazards
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information, technical data,
standards and drawings
 selecting equipment for a basic structures inspection
 undertaking a basic structures inspection.

Knowledge Evidence
 defect categories/types convention

 fundamentals of structure types
 hazards that may exist when locating defects in structures and ways of controlling the
risks involved
 problems that may occur when locating defects in structures and action that can be taken
 structures components
 structures terminology and conventions
 types of structures defects
 workplace procedures for locating defects in structures.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2090 Use communication systems in a taxi Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to use taxi cab communications systems
by applying established communications principles and practices for taxi drivers.
It includes identifying features of taxi communications system and operating it effectively,
using appropriate communications protocols and communicating with a base. It also includes
identifying faulty communications equipment operation and taking appropriate action, and
using technical and colloquial language and vocabulary in day-to-day communications.
Communication systems are used in accordance with codes/regulations and workplace
requirements relevant for using taxi communications systems in the taxi industry.
Safety checks and equipment tests are performed with limited or no supervision, and with full
accountability and responsibility for self and others in achieving the prescribed outcomes.
This unit meets part of the certification requirements for obtaining taxi driver accreditation.
As requirements may vary between states and territories, people seeking taxi accreditation
should contact their state/territory taxi regulator.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Identify features of taxi 1.1 Features and functions of taxi radio system are
communications system identified
1.2 Features and functions of taxi computer dispatch

system are identified
1.3 Features and functions of taxi duress alarm system are

identified
2 Operate taxi 2.1 Checks are carried out to confirm communications

communications system system is operational in accordance with manufacturer
2.2 Communications system is used in a manner consistent

with road laws and safe driving practices
2.3 Communications security is maintained in accordance

3 Use appropriate 3.1 Received messages are interpreted and recorded as

communications protocols required in accordance with workplace procedures
3.2 Messages are transmitted clearly and precisely with due

observation of ethics and protocols required of users
3.3 Incoming messages are received and are answered

promptly and courteously within operating procedures
and regulatory requirements
3.4 Clear, unambiguous vocal communication is used in

accordance with operating procedures, language
requirements and codes
3.5 Appropriate protocols and procedures are followed

when using communications systems in emergencies
4 Maintain communications 4.1 Equipment is checked and monitored in accordance

equipment operational with workplace procedures
status
4.2 Minor faults in communications systems are identified,
diagnosed and repaired or reported in accordance with

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2090A Use communication systems in a taxicab.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2090 Use communication systems in a taxi Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2090 Use communication

systems in a taxi
include:
 carrying out minor routine monitoring procedures for communications equipment
 communicating effectively with others when using communications systems in a taxi,
including during transmission and at receipt of information, in a manner consistent with
road laws and safe driving practices
 communications systems including:
 computer dispatch
 mobile phone – on person or hands-free
 vehicle mounted radio
 security equipment, including duress alarm and camera
 completing documentation related to using communications systems in a taxi
 identifying, reporting and/or rectifying problems that may arise when using
communication systems in a taxi in accordance with workplace procedures
 monitoring communications equipment operational status
procedures
 operating taxi and other electronic communications systems effectively and to required
protocol
 reading, interpreting and following relevant operating instructions, procedures,
information and signs
 undertaking pre-operational checks for communications systems and equipment
 using communications systems in emergencies
Knowledge Evidence

 basic barriers to effective communication and how to overcome them

 basic communication techniques including the phonetic alphabet
 basic principles of effective communication, which includes:
 two-way conversation
 questioning to obtain information and/or to clarify information and understanding
 routine oral reporting
 features of various communications systems such as:
 taxi radio systems
 taxi computer dispatch systems
 taxi duress alarm systems
 procedures and protocols for using communications systems in an emergency
 relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local regulations
 workplace procedures and policies for using communication systems in a taxi.
assessment.
assessment.
Assessment of this unit must be undertaken on actual taxi radio equipment.

industry including:
 taxi communications equipment
 taxi duress alarm system.
Links
036d851

TLIB2091 Measure and record track geometry Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to measure and record track geometry in
It includes measuring and recording track geometry, and reporting results.
guidelines.
involves the application of routine operational principles and procedures when measuring and
recording track geometry, across a variety of operational contexts within the Australian rail
system.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Measure 1.1 Equipment and tools appropriate to task are selected and checked
geometry for correct operation in accordance with manufacturer instructions
are implemented
1.3 Equipment is operated in accordance with manufacturer and work

instructions to provide appropriate data for analysis
2 Record results 2.1 Data is recorded in a complete and accurate manner

procedures, as required
3 Process data 3.1 Data is compared to maintenance/construction tolerances in

3.2 Results are reported in accordance with workplace procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2091A Measure and record track geometry.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2091 Measure and record track geometry Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2091 Measure and record

track geometry
include:
identified hazards
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information, plans, drawings
and specifications
 reading recorded track geometry data
 recording and reporting results accurately in accordance with workplace procedures
 reporting and/or rectifying identified problems, in accordance with workplace procedures
 using appropriate measurement tools to measure a range of geometry elements

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2091 Measure and record track geometry Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 hazards that may exist when measuring and recording track geometry, and ways of
 problems that may occur when measuring and recording track geometry, and action that
can be taken to report or resolve these problems
 relevant records procedures
 relevant rail industry standards
 safeworking procedures
 track geometry parameters including the horizontal and vertical alignment, cross-level and
cant of the track
 workplace procedures for measuring and recording track parameters.
assessment.
assessment.
Links
036d851

TLIB2092 Operate minor mechanical equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to operate and maintain minor
mechanical equipment in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and
It includes carrying out pre-operation checks on equipment, operating mechanical equipment,
conducting routine maintenance, and securing and storing equipment.
guidelines.
the application of routine procedures when operating and maintaining minor mechanical
equipment across a variety of operational contexts.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Carry out 1.1 Pre-operational checks are conducted in accordance with

pre-operation checks manufacturer specifications to ensure optimum functionality
of equipment

1.3 Necessary adjustments to equipment are made to ensure

efficient operation, in accordance manufacturer instructions
1.4 Faulty equipment is tagged-out and reported to relevant

person to ensure equipment is safe and effective to use
2 Operate mechanical 2.1 Equipment is operated in accordance with manufacturer and

equipment workplace operating instructions to ensure safe and effective
operation
2.2 Appropriate personal safety protection is used to minimise the

risk of injury to operator
2.3 Work operational hazards are identified and eliminated or

controlled appropriately when using equipment, to ensure
safeworking conditions
2.4 Assisting personnel are given clear instructions about their

duties as required to ensure safe and effective working
conditions
3 Conduct routine 3.1 Equipment is cleaned and maintained in accordance with

maintenance manufacturer specifications to ensure optimum functionality
3.2 Records are maintained according to workplace procedures
4 Secure and store 4.1 Equipment is handled and transported in a safe, secure,
equipment efficient manner to minimise risk of injury to personnel and
damage to equipment
4.2 Equipment is secured in storage area in accordance with

operational procedures
4.3 Equipment is stored in accordance with manufacturer and

workplace procedures to prevent loss and damage to
equipment

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2092A Operate minor mechanical equipment.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2092 Operate minor mechanical equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2092 Operate minor

mechanical equipment
include:
identified hazards
 identifying, selecting and efficiently and effectively using relevant tools and equipment
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant manufacturer instructions, procedures, information and
signs

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2092 Operate minor mechanical equipment Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 problems that can occur when operating and maintaining minor mechanical equipment,
and related action that should be taken
 relevant manufacturer operating procedure or manual
 relevant safety, WHS/OHS and environmental procedures and regulations
 tools and equipment used when operating and maintaining minor mechanical equipment,
and the procedures and precautions for their care, use and storage
 workplace procedures and policies for operating and maintaining minor mechanical
equipment.
assessment.
assessment.
Links
036d851

TLIB2096 Repair concrete/masonry structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2096 Repair concrete/masonry structures
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to repair concrete/masonry structures and
their components in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace
procedures.
It includes determining job requirements, preparing components, performing repairs and
cleaning up the site after maintenance activities.
guidelines.
concrete/masonry structures and their components, as part of workplace activities across a
variety of operational contexts within the Australian rail system.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.




requirements
1.3 Scope of work and resources required are identified
1.4 Job is planned in accordance with availability of required

resources
2 Prepare components 2.1 Components requiring repair are identified and isolated or
for repair marked in accordance with workplace procedures

required to enable appropriate repair of components
3 Perform repairs 3.1 Defective area is removed in accordance with workplace

procedures
3.2 Repairs are carried out to required standard in accordance


as required





procedures
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2096A Repair concrete/masonry structures.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2096 Repair concrete/masonry structures Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2096 Repair

concrete/masonry structures
and include:
identified hazards
environments
 repairing a range of defect types
 repairing existing concrete/masonry structures using a range of repair techniques
 selecting and using relevant tools and equipment.

Knowledge Evidence
 basic concrete construction techniques

 concrete/masonry structure repair methods and techniques
 functions of different types of concrete/masonry structures
 hazards that may exist when repairing concrete/masonry structures and ways of
 problems that may occur during the repair of structures and action that can be taken to
report or resolve these problems
 safety data sheets (SDSs)/material safety data sheets (MSDSs) and/or manufacturer
instructions and workplace procedure information on the use of epoxy and grouts for
mortar pads and cracks
 workplace procedures for repairing concrete/masonry structures.
assessment.
assessment.
Practical assessment must occur in an appropriate range of situations, repair techniques and
defect types in the workplace.
 applicable documentation including SDSs/MSDSs, workplace procedures, rail industry
standards, regulations, codes of practice and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIB2097 Install and maintain guard rails Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to install and maintain guard rails in
It includes determining job requirements, installing guard rails and completing all required
documentation.
guidelines.
Guard rails include guard rails installed on:
 level crossings and sharp curves to prevent derailment
 underbridges and near vulnerable structures to limit lateral movement of derailed wagons.
involves the application of routine operational principles and procedures when installing and
maintaining guard rails, as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational contexts
within the Australian rail system.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Determine job 1.1 Worksite is identified

requirements
1.3 Obstructions are cleared from gangways/flangeways to ensure

safe passage of trains
1.4 Installation, replacement or repair method is selected in

accordance with work requirements, rail industry standards
1.5 Plant, equipment and materials are prepared for work
2 Install guard rail 2.1 Existing rail is removed, as required, to enable fitting of new
rail
2.2 New or replacement guard rail is installed to required

standards using suitable equipment and fastening system to
restore functionality of guard rail
2.3 Final job is checked for compliance to required standards to

enable services to be restored safely


procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2097A Install and maintain guard rails.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2097 Install and maintain guard rails Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2097 Install and maintain

guard rails
include:
 ensuring completed work meets track geometry requirements
identified hazards
 installing and maintaining guard rails on underbridges, level crossings in open track in
environments
rail industry standards, regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
 selecting appropriate material for guard rails
damage to materials or equipment.

Knowledge Evidence
 guard rail installation and maintenance techniques and processes

 hazards that may exist when carrying out the installation and maintenance of guard rails,
and ways of controlling the risks involved
 principles of guard rail function
 problems that may occur when installing and maintaining guard rails, and action that can
be taken to report or resolve these problems
 rail industry standards applicable to guard rails
 relevant rail industry standard
 relevant technical manuals and instructions
 workplace procedures for installing and maintaining guard rails.

assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on electric passenger trains Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on electric

passenger trains
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to identify, diagnose and rectify faults on
electric passenger trains in accordance with safeworking and regulatory requirements, and
It includes identifying maintenance and/or repair requirements, conducting minor
maintenance and routine repairs, and checking and reporting minor repairs and/or
maintenance in accordance with workplace procedures.
Work is generally performed without supervision and within a team environment. It involves
the application of routine fault identification, diagnosis and rectification procedures when
maintaining the safety and operation of equipment on electric passenger trains operating
within Australian rail systems.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Diagnose faults 1.1 Electric passenger train and equipment are monitored for
potential faults
1.3 Faulty or damaged components or equipment are identified and

assessed
1.4 Equipment and/or tools required to rectify faults are identified

and obtained
1.5 Work area and equipment are prepared and made safe to repair
faults or to replace components
2 Carry out fault 2.1 Rectification, repair or component exchange are carried out in
rectification, repair accordance with workplace procedures
or replacement
2.2 Required equipment, tools and materials are operated, applied
and handled to conform to work health and safety
(WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) requirements and
manufacturer specifications to prevent injury and damage
2.3 Activities are carried out in accordance with WHS/OHS and

3 Check and report 3.1 Rectification, repair, or component exchange activities are
rectification, repair checked for compliance with safety requirements and
or replacement workplace procedures

3.3 Rectification, repair, component exchange activities are

reported and accurately documented in appropriate records or
logbooks

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2104A Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on
electric passenger trains.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on electric passenger trains Date this document was
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and

rectify faults on electric passenger trains
include:
 explaining and following procedures for reporting faults and inoperable equipment
identified hazards
 identifying typical faults that may occur on electric passenger trains
environments
procedures
 rectifying a range of faults correctly on an electric passenger train
 reporting and/or rectifying problems, faults or malfunctions promptly, in accordance with
damage to equipment.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2104 Identify, diagnose and rectify faults on electric passenger trains Date this document was
Knowledge Evidence
 relevant sections of applicable state/territory legislated rail safety requirements, codes of
practice and/or guidelines, and safeworking system requirements
 tools and equipment used when identifying, diagnosing and rectifying faults, and the
procedures and precautions for their care, use and storage
 typical repair problems that can occur and related action that should be taken
 workplace procedures and policies for diagnosing and repairing faults.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2111 Assist with testing train braking system on electric passenger train Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2111 Assist with testing train braking system on electric

passenger train
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to assist with testing the train braking
system on electric passenger trains in accordance with workplace procedures and the
requirements of relevant safeworking regulations and codes of practice.
It includes preparing for train brake inspection and testing, inspecting and testing train brake
operation, dealing with identified faults, and reporting and/or recording brake test results in
accordance with workplace requirements.
legislated rail safety and safeworking requirements and to comply with relevant codes of
practice and/or guidelines.
involves the application of operational principles, regulations, safeworking codes, protocols
and procedures when testing a train braking system, as part of workplace activities across a
variety of operational contexts within the Australian rail industry.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Prepare for train 1.1 Work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety
brake inspection and (OHS) legislation, codes of practice, policies and procedures
testing are identified and followed
1.2 Isolation or securing of train is confirmed in accordance with

workplace procedures to make the work area safe for the
inspection and test
1.4 Readiness of brake system for inspection and testing is

confirmed
2 Test train brake 2.1 Brake tests are conducted to ensure compliance with required
operation rail industry standards
2.2 Modified brake tests are conducted in accordance with

workplace procedures to meet required rail industry standards,
as required
2.3 Continuity tests are conducted in accordance with workplace

procedures to ensure train braking system meets functional
specifications
2.4 Corrective action is taken when faults are identified to ensure

operational safety
2.5 Faults or defects found during brake tests are reported and/or
recorded in accordance with workplace procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2111A Assist with testing train braking system on
electric passenger train.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2111 Assist with testing train braking system on electric passenger train Date this document was
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2111 Assist with testing train

braking system on electric passenger train
include:
 applying rail safety practices, rail industry standards, rules, codes of practice and
guidelines
 assessing brake system defects
 identifying correct procedures to be followed in a failed brake test
identified hazards
environments
 operating and adapting to differences in brakes and related equipment in accordance with
 performing all types of applicable brake tests in accordance with workplace procedures

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2111 Assist with testing train braking system on electric passenger train Date this document was
Knowledge Evidence
 brake systems, their components and their operation

 diagnostic techniques for electric passenger train braking systems
 different types of electric passenger train braking systems failures/defects that could occur
 documentation requirements relating to brake testing
 relevant sections of applicable state/territory legislated rail safety requirements, rail
industry standards, codes of practice and/or guidelines
environmental procedures and regulations including codes of practice
 types of brake tests and their purpose.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2119 Carry out maintenance of trailers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2119 Carry out maintenance of trailers
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out basic servicing and
maintenance of a commercial trailer across a variety of operational contexts.
It includes action to implement trailer manufacturer specifications for routine checks and
maintenance, to ensure all specified safety requirements are met, and to ensure trailer is
regulations.
Work is performed with limited or minimum supervision, and with limited accountability and
responsibility for self and others in achieving the prescribed outcomes.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Identify faults and 1.1 Job hazards are identified and required action is taken to
perform routine minimise, control or eliminate identified hazards
maintenance
1.2 Trailer faults are identified and diagnosed in accordance
1.3 Trailer components are lubricated in accordance with

2 Carry out repairs on 2.1 Trailer air/hydraulic brake system is inspected and
trailers adjusted, and required minor maintenance or repairs are
carried out
2.2 Trailer electrical system is checked for correct operation

and required minor maintenance or repairs are carried out
2.3 Trailer suspension and axles are inspected and identified

faults are repaired and/or reported in accordance with
2.4 Trailer wheels and tyres are inspected, removed, repaired

and refitted as required, in accordance with workplace
procedures
2.5 Required documentation is completed in accordance with

2.6 Records of routine maintenance and repairs are kept in


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2119A Carry out maintenance of trailers.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2119 Carry out maintenance of trailers Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2119 Carry out maintenance

of trailers
include:
hazards
 carrying out lubrication processes in the course of work activities
procedures
signs
 servicing trailer and equipment in terms of maintenance schedule and standard operating
procedures
Knowledge Evidence

 basic fault-finding procedures required during routine servicing and maintenance of

trailers
 basic principles of operation of systems on commercial trailers, including electrical
systems, tyres, brakes and coupling systems
 housekeeping standards required for routine servicing and maintenance
 problems that may occur during routine servicing and maintenance of trailers and
appropriate actions and solutions
 procedures for checking, and routine servicing and maintenance of commercial trailers in
accordance with workplace procedures, manufacturer requirements and established safety
rules and regulations
 procedures for using and maintaining materials, tools and parts required for routine
 recognition and diagnosis of faults and trailer irregularities
 relevant duty of care requirements for routine servicing and maintenance of trailers
 relevant national heavy vehicle legislation and regulatory requirements
assessment.
assessment.
industry.

Links
036d851

TLIB2121 Maintain rail joints Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2121 Maintain rail joints
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to maintain rail joints in accordance with
rail industry standards, safeworking and regulatory requirements, and workplace procedures.
It includes identifying and determining parameters or components that require repair, cutting
and boring rail, maintaining rail joints and completing required documentation.
People achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil applicable state/territory legislated
rail safety requirements and to comply with relevant codes of practice and/or guidelines.
Work is performed under minimal supervision, generally in a team environment. It involves
the application of routine operational principles and procedures when maintaining rail joints,
as part of workplace activities across a variety of operational contexts within the Australian
rail system.
Operators of mechanised equipment must have undertaken training and, where appropriate,
hold the relevant licence, permit or certificate and be recognised as competent for the class of
machinery being used.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Determine parameters or 1.1 Rail joint condition, component, fastening and

components that require anchoring defects affecting rail joints are identified in
adjustment accordance with organisational procedures

1.3 Appropriate repair method is selected to ensure rail

joint meets specifications
1.4 Scope of work is determined and resources are

arranged
2 Check and maintain rail 2.1 Surfaces and component parts are checked in
joint accordance with specifications and organisational
procedures
2.2 Rail joint is maintained to specifications in accordance

with organisational procedures
3 Complete documentation 3.1 Required documentation procedures and processes are

confirmed
3.3 Documentation is processed in accordance with


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2121B Maintain rail joints.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2121 Maintain rail joints Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2121 Maintain rail joints
include:
 examining rail joints to determine defects and selecting appropriate repair methods
identified hazards
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information, technical data, rail
industry standards and drawings
 reporting and rectifying identified problems, faults and malfunctions in accordance with
 selecting and using hand tools, power tools and equipment
 using relevant plant and mechanised equipment in accordance with workplace procedures

Knowledge Evidence
 documentation requirements
 fundamentals of track structures relating to rail joints
 hazards that may exist when maintaining rail joints and ways of controlling the risks
involved
 problems that may occur when maintaining rail joints and action that can be taken to
report or resolve these problems
 rail joint components
 rail joint defects
 track and rail industry standards relating to rail joints
 workplace procedures for maintaining rail joints.

assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, rail industry standards,
regulations, codes of practice and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail operations in yards or sidings Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail operations in

yards or sidings
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to apply an awareness of the
fundamentals of rail operations in yards or sidings.
It includes fixed structures, rail vehicles and rolling stock, signals, safety devices, primary
activities and safety systems.
This unit is intended as an introduction to rail yards or sidings for people entering the rail
industry who will be working on or around rail yards or sidings.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


Elements describe the essential Performance criteria describe the performance needed
outcomes. to demonstrate achievement of the element.
1 Identify yard or siding 1.1 Terminology for track, trackside equipment and
structures, layout and fixed structures is identified
terminology
1.2 Features of track, including geography and
geometry are identified
1.3 Infrastructure categories and their purpose are

identified
1.4 Other principal structure types and their purpose

are identified
1.5 Relevant stakeholders for reporting structural

faults or anomalies to, are identified
2 Identify above and below 2.1 Principal overhead and/or electrical components
ground services and their purpose are identified and explained
2.2 Power supply voltages are identified
2.3 Methods of isolation are identified and their

3 Identify rail track vehicles and 3.1 Types of trains and rolling stock are identified
rolling stock
3.2 Types of rail track vehicles are identified
3.3 Relevant stakeholders for reporting rolling stock

faults or anomalies to, are identified
4 Identify signals and safety 4.1 Types, location and purpose of signals are
devices identified
4.2 Types, location and purpose of safety devices are

identified
4.3 Relevant stakeholders for reporting signal or safety

device faults or anomalies to, are identified
5 Identify primary rail activities 5.1 Primary rail activities and other operators are
and safety systems identified as required
5.2 Types and purpose of safety systems are identified

5.3 Relevant stakeholders for reporting safety events

to, are identified
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2122A Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail
operations in yards or sidings.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail operations in yards or sidings Date this document was
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2122 Apply awareness of

fundamentals of rail operations in yards or sidings
include:
 identifying activities carried out in a rail yard or siding
 identifying job hazards and possible safety events and taking required action to minimise,
control or eliminate identified hazards
 identifying layout, main features and equipment in a rail yard or siding
 interpreting and following operational instructions.
Knowledge Evidence
 above and below ground services

 features of track, layout and geometry
 overhead and/or electrical infrastructure
 primary rail activities and safety management systems
 rail, rail track vehicles and rolling stock
 relevant communications systems and procedures
 relevant sections of applicable state/territory legislated rail safety requirements, codes of
practice and/or guidelines
 track components and layout
 track, trackside equipment and yard structure terminology.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2122 Apply awareness of fundamentals of rail operations in yards or sidings Date this document was
assessment.
assessment.
Resources for assessment may include:

Links
036d851

TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram or light rail track fundamentals Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram or light rail track

fundamentals
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to apply an awareness of tram or light
rail fundamentals.
It includes identifying tram or light rail track terminology, track and system components, and
the tools and equipment used on or around tram or light rail track.
guidelines.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Identify tram or light rail track and 1.1 Terminology related to tram or light rail track
structures terminology and and structures infrastructure is identified
components
1.2 Main components of tram or light rail track
and structures are identified
2 Identify tram or light rail track 2.1 Track components and their purpose are
components identified and explained
2.2 Tram crossing types and components are

identified and their purpose is explained
2.3 Manual, electrical and spring-operated points

are identified and their use is explained
3 Identify tram or light rail electrical 3.1 Overhead trolley system components, voltages
system features and exclusion zones are identified and
explained
3.2 Below ground electrical system is identified

and explained
3.3 Reporting procedures and protocols for

identified electrical system faults and defects
are explained
4 Identify tram or light rail tools and 4.1 Tools and equipment for tram or light rail track
equipment installation and maintenance are identified
4.2 Track machines for tram or light rail track

installation and maintenance are identified
5 Identify tram or light rail track and 5.1 Possible faults for tram or light rail track and
system faults or problems system are identified
5.2 Reporting procedures and protocols for

identified track and system faults are explained

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2125A Apply awareness of tram or light rail track
fundamentals.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram or light rail track fundamentals Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram

or light rail track fundamentals
include:
hazards
 identifying tools and equipment required for a range of tram or light rail track
maintenance tasks
 identifying track machines required for a range of tram or light rail track installation and
maintenance tasks
environments.
Knowledge Evidence
 applicable safety, work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS)
and environmental procedures and regulations related to tram or light rail
 fundamentals of tram or light rail track and structures
 fundamentals of tram or light rail track layout and geometry
 rail electrical system related to tram or light rail infrastructure
 relevant safeworking system and workplace procedures
 tools and equipment used in tram or light rail track construction and repair
 tram or light rail track and overhead trolley components
 tram or light rail track terminology.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2125 Apply awareness of tram or light rail track fundamentals Date this document was generated: 18
May 2017
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on on-track vehicles Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on on-track vehicles
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to diagnose and rectify minor faults on
on-track vehicles, in accordance with organisational requirements.
It includes identifying repair and maintenance requirements, and conducting repairs and
minor maintenance.
It involves the application of routine minor fault diagnosis and rectification procedures to
maintain the safety and operation of on-track vehicles. This unit only covers minor repairs as
defined by organisational policies.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Identify repair and 1.1 Faulty or damaged components or equipment are identified and
maintenance assessed for component exchange or minor repair
requirements
are implemented
1.3 Identified faulty or damaged components outside own scope, as

determined by organisational policies, are reported in accordance
with organisational procedures
1.4 Where repair/maintenance/component exchange is appropriate,

equipment and tools required are identified and obtained
1.5 Work areas and equipment are prepared and made safe for
repair/maintenance/component exchange activities
2 Conduct minor 2.1 Routine repair/maintenance/component exchange is carried out

repairs and in accordance with manufacturer specifications and
maintenance organisational procedures
2.2 Equipment, tools and materials are operated, applied and

handled in accordance with work health and safety
(WHS)/occupational health and safety (OHS) requirements and
manufacturer specifications to prevent injury and damage
3 Check and report 3.1 Minor repair/maintenance/component exchange activities are

minor repairs and checked for compliance with manufacturer specifications and
maintenance workplace procedures

3.3 Worksite is checked for cleanliness and operational safety, and

appropriate action is taken to restore site and equipment
3.4 Repair/maintenance/component exchange activities are

documented and processed in accordance with organisational
requirements

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2130A Diagnose and rectify minor faults on
on-track vehicles.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on on-track vehiclesDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify

minor faults on on-track vehicles
include:
 adapting to differences in on-track vehicles and associated equipment and procedures
 carrying out minor repairs, maintenance and component exchange on different on-track
vehicles
 changing out faulty components in accordance with organisational procedures and
 following correct procedure for identifying minor faults
 following correct workplace requirements for reporting identified defects
 identifying equipment checks required for a range of on-track vehicles in the workplace
identified hazards
 identifying typical faults or defects that may occur on on-track vehicles
environments
 reporting minor faults and completing organisational documentation.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2130 Diagnose and rectify minor faults on on-track vehiclesDate this document was generated: 18 May
2017
Knowledge Evidence
 hazards that may exist when diagnosing and rectifying minor faults with on-track
vehicle/s and ways of controlling the risks involved
 organisational procedures for diagnosing and rectifying minor faults with on-track
vehicle/s
 problems that may occur when diagnosing and rectifying minor faults with on-track
vehicle/s and action that can be taken to report or resolve these problems
 tools and equipment used when diagnosing and rectifying minor faults and the procedures
and precautions for their care, use and storage
 workplace documentation and records requirements.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB2131 Prepare train Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to prepare a train for operation in
accordance with organisational policies and procedures.
It includes conducting pre-departure checks and confirming the required train documentation.
guidelines.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Identify 1.1 Required checks, and relevant procedures and standards are
pre-departure checks identified in accordance with organisational policies and
procedures
1.2 Constraints and special instructions that may apply for the
journey are obtained
1.3 Compliance with the Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG)

Code and relevant regulatory requirements are identified, as
required
2 Implement 2.1 Motive power unit control systems are set up and checked in
pre-departure checks accordance with organisational policies and procedures

2.3 Train is checked to ensure rolling stock is coupled and

sequenced correctly
2.4 Train braking systems are tested to ensure they are operating
effectively, in accordance with organisational policies and
procedures
2.5 Action is taken to rectify identified faults to ensure minimum

delay to planned running schedule
3 Confirm train can 3.1 Relevant personnel are advised of the result of completed
proceed checks
3.2 Authority to proceed relevant to the operational situation is

obtained and followed in accordance with organisational

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2131A Prepare train.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2131 Prepare train Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2131 Prepare train
include:
 conducting pre-departure checks and confirming the required train documentation
identified hazards
environments
procedures

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2131 Prepare train Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 communications procedures and protocols

 maintenance and servicing procedures
 relevant sections of the Australian Dangerous Goods (ADG) Code and any other
dangerous goods regulations
 relevant state/territory legislated rail safety requirements, codes of practice and/or
guidelines
 train preparation documentation procedures.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, rules, regulations, codes of

Links
036d851

TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking system Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking system
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to test the braking system on
medium/heavy track vehicle/s in accordance with manufacturer specifications and/or
It includes planning and preparing for track vehicle brake inspecting and testing, inspecting
and testing track vehicle brake operations, and completing documentation.
This unit applies to people involved in testing a track vehicle braking system as part of
workplace activities within the rail industry.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Plan and prepare for track 1.1 Logbooks and other relevant documentation are
vehicle brake inspection and checked to establish existing identified defects
testing
1.3 Track vehicle is isolated or secured, in accordance

with workplace procedures, to make the work area
safe prior to inspection
2 Inspect and test track vehicle 2.1 Tools and equipment required to inspect and test
brake operation brake equipment are identified and obtained
2.2 Visual and acoustic inspections are conducted to

identify faults or defects
2.3 Brakes are applied and released to ensure track

vehicle braking system meets functional
specifications
2.4 Identified defects and faults are rectified and/or

reported in accordance with manufacturer
specifications and/or organisational procedures
3 Complete documentation 3.1 Required documentation procedures and processes

are confirmed
3.2 Logbook and other service records on the track

vehicle are completed in accordance with
3.3 Documentation and records are proofread and

processed in accordance with workplace procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB2133A Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking
system.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking systemDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy

track vehicle braking system
include:
 adapting to differences in track vehicles and associated equipment and procedures
 completing test result records in accordance with workplace procedures
 conducting inspections and testing of different types of brakes on medium/heavy track
vehicle/s
 conducting brake system test on medium/heavy track vehicles in accordance with
operational procedures and manufactures specification
identified hazards
 implementing correct procedure for testing braking system
 implementing workplace procedures to deal with identified defects and faults
environments
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information and signs.

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2133 Test medium/heavy track vehicle braking systemDate this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Knowledge Evidence
 hazards that may exist when starting up and shutting down medium/heavy track vehicles
and ways of controlling the risks involved
 organisational procedures for conducting brake tests on medium/heavy track vehicles
 problems that may occur when testing brakes on medium/heavy track vehicles and action
 types of brake system tests and their purpose.
assessment.
assessment.

Links
036d851

TLIB3002 Test equipment and isolate faults Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to test equipment and to isolate faults in
accordance with relevant codes of practice, regulations and workplace requirements within
the transport and logistics industry.
It includes scoping and planning operational checks, checking equipment through its full
operating range, and isolating faults and/or formulating recommendations for adjustment,
repair or replacement.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Scope operational checks 1.1 Physical condition of equipment is observed

1.2 Test procedures and parameters are identified in

1.3 Preliminary observations are recorded
1.4 Test procedures are confirmed with appropriate staff

as required and necessary permission is obtained
2 Plan operational checks 2.1 Specifications and notes from preliminary

observations are checked and clarified as required
2.2 Sequence of tests are planned noting where results and

observations should be recorded

2.4 Safe area for testing is identified
2.5 Arrangements are made to obtain additional resources

and staff, as required
3 Check equipment through 3.1 Tests are undertaken in accordance with relevant
its full operating range safety and operational requirements
3.2 Results are recorded and findings are confirmed
4 Isolate fault and/or 4.1 Proposals for equipment repair are recorded based on
formulate recommendations faults found, cost/time implications and workplace
approval systems
4.2 Report is explained to relevant workplace personnel

including options and recommendations
4.3 Parts are procured and/or repairs are undertaken in

accordance with enterprise procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB3002A Test equipment and isolate faults.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3002 Test equipment and isolate faults Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3002 Test equipment and

isolate faults
include:
 adapting to differences in equipment in accordance with standard operating procedures
hazards
environments
signs
 selecting and using relevant meters, gauges, equipment and tools when testing equipment
and isolating faults
Knowledge Evidence

 characteristics, capabilities and limitations of equipment concerned

 fault-finding techniques including identification of cost/time effective rectification
procedures
 faults that may occur with equipment, and appropriate action that can be taken to report
and/or rectify identified equipment or component faults
 guidelines relating to the safe use of machinery and equipment including tagging
unserviceable or damaged items
 operational safety requirements for equipment concerned
 operational work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for testing
equipment and isolating faults
 relevant sections of regulatory requirements applicable to testing equipment and isolating
faults
 tools, meters, gauges and equipment used when testing equipment and isolating faults and
the precautions and procedures that should be followed in their use
 workplace procedures and policies for testing equipment and isolating faults, including
tagging and reporting faulty equipment and components.
assessment.
assessment.
 applicable documentation including manufacturers specifications, workplace procedures,
regulations, codes of practice and operation manuals.

Links
036d851

TLIB3005 Carry out maintenance of vehicles designed to carry special loads Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB3005 Carry out maintenance of vehicles designed to carry

special loads
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out basic servicing and routine
maintenance of a commercial vehicle designed to carry a special load, across a variety of
operational contexts.
It includes action to implement manufacturer specifications for routine checks and
maintenance of vehicle and its associated ancillary equipment, to ensure all specified safety
requirements are met, and to ensure vehicle and its ancillary equipment are operational to
workplace requirements and relevant state/territory roads and traffic authority regulations.
Work must be carried out in accordance with relevant roads and traffic authority regulations,
and workplace procedures and policy for vehicle maintenance.
Work is performed with limited supervision and with duty of care responsibility for self and
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Diagnose vehicle 1.1 Job hazards are identified and required action is taken to
faults and undertake minimise, control or eliminate identified hazards
repairs for safe
vehicle operation 1.2 Faults in vehicle and/or ancillary equipment electrical system
are identified, diagnosed and repaired, in accordance with
1.3 Faults in fuel system are identified, diagnosed and repaired in

accordance with manufacturer specifications and workplace
procedures
2 Maintain the vehicle 2.1 Fluid levels in vehicle and/or ancillary equipment are
systems checked and adjusted in accordance with manufacturer
specifications and workplace procedures
2.2 Air/hydraulic fluid levels in vehicle and/or ancillary

equipment are checked and adjusted in accordance with
2.3 Safety equipment is inspected in accordance with regulatory

3 Carry out minor 3.1 Vehicle components are removed, repaired or replaced and
repairs to a vehicle refitted to vehicle using correct tools in accordance with
3.2 Tyres are repaired or replaced on vehicle in accordance with

workplace procedures and manufacturer instructions
3.3 Need for more complex maintenance procedures is identified

and problem is correctly referred in accordance with
3.4 Work health and safety (WHS)/occupational health and

safety (OHS) procedures are followed throughout
maintenance activities
3.5 Required documentation is completed in accordance with

3.6 Records of routine maintenance and repairs are kept in


Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB3005A Carry out maintenance of vehicles
designed to carry special loads.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3005 Carry out maintenance of vehicles designed to carry special loads Date this document was
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3005 Carry out maintenance

of vehicles designed to carry special loads
include:
hazards
environments
procedures
Knowledge Evidence

 basic fault finding procedures required for routine servicing and maintenance of vehicles
designed to carry special loads
 basic principles of operation of systems on commercial vehicles, including electrical
systems, fuel systems, cooling systems, steering systems, exhaust system, tyres, brakes,
and relevant ancillary systems
 housekeeping standards
 problems that may occur during routine servicing and maintenance of a vehicle and its
associated ancillary equipment, and appropriate action and solutions
 procedures for checking, and routine servicing and maintenance of a commercial vehicle
designed to carry special loads in accordance with workplace procedures and
manufacturer requirements, and established safety rules and regulations
 procedures for using and maintaining materials, tools and parts required for routine
 procedures required to minimise waste during routine servicing and maintenance
 recognition and diagnosis of faults and vehicle/ancillary system irregularities
 relevant duty of care requirements for routine servicing and maintenance of vehicles
designed to carry special loads
 relevant national heavy vehicle legislation and regulatory requirements
 relevant WHS/OHS and pollution control procedures
assessment.
assessment.


industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB3006 Carry out inspection of vehicles designed to carry special loads Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB3006 Carry out inspection of vehicles designed to carry

special loads
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out an inspection of a commercial
vehicle designed to carry a special load, in accordance with relevant roads and traffic authority
regulations, and workplace policy and procedures concerning vehicle inspection.
It includes action to implement manufacturer specifications for routine checks of vehicle and its
associated equipment, to clean the vehicle and its associated equipment, to ensure all specified
safety requirements are met, and to ensure vehicle and equipment are operational to workplace
requirements and relevant state/territory roads and traffic authority regulations.
Work is performed with limited supervision, with duty of care responsibility for self and others
in achieving the prescribed outcomes. It involves the application of routine vehicle checking and
maintenance principles and procedures to inspect a commercial vehicle designed to carry special
loads, across a variety of operational contexts.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Check vehicle 1.1 Job hazards are identified and required action is taken to
1.2 Visual check of internal and external condition of vehicle is

1.3 Pre-operational inspections and checks of vehicle tyres,

suspension, fluid levels and other critical features are carried
out to ensure conformance with road safety standards
1.4 Associated equipment is tested to ensure it functions

correctly to manufacturer specifications
1.5 Post start-up and shut-down checks are carried out after
engine is started to identify possible engine or electrical
problems
1.6 Warning systems (instruments and gauges) are checked to

ensure they are operational
1.7 Vehicle-monitoring device is logged on/off in accordance

with manufacturer instructions and workplace procedures, as
required
2 Clean vehicle and 2.1 Vehicle and associated equipment is cleaned in accordance
ancillary equipment with workplace procedures
2.2 Special purpose ancillary equipment is cleaned in accordance

with relevant government regulations and workplace
procedures
3 Complete 3.1 Basic faults are identified and/or diagnosed and appropriate
documentation action is taken to report or remedy them as required by
workplace procedures and legislation
3.2 Records of inspection are updated and recommended repairs

are documented in accordance with workplace procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB3006A Carry out inspection of vehicles designed
to carry special loads.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3006 Carry out inspection of vehicles designed to carry special loadsDate this document was generated:
18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3006 Carry out inspection of

vehicles designed to carry special loads
include:
hazards
 interpreting and following operational instructions and prioritise work
procedures
 reading and interpreting relevant instructions, procedures, information, technical data and
drawings
Knowledge Evidence
 principles of operation of systems on commercial vehicles including:

 electrical systems
 fuel systems
 cooling systems
 steering systems
 exhaust systems
 tyres, brakes

18 May 2017
 relevant ancillary systems

 problems that may occur during routine inspection of a vehicle and its associated ancillary
equipment, and appropriate actions and solutions
 procedures for checking and routine inspection of a commercial vehicle designed to carry
special loads, in accordance with workplace and manufacturer requirements and
established safety rules and regulations including:
 visual inspection
 pre-operational checking
 warning systems checking
 relevant duty of care requirements for routine inspection of vehicles designed to carry
special loads
 techniques for recognising faults and vehicle/ancillary system irregularities.
assessment.
assessment.
industry.
Links

18 May 2017

036d851

TLIB3011 Set up and rig crane for lift Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to set up and rig a mobile crane for a lift.
It includes the systematic positioning and stabilisation of the crane and its assembly prior to
lift in a variety of operational contexts.
Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant state/territory authority mobile
crane operations licence/permit requirements and regulations.
Work is performed with limited or minimum supervision, with limited accountability and
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.

Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.

1 Position and 1.1 Crane is directed to position in accordance with job plan,
stabilise crane applicable Australian Standards, codes of practice and
manufacturer specifications to ensure safe operation
1.2 Ground is checked to ensure it is firm enough to bear the load
1.3 Appropriate plates or packing are correctly used to adequately

distribute load
1.4 Outriggers and stabilisers are correctly deployed and positioned in

accordance with manufacturer instructions, appropriate Australian
Standard and other relevant statutory regulations
1.5 Outrigger packing is checked for adequacy prior to and after lift is
taken
2 Assemble crane 2.1 Block is reeved in accordance with manufacturer instructions
2.2 Counterweights are installed in accordance with manufacturer

specifications
2.3 Attachments are set up in accordance with manufacturer

instructions
2.4 Qualified rigger is consulted and other personnel are assisted as

necessary to ensure efficient and safe assembly and set-up of
crane
2.5 Straight fly jibs and luffing fly jibs are assembled and fitted in
accordance with manufacturer instructions

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB3011A Set up and rig crane for lift.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3011 Set up and rig crane for lift Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3011 Set up and rig crane for

lift

hazards
 applying procedures for fitting attachments and fly jibs
 fitting fly jibs and attachments
 monitoring work activities in terms of planned schedule and modifying activities
depending on operational contingencies, risk situations and environments
 monitoring condition of equipment
procedures
signs
 selecting and using appropriate personal protective equipment conforming to industry and

Knowledge Evidence
 company work procedures for setting up and rigging a mobile crane at a worksite
 hazard management strategies consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control (with
elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before
safe working practices and personal protective equipment)
 mobile crane applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control
mechanisms
 operational procedures for crane crews
 operational work systems and equipment
 procedures for fitting attachments and fly jibs
 procedures for identifying and correctly using equipment, processes and procedures
 relevant agreements, codes of practice or other legislative requirements
 relevant road rules, regulations, permit and licence requirements for mobile crane
operations and rigging mobile cranes.

assessment.
assessment.
Assessment of setting up and rigging a mobile crane for a lift must occur in workplace
operational situations where it is appropriate to do so. Where this is not appropriate,
assessment must occur in simulated workplace operational situations that replicate workplace
conditions and involve the movement of equipment, goods, materials and vehicular traffic.
and operation manuals, including relevant:
 state/territory regulations and licence/permit requirements pertaining to mobile cranes
 state/territory road rules
 state/territory WHS/OHS legislation
 state/territory environmental protection legislation
 relevant materials, tools and equipment
 gloves
 sunscreen, sunglasses and safety glasses
 two-way radios
 high visibility clothing.
Links
036d851

TLIB3012 Plan job and set up work areas Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan a lifting job and to set up work
areas prior to positioning and setting up a mobile crane in compliance with the licence/permit
requirements and regulations in a variety of operational contexts.
It includes obtaining and confirming job instructions and work specifications; coordinating
the loading of gear and equipment; assessing job requirements of work areas; designing job
plans and setting up work area.
Work is performed with limited or minimum supervision, with limited accountability and
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Obtain and confirm job 1.1 Job instructions are obtained and checked to ensure
instructions/work specifications include all necessary information

specifications 1.2 Lift plan and other work specifications are interpreted and
clarification is sought as required
2 Coordinate loading of 2.1 Specific gear necessary for job is identified and obtained
gear and equipment
2.2 Equipment is properly packed and secured in accordance
with company procedures to ensure injury and damage are
avoided during transportation
3 Assess job requirements 3.1 Adequate site access and egress is identified
and work area
3.2 Potential hazards are identified and appropriate
elimination or control measures selected
3.3 Weight and dimensions of load are estimated or

confirmed in consultation with customer and relevant
personnel to ensure job is within limits of crane capacity
3.4 Site information is interpreted and requirements are

confirmed with site supervisor
3.5 Area is assessed to ensure there is sufficient space to

establish crane and conduct lift
3.6 Need to move mobile crane is assessed and route to be

travelled is planned as required, to ensure crane traverses
firm surfaces and slopes are avoided where possible
3.7 Lift safety or feasibility concerns are discussed with

customer and if not resolved, reported to supervisor
3.8 Payment arrangements are confirmed with customer as

required
3.9 Customer requirements are anticipated and suggestions

are made to maximise safety and efficiency, and to
minimise inconvenience
4 Design job plan 4.1 Job plan is developed to include hazard prevention/control
measures and safety procedures in accordance with
applicable Australian Standards, codes of practice and
equipment manufacturer specifications
4.2 Cranes load chart is consulted and information on

permissible loads, radii, weights, boom and jib
configurations is taken into account in job plan
4.3 Job requirements, customer priorities, and workplace

rules and procedures are taken into account in job plan

4.4 Job plan is discussed and confirmed with relevant

personnel
4.5 Job plan details are documented as required
5 Set up work area 5.1 Site personnel and public are advised of potential danger
and site/work area is isolated as required in accordance
with legislative, regulatory and customer requirements
5.2 Site safety procedures are followed
5.3 Required protective equipment is identified and fitted in

accordance with manufacturer guidelines and customer
requirements
5.4 Ancillary equipment is assembled and erected as required
5.5 Load destination and as required, travel route, are

prepared to accept load
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB3012A Plan job and set up work areas.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3012 Plan job and set up work areas Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3012 Plan job and set up work

areas

hazards
environments
 monitoring condition of equipment during setting up processes and taking appropriate
action
procedures
 producing a comprehensive work plan
signs
 working collaboratively with others working systematically with required attention to
detail without injury to self or others, or damage to goods or equipment.

Knowledge Evidence
 application of relevant agreements, codes of practice or other legislative requirements

 company work procedures for planning mobile crane jobs and setting up work areas
 guidelines for the safe use of machinery and equipment
 hazard management strategies consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control (with
safe working practices and personal protective equipment)
 identification and correct use of equipment, processes and procedures
mechanisms
 operational procedures for crane crews
 operational work systems and equipment
 prioritising and multi-tasking work
 relevant road rules, regulations, permit and licence requirements
 relevant WHS/OHS and environmental procedures and regulations.

assessment.
assessment.
situations that replicate workplace conditions and involve the movement of equipment, goods,
materials and vehicular traffic.
and operation manuals, including relevant:
 state/territory regulations and licence/permit requirements for mobile cranes
 state/territory road rules
 state/territory environmental protection legislation
industry.
Links
036d851

TLIB3013 Maintain mobile cranes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to carry out routine maintenance on a
mobile crane, in compliance with licence/permit requirements, regulations and work
requirements in a variety of operational contexts.
It includes obtaining and confirming job instructions and work specifications, coordinating
loading of gear and equipment, assessing job requirements and work areas, designing job plan
and setting up work area.
self and others in achieving the prescribed outcomes.
This unit applies to maintenance activity on equipment used by the operator and is limited to
lubrication, fluid, filter and accessory changing and checks for cracks, surface or structural
faults or other damage.
publication.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.



1 Plan maintenance 1.1 Tags, service records, logbooks and crane manufacturer
operations information are read prior to commencing maintenance,
and previously identified and manufacturer
recommendations are noted
1.2 Maintenance schedules are read and maintenance tasks are

confirmed to match schedule
1.3 Step by step procedure is worked out to minimise time

delays and to sequence maintenance processes consistent
with manufacturer recommendations
2 Complete 2.1 Appropriate safe work area is selected for maintenance

pre-maintenance checks tasks
2.2 Required tools, consumables and equipment are identified

and assembled
2.3 Equipment is inspected for visible faults and loose or

damaged components
3 Identify and assess faults 3.1 Conditions found are compared with manufacturer
found information and intended use of crane
3.2 Conditions noticed that may cause future difficulties are

identified and potential effect on the safe and efficient
operation of mobile crane is documented
3.3 Potential fault conditions are reported to appropriate

personnel
4 Conduct maintenance 4.1 Fluid replacements and lubrication operations are

operations and safety completed
checks
4.2 Fluid levels are checked and adjusted
4.3 Mechanical components are checked to ensure attachments

and tensions are secure
4.4 Mechanical adjustments are made
4.5 Maintenance plan is followed and appropriate adjustments

are made to maintenance plan to deal with unexpected
events
4.6 Own work and crane system operations are checked to

ensure crane’s operational condition is in accordance with
required specifications

4.7 Tools, equipment and unused consumables are returned to

appropriate locations and waste is disposed of in
accordance with workplace policy and procedures
5 Complete maintenance 5.1 Accurate reporting of safety check results and

records maintenance conducted, is completed and filed in
accordance with procedures, industry guidelines and
statutory requirements
5.2 Clear reference in reports is made to any items that may

not yet require maintenance but may affect the future
working condition or safety of the mobile crane
Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB3013A Maintain mobile cranes.
Links
036d851

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3013 Maintain mobile cranes Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
Assessment Requirements for TLIB3013 Maintain mobile cranes

hazards
 identifying non-conformities that may compromise operational capability
environments
 monitoring work activities in terms of planned maintenance schedule
procedures
 planning and prioritising own work, multi-tasking, predicting consequences and
identifying improvements
 producing a comprehensive maintenance plan
 working systematically with required attention to detail without injury to self, others, or

Knowledge Evidence
 application of relevant agreements, codes of practice or other legislative requirements

 guidelines for the safe use of machinery and equipment
 hazard management strategies consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with
safe working practices and personal protective equipment
mechanisms
 operational crane systems and equipment
 operational safety and maintenance procedures for crane crews
 relevant regulations, permit and licence requirements for mobile crane operational safety
and maintenance
 use, characteristics, capabilities and limitations of lubrication and adjustment tools and
equipment
 workplace procedures for planning mobile crane jobs and setting up work areas.

assessment.
assessment.
situations that replicate workplace conditions and involve the movement of equipment, goods,
materials and vehicular traffic.
 applicable documentation including workplace procedures, regulations, codes of practice and
operation manuals, including relevant:
 state/territory regulations pertaining to the maintenance and safety of mobile cranes
 gloves
 sunscreen, sunglasses and safety glasses
 two-way radios
 relevant materials, tools and equipment currently used in industry
 state/territory environmental protection legislation.
Links
036d851

TLIB3014 Load and unload wheeled or tracked crane Date this document was generated: 18 May 2017
TLIB3014 Load and unload wheeled or tracked crane
Application
This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to unload and load a wheeled or tracked
mobile crane from and onto a float, in accordance with licence/permit requirements and
regulations.
It includes inspecting the worksite, unloading and loading crane from and onto float, and
securing crane prior to travel.
Work is performed under general supervision, with duty of care responsibility for self and others
in achieving the prescribed outcomes.
Pre-requisite Unit
Not applicable.
Competency Field
Unit Sector
Not applicable.


1 Inspect site 1.1 Site access and exit routes are identified

1.2 Site hazards are identified and required action is taken to

1.3 Loading and unloading area is selected based on assessment

of worksite requirements, physical conditions, proximity to
job and safety of operations
2 Unload/load crane 2.1 Vehicle is inspected and checked prior to unloading

from/onto float
2.2 Pre-operational checks are conducted in accordance with
2.3 Float is positioned on site in designated loading/unloading

area noting ground conditions, and potential and identified
site hazards
2.4 Lashings, chains, stabilisers and chocks are safely removed,

and correctly stowed and secured in designated areas
2.5 Loading ramps are secured
2.6 Crane is driven on/off float ensuring no injury to personnel

or damage to equipment and site
2.7 Crane is stabilised, shut down and secured
3 Secure crane for 3.1 Weight and dimensions of crane are established and
travel compared to carrying capacity of vehicle
3.2 Crane is correctly positioned on float
3.3 Crane is secured using appropriate securing equipment and is

shackled to anchorage points in accordance with
workplace/float securing system and manufacturer
specifications
3.4 Securing equipment is tightened to ensure security during

travel
3.5 Ramps are loaded and secured

procedures

Foundation Skills
of competency.
Range of Conditions
work environment.

This unit replaces and is equivalent to TLIB3014A Load and unload wheeled or tracked
crane.
Links
htt

Tli R3.0 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Tli R3.0 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TLI Transport and Logistics Training

Approved Page 2 of 6465

TLI42016 Certificate IV in Logistics ......................................................................................210

Approved Page 3 of 6465

Assessment Requirements for BSBINM401 Implement workplace information system ..401

Approved Page 4 of 6465

BSBPMG606 Direct human resources management of a project program ........................554

Approved Page 5 of 6465

CPCCCM2010B Work safely at heights ................................................................................702

Approved Page 6 of 6465

PSPGOV506A Support workplace coaching and mentoring .............................................1074

Approved Page 7 of 6465

RIIBEF402D Supervise on-site operations ..........................................................................1566

Approved Page 8 of 6465

SITXFIN402 Manage finances within a budget ..................................................................1768

Approved Page 9 of 6465

Assessment Requirements for TLIA3002 Maintain container/cargo records ..................1969

Approved Page 10 of 6465

Approved Page 11 of 6465

Approved Page 12 of 6465

Assessment Requirements for TLIB2131 Prepare train ....................................................2371

Approved Page 13 of 6465

Assessment Requirements for TLIB3058 Maintain aerial signal/telecommunications lines

Approved Page 14 of 6465

Approved Page 15 of 6465

TLIC2025 Operate four wheel drive vehicle .......................................................................2778

Approved Page 16 of 6465

TLIC3028 Operate and monitor a heritage motive power unit .........................................2908

Approved Page 17 of 6465

TLIC3073 Fire a steam locomotive ......................................................................................3061

Approved Page 18 of 6465

TLID2004 Load and unload goods/cargo ............................................................................3212

Approved Page 19 of 6465

TLID3044 Shift loads using cranes.......................................................................................3370

Approved Page 20 of 6465

TLIE3010 Estimate furniture removal jobs ........................................................................3522

Approved Page 21 of 6465

TLIF0004 Work effectively in a train-driving environment ..............................................3637

Approved Page 22 of 6465

Approved Page 23 of 6465

TLIF3096 Carry out emergency response to a dangerous goods incident ........................3882

Approved Page 24 of 6465

TLIF4107 Respond to notifiable rail safety occurrences ....................................................4005

Approved Page 25 of 6465

TLII2015 Operate the on-train buffet car ...........................................................................4139

Approved Page 26 of 6465

TLIK2003 Apply keyboard skills .........................................................................................4267

Approved Page 27 of 6465

Assessment Requirements for TLIL4009 Manage personal work priorities and

Approved Page 28 of 6465

Assessment Requirements for TLIL4082 Coordinate rail interface agreements .............4541

Approved Page 29 of 6465

Approved Page 30 of 6465

Assessment Requirements for TLIM0003 Conduct learner rider training ......................4889

Approved Page 31 of 6465

TLIP2017 Maintain control of records ................................................................................5018

Approved Page 32 of 6465

TLIP4005 Manage workplace information .........................................................................5152

Approved Page 33 of 6465

TLIR4003 Negotiate a contract.............................................................................................5294

Approved Page 34 of 6465

Approved Page 35 of 6465

TLIU4011 Apply environmental procedures to rail operations ........................................5564